Mastering Orthopedic Techniques: Intra-articular Fractures Rajesh Malhotra
INDEX
×
Chapter Notes

Save Clear


Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd
Headquarter
Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd
4838/24, Ansari Road, Daryaganj
New Delhi 110 002, India
Phone: +91-11-43574357
Fax: +91-11-43574314
Overseas Offices
J.P. Medical Ltd
83 Victoria Street, London
SW1H 0HW (UK)
Phone: +44-2031708910
Fax: +02-03-0086180
Jaypee-Highlights Medical Publishers Inc
City of Knowledge, Bld. 237, Clayton
Panama City, Panama
Phone: + 507-301-0496
Fax: + 507-301-0499
Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd
17/1-B Babar Road, Block-B, Shaymali
Mohammadpur, Dhaka-1207
Bangladesh
Mobile: +08801912003485
Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd
Shorakhute, Kathmandu
Nepal
Phone: +00977-9841528578
Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers Ltd
The Bourse
111 South Independence Mall East
Suite 835, Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA
Phone: + 267-519-9789
© 2013, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior permission of the publisher.
Inquiries for bulk sales may be solicited at: jaypee@jaypeebrothers.com
This book has been published in good faith that the contents provided by the author contained herein are original, and is intended for educational purposes only. While every effort is made to ensure accuracy of information, the publisher and the author specifically disclaim any damage, liability, or loss incurred, directly or indirectly, from the use or application of any of the contents of this work. If not specifically stated, all figures and tables are courtesy of the author. Where appropriate, the readers should consult with a specialist or contact the manufacturer of the drug or device.
Obstetric Vasculopathies
First Edition: 2013
9788184488951
Printed at

Intra-articular Fractures: What Have We Learnt?1

Bhavuk Garg, Rajesh Malhotra
 
Introduction
Life is movement, Movement is life. This sentence has always been cited as the steering principle of fracture care.1 This principle is more than vital in the management of intra-articular fractures: fractures that extend or involve the articular cartilage. It is an irony that junior most orthopedic surgeons operate most of the intra-articular fractures like patellar fractures, malleolar fractures, neck femur fractures, olecranon fractures, etc. (Fig. 1.1).
Intra-articular fractures, if not properly treated, inevitably lead to stiffness, pain or osteoarthritis (post-traumatic). In his famous book on conservative management of fractures entitled, “The Closed Treatment of Common Fractures”, Sir John Charnley advocated nonoperative management of intra-articular fractures.2
Figure 1.1: Common intra-articular fractures, which are usually managed by junior most orthopedic surgeons
2Several other authors including Neer et al3 and Stewart et al4 also advocated the same. The main reason for this favor for conservative management was unavailability of proper internal fixation devices as well as lack of proper understanding of orthopedic surgical principles.
After foundation of AO group in 1958 at Biel, Switzerland, a lot of improvements in orthopedic internal fixation devices as well as an improved understanding of orthopedic surgical principles prevailed. AO/ASIF group reported better outcome of intra-articular fractures with open reduction and internal fixation.5 Several other authors echoed similar results.6,7 It was also observed that intra-articular fractures that underwent ORIF as well as immobilization had much more stiffness and worse outcome than fractures, which were either, treated with ORIF and early motion, or, immobilization alone.8 AO group also advocated that intra-articular fractures behave in a different biological and functional manner as compared to diaphyseal fractures.
 
Principles of Intra-articular Fracture Management
Müeller et al1 enunciated the AO principles of intra-articular fracture care that anatomical reduction as well as absolute stability is vital to the optimum healing of articular fractures. These factors also enable the patient for early motion, leading to best outcome for intra-articular fractures. Mitchell and Shepard9 reported that articular cartilage regenerate after intraarticular fractures provided anatomical reduction and absolute stability. Salter et al10 showed that continuous passive motion stimulates articular cartilage healing as well as regeneration. Schatzker et al11 pointed out following principles of intra-articular fracture treatment:
  1. Immobilization of intra-articular fractures leads to stiffness of joint.
  2. Immobilization combined with ORIF of intra-articular fractures causes much more stiffness.
  3. Depressed and impacted articular fragments will not reduce by closed manipulation or ligamentotaxis.
  4. Big articular defects do not fill by fibrocartilage, resulting in instability due to their displacement.
  5. Anatomical reduction and as well as absolute stability is vital to the optimum healing of articular fractures (Fig. 1.2).
  6. Metaphyseal voids should be bone grafted (Fig. 1.3) (however, with use of current locking plates, this has become controversial).
  7. Any metaphyseal and diaphyseal displacements should be reduced to prevent extra load on the joint (This reduction need not to be anatomical).
  8. It is extremely important to restore the joint congruity as well as axial alignment.
  9. Early motion is essential for optimal healing of articular cartilage and best outcome. Stable internal fixation is a must for this.
 
Basic Sciences Facts about Intra-articular Fractures
Articular cartilage is an aneural structure with no blood or lymphatic supply and is dependent upon diffusion from surrounding tissues for nutrition. The cartilage matrix has got hypoxic environment and depends on anaerobic glycolysis and mainly consists of type-2 collagen and proteoglycans important for the joint. This structure makes articular cartilage very sensitive to injury and confers to it poor reparative potential.
Relationship between articular cartilage injury and subsequent development of osteoarthritis is a complex phenomenon. Articular cartilage healing leads to formation of fibrocartilage, however it does not restore the structural and mechanical properties of a normal articular cartilage.12 Larger the defect, larger is the alteration of mechanical properties; larger is the risk of progression to osteoarthritis.123
Figure 1.2: A depressed intra-articular fracture of proximal tibia managed by anatomical reduction, stable fixation and early motion. Patient had excellent functional result
Figure 1.3: Bone grafting should be done in cases of metaphyseal voids, particularly in osteoporotic bones
4Severity of articular cartilage injury has also been linked to the outcome of intra-articular fractures. Marsh et al13 reported that development of post-traumatic osteoarthritis correlate with the severity of articular damage. Several other authors have also reported the same findings.14,15
Effect of step-off defects and development of post-traumatic osteoarthritis has also been studied in detail. The thickness of articular cartilage varies from joint to joint and is also variable at different sites in a single joint16 (Ankle 1.0–1.62 mm, Knee 1.69–2.55 mm, Patella 1.76–2.59 mm). Articular cartilage step-offs do remodel but have limited capability.17 Articular step-offs that exceeds the full thickness of articular cartilage usually do not remodel completely. These step offs lead to localized and altered mechanical peak pressures, leading to rapid progression of osteoarthritis.18 Usually a step-off of less than 2 mm is acceptable.12 Extra-articular deformities also affect the development of osteoarthritis after intra-articular fractures by virtue of altered mechanical axis and eccentric joint loading.19 Management of soft tissue surrounding joint is also very important in determining the optimal outcome following intraarticular fractures.20,21 Joint immobilization causes raised joint pressure leading to loss of nutrition and chondrocyte death. There is also liberation of several enzymes like proteases, which lead to articular surface degeneration. Motion promotes healing of full thickness articular cartilage defects with hyaline articular “cartilage like” material.
 
Imaging of Intra-articular Fractures
A detailed radiographic work-up is essential to understand the fracture anatomy of intra-articular fractures. Anteroposterior and lateral X-rays alone are usually not sufficient. Computed tomography is very useful for delineating the fracture configuration and has proved invaluable in current planning and management of intra-articular fractures (Fig. 1.4). This is more important in certain complex fractures like acetabular fractures, distal humerus fractures, distal tibia fractures, etc. CT gives detailed description of articular gap and step offs.22,23 According to a study by Tornetta,24 surgical plan changed in 64% cases after CT and additional information was available in 82% cases.
Recently intraoperative 3D fluoroscopy has been introduced, which usually provides inferior quality images than intraoperative CT but is much cheaper and has similar clinical value. Several studies26,27 have proved the usefulness of this investigation and have led the surgeons to change their implant placement during surgery.
 
Timing to Operate
Intra-articular fractures rarely require urgent ORIF except in open fractures, fractures with neurovascular complications, associated compartment syndrome and irreducible fracture dislocations. Proper management of intra-articular fractures requires appreciation of fracture anatomy as well as soft tissue injury. Usually complex intra-articular fractures are associated with significant trauma to surrounding soft tissue. Surgical approach through such traumatized soft tissue envelop, if done early, will cause additional trauma to soft tissue envelope, leading to problems related to wound healing and infection (Fig. 1.5). So it is prudent to wait for soft tissue healing before embarking upon the surgery. This can vary from days to weeks.11 In between the time, one can use bridging external fixators also known as traveling fixators (Fig. 1.6) with definitive fixation later on. Several indirect reduction techniques and biological fixation concepts have also come to reduce trauma to the soft tissue envelope.
It is also important to assess the resources of surgeon as well as of the institution and cases should be referred to higher centers if facilities are inadequate.5
Figure 1.4: CT gives much detailed description of intraarticular fracture anatomy. Die-punch component (arrow) was easily identified on CT in this case
Figure 1.5: Infection and wound healing problems are common if surgery is done early through traumatic soft tissue envelope
 
Surgical Principles (Figs 1.7A to E)
An atraumatic surgical approach should be used. Both minimally invasive and open approaches are available, however all articular fragments must be reduced anatomically and preferably under vision. Ligamentotaxis will only work for fragments with ligament attachment (i.e. some split fractures of the tibial plateau).
Surgical reconstruction begins with anatomical reduction of the articular surface.
Quite often the depressed fragments need to be elevated. Bone graft or bone substitute is used to support this elevated fragment if necessary.6
Figure 1.6: Traveling temporary fixator
Figures 1.7A to E: (A) AP and lateral X-rays of intraarticular distal humerus fracture; (B) Exposure of fracture; (C) Reduction of articular surface; (D) Provisional fixation of fracture with K wires; (E) Postoperative X-rays showing definitive fixation with plates and screws
This articular reduction is then secured with K-wires or screws and then this articular block is fixed to the metaphysis with the help of definitive implant. Nowadays, periarticular anatomical locking plates have become indispensable in the management of these fractures. All measures are taken to minimize trauma to the surrounding soft tissue.
 
Postoperative Rehabilitation
Several studies29-31 have reported beneficial effects of early motion in intra-articular fractures. Active assisted exercises are preferable, muscles and joints both are rehabilitated. Continuous passive motion (CPM) does not prevent muscle atrophy, however; it is still a useful tool in the management of intra-articular fractures. Sometimes, stability of fixation can be of concern. Some sort of additional stability can be provided with 7ROM-splints. Plaster immobilization should not be used after ORIF of intra-articular fractures as it leads to more stiffness. Patients are kept non-weight bearing until articular fracture is healed.
 
Emerging Technologies
T1-rho MRI mapping, which measure relaxation times in cartilage can assess specific components of articular cartilage biochemistry and ultra-structure. It has shown to be more sensitive to cartilage degradation than conventional MRI techniques.32-34
Recently virtual operative plan can be made preoperatively with the help of electronic templating. Electronic templating is also useful in planning of implant needs as well as positioning over the bone fragments. Superior softwares are being introduced to improve the efficacy as well as extent of application of this technology.35
Navigation is another important breakthrough which helps in the management of complex intra-articular fractures like acetabular fractures. Both CT based as well as fluoroscopy based navigations are available in today's world.36,37
New technologies are being added to orthopedics day by day. Some technologies like nanotechnology have the potential to change the current orthopedic practice completely.
References
  1. MullerME, AllgowerM, SchneiderK, WilleneggerH. Manual of internal fixation, 2nd edn. Springer,  Berlin Heidelberg, New York, 1979.
  1. CharnleyJ. The closed treatment of common fractures. Livingstone, Edinburgh, 1961.
  1. NeerC, GrahamSA, SheltonML. Supracondylar fracture of the adult femur. J Bone Joint Surg. 1967;49A:591-613.
  1. StewartM, SiskD, WallaceSL. Fractures of the distal third of the femur. J Bone Joint Surg. 1966;48A:784-807.
  1. WenzlH, CaseyPA, HebertP, BelinJ. Die operative Behandlung der distalen Femurfraktur. AO Bulletin, Bern. 1970.
  1. MizeRD, BucholzRW, GroganDP. Surgical treatment of displaced comminuted fractures of distal end of femur. J Bone Joint Surg. 1982;64A:871-9.
  1. SchatzkerJ, LampertDC. Supracondylar fractures of the femur. Clin Orthop. 1979;138:77–83.
  1. SchatzkerJ, McBroomR, BruceD. The tibial plateau fracture: the Toronto experience. Clin Orthop. 1979;138:94–104.
  1. MitchellN, ShepardN. Healing of articular cartilage in intra-articular fractures in rabbits. J Bone Joint Surg. 1980;62A:628-34.
  1. SalterRB, et al. The biological effects of continuous passive motion on the healing of full thickness defects in articular cartilage: an experimental investigation in the rabbit. J Bone Joint Surg. 1980;62A:1232-51.
  1. SchatzkerJ, TileM. The rationale of Operative Fracture Care, 3rd edn, Springer, Berlin Heidelberg,  New York, 2005.
  1. DirschlDR, MarshL, BuckwalterJA, et al. Articular fractures. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2004;12:416–23.
  1. MarshJL, BuckwalterJ, BrownT, et al. Articular fractures: Does an anatomic reduction really change the result? J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2002;84:1259–71.
  1. CrutchfieldEH, SeligsonD, HenrySL, WarnholtzA. Tibial pilon fractures: A comparative clinical study of management techniques and results. Orthopedics. 1995;18:613–7.
  1. SandersR, FortinP, DiPasqualeT, WallingA. Operative treatment in 120 displaced intra-articular calcaneal fractures: Results using a prognostic computed tomography scan classification. Clin Orthop. 1993;290:87–95.
  1. ShepherdDET, SeedhomBB. Thickness of human articular cartilage in joints of the lower limb. Ann Rheum Dis. 1999;58:27–34.
  1. LovászG, LlinásA, BenyaPD, ParkSH, SarmientoA, Luck JVJr. Cartilage changes caused by a coronal surface stepoff in a rabbit model. Clin Orthop. 1998;354:224–34.
  1. BrownTD, AndersonDD, NepolaJV, SingermanRJ, PedersenDR, BrandRA. Contact stress aberrations following imprecise reduction of simple tibial plateau fractures. J Orthop Res. 1988;6:851–62.
  1. RasmussenPS. Tibial condylar fractures as a cause of degenerative arthritis. Acta Orthop Scand. 1972;43:566–75.
  1. McFerranMA, SmithSW, BoulasHJ, SchwartzHS. Complications encountered in the treatment of pilon fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1992;6:195–200.
  1. BlauthM, BastianL, KrettekC, KnopC, EvansS. Surgical options for the treatment of severe tibial pilon fractures: A study of three techniques. J Orthop Trauma. 2001;15:153–60.
  1. SandersR, FortinP, DiPasqualeT, WallingA. Operative treatment in 120 displaced intraarticular calcaneal fractures: Results using a prognostic computed tomography scan classification. Clin Orthop. 1993;290:87–95.
  1. ColeRJ, BindraRR, EvanoffBA, GilulaLA, YamaguchiK, GelbermanRH. Radiographic evaluation of osseous displacement following intra-articular fractures of the distal radius: Reliability of plain radiography versus computerized tomography. J Hand Surg [Am]. 1997;22:792–800.
  1. TornettaP, GorupJ. Axial computed tomography of pilon fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;323:273–6.
  1. KendoffD, CitakM, GardnerMJ, StübigT, KrettekC, HüfnerT. Intraoperative 3D imaging: value and consequences in 248 cases. J Trauma. 2009;66(1):232–8.
  1. KendoffD, CitakM, GardnerM, KfuriM Jr, ThumesB, KrettekC, et al. Three-dimensional fluoroscopy for evaluation of articular reduction and screw placement in calcaneal fractures. Foot Ankle Int. 2007;28(11):1165–71.
  1. KendoffD, GardnerMJ, CitakM, KfuriM Jr, ThumesB, KrettekC, et al. Value of 3D fluoroscopic imaging of acetabular fractures comparison to 2D fluoroscopy and CT imaging. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2008;128(6):599–605.
  1. KendoffD, PearleA, HüfnerT, CitakM, GöslingT, KrettekC. First clinical results and consequences of intraoperative three-dimensional imaging at tibial plateau fractures. J Trauma. 2007;63(1):239–44.
  1. SalterRB. Continuous passive motion: from origination to research to clinical applications. J Rheumatol. 2004;31(11):2104–5.
  1. SalterRB. History of rest and motion and the scientific basis for early continuous passive motion. Hand Clin. 1996;12(1):1–11.
  1. SalterRB. The physiologic basis of continuous passive motion for articular cartilage healing and regeneration. Hand Clin. 1994;10(2):211–9.
  1. SouzaRB, StehlingC, WymanBT, Hellio Le GraverandMP, LiX, LinkTM, et al. The effects of acute loading on T1rho and T2 relaxation times of tibiofemoral articular cartilage. Osteoarthritis Cartilage. 2010;18(12):1557–63.
  1. ZarinsZA, BolbosRI, PialatJB, LinkTM, LiX, SouzaRB, et al. Cartilage and meniscus assessment using T1rho and T2 measurements in healthy subjects and patients with osteoarthritis. Osteoarthritis Cartilage. 2010;18(11):1408–16.
  1. BolbosRI, MaCB, LinkTM, MajumdarS, LiX. In vivo T1rho quantitative assessment of knee cartilage after anterior cruciate ligament injury using 3 Tesla magnetic resonance imaging. Invest Radiol. 2008;43(11):782–8.
  1. PilsonHT, ReddixRN Jr, MuttyCE, WebbLX. The long lost art of preoperative planning—resurrected? Orthopedics. 2008;31(12).
  1. HoffmannM, SchröderM, LehmannW, KammalM, RuegerJM, HerrmanRuecker A. Next generation distal locking for intramedullary nails using an electromagnetic X-ray-radiation-free real-time navigation system. J Trauma Acute Care Surg. 2012;73(1):243–8.
  1. OberstM, HauschildO, KonstantinidisL, SuedkampNP, SchmalH. Effects of three-dimensional navigation on intraoperative management and early postoperative outcome after open reduction and internal fixation of displaced acetabular fractures. J Trauma Acute Care Surg. 2012 Jun 14. [Epub ahead of print].

Glenoid Fractures2

Vikram A Mhaskar, J Maheshwari
 
Introduction
Scapular fractures comprise of approximately 1% of all fractures. Of these, one-third affect the glenoid process, including the fractures of glenoid cavity and neck. More than 90% of glenoid fractures are minimally displaced and can be managed nonoperatively, the other 10% need surgery. The displaced fractures may affect stability of the shoulder if they involve glenoid rim or result in substantial tilt of the glenoid. These fractures can occur in isolation, in association with other scapular fractures, and as a part of glenohumeral dislocations. They often occur due to high-energy trauma, or fall on an out-stretched arm.
 
Relevant Anatomy
Glenoid inclination is variable. On an average, it is inclined 4.25 degrees superiorly and is in retroversion of 1.23 degrees. Any significant change in inclination may result in an unstable shoulder. The glenoid width averages 28.8 ± 1.6 mm in males and 23.6 ± 1.5 mm in females. Its height averages 37.5 ± 2.2 mm in males and 32.6 ± 1.8 mm in females.
The shallowness of the fossa and relatively loose articulation between the shoulder and the rest of the body allows the arm to have tremendous mobility at the expense of being much easier to dislocate than most other joints in the body. The head of the humerus is approximately 4 times the size of the glenoid fossa, and hence loss of glenoid surface may become a reason for recurrent dislocation.
 
Clinical Features
Common presentation of a glenoid fracture is in association with an acute anterior dislocation of the shoulder, which has the tendency to re-dislocate after reduction. On X-rays, one can see a fracture of the anterior glenoid rim. Posterior glenoid fractures often result in persistent posterior dislocation. Glenoid fossa fractures have few symptoms. Often these injuries are associated with a multiply injured patient, and are associated with serious chest injury. For this reason such injuries are commonly missed. One must look for brachial plexus and vascular injuries, sometimes associated with ‘high-velocity’ trauma.10
Figure 2.1: Classification of glenoid fractures
 
Radiographic Features
Trauma series including a true AP of the shoulder and axillary (mostly possible) form the basic views. Computed tomography (CT) scan, particularly a 3-D CT scan with ‘end-on glenoid’ with head removed, gives the best idea about the type of fracture. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is sometimes done to assess for the associated rotator cuff injuries.
 
Classification
Ideberg and Goss classified1 these fractures into six types (Fig. 2.1):
Type I:
Fractures of the glenoid rim, subdivided into type Ia (anterior rim), and type Ib (posterior rim) fractures.
Type II:
Transverse or oblique fractures through the glenoid fossa extending into the lateral border of the scapula so that the inferior triangular fragment, if displaced, may result in inferiorly subluxated humeral head.
Type III:
Oblique fracture through the glenoid fossa that exits at the mid superior border of the scapula, often associated with acromion/clavicular fracture or acromioclavicular joint dislocation.
Type IV:
Horizontal fracture line extending through and through to the medial border of the scapula.
Type V:
Combination of type IV with a fracture separating inferior (Va), superior (Vb) or both halves (Vc) of the glenoid.
Type VI:
Severe comminuted fracture of the glenoid fossa.
 
Management
Non-surgical: Minimally displacement (less than 5 mm step and less than 5 mm separation) is acceptable as it does not cause long-term issues. Usually a sling for 2 to 3 weeks is adequate. Most fractures heal in 6 weeks.
Surgical: Surgical indications of glenoid fossa fractures broadly depend upon the following:
  1. Articular step of more than 5 mm
  2. Separation of fragments enough to cause non-union (more than 5 mm)
  3. Fracture pattern that allows displacement of the head out of the glenoid (type I and II)
11Depending upon the type of fracture, the treatment is as follows:
Type I a,b
Open reduction required if fracture involves more than 1/4th of the glenoid fossa, and is associated with shoulder instability. Fixation is done via anterior approach for type Ia and posterior approach for type Ib fractures.
Type II
Excellent results are obtained with open reduction and internal fixation, usually from posterior approach.
Type III
Goss recommends open reduction internal fixation for a step off of 5 mm or more involving the articular surface. Rockwood2 recommends arthroscopic evaluation and assisted reduction with limited open surgery, by using a heavy pin in the coracoid to manipulate the upper glenoidal aspect.
Type IV
Open reduction only recommended in a separated fracture or that with a step off, mainly when the superior fragment of the glenoid is displaced laterally.
Type V
Conservative treatment, if humeral head is well centered.
Type VI
Best treatment is early motion.
 
Approaches
Thorough knowledge of the surgical anatomy is necessary to adequately stabilize a glenoid fracture. It is important is to decide from which side can the fracture be best approached—anterior, posterior, superior or combined. Anterior rim fracture can be approached from front (deltopectoral approach). Posterior rim fractures and all the other fractures are best approached from behind. In some, an additional exposure from superiorly is required to control the superior fragment. Basic orthopedic and shoulder instruments are required. K-wires, 4 mm cannulated screws, and small fragment recon plates form the mainstay of implants required to fix these fractures.
Deltopectoral approach: This approach is used essentially for anterior glenoid rim fractures. The approach is similar to that used for any anterior surgery on the shoulder, and consists of the following steps (Fig. 2.2).
The patient is positioned in beech-chair position. The bony landmarks are marked, particularly the coracoid. A 10 cm skin incision is made extending from lateral third of the clavicle, going over the coracoid, towards insertion of the deltoid (Fig. 2.2A). The cephalic vein is identified (Fig. 2.2B), and mobilized laterally. The deltopectoral interval is opened (Fig. 2.2C). The tip of the coracoid can be felt in the superior part of the incision. Coracoid is the ‘light house’ of anterior shoulder exposure. Undersurface of the deltoid and pectoralis are mobilized to be able to retract them. A self-retaining retractor is handy at this stage (Fig. 2.2C). The conjoint tendons attaches on the tip of the coracoid, and is covered with clavipectoral fascia. The clavipectoral fascia lateral to the conjoint tendon is cut to retract the conjoint tendon medially. The self-retaining retractor is now shifted between conjoint tendon medially and deltoid laterally. The shoulder is externally rotated at this stage. The fibers of underlying subscapularis come to vision, running medial to lateral, getting attached to the lesser tuberosity (Fig. 2.2D). The bursa covering the muscle is removed by blunt dissection. The tendinous upper border of the subscapularis can be felt at the base of the coracoid. The lower border of the subscapularis corresponds to a leash of vessels running transversely from medial to lateral (Fig. 2.2D), commonly termed as ‘three sisters’. These vessels are carefully ligated. Once the attachment of the subscapularis and its upper and lower borders are identified, its tendon is cut 2.5 mm from the attachment. 3 to 4 stay sutures are placed in the cut edge of the subscapularis for later closure (Fig. 2.2E). The plane between the subscap and anterior capsule is developed. The muscle is retracted medially.12
Figures 2.2A to G: Deltopectoral approach for glenoid exposure
The underlying anterior capsule is likewise cut from the lessor tuberosity, and retracted medially. The anterior part of the glenoid rim can now be seen and tilt (Fig. 2.2F). A special humeral head retractor (Facuda) comes handy in keeping the head out of the way (Fig. 2.2G). Often one needs to carefully dissect the capsule from lower pole of the glenoid to adequately expose the fracture extending to the lower pole. Great care needs to be taken while doing this as the axillary nerve is close. The fracture is reduced under direct vision. It is temporarily fixed with one or two K-wires. It is best to use 4 mm cannulated screws to fix the fracture. One needs to be careful while drilling and fixing the anterior rim as the axillary nerve is close. Attention is required to drill in mediolateral 13direction to avoid putting the screw intra-articular. An osteotomy of the coracoid may be required for better exposure.
Figures 2.3A to F: Posterior approach for glenoid exposure (A) Bony anatomy of the shoulder from behind; (B) Skin incision; (C) Posterior approach muscles under the deltoid; (D) Internervous plane between infraspinatus and teres minor; (E) Capsule over the joint; (F) Exposing of glenoid
Posterior approach (Figs 2.3A to F): With the patient in lateral decubitus position, bony landmarks are drawn (Fig. 2.3A). A curved skin incision is made starting at lateral prominence of acromion, going medially along scapular spine and distally to the inferior angle of scapula (Fig. 2.3B). The deltoid is detached sharply from the scapular spine alongwith some periostium. Interval between the posterior deltoid and underlying infraspinatus muscle is created by careful blunt dissection with finger. The detached deltoid is retracted laterally. Under the deltoid one would find the bellies of infraspinatus and teres minor (Fig. 2.3C). A plane can be identifies more easily between the two at the lateral end where they attach to the posterior part of the greater tuberosity. Further dissection is between the infraspinatus and teres minor (Fig. 2.3D), as these muscles are suplied by two different nerves (suprascapular and axillary nerves respectively). Under the muscles, one will find the posterior capsule covering the head, which can appropriately expose the glenoid (Fig. 2.3E). The exposure can be further improved by detaching the origin of triceps from infragenoid tubercle, and by placing a head retractor to expose the glenoid (Fig. 2.3F).
14For more extensile exposure, particularly to expose superior part of the glenoid and lateral border of the scapula, infraspinatus or teres minor is detached from the greater tuberosity. These can subsequently be reattached at the end of the operation with suture anchors. Long head of the triceps from inferior glenoid tubercle may have to be removed to gain access to inferior rim of the glenoid, and to the lateral boarder of the scapula. Suprascapular nerve medially and axillary nerve inferiorly are at risk in this exposure.
Superior approach: This may be required as an additional approach to control the superior glenoid fragment. It is a direct approach to the superior part of the glenoid, which can be reached by splitting the fibers of trapezius and supraspinatus.
Tips in reduction and fixation:
  • Adequate exposure, and knowledge of structures at risk, particularly axillary nerve and suprascapular nerve
  • Reduction, either direct or indirect using thick K-wires as joy sticks
  • Temporary fixation with thin K-wires over which cannulated screws can be fixed
  • Exact size and placement of the screw is important, particularly to avoid intra-articular placement of the screw.
 
Postoperative Management and Rehabilitation
The shoulder area does not respond too well to the operative treatment.
It is important to device a rehabilitation protocol that will allow adequate healing of the fracture as well as preserve motion at the shoulder joint. Passive movements should be performed from day one, at least in selected directions. Initially, near full time wearing of a shoulder brace which keeps the shoulder 20 degree abduction and in neutral rotation. Early supervised range of motion exercises is recommended.
If full subscapularis take down is done, brace is worn in 0 degree external rotation for 4 weeks. 30 degrees of internal rotation and 90 degrees of elevation is allowed. External rotation movement is limited to 30 degrees for 3 weeks.
Active resisted exercises started at 3 weeks when muscle healing has occurred. Activities against resistance are started only after radiological evidence of healing is seen. It is very important to strengthen the muscle groups around the shoulder for optimal rehabilitation.
 
COMPLICATIONS
  1. Shoulder stiffness: Some degree of shoulder stiffness may always be present but can be largely prevented with appropriate operative mobilization. Some patients may need manipulation under anesthesia if expected ROM is not achieved.
  2. Secondary degenerative arthritis: Though incidence of osteoarthritis is less in upper limb fractures, but gross malreduction, significant step at the fracture site and undue shearing force due to the tilt of the glenoid may result in early osteoarthritis. Pain is the main symptom. Some patients may ultimately require a shoulder replacement.
  3. Axillary nerve injury: Axillay nerve is pretty close to the inferior pole of the glenoid and can be easily damaged as a result of traction or direct injury. It can be prevented with appropriate surgical approach.
  4. Failure of fixation: Often it may not be possible to achieve adequate fixation of fragments. It is prudent in such cases to go slow with rehabilitation.
  5. Infection: This is an uncommon a complication as in other operations. A contused skin due to injury itself, at the site of the incision, may lead to wound healing problems. Infection can be prevented by meticulous surgery. Maintaining asepsis and use of appropriate perioperative antibiotics can minimize this complication.
  6. Instability: Appropriate treatment of associated injuries to the rotator cuff and other stabilizing structures may prevent this complication.
15
 
RESULTS
Glenoid fossa fractures are rare. The indication for conservative or surgical treatment is controversial, especially because of limited reports in the literature. Many authors prefer conservative treatment for most type of glenoid fractures.3 Kligman and Roffman reported on a small series of four patients with displaced, intra-articular glenoid fossa, who were treated either surgically or conservatively. After an average 7-year follow-up, clinical and radiographic results were satisfactory in all patients. Kraus et al3 reported good results of type 1b fractures treated conservatively in elderly patients.
More recently, several authors have shown good results with open reduction and fixation of some of these fractures. They used Ideberg classification in planning the surgical approach. Schandelmaier et al published 10 year follow-up of glenoid fractures treated by operation, with good to excellent results in majority. Anavian et al4 also suggested surgical treatment for complex, displaced intra-articular glenoid fractures with or without involvement of the scapular neck. Mayo et al5 published results of surgical treatment in twenty-seven patients at mean follow-up 43 months from surgery. Anatomic reconstruction was achieved in 24 (89%) patients. They concluded that anatomic surgical reconstruction with a low complication rate and good functional outcome can be obtained for most patients of glenoid fractures treated surgically. Leung et al6 reported the results of treating 14 glenoid fractures with open reduction and stable internal fixation, with an average follow-up period of 30.5 months. They concluded that the operative treatment for these fractures gives good and predictable results.
The recent trend is to do arthroscopic assisted reduction and percutaneous fixation of glenoid fractures. Methods of indirect reduction using a thick K-wire as joy stick, and safe corridors for percutaneous internal fixation under arthroscopic vision have been described.7 Sugaya et al8 reported successful results by treating anterior glenoid rim fractures, with average 27% bone loss, arthroscopically.
 
Illustrative Case
This 30-year-old man fell from a bike and sustained injury to his right (dominant) shoulder. It was diagnosed as shoulder dislocation. The attending surgeon made an attempt at closed reduction. He noticed that, though it could be easily reduced, but it was dislocating with equal ease. The X-ray showed fracture of the anterior rim of the glenoid (Fig. 2.4A). CT scan confirmed the presence of a significant fracture of the anterior rim of the glenoid. A further study with 3D CT showed the exact size of the glenoid fragment, constituting nearly 40% of the glenoid (Fig. 2.4B).
Arthroscopic reduction and fixation of the fragment was carried out. Arthroscopic surgery was done with the patient in lateral position, and arm in traction. Standard posterior viewing portal was made. Instruments were introduced from anteroinferior (instrument) portal. Hematoma was cleaned using a shaver, and the fracture evaluated. Reduction of the fracture was achieved by manipulating the fragment using a probe. In order to get a direct access to the anterior rim of the glenoid an additional 5 O'clock portal was made through the subscapularis (Fig. 2.4C). Two guide wires were passed into the anterior glenoid fragment to fine tune the reduction, and also to temporarily stabilize it. After careful drilling over the guidewires, two 4 mm cannulated lag screws were passed to fix the fracture (Fig. 2.4D). The stability of the reduction was checked and found satisfactory. The patient was kept in a sling with intermittent mobilization for 4 weeks, after which active assisted exercises were started. CT scan done at 2 months showed that the shoulder is well reduced and glenoid fragment is well in position (Fig. 2.4E). The patient continued physiotherapy and became nearly normal with minimal scars (Fig. 2.4F).16
Figures 2.4A to F: (A) Preoperative X-ray showing fracture of the anterior glenoid rim; (B) Preoperative 3D CT scan with en-face view showing the extent of the fracture; (C) Showing 5 O'clock portal used for passing screws; (D) Pictorial representation of the fixation of the glenoid; (E) Showing well reduced and fixed glenoid fracture; (F) Showing minimal scars
References
  1. GossTP. Fractures of the glenoid cavity. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1993;74:299–305.
  1. ButtersKP. The scapula. In: RockwoodCA, Matsen FAII (Eds). The shoulder. Philadelphia: WB Saunders.  1990;I:335-6.
  1. KrausN, GerhardtC, HaasN, ScheibelM. Conservative therapy of anteroinferior glenoid fractures. Unfallchirurg. 2010;113(6):469–75.
  1. AnavianJ, GaugerEM, SchroderLK, WijdicksCA, ColePA. Surgical and functional outcomes after operative management of complex and displaced intra-articular glenoid fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2012;94(7):645–5.
  1. MayoKA, BenirschkeSK, MastJW. Displaced fractures of the glenoid fossa. Results of open reduction and internal fixation. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1998;(347):122–30.
  1. LeungKS, LamTP, PoonKM. Operative treatment of displaced intra-articular glenoid fractures. Injury. 1993;24(5):324–8.
  1. MarslandD, AhmedHA. Arthroscopically assisted fixation of glenoid fractures: a cadaver study to show potential applications of percutaneous screw insertion and anatomic risks. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2011;20(3):481–90.
  1. SugayaH, KonY, TsuchiyaA. Arthroscopic repair of glenoid fractures using suture anchors. Arthroscopy. 2005;21(5):635.

Proximal Humeral Fractures: Open Reduction and Internal Fixation3

Bhavuk Garg, Prakash P Kotwal
 
Introduction
Proximal humeral fractures account for around 4 to 5% of all fractures. It is the second most common fracture type of upper extremity and 3rd most common fracture in patients > 65 years. Most of proximal humeral fractures (80–85%) are minimally displaced. These fractures have a bimodal distribution. In the younger age group, proximal humeral fractures usually occur because of high energy injury, while in elderly, low energy injuries are usually the culprit due to underlying osteoporosis.1
Disabilities associated with proximal fractures are often underestimated and are due to loss of motion, loss of reduction, avascular necrosis (AVN), heterotopic bone formation and injuries to rotator cuff, nerves (axillary, brachial plexus), vascular structures, scapula, clavicle, etc.
Both conservative and surgical options are used for proximal humeral fractures; however, the operative indications are expanding because of:
  • Better understanding of multiple fracture patterns
  • Higher patient expectations
  • Improvements in internal fixation techniques.
 
Classification
The decision to operate and the selection of the appropriate surgical modality for proximal humerus fractures are largely based on the fracture pattern. Understanding the particular fracture pattern in each case is complicated. Because of the increase in treatment methods as well as understanding of proximal humeral fractures, a variety of classification systems have been devised. The Neer's 4-part classification2 (Fig. 3.1) is still the most widely used classification and is based on pathoanatomy of proximal humerus fractures. AO/ASIF3 classification system (Fig. 3.2) considered vascularity also in addition to patho-anatomy. In 2004, Edelson et al4 published a CT based classification, which has shown potential to improve as well as modify the surgical procedures. This classification divides proximal humerus fractures into 5 major patterns:
  1. Two part
  2. Three part
  3. Shield fractures and variants
  4. Isolated greater tuberosity #
  5. Fracture dislocations
18
Figure 3.1: Neer classification system
Figure 3.2: AO classification system
19The shield was defined as the section of bone circling the head composed of the greater and lesser tuberosities and held together by the bicipital groove. The shield fracture pattern involves the superior bicipital groove and the lesser tuberosity, with the shield fragment itself usually being comminuted.
 
IMAGING WORKUP1
 
Radiographs
The standard trauma series (Fig. 3.3) for proximal humerus fracture includes true AP, axillary lateral and scapular Y view. The trauma series evaluates the glenohumeral joint and proximal humerus in three perpendicular planes. The axillary radiograph best shows displacement of the lesser and greater tuberosities and splits and dislocations of the humeral head. If the patient is unable to tolerate the axillary view because of pain, a Velpeau axillary view can be substituted. The axillary view is the most frequently omitted image and is a common reason for missed dislocations and fractures.
Other radiographic projections1 are useful for specific fracture types, such as humeral head indentations (so-called Hill-Sachs and reverse Hill-Sachs lesions) or glenoid rim fractures, but are not needed in most cases. The Stryker notch view1 is used to evaluate for Hill-Sachs lesions in dislocations and fracture dislocations of the glenohumeral joint. The Didiee view1 is an excellent radiographic view for visualization of the anterior inferior glenoid rim. The Hill-Sachs radiograph is an AP radiograph taken with the humerus in internal rotation revealing posterolateral head impaction fractures. The internal rotation view allows for better visualization of the lesser tuberosity. The West Point axillary lateral view provides tangential imaging of the anterior glenoid rim.
Figure 3.3: Standard radiographic workup for proximal humerus fractures
20
 
Computed Tomography
Computed tomography (CT) has enhanced tremendously our ability to image and understand complex proximal humerus fractures. CT represents an invaluable tool in the preoperative planning and execution of internal fixation for these complex fractures. Most authors recommend the systematic use of CT scans for preoperative planning, especially for fractures including the greater or lesser tuberosities, humeral head impaction, head splitting, or any other fracture with intra-articular fragments.
 
Magnetic Resonance Imaging
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) can be a useful diagnostic tool in assessing osseous abnormalities about the proximal humerus potentially leading to improved patient evaluation and treatment. MRI may help identify occult fractures and detect associated rotator cuff tears. In general, MRI is rarely used in the standard preoperative imaging protocol of proximal humerus fractures.
 
Radiographic Assessment of Bone Density1 (Fig. 3.4)
Bone mineral density can be roughly determined by radiographic evaluation and can have a considerable effect on treatment options. Tingart and colleagues5 identified a reliable and reproducible predictor of bone mineral density of the proximal humerus. They compared the cortical thickness of the proximal humeral diaphysis with the bone mineral density of the proximal humerus. They noted that a cortical thickness (defined as the sum of the cortical thickness of the medial and lateral cortex of the proximal humerus) less than 4 mm was highly predictive of low bone mineral density. Additionally the radiographic images must be evaluated for the presence of an intact medial buttress because this has been theorized to be important in strength of fixation, especially regarding current locking plate technology.
 
Radiographic Evaluation of Vascularity6,7 (Fig. 3.5)
Another consideration in the radiographic classification of proximal humeral fractures is the vascularity of the humeral head.
Figure 3.4: Bone density assessment of proximal humerus (at level 2)
Figure 3.5: Assessment of vascularity in proximal humerus fractures
21Avascular necrosis is known as sequela of proximal humeral fractures and has been reported at rates of 21 to 75%. The vascularity of the humeral head segment in conjunction with the state of the articular surface and other mitigating patient factors help to determine optimum treatment. Hertel and colleagues7 devised a series of criteria that could be predictive of humeral head ischemia after fracture. Fractures that were predictive of ischemia were those of the anatomic neck, four-part displaced and all three-part fractures configurations except one. The exception three-part fracture that maintained perfusion involved a fracture at the anatomic neck and a fracture below the tuberosities at the surgical neck; however, the tuberosities did not have a fracture between them. Additional elements, such as length of the posteromedial metaphyseal extension (<8 mm associated with vascular compromise) and the integrity of the medial hinge, were also key in predicting vascular disruption.
Tamai and colleagues8 suggested that the orientation of the articular surface is important in predicting humeral head vascularity. The absence of displacement or medial displacement of the humeral head with respect to the humeral shaft was predictive of maintained vascularity to the humeral head.
 
INDICATIONS FOR CONSERVATIVE MANAGEMENT (FIG. 3.6)
In this operative era, there is still a role of conservative management. The indications for closed treatment are:
  • Minimally displaced 2 part fracture (or positional reduction of significant displacement)
  • Greater tuberosity fracture displacement <5 mm
  • Minimally displaced 3- and 4-part fractures.
 
INDICATIONS FOR OPEN REDUCTION AND INTERNAL FIXATION (ORIF)9-11
Indications for ORIF can be summarized as follows:
  • Displaced greater tuberosity fracture (>5 mm)
  • Lesser tuberosity fracture with involvement of articular surface
  • Displaced or unstable surgical neck fracture
  • Displaced anatomic neck fracture in young patient
  • Displaced, reconstructible 3- and 4-part fractures.
Figure 3.6: Conservative management of proximal humerus fracture
22
Table 3.1   Choice of surgical approach
Surgical approach
Fracture pattern
Deltopectoral
Surgical neck, Lesser tuberosity, 3 part, 4 part/surgeon choice
Deltoid splitting
Greater tuberosity, Some Surgical neck if using IM fixation
Posterior
Scapula, glenoid, occasional posterior articular fracture
Percutaneous
Fractures amenable to pinning or nailing
The last indication is variable for different surgeons depending upon their skills and experience.
 
Surgical Approaches
A variety of surgical approaches have been described for proximal humeral fractures. Choice of surgical approach depends upon fracture pattern (Table 3.1).
 
Current Techniques of Open Reduction and Internal Fixation (ORIF)
A variety of ammunition is present in an orthopedic surgeon's armamentarium to deal with proximal humeral fractures. They can be discussed in brief as follows:
 
PERCUTANEOUS PINNING12 (FIG. 3.7)
This is best suited for limited 2 or 3 part fractures when other techniques are not favorable. This is usually done in beach-chair position under C arm control. After closed reduction, bidirectional pins are used, which are preferably terminally threaded. Associated problems include pin migration, axillary nerve injury, pin loosening and infection. Another major disadvantage is that no early motion can be instituted leading to shoulder stiffness.
 
SUTURE OR K-WIRE/TENSION BAND13 (FIG. 3.8)
This is best suited for isolated greater tuberosity, lesser tuberosity, or both, or both tuberosities associated with undisplaced surgical neck fracture. Associated problems include cuff constriction, limited head fixation to shaft and wire migration.
Figure 3.7: Percutaneous pinning of proximal humerus fracture
Figure 3.8: Tension band wiring (schematic diagram)
23
Figure 3.9: Flexible nailing of proximal humerus fracture
Figure 3.10: Locked nailing for proximal humerus fracture (schematic diagram)
 
INTRAMEDULLARY NAILING14
Two types of intramedullary nails are available: Flexible (Fig. 3.9) and locked rigid nails (Fig. 3.10). They are best suited for two part surgical neck fractures. Associated problems are limited head fixation, migration into subacromial space, cuff violation, etc. Locked nails provide enhanced proximal fixation with twisted blades or multiple screws.
 
PLATING
Buttress plate technique (Fig. 3.11) is usually applied lateral to the bicipital groove to minimize vascular damage. This is rarely used now a days due to impingement and poor head fixation. This is best suited for low 2-part surgical neck fracture alone or associated with greater tuberosity fracture. These plates have high failure rate due to impingement and poor screw purchase.
To obviate the screw fixation problem, Hintermann et al15 recommended blade plate fixation (Fig. 3.12) regardless of age.
Figure 3.11: Buttress plate fixation
24
Figure 3.12: Blade plate fixation
However, Meier et al16 reviewed 36 cases with blade plate fixation and found that 8 patients out of 36 had blade plate perforation and recommended alternate fixation if possible.
Locking plates came as a boon to solve all these problems. They provide near-anatomic reduction and stable fixation leading to good results. They also provide good fixation in osteoporotic bones. They also bail out the surgeon who can switch to arthroplasty if he is unable to obtain adequate reduction/fixation. They have combined properties of versatile adaptability of buttress plate and angular stability of blade plate. PHILOS® by AO group also provides suture holes to neutralize muscle forces. All these features allow for early postoperative mobilization, essential for good functional results.17
Locking plate fixation is currently the most commonly employed technique for displaced but salvageable two-, three-, and four part fractures.
 
Surgical Technique for Locking Plate Fixation of Proximal Humerus
 
POSITIONING AND ANESTHESIA (FIG. 3.13)
General anesthesia is used. The patient is positioned on the operating room table in a semi-sitting beach-chair position; the head is rotated to the opposite side.
Figure 3.13: Positioning of patient
25To prevent the patient from sliding down the operating room table, a pillow is placed behind the knees and a seat belt across the patient's thighs. The shoulder is positioned off the edge of the table so that the arm can be extended and imaged properly when needed intraoperatively.
 
Surgical Approach and Exposure
A standard deltopectoral approach is used. The incision is around 10 to 15 cm in length starting from the coracoid process to deltoid insertion (Fig. 3.14). Interval between pectoralis major and deltoid is easily identified by the presence of cephalic vein (Fig. 3.15), which is reflected laterally. This is an extensile approach and can be extended distally as an anterolateral approach if there is a diaphyseal extension. The insertion of the pectoralis major is partially released for exposure. Abducting the humerus during the procedure aids in relaxing the deltoid. If excessive deltoid tension is present, a transverse division of the anterior 1 cm of the deltoid insertion distally improves exposure and, more importantly, avoids damaging the deltoid.
Figure 3.14: Standard deltopectoral approach skin marking
Figure 3.15: Cephalic vein is the landmark for delto-pectoral interval
26
Figure 3.16: Identification of fracture fragments
 
Identification of Fracture Fragments
The long head of the biceps tendon serves as the key landmark in separating the greater and lesser tuberosity segments. In three and four part fractures, the split in the tuberosities is located just posterior to the bicipital groove. The space formed by this fracture line is developed to gain access to the humeral head and glenohumeral joint (Fig. 3.16).
The displaced greater tuberosity with its attached supraspinatus tendon lies laterally and posteriorly to the humeral head, and there is displacement between the humeral head and shaft. The articular surface of the humeral head usually lies posteriorly, directed away from the glenoid fossa, often facing lateral. It is necessary to disimpact the humeral head by blunt dissection and confirm that the head does not have a rare impaction or head-splitting fracture.18
 
Mobilization of Fracture Fragments
Nonabsorbable intraosseous or intratendinous (in case of osteoporotic bone) sutures are passed through both tuberosities (Fig. 3.17). It is important to open the rotator interval to inspect the articular surface for any loose fragments or defects. If humeral head is dislocated, it is reduced first before performing any reduction maneuver.
 
Reduction of Fracture Fragments (Fig. 3.18)
Humeral head is reduced over the shaft in all the three planes (coronal, sagittal and horizontal) either manually or with the help of K-wires, periosteal elevator or osteotomes. Lateralizing the shaft also helps shaft reduction, as it is usually displaced anteromedially due to the pull of pectoralis major. This can be achieved either by reduction forceps or by indirect pressure in the axilla through customized bolster. Aligning of fracture spikes as well as bicipital groove also help in ensuring optimum alignment. Tuberosities are also reduced with the help of holding sutures.
 
Provisional Stabilization
Once reduction is achieved, it is held with the help of K-wires (Figs 3.19 and 3.20). Bone graft or bone substitutes may be used if there is extensive metaphyseal defect (Fig. 3.21).27
Figure 3.17: Passing of holding sutures through tuberosities
Figure 3.18: Reduction of fracture fragments
Figure 3.19: Provisional stabilization with K-wires
28
Figure 3.20: Reduction is confirmed under C-arm
Figure 3.21: Bone substitute is added in case of metaphyseal void
Gardner et al19 emphasized the importance of medial buttress in proximal humerus fractures and recommended restoration of the medial buttress with reduction. If it is not possible, then it should be substituted with oblique locking (kickstand) screw or a fibular strut graft.
 
Definitive Plate Fixation
We routinely use the PHILOS® (Synthes) locking plate for proximal humerus fractures. Plate length is chosen optimally to insert 3 to 4 screws distal to fracture and 4-6 screws in the humeral head depending upon the bone quality. The correct plate position is about 8 mm distal to the top of the greater tuberosity, aligned properly along the axis of the humeral shaft and slightly posterior to the bicipital grove (2–4 mm) (Fig. 3.22).
Inserting a K-wire through the proximal hole of the insertion guide can confirm the correct plate position. The K-wire should rest on the top of the humeral head (Fig. 3.23). Placing the plate at too high a level increases the risk of subacromial impingement.29
Figure 3.22: Lateral placement of plate
Figure 3.23: Always ensure optimum height of plate
Placing the plate too low can prevent the optimal distribution of screws in the humerus head. The plate may also be used as a reduction tool.
Hold the appropriate Metaphyseal Jig over the plate. Before inserting the screws, check the subsequent position of the screws using Kirschner wires. Do not drill through the subchondral bone and into the shoulder joint. The drill is inserted using “wood-pecker technique” at low speed where we advance the drill bit only for a short distance, then pull the drill back before advancing again. This procedure is repeated until subchondral bone contact can be felt. The intact subchondral bone should be felt with a depth gauge or blunt pin to ensure that the screw stays within the humeral head. The screw length is measured and is around 40 to 50 mm in most of the cases (Fig. 3.24). Medial buttress screw (kickstand screw) is placed through the plate if required.
Once proximal fixation is achieved, a bicortical non-locking screw is inserted through the elongated hole into the distal shaft. Make sure to insert the screw perpendicular to the humeral shaft. By tightening this screw in the humeral shaft, the humeral head will 30be aligned to the humeral shaft, thus achieving a correct reduction. Additional screws are then inserted (Fig. 3.25).
Figure 3.24: Insertion of proximal screws
Figure 3.25: Placement of all screws. Note the position of biceps tendon with respect to plate positioning
It is advisable to check all screws under image intensifier to rule out any intra-articular penetration of the screw tips (Fig. 3.26).
 
Tuberosity Fixation
The function of plate is to connect the humeral head to the shaft. Tuberosity fragments must be fixed separately. Tuberosities are secured with tension band sutures through the small holes in the plate (Fig. 3.27). Check the sutures to ensure that they do not rupture during motion.31
Figure 3.26: Always check in multiple views or under fluoroscopy to rule out anterior intra-articular placement of screws
Figure 3.27: Tuberosity fixation through plate holes with nonabsorbable sutures
32
Figure 3.28: Wound closure
 
Wound Closure
After a thorough wash, wound is closed in layers (Fig. 3.28). A drain may or may not be used depending upon surgeon's preference.
 
POSTOPERATIVE REHABILITATION
Usually a shoulder immobilizer is used for 2 to 4 weeks depending upon the stability of fixation. Pendulum exercises and elbow ROM exercises are started immediately as soon as the pain subsides. Sequentially active assisted and active exercises are initiated. However, full load is exerted only after fracture has consolidated, usually at 6 months.
 
COMPLICATIONS
These locking plates have their own set of complications. Plate breakage and locking screw backout are two major problems (Figs 3.29A to D). Also humeral diaphyseal split fractures have been reported with use of short proximal humerus locking plates. Simple fractures at the surgical neck may run with an increased risk of a fatigue failure of the plate. In a recent systemic review,20 fixation of proximal humerus fractures with proximal humerus locking plates was found to be associated with a high rate of complications and reoperation and the authors suggested that the surgical technique should be used carefully and only in well-selected patients.
 
RESULTS OF LOCKING PLATES IN PROXIMAL HUMERUS FRACTURES
Saudan et al21 presented first results of locking plates in proximal humerus fractures and recommended ORIF of 2, 3-part fractures regardless of age, ORIF of 4-part fractures in younger patients and hemiarthroplasty for elderly 4-part fractures. Fankhauser et al22 reported that results of locking plate are inversely proportional to the severity of injury. Koukakis et al23 reported better results in younger patients as compared to elderly patients. Now longer plates are also available to deal with diaphyseal extension of proximal humerus fractures. Results have been very encouraging as most authors report a very high union rate combined with satisfactory functional results.24-2933
Figures 3.29A to D: Complications of locking plate
 
Summary
A lot has changed in our understanding and management of proximal humerus fractures. Surgical treatment of proximal humeral fractures continues to be a challenge especially in osteoporotic patients. Locking plates have been used with satisfactory results but the previous reported complications have not been substantially reduced. Most of the existing studies involve a small number of patients followed up for a rather short period of time. Since proximal humeral fractures constitute a heterogeneous group of complex fractures in an even more heterogeneous population, no single fixation method is a panacea. Choice of implant and method of fixation should be selected according to individual patient and fracture pattern characteristics based on clearly defined indications and contraindications.
 
Illustrative Case
A 45-year-old male sustained bilateral proximal humerus fractures during a road traffic accident. He sustained a 4-part fracture on right side and a three-part fracture on left side (Fig. 3.30). Both sides were managed with proximal humerus locking plate fixation. He made an excellent recovery with almost full range of motion at the end of 6 months. His postoperative X-rays at 3 years follow-up are shown in Figure 3.31.34
Figure 3.30: Preoperative X-rays and CT scan of bilateral proximal humerus fracture
Figure 3.31: Postoperative X-rays showing excellent healing and remodeling of the same patient at 3 years
References
  1. RobinsonC, et al. Classification and Imaging of Proximal Humerus Fractures. Orthopedic Clinics of North America. 2008;39(4):393–403.
  1. NeerCS. Displaced proximal humeral fractures. Part I: classification and evaluation. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1970;52:1077–89.
  1. MüellerME, NazarianS, KochP, et al. The comprehensive classification of fractures of long bones. Springer,  New York; 1990. pp. 54-63.
  1. EdelsonG, KellyI, VigderF, et al. A three-dimensional classification for fractures of the proximal humerus. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2004;86(3):413–25.
  1. LeeCK, HansenHR. Post-traumatic avascular necrosis of the humeral head in displaced proximal humeral fractures. J Trauma; 1981. pp. 788-91.
  1. HertelR, HempfingA, StiehlerM, et al. Predictors of humeral head ischemia after intracapsular fracture of the proximal humerus. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2004;13:427–33.
  1. TingartMJ, AprelevaM, vonStechow D, ZurakowskiD, WarnerJJ. The cortical thickness of the proximal humeral diaphysis predicts bone mineral density of the proximal humerus. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2003;85:611–7.
  1. TamaiK, HamadaJ, OhnoW, et al. Surgical anatomy of multipart fractures of the proximal humerus. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2002;11(5):421–7.
  1. Naranja RJJr, IannottiJP. Displaced three-and four-part proximal humerus fractures: Evaluation and management. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2000;8:373–82.
  1. CornellCN. Internal fracture fixation in patients with osteoporosis. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2003;11:109–19.
  1. ZytoK, WallaceWA, FrostickSP, PrestonBJ. Outcome after hemiarthroplasty for three-and four-part fractures of the proximal humerus. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 1998;7:85–9.
  1. ReschH, PovaczP, FrohlichR, WambacherM. Percutaneous fixation of three-and four-part fractures of the proximal humerus. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1997;79:295–300.
  1. CornellCN, LevineD, PagnaniMJ. Internal fixation of proximal humerus fractures using the screw-tension band technique. J Orthop Trauma. 1994;8:23–7.
  1. YoungA, HughesJS. Locked intramedullary nailing for treatment of displaced proximal humerus fractures. Orthopedic Clinics of North America. 39(4):417–28.
  1. HintermannB, et al. Rigid internal fixation of fractures of the proximal humerus in older patients. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2000;82-B:1107-12.
  1. MeierRA, et al. Unexpected high complication rate following internal fixation of unstable proximal humerus fractures with an angled blade plate. J Orthop Trauma. 2006;20(4):253–60.
  1. StrohmPC, KostlerW, SudkampNP. Locking plate fixation of proximal humerus fractures. Techniques in Shoulder and Elbow Surgery. 2005;6:8–13.
  1. SchlegelTF, HawkinsRJ. Internal fixation of three part proximal humeral fractures. Operative techniques in Orthopaedics. 1994;4:9–12.
  1. GardnerMJ, WeilY, BarkerJU, et al. The importance of medial support in locked plating of proximal humerus fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21(3):185–91.
  1. SproulRC, et al. A systematic review of locking plate fixation of proximal humerus fractures. Injury, Int J Care Injured. 2011;42:408–13.
  1. SaudanM, SternRE, LubbekeA, PeterRE, HoffmeyerP. Fixation of fractures of the proximal humerus: experience with a new locking plate. 2003; Presented at the 2003 Annual Meeting of the Orthopedic Trauma Association; Oct 9-11; Salt Lake City, Utah.
  1. FankhauserF, BoldinC, SchippingerG, HaunschmidC, SzyszkowitzR. A new locking plate for unstable fractures of the proximal humerus. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2005;430:176–81.
  1. KoukakisA, ApostolouCD, TenejaT, KorresDS, AminiA. Fixation of proximal humerus fractures using the PHILOS plate: early experience. Clin Orthop Relat Res; 2006. pp. 115-20.
  1. FazalMA, HaddadFS. Philos plate fixation for displaced proximal humeral fractures. J Orthop Surg (Hong Kong). 2009;17(1):15–8.
  1. BrunnerF, SommerC, BahrsC, et al. Open reduction and internal fixation of (proximal humerus fractures using a proximal humeral locked plate: a prospective multicenter analysis. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23(3):163–72.
  1. MartinezAA, CuencaJ, HerreraA. Philos plate fixation for proximal humeral fractures. J Orthop Surg (Hong Kong) 2009;17(1):10–4.
  1. PapadopoulosP, KarataglisD, StavridisSI, et al. Mid-term results of internal fixation of proximal humeral fractures with the Philos plate. Injury. 2009;40(12):1292–6.
  1. ParmaksizogluAS, SokucuS, OzkayaU, et al. Locking plate fixation of three-and four-part proximal humeral fractures. Acta Orthop Traumatol Turc. 2010;44(2):97–104.
  1. SudkampN, BayerJ, HeppP, et al. Open reduction and internal fixation of proximal humeral fractures with use of the locking proximal humerus plate. Results of a prospective, multicenter, observational study. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2009;91(6):1320–8.

Hemiarthroplasty for Acute Proximal Humerus Fractures4

Bhavuk Garg, Prakash P Kotwal
 
Introduction
The optimal and ideal management of complex proximal humeral fractures remains controversial. Although innovations in surgical techniques as well as newer implants like locking plates have enabled orthopedic surgeons to fix more and more complex proximal humerus fractures, hemiarthroplasty still remains an often needed and valid surgical option.
Many shoulder surgeons argue that humeral head preservation is theoretically supreme. However, increased rates of osteonecrosis in cases of internal fixation compared to good outcomes of hemiarthroplasty in carefully selected elderly patients, makes the latter a reasonable and efficient solution.1-4
In 1970, Neer5 first described hemiarthroplasty for 3- and 4-part proximal humeral fractures, and today this procedure has become the preferred surgical procedure for fractures that cannot be repaired by internal fixation or when the humeral head is deemed nonviable.6
 
Indications7
Not all proximal humerus fractures can be reconstructed. Only such selected cases need hemiarthroplasty. Indications vary depending upon age. In elderly, many 4 parts, some severe 3 part fractures and most 3,4 part fracture dislocations are treated by hemiarthroplasty, while in young, they are usually attempted to treat by reconstruction. However, nonreconstructible articular surface (severe head split) or extruded anatomic neck are treated by hemiarthroplasty in young as well as elderly patients.
Whereas the indications of hemiarthroplasty in proximal humerus fracture has not changed in the last four decades, several factors related to patient (age, comorbidities, etc.), surgeon (experience, instruments, etc.) and fracture pattern must be taken into account before embarking on hemiarthroplasty in proximal humerus fractures.7
 
Surgical Technique
The surgical technique for hemiarthroplasty in proximal humeral fractures can be discussed as follows:38
Figure 4.1: Positioning of patient
Figure 4.2: Ensure adequate mobility of arm and forearm intraoperatively
 
POSITIONING AND ANESTHESIA (FIGS 4.1 AND 4.2)
General anesthesia is used. The patient is positioned on the operating room table in a semi-sitting beach-chair position; the head is rotated to the opposite side. Usually the patient sits up at an angle of approximately 45 to 50 degrees. To prevent the patient from sliding down the operating room table, a pillow is placed behind the knees and a seat belt across the patient's thighs. A towel is placed under the medial border of the scapula. The shoulder is positioned off the edge of the table so that the arm can be extended and imaged properly when needed intraoperatively.
 
Surgical Approach
 
SURGICAL APPROACH AND EXPOSURE
An extensile deltopectoral approach is used. The incision is around 15 to 20 cm in length starting from the coracoid process to deltoid insertion (Fig. 4.3).39
Figure 4.3: Deltopectoral approach
Figure 4.4: Cephalic vein is an important landmark for surgical plane
Interval between pectoralis major and deltoid is easily identified by the presence of cephalic vein (Fig. 4.4), which is reflected laterally. This is an extensile approach and can be extended distally as an anterolateral approach if there is a diaphyseal extension. The insertion of the pectoralis major is partially released for exposure. Abducting the humerus during the procedure aids in relaxing the deltoid. If excessive deltoid tension is present, a transverse division of the anterior 1 cm of the deltoid insertion distally improves exposure and, more importantly, avoids damaging the deltoid. Superiorly dissection should not go medial to coracoid process.40
Figure 4.5: Exposure of fracture fragments
 
EXPOSURE OF FRACTURE FRAGMENTS (FIG. 4.5)
The long head of biceps should be identified and isolated. The long head of the biceps tendon serves as the key landmark in separating the greater and lesser tuberosity segments. In three and four part fractures, the split in the tuberosities is located just posterior to the bicipital groove. The space formed by this fracture line is developed to gain access to the humeral head and glenohumeral joint.
A through saline lavage is given. Avoid removing any loose fragments of cancellous bone as well as the large pieces of bone for use as autogenous bone graft and for some support to the prosthesis. The humeral head is removed and is gauged to select the head implant size. It is important not to use any excessive force for humeral head removal.
 
Mobilization of Tuberosities (Fig. 4.6)
Both lesser as well as greater tuberosities are mobilized medially, laterally, superiorly and inferiorly and tagged with heavy sutures. We prefer no. 5 Ethibond suture for this. The sutures should be passed through the tendons of rotator cuff, just proximal to their insertion. This helps in avoiding any cut-through of suture from the bone.
Figure 4.6: Mobilization and tagging of tuberosities with heavy sutures
41
 
Humeral Shaft Preparation
The proximal aspect of shaft is cleared from all sides. It is important to handle the shaft carefully, especially if it is osteoporotic. Sometimes there is undisplaced fracture of the shaft, which can usually be managed by extending and external rotating the arm helps in exposing the humeral shaft.
The medullary canal is prepared with sequential reamers (Fig. 4.7). Depending upon the quality of bone or fracture extending into the shaft, cemented or cementless hemiarthroplasty can be performed. The proximal humerus shaft is prepared with drill holes to allow for tuberosity fixation (Fig. 4.8).
 
Placement of Prosthesis
Regarding placement of prosthesis, it is important to choose proper orientation, size and position of the implant (Fig. 4.9). These all involve proper adjustment of height, retroversion and size of prosthesis head.8
Figure 4.7: Sequential reaming of humeral shaft
Figure 4.8: Preparation of drill holes and passing sutures through proximal shaft of humerus
42
Figure 4.9: Prosthesis insertion
Height of prosthesis can be determined by following methods:9
  1. Calcar of proximal humerus
  2. Upper border of pectoralis major: The distance between upper border of pectoralis major and humeral head is 5 cm (Fig. 4.10).
  3. The neck of prosthesis should lie exactly at the level of supraspinatus insertion, when greater tuberosity is anatomically reduced.
  4. Tension of the biceps tendon: If too taut, denotes proud prosthesis, if slack, shows deeply seated implant.
Retroversion of prosthesis can be judged by placing the forearm in neutral position, with transepicondylar axis parallel to the trunk. The ideal retroversion of the implant should be 20 to 30 degrees. Another useful tip is that the fin of prosthesis should be just posterior to the bicipital groove (Fig. 4.11).
For humeral head size, either the removed humeral head can be measured or templating of contralateral humeral head can be done.
Figure 4.10: The distance between upper border of pectoralis major and humeral head should be 5 cm
43
Figure 4.11: Fin of prosthesis should be just posterior to the bicipital groove
After determining all the aspects, prosthesis shaft and humeral head are assimilated. This modularity has given us advantage to reciprocate the anatomy more closely. The assembled prosthesis is then inserted with or without cement, as needed.
 
Tuberosity Repair
This is an important step, which should be done meticulously. The tuberosities are sutured to each other and to the proximal shaft with sutures passing through the lateral holes of prosthetic fin (Fig. 4.12). We routinely perform bone grafting around this repair, which is usually harvested from removed humeral head (Fig. 4.13). The arm should be gently moved to check the stability of repair.
 
Wound Closure
Hemostasis is achieved. Rotator interval is closed. Wound is closed in layers over a suction drain (Fig. 4.14). A supporting arm pouch is given.
Figure 4.12: Tuberosity repair with passing of sutures through lateral fin
44
Figure 4.13: Bone grafting of tuberosity repair area
Figure 4.14: Final wound closure over drain
 
Postoperative Protocol
Passive mobilization and the pendulum exercises are begun early, usually first or second postoperative day. After healing of tuberosities, active assisted exercises can be started. Pulley and active exercises are not allowed in the first 6 weeks. At 6 weeks, if there is radiographic evidence of tuberosity healing, resistive exercises are started.8
 
Complications
Following complications may be seen:
  1. Rotator cuff dysfunction
  2. Instability
  3. Dislocation
  4. Aseptic loosening
  5. Septic loosening
  6. Periprosthetic fracture etc.
45
 
Results
Neer5 reported excellent results following arthroplasty for acute proximal humerus fractures. Bastian et al6 presented a series of 49 cases of hemiarthroplasty and suggested that hemiarthroplasty is a viable alternative in patients with osteopenic bone and/or comminuted fractures.
 
Illustrative Case
A 64-year-old farmer had a fall from tree and sustained a four-part fracture of left proximal humerus. His bones are very osteoporotic and a cemented hemiarthroplasty was performed (Fig. 4.15). At one-year follow-up, patient had no pain and a useful range of motion at left shoulder (Fig. 4.16).
Figure 4.15: Cemented hemiarthroplasty for 4 part fracture of proximal humerus
Figure 4.16: Excellent outcome at one-year follow-up
46
References
  1. KontakisG, et al. Prosthetic replacement for proximal humeral fractures. Injury Int J Care Injured. 2008;39:1345–58.
  1. RobinsonCM, PageRS, HillRM, et al. Primary hemiarthroplasty for treatment of proximal humeral fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2003;85-A:1215-23.
  1. TannerMW, CofieldRH. Prosthetic arthroplasty for fractures and fracture-dislocations of the proximal humerus. Clin Orthop Relat Res; 1983. pp. 116-28.
  1. WijgmanAJ, RoolkerW, PattTW, et al. Open reduction and internal fixation of three and four-part fractures of the proximal part of the humerus. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2002;84-A: 1919-25.
  1. NeerCS II. Displaced proximal humeral fractures. II. Treatment of three-part and four-part displacement. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1970;52:1090–103.
  1. BastianJD, HertelR. Osteosynthesis and hemiarthroplasty of fractures of the proximal humerus: outcomes in a consecutive case series. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2009;18:216–9.
  1. SirveauxF, RocheO, MoléD. Shoulder arthroplasty for acute proximal humerus fracture. Orthopaedics and Traumatology: Surgery and Research. 2010;96:683–94.
  1. MoenTC, BiglianiLU. Hemiarthroplasty for Four-Part Fractures of the Proximal Humerus. Operative Techniques in Orthopaedics. 2011;21(1):94–100.
  1. RobinsonCM. Proximal humerus fractures. In: BucholzRW, et al. Rockwood and Green's fractures in adults, 7th edn. Philadelphia: LWW;  2010. pp. 1039-105.

Reverse Shoulder Arthroplasty for Proximal Humeral Fractures5

Anders Ekelund
 
Introduction
Proximal humeral fracture is the third most common fracture in the elderly. The incidence is increasing as well as the mean age of the patient being treated for a proximal humeral fracture.1,2 The majority of these fractures are minimally displaced and can be treated conservatively (70-80%). In our institution we perform surgery in about 25% of the cases. The most commonly used classification system is the 4-part fracture classification by Neer.3,4 The four main fragments are the head, greater tuberosity, lesser tuberosity, and the shaft. The most complex fractures are the 3- and 4-part fractures. Hemiarthroplasty has been advocated for treating complex proximal humerus fractures in the elderly, but outcome has been very variable and unpredictable.5-10 In a recent prospective randomized study there were no significant differences between hemiarthroplasty and nonoperative treatment regarding Constant score, range of motion and pain.11 However, quality of life was better in patients treated with hemiarthroplasty, and there was a trend towards less pain with hemiarthroplasty. The alternative to hemiarthroplasty has been locked plating since these plates can be used to reduce and maintain reduction even in osteoporotic bone. The reported overall outcome for locked plating in 3- and 4-part fractures has been superior to hemiarthroplasty,12-15 but the incidence of complications and revision surgery have been high. In 2009 Brunner et al reported on a series of 157 patients with 3- and 4-part fractures treated with locked plating.16 There was a complication rate of 45% and revision surgery was needed in 25% of the patients. Patients older than 75 years had 3.3 times higher risk for complications. Several reports have seen similar high-risk for complications after locked plating in the elderly, such as screw cutout and secondary displacement.17-19
Today many old patients are very active and have difficulty accepting a poor shoulder function after a proximal humerus fracture. They want to go back to activities of daily living similar to the preinjury level. Since the challenge in complex proximal humerus fractures is to restore rotator cuff function, an increasing interest in using the reverse arthroplasty in complex proximal humerus fractures has been seen during recent years. Using a reverse shoulder arthroplasty the deltoid muscle alone can create stability and restore function without rotator cuff muscles. The reverse arthroplasty has been used for treating a variety of conditions with a nonfunctioning rotator cuff such as cuff-tear arthropathy, rheumatoid arthritis, failed anatomical arthroplasties, instability due to cuff deficiency, and, massive rotator cuff without osteoarthritis.20-27 Excellent pain relief and restoration of active range of motion have been consistently reported. However, if 48functional external rotation is lacking preoperatively it will not be restored by the reverse arthroplasty. Significantly better outcome was seen if the teres minor was intact compared to patients with no teres minor.28 In these cases adding a transfer of lattissimus dorsi or a combination of lattissimus dorsi and teres major have been advocated and shown to improve external rotation.29,30 It, therefore, seems logical to repair the posterior rotator cuff muscles in fracture cases in order to restore functional external rotation. The importance of the subscapularis function in association with a reverse arthroplasty is unclear. Edwards et al found a higher risk for dislocation of a reverse arthroplasty if the subscapularis was missing, while Clark et al did not find such a correlation.31,32 However, the most important stabilizing factor of the reverse arthroplasty is the compressive force generated by the soft tissue (deltoid muscle and the remnants of the rotator cuff).33 Therefore, I believe it is important to reconstruct the anterior and posterior cuff by reattaching the tuberosities with the technique described below.
 
Preoperative Evaluation
Preoperative evaluation of the function of the plexus brachialis, including the axillary nerve, is important. Clinical examination is sufficient and an electrophysiological test is usually not indicated. In complex proximal humeral fractures plain radiographs and CT scan are commonly performed. This gives the treating surgeon a possibility to evaluate the fracture system, the glenoid and the status of the rotator cuff muscles. On several occasions I have found that the proximal humeral fracture has been associated with a rim fracture of the glenoid, which reduced the surface area of the glenoid and therefore, needed to be treated. Ideally the surgery should be performed within 7 days from the trauma to facilitate mobilization and reattachment of the tuberosities.
 
INDICATION
My indication for using the reverse arthroplasty in proximal humerus fracture is complex 3-part and 4-part fractures in patients older than 75 years. If significant cuff deficiency is seen during surgery or detected on preoperative CT scan in patients between 65 and 75 years of age a reverse arthroplasty is considered, but decision process depends on the general health and activity level of the patient. In our algorithm for proximal humeral fractures open reduction and internal fixation with a locked plate is attempted in patients younger than 75 years and if that is not possible a hemiarthroplasty is used.
 
REVERSE SHOULDER ARTHROPLASTY AND CHOICE OF IMPLANT
There are many different designs available today, but they are all based on the original ideas of Grammont's Delta reverse design.34 There is a large glenoid hemisphere and a small humeral cup with a nonanatomical inclination angle of 155 degrees. The center of rotation is medialized, which improves the lever arm for the deltoid muscle and recruits more deltoid muscle fibers for abduction. Since the humerus is lowered it restores the length of the deltoid muscle, and actually increases the tension of the deltoid muscle. This design has proven to restore biomechanical balance in cuff deficient shoulders.34 The glenoid component has noncemented fixation with a central peg and 4 screws. The screws can create compression and angle stability. This type of fixation has been very reliable and the author has not seen any glenoid loosening in almost 600 cases of Delta Xtend since 2006.
In fracture cases I always use the cemented monobloc humeral component with the smaller proximal size (size 1) in order to have room for the tuberosities (Fig. 5.1). In almost all cases the stem has been size 10, epiphysis 1. On the glenoid side I have used the bigger glenosphere (size 42) in all cases to maximize stability and range of motion.49
Figure 5.1: Delta Xtend monobloc reverse shoulder arthroplasty (DePuy, Warsaw, IN, USA)
Figure 5.2: Patient in beach chair position and surgical field draped and covered with an incision drape
 
SURGICAL TECHNIQUE DELTA XTEND™ (DEPUY, WARSAW, IN, USA)
I prefer to do the surgery under combined general anesthesia and ultrasound guided interscalene block with the patient in the beach chair position (Fig. 5.2). The arm on the injured side should be lateral of the edge of the table in order to be able to extend the arm in the posterior direction to facilitate reaming of the humerus. This is particularly important if the surgery is performed through the deltopectoral approach. The sterile field should include the shoulder and the upper arm down to approximately 10 centimeters above the elbow. An antimicrobial incision drape (Ioban™, 3M, St Paul, MN, USA) is routinely used to reduce the risk for infection. It is especially important to cover the skin in the axilla. Half an hour before the surgery 2 gram of cloxacillin 50(Ekvacillin®, Astra Zeneca, Södertälje, Sweden) is given intravenously as prophylaxis, followed by two more injections, 8 and 16 hours, after surgery.
Figure 5.3: Skin incision from anterior-posterior marked over the lateral part of acromion
The author also routinely gives tranexamic acid (Cyklokapron®, MEDA, Solna, Sweden) 10 mg/kg bodyweight 30 minutes before surgery to reduce bleeding.
The surgery can be performed through a deltopectoral approach or a supero-lateral deltoid splitting approach. I prefer the deltoid splitting approach. It is very easy and gives good access to the glenoid and makes tuberosity reconstruction easier. However, the procedure can be done through the classic deltopectoral approach using the same technique.
 
SUPERO-LATERAL APPROACH
The skin incision is in the anterior-posterior direction centered over the lateral part of the acromion, approximately 5 millimeter from the lateral margin. It starts posteriorly over the most posterior part of the acromion and ends 4 to 5 cm anterior of the tip of the acromion (Fig. 5.3). The total length of the incision is normally 8 to 10 cm, but can be extended if necessary. Subcutaneous dissection in the medial and lateral direction makes it possible to fold the medial and lateral skinfolds away from the operative field and they are held in this position with stay sutures. The deltoid release/splitting starts at the level of the AC-joint approximately 5 mm posterior of the tip of the acromion and is extended in the lateral direction about 4 cm lateral of the acromion (further extension laterally can be performed, but the axillary nerve is running on the undersurface of the deltoid muscle in this region and has to be protected). The deltoid can be released from the tip of the acromion with electrocautery or taken down with a small piece of bone from the acromion. The author prefers to take 5 to 6 mm of the tip of the acromion together with the deltoid insertion anteriorly in order to protect the tendon during surgery and to facilitate the repair at the end of the procedure. The coracoacromial ligament is released to create more room.
A self-holding retractor is placed in the deltoid split, a Gelpi retractor is my favorite (Fig. 5.4), and the fracture hematoma is evacuated. The fracture site can now be evaluated. The tuberosity fragments are first identified. The head fragment is removed and kept as a source for bone graft.51
Figure 5.4: A self-holding retractor is shown which facilitates surgery (Gelpi-type)
Figure 5.5: The supraspinatus tendon is excised using electrocautery or a knife
A tenotomy of the long head of the biceps is performed. Stay sutures (no 2 Orthocord (DePuy Mitek, Raynham, MN, USA) or similar) are placed close to the cuff insertion of the lesser and greater tuberosity. The stay suture in the greater tuberosity should be placed in the infraspinatus tendon insertion. The supraspinatus tendon is excised by releasing it from the insertion on the greater tuberosity using electrocautery and cutting it at the muscle-tendon junction (Fig. 5.5). The lesser tuberosity with the insertion of the subscapularis and the greater tuberosity with the insertion of the infraspinatus and teres minor are mobilized. If the greater tuberosity is fragmented into several pieces it may be necessary to place two or more stay sutures to control the major fragments.
The self-holding retractor is now placed deeper so that the tuberosity fragments are held apart creating a good view of the glenoid. The proximal end of the shaft is identified and in most cases it is displaced anterior-medially. A release of the soft tissues of the proximal 1.5 cm of the shaft is recommended to facilitate the tuberosity reconstruction.52
Figure 5.6: The forked glenoid retractor in place
Figure 5.7: The inferior part of the glenoid forming a circle is identified after adequate releases and cartilage removal. The guidepin should be placed in the center of that circle
Two drill holes are made in the shaft anteriorly (one in the area of the bicipital groove and one more anteriorly) and two drill holes are made in the shaft laterally. These 4 drill holes are placed 5 to 7 mm away from the fracture line.
Reaming of the shaft is performed and in most cases it will be a size 10 stem.
 
GLENOID PREPARATION
A 360 degree release around the glenoid is performed and the cartilage and labrum is removed. The inferior bony pillar of scapula is identified as well as the base of the coracoid process. The inferior pillar is located slightly posterior (7 o'clock position in a right shoulder). The specific forked glenoid retractor is placed inferiorly below the glenoid with one prong on each side of the inferior bony pillar and pushed downward to displace the shaft (Fig. 5.6). The lower part of the glenoid is forming a circle (Fig. 5.7) and with the specific glenoid guide instrument a guidepin is drilled into the center of this inferior circle (Fig. 5.8).
Figure 5.8: The guidepin in place with the metaglene guide as low as possible
53
Figure 5.9: Intraoperative picture of the guidepin in place
The inferior edge of the metaglene component should follow the inferior border of the glenoid. The guidepin should be placed perpendicular to the surface of the glenoid. It is particularly important to avoid a superior tilt of the guidepin (Fig. 5.9). Once the guidepin is in a good position the reaming is done. The small circular reamer creates a surface for the metaglene. The hard subchondral bone plate should be maintained i.e. only minimal reaming is necessary. This is followed by using the hand held reamer to create room for the glenosphere superiorly. The central hole is then drilled followed by removal of the guidepin. Many times the guidepin will be removed together with the drill. The metaglene component is impacted and rotated so that the inferior hole is in line with the inferior pillar.
Figure 5.10: The hole for the inferior screw is drilled using the drill guide, aiming for the inferior bony pillar
54
Figure 5.11: The locking screw is placed over the guidepin
Figure 5.12: The inferior locking screw is placed, but not fully tightened
Using the guide system the hole for the inferior screw is drilled (Fig. 5.10). I use the drill-push technique, i.e. I drill just a little distance into scapula and then carefully push the drill inward in order to feel that there is a bony stop at the bottom. Then drilling is done a little further followed by pushing the drill inward to feel that there is still a bottom in the hole. These steps are repeated until a hole for a 42 mm screw has been created. A 36 mm screw is acceptable, but I prefer a 42 mm in the inferior hole. With this technique it is possible to be sure that there is bone at the bottom of the drill hole i.e. the screw is inside the scapula pillar. If the drill exits the bone before a 36 mm hole is created there are several adjustments that can be performed. The first step is to palpate the inferior pillar again and to look at the plain radiographs. If the patient has a prominent long scapular neck a more horizontal drilling usually results in a deeper drill hole inside scapula. It is also possible to rotate the metaglene to place the inferior hole slightly more posterior or anterior and then aim the drill towards the inferior pillar. The guidepin for the screw is placed into the drill hole and by pushing this pin into the hole the surgeon can feel that there is a stop at the bottom i.e. the drill hole is all inside the bone. The self-tapping locking screw is placed over the guidewire (Fig. 5.11). The screw should not be tightened completely since this can create a tilting of the metaglene component if the bone is osteoporotic (Fig. 5.12). The superior drill hole is done with the same technique aiming at the base of the coracoid process. This screw is bicortical, thus the drill hole should exit through the distal cortex. To avoid placing a screw that is too long I prefer to drill this hole until I hit the second more distal cortex. I measure the distance at this stage. The second cortex is then drilled and a locking screw 5 mm longer than the previous measurement is used. This technique avoids the risk of placing a too long screw in this position, which could injure the suprascapular nerve. A guidewire is placed in the superior hole and a locking screw (usually 30 or 36 mm) introduced. Once the superior screw is almost fully seated the inferior screw is completely tightened followed by tightening of the small locking screw. This creates compression followed by locking the screw to the metaglene component. The same steps are done with the superior screw. The anterior and posterior screws are introduced and these are usually 18 mm nonlocking screws. If one or more of these drill holes are 24 mm or more I prefer to use locking screws in these holes, thus as many locking screws as possible is recommended (Fig. 5.13).
 
HUMERAL INSERTION AND IMPLANT SELECTION
A 42 mm trial glenosphere is placed on the metaglene and a monobloc, epiphysis size 1 humeral component (stem size according to the last reamer used, usually size 10) is placed into the shaft. I prefer to use the smaller size epiphyseal component to maximize the space available for the tuberosities. A trial polyethylene insert 42 +3 is placed on top of the humeral component. I place the humeral component is neutral version in relation to the forearm i.e. no ante- or retroversion. The Delta Xtend monobloc stem is designed so that in a standard 3-4 part fracture without comminution below the surgical neck the 55humeral component can be pushed down as far as possible.
Figure 5.13: An intraoperative picture showing all 4 screws in place. Note that they are all fully seated into the metaglene
The proximal epiphyseal part of the humeral component will come against the proximal end of the shaft and automatically determine the correct height of the implant. The soft tissue balance can later be adjusted using a 9 mm spacer and different heights of the polyethylene inserts. A trial reduction is performed to see that the humeral component is positioned correctly without any lateral gap between the glenosphere and the insert. At this time I do not test stability in too much detail.
The trial components are removed. Two strong sutures are placed in the anterior holes of the shaft and two in the lateral holes (No 2 Orthocord sutures or similar) (Fig. 5.16). These sutures are later used for tuberosity fixation. A standard 42 mm glenosphere is placed on the metaglene. I routinely use a small disk of collagen impregnated with gentamicin (Collatamp®) inside the glenosphere to fill the dead space and to create additional prophylaxis against infection (Fig. 5.14). The central screw is tightened.
Figure 5.14: The gentamicin impregnated collagen in place inside the glenosphere
56
Figure 5.15: Definite glenosphere in place and trial reduction performed with the trial humeral stem and trial inserts
Figure 5.16: Schematic picture over suture placement for tuberosity reconstruction. Suture A: Horizontal suture through the medial hole of the humeral component. Suture B: Shaft suture used to fix the greater tuberosity (GT) with an overlap. Suture C: Shaft suture used to fix the lesser tuberosity (LT) with an overlap
The screwdriver removed and the impactor is used to impact the glenosphere onto the metaglene, followed by further tightening of the central screw. These steps are repeated until the glenosphere is fully seated onto the metaglene.
A cement restrictor/plug is introduced into the humeral shaft. Antibiotic loaded cement prepared and introduced into the humeral medullary canal after rinsing. The definite humeral component is inserted in neutral position and pushed down until it is seated against the surgical neck. Before inserting the humeral component another strong suture (No 2 Orthocord or similar) should be placed into the medial hole of the humeral component. This suture will be the horizontal cerclage for tuberosity fixation. Excess cement removed.
When the cement has cured the soft tissue balancing is performed. In most cases a standard 42 +6 or 42 +9 insert will create adequate stability, but sometimes a 9 mm spacer is also needed. I do not use the high mobility inserts in fractures cases since they results in less stability. The stability is tested in several steps (Fig. 5.15). After reduction I pull the arm downwards and there should be no gapping between the components. Then I place the arm in extension and external rotation. No dislocation should occur and only minimal anterior gapping between the components seen. The last step is to place the arm in maximal adduction and no or only minimal (1-2 mm) lateral gapping between the components should occur. The definite components are inserted and the shoulder joint reduced.
The last step is to reattach the tuberosities (Fig. 5.16). Several different techniques have been described. I believe it is important to reattach the tuberosities to create better stability, to maintain the function of the posterior rotator cuff for external rotation, and to keep the subscapularis in order to maximize the capacity for internal rotation. Since the supraspinatus tendon has been excised it is possible to place the tuberosity fragments more inferiorly creating on overlap in relation to the humeral shaft. This result in more bone to bone contact i.e. better conditions for healing and the technique has been successfully used by the author for about 10 years.
57Refixation of the tuberosities start with the suture through the medial hole (Fig. 5.16 suture A). The posterior end of this suture is placed through the infraspinatus insertion from inside-out and the anterior end of the suture is placed in a similar fashion through the insertion of the subscapularis. These suture ends are now clamped and will be the last suture to tie.
The two lateral shaft sutures are now placed through the inferior part of the greater tuberosity through the bone (6-7 mm from the inferior border) from inside-out (Fig. 5.16 sutures marked B). The two suture ends from the more posterior hole will be placed in the posterior part of the tuberosity and the suture ends from the anterior shaft hole will be placed through the tuberosity more anteriorly. The two shaft sutures coming out through the more anterior shaft holes are placed in a similar fashion through the lesser tuberosity (Fig. 5.16 sutures marked C). Usually these sutures can be placed through the bone of the tuberosities using a strong needle, but occasionally drilling is necessary. Bone graft is taken from the cancellous bone of the humeral head. The greater tuberosity fragment is placed in the correct position by pulling on the stay suture. The two shaft sutures are tied (separately) which will create an overlap and compression between the inferior part of the tuberosity and the shaft. Bone graft is placed anterior to the greater tuberosity against the implant before the lesser tuberosity is reduced and the two anterior sutures tied to create overlap and compression between the lesser tuberosity and the shaft. It can sometimes be helpful to place a suture through the bone of the superior part of the greater and lesser tuberosity close to the vertical fracture line between the tuberosities and tie it before the anterior shaft sutures are tied. This step reduces and holds the lesser tuberosity in a good position when the lesser tuberosity is compressed and fixed against the shaft. Finally the horizontal suture (previously clamped) (suture A in Figure 5.16) through the medial hole of the humeral component is tied creating additional stability (Fig. 5.17). One or both of the stay sutures can, if necessary be used for additional fixation between the tuberosities. If not needed they are removed.
The deltoid with the small bony piece is reattached to the acromion. The sutures are placed through the acromion and around the bony fragment in the deltoid to create a solid repair. A drain without suction is placed with the tip deep in the wound and removed the morning after surgery. The lateral deltoid split is closed with absorbable sutures. I prefer using subcutaneous and intracutaneous sutures for closing the wound to create a nicer scar and avoiding the need for suture removal.
Figure 5.17: Final construct after all the sutures have been tied
58
 
Postoperative Management
The operated arm is placed in a sling. Elbow and hand exercises are started the day after surgery. Two weeks after surgery passive range of motion with elevation to 70 degrees, external rotation to neutral, and internal rotation to the buttock is initiated. Three to four weeks after surgery assisted active excercises are started and after 5 to 6 weeks free active rehabilitation is allowed. Postoperative radiographs are taken under fluoroscopic control 2 days after surgery to get a perfect A-P projection. Routine follow- up with new radiographs are done 3 months after surgery.
 
Tips and Pearls
  • It is easier to mobilize and reattach the tuberosities if the surgery is performed within the first week after trauma.
  • Analyze the plain radiographs preoperatively to see the shape of the scapular anatomy. If there is a long neck, the inferior screw has to be more horizontal.
  • Put the metaglene as low as possible. The metaglene should follow the inferior edge of the glenoid. When the glenosphere is attached an inferior overhang will be created to minimize notching.
  • Always try to use a large glenosphere in order to increase stability and range of motion.
  • Adequate releases around the glenoid is important to create room for the humeral component. In maximum adduction there should be minimal gapping between components laterally.
  • If there is poor soft tissue tensioning lengthening the system with a thicker insert or adding a 9 mm spacer is usually sufficient to create good stability.
  • If there is metaphyseal comminution below the surgical neck soft tissue balancing is more challenging and the fracture jig that can hold the implant at a specific height can be helpful. In such cases a deltopectoral approach is preferable.
  • If the glenoid is deficient the humeral head can be used as a structural graft to reconstruct the glenoid.
 
Results
There are a few reports on the outcome after using the reverse arthroplasty in proximal humerus fractures in the elderly.35-44 Outcome and complication rates vary considerably as well as surgical technique. Bufquin et al repaired the tuberosities while Cazeneuve et al excised the tuberosities in most cases. Removing the tuberosities means removing the posterior rotator cuff muscles which are the main providers for functional external rotation. There are several reports showing inferior outcome after reverse arthroplasty in patients with cuff tear arthropathy if the infraspinatus and teres minor were missing.26,28 To improve functional external rotation by adding lattissimus dorsi/teres major transfers have been recommended in such cases. In order to restore functional external rotation in fractures cases the author believes it is important to repair the posterior cuff. This is supported by a recent paper where Galinet et al found that external rotation and Constant score were significant better if the tuberosities healed in an anatomic position.45
In 2006 Cazeneuve et al reported the results of a series of 23 patients treated with a reverse arthroplasty for acute proximal humerus fractures.37 Mean age of the patients was 75 years and the tuberosities were reconstructed in only 5 patients. Sixteen patients were available for follow-up after a mean 86 months. Constant score was 60 (compared to 83 in the contralateral side). All patients, except two revision cases (infection and 59dislocation), achieved more than 120 degrees of active forward elevation. External rotation was poor, but better in the cases where reconstruction of the tuberosities had been performed.
In 2007 Bufquin et al reported on 43 patients treated with a reverse arthroplasty for acute 3- and 4-part fractures of the proximal humerus.36 All patients, except two, were evaluated after a mean of 22 months. Mean age was 78 years (65-97). The tuberosities were reconstructed in 36 patients, but the supraspinatus and biceps tendons divided. Mean Constant score at follow-up was 44 and mean active forward elevation 97 degrees. The external rotation was satisfactory and better in cases where the greater tuberosity has healed in a good position. Patients older than 75 years had a tendency for inferior results compared to patients younger than 75 years. There were three patients with reflex sympathetic dystrophy, five with neurological complications, and one dislocation.
In a retrospective study by Galinet et al of 40 patients with acute proximal humerus fractures the outcome of hemiarthroplasty and reverse arthroplasty were analyzed.40 The Constant score in the reverse arthroplasty group was 53 compared to 39 in the hemiarthroplasty. Active range of motion was also better in the reverse group, elevation 91 degrees compared to 60 degrees. External rotation was slightly better in the hemiarthroplasty group, but it is important to note that the tuberosities were removed in the reverse group except in one case.
In a prospective study by Sirvaux et al of 15 cases with minimal follow-up of 2 years (mean age 78 years) the Constant score was 55 and mean active elevation 107 degrees.9 This series was compared to a series of hemiarthroplasty and the mean outcome was similar. However, the distribution of the results was different in favor for the reverse arthroplasty. In the reverse group all, but one patient, could elevate the operated arm to 90 degrees or more, while only 50% of the hemiarthroplasty patients could reach that level.
Boyle at al reported on the results from the New Zealand Joint Registry regarding the functional outcome after reverse arthroplasty or hemiarthroplasty in patients with acute proximal humerus fractures.35 There were 313 hemiarthroplasties and 55 reverse arthroplasties. The reverse arthroplasty patients were significantly older (80 years vs 72 years) and had significantly better Oxford Shoulder Score at five years.
One of the advantages with the reverse arthroplasty is that even when the tuberosities do not heal the function can be quite good, except for external rotation, and most patients are painfree.
 
Complications
The most important reported complications have been dislocation, infection, and tuberosity nonunions.46 However, no infections, dislocation or loosening have been seen and no revision surgery performed in the author's series of over 100 Delta Xtend reverse arthroplasty in patients with acute proximal humeral fractures since 2006.
 
Illustrative Case
A 75 years old healthy male sustained a comminuted proximal humeral fracture on the right side (Figs 5.18A to D). Plain radiographs and a CT scan were performed and it was decided that a reverse arthroplasty would be the best treatment. Postoperative radiographs show good position of implant with an inferior overhang of the glenosphere and tuberosities reattached with a bony overlap to the shaft. Functional outcome excellent at 6 months.60
Figures 5.18A to D: A 75 years old right handed male sustaining a comminuted fracture of his right shoulder. (A and B) Preoperative radiographs and CT scans are shown; (C) Postoperative radiographs shows good position of implant and screws. The tuberosities have been reattached with an overlap against the shaft; (D) The patient had excellent function at 6 months
 
Summary
Complex proximal humeral fractures in the elderly are a challenge to treat. Traditional methods of managing these fractures with hemiarthroplasty or locked plating have been associated with unpredictable outcome and a high incidence of complications and revision surgery. Hemiarthroplasty has shown to give similar outcome as nonoperative treatment. One of the main reasons for failure of hemiarthroplasties has been secondary displacement and resorption of the tuberosity resulting in a nonfunctioning rotator cuff. Since the reverse arthroplasty does not rely on the function of the rotator cuff to the same extent as an anatomical arthroplasty it offers an attractive alternative in complex fractures of the proximal humerus in older patients. Published results have shown encouraging results and the author have routinely used the Delta reverse arthroplasty for treating complex 3-4 part proximal humerus fractures in patients older than 75 years since 1998. The outcome is superior to our previous results with hemiarthroplasty and locked plating and more predictable.10,16
References
  1. HirzingerC, TauberM, ReschH. Proximal humerus fracture:new aspects in epidemiology, fracture morphology, and diagnosis. Unfallchirurg. 2011;114:1051–8.
  1. PalvanenM, KannusP, NiemiS, ParkkariJ. Update in the epidemiology of proximal humeral fractures. Clin Orthop Rel Res. 2006;442:87–92.
  1. NeerCS. Displaced proximal humeral fractures. Classification and evaluation. J Bone Joint Surg. 1970;52:1077–89.
  1. NeerCS. Four-segment classification of proximal humeral fractures:purpose and reliable use. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2002;11:389–400.
  1. BoileauP, KrishnanSG, TinsiL. Tuberosity malposition and migration: reasons for poor outcomes after hemiarthroplasty for displaced fractures of the proximal humerus. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2002;11:401–12.
  1. GreenA, BarnardWL, LimbirdRS. Humeral head replacement for acute, four-part proximal humerus fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 1993;2:249–54.
  1. KontakisG, KoutrasC, Tosounidis,Giannoudis. Early management of proximal humeral fractures with hemiarthroplasty. J Bone Joint Surg 2008;90-B:1407-13.
  1. RobinsonCM, PageRS, HillRMF, et al. Primary hemiarthroplasty for the treatment of proximal humeral fractures. J Bone Joint Surg. 2003;85-A:1215-23.
  1. SirveauxF, RocheO, MoléD. Shoulder arthroplasty for acute proximal humerus fracture (Review) Orthopaedics and Traumatology: Surgery and Research. 2010;96:683–94.
  1. WretenbergP, EkelundA. Acute hemiarthroplasty after proximal humerus fractures in old patients: a retrospective evaluation of 18 patients followed for 2-7 years. Acta Orthop Scand. 1997;68:121–3.
  1. OlerudP, AhrengartL, PonzerS et al. Hemiarthroplasty versus nonoperative treatment of displaced 4-part proximal humeral fractures in elderly patients: a randomized controlled trial. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2011;20:1025–33.
  1. SolbergBD, MoonCN, FrancoDP et al. Locked plating of 3-and 4-part fractures in older patients: the effect of initial fracture pattern and outcome. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23:113–9.
  1. SproulRC, IyengarJJ, DevcicZ, FeeleyBT. Asystematic review of locking plate fixation of proximal humerus fractures. Injury. 2011;42:408–13.
  1. SudkampN, BayerJ, Hepp et al. Open reduction and internal fixation of proximal humeral fractures with the use of the locking proximal humerus plate. J Bone Joint Surg. 2009;91-A:1320-8.
  1. ThanasasC, KontakisG, AngoulesA, et al. Treatment of proximal humerus fractures with locking plates: a systematic review. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2009;18:837–44.
  1. BrunnerF, SommerC, BahrsC, et al. Open reduction and internal fixation of proximal humerus fractures using a proximal humeral locked plate: a prospective multicenter analysis. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23:163–72.
  1. KrappingerD, BizzottoN, RiedmanS, et al. Predicting failure after surgical fixation of proximal humerus fractures. Injury. 2011;42:1283–8.
  1. OwsleyKC, GorcycaJT. Displacement/ screw cutout after open reduction and locked plate fixation of humerus fractures. J Bone Joint Surg. 2008;90:233–40.
  1. SchliemannB, SiemoneitJ, TheisenC, et al. Complex fractures of the proximal humerus in the elderly-outcome and complications after locking plate fixation. Musculoskelet Surg. 2012;96(suppl 1):S3–11.
  1. BaulotE, ChabernaudD, GrammontP. Resultats de la prothèse inverse de Grammont pour omarthroses associées à de grande destructions de la coffie. A propos de 16 cas: Acta Ortop Belgica. 1995;61:112–9.
  1. BoileauP, WatkinsonD, HatzidakisAM, HovorkaI. Neer Award 2005: The Grammont reverse shoulder prosthesis: Results in cuff tear arthritis, fracture sequele, and revision arthroplasty. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2006;15:527–40.
  1. EkelundA, NybergR. Can reverse shoulder arthroplasty be used with few complications in rheumatoid arthritis? Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2011;469:2483–8.
  1. GrammontPM, BaulotE. Delta shoulder prosthesis for rotator cuff rupture. Orthopaedics. 1993;16:65–8.
  1. SeebauerL, WalterW, KeylW. Die Inverse Schulter endoprosthese zur behandlung der defektarthropathie. Operative Orthopädie und traumatologie. 2005;1:1–24.
  1. WernerCML, SteinmanPA, GilbartM, GerberC. Treatment of painful pseudoparesis due to irreparable rotator cuff dysfunction with the Delta III reverse-ball-and-socket total shoulder prosthesis. J Bone Joint Surg. 2005;87-A:1476-86.
  1. WalchG, BoileauP, MoléD, etal (Eds). Reverse shoulder arthroplasty. Montpellier: Sauramps medical,  2006.
  1. WallB, Nové-JosserandL, O'ConnorP, EdwardsTB, WalshG. Reverse total shoulder arthroplasty: A review of results according to etiology. J Bone Joint Surg. 2007;89:1476–85.
  1. SimovitchRW, HelmyN, ZumsteinMA, GerberC. Impact of fatty infiltration of teres minor muscle on the outcome of reverse total shoulder arthroplasty. J Bone Joint Surg. 2007;89:934–9.
  1. BoileauP, RumianAP, ZumsteinMA. Reversed shoulder arthroplasty with modified LÉpiscopo for combined loss of active elevation and external rotation. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2012;19:20–30.
  1. GerberC, PenningtonSD, LingenfelterEJ. Reverse Delta-III total shoulder replacement combined with lattissimus dorsi transfer. A preliminary report. J Bone Joint Surg. 2007;89:940–7.
  1. EdwardsTB, WilliamsMD, LabriolaJE, et al. Subscapularis insufficiency and the risk of shoulder dislocation after reverse shoulder arthroplasty. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2009;18:892–6.
  1. ClarkJC, RitchieJ, SongFS, KissenberthMJ, TolanSJ, HartND, HawkinsRJ. Complication rates, dislocation, pain, and postoperative range of motion after reverse shoulder arthroplasty in patients with and without repair of the subscapularis. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2012;21: 36–41.
  1. GutiérrezS, KellerTS, LevyJC, LeeWE, LuoZP. Hierarchy of stability factors in reverse shoulder arthroplasty. Clin Orthop Rel Res. 2008;466:670–6.
  1. BoileauP, WatkinsonDJ, HatzidakisAM, et al. Grammont reverse prosthesis: design, rationale, and biomechanics. 2005;14:147S–61S.
  1. BoyleMJ, YounSM, FramptonCM, BallCM. Functional outcomes of reverse shoulder arthroplasty compared with hemiarthroplasty for acute proximal humeral fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg 2012, Epub ahead of print.
  1. BufquinT, HersanA, HubertL, Massin. Reverse shoulder arthroplasty for the treatment of three-and four-part fractures of the proximal humerus in the elderly. J Bone Joint Surg. 2007;89-B:516-20.
  1. CazeneuveJF, Cristofari. Grammont reversed prosthesis for acute complex fracture of the proximal humerus in an elderly population with 5 to 12 years follow-up (In French). Revue de chir orthop. 2006;92:543–8.
  1. CazeneuveJF, CristofariDJ. Delta III reverse shoulder arthroplasty: radiological outcome for acute complex fractures of the proximal humerus in elderly patients. Orthopaedics and Traumatology: surgery and research. 2009;95:325–9.
  1. CazeneuveJF, CristofariDJ. The reverse shoulder prosthesis in the treatment of fractures of the proximal humerus in the elderly. J Bone Joint Surg. 2010;92-B:535-9.
  1. GalinetD, ClappazP, GarbuioP, et al. Three or four parts complex proximal humerus fractures: Hemiarthroplasty versus reverse prosthesis: A comparative study of 40 cases. Orthopaedics and Traumatology: Surgery and Research. 2009;95:48–55.
  1. KleinM, JuschkaM, HinkenjannB, et al. Treatment of comminuted fractures of the proximal humerus in elderly patients with the Delta III reverse shoulder prosthesis. Orthop Trauma. 2008;22:698–703.
  1. LenarzC, ShishaniY, McCrumC, et al. Is reverse shoulder arthroplasty appropriate for the treatment of fractures in the older patient? Clin Orthop Rel Res. 2011;469:3324–31.
  1. YoungSW, SegalBS, TurnerPC, et al. Comparison of functional outcomes of reverse shoulder arthroplasty versus hemiarthroplasty in the primary treatment of acute proximal humerus fracture. ANZ J Surg. 2010;80:789–93.
  1. WallB, WalchG. Reverse shoulder arthroplasty for the treatment of proximal humeral fractures. Hand Clin. 2007;23:425–30.
  1. GalinetD, AdamA, GasseN, et al. Improvement in shoulder rotation in complex shoulder fractures treated by reverse shoulder arthroplasty. J Shoulder Elbow Surg 2012 Epub ahead of print.
  1. ZumsteinMA, PinedoM, OldJ, BoileauP. Problems, complications, reoperations, and revisions in reverse total shoulder replacement. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2011;20:146–57.

Distal Humeral Fractures: LCP with Olecranon Osteotomy6

Frankie Leung, Chan Chi-Fat
 
Introduction
Fractures of the distal humerus present challenges to the orthopedic surgeons. The aim of treatment is anatomical restoration of the joint surface to prevent arthritic change, as well as rigid internal fixation to allow early range of motion exercises. The difficulties lie in the complex anatomy of the distal humerus, as well as the problems of fracture comminution and possible intra-articular involvement. The small distal articular fragments offer little room for screw purchase. Nevertheless it is crucial that a stable fixation allowing early joint motion is achieved at the end of the surgery. In treating elderly distal humeral fractures, the quality of fixation is further compromised by pre-existing osteoporosis.
Locking compression plate has improved fixation in osteoporotic bone over conventional non-locking plate and there are studies to show improved outcomes by using this plating system in osteoporotic fracture. The device is particular useful in fixing the distal humeral fracture.
 
Classification
The most common classification used for distal humerus fractures is AO/ASIF or Müller's classification, which can be described as follows:
Type 13 A–Extra articular fracture
A1–Apophyseal avulsion
A2–Metaphyseal simple
A3–Metaphyseal multifragmentary
Type 13 B–Partial articular fracture
B1–Sagittal lateral condyle
B2–Sagittal medial condyle
B3–Frontal
Type 13 C–Complete articular fractures
C1–Articular simple, metaphyseal simple
C2–Articular simple, metaphyseal multifragmentary
C3–Articular, multifragmentary.
 
INDICATIONS
Displaced intra-articular distal humerus fractures in adults.64
 
CONTRAINDICATIONS
  1. Medically unstable patients
  2. Active infection
  3. Excessive comminution
  4. Olecranon osteotomy is also contraindicated in cases, in which conversion to total elbow arthroplasty may be needed.
 
Surgical Technique
 
ANESTHESIA
The operation is performed under general anesthesia with or without regional block. Antibiotics prophylaxis with first generation cephalosporin is recommended.
 
POSITION–NEED FOR INTRAOPERATIVE IMAGING
The patient can be put in a prone position or a lateral decubitus position with the arm supported (Fig. 6.1). Care is taken to pad and protect all bony prominences. A pneumatic tourniquet is used before preparation and draping for a blood-less field. For more extensive fractures or larger arm, a sterile tourniquet should be used to minimize the compromise on the size of the prepared field.
 
APPROACH/EXPOSURE
A midline posterior incision is made curving around the tip of the olecranon to avoid making a scar directly on it (Fig. 6.2).
The incision should be down to the triceps aponeurosis with a full thickness skin flap on both sides. The ulnar nerve is identified medial to the humerus and it is carefully exposed and slinged with cotton loop. The nerve should be handled very gently and forceful retraction should be avoided. If anterior transposition of the ulnar nerve is planned, the cubital tunnel should be adequately released so that the nerve is free from any kinking after transposition.
In intra-articular fractures especially those of type C2 and C3 fracture, a full exposure of the distal articular surface requires an olecranon osteotomy. Muscle and soft tissue are dissected along both sides of the proximal olecranon to identify the joint surface.
Figure 6.1: The lateral position of the patient with a radiolucent arm support
Figure 6.2: Surface markings and planned incision
65
Figures 6.3A to C: Chevron osteotomy of the olecranon
An anconeus flap transolecranon approach, which preserves anconeus innervation and blood supply, can also be used. Olecranon osteotomy can be done as a Chevron shape or as a straight transverse fashion about two centimeters from the tip of the olecranon with a thin oscillating saw (Figs 6.3A to C). This centers the osteotomy in the mid portion of the greater sigmoid notch, which contains minimal articular cartilage. The final cut into the joint surface is made with a sharp, narrow osteotome to avoid taking a cut onto the joint surface. In addition, this kind of controlled fracture of the olecranon which contains an interdigitation, is a key to an accurate reduction at the end of the procedure. Thick osteotomes should not be used because anatomic reduction will not be achieved and the fragments will be overcompressed. The olecranon fragment is then retracted proximally and the distal humerus is exposed (Fig. 6.4)
 
REDUCTION TECHNIQUES
Once the fracture configuration is confirmed, the aim is to reduce the articular fracture in anatomical position and then to reduce the articular block to the shaft in corrected alignment. The joint surface is restored first. The fragment can be manipulated with a reduction forceps or joystick K-wires. 3.5 mm cortical screw or 4.0 mm cancellous lag screw are used to provide a firm hold of the articular fragment (Fig. 6.5).
However, in case of fracture comminution, there is a risk of overcompressing the fragment, which will result in a narrowing of the trochlea. A position screw without compression or locking head screw through the plate should be used in these situations.
Figure 6.4: The fracture is exposed after the olecranon fragment is retracted proximally
66
Figure 6.5: Reconstruction and fixation of articular block with lag screw
Figure 6.6: Temporary fixation with K-wires
In some other conditions, the intra-articular fracture may extend in coronal or sagittal planes. In these cases, a headless screw like Herbert screw or threaded K-wires which are buried under the articular surface can be used. Once the distal articular fragments are assembled, they are repositioned and reduced onto the end of the humeral shaft. The reduction is temporarily held with 1.6 mm K-wires (Fig. 6.6). The final alignment of reduction is checked under direct vision or with the help of the image intensifier before definitive fixation is performed.
 
FRACTURE STABILIZATION/PROCEDURE
3.5 mm locking compression reconstruction plates are used to fix the fracture. Locking plates construct at 90 degree orientation to each other increase the overall stiffness to torsional and bending forces. The plates are applied to the medial ridge of the medial column and along the posterior aspect of the lateral column. During the contouring of the locking compression plate, temporary blockage of the holes with spacers is recommended to avoid deformation of the threaded plate holes. Although exact anatomical contouring to the underlying cortex is not necessary, care should be taken 67not to exceed a distance of 2 to 3 mm within the meta- and epiphyseal region in order to prevent soft tissue impingement. For the dorsally applied radial plate, the plate should be placed as possible to maximize screw placements but not to the extent to interfere with the extension of the elbow. The distal margin of radial plate should be adjacent to the posterior articular cartilage of the capitellum. The medial plate is contoured around the medial epicondyle in such a configuration that a long locking head screw can be inserted in the distal locking hole to transfix the articular fragment. Any screw perforation into the olecranon fossa or the coronoid fossa should be avoided. If locking head screws and conventional screws are used together on the same locking plate, it is always necessary to use the conventional screw first. Otherwise, the LCP principle of an internal fixator is disregarded, resulting in additional stress on the locking head screws.
After the reduction is checked and found to be adequate, the olecranon osteotomy is then fixed with a tension band technique. The fracture is first reduced under direct vision. Two 1.6 to 1.8 mm K-wires are inserted into the olecranon tip and advanced to the osteotomy site to provide rotational control. Engagement of the anterior cortex is suggested especially in osteoporotic patient to minimize back out of the wires. A figure-of eight wire loop of 1.25 mm wire is positioned through a drill hole located distally. Care is taken to bend the proximal ends of the Kirschner wires and seat them onto the proximal olecranon both to prevent proximal migration as well as to avoid the prominence of the wires. Alternately, a 3.5 mm LCP can be used to fix this fragment.
 
CLOSURE
The triceps aponeurosis is repaired on both sides. The ulnar nerve is checked again and assessed for the necessity for anterior transposition. A suction drain is inserted and the skin is closed in layers. Postoperatively, the elbow is kept elevated in a sterile dressing and immediate active motion can be allowed for the patients. If the soft tissue is compromised or the fixation is inadequate, a short-term immobilization can be used.
 
Postoperative Management
Active and active assisted elbow range of motion is started on the first postoperative day. Continuous passive motion devices are usually not necessary. Early motion ensures a good return of function range of movements. Muscle strengthening can be started when the fracture starts to heal, usually at 4 to 6 weeks time.
 
Results of Treatment
Chan et al (2009) reported 24 patients with distal humeral fractures treated with open reduction and internal fixation with 3.5 mm locking compression plates. Most of the patients in this series had osteoporotic bone. All patients were shown to achieve excellent or good results and this is similar to the series of Huang et al (2005). They also showed better results with type A, extra-articular fractures, and this is not difficult to comprehend that type C, complete articular, fractures will have worse prognosis.
 
Complications
Complications include nonunion at the fracture and/or osteotomy site, and implant loosening and pull-out. Residual elbow stiffness can occur and hence early mobilization is mandatory to ensure a good functional range.
Ulnar nerve symptoms can also occur but are usually transient due to overzealous retraction during surgery.68
 
Summary/Conclusion
Stable fixation and a precise restoration of normal anatomy is the goal of treatment in distal humeral fractures and the use of locking compression plate can facilitate fulfillment of these requirements. Early mobilization can be started early postoperatively and complications are uncommon.
 
Illustrative Case
A 46-year-old man slipped and fell while walking downstairs. He sustained a grade I open C2 fracture of his left distal humerus (Figs 6.7A and B). Double plate fixation was done with 2 locking plates at 90 degrees orientation to each other (Figs 6.8A and B). Active and passive assisted elbow range of motion were started on the first postoperative day and a good return of function was seen at 3 months (Figs 6.9A and B).
Figures 6.7A and B: Preoperative radiographs showed a C2 fracture of distal humerus
Figures 6.8A and B: Double plate fixation of C2 fracture with 3.5 mm locking compression plates
69
Figures 6.9A and B: Follow-up at 3 months time showed a good return of functional range of elbow motion
Bibliography
  1. ChanCF, YuenG, LeungFKL. Fixation of distal humeral fractures in elderly patient by locking compression plate. Chin J of Reparative and Reconstructive Surg. 2009;23(11): 1285–9.
  1. JanKorner, HelmutLill, et al. Distal humerus fractures in elderly patients: results after open reduction and internal fixation. Osteoporosis Int. 2005;16:S73–9.
  1. JanKorner, HelmutLill, et al. The LCP–concept in the operative treatment of distal humerus fractures–biological, biomechanical and surgical aspects. Injury. 2003;34:S-B20-30.
  1. JeffreyAnglen. Distal humerus fractures. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2005;13:291–7.
  1. JesseB Jupiter. The surgical management of intra-articular fractures of the distal humerus. Master techniques in orthopaedic surgery. The Elbow. Raven Press, Ltd;  1994. pp. 53-70.
  1. HuangTL, ChiuFY, ChuangTY, et al. The results of open reduction and internal fixation in elderly patients with severe fractures of the distal humerus: a critical analysis of the results. J Trauma. 2005;58(1):62–9.
  1. HubertJohn, RaphaelRosso, et al. Operative treatment of distal humeral fractures in the elderly. JBJS. 1994;76(5):793–6.
  1. MichaelD Mckee, TracyL Wilson, et al. Functional outcome following surgical treatment of intra-articular distal humeral fractures through a posterior approach. JBJS. 2000;82-A(12): 1701-7.
  1. MichaelHausman, AlbertPanozzo. Treatment of distal humerus fractures in the elderly. CORR. 2004;425:55–63.
  1. SoonJL, ChanBK, et al. Surgical fixation of intra-articular fractures of the distal humerus in adults. Injury Int J Care Injured. 2004;35:44–54.
  1. SrinivasanK, AgarwalM, et al. Fractures of the distal humerus in the elderly. CORR. 2005;434:222–30.
  1. TengLe Huang, FangYao Chiu, et al. The results of open reduction and internal fixation in elderly patients with severe fractures of the distal humerus: A critical analysis of the results. The Journal of Trauma. 2005;58:62–9.
  1. ThomasW Throckmorton, PeterC Zarkadas, et al. Distal Humerus Fractures. Hand Clinic. 2007;23:457–69.

Distal Humerus Fractures: Parallel Plating Technique Using Triceps Reflecting Anconeus Pedicle (TRAP) Approach7

Amite Pankaj, Puneet Mishra, Rajesh Malhotra
 
Introduction
Fractures of the distal humerus account for 2 to 6% of all fractures1 which tend to occur in a bimodal age distribution, with fractures in younger patients occurring as a result of high energy mechanisms and fragility fractures occurring in the elderly as a result of low energy falls. The subsequent fracture pattern may be extra-articular (AO type A), partial articular (AO type B), or complete articular (AO type C).
Restoration of painless and satisfactory elbow function requires anatomic reconstruction of the articular surface and stable fixation of the fracture fragments to ensure that early mobilization does not compromise fracture union. In the presence of bone-loss, comminution and/or osteoporosis all these goals may be difficult to achieve.2-4
In order to enhance the stability of fixation in these fractures involving both the columns so that early elbow rehabilitation can be instituted, O'Driscoll et al proposed parallel plating for these fractures which is based on architectural principles such that fixation in the distal fragments is not only enhanced but it also contributes to structural stability at the supracondylar level. Along with the maintenance of articular surface, the fracture union is achieved by stable fixation by two plates applied in a near parallel orientation along the medial and lateral pillars (Figs 7.1A and B).
Currently the olecranon osteotomy approach is the most commonly used surgical approach and is considered gold standard by many surgeons to achieve goals of stable fracture fixation and aggressive postoperative elbow rehabilitation. However, this approach has its complications in the form of prominence/migration of hardware, nonunion/displacement of osteotomy, and need of secondary procedures related to these complications in a significant number of patients.5-7
Other approaches (Bryan Morrey triceps reflecting, Triceps splitting, paratricipital) have been devised in the past to approach the distal humerus. However, the approaches that dissociate the triceps from olecranon have distinct disadvantages of suboptimal exposure, extensive dissection, triceps weakness and delayed rehabilitation.8-10 O'Driscoll has described a triceps reflecting anconeus pedicle approach (TRAP) that is extensor mechanism sparing paratricipital approach through a midline posterior incision that avoids an olecranon osteotomy and mobilizes the triceps and anconeus muscle off the posterior humerus and intermuscular septae and provides adequate exposure. This approach also preserves the neurovascular supply of the anconeus that acts as a dynamic 72stabilizer of the elbow.11 In addition, it has been shown to allow aggressive postoperative elbow rehabilitation.3,4,12-14
Figures 7.1A and B: An example of ORIF of AO type C intercondylar distal humerus fracture with parallel plating technique
The present chapter describes the surgical technique of open reduction and internal fixation of distal humeral fractures that involve both the columns, including intra-articular fractures, i.e. AO type A and C fractures with parallel plating utilizing the TRAP approach.
 
Indications of Surgery
All displaced nonpathological fractures of the distal humerus involving both the columns, i.e AO/OTA type A (or supracondylar fractures), fractures with intra-articular involvement with bicolumnar involvement, i.e. AO/OTA type C (or intercondylar fractures) in skeletally mature patients (fused physis aound the elbow) are indications for open reduction and internal fixation (ORIF).
Contraindications to ORIF include inability to tolerate surgery because medical co-morbidities, and inability to benefit from surgery because of neurologic impairment of the limb where the bag of bones treatment traditionally has a role which consists of immobilizing the elbow in 60 degree of flexion for 2 to 3 weeks, followed by gentle motion. In addition, ORIF is contraindicated in patients with excessively high-risk for local complications because of infected or severely deficient soft tissues where a temporary or definitive external stabilization may have a role.
It has to be noted that osteopenia is essentially not a contraindication to ORIF by parallel plating technique since here fixation of bone fragments relies on stability of the hardware construct rather than on fixation by screw threads, for stability.1,5,6
 
Preoperative Considerations
 
INITIAL MANAGEMENT AND DIAGNOSIS
The initial management and resuscitation is on the lines of ATLS (Advanced Trauma Life Support) protocol. The affected elbow is provisionally splinted and only after hemodynamic stabilization, radiographic evaluation should be done.
73After a thorough clinical evaluation of the patient and the involved upper extremity, a record of the mechanism of injury, time duration since injury and whether the injury is closed or open and Gustillo and Anderson Grading of the fracture should be made. A record of any previous bone or joint disease or any other associated injury, should also be made.
 
DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING (AT THE TIME OF ADMISSION)
Radiographs of the affected elbow, anteroposterior and lateral views, if possible under gentle traction, should be done and the fracture classified according to the AO/OTA classification system. However, if doubt persists regarding intra-articular extension of the fracture or regarding classification of the fracture a CT scan of the affected elbow must be done.
 
Preoperative Surgical Preparation
As with any complex fracture procedure, ORIF of distal humerus fractures is best undertaken during daylight hours, after adequate planning, and with a rested, experienced surgical team and staff. Poor skin condition like blisters in the vicinity of the surgical incision or approach should be treated first by rupturing them under sterile conditions and then allowing them to heal till they turn into a scab, before proceeding for surgery. Intravenous third generation cephalosporin and aminoglycoside (metronidazole is added in open fractures) are usually given as preoperative prophylactic antibiotic 15 minutes before inflation of tourniquet.
 
Concept of Principle Based Parallel Plating Technique
 
EVOLUTION
The concept of parallel plating was conceived because various authors had reported a rate of 20 to 25% unsatisfactory results following orthogonal plating of distal humeral fractures.2,15-20 Realizing the technical limitations of orthogonal plating, it was noted that whenever nonunion or failure of fixation occurred, it did at the supracondylar level due to suboptimal anchorage of the articular fragments to the shaft caused by the limited number and length of screws that can be placed in the distal fragments, resulting in inadequate stability of fixation of the distal fragment to the shaft at this level.3,4 This was so because of various reasons: (a) when used in cases of low intercondylar fractures, adequate bone-stock for holding the screws in 90 to 90 plate configuration may not be available; (b) Since the articular fragments are first fixed independently with a cannulated cancellous screw, no further intercondylar compression can be expected when the plates are applied; (c) Further, the posterolateral plate does not allow the insertion of longer screws, so the amount of bone-stock available for purchase of the distal screws is not adequate, and hence the stability is less.1,3,4 Hence, when orthogonal method of plating fails, it is due to the nonunion at the supracondylar level, or stiffness resulting from prolonged immobilization that has been used in an attempt to avoid failure of fixation that had been inadequate.4,19,20
Based on these observations, Sanchez-Sotello and O'Driscoll of the Mayo Clinic Group, in an effort to increase the potential for optimal function after fixation of distal humerus fractures and to obtain reproducible stable fixation in the presence of osteoporosis or comminution, proposed parallel plating technique based on principles that maximize fixation in the distal fragments and compression at the supracondylar level. This technique is based on the principles of: (1) Enhancing fixation in the distal fragments, and (2) Achieving stability at the supracondylar level. Subsequently, various biomechanical studies have found parallel plate fixation to be substantially more stable than orthogonal plate fixation21-23 and level IV clinical studies too have shown good to excellent results.4,14,21-2774
Table 7.1   Technical objectives of the principle based parallel plating technique3,4
Objectives concerning screws in the distal fragments
Objective 1
Each screw should pass through a plate
Objective 2
Each screw should engage a fragment on the opposite side that is also fixed to a plate
Objective 3
An adequate number of screws should be placed in the distal fragments
Objective 4
Each screw should be as long as possible
Objective 5
Each screw should engage as many articular fragments as possible
Objective 6
The screws should lock together by interdigitation, thereby creating a fixed-angle structure and linking the columns together
Objectives concerning the plates used for fixation
Objective 7
Plates should be applied such that compression is achieved at the supracondylar level for both columns
Objective 8
Plates used must be strong enough and stiff enough to resist breaking or bending before union occurs at the supracondylar level
As described by O'Driscoll et al there are 8 technical objectives that have been described concerning parallel plating. There are 6 objectives related to distal screw insertion and 2 related to plate fixation given in Table 7.1.3,4
 
Surgical Technique
 
PATIENT POSITION
The patient is operated under tourniquet, if feasible, in the lateral decubitus position with the arm hanging free over a bolster, allowing free unhindered elbow flexion beyond 90 degree (Fig. 7.2)
Figure 7.2: The elbow position must allow movement greater than 90 degrees to help expose the articular surface in TRAP approach
75
 
SURGICAL APPROACH: TRICEPS REFLECTING ANCONEUS PEDICLE (TRAP) APPROACH
 
Superficial Exposure
An extensile posterior midline skin incision, around 15 cm long, is given curving medially or laterally to avoid the tip of the olecranon. The incision starts and finishes in the midline (Fig. 7.3A).
The incision is carried down as thick fasciocutaneous flaps (includes the skin and superficial fascia) to the level of the deep fascia and triceps tendon, extending medially and laterally to the supracondylar ridges. The ulnar nerve is identified, dissected free of its surrounding tissues, and then gently retracted using a feeding tube (Fig. 7.3B).
We routinely free the course of the ulnar nerve from the medial intermuscular septum till the nerve passes deep under vision into the flexor carpi ulnaris muscle.
 
Deep Exposure
Part 1: Lateral approach: The deep exposure involves combined approaches from the lateral and medial sides of the elbow. We always start with the lateral portion of the approach first, which is a modified Kocher's approach. We palpate the olecranon tip, lateral humeral epicondyle and the subcutaneous border of the ulna, which are the boundaries within which the triangular shaped anconeus muscle lies. A fibrous intermuscular fascia “white line”—is usually amenable to visualization and just barely palpable in each case, which separates the extensor carpi ulnaris (ECU) from the anconeus.6 Distally the tip of the anconeus is usually 10 cm from the tip of the olecranon. Once the anconeus is visualized, we then incise the deep fascia directly over the “white line” and then we start separating the anconeus from the ECU. We then proceed from distal to proximal in this interval towards the lateral humeral epicondyle separating the anconeus from the ECU and also subperiosteally from the subcutaneous border of the ulna (Fig. 7.3C).
Anconeus is then dissected off the capsule and lateral collateral ligament complex; the lateral collateral ligament and annular ligament are preserved intact.
Proximally the dissection is carried over the lateral supracondylar ridge elevating the triceps subperiosteally. The origins of the common extensor tendons, extensor carpi radialis longus, and brachioradialis are left undisturbed on the humerus because no exposure is required anterior to the lateral epicondyle or supracondylar ridge of the humerus. At the level of the tip of the olecranon, an arthrotomy is made, and the dissection is continued through the capsule at that point and around posteriorly. It is essential that the collateral ligament complex not be violated. Although we are describing the medial and lateral aspects of the TRAP approach sequentially for better understanding, it is usually easier to lift the flap from distal to proximal by performing the medial and lateral dissection simultaneously.
Part II: Medial approach: The medial exposure consists of the triceps-reflecting approach to the posterior aspect of the elbow, as described by Bryan and Morrey. We start at the point corresponding to the distal most extent of the anconeus muscle attachment that is usually 10 cm distal to the olecranon. We then incisie the periosteum on the subcutaneous border of the ulna, continuing proximally along the edge of the flexor carpi ulnaris origin (Fig. 7.3D).
The periosteum is then elevated off the subcutaneous surface of the ulna from medial to lateral, continuing beneath the anconeus, which is elevated subperiosteally off the lateral side of the ulna. At the medial side of the olecranon, the incision is extended proximally along the medial border of the triceps while retracting the ulnar nerve. The triceps is reflected laterally off the distal humerus with a scalpel, carefully releasing Sharpey's fibers from their insertion at the tip of the olecranon.76
Figures 7.3A to G: (A) The skin incision; (B) Isolation of ulnar nerve; (C) Identification of the plane between ECU and anconeus; (D) Detach the origin of FCU from the medial border of ulna; (E) Marking suture placed at the attachment of triceps tendon to olecranon and corresponding point marked on olecranon with a bovie for precise attachment of the triceps at the end of procedure; (F and G) The triceps-anconeus flap is kept moist in a soaked sponge and hyperflexion of the elbow exposes the distal articular surface of the humerus
77Although the triceps inserts on most of the olecranon and continues distally as a periosteal sleeve on the proximal ulna, the critical portion is an area approximately 1 cm in diameter on the olecranon. This area is located in line with the intramedullary long axis of the ulna (i.e. where K-wires are inserted for tension band fixation of an olecranon fracture). It is important to reattach the triceps precisely at that point at the completion of the procedure, so that the proper length-tension relationship is restored and the mechanical advantage of the olecranon is not lost. We then place a marking suture in the Sharpey fibers at the time of their release (Fig. 7.3E).
We mark with a cautery, the corresponding site on the ulna just opposite to the marking suture opposite for identification later. Proper marking permits accurate reattachment of the triceps tendon, preventing not only shortening, but also lengthening or medial or lateral displacement of the tendon.
The dissection on the medial side then progresses to the point at which dissection on the lateral side had stopped, such that the planes of dissection meet proximally on the humerus beneath the triceps and distally on the ulna beneath the anconeus. The fascial and periosteal attachments of the distal anconeus are released, and the entire triceps and anconeus pedicle is reflected proximally. This entire flap so elevated is kept moist throughout surgery with a wrap-around saline soaked gauze to prevent its desiccation.
Flexion of the elbow beyond 90 degree permits excellent exposure to the distal humerus except for a small portion of the articular surface of the anterior trochlea (Figs 7.3F and G).
A sling of narrow gauze is placed across the trough of the olecranon process and this may be used to exert a posterior pull over the olecranon to further enhance the exposure of the anterior part of the intercondylar region if needed.
 
Fixation Technique
 
STEP 1: ARTICULAR SURFACE REDUCTION AND FRACTURE ASSEMBLY
Once the fracture is exposed, the first step is reassembly of the articular surface. The articular fragments are provisionally fixed with smooth Kirschner wires (K-wire). In cases with extensive intra-articular comminution, fine threaded wires (1–1.5 mm) are used and then cut off and left in as definitive adjunctive fixation. Fracture re-assembly is completed with provisional fixation of intercondylar with the supracondylar component of the fracture with K-wires (1.5–2 mm) along the respective columns (Fig. 7.4A).
 
STEP 2: PLATE PLACEMENT AND PROVISIONAL FIXATION
The next step is to contour the reconstruction plates, using AO bender and L-benders to fit the reassembled humerus medially and laterally. The medial plate should be extended to the articular margin in cases of very distal or comminuted fractures and is contoured to the shape of the medial epicondyle. The lateral plate is placed laterally, rather than posteriorly, on the lateral column. While we refer to the plates as being parallel, each plate is actually rotated posteriorly slightly out of the sagittal plane such that the angle between them is often in the range of 150 to 160 degree. This orientation permits the insertion of at least four long screws in the intercondylar region, i.e. the distal fragments from one side to the other.
The ulnar nerve should be transposed if this extended plate is used. Both plates are slightly under-contoured to provide additional compression at the metaphyseal region when applied. The length of the plates selected should be such that at least three screws are placed in the proximal part of the humeral shaft both medially and laterally proximal to the metaphyseal component of the fracture.78
Figures 7.4A to G: (A) Completed provisional fixation of the entire fracture geometry with K-wires; (B) The plates are provisionally position along the medial and lateral pillars with the help of K-wires; (C) Plate application and provisional fixation. Medial and lateral 3.5 mm reconstruction plates are contoured, placed and are held apposed to distal humerus with K-wires and one screw on either side is placed in the diaphyseal fragment through slotted hole; (D and E) Articular fixation. Screws are inserted through the free hole of the lateral plate and across the distal articular fragments, from lateral to medial, and are tightened. This step is repeated similarly on the medial side with use of a free hole distally as shown; (F) Supracondylar compression is given using a large tenaculum to provide interfragmentary compression across the fracture at the supracondylar level sequentially at both the columns; (G) Final fixation
79As far as possible it should be attempted that the plates end at different levels proximally to avoid the creation of a stress-riser. The plates are then provisionally applied according to the following steps. First, two smooth 2 mm K-wires are introduced at the medial and lateral epicondyles through holes in the plates while they are held snugly against the bone (Fig. 7.4B).
These are left in place until after step 4 (described below). Appropriate reduction of the distal fragments to the humeral shaft at the supracondylar level is then confirmed, and one cortical screw is loosely introduced into a slotted hole to secure each plate in place at the diaphysis; the use of slotted holes facilitates later adjustments in plate position (Fig. 7.4C).
 
STEP 3: ARTICULAR FIXATION
Once the plates are provisionally applied, medial and lateral screws are introduced distally to provide stable fixation of the intra-articular fragments and rigid anchorage to the plates. The two distal screws (fully threaded 4 mm cancellous screws, sizes 45–60 mm) one medial and one lateral, are inserted after drilling with a drill-bit. As stated above, the screws placed are aimed to be as long as possible, should pass through as many fragments as possible, and should engage in the opposite column (Figs 7.4D and E).
Prior to screw insertion, a large bone clamp or intercondylar reduction forceps may be used to compress the intra-articular fracture lines unless there is a gap in the articular surface. This ensures interfragmentary compression without the need for lag screws.
 
STEP 4: SUPRACONDYLAR COMPRESSION
The plates are then fixed proximally under maximum compression at the supracondylar level. First, the proximal diaphyseal screw on one side is backed out and a large bone clamp is then applied distally on that side and proximally on the opposite cortex to eccentrically load the supracondylar region. A second proximal screw is then inserted through the plate in compression mode, and then the screw in the slotted hole is retightened. Second, the same steps are followed on the opposite side (Fig. 7.4F). Diaphyseal screws are then introduced, providing additional compression as a result of the under-contoured plates being pulled down to the underlying bone.
 
STEP 5: FINAL FIXATION
The smooth K-wires holding the plates to the bones inserted in step one are now removed, the remainder of the screws are inserted and the final fracture fixation is completed (Fig. 7.4G).
The intraoperative elbow motion is performed after complete fracture fixation to assess the fracture stability.
 
TRICEPS REATTACHMENT
Two crisscross drill holes are made through the ulna, proximal to distal, beginning at the normal critical attachment site of Sharpey's fibers on the olecranon as identified by the mark of the cautery earlier. These holes exit distally on either side of the ulna. One transverse hole is also drilled.
A heavy nonabsorbable suture (ethibond no. 5) is placed through the triceps precisely at the location of Sharpey's fibers (which was marked by the marking suture during the triceps reflection earlier) (Fig. 7.5A). The suture is woven back through again in a locking stitch manner,6 similar to a modified Mason-Allen stitch. This stitch then exits the deep surface of the triceps tendon at Sharpey's fibers and then is passed through the drill hole with a straight needle (Figs 7.5B and C).80
Figures 7.5A to E: Triceps reattachment (A) Heavy nonabsorbable suture passed through the location of Sharpey's fibers; (B and C) Suture woven through triceps tendon and drill hole; (D and E) Interval between ECU and anconeus closed and triceps reattachment completed
After exiting the ulna distally, the suture is woven over the top of the periosteum, through the anconeus muscle, then re-enters the bone distally on the opposite side of the ulna. After being brought out of the ulna at the attachment site of Sharpey's fibers proximally, the suture is passed through the triceps tendon about 1 cm away from where it had entered the tendon. These two holes, where the suture passes through the tendon, should be aligned precisely with the proximal drill holes on the ulna at the attachment site of the tendon. The suture is then pulled so that all of the slack is taken up, and the tendon is pulled down to the bone by the locking suture. The suture is tied tightly. Next, the free ends of the suture are woven 3 to 5 cm proximally into the triceps tendon in a Bunnell fashion, pulled, and tied so as to reef or create some slack in the distal triceps tendon. This slack permits tension in the triceps tendon to be absorbed at the proximal suture knot and less so at the reattachment to the olecranon. This protects the reattachment and lessens micromotion between the reattached tendon and bone.
Finally, the interval between ECU and anconeus is closed as far as possible without tension and free edges of the triceps and periosteum are closed (Figs 7.5D and E).
Intraoperative elbow range of motion is performed and the tension on the repair of the triceps tendon is adjudged during this act.
Routine anterior transposition of the ulnar nerve is not recommended. Anterior transposition of the ulnar nerve is performed only if the medial plate extends below the medial epicondyle or if superficial hardware, e.g. a distal screw is present in the groove for the nerve 81behind the medial epicondyle thereby risking or hindering the course of the nerve in its groove.
 
Postoperative Follow-up and Rehabilitation
Immediately after closure, the elbow is placed in a bulky dressing with a posterior plaster slab to maintain the elbow in maximum possible extension (with a belief to keep the olecranon fossa free of hematoma which may later reorganize and lead to an extensor lag postoperatively during rehabilitation) and the upper extremity is kept elevated. The first postoperative dressing is changed after 2 days and an elastic non-constrictive dressing is applied over an absorbent dressing placed on the wound. A physical therapy program including only active elbow flexion and no active elbow extension is initiated on day 3. However, passive extension and flexion are both allowed. Further periodic in patient wound inspections are done on a case to case basis and patients are discharged when early wound healing is found satisfactory. All patients are permitted active use of the hand and are instructed not to lift (or push or pull) anything heavier than a glass of water or a telephone receiver for the first 6 weeks. External protection, such as a removable above elbow POP splint or brace, is used by all patients in an intermittently removable fashion for at least 6 weeks. Continuous active and passive range of motion (ROM) exercises are encouraged with an emphasis on minimum period of 3 hours of daily exercise. Patients are followed at monthly intervals till fracture union and three monthly thereafter. Postoperative radiographs are evaluated for fracture union, changes in hardware position, subchondral collapse and the development of heterotopic ossification.
An assessment for approach related wound complications, secondary procedures required, and periodic elbow range of motion assessment is specifically done. A note should be made, at any stage in the follow-up whether the patient had required any secondary procedure.
 
Complications
 
TRAP APPROACH RELATED COMPLICATIONS
 
Early Complications
Postoperative hematoma: Being an extensile approach, where the proximal 10 to 12 cm of the ulna with the olecranon process is denuded off the soft tissues, formation of postoperative hematoma is likely as this region is highly vascular.14 Hence, after the tourniquet is removed and before final closure, meticulous hemostasis is essential to decrease its incidence.
Delayed wound healing and/or superficial skin necrosis around the tip of the olecranon: Even though thick fasciocutaneous flaps are elevated on either sides, one may still encounter superficial skin necrosis around the tip of the olecranon. One of the reasons for this is that while reattaching the triceps, four to five knots of the ethibond suture are directly placed over the olecranon tip. If not buried into the substance of the triceps muscle, these knots may continue to irritate this area during early elbow rehabilitation which may then present as superficial skin necrosis or delayed wound healing around the tip of the olecranon. This has been reported by O'Driscoll and also by the current author (PM) in previously reported series.11,14 Secondly, most of these fractures are high energy and the skin area around the tip of the olecranon is the one that bears the brunt of the impact when one falls over the point of the elbow. Hence its blood supply due to the impact of the injury is already precarious. Skin incision and surgical dissection around 82the tip of the olecranon could be another reason for this complication. Hence, extensive dissection around the tip of the olecranon should be avoided in all the posterior approaches to the elbow.
 
Late Complications
Triceps detachment: TRAP approach requires familiarity with the anatomy and it may not be obvious to those who have not seen the approach being performed.11,12,14 Most importantly, the technical details of tendon reattachment need to be understood well and should be observed which being performed. We strongly feel that attention to the details of the technique of triceps reattachment is absolutely essential so that unhindered postoperative elbow rehabilitation can be followed. Insecure attachment of the triceps and give way of the sutures during aggressive elbow mobilization could lead to of tendon detachment.
Triceps weakness: TRAP approach may be associated with triceps weakness which has been frequently noted even with olecranon osteotomy and other posterior approaches like triceps splitting/reflecting. McKee et al in their study concluded that patients who have this injury can be advised that they will lose approximately 25% of extension strength, regardless of the type of posterior approach (olecranon osteotomy or triceps splitting) used for operative repair.5 It has been our observation that wound related complications in the region of triceps insertion at the olecranon tip may lead to a clinically significant triceps weakness.14
Heterotopic ossification (HO): Using TRAP approach, O'Driscoll reported an incidence of 38% (12/32 cases) of HO in his series where excision was required in 5 cases.4 Although various authors also have reported this complication following TRAP and other posterior elbow approaches and it is difficult to say whether TRAP approach has increased association with HO.
 
COMPLICATIONS RELATED TO PARALLEL PLATING TECHNIQUE
Hardware breakage: During provisional fixation of the fracture geometry with K-wires is performed, care has to be taken that the wires are placed in a subchondral location rather in the center of the condylar fragments thereby leaving the path and space for future placement of screws through the plate from one column into the intercondylar region. Moreover, when drilling through the distal fragment, drill bit is prone to damage or breakage after striking a screw or screws placed previously. If such a resistance is encountered, the drill should be withdrawn, the path should be changed slightly and a 2 mm K-wire may be used instead for drilling the path for the screw.
Avascular necrosis of the lateral humeral condyle (Figs 7.6A to C). The lateral column is perfused by segmental posterior condylar perforating vessels, which may be stripped away with extensive subperiosteal elevation. Hence at the lateral column extensive subperiosteal dissection should be avoided for plate placement. In all circumstances, the soft tissues should be retained on the articular fragments.
 
Results
 
RESULTS OF TRAP APPROACH
There is paucity of literature on the results of operative fixation of distal humeral fractures utilizing TRAP approach and have been summarized in the Table 7.2.83
Figures 7.6A to C: (A) A closed AO type C3 fracture; (B) Four months postoperative X-ray showing fracture union; (C) One year postoperative X-ray depicting avascular necrosis of the lateral humeral condyle
Table 7.2   Published studies on open reduction and internal fixation of distal humerus fractures using triceps reflecting anconeus pedicle (TRAP) approach
Study
No. of cases
Follow-up (months) mean (range)
Overall results (mean score)
Complications
Reoperations
Ozer et al 200513
11
26(14–40)
OTA functional assess.: 10 excellent–good; 1 fair
Ulnar paresthesia-2 HO-1
None significant
Pankaj et al 200712
40
18+/-4(12–36)
87% good triceps strength
No reoperations or triceps failure
Implant removal for prominence-2
Athwal et al 200928
Total: 37 (32 reviewed)
27(12–54)
MEPS 82 (40–100) DASH 24
Postoperative nr. Inj.-4 Wound problems-4 HO-2
Elbow arthrolysis-3 Prom. Hardware removal-2 Wound problems-3
12 underwent
TRAP
Mishra et al 201014
15
6 (9–14)
MEPS 85
Postoperative Ulnar nr-2 Inf.-2 Wound healing problems-4 HO-2 Triceps weakness <4–3
Prom. Hardware removal-2 HO excision-1 Ulnar neurolysis:1
 
RESULTS OF ORIF WITH PARALLEL PLATING TECHNIQUE
Summary of results of some of the studies on fixation of distal humerus using the technique of parallel plating is shown in Table 7.3.84
Table 7.3   Published studies on open reduction and internal fixation of distal humerus fractures using parallel plating technique
Study
N
Follow-up (months) mean (range)
Rom/Flexion (f)/Ext.lag(e) (degrees)
Overall results (mean score)
Complications
Reoperations
Sanchez, Driscoll et al 20074
32
24 (12–60)
F: 124 (80–150)
E: 26 (0–55)
MEPS 83
Delayed union-1
Ulnar neuropathy-1
HO-4
Infection-1
14/32 (43%) for wound
Compl., HO, nonunion (1), arthritis,ulnar nr., etc
Atalar et al 200927
21
28 (12–48)
ROM: 90+/-31
F: 118+/-17.4
E: 27.8+/-17.4
MEPS 86+/-12.6
HO-7
Infection-1
Chondrolysis-1
HO excision-2; Prom. Hardware removal-5; arthrolysis - 2
Athwal et al 200928
37
27(12–54)
ROM: 97 (10-145)
F: 1(70–145)
E: 25(15–90)
MEPS 82 (40–100)
DASH 24
24 compl. In 17 pts Postoperative nr. Inj.- 4
Wound problems- 4
HO-2
Elbow arthrolysis-3
Intra-articular
Screw-2
Perop screw breakage-3
Prom. Hardware removal-2
Wound problems-3
Mishra et al 201014
15
6 (9–14)
F:112 (80–135)
E: 10.4 (5–20)
MEPS 85
Postoperative Ulnar nr-2; Inf.-2; wound healing problems not requiring reoperation-4; HO-2; triceps weakness<4:3
Prom. Hardware removal-2
HO excision-1
Ulnar neurolysis:1
Shin SJ et al 201025
18
28 (24–93)
F: 112+/-19 (95–135)
E: 10+/-8 (0–20)
MEPS 94.3
Elbow stiffness-1
HO-2; Tr. Ulnar nr.-4
Prom. Hardware removal-6; ulnar neurolysis-1
MEPS: Mayo elbow performance score; DASH: Disability of arm shoulder and hand score; HO: Heterotopic ossification
 
Illustrative Cases
 
CASE 1
A 35-year-old male sustained injury to his left elbow due to a road traffic accident. Radiographs revealed AO type C 3 fracture of the distal humerus (Fig. 7.7A). Patient was operated three weeks after injury due to pulmonary complications.
Figures 7.7A and B: (A) A 35-year-old male with AO type C3 fracture of the distal humerus, operated 3 weeks post injury due to underlying pulmonary problems; (B) One year postoperative X-ray showing sound anatomical union
85Internal fixation with parallel plating through TRAP approach was done. Radiographs at one year follow-up showed sound anatomical union (Fig. 7.7B).
 
CASE 2
A 22-year-old male sustained a low AO type C3 intra-articular fracture of the left distal humerus following a fall (Fig. 7.8A) parallel plating through. TRAP approach was performed. Follow-up radiographs at 2 years showed sound radiological union (Fig. 7.8B). Patient has excellent range of motion and function (Fig. 7.8C).
Figures 7.8A to C: A low AO type C3 intra-articular fracture of the distal humerus (left elbow) in a 22-year-old male: (A) Preoperative anteroposterior (AP); (B) 2 years postoperative AP X-ray of right elbow showing sound radiological union; (C) Excellent range of motion and function
 
Summary
TRAP approach allows adequate fracture visualization and stable fracture fixation even in comminuted AO type C3 fracture of the distal humerus, with the advantage of intact olecranon that does serve as a template around which critical intra-articular fracture reduction is contoured. The approach permits aggressive postoperative elbow rehabilitation without elbow instability. However, wound related complications and residual triceps weakness may be of concern in some cases. Accurate and strong reattachment of the reflected extensor mechanism is absolutely critical for postoperative elbow rehabilitation and a good functional outcome.
Principle based parallel plating technique is an architecturally sound and mechanically stable technique for fixation of even complex intra-articular fractures of distal humerus, i.e. AO type C2 and C3 fractures, low intercondylar fractures and osteoporotic fractures. It provides additional stability and compression at the 86supracondylar level thus resulting in early clinical and radiological union. Because of the stability it confers to the distal humeral construct, it allows early mobilization and rehabilitation of the elbow.
References
  1. WongAS, BaratzME. Elbow fractures-distal humerus. J Hand Surg. 2009;34A:176-90.
  1. RingD, JupiterJB. Fractures of the distal humerus. Orthop Clin North Am. 2000;31:103–13.
  1. O'DriscollSW, Sanchez-SoteloJ, TorchiaME. Management of the smashed distal humerus. Orthop Clin North Am. 2002;33:19-33,vii.
  1. Sanchez-SoteloJ, TorchiaME, O'DriscollSW. Complex distal humeral fractures: Internal fixation with a principle-based parallel-plate technique. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2007;89:961–9.
  1. McKeeMD, WilsonTL, WinstonL, et al. Functional outcome following surgical treatment of intra-articular distal humeral fractures through a posterior approach. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2000;82-A:1701-7.
  1. SodergardJ, SandelinJ, BostmanO. Postoperative complications of distal humeral fractures. 27/96 adults followed up for 6 (2-10) years. Acta Orthop Scand. 1992;63:85–9.
  1. RingD, GulottaL, ChinK, JupiterJB. Olecranon osteotomy for exposure of fractures and nonunions of the distal humerus. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18:446–9.
  1. MorreyBF. Limited and extensile triceps reflecting exposures of the elbow. In: MorreyBF (Ed). Master Techniques in Orthopaedic Surgery: The Elbow, New York: Raven Press;  1994. pp. 3-20.
  1. CheungEV, SteinmannSP. Surgical approaches to the elbow. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2009;17:325–33.
  1. WilkinsonJM, StanleyD. Posterior surgical approaches to the elbow: a comparative anatomic study. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2001;10:380–2.
  1. O'DriscollSW. The triceps-reflecting anconeus pedicle (TRAP) approach for distal humeral fractures and nonunions. Orthop Clin North Am. 2000;31(1):91–101.
  1. PankajA, MallinathG, MalhotraR, BhanS. Surgical management of intercondylar fractures of the humerus using triceps reflecting anconeus pedicle (TRAP) approach. Indian J Orthop. 2007;41:219–23.
  1. OzerH, SolakS, TuranliS, BaltaciG, ColakogluT, BolukbasíS. Intercondylar fractures of the distal humerus treated with the triceps reflecting anconeus pedicle approach. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2005;125:469–74.
  1. MishraP, AggarwalA, RajagopalanM, DhammiIK, JainAK. Critical analysis of triceps reflecting anconeus pedicle (TRAP) approach for intra-articular distal humeral fractures. Journal of Clinical Orthopaedics and Trauma. 2010;1(2):71–80.
  1. LetschR, Schmit-NeuerburgKP, SturmerKM, et al. Intra-articular fractures of the distal humerus. Surgical treatment and results. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1989;241:238–44.
  1. HoldsworthBJ, MossadMM. Fractures of the adult distal humerus. Elbow function after internal fixation. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1990;72:362–5.
  1. WildburgerR, MahringM, HoferHP. Supra-intercondylar fractures of the distal humerus: results of internal fixation. J Orthop Trauma. 1991;5:301–7.
  1. SodegardJ, SandelinJ, BostmanO. Postoperative complications of distal humeral fractures. 27/96 adults followed up for 6 (2-10) years. Acta Orthop Scand. 1992;63:85–9.
  1. AckermanG, JupterJB. Non-union of fractures of the distal end of the humerus. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1988;70:75–83.
  1. KornerJ, DiederichsG, ArzdorfM, et al. A biomechanical evaluation of methods of distal humerus fracture fixation using locking compression plates versus conventional reconstruction plates. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18:286–93.
  1. PenzkoferR, HungererS, WipfF, OldenburgGV. Anatomical plate configuration affects mechanical performance in distal humerus fractures. Clinical Biomechanics. 2010;25:972–8.
  1. StoffelK, CunneenS, MorganR, NichollsR, StachowiakG. Comparative Stability of Perpendicular Versus Parallel Double-Locking Plating Systems in Osteoporotic Comminuted Distal Humerus Fractures. Inc. J Orthop Res. 2008;26:778–84.87
  1. ZalavrasCG, VercilloMT, JunBJ. Biomechanical evaluation of parallel versus orthogonal plate fixation of intra-articular distal humerus fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2011;20:12–20.
  1. AbzugJM, DantuluriPK. Use of orthogonal or parallel plating techniques to treat distal humerus fractures. Hand Clin. 2010;26:411–21.
  1. ShinSJ, SohnHS, DoNH. A clinical comparison of two different double plating methods for intra-articular distal humerus fractures. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2010;19:2–9.
  1. QiX, LiuJG, GongYB, YangC, LiSQ, FengW. Selection of approach and fixation in the treatment of type C fracture of distal humerus in adults. Chin J Traumatol. 2010;13(3):163–6.
  1. AtalarAC, DemirhanM, SalduzA, KiliçogluO, SeyahiA. Functional results of the parallel-plate technique for complex distal humerus fractures. Acta Orthop Traumatol Turc. 2009;43(1):21–7.
  1. AthwalGS, HoxieSC, RispoliDM, SteinmannSP. Precontoured parallel plate fixation of AO/OTA type C distal humerus fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23(8):575–80.88

Coronal Shear Fractures of the Distal Humerus8

Ritabh Kumar
 
Introduction
Coronal shear injuries of the distal humeral articular surface are uncommon injuries.1 The apparently ‘isolated’ capitellar shear pattern is extremely rare.2 With newer imaging tools the true ‘complex’ nature of these injuries is now better recognized. The spectrum varies from the classical isolated capitellum shear fracture to the more complex pattern involving the entire anterior distal humeral articular surface with elbow dislocation and radial head fracture. Most of the patients are young and surprisingly, sometimes the injury follows trivial trauma such as simple fall on the outstretched hand.
Although the injury is identified, its true nature cannot be known by a plain radiograph alone. The displaced capitellum is the most obvious abnormality (Fig. 8.1). Being an intra-articular injury, atraumatic anatomical reduction with rigid stabilization and early mobilization is the favored treatment modality.
Figure 8.1: Dubberley type 1B coronal shear injury
90
Figure 8.2: CT scan—capitellar wheel split with intact trochlear wheel
Figures 8.3A and B: Dubberley classification (A) Posterior column intact; (B) Posterior column comminution (Dubberley et al. J Bone Joint Surg. 2006;89A(1):46-54)
However, underestimating the injury can lead to inadequate reduction and fixation. CT scan with 3D reconstruction is invaluable in preoperative planning and prognostication3 (Fig. 8.2). The classification offered by Dubberley et al (Fig. 8.3) is prognostic and also helps in guiding the optimum operative intervention.3
 
Equipment
  • K wires—1 mm, 1.6 mm
  • Stainless Steel wires—for tension banding
  • 2.4 mm Headless Compression Screws—cannulated
  • 2.0 mm and 2.7 mm screws from the hand set
  • 3.5 mm instrumentation
  • 3.5 mm reconstruction plates and/or anatomically contoured distal humerus implants
  • 6.5 mm cancellous screws with 3.2 mm drill bit
  • Mini anchors for repair of ligament injury.
91
Figures 8.4A to C: 3D CT images
 
Preoperative Planning
Being an intra-articular injury with fragment displacement the only viable option is an anatomic reduction, rigid fixation and early mobilization. Anatomical reduction necessitates an adequate exposure. The CT scan with 3D reconstruction helps in understanding the true personality of the injury4,5 (Figs 8.4A to C). Digital subtraction of the proximal ulna and radius has been recommended for better injury appreciation.2 No single surgical approach is endorsed. Lower grades of injury can be managed well by a lateral approach, with or without epicondylar osteotomy. In higher grades with increasing trochlear involvement and posterior comminution, the olecranon osteotomy provides ample exposure.
 
LATERAL APPROACH
The choice of regional or general anesthesia is decided by the patient. The patient is in the supine position with shoulder abducted to 90 degrees and elbow extended. A high arm tourniquet is optional. A lateral skin incision centered on the epicondyle from 6 cm proximal and 3 cm distal to the joint line is made. The proximal dissection is between the Brachioradialis and Triceps and distally between the Extensor Carpi Ulnaris and Anconeous. Greater access to the joint is provided by an epicondylar osteotomy (Figs 8.5A and B). With the elbow flexed, placing the retractors anteriorly under the capsule is facilitated.92
Figures 8.5A and B: Epicondylar osteotomy
After joint lavage, the articular fragment and its bed are examined. Impaction and comminution is carefully analyzed to prevent malreduction. Reduction is facilitated by identifying the intact wall of the fracture bed and placing the capitellum against it. This is held provisionally with two or three 1 mm K-wires placed peripherally (Fig. 8.6A). The key is maintaining articular congruency. Definitive fixation is achieved with at least two headless compression screws. The screws are placed divergent and adjacent to the highest point of the dome of the capitellum. The range of movement is verified after removing the wires. The osteotomy is repaired by tension banding (Fig. 8.6B). Joint stability is tested. After skin closure the limb is splinted in an above elbow slab to allow for soft tissue healing. Check radiographs are obtained immediate postoperatively and during follow-up (Fig. 8.7)
Figures 8.6A and B: (A) Fracture reduction and provisional fixation. Note the posterior comminution; (B) After fixation and tension banding the osteotomy
93
Figure 8.7: Postoperative X-rays
 
OLECRANON OSTEOTOMY APPROACH
The patient is placed lateral or prone after general anesthesia. A high arm tourniquet is applied. A longitudinal skin incision in the midline curving ulnar to the olecranon is made. After isolating the ulnar nerve and tagging it, a chevron osteotomy is made after predrilling the proximal ulna with a 3.2 mm drill bit. The olecranon is reflected proximally and the joint opened. The jigsaw is best fixed from the larger to smaller fragments using 1 mm K wires to temporize the reduction. After ascertaining anatomical reduction, definitive fixation is accomplished with small screws. Metaphyseal comminution necessitates further protection of the construct by buttress plating the lateral column.
 
Postoperative Rehabilitation
The limb is rested in a posterior back slab till edema settles down. Active assisted shoulder and active wrist/finger mobilization is begun in the immediate postoperative period. Intermittent elbow mobilization with rest in splint is begun after a week. Stretching is initiated after 6 weeks and exercises against resistance at 12 weeks. The splint is discarded when the patient regains good voluntary control. It is important to reiterate the virtue of persistence and patience. Function that appears to stagnate despite effort surprisingly begins to improve with time.
 
Complications
The elbow is extremely sensitive to injury and intolerant to immobilization. Stiffness is the most common complication reported and the risk is greater in the higher grades.1,3,4 This partially offsets the concerns of instability. Hardware concerns linger especially with the olecranon osteotomy approach. Heterotopic ossification remains a risk though rarely reported.1
 
Literature Review
The isolated coronal fracture of the capitellum is very rare.1,2 Experience is limited in managing these uncommon but challenging injuries. Vast majority of such injuries also involve the trochlea and/or posterior aspect of the distal humerus.2 These are complex injuries with significant osseous and ligamentous disruption. 3D CT scans are invaluable 94in estimating the injury personality.2 Retrospective studies report a generally favourable outcome following ORIF. However, loss of terminal extension is commonly observed. As fracture area increases, prognosis worsens. Nonunion and avascular necrosis is rarely reported. Although stiffness is common, motion and function gained is reasonably enduring.1
 
Illustrative Case
A 30-year-old male sustained injury to his left elbow after fall from motorcycle and sustained Dubberley 3B injury (Fig. 8.8).
Figure 8.8: Dubberley 3B injury
Figure 8.9: 3D CT scan images; separate capitellar and trochlea fragment
95
Figure 8.10: Olecranon osteotomy approach
Figure 8.11: Postoperative X-rays
CT scan with 3D reconstruction revealed separate capitellar and trochlear fragments (Fig. 8.9). The fractures were fixed with an olecranon osteotomy approach (Fig. 8.10). Postoperative radiographs showed satisfactory reconstruction (Fig. 8.11). Follow-up at one-year revealed consolidation on radiographs (Figs 8.12A and B) and excellent functional outcome (Figs 8.13A and B).96
Figures 8.12A and B: One-year follow-up X-rays
Figures 8.13A and B: Clinical function at one-year
References
  1. GuittonTG, DoornbergJN, RaaymakersELFB, RingD, KloenP. Fractures of the capitellum and trochlea. J Bone Joint Surg. 2009;91-A(2):390-7.
  1. RingD. Apparent capitellar fractures. Hand Clinics. 2007;23:471–9.
  1. DubberleyJH, FaberKJ, MacDermidJC, PattersonSD, KingGJW. Outcome after open reduction and internal fixation of capitellar and trochlear fractures. J Bone Joint Surg. 2006; 89-A(1):46-54.
  1. RuchelsmanDE, TejwaniNC, KwonYW, EgolKA. Coronal plane partial articular fractures of the distal humerus: Current concepts in management. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2008;16: 716–28.
  1. AshwoodN, VermaM, HamletM, GarlapatiA, FoggQ. Transarticular shear fractures of the distal humerus. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2010;19:46–52.

Isolated Shear Fracture of the Humeral Trochlea9

Ritabh Kumar
 
Introduction
Coronal plane fractures of the distal humerus are uncommon injuries with most of them reported on the capitellar side.1 Also known as the Laugier's fracture, the trochlea is devoid of any muscle or ligament attachment. Well protected in the olecranon, it is very uncommon to have isolated shear injuries of the trochlea. The history is similar to any other upper limb injury mechanism—a fall on the outstretched hand. The radiographs should be of high quality and examined carefully. The lateral view as shown in Figure 9.1 shows the double crescent sign. Whether the crescent has risen from the medial or lateral column is impossible to appreciate. The AP view as shown in Figure 9.2 may suggest a hint but the images are sometimes difficult to obtain as the elbow is in flexion following pain and spasm. The relevance of traditional clinical examination is underscored in this context. On inspection the bruise on the medial aspect and medial tenderness suggest pathology on the wrong side of the elbow (Fig. 9.3).
Figure 9.1: Lateral view of elbow showing the ‘double crescent’ sign
Figure 9.2: AP view of elbow in flexion. Despite a good quality image it can be interpreted as normal. Note the articular step on the medial side of the humerus
98
Figure 9.3: Clinical image showing medial bruise anteriorly. This suggests a rent in the anterior elbow capsule and extravasation of hematoma
 
Equipment
  1. K-wires 1 mm
  2. Headless compression screws
  3. Mini anchors
  4. Image intensifier
 
Preoperative Planning
The threshold to obtain a CT scan should be very low in intra-articular injuries. It delineates the true pathoanatomy of the injury and also helps in preoperative planning (Figs 9.4 and 9.5). Osteochondral fragmentation is readily identified. The injury is usually more extensive than suggested by the radiographs. The importance of post-surgery rehabilitation should be emphasized as the elbow joint is intolerant to injury, surgery and immobility. Being an intra-articular injury with fragment displacement the only viable option is an anatomic reduction, rigid fixation and early mobilization.
Figure 9.4: Axial CT scan image showing a true coronal shear with intact posterior cortex
99
Figure 9.5: 3D CT images showing an ‘empty olecranon’ sign and an intact lateral column
Figure 9.6: Intraoperative view of osteochondral fragment. The ulnar nerve is isolated and tagged
The choice of general or regional anesthesia is best decided by the patient. The shoulder is abducted to 90 degrees and the forearm extended and supine. A high arm tourniquet is preferred with the pressure set at 125 mm of Hg more than the systolic blood pressure. The joint is opened by a medial approach utilizing a longitudinal incision just anterior to the medial epicondyle. After identifying and tagging the ulnar nerve, the common flexor origin is sharply dissected off the epicondyle. The capsule is opened in line with the skin incision. The fracture hematoma drains spontaneously and the osteochondral fragment identified (Fig. 9.6). The joint is lavaged with saline to improve visualization. Every attempt should be made to retain any soft tissue attachment to the displaced fragment. The fracture bed is exposed and the fragment then reduced under vision. The reduction is held with two one millimetre K-wires spread apart. Definitive fixation is done using headless compression screws buried below the level of articular 100cartilage.
Figure 9.7: Low load long duration stress using stretch band tied to table
Depending upon the fragment size, a minimum of two screws is necessary to provide the desired stability to allow early mobilization. The elbow is moved through full range of movement to check for any block. The tourniquet is deflated and hemostasis secured. The capsule is closed with 3‘0’ VicrylTM. The common extensor origin is anchored to the medial epicondyle either through drill holes or suture anchors. The skin is approximated with 3‘0’ nylon and an above elbow splint applied in about 80 degrees of flexion and neutral forearm position.
 
Postoperative Rehabilitation
Active use of the hand is encouraged immediately after surgery with assisted shoulder mobilisation. Intermittent active elbow movements are commenced within 3-5 days with rest in the splint in between. As active control improves, the splint can be dispensed. The patient is encouraged to use the affected upper limb for activities of daily living like brushing, buttoning, combing of hair. Elbow stiffness is resilient but compliant to persistence. It is important to reassure the patient to persevere with exercises. Serial radiographs are obtained to assess the status of the fixation. Union is difficult to appreciate directly. Absence of symptoms with improving range of movement indirectly suggests satisfactory progress to union. Functional arc is gained earlier if the dominant extremity is involved. Terminal loss of extension is obvious and more disabling than a similar flexion loss. Low load long duration exercises may help in restoration of extension (Fig. 9.7).
 
Complications
Elbow contracture is the most common problem.1 The injury is unusual and it is difficult to gauge the actual extent of damage. Atraumatic rigid fixation and early active mobilization is the key in realising a satisfactory outcome. Osteonecrosis is a possible concern as the fragment is devoid of any soft tissue attachment. It is imperative to provide compression across the fracture to enable primary bone union.
 
Illustrative Case
A 23-year-old air hostess sustained injury to her non dominant following a fall while learning to ski. She presented in the outpatient clinic three days later with her elbow in 101an above elbow splint, an X-ray film and a diagnosis of fracture capitellum.
Figures 9.8A and B: (A) Lateral; and (B) Anteroposterior (AP) radiographs of the left elbow showing displaced fracture of trochlea. Note the indistinct outline of medial distal humerus on the AP view. The fracture was confused with capitellum fracture by the initial care provider
Figure 9.9: Postoperative X-rays
Figure 9.10: Clinical images at 2 years showing restriction in terminal extension
A diagnosis of trochlear fracture was made (Figs 9.8A and B). The fracture was reduced through medial orthrotomy and fixed with two headless compression screws (Fig. 9.9). The patient had good function at 2 year follow-up barring loss of terminal extension of the left elbow (Fig. 9.10).102
 
Literature Review and Summary
Coronal shear fractures of the distal end of the humerus are uncommon injuries often underestimated on the radiograph.1 The isolated shear fracture of the trochlea is extremely rare. Very few cases have been reported in English literature.2-4 CT scan helps understand the pathoanatomy better. Small headless screws enable rigid fixation of the fragment where possible. A good outcome is achievable if the basic tenets of intra articular fracture managements are adhered to.
References
  1. GuittonTG, DoornbergJN, RaaymakersELFB, RingD, KloenP. Fractures of the capitellum and trochlea. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2009;91:390–7.
  1. NakataniT, SawamuraS, ImaizumiY, SakuraiA, FujiokaH, TomiokaM, et al. Isolated fracture of the trochlea: A case report. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2005;14:340–2.
  1. KaushalR, BhanotA, GuptaPN, BahadurR. Isolated shear fracture of the humeral trochlea. Injury Extra. 2005;36:210–1.
  1. KwanMK, ChooEH, ChuaYP, MansorA. Isolated displaced fracture of the humeral trochlea. A report of two rare cases. Injury Extra. 2007;38:461–5.

Coronoid Fracture10

Ravi Gupta, Amit Kumar, Tahir Ansari, Ratnav Ratan
 
Introduction
Coronoid fractures usually occur as a part of unstable elbow dislocations1; however these can occur in isolation as Brachialis avulsion injury.2 Traditionally, large coronoid fracture fragments and the small fragments causing instability require fixation and the small fragments causing no instability are managed conservatively. With increasing understanding of the contribution of the coronoid to stability of the elbow, the trend is increasingly towards operative stabilization of these injuries and initiation of early, protected range-of-motion program to avoid stiffness at elbow. Since it is a part of complex bony and soft tissue injury, the management of these injuries requires a complete diagnosis as to whether the coronoid fracture is an isolated injury or is a part of a complex injury which requires management of bony as well as soft tissue structures.
 
Relevant Anatomy
The elbow is an inherently stable joint consisting of articulations between the humerus, ulna and radius; that has both rotational and hinge motion. The trochlea of the humerus articulates with the trochlear notch of the proximal ulna to form the hinge while the radial head articulates with the capitellum and the radial notch of the ulna to create a joint for rotational motion. The distal humerus has coronoid fossa anteriorly that accommodates the coronoid process during extreme flexion (Fig. 10.1) while posteriorly there is olecranon fossa that accommodates the olecranon process during the extreme extension. The coronoid process provides structural stability to elbow joint against posterior displacement by acting as an anterior buttress3 (Fig. 10.1). Approximately 50% of the elbow stability comes from the congruent bony articulation between the trochlea of humerus and coronoid facet of ulna.4
The coronoid process gives attachment to the anterior capsule of the elbow joint close to its tip, insertion of brachialis muscle just distal to capsule (Fig. 10.2) and insertion of the medial ulnar collateral ligament (MUCL) on the sublime tubercle on the medial side;3,5 (Figs 10.3 and 10.4) thus contributing further to stability of the elbow joint.
 
Epidemiology
Coronoid fractures account for about 1 to 2% of all elbow fractures and are associated in 2 to 15% of patients with dislocation.6-8 They also occur as a part of a complex injury, 104known as ‘terrible triad of the elbow’9-11 that constitutes of elbow dislocation, radial head fracture, and coronoid process fracture.
Figure 10.1: Frontal view of the bony anatomy of elbow
Figure 10.2: Important soft tissue attachments contiguous to olecranon
Figure 10.3: Stabilizers of elbow joint on lateral aspect
Figure 10.4: Stabilizers of elbow joint on medial aspect
105In children, coronoid fractures have a bimodal age distribution, with peaks at age 8 to 9 years and at age 12 to 14 years.12 Coronoid fractures in children are often associated with elbow dislocations, olecranon fractures, medial epicondyle fractures, or lateral condyle fractures.
 
Mode of Injury
Fracture of coronoid process take place usually as a part of elbow dislocation which commonly is caused by a fall on the elbow or outstretched hand.10,13-15 The injury can take place during motor vehicle accidents, sports injuries, activities of daily living or even at work.13,15 It is a high energy injury associated with severe soft tissue damage.16
The mechanisms of injury of coronoid fracture consist of axial loading of the elbow in extension causing shearing off of the coronoid by trochlea during posterior elbow dislocation and/or the avulsion of the coronoid tip by the pulling force of the capsule.2,6,10,15,17-19
When there is component of valgus and posterior-lateral rotatory force in addition to this axial loading, posterolateral rotational instability results. The forced supination of forearm away from humerus first damages lateral collateral ligament and there can be associated fracture of radial head, fracture of coronoid and posterior dislocation of elbow; the terrible triad (Fig. 10.5). The MUCL is the last structure to be damaged in this injury pattern.20
On the contrary if there is a valgus and posteromedial component to with this axial loading, it causes fracture of anteromedial facet of coronoid which may be associated with LCL injury or additional fracture to base of coronoid.1,2,21
Isolated valgus instability of the elbow can be found in throwing athletes (e.g. baseball, javelin) due to rupture or attenuation of the medial ulnar collateral ligament (MUCL);5 however it is the radial lateral collateral ligament which is more frequently associated with traumatic elbow instability.1,22
 
Clinical Features
This injury may present as an isolated injury or more commonly as a part of elbow dislocation. The patient usually has history of fall on outstretched hand with hyperextension and twisting forces at the elbow. There is pain, tenderness, and swelling around the elbow.
Figure 10.5: Terrible triad of elbow
106
Figure 10.6: Method to obtain radiocapitellar view
When there is an isolated coronoid fracture and sometimes after spontaneous relocation of associated elbow dislocation, these clinical signs are not present.6,23 Varus or valgus stress tests and range of motion may demonstrate pain and instability.2,6
Neurovascular injury although rare with isolated coronoid fracture, can occur due to associated injuries and should be ruled out by doing a proper clinical examination.
 
Investigations
Radiographs of the elbow in the anteroposterior (AP), lateral, and, if required, oblique views should be obtained to ascertain clearly the extent of bony injury. Oblique views are especially important in minimally displaced fractures, because in a true lateral view of the elbow, the radial head overlaps the coronoid, thus coronoid fractures may be confused with radial head fractures.24,25 To avoid this problem, Greenspan and Norman described the radiocapitellar view (Figs 10.6 and 10.7).26,27 This separates the radial head from the coronoid and provides clear visualization of coronoid, radial head, capitello-radial and trochleo-ulnar joints. Sometimes plain radiographs are unable to completely demonstrate the extent of associated injuries and CT scan or MRI is useful.
Figures 10.7A to C: Radiocapitellar view. What appears to be an isolated fracture of capitellum on anteroposterior and true lateral view demonstrates an associated fracture of coronoid on radiocapitellar view
107
Figure 10.8: Types of coronoid fractures (after O‘Driscoll28)
 
Classification
Regan and Morrey classified coronoid fractures into 3 types:8
  • Type I: Tip of the coronoid
  • Type II: More than tip but less than 50% of coronoid
  • Type III: More than 50%.
There are A and B subtypes in each category indicating absence and presence of associated dislocation respectively.
O'Driscoll described a new classification system as follows:28
  • Type 1: Tip fracture,
  • Type 2: Anteromedial facet fracture,
  • Type 3: Basal fracture involving at least 50% of height of coronoid.
All the 3 types are further divided into subtypes depending upon severity of the injury (Fig. 10.8). This classification system considers the injury pattern and thus helps in diagnosis of associated injuries and planning of treatment.28
 
Treatment and Surgical Indications
Aim of surgery for any injury around elbow should be to achieve stability and start early range of motion exercise. Being an articular fracture, congruent reduction at the time of surgery should be ensured. Role of coronoid as important stabilizer of elbow has been shown in recent studies.10,28,29 The injuries which pose difficulty in management are the terrible triad, varus-posteromedial injury, and olecranon fracture-dislocations with associated coronoid fractures.28 In all these injuries management of coronoid fracture is critical for elbow stability.
The stabilizing function of the coronoid process under axial load to the elbow has been reported to have no significant difference; at any flexion position in posterior axial displacement between intact elbows and elbows in which 50% or less of the coronoid process was fractured (Regan and Morrey types 1 and 2) (P = .43).30 Differences in posterior axial displacement were significant across all flexion positions between intact elbows and elbows in which more than 50% of the coronoid process was fractured (Regan and Morrey-type 3, O'Driscoll-Basal type) (P = .006). Thus for isolated coronoid fractures Regan and Morrey type 1 and type 2 fractures can be managed conservatively.
However since coronoid fracture rarely occurs as isolated injury, size of the fractured fragment should not be the sole criteria in planning treatment of these fractures. The 108anteromedial fascet of coronoid, basal coronoid fracture, associated Olecranon and radial head fracture should be fixed. Among the soft tissue component LCL which is usually avulsed from lateral epicondyle should be repaired and MUCL is expected to heal properly without repair in an otherwise stable elbow.29,31 In addition a displaced coronoid fracture that presents with a block to elbow motion is a definite indication for surgical stabilization.26
 
Surgical Procedure
 
POSITION AND ANESTHESIA
Coronoid is usually fixed through a posteromedial approach in a lateral position (Figs 10.9 and 10.10) preferably under general anesthesia.
 
EXPOSURE OF FRACTURE
The coronoid can be approached posteromedially through a posterior midline incision after lifting the ulnar origin of the extensor carpi ulnaris (ECU) subperiosteally.
Figure 10.9: Posterior approach to the coronoid: lateral decubitus position with a pillow under the arm
Figure 10.10: Posterior approach to the coronoid: after prepping and drapping
109
Figure 10.11: Radial head being approached between the anconeus medially and the ECU laterally
In cases of a Monteggia fracture-dislocation, the coronoid may be approached through the interval between the ECU and the anconeus laterally and the flexor carpi ulnaris (FCU) medially. The radial head may be approached between the anconeus medially and the ECU laterally (Fig. 10.11). This will help prevent formation of a synostosis between the radius and the ulna.
 
REDUCTION
Anatomical reduction of a large coronoid process fracture is important for elbow joint stability and congruity. This is particularly true, when the coronoid fracture is part of a comminuted olecranon fracture. Reduction may be visualized through the medially extended posterior incision, through the olecranon fracture site (Fig. 10.12). Alignment must be checked with satisfactory X-rays or image intensifier.
 
FIXATION
After exposing the fracture site and cleaning the edges, the fragment is anatomically reduced. The fracture is stabilized initially with a large clamp or by Kirschner wire (K-wire) fixation. Definitive fixation can then be achieved with a small plate or with screws. Precontoured coronoid plates are now available .The primary role of the plate is to provide a buttress against posterior subluxation of the ulna in relation to the humerus (i.e. push plate). Coronoid may also befixed by means of an interfragmentary screw (from posterior to anterior, or from anterior to posterior if the fragment is small or osteoporotic) (Fig. 10.13).
Figure 10.12: Fixation of a coronoid fracture combined with a transolecranon fracture. After fixing coronoid, olecranon is fixed with another plate posteriorly
110
Figure 10.13: Fixation of coronoid using posteroanterior interfragmentary screws
Figure 10.14: Illustration of suture technique for fixation of a small coronoid fracture
The fracture may also be stabilized using heavy nonabsorbable sutures or suture anchors32,33 (Fig. 10.14).
The results from one study noted that suture lasso fixation of coronoid fractures for terrible triad injuries results in fewer complications and greater stability compared with screw or suture anchor fixation techniques. A higher rate of implant failure was noted with internal screw fixation, while the suture anchor technique resulted in a higher rate of malunion and nonunion.34
In patients with highly comminuted coronoid fractures which is large enough to compromise stability and not fixable; reconstruction using a piece of the radial head (Esser technique) or a piece of the olecranon (Moritomo technique) has been described.35 Intraoperative test of stability should be performed with different authors describing stability up to 45 to 30 degree of flexion as acceptable.29,36
 
REHABILITATION
After the surgery, the elbow is immobilized at 90° of flexion in a well-padded posterior splint. The elbow is immobilized for about a week, and then the protected immobilization program should be substituted with protected mobilization program in a hinged orthosis is initiated, which prevents varus-valgus stresses on the elbow. Brace use is continued for approximately 4 to 6 weeks to allow the ligaments to heal.
 
COMPLICATIONS
Osteoarthritis, myositis ossificans, parasthesia, stiffness and instability are the most common complications associated with coronoid fractures.
Osteoarthritis occurs due to incongruent fixation of coronoid especially the anteromedial facet and can be avoided by ensuring anatomical reduction. Myositis ossificans is associated with any injury or surgery around elbow, the authors prefer to use indomethacin (75 mg PO) for 3 weeks following the surgery to prevent this. Paresthesias in the ulnar nerve distribution can be avoided by anterior transposition whenever necessary. The early mobilization is important to prevent stiffness and painful loss of function.2,10,15,17,23,37,38 Unrecognized or untreated LCL injury is the most common cause of post-traumatic instability; however attenuated or torn MUCL can be the cause in throwing athletes. 111
 
Results
Results of isolated coronoid fracture are not reported in many studies. As these fractures have been associated with elbow dislocation; the complications of elbow dislocation overshadow the results of coronoid fixation. Loss of range of motion is the most common complication that develops because of prolonged immobilization. Stable internal fixation of the coronoid which is difficult to achieve may lower this complication in future. Job N Doornberg et al reported a series of 18 patients with 26 months follow-up; twelve patients who were operated and fixation was done with a plate had good or excellent elbow function; six patients had development of arthrosis and a fair or poor result according to the system of Broberg and Morrey. Malalignment of the anteromedial facet of the coronoid with varus subluxation of the elbow, which was due to the fact that the fracture were not specifically treated in four patients and to loss of fracture fixation in two patients.21 Loss of terminal extension is very common but the patients are not very symptomatic as the functional range of motion of elbow ranges 30 to 130 degree. Complex elbow instability is another main reason for the poor outcome of the coronoid fratures.39 O'Driscoll type I fractures are associated with terrible triad injuries; type II fractures are associated with VPMRI injury patterns; and type III fractures are associated with olecranon fracture dislocations.19 It is difficult to predict the outcome of coronoid fracture alone. Long-term results of radial replacement or repair in terrible triad are not available but short-term results favor a good outcome with replacement or repair of the radial head.40 Osteoarthritis of elbow and heterotopic ossification are another complications which may appear more severe in X-rays than clinically.
 
Illustrative Case
A 38-year-old man presented with radial head fracture with communited olecranon fracture extending into the coronoid with a communited radial head fracture. He was operated via a posterior approach in lateral position. Open reduction was done with a reconstruction plate with a posteroanterior screw into coronoid through the plate along with radial head replacement. His pre- and postoperative X-rays are shown in Figure 10.15. At the end of 3 months he had an excellent range of motion of elbow and a satisfactory outcome.
Figure 10.15: Preoperative X-rays and CT showing a communited olecranon fracture extending into the coronoid with a communited radial head fracture for which open reduction of coronoid and olecranon done with a posteroanterior screw through the plate along with radial head replacement
112
 
Conclusion
Management of Coronoid fractures usually depends on the size of the coronoid and other complex injury patterns of the elbow which has to be dealt simultaneously with as much vigour. Different surgical techniques has been described for its fixation; The aim of all the methods remain the same which is provide stable internal fixation so that early range of motion can be started. Literature favors a lag screw technique with or without a volar buttress plate.
References
  1. RingD. Fractures and dislocations of the elbow. In Rockwood and Green's fractures in adults. 6th edn. PA: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins.  Philadelphia. 2006;1:991–1047.
  1. GadgilA, RoachR, NealN, et al. Isolated avulsion fracture of the coronoid process requiring open reduction in a pediatric patient. A case report. Acta Orthop Belg. 2002;68:396.
  1. CageDJ, AbramsRA, CallahanJJ, BotteMJ. Soft tissue attachments of the ulnar coronoid process. An anatomic study with radiographic correlation. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1995; 320:154-8.
  1. MorreyBF. Complex instability of the elbow. Instr Course Lect. 1998;47:157–64.
  1. AbloveRH, MoyOJ, HowardC, PeimerCA, S'DoiaS. Ulnar coronoid process anatomy: possible implications for elbow instability. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2006;449:259–61.
  1. SelesnickFH, DolitskyB, HaskellSS. Fracture of the coronoid process requiring open reduction with internal fixation. A case report. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1984;66:1304–6.
  1. MorreyBF. The elbow and its disorders. 3rd edn. Philadelphia, PA: WB Saunders Company;  2000.
  1. ReganW, MorreyB. Fractures of the coronoid process of the ulna. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1989;71(9):1348–54.
  1. HotchkissRN. Fractures and dislocations of the elbow. In: RockwoodCA, GreenDP (Eds). Rockwood and Green's fractures in adults. Vol 1. 4th edn. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins;  1996. pp. 929-1024.
  1. RingD, JupiterJB, ZilberfarbJ. Posterior dislocation of the elbow with fractures of the radial head and coronoid. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2002;84:547–51.
  1. DoornbergJN, vanDuijn J, RingD. Coronoid fracture height in terrible-triad injuries. J Hand Surg Am. 2006;31:794–7.
  1. BracqH. Fracture of the coronoid apophysis. Rev Chir Orthop Reparatrice Appar Mot. 1987;73(6):472–3.
  1. JosefssonPO, JohnellO, WendebergB. Ligamentous injuries in dislocations of the elbow joint. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1987;221:221–5.
  1. SeijasR, JoshiN, HernndezA, CatalnJM, FloresX, NietoJM. Terrible triad of the elbow—role of the coronoid process: a case report. J Orthop Surg (Hong Kong). 2005;13:296–9.
  1. JosefssonPO, GentzCF, JohnellO, WendebergB. Dislocations of the elbow and intra-articular fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1989;246:126–30.
  1. JosefssonPO, JohnellO, GentzCF. Long-term sequelae of simple dislocation of the elbow. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1984;66:927–30.
  1. MehlhoffTL, NoblePC, BennettJB, TullosHS. Simple dislocation of the elbow in the adult. Results after closed treatment. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1988;70:244–9.
  1. DoriaA, GilE, DelgadoE, Alonso-LlamesM. Recurrent dislocation of the elbow. Int Orthop. 1990;14:41–5.
  1. DoornbergJN, RingD. Coronoid fracture patterns. J Hand Surgery Am. 2006;31:45–52.
  1. O'DriscollSW, MorreyBF, KorinekS, et al. Elbow subluxation and dislocation. A spectrum of instability. Clin Orthop. 1992;280:186–97.
  1. DoornbergJN, RingDC. Fracture of the anteromedial facet of the coronoid process. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2006;88:2216–24.
  1. JobeFW, StarkH, LombardoSJ. Reconstruction of the ulnar collateral ligament in athletes. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1986;68:1158–63.
  1. PughDM, WildLM, SchemitschEH, KingGJ, McKeeMD. Standard surgical protocol to treat elbow dislocations with radial head and coronoid fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2004;86:1122–30.
  1. GiannicolaG, SacchettiFM, GrecoA, CinottiG, PostacchiniF. Management of complex elbow instability. Musculoskelet Surg. 2010;94(1):S25–36.
  1. SotereanosDG, DarlisNA, WrightTW, GoitzRJ, KingGJ. Unstable fracture-dislocations of the elbow. Instr Course Lect. 2007;56:369–76.
  1. GreenspanA, NormanA, RosenH. Radial head-capitellum view in elbow trauma: clinical application and radiographic-anatomic correlation. Am J Roentgenol. 1984;143(2):355–9.
  1. GreenspanA, NormanA. Radial head-capitellum view: an expanded imaging approach to elbow injury. Radiology. 1987;164(1):272–4.
  1. O'DriscollSW, JupiterJB, CohenM, et al. Difficult Elbow Fractures: Pearls and Pitfalls. Instructional Course Lectures. 2003;52:113–34.
  1. RingD, JupiterJB. Fracture-dislocation of the elbow. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1998;80:566–80.
  1. CloskeyRF, GoodeJR, KirschenbaumD, CodyRP. The role of the coronoid process in elbow stability. A biomechanical analysis of axial loading. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2000;82-A(12):1749-53.
  1. McKeeMD, SchemitschEH, SalaMJ, et al. The pathoanatomy of lateral ligamentous disruption in complex elbow instability. J Should Elbow Surg. 2003;12:391–6.
  1. PaiV, PaiV. Use of suture anchors for coronoid fractures in the terrible triad of the elbow. J Orthop Surg (Hong Kong). 2009;17(1):31–5.
  1. ClarkeSE, LeeSY, RaphaelJR. Coronoid fixation using suture anchors. Hand (NY). 2009; 4(2):156–60.
  1. GarriguesGE, WrayWH, LindenhoviusAL, RingDC, RuchDS. Fixation of the coronoid process in elbow fracture-dislocations. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2011;93(20):1873–81.
  1. MoritomoH, TadaK, YoshidaT, KawatsuN. Reconstruction of the coronoid for chronic dislocation of the elbow. Use of a graft from the olecranon in two cases. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1998;80(3):490–2.
  1. MorreyBF. Complex instability of the elbow. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1997;79:460–9.
  1. McGinleyJC, RoachN, HopgoodBC, KozinSH. Nondisplaced elbow fractures: A commonly occurring and difficult diagnosis. Am J Emerg Med. 2006;24:560–6.
  1. McKeeMD, PughDM, WildLM, SchemitschEH, KingGJ. Standard surgical protocol to treat elbow dislocations with radial head and coronoid fractures. Surgical technique. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2005;87(1):22–32.
  1. TashjianRZ, KatarincicJA. Complex elbow instability. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2006;14(5):278–86.
  1. LeighWB, BallCM. Radial head reconstruction versus replacement in the treatment of terrible triad injuries of the elbow. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 2012;21(10):1336–41.

Fractures of the Olecranon11

WY Shen
 
Introduction
Fractures of the olecranon affect the articular surface of the humeroulnar joint. Thus, the aim of treatment is to restore function of the humeroulnar joint. To achieve that aim, several treatment goals must be attained:
  1. Congruent reconstruction of the articular surface.
  2. Stable reconstruction of the extensor mechanism to allow immediate full-range mobilization.
  3. For high-grade fractures associated with instability of the elbow joint, stability of the elbow joint must be restored.
 
Classification
There is no universally accepted classification system. AO groups offers a comprehensive classification system. However, Mayo classification,1 which classifies these fractures based on stability, displacement and comminution is commonly used. Type I fractures are undisplaced, Type II fractures are displaced and stable (fragments displaced > 3 mm but collateral ligaments intact and forearm is stable in relation to elbow) and Type III fractures are displaced and unstable (displaced fracture fragments, forearm is unstable in relation to the humerus. This is a fracture-dislocation). Each is divided into subtype A (noncomminuted) or B (comminuted).
 
Simple Transverse Mid-Olecranon Fractures—Tension Band Wiring
For simple transverse mid-olecranon fractures as shown in Figures 11.1A to C, the tension band wiring technique offers a simple, cheap and effective fixation.
Tension band wiring converts the cyclic tension load to dynamic compressive forces at the fracture ends. Thus, compression is generated when the patient mobilizes the elbow. The friction generated by the compressive forces holds the reduction in place until the fracture heals. Figures 11.2A and B explain why it works well in simple transverse fractures but not oblique or comminuted ones.
The patient should be placed in lateral decubitus position, with the arm supported by a T-bar, or in a prone position with the forearm hanging over the edge of the operating table (Figs 11.3A to C). The latter is less favored by the anesthetists, but makes intraoperative fluoroscopy much easier. 116
Figures 11.1A to C: (1) Kirschner wires should be targetted to just penetrate the anterior cortex; (2) The wire loop should be passed under the triceps insertion. The loop should be knotted and buried here; (3) The wire loop should not be knotted here as it will cause skin impingement and great discomfort; (4) The ends of the Kirschner wires should be cut, bent and buried here
Figures 11.2A and B: Schematic drawing showing how tension band wiring works in a simple transverse fracture (A) as against the case of an oblique fracture (B). In Figure A, the pull of the extensors and flexors will generate compressive forces at the fracture plane to maintain reduction, whilst in Figure B, shearing forces to displace the fracture
Figures 11.3A to C: (A) The patient could be positioned in lateral decubitus or (B) prone. The former, as shown in Figure (C), is much preferred by the anesthetist
117The incision is made in the midline, but skirted to the medial side at the tip of the olecranon to avoid a tender scar at that spot. The fracture is thus exposed.
Some surgeons prefer to expose via a posterior incision with the patient supine and the injured arm placed over the abdomen. Though this position greatly facilitate the use of the C-arm for intraoperative checks, and simultaneous operation on other limbs, this is not advocated except for the most experienced surgeon as it is much more difficult to orientate the anatomy appropriately (Figs 11.4A to D). Moreover, should the fracture turn out to be more complex than anticipated, the awkward positioning would render it difficult to deploy other methods of fixation (Figs 11.5A to C).
Figures 11.4A to D: These humeral and olecranon fractures were fixed with the patient lying supine. It is obvious that both were not well fixed. Both operations would be much easier if operated with the patient lying lateral or prone, and the fractures exposed and fixed via a posterior exposure
Figures 11.5A to C: The olecranon fracture was one of many fractures in this young patient with multiple injuries. It was operated on in the supine position in order that other teams can work on other regions at the same time. The intraoperative X-ray (A) showed that this was not a simple transverse fracture. It might have been better fixed if a hook plate was used. However, the surgeon was reluctant to use a hook plate in the supine position. The fracture ended up inadequately reduced, and inadequately fixed as shown in (B) and (C)
118In the situation of a polytraumatized patient with many fractures to fix, it is tempting to do everything at one go in the supine position. Often times, optimal fixation is compromised by this approach. The concept of Damage Control Orthopedics should be applied in such situations. The individual operations should be staged. Each fracture should receive optimal reduction and fixation in order that the patient regains maximum function in all injured regions.
A common problem of the standard Weber-Vasey fixation is that the short Kirschner-wires, which are placed in the intramedullary position and thus do not penetrate the anterior cortex of the ulna, tend to back out with elbow motion and cause impingement of the skin, or even penetration of the skin. Sometimes, the fixation is lost when the wires back out.
Many modifications of the Weber-Vasey technique had been proposed, but two of them are particularly useful. In one, long Kirschner wires are used, and these should reach the distal quarter of the ulnar medullary canal. The natural curvature of the ulnar medullary canal provides reliable three-point fixation against the straight Kirschner wires to generate friction and prevent backing out of the wires.8 In the other, the Kirschner wires are aimed at penetrating the anterior cortex just distal to the coronoid process (Figs 11.1A to C). With the latter approach, the Kirschner wires must not protrude more than 2-3 mm from the anterior surface of the cortex, else it might cause injury to anterior neurovascular structures. In both, the proximal ends of the wires must be nicely bent and buried into the tip of the olecranon to prevent impingement.5
The figure-of-eight wire loop should be passed under the triceps tendon, not around the proximal ends of the Kirschner wires.1 The wire loop is best passed with the use of a wide-bore needle. At the distal end, the wire loop is passed through a 2 mm drill hole made 2 to 3 cm distal to the fracture line. The loop is tightened by twisting at the proximal end of the olecranon tip, the twisted ends are then cut, bent and buried into the triceps tendon. Twisting or knotting at the subcutaneous border of the ulna should be avoided as it would cause impingement and great discomfort.
Except for the most experienced surgeons, intra-operative X-rays are mandatory to check articular congruity and position of implants.
 
Transverse Fractures with Articular Depressed Fragment
Olecranon fractures that appear to be simple transverse often come with an inconspicuous intra-articular depressed fragment. These are often not well shown in the injury film unless the olecranon is oriented for true lateral projection. At other times, the depressed fragment is inconspicuous but would not escape the careful scrutiny of an experienced surgeon. Several examples are shown in Figures 11.6 to 11.8. Thus, it is highly recommended that all olecranon fractures should be carefully screened with the C-arm before the patient is positioned lateral.
When there is an articular depressed fragment, this fragment must be reduced by elevating it against the trochlea. The reduced fragment is held in position using a thin Kirschner wire to push it against the trochlea while the olecranon tip is pulled down with a wire loop over the triceps insertion (Figs 11.9A and B). Kirschner wires are then inserted very close to the subchondral bone of the depressed fragment in order to keep it in place. A good quality lateral X-ray check at this juncture is mandatory to ascertain the appropriate reduction of the depressed fragment, and the position of the Kirschner wires.
An alternative is to put cancellous bone graft in the medullary void to support the reduced fragment.119
Figures 11.6A to C: (A) The depressed articular fragment was quite inconspicuous. To the experienced eye, it would be detected as one notices the widening of the joint space from the coronoid towards the olecranon tip; (B) Without a inquisitive eye, the surgeon missed the obvious depression even in this intraoperative X-ray. The surgeon's attention was completely occupied with checking the position of the implants, and thus neglected the articular incongruity; (C) The depression remained unreduced in the post-operative film
Figures 11.7A to C: The depressed articular fragment was quite inconspicuous. The experienced surgeon would notice the narrowing at the trough of the olecranon curve and deduce the presence of the depressed fragment. The depressed fragment was still hidden in this oblique intraoperative X-ray, only becoming apparent in the postoperative X-ray
120
Figures 11.8A to C: The depressed articular fragment was completely hidden in this oblique view of the olecranon. The narrowing at the site of the arrow might be a hint. Unaware of this possibility, the surgeon missed the obvious depression in this intraoperative X-ray. The depression was best shown in this postoperative X-ray taken in true lateral. The surgeon failed to fulfill one of the primary aims of this operation
Figures 11.9A and B: 1. The intra-articular loose fragment was reduced by pushing it against the trochlea. The thin K-wire, represented by the blue arrow, pushing it against the trochlea was maintained until the olecranon process was pulled down to keep the fragment in place. 2. The olecranon process was pulled down with the wire loop round the triceps insertion. 3. K-wire was inserted close to the subchondral bone to support the loose articular fragment (K-wire marked with green arrow)
121
 
Comminuted or Oblique Fractures—Hook-plating
Simple tension band wiring is not stable enough in these situations. Various anatomic olecranon plates are recently introduced.3 However, they all share one major drawback– they are too thick and bulky for the olecranon which is usually a subcutaneous bony prominence. The author is in favor of using simple one-third tubular plates for this purpose.2 The most distal hole in a seven-hole one third tubular plate is cut. The cut ends are then bent into hooks. The end of the plate is slightly contoured to fit the olecranon tip. The hooks are gently tapped to purchase the periosteal soft tissues at the olecranon tip. The distal end of the plate is fixed with cortical screws placed eccentric to generate some compression to enhance stability. The hook plate is further protected with a Figure-of-eight tension band wire loop2 (Figs 11.10A to F).
Figures 11.10A to F: (A) The end hole on a seven-hole 1/3 tubular plate was cut; (B) The sharp cut ends were bent into hooks; (C) The bent ends seen sideways; (D) Another bend was added; (E) The preoperative X-ray; (F) The postoperative X-ray showing hook plate in place, with additional Figure-of-eight wire loop, and “spring plate” on medial surface to fix the comminuted fracture
122
Figures 11.11A to H: (A and B) Continued from Figure 11.9. The other K-wire (green arrow) was inserted obliquely to stop the fragments from sliding across the oblique fracture line; (C) Figure-of-eight wire loop tightened. Oblique K-wire removed. Second subchondral K-wire inserted; (D and E) Hook-plate added on posteromedial aspect as antiglide plate on the oblique fracture plane; (F) When forearm movement was tested, something was blocking pronation and supination. Careful screening revealed that the screw (green arrow) was too long. The offending screw was replaced with one 2 mm shorter. Free forearm rotation was restored. The screw was too long because measurement was taken before the plate was fully compressed onto the cortex; (G and H) Postoperative X-ray showing that the comminuted oblique fracture was well reduced and well fixed
123In comminuted fractures, the fragments must be stabilized and maintained in congruent shape against the trochlea.
In all olecranon fractures, use of reduction clamps or bone clips to hold reduction should be avoided. The bone is usually too soft to take the insult, and might result in further comminution. The proximal fragment (olecranon process) is best pulled down by means of a wire loop passed under the triceps tendon.
The use of hook-plate is highlighted in several cases presented (Figs 11.11 to 11.14).
Despite its low profile, the one-third tubular hook-plate still produces discomfort in most patients. More often than not, patients demand removal of these offending implants once the mission of healing the fracture is accomplished.5
Figures 11.12A to D: (A and B) Preoperative X-rays showed a “lengthened” olecranon process. This turned out to be a long oblique fracture; (C and D) The long oblique fracture was reduced, fixed with two lag screws, and protected by posterior hook-plate and Figure-of-eight wire loop
124
Figures 11.13A to C: (A) This olecranon process also appeared too long. Again, an oblique fracture was found on opening up; (B) Fixation was secured with lag screw, hook-plate and wire loop (C) Loose fragments from fractured radial head were excised
Figures 11.14A to C: Comminuted olecranon fracture fixed with lag screws, hook-plate and wire loop. Here, the proximal bend on the plate was not fashioned so that the plate could be fixed more distally to accommodate the long oblique fracture
125
Figures 11.15A to D: (A) This is a closed fracture dislocation in a 74-year-old lady with rheumatoid arthritis; (B) The dislocation was reduced and the fracture itself was well reduced and fixed. However, additional measures to maintain stability was not instigated; (C) Elbow joint remained unstable at 12 weeks; (D) Plate fractured at 16 weeks
 
Transolecranon Fracture-Dislocations—External Fixation
Fractures belonging to Mayo Clinic Classification Type III1,4 constitute around 5% of all olecranon fractures. These are fractures associated instability of the elbow joint. Most of them will remain unstable, and elbow function becomes severely jeopardized, if the olecranon fracture alone was stabilized (Figs 11.15A to D).3,5,7
The fixation of the olecranon fracture itself is not different from those described above, though the fractures are usually more comminuted than those without dislocation or subluxation. However, the instability needs additional attention. Ligamentous disruptions need to be repaired or re-attached. This might mean plaster immobilization following fracture fixation. In order to allow early mobilization, a hinged external fixator that allows flexion extension exercise of the elbow joint might be indicated (Figs 11.16A to H).
 
Complications
Complications of the olecranon fractures are related to the fracture and accompanying trauma, the choice of implant, and surgical technique. The most common complications are related to hardware, namely migration of K-wires, irritating of skin by wires, breakage of circlage wires etc. Most patients will require removal of hardware once the fracture has healed. Loss of movements especially terminal extension, loss of reduction 126and the gap at fracture site, heterotopic ossification, ulnar nerve paraesthesia, non- union and secondary osteoarthritis may occur.
 
Results
The results of the treatment of uncomplicated olecranon fractures are quite good, with union rate of over 95%. However, long-term follow-up following olecranon fracture shows degenerative changes in more than 50% of cases. Rommens et al10 evaluated functional results after operative treatment of olecranon fractures. Patients with an unstable elbow (Mayo type III) had a higher loss of elbow function than others. There was correlation between fracture morphology as well as suboptimal osteosynthesis, and, arthrosis. Patients more often had subjective complaint and loss of function in activities of daily-living before hardware removal than after. Authors concluded that primary elbow instability and fracture morphology are prognostic factors for elbow function and development of arthrosis after operative treatment of elbow fractures. Hardware removal after fracture healing was recommended in all cases in view of frequent patient complaints related to the implants.
 
Conclusion
Olecranon fractures are intra-articular fractures involving a highly mobile joint. Good recovery of upper limb function can only be achieved if articular congruity is restored, and the elbow is allowed mobilization while the fracture healing takes place. Anatomic reduction and stable internal fixation are mandatory. The initial films often fail to reveal the full complexity. Careful scrutiny of fracture with fluoroscopy is an important prerequisite towards appropriate choice and execution of fixation. Stable and undisplaced fractures can be treated nonoperatively while the excision of the olecranon fragment(s) should be reserved for those cases when anatomic restoration cannot be achieved with internal fixation.
 
Illustrative Case
A 19-year-old motorcyclist had MVA with multiple injuries including the compound fracture-dislocation of the left elbow (Fig. 11.16A). Examination under anesthesia revealed gross comminution of the olecranon and unstable elbow joint (Figs 11.16B and C). Patient had debridement and suturing of 1 cm size laceration on the elbow and hinged external fixator was applied (Fig. 11.16D). Five days later, double plating Figure- of-eight with wire loop was done while retaining the fixator (Figs 11.16E and F). Fixator was removed at 6 weeks. X-rays taken at 6 month showed satisfactory reconstruction. The elbow range of movements achieved was 40 to 140 degrees.127
Figures 11.16A to H: (A) A 19-year-old motorcyclist with multiple injuries. Fracture dislocation of elbow with a 1 cm wound; (B) EUA revealed gross comminution and unstable elbow joint; (C) Elbow subluxed when traction was relaxed; (D) Hinged external fixator installed, with axis centered; (E and F) Postoperative X-ray after double plating done 5 days later. No attempt was made to open the joint and reduce the multiple articular fragments. Fixator removed at 12 weeks; (G and H) X-ray taken at 6 months. Range of motion was 40 to 140
References
  1. CabanelaM, MorreyB. The elbow and its disorders. Philadelphia: WB Saunders;  2000. pp. 365-79.
  1. GerberC, StokarP, GanzR. The technique of open reduction and tension band augmented plate fixation of comminuted fractures of the olecranon. Techniques in Orthopaedics. 1991;6(2):41–4.
  1. LavigneG, BaratzM. Fractures of the olecranon. J Am Soc Surg Hand. 2004;4(2):94.
  1. MorreyBF. Current concepts in the treatment of fractures of the radial head, the olecranon, and the coronoid. Instructional Course Lectures. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery-American Volume. 1995;77:316–27.
  1. RommensPM, KuchleR, SchneiderRU, ReuterM. Olecranon fractures in adults: factors influencing outcome. Injury. 2004;35(11):1149–57.
  1. KuchleR, SchneiderRU, ReuterMM. Olecranon fractures in adults: factors influencing outcome. Injury. 2004;35(11):1149–57.
  1. SchatzkerJ. Fractures of the olecranon. In: SchatzkerJ, TileM (Eds). The Rationale of Operative Fracture Care, 3rd edn. New York: Springer-Verlag;  2005. pp. 123-9.
  1. WeseleyMS, BarenfeldPA, EisensteinAL. The use of the Zuelzer hook plate in fixation of olecranon fractures. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery-American Volume. 1976;58(6):859–63.
  1. WuCC, TaiCL, ShihCH. Biomechanical comparison for different configurations of tension band wiring techniques in treating an olecranon fracture. Journal of Trauma-Injury Infection and Critical Care. 2000;48(6):1063–7.
  1. RommensPM, SchneiderRU, ReuterM. Functional results after operative treatment of olecranon fractures. Acta Chir Belg. 2004;104:191–7.

Radial Head Fractures: ORIF12

Bhavuk Garg, Prakash P Kotwal
 
Introduction
The radial head is a very important structure responsible for elbow stability. It plays a vital role in valgus as well as longitudinal stability of elbow.1-5 This contribution becomes more important if associated with other injuries around elbow like elbow dislocation or other fracture combinations around elbow. Fall on the outstretched hand with elbow in extension and forearm in pronation is the most common mechanism leading to radial head fractures. Radial head fractures constitute 4% of all fractures and around 30% of all elbow fractures.6
While historically radial head fractures were managed by conservative treatment or excision of radial head, improvement in surgical techniques and availability of very low profile mini-fragment screws and locking plates have brought a paradigm shift in the management of radial head fractures.
Management of radial head fractures depends upon the degree of displacement as well as comminution, patient's functional demands and presence of other associated injuries. This chapter will focus on isolated radial head fractures.
 
Classification
Mason7 classified radial head fractures into 3 types (Figs 12.1A to D):
  1. Type I: Undisplaced (<2 mm displacement).
  2. Type II: Partial articular, displaced (>2 mm displacement).
  3. Type III: Comminuted.
Johnston8 modified this classification in 1962 by adding elbow dislocation with radial head fracture as Type IV.
 
Treatment
While conservative management is universally accepted to be the best for Type I fractures, Type III fractures especially in older individuals or if having more than 3 fragments are best managed by radial head arthroplasty. Type II fractures are usually managed with open reduction and internal fixation. Usually mini-fragment screws are enough for isolated radial head fractures, but a plate may be necessary if associated with radial neck fracture.130
Figures 12.1A to D: Mason classification of radial head fractures
 
Surgical Technique
 
POSITIONING AND ANESTHESIA (FIG. 12.2)
The patient is placed in supine position with tourniquet control of upper extremity. The elbow and forearm is kept on a side-table. We prefer general anesthesia, however, a regional anesthesia can also be used.
 
APPROACH
A standard Kocher lateral approach is used starting from lateral epicondyle to a point over posterior border of ulna, around 6 to 7 cm below olecranon (Fig. 12.3). After cutting the deep fascia, the space between anconeus and extensor carpi ulnaris is identified (Fig. 12.4). It is easier to identify the plane distally as both muscle share a common aponeurosis proximally. A lateral collateral ligament is identified (Fig. 12.5) and a longitudinal incision is made in its anterior aspect. The annular ligament and capsule are cut in the same line. It is important to keep the forearm pronated to avoid injury to the posterior interosseous nerve. It is also important to dissect carefully if one needs to expose around radial neck or below.131
Figure 12.2: Positioning of the patient
Figure 12.3: Incision extends from lateral epicondyle (LE) to a point 6 cm below the tip of olecranon on posterior border of ulna
Figure 12.4: Kocher interval between anconeus and extensor carpi ulnaris
132
Figure 12.5: Identification of lateral collateral ligament
Figure 12.6: Identification of fracture fragments
 
EXPOSURE OF FRACTURE
Usually cutting the capsule leads to drainage of fracture hematoma. All loose small fragments not amenable to fixation are discarded. Attempt is made to preserve all soft tissue attachments. All fracture fragments are identified (Fig. 12.6) with the help of forearm supination and pronation. Areas of impaction are also identified. These impacted areas, if any should be elevated carefully (Fig. 12.7).
 
FRACTURE REDUCTION AND PROVISIONAL STABILIZATION
All fracture fragments are reduced anatomically and fixed provisionally with K-wires (Fig. 12.8). One should be careful with their retractors as posterior interosseous nerve run very close to bone specially just opposite to bicipital tuberosity (Fig. 12.9).
Figure 12.7: Elevation of impacted fragments
133
Figure 12.8: Provisional fixation with K-wires
Figure 12.9: Metaphyseal defect seen after provisional fixation
In case of more than two fragments, this K-wire fixation may be staged fixing one fragment first, followed by reduction and fixation of another fragment. Sometimes one may have to reconstruct the radial head on table if big loose fragments are present. In case of any bony defect (Fig. 12.9), bone graft from tip of olecranon or bone substitutes may be used to fill the gap (Fig. 12.10).
 
ZONE OF SAFETY (FIG. 12.11)
There is a 110-degree arc zone on the posterolateral aspect of the radial head, which does not enjoy contact with ulnar notch during forearm rotation. This area provides a safe zone for placement of hardware whether screws or plate as it does not cause any 134proximal radio-ulnar impingement.6
Figure 12.10: Filling of defect with bone substitutes
Figure 12.11: Zone of safety
This zone can be identified between two lines drawn through radial styloid and Lister tubercle with forearm in neutral rotation.9
 
DEFINITIVE FIXATION
A diversity of implants is available today for definitive fixation ranging from mini-fragment screws, headless compression screws and low profile plates. The 2.4 or 2.7 mm screws are most commonly used. It is important to ensure that screw head is buried or flushed completely with the articular surface and a countersunk may be used for this purpose.
Usually plates are reserved for fractures extending or involving radial neck. If using plate, it is important to pre-bend the plate around head-neck junction. It is important to have a good anatomical reduction and stability at the end of fixation (Fig. 12.12).135
Figure 12.12: Plate application in safe zone
Figures 12.13A and B: Final check under image intensifier
It is important to check the length of screws under image so that they do not protrude from other cortex (Figs 12.13A and B).
 
WOUND CLOSURE
Annular ligament and capsule are closed loosely so that they do not cause excessive friction or compression over the radial head during forearm motion. Rest of the wound is closed in normal fashion layer by layer (Fig. 12.14).
 
Postoperative Protocol
Generally, stitches are removed after 2 weeks. We keep the patient in a removable splint for 2 to 3 weeks and a passive ROM is used in this period. After three weeks, active assisted and active exercises are initiated. Full weight-bearing is usually allowed after three months.136
Figure 12.14: Meticulous closure is very important
 
Complications
Following complications related to open reduction and internal fixation of radial head fractures have been described:
  1. Injury to posterior interosseous nerve
  2. Nonunion
  3. Hardware failure
  4. Hardware impingement
  5. Stiffness of elbow
  6. Restriction of supination/pronation.
 
Results
Kass et al10 did a systemic review of radial head fracture studies, open reduction and internal fixation was successful in 76 of 82 patients (93%) (81–100% success in individual studies). Jupiter et al11 published a series of 46 patients of radial head fractures treated by ORIF in 2002, the result was unsatisfactory for four of the fifteen patients with a comminuted Mason Type-2 fracture of the radial head; all four fractures had been associated with a fracture-dislocation of the forearm or elbow, and all four patients recovered <100 degrees of forearm rotation. Thirteen of the fourteen patients with a Mason Type-3 comminuted fracture with more than three articular fragments had an unsatisfactory result. In contrast, all fifteen patients with an isolated, noncomminuted Type-2 fracture had a satisfactory result. Of the twelve patients with a Type-3 fracture that split the radial head into two or three simple fragments, none had early failure, one had nonunion, and all had an arc of forearm rotation of > or = 100 degrees
 
Illustrative Case
A 32-year-old female presented to us with a Mason Type II fracture of radial head (Figs 12.15A and B) without associated radial neck fracture. Fracture was operated and fixed with two 2.4 mm mini-fragment screws (Figs 12.16A and B). At six months, fracture was healed and patient had full range of motion without any associated pain (Figs 12.17A to D).137
Figures 12.15A and B: Type II radial head fracture
Figures 12.16A and B: Fixation with 2 mini-fragment screws
138
Figures 12.17A to D: Full range of motion at six months
References
  1. MorreyBF, TanakaS, AnKN. Valgus stability of the elbow. A definition of primary and secondary constraints. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1991;265:187–95.
  1. O'DriscollSW, BellDF, MorreyBF. Posterolateral rotatory instability of the elbow. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1991;73:440–6.
  1. BeingessnerDM, DunningCE, GordonKD, et al. The effect of radial head excision and arthroplasty on elbow kinematics and stability. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2004;86-A:1730-9.
  1. MorreyBF, AnKN, Stormont, et al. Force transmission through the radial head. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1988;70:250–6.
  1. RabinowitzRS, LightTR, HaveyRM, et al. The role of the interosseous membrane and triangular fibrocartilage complex in forearm stability. J Hand Surg Am. 1994;19:385–93.
  1. VanBeekC, LevineWN. Radial Head—Resect, Fix, or Replace. Oper Tech Orthop. 2010;20:2–10.
  1. MasonL. Some observations on fracture of the head of the radius with a review of a hundred cases. Br J Surg. 1954;42:123–32.
  1. JohnstonGW. A follow-up of one hundred cases of fracture of the head of the radius with a review of the literature. Ulster (Med J). 1962;31:51–6.
  1. CaputoAE, MazzoccaAD, SantoroVM. The non-articulating portion of the radial head: anatomic and clinical correlations for internal fixation. J Hand Surg Am. 1998;23:1082–90.
  1. KaasL, StruijsPA, RingD, vanDijk CN, EygendaalD. Treatment of Mason type II radial head fractures without associated fractures or elbow dislocation: a systematic review. J Hand Surg Am. 2012;37(7):1416–21.
  1. RingD, QuinteroJ, JupiterJB. Open reduction and internal fixation of fractures of the radial head. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2002;84(10):1811–5.

Radial Head Implant Arthroplasty13

Rohit Arora, Martin Lutz, Michael Blauth
 
Introduction
The radial head has an important function as a secondary stabilizer resisting posterolateral and valgus instability of the elbow and proximal migration of the radius. The impact of the radial head becomes evident in the situation of injury to the ulnar collateral ligament of the elbow or the interosseous membrane of the forearm.1 The increasing understandings of the importance of the radial head to the stability of the elbow and forearm led surgeons to attempt to reconstruct and save even comminuted radial head fractures by internal fixation.2 Early reports of open reduction and internal fixation in cases with minimal displacement and stable isolated head fractures were promising.3 Other authors treating cases of unstable, displaced, comminuted fractures of the radial head reported about early failures, nonunions and restricted postoperative active range of motion of elbow and forearm.4
The increasing availability and the use of metal radial head prosthesis for complex and not reconstructible radial head fractures put the role of open reduction and internal fixation and simple radial head excision in question. Historically the complex and comminuted radial head fractures were treated by simple radial head excision. Latest long-term studies report about late complications of radial head excisions including proximal radial migration causing wrist pain, decreased grip strength, ulnohumeral arthritis and valgus instability.5
Meanwhile radial head arthroplasty provides an acceptable alternative with satisfying results in cases with complex radial head fractures. Late complications associated with radial head excision can be avoided.
 
Mechanism of Injury
The radial head fractures absorbing the indirect force of the fall and impacts on the capitellum. It also can fracture via direct impact or as one component of higher-energy trauma.6
 
Classification
Fracture of the radial head is associated with a wide variety of injury patterns of the elbow. Alone the various combinations of proximal ulna and radius fracture patterns will not be clarified by the existing fracture classification of the radial head, which has been classified by Mason7 with a subsequent modification by Hotchkiss.8140
Figures 13.1A to C: (A and B) AP radiograph showing a radial head fracture; (C) Lateral CT scan of the same patient showing a Mason Type 3 fracture
Mason classified fractures of the radial head into the following types:
Type 1
Incomplete or complete rim fractures without displacement
Type 2
Complete rim fractures with displacement
Type 3
Comminuted fractures involving the whole radial head and this classification has been modified by Hotchkiss to include
Type 4
Fracture dislocation.
 
Preoperative Evaluation
A careful clinical examination should include: the neurovascular status of the limb, the shoulder and the wrist. Initial treatment of radial fracture associated with an elbow dislocation, consists of a closed reduction and splinting under local or general anesthesia. The decision for surgery is based on good-quality post-reduction anteroposterior and lateral radiographs. We routinely use CT scanning for these injuries as the size of radial head fragments and other fractured structures are typically well visualized on the CT scan. A 3D CT reconstruction is always helpful (Figs 13.1A to C).
 
Indication/Contraindication
Depending on the fracture pattern and associated soft-tissue injury several types of treatment exist for fractured radial heads. Regardless of the fracture type the goals of treatment for radial head fractures are to restore elbow stability, preserve elbow motion, and maintain the relative length of the radius. Radial head arthroplasty is indicated in cases with:
  • Extensive comminiution of the radial head
  • Substantial bone loss prohibiting internal fixation
  • Current instability resulting from elbow dislocation, collateral ligament injuries, coronoid fractures, olecranon fractures, or Essex-Lopresti injuries involving the interosseous membrane and distal radioulnar joint
  • Failure of radial head reconstruction including non-union, loss of reduction, recurrent elbow instability
Radial head arthroplasty is contraindicated in cases with:
  • Medical conditions precluding surgery
  • Isolated, stable and reconstruct able fractures of the radial head.
141
 
Surgical Implants
Most used radial head implants nowadays are made of metal, consisting of either cobalt-chromium or titanium. In comparison to the silicone implants, the metallic implants provide axial and valgus stability and avoid complications associated with silicone such as implant breakage and silicone induced synovitis. The surgeon has the possibility to choose between implants with loose-fitting stems and press-fit or cemented stems. Bipolar prostheses allow centering of the radiocapitellar joint as a result of an articulation at the head-neck junction.
 
Surgery
When faced with complex and comminuted radial head fractures, decision making either non-surgical treatment, open reduction and internal fixation, excision of the radial head, or radial head replacement might be difficult. If the radial head is not reconstructible, the treating surgeon has to decide between simply excising the native radial head versus replacing the radial head with a metallic implant.9 This decision should consider the presence of injury to the lateral ulnar collateral ligament and ulnar collateral ligament complex, which will lead to elbow instability if the radial head is not replaced and the ligaments are not repaired.10 Similarly, injury to the interosseous membrane will lead to longitudinal forearm instability without restoration of the radial head.11
 
Our Preferred Treatment Protocol
 
ANESTHESIA
General anesthesia with a tourniquet at upper arm inflated to 250 mmHg.
 
POSITION OF THE PATIENT
Prone position: This position permits easily a lateral approach to the elbow and also makes application of the hinged external fixator simpler due to the tendency for the elbow joint to be in a position of reduction rather than dislocation.
 
SURGICAL EXPOSURE
The radial head can be approached using the lateral approach. Lateral skin incision is employed centered just over the lateral humeral epicondyle. The forearm is maintained in pronation to maximize the distance between the posterior interosseous nerve and the surgical field. In comparison to the isolated radial head fractures, where we use the Kocher's interval between Anconeus and Extensor Carpi Ulnaris, in case of the terrible triad injuries, we gain access the joint through the interval created by the injury itself, rather than creating a separate arthrotomy. If the Kocher's interval is used, the capsular incision should be made anteriorly to the lateral ulnar collateral ligament to avoid injury to this important ligament complex.
Dividing the proximal edge of the supinator exposes the proximal radial diaphysis. The capsule is then elevated off the anterior aspect of the distal humerus continuing dis exposure distally across the radiocapitellar joint and through the annular ligament (Fig. 13.2).
The lateral ulnar collateral ligament can be saved, as long as the capsular incision remains anterior to the midaxial line of the radius. The anterior aspect of the radio-humeral joint including the radial head and coronoid process can be visualized and inspected. If the radial head is not repairable, we perform metallic radial head arthroplasty. If a reconstruction of the coronoid process is necessary, it can be done from the lateral side with the radial head excised. 142
Figure 13.2: The capsule and annular ligament (held by forceps) are incised, taking care to remain anterior to the lateral ulnar collateral ligament. (Abbreviations: RH: Radial head; EM: Extensor muscles; RCL: Radial collateral ligament; E: Lateral epicondyle)
Figure 13.3: Intraoperative situs showing comminuted radial head fracture. (Abbreviations: E: Lateral Epicondyle; *: Comminuted radial head fracture)
If the decision is made for radial head replacement, it is important to limit placement of retractors around the radial neck to avoid injury of the posterior interosseous nerve (Figs 13.3 and 13.4). To avoid this, we use an absorbable band to pull the radial shaft laterally. A neck cut is made perpendicular to the shaft to remove the fractured radial head. Care should be taken to avoid excessive radial neck excision to preserve the integrity and function of the annular ligament (Fig. 13.5).
Once the radial head is removed, valgus stability of the elbow is again assessed by stress testing as described by Bain and colleagous.12 A valgus stress is applied to the elbow with the forearm in a pronated position and the elbow in 30° of flexion. An ulnar collateral ligament injury can be confirmed if there is greater than 2 mm of narrowing between the radial neck and the capitellum.143
Figure 13.4: Comminuted radial head fracture where stable reconstruction was not possible
Figure 13.5: An absorbable band is used to pull the radial shaft laterally. A neck cut is made perpendicular to the shaft to remove the fractured radial head. (Abbreviation: RS: Radial shaft)
Valgus instability of the elbow in full extension is indicative of capsular injury in addition to an ulnar collateral ligament injury. Injury to the interosseous membrane and distal radioulnar joint is assessed by the “radius pull test”. The proximal radius is grasped and pulled proximally.13 With fluoroscopy on the wrist, proximal migration of the radius is determined as a change in the ulnar variance. A change in variance more than 3 mm suggests rupture of the interosseous membrane. According to Beingessner and colleagues14 lonely radial head replacement is insufficient to restore posterolateral stability if there is an associated injury of the lateral ulnar collateral ligament. So even in the setting of radial head arthroplasty, the lateral ulnar collateral ligament should be repaired.
After the radial head has been removed, the diameter and the thickness of the head are determined and an appropriate head size is chosen (Fig. 13.6).144
Figure 13.6: After the radial head has been removed, the diameter and the thickness of the head are determined and an appropriate head size is chosen
Figure 13.7: Radial over-lengthening in relation to the sigmoid notch. Lateral ulna-trochlear opening and an asymmetric joint space are visible
Replication of length is very critical and has a great impact on the clinical results. The major problem might be a too long prosthesis, which may lead to secondary radiocapitellar wear and erosions, as well as ulnohumeral arthritis (Fig. 13.7). A too short prosthesis may result in residual valgus instability and increased loads at the ulnohumeral joint due to the loss of the load-sharing role of the radial head. Doornberg and colleagous15 reported that the originally radial head lies an average of 0.9 mm distal to the proximal margin of the sigmoid notch of the olecranon, which can be used as a landmark to determine the radial head length. The medullary canal of the radial shaft is reamed until cortical contact is made (Fig. 13.8). The trial prosthesis is then inserted. Some implant designs (as used here) allow in situ expansion fitting of the radial head length.145
Figure 13.8: The medullary canal of the radial shaft is reamed until cortical contact is made
Figure 13.9: Starting with the shortest end of the trial gauge, sequentially increase the height by inserting the end of the gauge under the head of the assembly, until the head reaches the capitellum
Starting with the shortest end of the trial gauge, sequentially increase the height by inserting the end of the gauge under the head of the assembly, until the head reaches the capitellum. It is critical that the coronoid contacts the trochlea during this process. The coronoid separated from the trochlea is an indicator that the collar is too large (Fig. 13.9).
A too large radial head will result in a block to flexion and extension of the elbow. Intraoperative radiographs should be performed to confirm a correct placement of the stem and reduction of the ulnohumeral joint (Fig. 13.10).
Figure 13.10: The radial head implant should be checked intraoperatively for stability during elbow motion to ensure that any potential edge impingement of the implant and capitellum do not occur
146After an appropriate placement of the prosthesis is achieved, then the final implants are inserted. If avulsion of the lateral ligamentous complex from the posterolateral aspect of the distal humerus is associated with the radial head fracture, this tissue is repaired back to the distal humerus using multiple-suture anchors placed in the lateral epicondyle. Common extensor origin is reattached if disrupted.
 
The Use of Hinged External Fixation
After replacement of the radial head and ligamenteous repair is done, elbow stability is confirmed with the patient on the operating table. If the elbow seems unstable and tends to redislocate instead repairing the ulnar collateral ligament complex, we apply a hinged external fixator that will stabilize the joint in concentric position and allow immediate postoperative mobilization. In non-compliant patients we also tend to apply a hinged external fixator to avoid a splint and uncontrolled active range of motion. In these cases the hinged external fixator neutralizes the load on the radial head prosthesis and ligamentous structures and prevents redislocation and mechanical failure while immediate postoperative mobilization. In these cases the external fixator is left for 6 weeks.
 
Postoperative Treatment
We place the elbow with a radial head replacement and ligamentous repair in a splint with 90 degrees of flexion and as both, the lateral and medial ligamentous complex are injured, the forearm in neutral position for 6 weeks. Passive range of motion exercises out of the splint is started 3 days after surgery. At this time postoperative radiographs are performed to confirm concentric elbow reduction. Maximum elbow extension and forearm supination are avoided for the first 6 weeks. Strengthening exercises are started after secure fracture and ligament healing, usually at 8 weeks postoperatively.
 
Complications
Complications of these complex injuries may include:
  • Postoperative infection
  • Ulnar nerve dysfunction
  • Posterior interosseous nerve dysfunction
  • Immediate postoperative redislocation
  • Recurrent instability
  • Heterotropic ossification
  • Contracture and stiffness
  • Pain
  • Post-traumatic arthritis
  • CPRS Typ 1
 
Results
Holmenschlager16 evaluated 16 patients who were treated using radial head prosthesis. This group consisted of 14 patients with Mason-Johnston type IV fractures (defined as a radial head fracture with elbow instability) and 2 with Mason type III fractures. Seven of the patients had other associated fractures or ligament injuries where the author did not repair medial collateral ligament injuries. Most of the patients had radial head arthroplasty as an initial treatment and the cohort was followed-up for an average of 19 months. The mean loss of extension was 5°, with flexion reaching 128° and forearm rotation consisting of 77° of pronation and 79° of supination. Grip strength on the 147affected side was 10% weaker than the uninjured side. Using the Morrey classification 2 patients had excellent outcomes, 12 were good, 1 was fair, and 1 was poor. Complications included one transient radial nerve palsy, one case of complex regional pain syndrome, and 1 asymptomatic loosening of the implant.
 
Illustrative Case
A 50-year-old lady suffered posterolateral dislocation of her right elbow with comminuted fracture of the radial head (Figs 13.11A to C). Reduction of the dislocation and prosthetic replacement of the radial head (Figs 13.11D and E) restored anatomy and function with some terminal loss of elbow movements.
Figs 13.11A to E: Fracture dislocation of right elbow. (A) Anteroposterior; (B) Lateral radiographs; (C) 3D reconstruction confirming posterolateral dislocation of elbow with comminuted fracture of the radial head; (D) Anteroposterior; (E) Lateral radiographs following reduction of the dislocation and prosthetic replacement of the radial head demonstrate restored anatomy
References
  1. MorreyBF, ChaoEF, HuiFC. Biomechanical study of the elbow following excision of the radial head. J Bone Joint Surg. 1979;61A:63-8.
  1. RingD, QuinteroJ, JupiterJB. Open reduction and internal fixation of fractures of the radial head. J Bone Joint Surg. 2002;84A:1811-5.
  1. KelberineF, BassersB, CurvaleG, GroulierP. Fractures of the radial head: an analysis of 62 surgically treated cases. Rev Chir Orthop. 1991;6:283–9.
  1. IkedaM, SugiyamaK, KangC, TakagakiT, OkaY. Comminuted fractures of the radial head. J Bone Joint Surg. 2005;87A:76-84.
  1. HerbertsonP, JosefsonPO, HasseriusR, BesjakowJ, NyquistF, KarlssonMK. Fractures of the radial head and neck treated with radial head excision. J Bone Joint Surg. 2004;86A:1925-30.
  1. O'DriscollSW, MorreyBF, AnKN. Elbow dislocation and subluxation: a spectrum of instability. Clin Orthop. 1992;280:186–97.
  1. MasonML. Some observations on fracture of the head of the radius with a review of one hunderd cases. Br J Surg. 1954;42:123–32.
  1. O'DriscollSW, AnKN, KorinekS, et al. Kinematics of semiconstrained total elbow arthroplasty. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1992;74:297–9.
  1. KnightDJ, RymaszewskiLA, AmisAA, MillerJH. Primary replacement of the fractured radial head with a metal prosthesis. J Bone Jont Surg. 1993;75B:572-6.
  1. HatringtonIJ, TountasAA. Replacment of the radial head in the treatment of unstable elbow fractures. Injury. 1981;12:405.
  1. HotchkissRN, AnKN, SowaDT, BastaS, WeilandAJ. An anatomic and mechanical study of the interosseous membrane of the forearm: pathomechanics of proximal migration of the radius. J Hand Surg. 1989;14:256–61.
  1. BainGI, AshwoodN, BairdR, UnniR. Management of Mason type-III radial head fractures with a titanium prosthesis, ligament repair and early mobilization. J Bone Joint Surg. 2005;87A:136-47.
  1. SmithAM, UrbanoskyLR, CastleJA, RushingJT, RuchDS. Radius pull test: predictor of longitudinal forearm instability. J Bone Joint Surg. 2002;84A:1970-6.
  1. BeingessnerDM, DunningCE, GordonKD, JohnsonJA, KingGJ. The effect of radial head excision and arthroplasty on elbow kinematics and stability. J Bone Joint Surg. 2004;86A:1730-9.
  1. DoornbergJN, LinzelDS, ZurakowskiD, RingD. Reference points for radial head prosthesis size. J Hand Surg. 2006;31A:53-7.
  1. HolmenschlagerF, HalmJP, WincklerS. Fresh fractures of the radial head: results with the Judet prosthesis. Rev Chir Orthop. 2002;88:387–97.

Terrible Triad of Elbow14

Rohit Arora, Michael Blauth
 
Introduction
The combination of elbow dislocation and associated radial head and coronoid fractures are a complex injury pattern. Poor results have been reported in patients sustaining the so-called terrible triad of the elbow.1,2 It is essential to define this particular injury pattern because, elbow function is often poor due to arthrosis, recurrent instability and/or stiffness from prolonged immobilization3,4 and the title “terrible triad” is well deserved for these injuries.
In contrast to simple elbow dislocation a terrible triad of elbow is inherently unstable and requires surgical intervention. Nonoperative treatment of this injury results in severe stiffness and a nonfunctional elbow range of motion. It may be possible to obtain a primary satisfactory closed reduction of the elbow, but retention of reduction (when ever possible) is associated with prolonged immobilization (in excessive elbow flexion) and unacceptable final clinical results. Long-term results of patients who sustained an elbow dislocation with a displaced radial head fracture, reported that redislocations occurred in those patients, who also had an untreated associated coronoid process fracture and in those patients, in whom the radial head and/or the coronoid fracture had not been reconstructed anatomically.5
 
Mechanism of Injury
The most common cause of injury is the combination of axial compression supination and valgus deformity at the elbow causing the dislocation with posterior or posterolateral displacement of the olecranon resulting from a fall from height or higher velocity activity6 (Fig. 14.1).
 
Classification
There is no consensus on classification of the defined “terrible triad” of the elbow. There are individual classifications for radial head fractures and for coronoid process fractures.
Mason classified fractures of the radial head into the following types (Fig. 14.2):
Type 1
Incomplete or complete rim fractures without displacement
Type 2
Complete rim fractures with displacement
Type 3
Comminuted fractures involving the whole radial head and this classification has been modified by Hotchkiss7 to include:
Type 4
Fracture dislocation
150
Figure 14.1: Mechanism of injury
Figure 14.2: Mason classification of radial head fractures
Regan and Morrey8 classified coronoid process fractures into three types (Figs 14.3A to C):
Type 1
Fracture of the tip of the coronoid process
Type 2
≤ 50% of the coronoid process
Type 3
> 50% of the coronoid process
 
Preoperative Evaluation
A careful clinical examination should include: the neurovascular status of the limb, the shoulder and the wrist. Initial treatment consists of a closed reduction and splinting under local or general anesthesia. The decision for surgery is based on good-quality post-reduction anteroposterior and lateral radiographs. We routinely use CT scanning for these injuries as the size and shape of the coronoid and radial head fragment are typically well visualized on the CT scan. A 3D CT reconstruction is always helpful (Fig. 14.4).151
Figures 14.3A to C: Coronoid classification by Regan and Morrey
Figure 14.4: Lateral radiographs showing elbow dislocation, radial head fracture, and Type 3 coronoid fracture
 
Indication/Contraindication
The majority of unstable fracture-dislocations of the elbow require surgical intervention.
Absolute indications are:
  • Nonconcentric reduction of the ulnohumeral joint
  • Nonconcentric reduction of the radiocapitellar joint
  • Inability of forearm rotation due to interposition of bony fragments
  • Inability of elbow flexion/extension due to interposition of bony fragments.
Contraindications are:
  • Medical conditions precluding surgery
  • Concentric reduction of the ulnohumeral and radiocapitellar joints
  • Nondisplaced relatively small fracture fragment of the radial head and the coronoid process.
152
 
Surgical Implants
Surgical implants and instruments should include:
  • Orthopedic set (Kirschner wires, retractors, etc.)
  • Small-fragment screws (conventional and cannulated)
  • Headless compression screws
  • Radial head replacement
  • Hinged external fixator.
 
Surgery
Treatment protocol consists of open reduction and internal fixation of the radial head if possible, or metallic replacement where anatomic reconstruction is not feasible. The coronoid fragment should be fixed where possible, the anterior capsule and the lateral ligament should be repaired. The medial collateral ligament heals with good functional results without direct repair in acute cases provided that the elbow is reduced anatomically and isometric elbow motion is possible. Intraoperatively, sufficient stability should be achieved so that the elbow does not subluxate through a range of motion from 30 to 130 degree with the forearm in neutral position. Medial soft-tissue repair or a hinged external fixator might address further intraoperative persisting instability.6
 
Our Preferred Treatment Protocol
 
ANESTHESIA
General anesthesia with a tourniquet at upper arm inflated to 250 mm Hg.
 
POSITION OF THE PATIENT
Prone position: This position permits easily a lateral approach to the elbow and also makes application of the hinged external fixator simpler due to the tendency for the elbow joint to be in a position of reduction rather than dislocation.
 
SURGICAL EXPOSURE
The lateral approach to the elbow is best for open reduction, inspection of the joint, reconstruction or replacement of the radial head, fixation of the coronoid process and repair of the posterolateral ligament complex.
Lateral skin incision is employed centered just over the lateral humeral epicondyle. The forearm is maintained in pronation to maximize the distance between the posterior interosseous nerve and the surgical field. In comparison to the isolated radial head fractures, where we use the Kocher's interval between anconeus and extensor carpi Ulnaris, in case of the terrible triad injuries, we gain access to the joint through the interval created by the injury itself, rather than creating a separate arthrotomy. Joint capsule, radial collateral ligament and mostly the lateral muscle origins are disrupted with this injury (Fig. 14.5).
The anterior aspect of the radiohumeral joint including the radial head and coronoid process can be visualized and inspected. Reconstruction of the coronoid process is the most demanding technical aspect of the reconstruction. If the coronoid fragment is large enough, it can be visualized through the lateral approach, especially through radial head defect or after the radial head has been resected. That is why we fix the coronoid process first, before we reconstruct the radial head. The coronoid fragment is reduced and held with a dental pick and fixed with cannulated screws inserted percutaneously from posterior surface of ulna. If fragment fixation through the lateral approach is not possible, direct exposure through the medial approach can be an option.9153
Figure 14.5: A 3D CT-Scan showing a terrible triad injury of same patient after reduction of the elbow dislocation
Figure 14.6: Joint capsule, radial collateral ligament and mostly the lateral muscle origins are disrupted with this injury. Dissection is performed through this traumatic rent. (Abbreviations: E: Lateral epicondyle; EM: Extenor muscle; RCL: Radial collateral ligament; * Radial head excised)
Figure 14.7: Lateral approach showing displaced coronoid fracture fragment. (Abbreviations: E: Lateral epicondyle; RS: Radial shaft; Arrow: Displaced Coronoid fracture fragment
Figure 14.8: Intensifier control showing indirect fixation of the Coronoid fragment
Small free fragments can be excised (Fig. 14.6). “Lasso” sutures through anterior capsule into ulna can augment stability (Fig. 14.7).
After fixation of the coronoid fragment, the radial head should be fixed. Small single irreparable fragment may be resected. Resection of radial head in this complex injury is contraindicated. Fragments are temporarily fixed with either a Kirschner wire or reduced using a clamp and then fixed with countersunk small-fragment screws (Fig. 14.8). Associated radial neck fractures are temporarily fixed with Kirschner wires and then stabilized with a mini-fragment “T-” plate.154
Figure 14.9: Method of suture repair of torn or detached radial collateral ligament complex using sutures through bone tunnels in the lateral epicondyle. (Abbreviations: E: Lateral epicondyle; RCL: Radial collateral ligament complex; E: Extensor muscles)
Fixed angle plate is preferred for comminuted fractures of the radial neck. The implants are always placed in the “safe zone” being the lateral nonarticular portion of the radial head with the forearm in neutral position (Fig. 14.9). If the radial head is not repairable, we prefer metallic radial head arthroplasty. Modular implants improve the ability to accurately restore the dimensions of the proximal radius by allowing independent adjustment of head diameter and height, and stem size.
Usually avulsion of the lateral ligamentous complex from the posterolateral aspect of the distal humerus is associated with the terrible triad injury. This ligament plays an important role in the varus stability of the elbow, especially the ulnar band, and should always be repaired. This tissue is repaired back to the distal humerus using multiple-suture anchors placed in the lateral condyle (Fig. 14.10). Common extensor origin is reattached if disrupted and the fascia of the Kocher interval is repaired (Figs 14.11 and 14.12). Medial ligamentous complex is reattached in similar fashion through the medial approach, if the elbow subluxates at 40 degree or more of flexion after appropriate reconstruction of the radial head and lateral ligament (Fig. 14.13).
Figure 14.10: Immediate postoperative anteroposterior radiograph with applied hinged external fixator of the same patient as Figure 14.4
155
Figure 14.11: Immediate postoperative later radiograph with applied hinged external fixator of the same patient as Figure 14.4
Figure 14.12: Long-term follow-up anteroposterior radiographs showing the radial head implant in proper position with some heterotopic ossification
Figure 14.13: Long-term follow-up lateral radiographs showing joint congruency
 
The Use of Hinged External Fixation
After bony and ligamentous repair is done, elbow stability is confirmed with the patient on the operating table. If the elbow seems unstable and tends to redislocate we apply a hinged external fixator that will stabilize the joint in concentric position and allow immediate postoperative mobilization. In noncompliant patients we also tend to apply a hinged external fixator to avoid a splint and uncontrolled active range of motion. In these cases the hinged external fixator neutralizes the load on the repaired bone and ligamentous structures and prevents redislocation and mechanical failure while permitting immediate postoperative mobilization. The external fixator is left for 6 weeks (Fig. 14.14).156
Figure 14.14: To secure soft-tissue healing and start early active range of motion, a hinged external fixator was applied
 
Postoperative Treatment
We place the elbow with a stable osseous and ligamentous repair in a splint with 90 degree of flexion and as both, the lateral and medial ligamentous complex are injured, the forearm in neutral position for 6 weeks. Passive range of motion exercises out of the splint are started 3 days after surgery. At this time, postoperative radiographs are performed to confirm concentric elbow reduction. Maximum elbow extension and forearm supination are avoided for the first 6 weeks. Forearm rotation is performed in elbow flexion to minimize stress on medial and lateral ligament repairs or injuries. Strengthening exercises are started after secure fracture and ligament healing, usually at 8 weeks postoperatively.
 
Complications
Complications of these complex injuries may include:
  • Postoperative Infection
  • Ulnar nerve dysfunction
  • Posterior interosseous nerve dysfunction
  • Immediate postoperative redislocation
  • Recurrent instability
  • Heterotropic ossification
  • Contracture and stiffness
  • Pain
  • Post-traumatic arthritis.
 
Results
Terrible triad of the elbow is a rare injury pattern, and there are few published series reporting about long-term results. Ring and colleagues4 followed 11 patients who had the terrible triad pattern of injury over the time period of two years. Seven of the patients were rated as having an unsatisfactory outcome, with five redislocations. All four patients who had their radial head removed at the time of surgery went on to redislocate.
Pugh and colleagues10 in a retrospective study about a cohort of 36 consecutive terrible triad injuries that had been treated with a similar protocol of radial head 157replacement or fixation, internal fixation of the coronoid, surgical ligamentous repair and in select cases repair of the medial collateral ligament and/or hinged external fixation with early active mobilization. Although the complication rate was about 22%, there was only one case of recurrent instability, and most were related to hardware removal with elbow release (n = 4) or synostosis (n = 2). Using the Mayo Elbow Performance Score, they achieved 28 excellent or good results. Mean arc of motion was 112 degree. Stiffness, as expected, was common in these patients. The authors advocated surgically repairing the lateral-sided lesions and fluoroscopically and clinically examining the medial side after concentric reduction.
 
Illustrative Case
A 35-year-old male was involved in a motor vehicle accident and suffered terrible triad of elbow. Attempt was made to reduce the elbow dislocation. Postreduction radiographs showed partially reduced dislocation (Figs 14.15A and B). Open reduction and internal fixation of radial head fracture and fixation of coronoid fracture was performed (Figs 14.16A and B). However, the ulnar collateral ligament was not addressed.
Figures 14.15A and B: (A) Anteroposterior; (B) Lateral radiographs demonstrating a partially reduced elbow dislocation with radia head fracture and coronoid fracture
Figures 14.16A and B: Immediate postoperative (A) Anteroposterior; (B) Lateral radiographs after open reduction and internal fixation of the radial head fracture and fixation of the coronoid fracture using “Lasso” sutures through anterior capsule into ulna showing a concentric reduction of the radiocapitellar joint with a persisting impression of the radial head fracture. The ulnar collateral ligament complex was not addressed
158
Figure 14.17: Four days after surgery the patient had pain while resting in a splint. The lateral radiograph showed elbow redislocation with redisplacement of the radial head fracture fragment
Figure 14.18: Lateral radiograph after revision-surgery showing radial head replacement. The lateral collateral ligament complex was reconstructed using a bone anchor. At the time of revision, the coronoid fragment was found to be multifragmented and, therefore, was resected. To secure soft-tissue healing and start early active range of motion, a hinged external fixator was applied
Figures 14.19A and B: Long-term follow-up (A) Anteroposterior; and (B) Lateral radiographs showing the radial head implant in proper position with some heterotopic ossification
159Elbow redislocated with redisplacement of radial head fracture fragment after 4 days (Fig. 14.17). Revision surgery with radial head replacement lateral collateral ligament reconstruction and excision of comminuted coronoid fragment was performed (Fig. 14.18). Long-term follow-up showed satisfactory result albeit with some heterotopic ossification (Figs 14.19A and B).
References
  1. BrobergMA, MorreyBF. Results of treatment of fracture-dislocations of the elbow. Clin Orthop. 1987;216:109–19.
  1. FrankleMA, KovalKJ, SandersRW, et al. Radial head fractures associated with elbow dislocations treated by immediate stabilization and early motion. J Shoulder Elbow Surg. 1999;8:355–61.
  1. HeimU. Combined fractures of the radius and the ulna at the elbow level in the adult. Analysis of 120 cases after more than 1 year. Rev Chir Orthop Reparatrice Appar Mot. 1998;842:142–53.
  1. RingD, JupiterJB, ZilberfarbJ. Posterior dislocation of the elbow with fractures of the radial head and coronoid. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2002;84:547–51.
  1. JosefssonPO, GentzCF, JohnellO, et al. Dislocations of the elbow and intra-articular fractures. Clin Orthop. 1989;246:126–30.
  1. O'DriscollSW, MorreyBF, AnKN. Elbow dislocation and subluxation: a spectrum of instability. Clin Orthop. 1992;280:186–97.
  1. O'DriscollSW, AnKN, KorinekS, et al. Kinematics of semiconstrained total elbow arthroplasty. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1992;74:297–9.
  1. ReganW, MorreyB. Coronoid process and Monteggia fractures. In: MorreyBF (Ed). The elbow and its disorders. 3rd edition. Philadelphia: WB Saunders;  2000. p. 49.
  1. Neill CageDJ, AbramsRA, CallahanJJ, et al. Soft tissue attachments of the ulnar coronoid process. An anatomic study with radiographic correlation. Clin Orthop. 1995;320:154–8.
  1. PughDM, WildLM, SchemitschEH, et al. Standard surgical protocol to treat elbow dislocations with radial head and coronoid fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2004;86:1122–30.

Distal Radial Fractures: Locking Compression Plate (LCP) Fixation15

Frankie Leung, Lau Tak-Wing
 
Introduction
Distal radius fractures account for 14% of all extremity injuries (Gellman H, 1998) and 17% of all fractures treated in the emergency department (Gellman H, 1998; Graff S and Jupiter J, 1994; Jupiter JB, 1991). They occur as a result of either a low-energy or a high-energy trauma with resultant significant injury and possible impairment of the function of the upper extremity. Intra-articular distal radius fractures are particularly difficult to treat and are more prone to unsatisfactory functional outcome and future early degeneration if an accurate articular surface reconstruction is not achieved.
Numerous treatment modalities have been advocated, including closed reduction and casting, bridging external fixation, extra-focal and intra-focal pinning, fragment specific fixation and various plating techniques. Nevertheless, the goals of treatment are to achieve anatomical reduction and rigid fixation, thus facilitating early range of motion training and strengthening. It has been shown that articular displacement of more than 2 mm will predispose to joint degeneration.
Distal radius fracture also occurs commonly as a fragility fracture. For more than a century, the main treatment of Colles fractures has been casting. However, it is inevitable that there will be certain degree of residual wrist deformity and possible functional deficit. In the past, there were no good implants to stabilize these fractures. However, with the introduction of the locking screw concept, this problem can be overcome.
Locking plate fixation has several advantages. Firstly, the fixed-angle locking device adds extra rigidity to the fracture site by acting as a single unit, thus preventing early collapse and malunion. Additional bone grafting is not necessary. It also has less soft tissue complications and tendon attrition when compared to the dorsal plate fixation. Recent clinical studies showed effective bone healing, and low complication rates with the use of these plates.
 
Classification
A number of authors have proposed systems for the classification of fractures of the distal aspect of the radius including those described by Frykman, Melone, and the AO group. The exact location of fracture lines reflected in the Frykman classification communicates little useful information about fracture severity or displacement.
The AO classification is the most detailed and inclusive system. AO type-A fractures (extra-articular) are usually bending injuries through the metaphysis, and they do not affect the articular surface of either the radiocarpal or the radioulnar joint. AO type-B fractures (partial intra-articular) result from shear or impaction injuries, causing fractures 162of the volar and dorsal rims, fractures of the radial styloid or medial corner, or Die Punch fractures of the central articular surface.
Table 15.1   Universal Classification of fractures of distal end radius
Classification
Description
I
Nonarticular, nondisplaced
II
Nonarticular, displaced
  A
Reducible, stable
  B
Reducible, unstable
  C
Irreducible
III
Articular, nondisplaced
IV
Articular, displaced
  A
Reducible, stable
  B
Reducible, unstable
  C
Irreducible
  D
Complex
A portion of the articular surface remains in continuity with the metaphysis, which adds greatly to the stability of the fracture. AO type-C fractures (complex articular) are generally high-energy fractures, often involving a combination of shear and impaction. None of the articular surface remains in continuity with the metaphysis. Comminution of the distal radial metaphysis can be present in many of these injuries. It is defined as involvement of >50% of the diameter of the metaphysis as seen on any radiograph, comminution of at least two cortices of the metaphysis, or >2.0 mm of shortening of the radius.
The Universal Classification of distal radial fractures was proposed in 1990. This system differentiates between extra-articular and intra-articular fractures, as well as between stable and unstable fractures; it was created as a treatment-based algorithm (Table 15.1).
 
Indications/Contraindications
 
INDICATIONS FOR SURGERY
  • Unstable displaced extra-articular fractures
  • Displaced intra-articular fractures
  • Volar shearing fractures
 
CONTRAINDICATIONS
  • Comorbid medical conditions preventing anesthesia
  • Active infection
  • Complex regional pain syndrome
  • Severe local soft-tissue injury.
 
Surgical Technique
 
ANESTHESIA
General anesthesia or regional anesthesia such as a brachial plexus block can be used.
 
POSITION—NEED FOR INTRAOPERATIVE IMAGING
  • The patient is placed in a supine position with the affected upper limb abducted 90 degree. The forearm is supinated and positioned on a radiolucent table. The use of a tourniquet is preferred.
  • Henry's approach is usually used in volar approach. The incision is made between the tendon of flexor carpi radialis and the radial artery (Fig. 15.1). A roll of towel is used to support the wrist during dissection.163
    Figure 15.1: Surface markings and planned incision
    Figure 15.2: The fracture is exposed
    Figure 15.3: Reduction and temporary fixation using K-wires checked using fluoroscopy
  • After the flexor carpi radialis tendon is retracted medially, the pronator quadratus is exposed. This muscle is elevated from the radial side by sharp dissection from the radius, and then the fracture is exposed (Fig. 15.2).
 
REDUCTION TECHNIQUES
The fracture is first reduced with traction and manipulation. 1.4 mm K-wires are used to fix the fracture temporarily through a stab incision at radial styloid (Fig. 15.3). The dorsal collapsed fragment can be elevated by K-wire using intrafocal pinning technique from dorsal side. The reduction is confirmed using fluoroscopy. 164
Figures 15.4A and B: 2.4 mm distal radius T-shaped locking plate is positioned and fixed temporarily using K-wires
Figure 15.5: Final reduction and fixation of fracture
 
FIXATION AND PLATING
  • A 2.4 mm distal radius T-shape locking plate is placed on the volar aspect of distal radius. The 2.4 mm locking drill sleeves are attached to the plate. K-wires are inserted through the drill sleeves to fix the plate temporarily onto the distal radius (Figs 15.4A and B).
  • The distal locking screws should be placed in subchondral position to achieve better stability. The position of the plate is adjusted using fluoroscopy.
  • The distal locking screws are inserted first. It is then followed by a single cortical 2.4 mm screw to press the plate towards the distal radius bone (See arrow).
  • The compression of the plate towards the bone can be used as a mean to further improve the distal radius volar tilting because of the fixed angle locking screws in the distal fragment. A locking head screw is inserted into the most proximal screw hole (Fig. 15.5).
  • Before wound closure, the position of the screws and plate is confirmed using fluoroscopy.165
 
CLOSURE
The pronator quadratus is carefully placed back over the plate. A careful hemostasis is achieved. Suction drain is optional.
 
Postoperative Management
The use of additional external immobilization is not necessary unless there is severe swelling, and in this case a short arm plaster slab may be given for a few days. Active range of motion exercise should be started immediately. Strengthening exercises can be started at 4 to 6 weeks once there is early bone healing.
 
Complications
Complications are uncommon. Nonunion or delayed union is extremely rare. Neurological complication due to traction injury of the median nerve or injury to the terminal branch of the superficial radial nerve at radial styloid during the insertion of the K-wire can occur. Accidental radial artery injury during dissection is also possible.
Extensor pollicis longus tendon rupture occurred very infrequently. Surgery related causes include over drilling of the dorsal cortex by the drill bit. Screw penetration of the dorsal cortex near the third dorsal compartment can also occur, as length measurements are often inaccurate. If the implant is placed too distally, the flexor tendon may come into direct contact with the plate, leading to discomfort or even flexor tenosynovitis.
The degree of post-traumatic osteoarthritis is usually related to the degree of articular reduction.
 
Results
The advent of the locking plate system provides a more secure and reliable fixation of osteoporotic bones. Currently, 3.5 mm and 2.4 mm locking plate systems are commonly used. However, the 3.5 mm screws are not suitable in the management of displaced intra-articular fractures. Baker et al showed that intra-articular incongruity correlates with post-traumatic arthritis whilst malalignment can lead to decreased grip strength, reduced range of motion and instability. Leung et al showed that internal fixation results in a better restoration and preservation of radial length and volar tilt compared with external fixation.
The use of 2.4 mm implants improved the possibility of fixing complex intra-articular fracture. The effectiveness of its locking mechanism is further demonstrated in the fixation of osteoporotic bone. In early postoperative period, the patient is already allowed to do some wrist mobilization exercise. This facilitates cartilage healing and results in less joint stiffness. Kwan et al reported a series of seventy-five patients treated with such 2.4 mm system, with a mean age of 51. The radiographic results at the final follow-up showed a mean of 18 degree of radial inclination, 5 degree of volar tilt, 1.3 mm radial shortening, and no articular incongruity. Twenty-nine percent of patients showed grade 1 osteoarthritic changes and 6% had grade 2 changes in their final follow-up radiographs. An excellent or good result was obtained in 98% and 96% of patients according to the Gartland and Werley, and modified Green and O'Brien scores, respectively. The mean DASH (Disabilities of the Arm, Shoulder and Hand) score was 11.6, indicating a high level of patient satisfaction.166
 
Summary/Conclusion
The importance of restoring the anatomical alignment and articular congruity is well-recognized in the fixation of distal radial fractures. Intra-articular incongruity has been shown to correlate with post-traumatic arthritis whilst malalignment can lead to decreased grip strength, reduced range of motion and instability. With the advent of locking plate system, internal fixation can result in a better restoration of anatomy and preservation of function.
The 2.4 mm implants have been designed to address the increasingly complex fracture patterns encountered in osteoporotic bones. The plates and locking-head screws are smaller than the traditional 3.5 mm system, so fracture fragments can be addressed individually. The smaller profile plates allow a more distal placement, hence a more subchondral fixation, with less tendon and soft tissue irritation.
 
Illustrative Case
A 65-year-old lady was admitted to the hospital after a fall on level ground at home. (Figs 15.6A and B)
Nonoperative treatment with closed reduction and plastering would be an option. On the other hand, the fracture is likely to re-displace within the plaster because of metaphyseal comminution and intra-articular involvement.
Figures 15.6A and B: Anteroposterior and lateral X-rays after injury showing intra-articular comminuted fracture left distal radius
Figures 15.7A and B: CT sagittal and coronal reconstruction showing an AO C2 fracture of distal radius
167
Figures 15.8A and B: Postoperative anteroposterior and lateral X-rays showing articular congruity and good fracture alignment
Figures 15.9A to C: Patient enjoyed pain-free and good range of movement at 3 months time
Moreover, surgical fixation would offer the benefit of early mobilization. Before the surgery, CT scan was obtained for better delineation of fracture configuration and planning of operative approach. (Figs 15.7A and B). The fracture was reduced and fixed using distal radius locked compression plate (Figs 15.8A and B). Active range of movements were started immediately. The patient had excellent range of movements and function at 3 months following surgery (Figs 15.9A to C).
Bibliography
  1. BakerSP, O’NeillB, HaddonW Jr, LongWB. The injury severity score: a method for describing patients with multiple injuries and evaluating emergency care. J Trauma. 1974;14:187–96.
  1. BradwayJK, AmadioPC, CooneyWP. Open reduction and internal fixation of displaced, comminuted intra-articular fractures of the distal radius. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery Am. 1989;71:839–47.
  1. FernandezDL, GeisslerWL. Treatment of displaced articular fractures of the radius. J Hand Surg. 1991;16A:375-84.
  1. GartlandJJ Jr, WerleyCW. Evaluation of healed Colles’ fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1951;33:895–907.
  1. GraffS, JupiterJ. Fracture of the distal radius: classification of treatment and indications for external fixation. Injury. 1994;25(Suppl 4):14.
  1. JupiterJB. Fractures of the distal end of the radius. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery Am 1991;73:461.
  1. KnirkJL, JupiterJB. Intra-articular fractures of the distal end of the radius in young adults. The Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery. 1986;68-A(5):647-59.
  1. KwanK, LauTW, LeungF. Operative treatment of distal radial fractures with locking plate system—a prospective study. Int Orthop 2010; DOI 10.1007/s00264-010-0974-z.
  1. LeungF, TuYK, ChewWY, ChowSP. Comparison of external and percutaneous pin fixation with plate fixation for intra-articular distal radial fractures. A randomised study. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2008;90(1):16–22.
  1. LeungF, ZhuL, HoH, LuWW, ChowSP. Palmar plate fixation of AO type C2 fracture of distal radius using a locking compression plate—a biomechanical study in a cadaveric model. J Hand Surg. 2003;28B:263-6.
  1. LiporaceFA, GuptaS, JeongGK, StracherM, KummerF, EgolKA, et al. A biomechanical comparison of a dorsal 3.5 mm T-plate and a volar fixed-angle plate in a model of dorsally unstable distal radius fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2005;19:187–91.
  1. OrbayJL, FernandezDL. Volar fixation for the dorsally displaced fractures of the distal radius: a preliminary report. J Hand Surg [Am]. 2002;27A:205-15.
  1. OrbayJL. The treatment of unstable distal radius fractures with volar fixation. Hand Surg. 2000;5:103–12.
  1. TreaseC, McIffT, TobyEB, CityK. Locking versus nonlocking T-plate for dorsal and volar fixation of dorsally comminuted distal radial fractures: a biomechanical study. J Hand Surg [Am]. 2005;30A:756-63.
  1. TrumbleTE, SchmittSR, VedderNB. Factors affecting functional outcomes of displaced intra-articular distal radius fractures. J Hand Surg. 1994;19A:325-40.

External Fixation of Distal Radius Fractures16

Ravi Gupta, Nitin Bither
 
Introduction
Fractures of the distal radius are the most commonly encountered fractures and account for one-sixth of all the fractures.1,2 Dr Abraham Colles, in reference to fractures of the distal aspect of the radius, stated: “One consolation only remains, that the limb will at some remote period again enjoy perfect freedom in all its motions, and be completely exempt from pain; the deformity, however, will remain undiminished throughout life.”3 In 1814, when Dr Abraham Colles described the fracture, there was no anesthesia (1846), no aseptic surgery (1865), no radiography (1895), no electricity (1879); but now with the increasing complexity of fractures caused by high energy trauma in younger patients and due to modern surgical technique and the better understanding of mechanics, this statement is an exception and not a rule. Malunited fractures alter the kinematics of distal radioulnar as well as radiocarpal joint resulting in loss of function which is poorly tolerated by the young patients having high demands from the wrist. Emphasis has thus shifted to restore the anatomy as much as possible by a method that does not compromise hand function.4
 
Functional Anatomy with Relevance to External Fixation
The distal end of the radius has three concave articular surfaces—the scaphoid fossa, the lunate fossa, and the sigmoid notch. The articular surface of the radius slopes in a volar and ulnar direction with a radial inclination of 23° (range 13–30°), a radial length of 12 mm (range 8–18 mm), and an average volar tilt of 12° (1–21°)5 (Fig. 16.1).
The dorsal cortex is thin, which often results in comminution that can lead to an abnormal dorsal tilt. In the case of nonbridging fixators, while inserting the dorsal pins, it is important to engage the volar ulnar lip of the distal radius where the bone density is highest, especially in osteopenic bone.6 The superficial radial nerve exits from under the brachioradialis, approximately 5 cm proximal to the radial styloid, and bifurcates into a major volar and a major dorsal branch at a mean distance of 4.2 cm proximal to the radial styloid7 (Fig. 16.2). Blind pin insertion is not recommended as it does not permit identification and protection of these branches.
 
Indications
Bridging fixator is applied across the wrist joint and can be used either as a temporary or a definitive fixation technique.170
Figure 16.1: Configuration of distal radius articular surface
Figure 16.2: The safe placement of fixator pins
It can be used for temporary stabilization in initial management of open fractures with extensive soft tissue loss, as a part of damage control orthopedics in a polytraumatized patient, during pending transfer to a tertiary referral facility for definitive fracture management and to aid in provisional reduction of complex intra-articular fractures.26 The definitive indications include unstable extra-articular distal radius fractures, 2-part and selected 3-part intra-articular fractures without displacement and as combined internal and external fixation. Bridging external fixation should not be used as the sole method of stabilization with unstable distal radioulnar joint, Barton fractures and disrupted volar carpal ligaments/radiocarpal dislocations.
Nonbridging external fixation is indicated in any extra-articular fracture where there is a high risk of late collapse. Lafontaine et al identified a number of risk factors that were associated with secondary fracture displacement despite a satisfactory initial reduction.171
Figure 16.3: Supine position with whole upper limb resting on a side board
These included the presence of dorsal tilt 20°, comminution, intra-articular involvement, an associated fracture of the ulna, and age greater than 60 years. If 3 or more of these factors were present, there was a high likelihood of fracture collapse.27 Nonbridging external fixation is contraindicated when the distal fragment is too small for pin placement. At least 1 cm of intact volar cortex is required for pin purchase.28
 
Surgical Technique
 
POSITION AND ANESTHESIA
External fixator is usually applied in supine position (Fig. 16.3) preferably under general anesthesia. However some surgeons also do it under local or regional anesthesia.
 
PROXIMAL PIN PLACEMENT
The proximal pins are placed at the junction of the proximal and middle-thirds of the radius (Fig. 16.4) approximately 9 cm proximal to radial styloid. At this level, the tendons of extensor carpi radialis longus and extensor carpi radialis brevis as well as the extensor digitorum communis cover the radius. The proximal pins can be inserted in the standard midlateral position by retracting the brachioradialis tendon and the superficial radial nerve, in the dorsoradial position between the extensor carpi radialis longus and extensor carpi radialis brevis (Fig. 16.3), or dorsally between the extensor carpi radialis brevis and extensor digitorum communis, which carries less risk of injury to the superficial radial nerve.8
A stab incision is given at proposed site Figure 16.5 and underlying soft tissue is carefully separated with an artery forceps to avoid injury to above-mentioned structures (Fig. 16.6). A drill sleeve is inserted and drill hole is made Figure 16.7 and finally a 4 mm Schanz screw is inserted with the help of a T-handle (Fig. 16.8). Site of second proximal pin is marked with the help of connecting assembly (Fig. 16.9) and second Schanz screw is inserted following same steps (Fig. 16.10).
 
DISTAL PIN PLACEMENT
Distal Schanz screws (2.5 mm) are inserted into second metacarpal shaft (Fig. 16.11). Attention should be paid to avoid injury to the extensor tendon and the radio-dorsal neurovascular bundle. 172
Figure 16.4: Site of proximal pin placement is about 9 cm proximal to radial styloid
Figure 16.5: Stab incision
Figure 16.6: Soft tissue dissection with the help of an artery forceps
173
Figure 16.7: Drilling should always be done with the help of a drill sleeve
Figure 16.8: Insertion of Schanz screw
Figure 16.9: Marking of second Schanz screw insertion site with the help of clamp
Figure 16.10: Insertion of proximal second Schanz screw
Figure 16.11: Distal Schanz screws are inserted in second metacarpal shaft
174
 
FINAL ASSEMBLY
Frame is attached to the screws with the help of clamps. Reduction is achieved and confirmed under image intensifier. All clamps and screws are tightened finally.
 
Biomechanical Considerations for External Fixation
 
FRACTURE SITE LOADS
External fixation is considered flexible fixation.9 Rikli et al measured the in vivo dynamic intra-articular pressures under local anesthesia in the radioulnocarpal joint of a healthy volunteer. With the forearm in neutral rotation, the forces ranged from 107 N with wrist flexion to 197 N with wrist extension. The highest forces of up to 245 N were seen with the wrist in radial deviation and the forearm in supination. Presumably, any implant or external fixator would have to be strong enough to neutralize these loads in order to permit early active wrist motion.10
 
FIXATOR FRAME RIGIDITY
The strength of the fixator depends on the rigidity of the connecting rods and the clamps. Increasing the diameter of the rods increases the rigidity by a factor of 4. Uniplanar fixators are common, but the rigidity of the construct can be increased by adding a second parallel rod. Placing the rod as close to the skin as possible also increases the stability against bending loads by reducing the lever arm from the neutral joint axis. Most distal radius external fixators use 3.0 or 4.0 mm threaded half pins. Modern threaded pins are designed with a larger core diameter and smaller core-thread diameter. If the pin threads are buried, the larger pin diameter at the near bone interface resists bending forces, whereas the small core thread resists pullout forces at the far cortex. A bicortically inserted pin with a short thread will provide the best pin–bone fixation. It is also desirable to spread the force evenly across the entire shaft of the bone by creating a wide separation of the fixator pins. In order to achieve stable fixation and reduce the lever arm of displacing forces, the pins should be inserted close to the fracture site. One pin is hence inserted close to the fracture site, while the second is placed as far away as possible.11
 
CONSTRUCT RIGIDITY
Increasing the rigidity of the fixator does not appreciably increase the rigidity of fixation of the individual fracture fragments.12 There are a number of ways, however, in which to augment the stability of the construct. After restoration of radial length and alignment by the external fixator, percutaneous pin fixation can lock in the radial styloid buttress and support the lunate fossa fragment.13 A fifth radial styloid pin attached to the frame of a spanning AO (Synthes, Paoli, PA) external fixator prevents a loss of radial length through settling and leads to improved wrist range of motion as compared to a 4 pin external fixator.14 The addition of a dorsal pin attached to a sidebar easily corrects the dorsal tilt found in many distal radius fractures.15,16 The combination of an external fixator augmented with 1.6 mm (0.62 inch) K-wires approaches the strength of a 3.5 mm dorsal AO plate.17 Supplemental K-wire fixation is more critical to the fracture fixation than is the mechanical rigidity of the external fixator itself.12
 
Results
Lambotte in 1907 was the first to realize that in certain cases a fracture of the distal radius required an operative approach.18 External fixation was introduced by Ombredanne for distal radius fractures in adolescents.19 The Hofmann fixator adapted 175to the forearm was a more universal device which was developed for the tibia. Later a distraction element was added. This device was used extensively by Burni, Vidal et al and Asche.20,21
Bridging external fixation of distal radius fractures typically relies on ligamentotaxis to both obtain and maintain a reduction of the fracture fragments. As longitudinal traction is applied to the carpus, the tension is transmitted mostly through the radioscaphocapitate and long radiolunate ligaments to restore the radial length. Ligamentotaxis has a number of shortcomings when applied to the treatment of displaced intra-articular fractures of the distal radius. First, because ligaments exhibit viscoelastic behavior,22 there is a gradual loss of the initial distraction force applied to the fracture site through stress relaxation.23 Traction does not correct the dorsal tilt of the distal fracture fragment. This is because the stout volar radiocarpal ligaments are shorter, and they pull out to length before the thinner dorsal radiocarpal ligaments exert any traction. Excessive traction can actually increase the dorsal tilt.24 A dorsally directed vector is still necessary to restore the normal volar angulation. This is usually accomplished by applying manual thumb pressure over the dorsum of the distal fragment. With intra-articular fractures, ligamentotaxis reduces the radial styloid fragment, but for the above reasons, it does not reduce a depressed lunate fragment.25
To maintain reduction, flexion in the wrist joint should not exceed 20°, since above 40° the pressure in the carpal tunnel is elevated significantly and may cause carpal tunnel syndrome. Ulnar deviation should not exceed 20° to avoid excessive strain on the ulnar disc and the fibrocartilage complex. If restoration of the radial anatomy including the radioulnar and radiocarpal joints is not possible within these limits, external fixation should be augmented by supplementary techniques.29
The fixator should be maintained for 6 to 8 weeks if used alone and should be removed at 4 to 5 weeks when applied in conjunction with other devices.30
 
Supplementary Techniques for Augmented External Fixation
 
EXTERNAL FIXATION AND PINNING (FIGS 16.12A TO H)
Kirschner-wire augmentation can substantially improve stability of an unstable extra-articular fracture of the distal end of the radius regardless of the type of external fixator that is used.12 Despite support of an external fixation device, forces created by muscle- tendon units traversing the wrist tend to cause a lateral/rotational displacement of the radial styloid fragment and impaction of the lunate fossa fragment. Simple addition of K-wires is adequate to resist these forces. This has been borne out clinically with a high rate of satisfactory results and specifically with an extremely high radiographic rating. If there is >5 mm of impaction or void created after restoring the articular congruity, iliac-crest bone graft or allograft is recommended to fill the metaphyseal defect.31
 
INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FIXATION
Complex fractures involving metaphyseal comminution of both the volar and dorsal cortices, as well as possible articular comminution, preclude the use of only internal fixation. External fixation alone will not reduce depressed articular fragments. External fixation devices may maintain radial length, but individual fracture fragments need additional internal fixation.32
 
ARTHROSCOPIC ASSISTED REDUCTION AND EXTERNAL FIXATION
More than 2 mm of articular displacement or gap are typical indications for surgical treatment. Isolated radial styloid fractures and simple 3-part fractures are most suited 176to this technique.
Figures 16.12A to H: (A and B) Computerized tomographs showing comminuted intra-articular of the distal radius with dorsal subluxation of the wrist; (C and D) The injury was treated by external fixation supplemented with K-wires; (E to H) Excellent function could be achieved
177Large capsular tears, which carry the risk of marked fluid extravasation, active infection, neurovascular compromise, and distorted anatomy, are some typical contraindications.33
 
Complications
Pin-site complications include infection, loosening, and interference with extensor tendon gliding. The incidence of pin tract infections has been reported to be 1-8%. The risk of injury to branches of the superficial radial nerve mandate open pin-site insertion.34 The degree and duration of distraction correlates with the amount of subsequent wrist stiffness and reflex sympathetic dystrophy.35 Distraction, flexion, and locked ulnar deviation of the external fixator encourage pronation contractures. Distraction also increases the carpal canal pressure, which may predispose to acute carpal tunnel syndrome.36 Pin pull-out due to fracture of the distal fragment can occur if the distal fragment is too small or osteopenic.
Gaining an understanding of the principles and limitations of external fixation allows one to be flexible and adapt the fixation to the specific fracture pattern in order to maximize the chances for an acceptable outcome and minimize the complications.
 
Illustrative Case
A 40-year-old female presented with extensively comminuted fracture of distal end of radius. His preoperative X-rays are shown in Figure 16.13. She was treated with spanning external fixator (Fig. 16.14) and excellent reduction was obtained (Fig. 16.15). External fixator was removed at 6 weeks following which she was started on extensive physiotherapy. At the end of 3 months she had an excellent range of motion and a satisfactory outcome (Fig. 16.16).
Figure 16.13: Preoperative X-rays showing comminuted fracture of distal radius
Figure 16.14: Same patient was treated with spanning external fixator
178
Figure 16.15: Postoperative X-rays showing excellent reduction
Figure 16.16: Excellent functional outcome at the end of 3 months
(Acknowledgment: We thank you Dr Bhavuk Garg and Prof PP Kotwal (Department of Orthopedics, All India Institute of Medical Sciences, New Delhi, India) for providing us intraoperative photographs and case illustration)
References
  1. GoldenGN. Treatment and programs of Colles’ fracture. Lancet. 1963;1:511–4.
  1. OwenRA, MeltonLJ, JohnsonKA, et al. Incidence of a Colles’ fracture in a North American community. Am J Public Health. 1982;72:605–13.
  1. CollesA. On the fracture of the carpal extremity of the radius. Edinb Med Surg J. 1814; 10:181.
  1. ChenNC, JupiterJB. Management of Distal Radial Fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2007; 89:2051–62.
  1. FeipelV, RinnenD, RoozeM. Postero-anterior radiography of the wrist. Normal database of carpal measurements. Surg Radiol Anat. 1998;20:221–6.
  1. GausepohlT, WornerS, PennigD, KoebkeJ. Extra-articular external fixation in distal radius fractures pin placement in osteoporotic bone. Injury. 2001;32(s 4):SD79–85.
  1. MackinnonSE, DellonAL. The overlap pattern of the lateral antebrachial cutaneous nerve and the superficial branch of the radial nerve. J Hand Surg. 1985;10A:522-6.
  1. EmamiA, MjobergB. A safer pin position for external fixation of distal radial fractures. Injury. 2000;31:749–50.
  1. JuanJA, PratJ, VeraP, et al. Biomechanical consequences of callus development in Hoffmann, Wagner, Orthofix and Ilizarov external fixators. J Biomech. 1992;25:995–1006.
  1. RikliDA, HonigmannP, BabstR, et al. Intra-articular pressure measurement in the radioulnocarpal joint using a novel sensor: in vitro and in vivo results. J Hand Surg. 2007;32A:67-75.
  1. BehrensF, JohnsonWD, KochTW, KovacevicN. Bending stiffness of unilateral and bilateral fixator frames. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1983;178:103–10.
  1. WolfeSW, AustinG, LorenzeM, SwigartCR, PanjabiMM. A biomechanical comparison of different wrist external fixators with and without K-wire augmentation. J Hand Surg. 1999;24A:516-24.
  1. Seitz WHJr, FroimsonAI, LebR, ShapiroJD. Augmented external fixation of unstable distal radius fractures. J Hand Surg. 1991;16A:1010-6.
  1. WerberKD, RaederF, BrauerRB, WeissS. External fixation of distal radial fractures: four compared with five pins:a randomized prospective study. J Bone Joint Surg. 2003;85A:660-6.
  1. MarkiewitzAD, GellmanH. Five-pin external fixation and early range of motion for distal radius fractures. Orthop Clin North Am. 2001;32:329–35.
  1. BraunRM, GellmanH. Dorsal pin placement and external fixation for correction of dorsal tilt in fractures of the distal radius. J Hand Surg. 1994;19A:653-5.
  1. DunningCE, LindsayCS, BicknellRT, et al. Supplemental pinning improves the stability of external fixation in distal radius fractures during simulated finger and forearm motion. J Hand Surg. 1999;24A:992-1000.
  1. LambotteA. Sur l'OsteÂosynthese. La Belgique MeÂdicale, 1908. p. 231.
  1. Ombredanne, L'osteÂosynthese temporaire chez les enfants. Presse MeÂdicale,  1929. p. 52.
  1. VidalJ, BuscayretC, ParanM, et al. Ligamentotaxis. In: MearsDC, editor. External skeletal fixation. Baltimore: Wilkins.  p. 493.
  1. AscheG. Stabilizierung von handgelenksnahen SpeichenstuÈ ckfrakturen mit dem Midifixatoer externe. Handchirurgie. 1983;15:38.
  1. WooSL, GomezMA, AkesonWH. The time and history dependent viscoelastic properties of the canine medical collateral ligament. J Biomech Eng. 1981;103:293–8.
  1. WinemakerMJ, ChinchalkarS, RichardsRS, et al. Load relaxation and forces with activity in Hoffman external fixators: a clinical study in patients with Colles’ fractures. J Hand Surg. 1998;23A:926-32.
  1. BartoshRA, SaldanaMJ. Intraarticular fractures of the distal radius: a cadaveric study to determine if ligamentotaxis restores radiopalmar tilt. J Hand Surg. 1990;15A:18-21.
  1. SandersRA, KeppelFL, WaldropJI. External fixation of distal radial fractures: results and complications. J Hand Surg. 1991;16A:385-91.
  1. BindraRR. Biomechanics and biology of external fixation of distal radius fractures. Hand Clin. 2005;21:363–73.
  1. LafontaineM, DelinceP, HardyD, SimonsM. Instability of fractures of the lower end of the radius: apropos of a series of 167 cases. Acta Orthop Belg. 1989;55:203–16.
  1. McQueenMM. Non-spanning external fixation of the distal radius. Hand Clin. 2005;21:375–80.
  1. GausepohlT, PennigD, MaderK. Principles of external fixation and supplementary techniques in distal radius fractures. Injury, Int J Care Injured. 2000;31:56–70.
  1. LeungKS, TsangHK, ChiuKH, et al. An effective treatment of comminuted fractures of the distal radius. J Hand Surg. 1990;15A:11-7.
  1. SwigartCR, WolfeSW. Limited incision open techniques for distal radius fracture management. Orthop Clin North Am. 2001;32:317–27.
  1. SimicMP, WeilandJA. Fractures of the distal aspect of the radius: changes in treatment over the past two decades. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2003;85:552–64.
  1. SlutskyJD. External fixation of distal radius fractures. J Hand Surg. 2007;32A:1624-37.
  1. CooneyWP. External fixation of distal radius fractures. Clin orthop. 1983;180:44–9.
  1. KaempffeFA, WheelerDR, PeimerCA, et al. Severe fractures of the distal radius: effect of amount and duration of external fixator distraction on outcome. J Hand Surg. 1993;18A:33-41.
  1. BaechlerMF, MeansKR Jr, ParksBG, NguyenA, SegalmanKA. Carpal canal pressure of the distracted wrist. J Hand Surg. 2004;29A:858-64.

Dorsal Barton Fractures17

Ritabh Kumar, Pushkar Chawla
 
Introduction
Intra-articular distal radius fractures are common. The principles of intra-articular fracture management remain the same as elsewhere in the skeleton; an atraumatic anatomical reduction with rigid fixation to enable early mobilization. The functional outcome depends on the quality of restoration of wrist anatomy—articular surface congruency, along with palmar tilt, radial length and width.1,2 Nevertheless treatment should be individualized on the basis of patient personality and the fracture pattern. Understanding the pathologic anatomy of each fracture pattern helps in improving the benefits of treatment and reducing the risks. AO Müller (Fig. 17.1A) and OTA (Fig. 17.1B) are the most frequently used classification for these fractures. There is a current consensus that the AO 23 B and C injuries are best managed by ORIF in the young high demand individuals. Currently the implant of choice is a plate. The location—volar or dorsal remains contentious. The advent of locking plates has extended the indications of plating across the skeleton. The concepts of buttressing by anatomic contouring on the side of comminution with conventional plates have given way to angular stable constructs possible from the opposite side. This has given the surgeon modularity to operate from the safer soft tissue zone. In 23 C3 injuries, the volar approach definitely scores over the dorsal approach in terms of soft tissue safety. The dorsal approach, however, offers the option of direct visualization of the joint surface. Intra-articular step off and gap displacement is better appreciated directly. This enables a better quality of reduction compared to the indirect reduction from the volar side.3 However, fracture stabilization remains a concern. Better understanding of the dorsal wrist anatomy and wrist biomechanics have led to the evolution of lower profile anatomically contoured plates that may mitigate the concerns of extensor tendinitis.
 
Indications for Operative Treatment
Intra-articular fractures of the distal radius with dorsal displacement (extension type fractures):
  1. Dorsal Barton variety
  2. Dorsal fracture subluxations
  3. Fractures with significant dorsal comminution.182
Figure 17.1A: Classification of dorsal barton fracture of distal radius (AO 23B2). Adapted from AO Muller classification of Fractures – Long Bones
Figure 17.1B: Classification of dorsal barton fracture of distal radius (OTA 23B2). Adapted from Journal of Orthopedic Trauma. 2007;21(Suppl 10): S19-S30
 
Preoperative Planning
Given the indications, comminution and significant associated soft tissue injury, it is prudent to perform the definitive fixation after a delay of five to seven days. The injury may be splinted in a volar slab after gentle realignment or temporized in an external fixator. Being a non-weight bearing joint with cancellous bone aplenty, union is rarely a concern. The trepidation is in holding the reduction reliably till union. A single plate may not stabilize the multiple small fragments reliably. The alternate is two or more small plates used judiciously to maintain the desired reduction. Consent for autologous bone graft from the iliac crest or synthetic injectable bone substitutes should always be taken. It is prudent to also consent for plate removal preferably within a year.
 
Equipment
  1. Hand System
  2. Locking distal radius system – 2.4 mm
  3. K-wires – 1 mm
  4. Mini external fixator
  5. Injectable bone graft/ provision for cancellous autograft
  6. Image intensifier
 
Anesthesia
General anesthesia is considered if autologous cancellous graft is contemplated. Should synthetic graft be opted for, the preferred anesthesia is regional. Prophylactic antibiotics 183are administered prior to inflating the tourniquet. An arm tourniquet set at 125 mm Hg more than the systolic is desirable. Once the reduction of the articular fragments is achieved, the tourniquet may be released to reduce edema. The shoulder is abducted to 90 degrees with the forearm pronated. A bridging external fixator may be applied in case of severe comminution, shortening or where there has been a delay of over 10 to 12 days in definitive fixation. The restoration of length by ligamentotaxis using the viscoelastic properties of edematous tissues makes surgery less demanding. The placement of the frame is crucial—it should not interfere in the way of open reduction. The proximal pins should be at a minimum distance of 10 to 12 cm from the wrist joint on the lateral surface of the radius.
The approach is straightforward. A longitudinal midline incision 8 to 9 cm long in line with the third metacarpal is made (Fig. 17.2). The incision should be 3 cm distal to the wrist joint. This incision is extensile. The dorsal retinaculum is opened (Fig. 17.3). The joint is opened through the floor of the fourth extensor compartment—the highway to the wrist. The tendons are retracted to either side (Fig. 17.4) and the joint opened by a transverse incision into the dorsal wrist capsule. The floor of the tendon sheath is thereafter erased with sharp dissection to visualize the width of the dorsal radius (Fig. 17.5). A separate incision can be made into the floor of the second extensor compartment to visualize and reduce the lateral column.
Figure 17.2: After skin incision
Figure 17.3: Extensor retinaculum is opened over the fourth compartment
184
Figure 17.4: Dorsal periosteal sleeve on reflecting extensor tendons radially
Figure 17.5: After sharp dissection of the dorsal periosteum
Releasing the Brachioradialis tendon off the styloid facilitates implant placement and neutralises the deforming force of the muscle on the styloid. The only neurovascular structure at risk in the dorsal approach and exposure is the superficial branch of the radial nerve that should be sought and protected while dissecting the second compartment. Using the lunate and scaphoid as a template the articular surface is reduced under vision (Fig. 17.6) and provisional stabilization done with 1 mm K-wires placed as distally as possible and in subchondral bone. Image guidance should be used at every step of the procedure. The wires also serve as a marker for the distal location of the plate. The lateral pillar is usually reduced first and then the dorsal. It is best however, to start solving the jigsaw from the large to small fragments. The resultant void in the metaphyseal region is filled up with graft or synthetic substitute, where necessary. This further enhances the stability of the construct. The selected plate is then fixed to the proximal fragment with a nonlocking cortical screw just proximal to the fracture. The lateral column plates are anatomically contoured and should be used as provided. The dorsal plates are straight and the distal end should be contoured a shade inferior.
185
Figure 17.6: The articular surface visualized
This would enable the distal locking screws to hold into the subchondral bone and minimize the risk of intra-articular penetration. It is important to remember that in the current plate designs using locking screws the plate dictates the direction of the screw, not the surgeon. The plate should buttress the articular rim dorsally and bridge the metaphyseal gap. Plate position is paramount. Some time should be spent at this step studying the images on the C-arm. The articular fragments are stabilized with 2.4 mm locking screws. Locking screws are not intended for bicortical purchase distally and it is prudent to err towards a shorter length. Confirmation is obtained in multiple planes and the temporizing K-wires removed. Stability of the fixation and range of movements are checked under fluoroscopy. The tourniquet may be deflated now, if not done so earlier and hemostasis secured. The dorsal wrist capsule is closed with 3‘0’ Vicryl. It is vital to continue this approximation proximally so that the periosteal sleeve covers the implant reducing the risk of friction tendonitis.3 The sharp dissection during exposure helps retain tissue of sufficient strength and length to approximate reliably. The extensor tendons are replaced over the repaired floor and the dorsal retinaculum closed with two sutures. This is to enable a closure over the extensor tendons to prevent bowstringing. The closure may seem tight but as the edema resolves and rehabilitation progresses, function is rapidly regained. The skin is closed with interrupted fine nylon. A volar splint holding the wrist in functional dorsiflexion is applied. The splint should extend not beyond the distal palmar crease.
An alternate to dorsal plating is the use of a bridging external fixator. If the fragments are small with significant comminution it may be prudent to avoid plating. The principle of rigid fixation is unachievable.
 
Postoperative Management
Pain relief, limb elevation and ice packs on the dorsum of the wrist are crucial. Breakthrough pain sensitises the nerves and may delay the functional recovery of the limb. Predictable pain relief provides the patient the confidence to start moving the fingers in the early postoperative period. This reduces the risks of adhesions and improves tendon excursion. It is important to emphasize that wiggling the fingers is not enough. All the three finger joints beyond the splint should be alternately flexed and extended through full range. The skin on the dorsum of the wrist is lax and it is common to see significant swelling postoperatively. Limb elevation and active finger 186movements help pump out the edema. After suture removal at two weeks the wrist is mobilized intermittently till good voluntary control is gained. The first 6 weeks are aimed at restoring the range of movement. The patient is encouraged to perform his/her activities of daily living like brushing teeth, eating food, combing the hair and buttoning/unbuttoning shirts using the affected hand. This improves coordination and fine muscle function. Once fracture consolidation is confirmed in follow-up radiographs, exercises against resistance are encouraged to build-up strength.
 
Complications
These could be due to the injury per se or its treatment, acute or chronic. The most common complication postoperatively is related to the hardware used. Closure of the tendon sheath floor over the plate may not always be achievable. Prominence of the plate primarily or after fracture collapse increases the risk of extensor tendonitis. This may range from irritation to frank rupture. A second surgery is forced upon the patient to remove the hardware. The problem, however, remains a noteworthy risk following dorsal plating and even after its early removal.4,5 The low profile of the implants increases the risk of breakage.5
 
Literature Review/Outcomes
Intuitively, the dorsal approach seems straightforward. Visualization of the joint surface is excellent. However, dorsal plating remained contentious. Early implants were bulky and the incidence of friction tendinitis unacceptably high. Letsch et al in 20036 reported the outcomes of distal radius fractures following dorsal versus volar plating. The reported cases were operated from 1987 to 1994 using conventional T plates. Extension type injuries with dorsal comminution were buttressed dorsally. Their study reported better restoration of anatomy and functional results with the dorsal approach. The results of this study contradicted conventional wisdom then prevalent that surprised the authors too. The three column concept in 1996 reported by Rikli and Regazzoni7 improved our understanding of the pathoanatomy and interpretation of the post-injury radiograph. The development of resilient lower profile implants now provides the surgeon the flexibility to fix the fracture according to its personality. Buttressing the fractures dorsally with two small plates rather than one bulky implant aided better rigid fixation. Ability to close the periosteal sleeve over the implant helped reduce the risk of tendinitis. Articles with these newer devices report almost negligible extensor tendinitis.8
 
Conclusion
The dorsal approach as described is extensile and provides an excellent exposure of the intra-articular pathoanatomy. Newer plate designs have moderated the hardware apprehensions, but they remain nevertheless.
 
Illustrative Case
A forty-year-old man sustained comminuted intra-articular fracture of distal radius with dorsal displacement with fracture of the ulnar styloid (Figs 17.7A and B). Fracture was reduced and internally fixed using dorsal locking plate. Follow-up radiographs showed fracture consolidation (Fig. 17.8). Patient has excellent clinical function (Fig. 17.9).
187
Figures 17.7A and B: (A) Post injury X-rays AP (B) lateral views
Figure 17.8: X-ray at 3 years follow-up
Figure 17.9: Clinical function at three years post-surgery
188
References
  1. McQueenM, CaspersJ. Colles fracture: Does the anatomical result affect the final function? J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1988;70:649–51.
  1. TrumbleTE, SchmittSR, VedderNB. Factors affecting functional outcome of displaced intra articular distal radius fractures. J Hand Surg Am. 1994;19:325–40.
  1. TavakolianJD, JupiterJB. Dorsal plating for distal radius fractures. Hand Clin. 2005;21:341–6.
  1. RuchDS, PapadonikolakisA. Volar versus dorsal plating in the management of intra-articular distal radius fractures. J Hand Surg Am. 2006;31:9–16.
  1. McKaySD, MacDermidJC, RothJH, RichardsRS. Assessment of complications of distal radius fractures and the development of a complication checklist. J Hand Surg Am. 2001; 21:916–22.
  1. LetschR, InfangarM, SchmidtJ, KockHJ. Surgical treatment of the fractures of the distal radius with plate: A comparison of palmar and dorsal plate position. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2003;123:333–9.
  1. RikliDA, RegazzoniP. Fractures of the distal end of the radius treated by internal fixation and early function. A preliminary report of 20 cases. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1996;78:588–92.
  1. JupiterJB, Marent-Huber M and the LCP Study Group. Operative management of distal radius fractures with 2.4 mm locking plates – A Multicentre prospective Case Series. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2009;91:55–65.

Spinopelvic Fixation in Cases of Old Fractures or Associated Sacral Fractures18

Kyle F Dickson
 
Introduction
Experience is not doing a better job on cases but doing a perfect job more efficiently. Nonunions and malunions of the pelvis present challenging problems for both the patient and the surgeon. Though optimal initial care can potentially prevent these complications, nonunions and malunions still occur.1-5 Tile6 estimated a 5% incidence of residual severe deformity in major disruptions of the pelvic ring. However, non-operative management of vertically unstable pelvises can lead to malunions and nonunions in 55 to 75% of cases.7,8
When evaluating a patient with a pelvic malunion or nonunion, a thorough work-up is required to identify the cause of the patients pain, define the deformity of the pelvis, review the expectations of the patient, and plan treatment. In nonunions, associated medical morbidities need to be diagnosed and corrected before surgery (i.e. malabsorption, vitamin D deficiency, diabetes, etc.). The amount of peer-reviewed literature on the subject is very small. Data from our recent publications4,5,7,8 is used to highlight points of assessment (i.e. physical exam, radiology, definition of deformity) and management of these difficult, and potentially disabling problems.
Spinopelvic fixation is used in acute cases of bilateral sacral fractures with a transverse component, “H” or “U” pattern (illustrative case) or unstable lumbar sacrum instability (Figs 18.1A to L).9,10 Spinopelvic fixation is also used in cases of old fractures that have healed with deformities (malunions) and those fractures which still have not healed (illustrative case).
 
Indications/Contraindications
Indications for surgery include pain, pelvic ring instability, and clinical problems relating to the pelvic deformity (gait abnormalities, sitting problems, limb shortening, genitourinary symptoms, vaginal wall impingement, etc.).
 
PAIN
Although pain is not always present in malunions and nonunions, it is often the primary reason for a patient to seek medical consultation. The pain is commonly secondary to instability of the pelvis, or malreduction, and is most frequently located posteriorly in the sacroiliac (SI) region.11 Posterior pelvic pain associated with malunion often improves after correction of the malunion, although the reason for this is less apparent than with 190correction of nonunions.5,7
Figures 18.1A to L: (A) AP view of a 35-year-old that is 2 years out from a MVA where the patient suffered bilateral SI joint instability with 2 iliosacral screws bilaterally (removed at one year), symphyseal plating for symphyseal disruption, and a failed right femoral neck treated with a total hip arthroplasty (THA). (B) AP view after another MVA suffering minimally displaced left pubis fracture, right pars fracture of S1, and left both column posterior wall (pattern consistent with an anterior column posterior hemitransverse with a posterior wall with none of the articular surface attached to the intact ilium. (C, D) Axial CT scan showing the anterior column fracture and the comminuted posterior wall. (E) Sagittal CT reconstruction showing the fracture through S1(arrow). (F) AP view after open internal fixation (OIF) times two. The anterior column, posterior column, and posterior wall all are not reduced. (G) CT scan verifying the malreduction. (H, I, J) AP, iliac oblique and obturator oblique view postoperatively after spinopelvic fixation for unstable L5-S1 likely due to the previous injury of the bilateral SI joints. (K) AP view 3 months postoperatively when the patient presented to the senior author with head damage and subluxation. (L) AP view after the patient had a staged approach with: 1) removal of all hardware and cultures, and 2) THA with structural allograft for the posterior wall. At one year the patient had removal of the spinopelvic fixation without complication
191Some residual chronic pain often occurs. In an acute injury, instability is readily apparent on physical examination of the pelvis. This is more difficult to appreciate in chronic malunions and nonunions. In these situations, the physician's hands are placed on each of the anterior-superior iliac spine (ASIS) and the pelvis is rocked from side to side. Subtle motion and pain of the pelvis can be detected in this manner. If no motion is detected, this compression may illicit pain secondary to the instability. In these chronic cases, radiographic single-leg stance anteroposterior (AP) views are usually more helpful as will be reviewed later.
Pain secondary to malunion or nonunion of the pelvis is often present during weight bearing and improves with rest. Because weight is transmitted posteriorly through the pelvis, pain is more commonly associated with sacroiliac joint (SI) malunions and nonunions. Malunions and nonunions of the anterior pelvic ring are rarely painful because less than 10% of the body's weight is transmitted through the anterior part of the pelvis.6 When the rare case of a painful malunion or nonunion of the anterior pelvic ring does present, it is often following a protracted course and multiple consultations with medical specialists (gynecologists, general surgeons, urologists, rheumatologists, etc). The patient may also experience low back pain secondary to the pelvic deformity, or neurogenic pain that radiates to the ankle secondary to compression or distraction of the nerves at the level of the roots or the lumbrosacral plexus. Scarring within the nerve is a common cause of chronic pain.
Patients may also complain of pain while sitting or lying. The two major causes for this are pelvic malunions that cause sitting or lying imbalance, and ischial nonunions that result in painful motion of the fracture upon sitting. The sitting imbalance is caused by different heights of the ischial tuberosities. AP radiographs are often used to determine these height differences. Lying imbalance often occurs when there is a vertical migration of one of the hemipelvises and this makes the posterior-superior iliac spine (PSIS) prominent on that side. However, posterior displacement of the hemipelvis can also occur either with or without vertical translation of the hemipelvis.
 
Deformity
Pelvic deformity is responsible for complaints in many clinical areas, i.e. pain, gait abnormalities, genitourinary system, etc. The most common deformities include cephalad and posterior translation and internal rotation of the hemipelvis.5,7,8,12 One can often appreciate the deformity by physical exam. With significant cranial displacement of the hemipelvis, a constant cosmetic deformity is observed. As the patient stands and faces either toward or away from the examiner, the shortened side appears flattened with the trochanteric area medialized. Conversely, the normal (opposite) side has the appearance of an exaggerated outward curvature of the hip. Nonobese, female patients will have typically identified this deformity and complained about it. This deformity will be exaggerated by further innominate bone displacement—such as adduction or internal rotation.
Other patients complain of posterior prominence. The patients notice this when lying supine due to lying imbalance. This deformity can be seen by comparing the posterior-superior iliac spines (PSISs) while the patient lies prone. The main cause of posterior prominence of the PSIS is from an internal rotation deformity of the innominate bone which causes PSIS to become more prominent. However, this condition can also occur from posterior translation of the innominate bone. Furthermore, cranial displacement of the hemipelvis results in the sacrum and coccyx becoming relatively more prominent and this bony prominence can be symptomatic. Sacral prominence can become particularly severe with bilateral hemipelvis displacement (“U” or “H” patterns) (illustrative case). We have seen numerous cases where this sacral prominence causes skin breakdown.
192This cranial displacement also creates sitting problems, and is especially noticeable when sitting in hard chairs. The sitting imbalance is due to the ischium being at different heights. In addition to vertical migration of the hemipelvis, this condition may be caused by a flexion/extension deformity of the hemipelvis (see Fig. 22.6). The patient is often observed leaning toward one side while sitting, though the direction he/she leans is not always consistent. The patient will lean toward the short side when attempting to sit on each buttock equally. Some patients with severe deformity will sit only on the undeformed side and lean away from the cranial displaced hemipelvis. Other patients are observed to shift their position frequently or place their hand under the cranially displaced side for support.
Gait abnormalities can also be caused by malunions. Cranial displacement causes shortening of the ipsilateral extremity. In our study of pelvic malunions resulting from unstable vertical fractures, the average leg-length discrepancy was greater than 3 cm with a range of up to 6 cm.5,7 The malunited pelvis may also cause an internal or external deformity of the lower extremity that alters the patient's gait. For instance, the patient shown in Figure 21.3 presented with 20 degrees of intoed gait and back pain. The patient shown in Figure 22.6 had a windswept pelvis, where one side is internally rotated and the other side is externally rotated, and the patient felt that they were “walking crooked”.
 
Genitourinary System
With significant internal rotation of the hemipelvis or a rotated and displaced rami fracture, impingement of the bladder can occur. This is usually caused by the superior rami. Figure 21.3 illustrates how free pieces of superior rami can heal in malrotated positions causing impingement. Symptoms of impingement include frequency, urgency, and hesitancy. The work-up should include a retrograde urethrogram and cystometrogram.
In very unusual cases, the ischium may displace so far medially that it causes impingement on the wall of the vagina and subsequent dyspareunia. Clitoral stimulation with weight bearing secondary to an unstable pubic symphysis has also been described.6 In addition, herniation of bowel through the rectus abdominus, or herniation of the bladder through the symphysis pubis is possible (Figs 18.2A and B).
Figures 18.2A and B: (A) AP view of a 2-year-old with an open book pelvis treated initially with an external fixator prior to open reduction internal fixation. (B) CT scan showing herniation of the bladder through the symphysis. Extra care is required to prevent a bladder injury during the ORIF through a Pfannenstiel approach (see chapter 22)
193
 
NEUROLOGIC INJURIES
Permanent nerve damage is a common cause of disability following pelvic injuries. A nerve injury occurs in 46% of the patients with an unstable vertical pelvis (see literature section).13 The most commonly affected nerve roots are L5 and S1, but any root from L2 to S4 may be damaged. In Huittinen's13 study of 40 nerve injuries, 21 (52.5%) were traction injuries, 15 (37.5%) were complete disruptions, and 4 (10%) were compression injuries. Interestingly, the lumbosacral trunk and superior gluteal nerve sustained traction injuries while most of the disruptions occurred in the roots of the cauda equina. Compression injuries occurred in the upper three sacral nerve foramina in patients with fractures of the sacrum. Furthermore, the traction and nerve disruption injuries occurred in the vertically unstable pelvic injuries while the compressive nerve injuries occurred following lateral compression of the pelvis. Lateral compression injuries of the pelvis often impact portions of the sacral bone into the foramen resulting in compression of the nerve, and may require decompression if neurologic exam worsens.
A thorough neurologic examination is necessary to determine any preoperative deficits and for intraoperative as well as postoperative nerve monitoring. Disruption of peripheral nerves should be evaluated by nerve conduction/EMG tests. Peripheral disruptions may be repaired with some salvage of function or return of protective sensation. Myelograms and magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) are used to rule out spinal nerve avulsions. As mentioned patients with nerve injuries are particularly sensitive to weight-bearing and any instability (illustrative case).
 
PATIENT EXPECTATIONS
An important aspect of the preoperative assessment is to discover a patient's understanding and expectations regarding their clinical problem. Significant discussion is necessary prior to making a decision for surgery. The patient must make the final decision based upon realistic goals and an understanding of the risk of complications. Specific symptoms of deformity such as limb shortening, sitting imbalance, vaginal impingement, and cosmetic deformity are expected to be reliably addressed by surgery. The patient must be cautioned, however, that while the majority of the deformity can be corrected, the actual anatomical result is usually less than perfect. In our series of pelvic malunions, only 76% of our reductions had less than 1 cm of residual deformity.5,7
Posterior pelvic pain in the absence of a demonstrable nonunion or instability is often difficult to explain, and may not completely or reliably improve with correction of the pelvic deformity. Ninety-five percent of patients with malunion of the pelvis report improvement of their pain, however, only 21% have complete relief of their posterior pain.5,7 Radiographic evidence of sacroiliac joint arthrosis is not a reliable indication of the cause of posterior pelvic pain. However, in patients with a pelvic nonunion, a significant reduction in pain is seen. Patients must understand the size of the case and have reasonable expectations of the results preoperatively.
 
Preoperative Plan
A thorough knowledge of pelvic anatomy is required to understand the three-dimensional deformity. Furthermore, extensive preoperative planning is needed to determine the proper order of exposures for release, reduction, and fixation. Because each patient is different, it behooves the surgeon to individualize the treatment.
The key for the surgeon is to understand the deformity preoperatively (please see chapter 21). Radiographic assessment includes five standard pelvis X-ray views (AP, 45 degree obliques, 40 degree caudad, and 40 degree cephalad), a weight-bearing AP X-ray, CT scan, and a 3D CT. The CT scan can be used to make a 3-dimensional pelvic model. This model helps the surgeon to understand the deformity and plan 194preoperatively (see Figs 21.2B and C). The displacement and the rotation of all fragments needs to be understood so appropriate release and reduction of fragments can be obtained. An obturator oblique clearly shows the sacroiliac joint on the ipsilateral side while a single leg weight-bearing AP determines stability of the nonunions. Technetium bone scans may be helpful in identifying the activity of the nonunion (atrophic or hypertrophic) but are not routinely ordered. Together, these multiple plain films and CT scans are used to assess nonunions and deformities of the pelvis. The displacements are often complex and include rotational and translational displacements around a three ordinate axis (see Fig. 21.2B). The most common deformities seen are posterior and cephalad translation and internal rotation and flexion of the hemipelvis.8
Translation of the pelvis from the normal anatomically positioned pelvis can be described using a vector three axis system. The translational deformities are:
  1. Impaction/diastasis (x-axis).
  2. Cephalad/caudad (y-axis).
  3. Anterior/posterior (z-axis).
Measuring cephalad translation on the AP X-ray is easily performed by measuring the difference in height between 2 fixed points on the pelvis—often the ischium, acetabular sourcil, or iliac crest. Classically, the posterior displacement is defined using the caudad (inlet) view. However, direct cephalad translation of the hemipelvis will cause an apparent posterior translation on the caudad (inlet) view and the apparent posterior lying imbalance because the PSIS becomes more prominent. Therefore, the posterior translation is best measured on the CT scan. The actual cephalad translation is measured on the AP from a line in the plane of the sacrum. A perpendicular distance from this line to the ischium, top of the iliac wing or the acetabular dome demonstrates the amount of vertical translation.8 This distance is compared to the other hemipelvis. The difference between the measurements of the ischia correlates with sitting imbalance. The differences in acetabular dome measurements gives the leg length discrepancy. The symptoms of sitting imbalance and leg length discrepancies are the deformity complaints caused by severely displaced pelvic malunions and nonunions.
Each axis also has a rotational component. Flexion/extension of the hemipelvis is defined as the rotation of the hemipelvis around the x-axis. Various anatomic relationships are used to define flexion/extension of the hemipelvis. They are:
  1. Obturator acetabular line to the tear drop (the more cephalad the line crosses the tear drop, the more flexion of the hemipelvis).
  2. The shape of the obturator foramen on the cephalad (outlet) or the AP view (the foramen becomes more elongated and elliptical with flexion).
  3. The position of the ischial spine within the obturator foramen on the outlet view (the more caudad the ischial spine is in relation to the foramen, the more flexion).
The best measurement of flexion is obtained from the three-dimensional CT. The normal hemipelvis and sacrum are removed from the anatomically positioned pelvis. The angle is measured from a line between the ASIS to the symphysis and a line perpendicular to the floor (normally this is 90 degrees).
Internal and external rotation of the hemipelvis is defined around the y-axis. Defining internal rotation on plain films is performed by:
  1. Comparison of the widths of the ischia (increased width shows internal rotation).
  2. Width of the iliac wing (greater with external rotation).
  3. The relationship of the ilioischial line to the tear drop (the more lateral the line, the more internal the rotation).
A CT scan can precisely define the degree of rotation.8 Drawing a line parallel to the constant quadrilateral surface (2–5 mm above the dome) and the angle this forms with the horizontal line in the plane of the sacrum measures rotation solely (see Figs 21.4C and F). Sponseller used the line from the ASIS to the PSIS to measure the deformity of 195the hemipelvis in children with congenital pelvic deformity.14 However, this measurement is a combination of internal/external rotation and abduction/adduction.
Abduction/adduction deformity is defined as the rotation of the hemipelvis around the z-axis. This axis passes anterior to posterior through the supra acetabular bone. The true rotation axis is likely closer to the posterior sacroiliac joint, but the axis can be defined in any anatomical position. What is important is the rotational deformity as compared to a normally positioned hemipelvis. Therefore, pure abduction and adduction will not affect the internal/external rotation measurements. Pure abduction/adduction deformities, however, are rare and are usually associated with other rotational deformities. One can also define the abduction/adduction deformities in degrees of rotation on the caudad (inlet) view if no internal/external rotation exists. The angle formed by a line from the PSIS to the symphysis pubis and a line in the plane of the sacrum estimates the abduction/adduction deformity. A CT scan can be used to estimate the amount of abduction/adduction by comparing the distance from the center of the quadrilateral surface to the midline on the injured side to that of the noninjured side, however, this does not give an actual degree of rotation (see Fig. 21.3H).
 
Implants
The iliosacral screws and reconstruction plates are similar to those described in the chapters on iliosacral screws and anterior approach to the SI joint. The spinopelvic fixation used needs to be able to place pedicle and transiliac screws (Figs 18.1A to L), have a bendable rod with the ability to distract (illustrative case). The bendable rod can be used to create the reduction with distraction in “H” or “U” bilateral sacral fractures, i.e. the bend in the rod allows the kyphotic deformity to be corrected in hyperextension.
 
Surgery
As mentioned earlier, the best treatment is prevention.1,2,11 The problem of malunions and nonunions appears most commonly after inadequate initial treatment of displaced fractures and unstable pelvic ring injuries.8 From the technical standpoint, late correction is very difficult because the anatomy is altered and less recognizable, and the potential complications are increased. Osteotomies can easily damage the structures that lie on the opposite side of the bone. Scarring around nerves prevent the fragments from moving freely without causing a nerve palsy.
 
ANESTHESIA
The timing of surgery is critical in bilateral sacral “U” or “H” fractures. Closed reduction by hperextension in the prone position can reduce the typical kyphotic deformity seen in these fractures in the first 3 to 5 days. After this time generally open reduction is required. If closed reduction and percutaneous fixation cannot be accomplished than the patient has to have ORIF to be stabilized (see chapter 21).
 
POSITION
The surgical technique often involves a three-stage procedure. The three-stage reconstruction as described by Letournel5,7 allows maximal degree of deformity correction as well as secure fixation. The three stages are performed with the patient supine–prone– supine, or prone–supine–prone. After each stage, the wound is closed and the patient turned to the opposite position. The first stage mobilizes anterior or posterior injuries by an osteotomy of the malunion or release of the nonunion. The second stage involves release and mobilization of the opposite side. The most important part of the second 196stage is the reduction of the pelvic ring. However this stage also includes an osteotomy, mobilization, or both, of that side of the ring. Following reduction, the second stage is completed by fixation of that particular side of the pelvic ring. The third stage completes the reduction and fixation of the opposite side (relative to the 2nd stage) of the pelvic ring. A radiolucent table with image intensification is commonly used for the three-stage procedure. The Judet table is also useful. Somatosensory evoked potentials (SSEPs) and motor evoked potentials have been used on some patients that require significant correction of vertical displacement but are not routinely used.
 
REDUCTION
For correction of cranial displacement of the hemipelvis, it is necessary to cut the sacrotuberous and sacrospinous ligaments at their attachment to the sacrum. It is preferable to perform osteotomies at the old injury site, but most posterior releases are through a lateral sacral osteotomy (see Figs 21.3, 22.6 and illustrative case). With advances in technology of the operating room table and the ability to fix the patients normal hemipelvis to the table15 (see Fig. 21.6B), some deformities can be corrected in one or two stages.4,8 This is especially true in rotational malunions. Vertical malunions require at least two stages to adequately release the hemipelvis. For example, an initial posterior osteotomy and release of the hemipelvis in the prone position, followed by anterior release and reduction of the vertical and rotational displacement and combined anterior/posterior fixation with the patient in the supine position.
 
MALUNIONS AND DISPLACED NONUNIONS OF THE PELVIS
To treat symptoms related to deformity of the pelvis, a reduction of the pelvis is required because a simple in situ fusion will be unrewarding and not completely relieve the pain (see Fig. 21.3). As mentioned earlier, this often involves a three stage, two stage, or one stage procedure.4,5,7 If combined with an acetabular malunion, four stages may be required (Figs 18.3A to Q). The key with combination pelvic and acetabular malunions and nonunions is after release of all the associated pieces, reduction and fixation of the pieces proceeds from the posterior pelvis to the anterior pelvis (i.e. posterior SI joint, acetabulum, and then the symphysis).
The first stage includes release of one side of the ring (i.e. posterior osteotomy through an old iliac wing/SI joint injury, sacrum and transverse processes, and release of the sacrospinous and sacrotuberous ligaments). The second stage includes the release of the other side of the ring (i.e. bilateral superior and inferior rami osteotomies, and further release of anterior interosseous SI joint, sacrospinous, and sacrotuberous ligaments as well as a sacral osteotomy), reduction of the pelvic deformity, and stabilization of that side of the pelvis (i.e. 10-hole reconstruction plate across the symphysis pubis). The third stage is used for additional reduction and fixation of the first-stage side of the pelvis (i.e. two 6.5 mm iliosacral screws). Obviously, if the pelvis is well reduced and opposite side fixation can be performed, a third stage is not required (i.e. fixation of the posterior ring during the 2nd stage using percutaneous iliosacral screws in the supine position). The order of stages depends on the pelvic deformity, where the initial injury occurred, and which side (anterior or posterior) will allow the best reduction during the second stage after complete release of the deformity both anteriorly and posteriorly (Fig. 18.3 and illustrative case). Often, rotational deformities are best reduced with the patient supine (see Fig. 22.6). With the ability to stabilize the normal hemipelvis to the bed, vertical translation can now be corrected using either anterior or posterior approaches. However, bilateral vertical translations are best reduced from a posterior approach after adequate release anteriorly (bilateral anterior sacrum osteotomies) using spinopelvic fixation (pedicle screws and fixation into the PSIS) for reduction of the deformity (illustrative case). 197
Figures 18.3A to I: (A) 28-year-old picture >3 months out from a MVA. Patient had a fungal infection of the Morel-Lavallee lesion now ready for a 4-staged reconstruction of a malunion of the pelvis and acetabulum with granulation tissue. (B to F) Initial AP, inlet, outlet, obturator oblique, and iliac oblique plain views showing a left unstable SI joint, right T-type posterior wall acetabular fracture, and symphyseal disruption. (G to I) Initial axial CT scans showing the left unstable SI joint and the right T-type with comminuted posterior wall fracture
Depending on the particular deformity, different reduction techniques are used. Posterior reduction techniques include table traction (Judet table Fig. 21.6A) with fixation of the opposite side of the pelvis to the table (see Fig. 21.6B), pointed reduction forceps (Weber clamp between the spinous process and iliac wing, Figures 21.9 and 21.10), pedicle screws attached to PSIS in distraction (illustrative case), femoral distractor between the two PSISs, and an angled Matta clamp through the notch (one tongs on the sacrum anteriorly and the other tongs on the outer cortex of the iliac wing, Figures 21.9 and 21.10). Various anterior maneuvers include the Weber clamp, large Jungbluth pelvic reduction clamp across the symphysis pubis, pelvic “C”-clamp, external fixation compression distraction devices (depending on the deformity), table traction, and use of a femoral distraction between two iliac wings just lateral to the SI joint and between the iliac wing and the contralateral quadrilateral surface to external rotate the pelvis (see Figs 21.8E, 21.9D, 21.13G). The key to reduction is to recognize the deformity, adequately release the deformity, and create a force vector to reduce the deformity.198
Figures 18.3J to Q: (J and K) Initial axial CT scans showing the left unstable SI joint and the right T-type with comminuted posterior wall fracture. (L) AP view after two of the four stages: 1) right ilioinguinal approach releasing the anterior column of the T-type acetabulum fracture and the symphysis and an iliac portion of the ilioinguinal on the left releasing the SI joint and 2) left posterior approach with release of the SI joint, reduction, and fixation with two iliosacral screws. (M to Q) AP, obturator oblique, iliac oblique, inlet, and outlet view after the 4 stage reconstruction: 3) right extended iliofemoral to release the posterior column and posterior wall of the T-type acetabulum fracture, anatomical reduction, and fixation and 4) Pfannenstiel approach for ORIF of the symphyseal disruption. The patient was seen 5 years postoperative without problems
A typical surgical plan for a vertical malunion of the pelvis would be:
  • Stage 1: Patient is positioned supine. Bilateral superior and inferior rami osteotomies are performed along with release of the soft tissue around the osteotomies, an anterior sacral osteotomy just medial to the sacroiliac joint with release of the soft tissue associated with the L5 nerve root, and release of the sacrospinous and sacrotuberous ligaments. This is done through a Pfannenstiel incision and the lateral window of the ilioinguinal approach.
  • Stage 2: The patient is placed prone and a posterior approach to the sacral osteotomy is performed. Further release of the sacral osteotomy is performed, along with release of the sacrotuberous and sacrospinous ligaments and the soft tissue around the iliac wing (including the iliolumbar ligament). Reduction of the vertical migration of the 199hemipelvis is performed using table traction through an ipsilateral femoral traction pin with the contralateral pelvis fixed to the table, and with a Weber clamp and angled Matta clamp as mentioned previously. Fixation is with two iliosacral screws.
  • Stage 3: The patient is again positioned supine and additional reduction of the rotational deformity is performed along with plating of the bilateral superior rami osteotomies (Figs 18.3 and 22.6). Alternatively, if the vertical deformity is minor (i.e. a posterior release is not required to get a minor correction with table traction) and the deformity is more rotational, the release, reduction and fixation can be done in a single stage anteriorly4 (see Fig. 22.6).
 
APPROACH
The approaches used have been described (posterior in the chapter on iliosacral screws and the anterior iliac portion of the ilioinguinal and Pfannenstiel approach in the chapter on the anterior approach to the SI joint). Use of the spinopelvic fixation utilizes a straight posterior approach often combined with a neurologic decompression (Figs 18.4A to C).
 
Simple Pelvic Nonunions
A Foley catheter is always placed preoperatively. A Pfannenstiel incision is made 2 cm cephalad from the symphysis. The decussation of the fascia fibers of the rectus abdominus mark the division between the two heads of the rectus. The two heads are split with extreme care being taken to avoid entering the bladder. The surgeon then inspects the bladder to detect any perforations. The Foley should be palpated to ensure the urethra is intact. A malleable retractor is then used to hold the bladder away from the symphysis pubis.
Figures 18.4A to C: (A) Intraoperative photo of a midline approach on a 20-year-old jumper with bilateral sacral fractures and spinopelvic fixation. (B and C) AP and lateral view showing the continued kyphotic deformity (required hyperextension of the lower extremities to correct this deformity—illustrative case)
200Two Hohman retractors are used to retract the two heads of the rectus from the superior surface of the symphysis pubis. Through the Pfannenstiel approach, the SI joints can be visualized and the quadrilateral surface exposed via the modified Stoppa approach.16 Therefore, a plate can be placed from the symphysis to the SI joint along the brim superiorly bilaterally. Furthermore, a plate can be placed within the pelvis from the symphysis along the quadrilateral plate to the SI joint. Plates or screws can be used on the inferior rami via a direct approach with the patient in the lithotomy position. This position allows the surgeon to also perform a Pfannenstiel incision as well (see Fig. 21.3I).
For SI joint arthrodesis or iliac wing nonunions, the lateral window of the ilioinguinal approach is performed. The L5 nerve runs 2 cm medial to the SI joint and must be protected. If vertical translation has occurred, mobilization of the nerve is required to reduce the hemipelvis without causing a nerve palsy.
Sacral nonunions, due to limited visualization, almost always are operated on through a posterior approach. A longitudinal approach two centimeters lateral to the PSIS is made. The gluteus maximus is raised off of the iliac crest, lumbodorsal fascia, and paraspinal muscles exposing the posterior SI joint and ligaments. For arthrodesis of the SI joint through the posterior approach, fibrous and cartilaginous tissue is removed from the joint and posterior superior iliac spine bone graft is used to fuse the joint. An osteotome is used to remove the articular cartilage from the iliac side first, and then a curette is used to remove cartilage from the sacrum all the way to the anterior brim.
 
Malunions and Displaced Nonunions of the Pelvis
Surgical approaches also vary with particular deformities of the pelvis. Anterior approaches include bilateral ilioinguinal, unilateral ilioinguinal, Pfannenstiel (modified Stoppa) incision, or lateral window of the ilioinguinal. Posterior surgical approaches include the posterior longitudinal incision6, 17 (sometimes bilaterally), midline approach, extended iliofemoral (EIF) incision (if combined with an acetabular malunion), or a lateral approach from the PSIS to the ASIS.
 
Fracture Stabilization
 
SIMPLE PELVIC NONUNIONS
Painful nonunions without deformity can be treated with stabilization, bone graft, or both. A technetium bone scan can indicate activity of the nonunion (atrophic [requires bone graft] or hypertrophic [requires stabilization]). In most cases it is not necessary and surgery involves both bone graft and stabilization.
Nonunions of rami fractures are rare. If they occur, they are often located in the medial aspect of the pubis bone or in the symphyseal region. Because more than 90% of weight-bearing is posterior, many nonunions of the anterior pelvic ring are asymptomatic. As a result, some patients are evaluated by several specialists (obstetrics and gynecology, general surgery, etc.) before an X-ray identifies a painful nonunion. Often treatment of symptomatic superior rami nonunion will heal the inferior rami nonunion. However, there are cases where plating both the superior and the inferior rami is required. The superior surface of the superior rami is cleaned for the plate, but the anterior insertion of the rectus remains intact. A large Weber clamp or pelvic reduction clamp can be used anteriorly to hold the symphysis together or rami fracture together. Usually, a six-hole 3.5 reconstruction plate is then implanted. Clinical research supports the implantation of this device.12 When a fusion of the symphysis is needed, an additional four-hole plate is used anterior to the symphysis and a corticocancellous graft bolts posterior to the symphysis. Additionally, when fusion of the symphysis is indicated, an eight to ten-hole plate is used rather than a six-hole plate superiorly.
201For anterior SI joint arthrodesis, after curetting the joint and creating a trough in the anterior SI joint, place two three-hole plates at approximately 90° to each other. Place the first plate as caudad as possible with one screw in the sacrum and two in the ilium. Due to the anatomy of the sacrum, this caudad position allows placement of the longest screws possible into the best bone. Angle the screw in the sacrum slightly medially to parallel the SI joint. Bicortical 3.5 mm screws are used. The use of a long oscillating drill is recommended because of its flexibility and safety. Alternatively, percutaneous iliosacral screws can be placed. Iliac wing nonunions usually require plate fixation only without involvement of the SI joint.
Fixation of sacral nonunions is usually obtained with two 6.5 mm, 16 mm thread length iliosacral screws. Again, the use of an oscillating drill is recommended for safety and so that three cortices are entered but not the fourth. Additional stability can be achieved by placing one or two posterior reconstruction plates from one iliac wing to the other iliac wing. These plates act as a tension band and are less prominent if placed caudad to the PSIS. Iliosacral bars are also an option, however, they are usually prominent and were not used in our series.5,7 More recently, trans-sacral screw fixation has been described but in general well placed iliosacral screws give sufficient stability for healing in well reduced sacral fractures.17,18
 
MALUNIONS AND DISPLACED NONUNIONS OF THE PELVIS
Stabilization of the pelvis also varies depending on the location of the deformity and the amount of release required for proper reduction. Standard fixation anteriorly includes curved 3.5 reconstruction plates of various sizes anteriorly along the brim and symphysis.
Posteriorly, 6.5 cancellous iliosacral screws 16 mm thread length, 3.5 mm and 4.5 mm osteotomy lag screws, and large reconstruction plates from just caudad to PSIS to PSIS are used. In each case however, the actual type of fixation is determined only after the reduction is performed.
 
CLOSURE
In general, fascial closure is with O vicryl, 2-O vicryl subcutaneous, and staples in the skin. Any muscle detachments are repaired with number 5 ethibond.
 
Tips and Pearls
  • In general, reduction of the posterior pelvic injury should precede reduction of an acetabular fracture or the anterior pelvic injury. Starting the reduction anteriorly, the surgeon must be aware that a few millimeters or degrees of malreduction anteriorly can lead to more than a centimeter displacement posteriorly.
  • A posterior external fixation frame (C-clamp) may give better compression posteriorly but is contraindicated in cases where the iliac fracture is anterior to the sacroiliac joint.
  • Leave the rectus abdominis attached to the pelvis when plating the symphysis pubis. Never debride the symphyseal cartilage in acute repairs.
  • If stable pelvic fractures have greater than 20 degrees internal rotation of the hemipelvis or greater than 1 cm of leg length discrepancy, or if the rami fracture is impinging on the bladder or vagina (tilt fracture), operative fixation is indicated.
  • Most rami fractures are treated conservatively. Those with greater than 1.5 cm of displacement with an unstable posterior injury are treated operatively due to disruption of the iliopectineal fascia.
  • The main complication of iliosacral screw placement is an L5 nerve root injury due to the guide pin, drill bit, or screw being placed too anteriorly so the pin exits and reenters the sacrum in the sacral ala area, damaging the L5 nerve root.202
  • Bilateral sacral fractures and U- or H-type fracture patterns are frequently misdiagnosed as simple sacral fractures and can cause significant morbidity from nerve injuries. These injuries completely disassociate the pelvis and the lower extremities from the spine. They frequently have a kyphotic deformity. They can best be seen on a lateral sacral view or lateral sacral CT reconstruction.
  • The most important component to the outcome of pelvic injuries is the preoperative nerve exam. Secondarily associated injuries and quality of reduction are also important.
 
Postoperative Management
Due to the extensive releases required to reduce pelvic malunions, postoperatively, patients are instructed to limit weight-bearing for three months before aggressive physical therapy and advancement to weight-bearing as tolerated. After adequate healing, range of motion and strengthening exercises are instigated.
 
Complications
Complications in treating bilateral sacral fractures, malunions, and nonunions included loss of reduction, neurologic injury, and vascular injury (external iliac vein). There were no surgical infections. Although residual low back pain was present in most of the patients preoperatively, 95% reported less pain following surgery.
The two roles for the orthopedic surgeon in patients with pelvic fractures are to anatomically reduce the pelvis and prevent complications. Complications that occur from the injury are not preventable. However, iatrogenic injuries can be prevented. Kellam et al reported a 25% infection rate with a posterior approach to the pelvis.19 This high infection rate is due to operating through damaged soft tissue and cutting straight down to the bone (not elevating the gluteus maximus flap). Careful consideration of the soft tissue, as well as an anatomical approach, can reduce this rate of infection to 2.8%.12 If the posterior soft tissue has sustained too much damage, an anterior approach should be chosen. Careful evaluation and treatment of Morel-Lavallée lesions can also decrease the rate of infection.
Although, injury-related nerve damage can occur, the surgeon must work to prevent iatrogenic nerve injury. Careful understanding of the anatomy, as well as proper reduction and fixation techniques, can prevent damage to nerves that may already be slightly injured secondary to the accident. Somatosensory evoked potentials as well as other nerve monitoring can be used in an attempt to decrease the rate of nerve injury. However, the benefits of nerve monitoring in the acute setting have been controversial. The author's use of nerve monitoring has been limited to correction of chronic malunions that require significant reductions.5 In the author's opinion, nerve monitoring in the acute setting is not indicated. Finally, because of the complexity of pelvic fractures and the associated injuries, the absolute correlation between reduction and function has not been demonstrated definitively. However, it is the author's strong opinion, which is supported in the literature and by personal experience with more than 1000 pelvic injuries, that the more anatomical the reduction is, the better the functional outcome for the patient.3,5,11 Therefore, the goal of every surgeon is to anatomically reduce and fix the pelvis and avoid complications.
 
LITERATURE
Previous literature focused on simple nonunions. These patients often do not require extensive anterior and posterior ring releases and reduction, and respond to in situ fusion only. Pennal3 showed that patients treated with surgery are significantly better than those treated conservatively. In his study, 11 out of 18 surgery patients returned to 203preinjury occupation versus five out of 24 conservatively treated patients. In nonunion cases with significant displacement, in situ fusions are unrewarding and leave the patient with complaints related to deformity as well as significant pain.
The time frame from injury to operation in our series averaged 42 months (range from 4 months to 14 years).5,7 Operative time averaged 7 hours (range 1.5 to 10.4 hours). Operative blood loss averaged 1,977 cc (range 200 to 7200 cc).
At follow up, (average 3 years, 11 months; range—9 months to 11 years) all but one patient had a stable union of their pelvic ring. Ninety-five percent of the patients were satisfied with the operation and 100% of the patients were satisfied with the improvement of their preoperative deformity. Ninety-five percent of patients with malunion of the pelvis report improvement of their pain, however, only 21% have complete relief of their posterior pain.5,7 In our series of pelvic malunions, most of the deformity was corrected with 76% of our reductions had less than 1 cm of residual deformity.5,7 As mentioned earlier, the unsatisfied patient continues to have a L5 nerve palsy. Now with over a hundred pelvic nonunion and malunion patients, prevention is still the key.
Our studies on malunions and nonunions show that 57% of the patients had a preoperative nerve injury and only 16% were resolving postoperatively.5,7 Only one patient in our studies would not have the nonunion/malunion surgery again, and this was due to a postoperative nerve complication. The patient underwent two operations on a 16-year-old nonunion that was extremely mobile. An L5 nerve root injury occurred from the posterior fixation. The patient required reoperation for persistent nonunion. At the time of the second operation, the posterior fixation was changed. The complaints of deformity were completely resolved but the patient still suffered from pain in the L5 nerve distribution, despite having a stable pelvis.
Stabilization of nondisplaced pelvic nonunions, especially posteriorly, has been proven to be successful in returning patients to their preinjury status.3 The one, two, or three stage pelvic reconstruction has also benefitted most patients with a pelvic malunion or displaced nonunion.5,7 Once the deformity has established itself and chronic symptoms develop, the probability of surgical reconstruction returning the patient to their preinjury status is decreased. Also, the rate of complications is higher for late surgical treatment. The most common errors seen that cause malunions are the conservative or external fixator treatment of an unstable pelvic injury, or a failure by the treating physician to understand the deformity or the ability to reduce that deformity. Prevention by acute open anatomical reduction and internal fixation of unstable pelvic injuries is the best treatment for pelvic malunions and nonunions.
Spinopelvic fixation9,10 is an important tool for the surgeon. There is controversy on its use in the acute setting. Many surgeons leave the fixation in until healing to be able to start weight-bearing sooner in the postoperative period and then remove the hardware 6 to 12 months postoperatively. The author's opinion is in most acute cases except for bilateral “U” or “H” sacral fractures, spinopelvic fixation is not required and good iliosacral screws give adequate stabilization if anatomical reduction is achieved.17 In “U” or “H” pattern sacral fractures or in malunions when spinopelvic fixation is required to achieve an anatomical reduction, the hardware can be removed intraoperatively once adequate stability has been achieved with iliosacral screws. Waiting 8-12 weeks for weight-bearing is less of a burden then having a second surgery to remove the spinopelvic hardware.
 
Illustrative Case
A H- or U-type fracture of the sacrum are particularly difficult to diagnose and treat. These bilateral fractures of the sacrum are often seen in jumpers and are a complete dissociation of the lower extremities and the caudad part of the sacrum from the spine.204
Figures 18.5A to L: (A to C) AP, outlet, and inlet view of a 22-year-old after a MVA suffering a “H” type bilateral sacral fractures. It is difficult to see the transverse component on these views (a lateral view is needed to see the true deformity). (D to F) Axial CT showing the bilateral sacral fracture. (G to I) Axial CT showing a healed rami fracture (callous 6 months post- injury), coronel reconstruction CT showing the bilateral sacral fracture, and lateral reconstruction CT showing the kyphotic deformity and S2 elevated to the superior endplate of S1. (J to L) AP, lateral, and inlet flouro intraoperative views. After anterior bilateral sacral osteotomies and posterior completion of the sacral osteotomies and release of ligaments, reduction is performed by hyperextension of bilateral lower extremities, spinopelvic distraction along bent rods that reduce the kyphotic deformity, and levering the top of S2 under S1 with a cobb between the nerve roots posteriorly. Two iliosacral screws are placed bilaterally and the reduction spinopelvic fixation is removed during the surgery
205
Figures 18.5M to O: (M, N) AP view and lateral reconstruction CT postoperatively showing the reduction. (O) AP view of the patient now 5 years postoperatively. The patient is pursuing a career in nursing
These patients can have significant deformity with kyphosis of the sacrum. The reduction of these injuries is problematic due to the fact that the entire pelvis requires distraction (Figs 18.5A to O). This patient (HT) was a 22-year-old who was involved in a MVA and suffered H type bilateral sacral fracture (Figs 18.5A to I). The patient initially had the wrong diagnosis of a nondisplaced bilateral sacral fracture. A lateral of the sacrum was never taken, therefore, the true kyphotic deformity was never diagnosed (Fig. 18.5I). After 3 months and the patient was still unable to ambulate secondary to pain, an orthopedic traumatologist was consulted. He made the diagnosis and refered the patient to the author for definitive fixation. Unfortunately the patient had a breakdown posteriorly that required wound care prior to definitive fixation. The patient had a 2 staged approach: (1) bilateral iliac portion of the ilioinguinal approach with bilateral anterior sacral osteotomy and (2) a posterior approach with decompression of the nerves, further release of the sacral osteotomies, placement of the spinopelvic fixation from L4 to PSIS, and reduction of the deformity. Unfortunately, during the right sacral osteotomy there was a bleeder within the bone that could not be stopped without packing. The patient was closed with the packing and three days later was brought back, the packing was removed and the secod stage was performed. The technique the author has used in this rare pattern is placement of pedicle screws in L5 (occasionally in L4 as well) down to the posterior-superior iliac spine. This allows traction between the intact portion of S1 (attached to the spine) and the iliac wing (and caudad part of the sacrum). Traction and hyperextension of the pelvis and lower extremities are required to obtain reduction. This should be the positioning of the patient prior to opening the fracture. Traction with the foregoing construct deforms the pelvis by pushing the pelvis laterally, distally, and into flexion. By bending the spinal rods appropriately, the surgeon can rotate the rods after distraction to reduce these deformities. Additionally, a cobb can be placed in the fracture line levaging the S2 segment under the inferior portion of S1 (Figs 18.5J to L). Once an anatomical reduction is achieved, iliosacral screws are placed to fix both of the hemipelves to the S1 body (Fig. 18.5M). Additionally, a tension plate can be placed posteriorly for added stability.
After fixation the spinal instrumentation is removed. Some surgeons may retain the pedicle fixation for additional stability. They claim a more rapid recovery due to immediate weight-bearing as tolerated compared with 12 weeks of touch-down weight-bearing. However, there are disadvantages with leaving the lumbopelvic fixation. An additional surgery is required to remove the implants, and this type of fixation may cause permanent morbidity with pain and deformity (angulation at the S1–L5 junction). In the author's experience, the lumbopelvic fixation can be removed without any loss of reduction and without the added morbidity of the added fixation. Although the rehabilitation is slower, the long-term outcome is the same or better without the 206lumbopelvic fixation. The main problem with these fractures is the failure to diagnose the fracture pattern so the kyphotic deformity is not reduced. This leads to significant morbidity to the patient and is very difficult to correct later after the fracture heals. The patient went on to uneventful healing and now 6 years later is pursuing a career in nursing (currently in nursing school)(Fig. 18.5O).
References
  1. HundleyJ. Ununited unstable fractures of the pelvis (Proceedings of the 33rd Annual Meeting of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons). J Bone Joint Surg Am; 1966.p.46A.
  1. MattaJM, SaucedoT. Internal fixation of pelvic ring fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1989;242: 83–97.
  1. PennalGF, MassiahKA. Nonunion and delayed union of fractures of the pelvis. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1980;151:124–9.
  1. FrigonVA, DicksonKF. Open reduction internal fixation of a pelvic malunion through an anterior approach. J Orthop Trauma. 2001;15(7):519–24.
  1. MattaJM, DicksonKF, MarkovichGD. Surgical treatment of pelvic nonunions and malunions. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:199–206.
  1. TileM. Fractures of the pelvis and acetabulum. Edited, Baltimore, Williams and Wilkins,  1984.
  1. DicksonKF, MattaJM. Surgical reduction and stabilization of pelvic nonunions and malunions. In The 63rd Annual Meeting of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons. Edited, Atlanta, Georgia, 1996.
  1. DicksonKF, MattaJM. Skeletal deformity after anterior external fixation of the pelvis. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23(5):327–32.
  1. SagiH. Technical aspects and recommended treatment algorithms in triangular osteosynthesis and spinopelvic fixation for vertical shear transforaminal sacral fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23(5):354–60.
  1. TanGQ, HeJL, FuBS, LiLX, WangBM, ZhouDS. Lumbopelvic fixation for multiplanar sacral fractures with spinopelvic instability. (epub before printed version) Injury, 2012.
  1. SembaRT, YasukawaK, GustiloRB. Critical analysis of results of 53 Malgaigne fractures of the pelvis. J Trauma. 1983;23(6):535–7.
  1. MattaJM, Tornetta P3rd. Internal fixation of unstable pelvic ring injuries. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:129–40.
  1. HuittinenVM, SlatisP. Nerve injury in double vertical pelvic fractures. Acta Chir Scand. 1972;138(6):571–5.
  1. SponsellerPD, BissonLJ, GearhartJP, JeffsRD, MagidD, FishmanE. The anatomy of the pelvis in the exstrophy complex. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1995;77(2):177–89.
  1. MattaJM, YerasimidesJG. Table-skeletal fixation as an adjunct to pelvic ring reduction. J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21(9):647–56.
  1. ColeJD, BolhofnerBR. Acetabular fracture fixation via a modified Stoppa limited intrapelvic approach. Description of operative technique and preliminary treatment results. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1994;305:112–23.
  1. HsuJR, BearRR, DicksonKF. Open reduction of displaced sacral fractures: Techniques and results. Sacral fractures. Orthopedics. 2010;33(10):730.
  1. BeaulePE, AntoniadesJ, MattaJM. Trans-sacral fixation for failed posterior fixation of the pelvic ring. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2006;126(1):49–52.
  1. KellamJ, McMurtryR, PaleyD, TileM. The unstable pelvic fracture: operative treatment. Orthop Clin North Am. 1987;18:25–41.

Surgical Techniques: Reduction and Fixation of Pelvic Ring Injuries19

Amol Chitre, Nikhil Shah, Henry Wynn-Jones, Anthony Clayson
 
Introduction
The pelvic ring gets its stability from strong anterior and posterior ligaments as well as the spinopelvic ligaments. Fractures of the pelvic ring occur with a bimodal distribution. Fractures that occur in younger adults tend to be as a result of high energy trauma, whereas those occuring in the elderly population are generally low energy injuries as a result of simple falls from standing height. Low energy injuries generally leave the pelvic ring stable and rarely require operative intervention.
High energy injuries may be the result of road traffic accidents, industrial accidents such as falls from heights and crush injuries. Once the pelvic ring has been compromised there is a high potential for the transmitted energy or fracture fragments to do further damage to the pelvic viscera and neurovascular structures. Bowel, bladder, urethra, major arteries, veins and nerves are all at risk. As well as intrapelvic injury, there is a high rate of associated injury, including head, chest, abdominal, spinal and musculoskeletal injury. Prognosis is usually determined by the urologic and neurologic injuries.
 
General Principles
Mortality associated with pelvic injuries tends to occur as a result of hemorrhage. The immediate management of pelvic injuries is based around ATLS principles. The main methods of surgical hemostasis from pelvic injury relate to emergent stabilization of the pelvis. This may be achieved by use of circumferential binders, external fixation, skeletal traction, C-clamps or a combination thereof. A small proportion of pelvic injuries—between 5 and 10%—produce arterial hemorrhage and this may be difficult to control with skeletal stabilization only. Arteriography and embolization should be considered in these patients. Where this is not possible surgical packing of the pelvis is a good option.
Open pelvic fractures have a high mortality rate – up to 50% and must be carefully assessed and treated promptly. Rectal and vaginal examination may reveal occult injuries where the fracture fragments have penetrated through. The principles of management revolve around aggressive resuscitation, early wound management with plastic surgical involvement, early pelvic stabilization which may include definitive stabilization, and emergency fecal diversion using a colostomy (ideally left hypochondriac area of the abdomen). This has been shown to reduce the rate of life-threatening sepsis.208
 
Emergency Pelvic Stabilization
 
APPLICATION OF PELVIC BINDER
Various devices are currently available to use as pelvic binders, but anything that acts circumferentially around the pelvis may be utilized. Historically towels or bed sheets have been used. Both lower limbs should be internally rotated and the knees slightly flexed. The binder should be applied at the level of the greater trochanters. It has previously been suggested that the binder acts by reducing pelvic volume thereby allowing tamponade to occur. However since even an intact pelvis can hold several liters of fluid it is more likely that the stability conferred to the fractured bone surfaces allows a better chance for clot to form and seal any damaged vessels.
 
APPLICATION OF PELVIC EXTERNAL FIXATION
Two configurations of pins are commonly used: Iliac crest pins or supra-acetabular pins. Iliac crest pins can be positioned without the use of fluoroscopy and are perceived to be easier as the iliac crest is easily palpable even in the obese patient (Fig. 19.1 and Table 19.1). However, the ilium is very thin and has concave surfaces on both the inner and outer table, hence there is a high chance that the pin does not stay within the bone and the purchase may be poor. Supra-acetabular pin positioning involves more dissection and is thought to be technically more demanding, but does confer the benefit of improved hold within better bone stock. Supra-acetabular external fixation may be used as part of the definitive treatment of the pelvic fractures (Fig. 19.2 and Table 19.2).
 
C-CLAMP
A C-clamp may beneficial in pelvic fractures where there is vertical instability of the pelvis or the posterior elements of the pelvis are significantly disrupted. Application of a C-clamp is technically demanding and should be performed by a surgeon who has appropriate knowledge of the device and the required training. Detailed description of this technique is outside the scope of this chapter (Fig. 19.2).
 
PELVIC PACKING
This is really a measure of last resort. It may sometimes also be necessary when a laparotomy has been performed which may have disturbed the initial clot around any pelvic fractures.
Figure 19.1: Supra-acetabular external fixator (suprapubic cystostomy is seen)
Figure 19.2: Application of anterior external fixator and C-clamp as emergency measure
209
Table 19.1   Technique—application of iliac crest external fixator
  • Patient is positioned supine
  • The pelvic binder may be left in situ
  • Palpate the iliac crest
  • We prefer three separate radial incisions on each side over the iliac crest. An incision along the crest is also described. The incisions should all be directed towards the umbilicus
  • For each incision:
    • Blunt dissect on to the iliac crest
    • Make a small starter hole using either the triple trocar mechanism available on most external fixator sets or a small drill
    • Advance the suitably sized Schanz screw (usually 5 or 6 mm) in by hand, aiming to keep the pin between the inner and outer table
  • The pins can be joined in a variety of configurations using rods and clamps after correcting the pelvic deformity with internal rotation forces if required (usually the pelvic binder will have already done this). As the incisions have been made radially, the pins should stay within the confines of the incision as the pelvis is closed
  • Care must be taken that in the postoperative period, the patient should be able to sit up. So the frame construction should not obstruct the chest or the thighs
  • This allows access to the abdomen if laparotomy is required at a later stage. Two bars should be used for each arm of the chevron to confer greater stability
  • Ensure the skin is released adequately around the pins.
Table 19.2   Technique—application of supra-acetabular external fixator
  • Patient is positioned supine
  • Palpate the ASIS and make a 2 cm incision on each side vertically down and slightly directed medially – beware the lateral cutaneous nerve of the thigh
  • Blunt dissect onto the ridge of bone between the ASIS and the AIIS
  • Using fluoroscopy, position the pin guide mechanism 1 cm above the acetabulum to ensure the hip capsule is not breached and make a starter hole. Advance the 5 mm Schanz pin under fluoroscopic guidance, ensuring the angle of the pin is such that the acetabulum is not penetrated
  • Position a second 5 mm Schanz pin 0.5 cm to 1 cm superior to the first pin in the same fashion
  • As the bone tends to be denser in this area it is usually sufficient to position 2 Schanz pins on either side.
  • Construct the frame, reduce the pelvis and tighten the construct as for the iliac crest fixator (Fig. 19.2)
In the instance where a laparotomy has already been performed, damp swabs are placed extraperitoneally as far round the pelvic brim and behind the pubic symphysis as possible. The wound is left open, but sealed with a sterile adhesive dressing. Once the patient has been stabilized the patient may be taken back to theater to remove the packs and achieve definitive fixation. Several excellent publications are available describing this technique.
 
Further Studies and Imaging
After the patient has been stabilized initially, further consideration must be given to whether the patient would benefit from surgical stabilization of the pelvic ring. At this point further imaging aids decision making. Traditionally a series of plain radiographs have been used – AP pelvis, inlet and outlet views. This combination can show disruption and displacement of both the anterior and posterior elements of the pelvis. We find CT scanning and in particular 3-D reconstructions quite useful to assess the posterior ring lesion such as sacral fractures, crescent fractures and sacro-iliac disruptions.210
 
Classification
The most important factor in deciding whether a pelvic fracture requires definitive operative fixation is whether the pelvic ring is stable or unstable. To this intent, we prefer the classification by Tile and Pennal (Table 19.3 ). Here the pelvis is essentially divided into two arches by the acetabulum with the anterior arch being all components anterior to the acetabulum and the posterior arch everything posterior. The posterior arch is the key to stability of the pelvis. Type A fractures are inherently stable and only in specific circumstances need surgical fixation. We would generally prefer to fix fractures which have a propensity for nonunion – particularly some displaced iliac wing fractures and displaced ischial tuberosity avulsions, or displaced ASIS and AIIS avulsions particularly in young athletes.
Type B fractures involve partial disruption of the posterior arch – this leaves the pelvis rotationally unstable, but it is stable in other planes. This is the classical open book type fracture. Type B fractures may require fixation – open book type injuries commonly do, whereas lateral compression injuries are commonly stable. Type C fractures involve complete disruption of the posterior arch, hence leaving the pelvis not only rotationally, but vertically unstable or in fact multidirectionally unstable. Type C fractures almost always require definitive surgical stabilization. A recent systematic review suggested that outcomes are much better after fixation in these injuries.
It is often difficult to be certain whether a fracture is stable as imaging gives you a static rather than a dynamic picture. In addition many patients will have a pelvic binder in place when their imaging is taken as part of their emergency treatment, which may give the false impression of pelvic ring stability. If there is any doubt we perform an examination under anesthetic with push/pull imaging of the pelvis. If there is any movement then surgical fixation is considered.
The other main classification systems currently in use are the Young and Burgess classification and the AO classification. Young and Burgess’ classification is based on the mechanism of injury and the direction of the force vector causing the pelvic injury. The three categories of injury are antero-posterior, lateral compression and vertical shear. We find this system less useful for determining the stability of the pelvis than the Tile and Pennal classification. The AO classification is an adaptation of Tile and Pennal's work and is probably a more useful tool for research and categorizing injuries.
Table 19.3   Tile and Pennal classification
Type A
  1. Avulsion injuries, e.g. ischial tuberosity or anterior inferior iliac spine
  2. Iliac wing, or anterior arch fractures caused by direct blow (e.g. bilateral pubic rami fractures)
  3. Transverse sacrococcygeal fracture
Type B
  1. Open book (pubic symphysis disruption)
  2. Lateral compression injury
    • Ipsilateral anterior and posterior injury
    • Contralateral injury.
  3. Bilateral
Type C
  1. Unilateral
    • Iliac fracture
    • Sacro-iliac fracture dislocation
    • Sacral fracture
  2. Bilateral, one side type B, one type C
  3. Bilateral type C
211
 
Techniques of Surgical Fixation
The goal of surgical fixation is to restore a stable ring configuration of the pelvis. Attention should be paid in order not to miss the posterior ring lesion which should be fixed if unstable. We shall describe our preferred methods to achieve definitive stabilization of the pelvic ring. Open surgical techniques have been described. Percutaneous techniques are not included in this chapter.
 
Surgical Tactic
For a type B injury only stabilizing the anterior ring lesion is enough. So the symphysis plating or the ramus plating should be sufficient to reduce and close the posterior ring lesion in a type B (usually the SI joint widening). If this is a type C injury then closing the ring with anterior fixation may paradoxically make the posterior ring lesion worse. So a pelvic binder or C-clamp, (used carefully in trained hands) may have already been used. Definitive stabilization will consist of only anterior stabilization in a type B injury and stabilizing the anterior and posterior ring lesions in type C injury.
 
Surgical Stabilization of Disruption of the Symphysis Pubis
  • Position the patient supine
  • Catheterize the patient and secure the catheter
  • Shave the patient around the pubic area
  • Palpate and mark anatomical landmarks – Pubic symphysis and ASIS.
Once the patient has been draped ready for surgery, mark the incision – this should be about 1 finger breadth above the pubic symphysis. We prefer the Pfannenstiel incision (Fig. 19.3).
Dissect through the subcutaneous fat till the rectus sheath (note at this level the rectus sheath is deficient posteriorly).
Make a small transverse incision through the rectus sheath.
Divide the rectus sheath transversely taking care not to extend too far laterally on either side and damaging the spermatic cord in men (round ligament in women) and elevate the sheath off the anterior aspect of the muscle to find the insertion distally.
Figure 19.3: Pfannensteil approach for symphysis fixation, same incision can be used for Stoppa approach
212At this point there are 2 options: (in many instances the rectus of the injured hemipelvis may be avulsed and the surgical approach has already been done for the surgeon).
  1. Divide the rectus abdominis off the pubic bone—to do this locate the pubic bone and cut down on to it leaving a 1 cm cuff of tendon to repair. This gives the advantage of making it easier to position 2 plates to fix the symphysis.
  2. Rectus split—make a midline incision at the lower end of the rectus muscle. Split the recti in the midline. This is potentially easier to repair at the end of the procedure.
Place a damp swab behind the pubic symphysis and peel off the bladder from the posterior wall using finger dissection. The swab should remain in place to protect the bladder from potential injury.
The rectus tendon, or stump of tendon depending on which approach has been used then needs to be sharply dissected and lifted off the anterior aspect of the pubis. Enough space should be created to allow for the positioning of a Homann retractor anterior to the ramus.
Continue the subperiosteal dissection to allow access to the superior and anterior aspect of the pubis on either side.
Clear the symphysis of cartilage using a curette, making sure bone is exposed. During this step care should be exerted not to damage the urethra.
Reduce the symphysis. A variety of methods can be used at this stage. Our preferred method is to position a 3.5 or 4.5 mm cortical screw vertically down either pubic body. Use either the Farabeuf or Jungblauth retractors to gradually bring the two sides of the pelvis together and hold them temporarily. Tenaculum reduction forceps can also be used (Fig. 19.4).
An anterior plate can be positioned. We usually use a 5 hole 3.5 mm pelvic recon plate with 2 screws on each side of the symphysis and this is sufficient in most cases. It is important when drilling this plate that the moist swab and a blunt Ganz type retractor is placed anterior to the bladder in order to protect it from injury due to the drill slipping.
Remove the 2 temporary screws and position a 2 hole or a 4 hole 4.5 mm reconstruction plate superiorly. Usually the 2 original screw holes can be used with 4.5 mm screws replacing the 3.5. Occasionally in poor quality bone a 6.5 mm long partially threaded screw may be required.
Check the reduction and position of the screws with Image Intensifier.
Figure 19.4: Reduction of the symphysis pubis using pelvic reduction clamp and screws—the same technique is applicable for reducing pelvic and acetabular fractures in other locations
213
Figure 19.5: Type B pelvic ring injury with symphysis disruption
Figure 19.6: Double plating of the symphysis pubis
Figure 19.7: Symphysis fixation with two plates
Close the rectus, and then the wound in layers over a drain.
We note that some centers have described using a single plate anteriorly, particularly using a specialized pelvic plate such as the Matta plate, however we feel the double plating technique gives more biomechanical stability (Figs 19.5 to 19.7). We have not had a single incidence of plate breakage in more than 16 years with the double plating technique.
 
Pubic Ramus Fractures
These are usually the anterior ring lesion in a type B or type C ring disruption. They may be unilateral or bilateral. When there are bilateral pubic rami fractures the symphysis is usually intact. Occasionally the ramus fracture may be quite close to the symphysis (Fig. 19.8). One of the strategies is to use an anterior supra-acetabular external fixator as a definitive means of stabilizing rami fractures when part of a type B or type C injury.
More recently we prefer to internally fix these fractures using the Stoppa or modified Stoppa approach. In some cases they may occur in association with anterior column 214fractures of the acetabulum, the so called combined pelvic ring and acetabulum fracture. In such cases an anterior ilioinguinal approach may be required (Figs 19.9 and 19.10).
Figure 19.8: Left superior ramus fracture extending into symphysis with left sacral fracture
We feel that the Stoppa allows better visualization of the ramus and also allows the plate to be positioned directly on the pelvic brim, thereby providing a biomechanical advantage and secure fixation. Details of the Stoppa approach have been described in our chapter on acetabular reduction techniques in this same textbook.
The initial skin incision that we prefer is the same as the Pfannensteil approach used for the symphysis pubis plating. The original Stoppa approach involves a longitudinal split of the rectus muscles, however visualization and exposure can be difficult. The modified Stoppa involves detaching the rectus muscle on the side of the fracture to allow more working space. We have found this to have minimal morbidity and provide excellent exposure.
Continue the subperiosteal dissection along the ramus, taking care to look specifically for the corona mortis – a communication between the external iliac artery and the obturator artery. If seen this should be clipped off using a variety of Ligaclips or formally isloated and ligated.
Figure 19.9: CT scans showing the left side sacral fracture
Figure 19.10: Anterior fixation using Stoppa approach extending over the symphysis and posterior sacral plating
215
Figure 19.11: Symphysis pubis disruption and right high superior ramus fracture fixed via a Pfannensteil incision extended as a modified Stoppa approach
Figure 19.12: Symphysis fixation and right superior ramus fixation via Stoppa appraoch
Continue carefully along the ramus as you will dissect under the external iliac vessels. A malleable retractor protects and pushes the urinary bladder out of the way. Too much posterior pressure should be avoided to prevent damage to the lumbo-sacral plexus of nerves. The surgeon usually stands on the opposite side of the patient. A blunt Kelly retractor can be used to retract and protect the muscular layer of the rectus with the blood vessels under the retractor.
Identify the iliopectineal fascia and then incise along it following the brim of the pelvis just deeper to the blood vessels. There should now be enough space to position a plate and screws above the acetabulum, along either the pelvic brim, or curving onto the inner surface of the ilium. The obturator nerve should also be proected.
A pelvic reconstruction 3.5 mm plate can be suitably contoured and fixed slightly inferior to the level of the brim along the quadrilateral surface. Check X-rays confirm lack of intra-artcular screw penetration (Figs 19.11 and 19.12).
 
Sacro-Iliac Joint (SIJ) Disruption – Type C Disruption
We commonly expose the sacro-iliac joint via the lateral window of the ilioinguinal approach.
The patient is positioned supine and draped as for the symphysis pubis plating. The ASIS and Iliac crests are identified and the incision is made starting 1cm above the ASIS extending along the crest. Continue the dissection to identify the fascia of the external oblique. Elevate the external oblique off the iliac crest. Note – to reflect the full muscle off the iliac crest take care to begin below the crest as the external oblique overhangs. Continue dissecting off the inner table of the ilium. A Cobb elevator is ideal for this. The periosteum should be elevated till the Sacro-iliac joint can be visualised. The L5 nerve root is to be protected.
Place a narrow curved retractor to allow visualization of the sacrum. 2 Steinmann pins can be placed into the sacral ala to serve as retractors. They must be subperiosteal and great caution is to be exercised in order to avoid potential injury to the L5 nerve root.
Two orthogonal plates of 2 holes each (DCP or LCP) should be used to fix the SIJ. Usually only 1 screw is placed through each plate on the sacral side of the SIJ, whilst 1 216or 2 can be positioned through each plate on the ilium side if a 3 hole plate is used.
Figure 19.13: Anterior fixation of the sacro-iliac joint from the first window of the Ilioinguinal approach
Figure 19.14: Type C pelvic ring injury—symphysis disruption and right sacro-iliac disruption
Figure 19.15: Double plating of symphysis and right sacro-iliac plating for type C injury
Some crescent fractures can also be fixed through the same approach using a longer plate (Figs 19.13 to 19.15).
 
Sacral Fracture or SIJ Type B Disruption
In order to gain pelvic ring stability in this situation we perform a posterior sacral plating, essentially fixing the right Ilium to the left. Prior to this, one most ensure the status of the sacral skin, pressure sores, internal degloving etc. Position the patient prone, paying particular attention to make sure any bony prominences are well padded and pillows are placed at the level of the shoulders and the ASIS.
Identify the Posterior Superior Iliac Spines on each side.217
Figure 19.16: Posterior sacral plating—incisions lateral to PSIS
Make a slightly curved but more or less vertical incision on each side just lateral to the PSIS, curving laterally superiorly. Dissect through the subcutaneous tissue to the muscle fascia (Fig. 19.16).
Release the gluteus maximus fascia from the lateral aspect of the PSIS and continue dissecting subperiosteally on the outer aspect of the ilium to allow enough space to position a plate. Beware dissecting more than 2cm distal to the PSIS as there is a chance of damaging the superior gluteal artery. Medial to the PSIS, make a small incision in the muscle fascia.
Develop a subfascial plane from one side to the other and pass a plate through, allowing for 3-4 free holes on either side of the PSIS (Fig. 19.17)
Bend the plate to fit along the Ilium on each side and fix with screws on either side.The plate acts as a tension band posteriorly (Fig. 19.18) (X-rays in Fig. 19.10).
The wound is closed in layers over a drain
 
Crescent Fracture
Crescent fractures are fracture dislocations of the SIJ which disrupt a variable amount of the SIJ before the fracture exits through the posterior iliac crest. The functional classification described by Day et al provides a useful framework to decide how to approach these fractures. Type 1 fractures involve less than one third of the joint.
Figure 19.17: Subfascial tunnel to pass the sacral plate which is then contoured and bent
218
Figure 19.18: Fixation of the posterior sacral plate on each side to the iliac bone. The postoperative X-ray appearance is similar to Figure 19.10
These are approached and fixed via the lateral window of the ilioinguinal approach as described in 3.
Type 2 fractures involve between one and two thirds of the joint, with the fracture line extending between the S1 and S2 foramen. These fractures are fixed from the posterior approach. A similar exposure is used to that described in 4, but the blade of the ilium is exposed more fully and the oppposite side of the pelvis to the fracture does not need to be opened. The fracture is exposed reduced and then fixed with 1 or sometimes 2 plates.
Type 3 fractures involve more than two thirds of the joint and the fracture line is posterior and superior to the S1 nerve root. This is ideally fixed from the lateral window of the ilioinguinal approach as described previously.
 
Iliac Wing Fracture
The Iliac crest is sandwiched between two sets of powerful muscles pulling in opposite directions – iliacus arising from the inner table and the gluteal muscles arising from the outer table. This can mean that fractures do not displace greatly. However there is a described risk of progressing to a symptomatic non-union, hence if there is any displacement we would recommend considering surgical fixation.
The approach for this is similar to the approach for a SIJ fixation, using the lateral window of the ilio-inguinal approach. Combinations of plates on the wing and along the crest can be used along with lag screws across the fracture if there is enough room.
 
Ischial Tuberosity Avulsion
These are commonly adolescent injuries and are often missed in the initial diagnosis. They can usually be treated conservatively, particularly in the occasional rather than elite athlete. We would recommend fixation if there was significant displacement or in elite athletes.
We would use a Kocher Langenbeck approach (as described in the acetabular fracture chapter). Care must be taken to visualise, mobilise and protect the sciatic nerve which lies next to the ischial tuberosity.219
 
Results of Management of Pelvic Ring Injuries
Giannoudis et al have published an excellent systematic review of outcomes following management of pelvic ring injuries. In summary they report better quality reduction identified in groups of patient where the anterior and posterior pelvic ring has been adequately stabilised. This group also has a much lesser incidence of severe pain as an outcome measure along with a higher incidence of undisturbed walking capacity and better functional outcome scores. Permanent neurological injury has been associated with inferior final functional outcome.
 
Summary and Conclusion
Pelvic ring injuries usually involve high energy and so can frequently pose more than one problem. Surgeons dealing with these injuries need to be adaptable and willing to use different methods to suit the fracture, the patient and the surgeon themselves. When classifyling these injuries one must always look for and identify the posterior ring lesion. This is the vital step in classifying the fractures as a type B or type C. One must carefuly and meticulously look for and document urological and neurological injuries which determine long term outcome.
Bibliography
  1. BroosP, VanderschotP, CraninxL, RommensP. The operative treatment of unstable pelvic ring fractures. Int Surg. 1992;77:303–8.
  1. DalalSamir A, AndrewR Burgess, JohnH Siegel, JeremyW Young, RobertJ Brumback, ATTILAPoka, et al. Pelvic fracture in multiple trauma: classification by mechanism is key to pattern of organ injury, resuscitative requirements, and outcome. The Journal of Trauma. 1989;29(7):98.
  1. HirvensaloE, LindahlJ, BostmanO. A new approach to the internal fixation of unstable pelvic fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1993;297:28–32.
  1. MarvinTile, DavidHelfet, JamesKellam. Fractures of the pelvis and acetabulum – third edition. The Modified Stoppa Approach for Acetabular Fracture. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins,  5 May 2003. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2011;19:170–5.
  1. MattaJM, TornettaP 3rd. Internal fixation of unstable pelvic ring injuries. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:129–40.
  1. MichaelBottlang, JamesC Krieg, MarcusMohr, TamaraS Simpson, StevenM Madey. Emergent Management of Pelvic Ring Fractures with Use of Circumferential Compression. The Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery. JBJS.org 2002;84-a (Supplement 2).
  1. PapakostidisC, KanakarisNK, KontakisG, GiannoudisPV. Pelvic ring disruptions: treatment modalities and analysis. 2008 of outcomes. International Orthopaedics (SICOT).
  1. PennalGF, TileM, WaddellJP, GarsideH. Pelvic disruption: assessment and classification. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1980;151:12–21.
  1. StephenDavid JG, HansJ Kreder, AdrianC Day, MichaelD McKee, EmilH Schemitsch, AmrEIMaraghy, et al. Early detection of arterial bleeding in acute pelvic trauma. The Journal of Trauma and Acute Care Surgery. 1999;47(4):638.
  1. DayAC, KinmontC, BircherMD, KumarS. Crescent fracture-dislocation of the sacroiliac joint: a functional classification. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2007 May;89(5):651–8.
  1. PapakostidisC, KanakarisNK, KontakisG, GiannoudisPV. Pelvic ring disruptions: treatment modalities and analysis of outcomes. Int Orthop. 2009;33(2):329-38. Epub 2008 May 7.

Sacroiliac Fixation: Iliosacral Screw Fixation20

Kyle F Dickson
 
Introduction
Pelvic ring disruptions are typically part of a complex set of injuries to both the axial skeleton and the contents of the pelvis, including the gastrointestinal tract, the bladder, lower genitourinary tract, and the pelvic floor structures. Pelvic ring injuries can be life threatening in the acute phase. Surviving patients may have chronic problems due to associated neurovascular injury, pelvic ring deformity or instability, and the sequelae of associated injuries to the surrounding soft tissues or visceral structures. These factors can lead to persistent pain, sitting and lying imbalance, limb length discrepancy, sexual/reproductive dysfunction, or bowel/bladder dysfunction. Clearly, the decisions about the management of pelvic ring injuries must consider all of these factors to treat these injuries successfully. Low-energy pelvic injuries due to minor falls rarely require surgical intervention. Conversely, patients with high-energy pelvic injuries often require operative treatment to save their life and prevent complications related to instability or deformity of the pelvis. Patients with high-energy pelvic injuries are often hemodynamically unstable with significant associated injuries. Their survival relies on the acute management of the associated injuries as well as the pelvic injury. The acute management of pelvic injuries is beyond the scope of this chapter.
This chapter deals primarily with iliosacral screws placed either percutaneously or open. In general, sacroiliac joint injuries often require open reduction internal fixation to achieve anatomical reduction of the joint as opposed to acute sacral injuries that can be reduced closed. Classification systems include components of anatomy, stability and deformity, and injury vector force.1 In classifying pelvic injuries, the most significant information for the orthopedic surgeon to define is: (1) where the pelvis is broken, (2) the stability of the fracture, and (3) the actual deformity that is occurring in the pelvis. These classification systems may aid in the treatment of potential associated injuries.2 Several classifications of pelvic ring injuries have been proposed. A simple classification that is used at the author's center is the Bucholz classification.3 Type I injuries are stable and do not require fixation. These injuries include isolated pubic rami fractures or minor (≤ 2 cm) disruptions of the pubic symphysis. Such injuries may be accompanied by nondisplaced or impacted sacral fractures. Bucholz type II injuries have rotational instability, with either internal or external rotation deformity, and may require reduction and stabilization. Bucholz type III injuries have complete dissociation of the hemipelvis from the rest of the body and are characterized as being both vertically and rotationally unstable (Figs 20.1A to E) (see the section on preoperative planning for 222the Burgess classification).
Figures 20.1A to E: (A) Example of a Bucholz type III pelvic ring disruption, with complete dissociation of the right hemipelvis. This injury will have both rotational and vertical instability through the sacral fracture; (B) Preoperative 2D CT scan showing sacral fracture; (C) Postoperative AP view after open reduction and internal fixation; (D) Postoperative 2D CT scan showing safe placement of iliosacral screws; (E) 3 year follow-up after iliosacral screws removed at 1 year
When making decisions about the definitive fixation of pelvic injuries, however, it is critical to understand the stability and deformity of the pelvis. Once the vector of deformity is discovered, the vector of reduction can then be planned using various combinations of closed and open reduction techniques. Of secondary importance is the type of fixation. In general, among the higher energy pelvic injuries, internal fixation is mechanically superior to external fixation.4 The external fixator is used more commonly during the initial stabilization of the patient, prior to definitive internal fixation. The exception to this generality is the use of definitive external fixation in injuries that are stable posteriorly (i.e. internal rotation deformity of the pelvis or an open book pelvis) where an anterior external fixator can be used for definitive fixation.
 
Indications/Contraindications
The inherent bony stability of the pelvis is very limited. Figure 20.2A demonstrates the key role that ligaments have in maintaining pelvic stability. One can easily see that disruption of the ligaments causes the sacroiliac joint to become completely unstable due to the lack of intrinsic bony stability. When pelvic instability is present, anatomical operative reduction and fixation generally increases the stability of the pelvis. Appropriate fracture reduction is especially important in the posterior pelvic ring because a malreduced fracture may make safe iliosacral screw fixation impossible.
A pelvic fracture that is classified as a Bucholz type I pelvic injury is stable and should be treated using nonoperative techniques. Another type of pelvic ring injury that can be managed nonoperatively is the lateral compression injury with impaction of the sacrum and minimal displacement of the anterior ring (Figs 20.3A and F). However, these sacral injuries need to be followed weekly with x-rays especially when there are 223bilateral superior/inferior rami fractures because loss of reduction can occur (Fig. 20.3B).5
Figures 20.2A to C: Illustration of an inlet view of the pelvis with the spine removed showing the sacroiliac joint: (A) The joint is stabilized by the anterior sacroiliac joint ligaments, the interosseous ligaments, and the strong posterior sacroiliac joint ligaments; (B) A pelvis with the three axes superimposed. Each axis has a translational deformity and a rotational deformity;
x-axis
Translation
Impaction/diastasis
Rotation
Flexion/extension
y-axis
Translation
Cephalad/caudad
Rotation
Internal/external rotation
z-axis
Translation
Anterior-posterior
Rotation
Abduction/adduction
(C) A actual pelvic malunion with cephalad and posterior translation and slight internal and adduction rotation
Additionally, fractures that involve the pubic rami without a clear injury posteriorly also do not require surgical treatment. Rarely avulsion of the ischium, anterior-superior iliac spine, or anterior-inferior iliac spine does occur. In these cases the pelvic ring is stable; however, there can be significant displacement of the avulsed fragment. No literature gives definitive recommendations on operative versus nonoperative treatment of displaced avulsion fractures, and decision making should occur on an individual case-by-case basis. The author uses greater than 1 cm of displacement as an indication to operate on these avulsions. Minimally displaced or impacted injuries of the pelvis are both radiographically and mechanically stable. These injuries can be treated by touch-down weight bearing for 6 to 8 weeks. Initial weekly X-rays should be performed to ensure that no additional deformity occurs. After 6 to 8 weeks, more aggressive exercise and range of motion ambulation training with physical therapy is recommended.
The indications for surgical treatment of pelvic ring injuries include those patients that fail nonoperative treatment as well as those pelvic injuries that are unstable or that have unacceptable deformity. An additional indication for surgery includes pelvic injuries that may be stable but have significant deformity. An example of this may include an internal rotation deformity as a result of a lateral compression type of injury in which there is greater than 15 degrees of internal rotation of the hemipelvis, or greater than 1 cm leg length discrepancy (Figs 20.3A to N).6,7 Additionally, these internal rotational deformities can cause a ramus fracture that pierces the bladder or vagina. In these cases it is necessary to externally rotate the hemipelvis to remove the bone from the bladder or vagina. Because these are stable injuries, a simple external fixator can be used to externally rotate the pelvis and restore the normal pelvic anatomy. Unfortunately, if the deformity becomes a malunion, an osteotomy is required prior to performing the reduction7 (Figs 20.3A to N and illustrative case). However, in most cases ramus fractures do not require fixation whether there is an isolated anterior injury or a combined anterior and posterior injury. In cases where there is greater than 15 mm of displacement 224associated with a posterior injury, the very strong pectineal fascia may be disrupted, and therefore open reduction and internal fixation of the ramus fracture is indicated.8
Figures 20.3A to N: Patient initially presented 6 month postinjury with groin pain and impotence: (A) AP X-ray of the pelvis from the time of injury; (B) AP X-ray at 6 weeks (M is 6 months) post-injury demonstrating malunion of the ischium and a painful inferior rami nonunion; (C) Axial CT-scan image demonstrating ischial nonunion; (D) Postoperative X-ray demonstrates a healed nonunion but persistent malunion of the iliac bone with >15° of internal rotation. Groin pain resolved and impotence improved but posterior sacroiliac pain and abnormal gait with intoeing; (E) Axial CT scan image showing rami union; (F) Axial CT scan showing impaction of the sacrum; (G) Axial CT scan image demonstrating 15 degree internal rotation deformity of the left hemipelvis; (H) Axial CT showing adduction deformity of the pelvis; (I) Clinical photo showing removal of screws in lithotomy position and inferior rami osteotomy (do not fix a malunion); (J) Clinical photo of femoral distractor and right half pin just lateral to the SI joint; (K) Clinical photo showing the left half pin into the ischium giving a reduction vector of external rotation and abduction; (L) AP X-ray status postsacral osteotomy and correction of deformity with restoration of leg length inequality and sitting imbalance; (M, N) Pre- and post-operative pelvic inlet X-rays illustrating correction of rotational malalignment. Pain significantly diminished and patient returned to work as a train conductor
225
Figures 20.4A to F: (A) Initial AP view of pelvis after a pedestrian versus motor vehicle showing what looks like an open book pelvis; (B) Patient was hemodynamically unstable at an outside hospital and an anterior external fixator was placed reducing the pelvis anteriorly but widening the posterior SI joint; (C) Axial CT showing an internal rotation deformity of the hemipelvis with the anterior external fixator in place; (D) Axial CT showing the displacement at the SI joint; (E) Postoperative AP view after ORIF through a posterior approach followed by an anterior symphyseal plating; (F) Axial CT showing rotational alignment postoperatively
In external rotation deformities or open book pelvic injuries, the indication for surgery is greater than 2.5 cm of diastasis of the pubic symphysis. Widening of less than 2.5 cm may require surgical fixation if there is an associated posterior injury. Disruptions of the posterior sacroiliac ligaments of the pelvis begin to occur with more than 2.5 cm of displacement. There are pelvic injuries that appear as simple symphysis diastasis that actually include a complete disruption of the posterior part of the pelvis. In these injuries, reduction of the diastasis with an anterior external fixation frame will widen the posterior complex and demonstrate posterior instability (Figs 20.4A to F).
The majority of pelvic injuries that require operative treatment are those that have complete instability of the hemipelvis. This may occur through the sacroiliac joint, or with a combination fracture-dislocation involving either the sacrum or the iliac wing (crescent fracture). Alternatively, injuries can involve just the sacrum or just the iliac wing posteriorly. Evaluation of the fracture of the iliac wing determines whether iliosacral screws can be used (i.e. the screws must have sufficient iliac bone on the displaced fragment to gain enough purchase to maintain reduction of the injury). Instability is determined by a combination of physical examination and radiographic analysis.9 The radiographic signs of instability include either or both greater than 5 mm of displacement of the sacroiliac joint and a fracture gap versus a fracture impaction. Additionally, a mobile hemipelvis during physical examination is an indication for surgical treatment. The surgical treatment of a pelvis fracture involves three steps: the approach, the reduction, and the fixation. In high-energy pelvic injuries, patients can have significant associated morbidity. While performing acute stabilization of the pelvis, orthopedic surgeons have the ability to control the reduction and prevent complications. A thorough understanding of the anatomy of the pelvis, as well as the deformity of the fracture, will optimize these two areas of control.226
 
Preoperative Planning
The specific location of the injury is easily defined by the imaging evaluation—anteroposterior (AP) inlet/outlet radiographs, and computed tomographic (CT) scan of the pelvis. Defining the stability of the pelvis is more complex. Stability is defined as the ability of the pelvic ring to withstand physiological forces without abnormal deformation. The stability of the pelvis is determined by both physical and radiographic examination. The physical examinations uses palpation to ensure that the anterior-superior iliac spine (ASIS), iliac wing, and symphysis are located in their proper positions. Furthermore, an ASIS compression test and iliac wing compression test should be performed. The ASIS compression test is performed by placing the palms of one's hand on the right and left ASIS and rocking the pelvis. In a hemodynamically unstable patient, this should be performed only once. This determines whether the pelvis rocks as a unit versus complete separation of the two halves of the pelvis. The ASIS compression test evaluates the external rotation of the hemipelvis. The iliac wing compression test is performed by placing the palms of the hands on the outside of the iliac wings and pushing the two wings together. This tests internal rotation instability.
Vertical instability is much more difficult to determine by physical examination. Traction or impaction of the leg using fluoroscopy can show caudal and cephalad migration of the hemipelvis. However, the degree of dissociation between the two sides of the pelvis will often be associated with vertical instability. The ASIS and iliac wing compression tests are performed often at the bedside, whereas the vertical migration tests are easier to perform under anesthesia in the operating room. Radiographic signs of instability include sacroiliac displacement of greater than 5 mm in any plane or a posterior (ilium or sacral) fracture gap rather than impaction. Some radiographs clearly show instability, whereas other findings are much more subtle (Figs 20.1A and B versus 20.3A and F and 20.4A). Using the combination of radiographs and physical examination, the surgeon can determine whether the pelvis is stable and can be treated nonoperatively, or is unstable and requires reduction and stabilization.
The most critical analysis of the injury prior to fixation is the actual deformity of the pelvic injury. Only by defining the deformity, the surgeon can plan the appropriate reduction maneuvers to anatomically reduce the pelvis. Unfortunately, the complexity of the pelvis makes analysis of the deformity is quite difficult. It is helpful to think of the deformity on an x-, y-, and z-axes5-7 (Figs 20.2B and C). Each axis has a translational deformity as well as a rotational deformity. The rotational deformities include flexion or extension around the x-axis, internal or external rotation around the y-axis, and abduction or adduction around the z-axis. The translational deformities of the pelvis include diastasis or impaction along the x-axis, cephalad or caudad translation along the y-axis, and anterior or posterior translation along the z-axis.
In a pelvic injury, the deformity is always a combination of rotational and translational deformities. The hemipelvis does not deform along a single point, but its deformity can be represented as a vector of deformity from an anatomically positioned hemipelvis. Understanding the radiographic landmarks and how they change with various deformities enables the surgeon to define the deformity and thus the preoperative plan for reduction. Furthermore, these radiographic landmarks are essential in assessing reduction. Cranial translation of greater than 1 cm can be difficult to appreciate without leveling the pelvis and performing measurements on the pelvis (by drawing a transverse line parallel to the cephalad border of the sacrum and a perpendicular line measuring the dome height for leg length discrepancy and ischial height for sitting imbalance determination). Assessing rotational deformities is equally challenging if the surgeon does not center the pelvis by positioning the radiographic beam to get a pure AP of the sacrum. An apparent deformity of the hemipelvis can be the result of a true traumatic deformity, tilting of the patient while the radiograph is taken, or both.227
Figures 20.5A to E: (A) AP radiograph of the pelvis of a patient who had a horse rear back and fall on him, causing an open book injury with 8 cm diastasis of the symphysis with posterior stability (open book pelvis); (B) With greater than 6 cm of symphysis diastasis, a complete disruption of the sacroiliac (SI) joint may exist. This axial CT shows a superior cut from a computed tomographic scan indicating a complete disruption of the SI joint both anteriorly and posteriorly; (C) However, a more inferior cut shows that the more important posterior-inferior sacroiliac ligaments are intact; (D) AP view postoperatively showing a well reduced symphysis; (E) AP view 1 year out in a patient who was noncompliant but asymptomatic after a little loss of reduction and broken plate
Understanding the mechanism of injury allows the surgeon to predict the type of deformity. Burgess et al proposed a classification of pelvic ring injuries that is based on the underlying mechanism of injury.10 Pelvic ring injuries are divided into anterior-posterior compression, lateral compression, vertical shear, or combined patterns. The anterior-posterior and lateral compression injuries are each divided into three subtypes with increasing degrees of instability. This scheme has proven valuable because it allows one to predict instability and consider reduction and fixation strategies that are appropriate for a particular case. For example, a patient that is hit from the side in a motor vehicle accident often has a lateral compression type of injury causing an internal rotation, flexion, and adduction deformity of the hemipelvis6,7 (Figs 20.3A, B and F). Likewise, patients that fall on their back or are crushed from the front often have an open book pelvic injury with an external rotation and abduction deformity (Figs 20.5A to E). In patients with hemodynamic and mechanical instability the most common deformities included cephalad and posterior translation with internal rotation and flexion. There was an equal number of abduction and adduction deformities.6
 
Implants
If open reduction is performed solid 6.5 mm screws are used. The screws come in fully, 32 mm, and 16 mm threaded and lengths form 30 mm to 180 mm. The notion of using fully threaded screws in comminuted sacral fractures to prevent squeezing down the foramen and possibly causing a nerve root injury has not been verified. In the author's opinion and experience of over 1000 iliosacral screws, especially when the fracture is being reduced with a clamp, compression of the nerve with using a partially threaded screw does not occur (Fig. 20.1). The author uses the 16 mm thread length because the weak part of the screw is the thread shank junction, so, this places this area farthest away from the injury zone (sacroiliac or sacral fracture). Furthermore, failure of reduction 228does not come from the screws backing out (generally bending) so using the 16 mm thread length does not compromise the fixation.
Figures 20.6A to F: (A) The operating table can use skeletal traction or boot traction; (B) The normal hemipelvis is fixed to the table with half pins into the posterior iliac spine or the gluteus medius tubercle anteriorly and the greater trochanter; (C) A long percutaneous iliosacral screw system (LFB – Louisiana Fat Boy); (D) A oscillating drill helps the tactile feel of drilling iliosacral screws (3 cortices not 4); (E) Inlet, AP, and outlet views help with safe placement of the iliosacral screws; (F) Potential dangerous pathways of a drill or pin
Iliosacral cannulated screws come in various sizes (6.5–8.0 mm) and lengths (30–180 mm). Cannulated screws are used when anatomical reduction can be obtained via traction or direct manipulation of the pelvic injury (Figs 20.6A to F). Occasionally longer transacral screws (120–180 mm) are used for bilateral injuries. A suggested benefit of the longer screws is that the construct will resist greater bending forces due to the longer lever arm. This would benefit comminuted sacral injuries.11 However, good evidence exists that two well placed iliosacral screws into the endplate of S1 body clinically in sacral fractures maintains reduction.12 In sacral dysmorphism, S2 may have more room for iliosacral screws than S1.
 
Surgical Treatment
 
ANESTHESIA/TIMING
The timing of fixation is controversial and needs to be planned on a case-by-case basis. Performing initial fixation as early as possible often makes it easier to achieve reduction by either closed or open techniques. Initial stabilization with either/or external fixation and percutaneous iliosacral screws can achieve excellent success. However, if anatomical reduction is not achieved by closed methods, performing open reduction prior to achieving hemodynamic stability and allowing the initial bleeding to cease can lead to significant blood loss and potential mortality to the patient. In general, the author's preference in a hemodynamically unstable patient with a mechanically unstable pelvis 229is to stabilize the pelvis with a pelvic sheet or binder in the emergency room.
Figures 20.7A to E: (A to C) AP, inlet, and outlet view of a 22-year-old 3 months after his unstable left SI joint and sacral impaction pelvic injury was treated with inadequate stability of an anterior plate and external fixator; (D) CT showing the widened SI joint and the sacral impaction at the SI joint; (E) AP view after a three stage reconstruction involving 1) Pfannenstiel and anterior iliac portion of the ilioinguinal to remove the plate and release the hemipelvis so a posterior reduction can be performed, 2) Posterior approach with release, reduction, and iliosacral screws of the left hemipelvis, and 3) Plating of the symphysis
If the patient is going to the operating room due to another emergency condition, the external fixator can be placed in the operating room. Remember the external fixator is for hemodynamic instability not for definitive fixation of mechanically unstable pelvis (Figs 20.7A to E). Additionally, closed reduction and percutaneous fixation of posterior disruptions can be undertaken at the same time if the patient is stable. Anatomical closed reductions become progressively more difficult to achieve after 72 hours. Occasionally, symphyseal plating is used in combination with an exploratory laparotomy to give the pelvis some anterior stability. However, only a few degrees of a malunion anteriorly can translate into more than a centimeter of displacement posteriorly. Ideally, definitive fixation is undertaken when the patient has stabilized initially (< 3 days) or after a positive fluid balance has been achieved (after 5 days from the injury).
 
POSITION
The patient can be in either the supine or prone position for placement of iliosacral screws. The surgeon has to be familiar with either technique. In general, the patient is placed prone if open reduction is required due to the more clamp options and more control over the free hemipelvis. The patient is placed supine when percutaneous iliosacral fixation is used with closed reduction, the soft tissue posteriorly is compromised, or there is a major rotational deformity (difficult to reduce posteriorly i.e. wind swept pelvis). Good radiographic evaluation is required for accomplishing either an anterior or a posterior approach to the posterior pelvic injury. Therefore, the surgeon must position the pelvis to ensure that good AP, lateral, inlet, and outlet views can be obtained to evaluate the reduction and perform the fixation of the pelvis prior to beginning surgery.
 
REDUCTION
With all pelvic injuries, reduction of the sacroiliac joint or the posterior pelvic injury is critical prior to inserting fixation. During the initial period (less than 72 hours) following injury, closed reduction and fixation can potentially be achieved. Closed reduction techniques include traction, manipulation using half pins (in the anterior-inferior iliac crest or posterior iliac spine region) or external fixators (either anterior frames or a posterior C-clamp (Figs 20.8A to F). 230
Figures 20.8A to F: (A) Anterior external fixator can help with rotational deformities; (B) C-clamp which can be useful for closed reduction of the SI joint; (C) The ideal position of the site for insertion of the pin for a posterior C-clamp is the point that lies at the intersection of a line from the anterior-superior iliac spine (ASIS) to the posterior superior iliac spine (PSIS) and the line represented by the border of the middle-third and posterior-third on the lateral aspect of the pelvis; (D) C-clamp on a pelvic model; (E) Compression initially is done by hand followed by using the threaded bolts on both sides; (F) Fracture anterior to SI joint so C-clamp and iliosacral screws will not work in this fracture pattern
Definitive fixation of the sacroiliac joint is often accomplished using iliosacral lag screws. If closed reduction fails to achieve an anatomical reduction, or if more than 72 hours has elapsed since the injury occurred, open reduction and internal fixation of the posterior pelvic injury is indicated. The most common deformities seen in operative posterior pelvic injuries include cephalad and posterior translation, diastasis, and rotational injuries (abduction/adduction, internal rotation/external rotation).6,12 Often, translational deformities are corrected, but rotational deformities persist. Awareness of the bony landmarks helps the surgeon to recognize and correct residual rotational deformities. Subtle manipulation of clamp placement will often correct the deformity.
The posterior external fixation frame (C-clamp) can be very helpful in fine tuning the reduction of the sacroiliac joint (Figs 20.8A to F). The contraindication for placement of the posterior clamp is an iliac wing fracture anterior to the sacroiliac joint because compression of the joint will not help the reduction of the iliac wing fracture. Comminution of the sacrum requires special consideration because overcompression can be harmful to the patient. The technique for placement of the posterior clamp is as follows. With the patient in the supine position, an imaginary line is drawn from the anterior superior iliac spine to the posterior superior iliac spine along the side of the patient. This line is divided into thirds, and a longitudinal stab incision is made at the interval between the posterior third and the middle third (Fig. 20.8C). This site should be roughly in line with the greater trochanter of the femur. A long clamp is then introduced through the stab wound down to the bone. The bone is palpated with the clamp, and the flare of the iliac wing is located. This flare is at the level of the anterior end of the sacroiliac joint; thus pin insertion anterior to this risks penetration of the peritoneal cavity if the pin traverses the ilium. Immediately posterior to the flare is the area where the pin should be placed. This corresponds to the area of the iliac wing outside the sacroiliac joint. Once this area is determined, a pin is placed on both sides and hammered into the iliac wing. A clamp is then placed over the pins, and the surgeon 231manually compresses the clamp to fit snugly against the pins (Fig. 20.8E). The clamp has a cannulated, threaded bolt that slides over the pins and is tightened with a wrench, providing additional compression of the posterior pelvic injury. Traction is helpful in reducing the completely unstable pelvic injury prior to initiating compression (Figs 20.8A and B). When open reduction is required the following clamp placement will be helpful.
 
Sacroiliac Joint Dislocations
Reduction of the sacroiliac joint is the most difficult step in treating these injuries. The clamps that are used for reduction include an angled Matta clamp that is placed through the sciatic notch, with one prong on the sacral ala and the other on the outer side of the iliac wing (Figs 20.9A to H). This helps reduce external rotation deformities, posterior translation, and diastasis of the sacroiliac joint (Figs 20.9B, C, G, H). Additionally, a Weber clamp is placed from the posterior-superior iliac spine to the sacral spinous process and reduces cephalad displacement and internal rotation deformities of the hemipelvis (Figs 20.9C, F, H). Combinations of these two clamps in the proper position and order of tightening will usually achieve anatomical reduction (Figs 20.1, 20.4 and illustrative case). The actual joint can be seen posteriorly at the inferior border of the posterior spinous area and SI joint can be palpated along the superior border of the greater sciatic notch and a portion of the ala (Fig. 20.9A) to ensure anatomical reduction.
 
Sacral Fractures (please see chapter on lumbopelvic fixation for “H” and “U” sacral fractures)
Sacral fractures can be quite difficult to reduce (Figs 20.10A to F). The approach for sacral fractures is similar to the approach for sacroiliac disruption described below. The sacral fracture line is debrided, with careful attention to the nerve roots. The combination of a Weber clamp posteriorly and the angled Matta clamp through the notch allows anatomical reduction (Figs 20.10B, C, D, E, F).6,12 In sacral fractures, the angled Matta clamp point needs to be medial to the fracture of the sacrum (Fig. 20.10C).12 The surgeon's index finger is placed between the S1 and S2 nerve roots onto the S1 body (Figs 20.10A and B). The backside of one side of the clamp is slid along the index finger until the point is sitting on the S1 body, ensuring safe placement and subsequent reduction. Similar to sacroiliac joint disruptions, the surgeon must use a combination of the two camps, slightly moving the tips and alternating the pressure placed until anatomical reduction is achieved. The key to reduction is to create the appropriate reduction vector using a combination of clamps (Figs 20.10E and F). Failure of fixation in sacral fractures has been reported between 11 to 50% but can be close to 0% with open anatomical reduction and good iliosacral screw placement.12
 
Crescent Fracture—Sacroiliac Joint Dislocation
Crescent fractures can be approached from the anterior approach; however, in most of these cases, the fracture will be difficult to visualize (i.e. the sacral fracture is more medial or the crescent fracture is posterior to the sacroiliac joint). In these cases the author prefers a posterior approach if the condition of the soft tissue will allow it. This allows a direct visualization of the fracture site, which either is posterior to the sacroiliac joint or enters the posterior part of the sacroiliac joint. Most of the time the posterior fractured piece of ilium remains attached to the sacrum through the sacroiliac joint ligaments, and the injury is stable once the fracture is reduced and fixed. The difficulty with crescent fractures is obtaining an acceptable reduction. The deformity that is most problematic is the internal/external rotation of the hemipelvis, which is difficult to manipulate from the posterior approach. Reduction techniques using clamps and a half pin as a joystick can allow reduction of the sacroiliac joint and the fracture.232
Figures 20.9A to H: (A) Finger palpation of the anterior SI joint to ensure anatomical reduction and the ala where one tine of the clamp is placed; (B) Placement of the clamp with your finger in place protecting the soft tissue anteriorly; (C) Final placement of the angled Matta clamp and the Weber clamp; (D) Use of the Jungbluth clamp to reduce the posterior SI joint from the symphysis; (E) AP view of a pelvis with posterior and cephalad displacement; (F) Weber clamp placement on a pelvis model correcting mainly cephalad translation (a little correction of internal rotation); (G) Angled Matta clamp placement on a pelvic model mainly correcting posterior translation and diastasis (a little correction of external rotation); (H) The combination of the two above clamps (rarely a Schantz pin is placed in the PSIS as a joy stick to control flexion/extension and adduction/abduction)
233
Figures 20.10A to F: (A) Schematic showing the arteries (also a venous plexus on the anterior sacrum) and S1 S2 nerve root between which a finger than one tine of the angled Matta clamp is placed onto S1 in sacral fractures; (B) Tip of the finger is placed onto the S1 body between the nerve roots of S1 and S2. The tine of the angled Matta clamp is placed safely along the inside of the finger between bone and finger to the S1 body; (C) Placement of the tine on S1 body; (D) Final angled Matta clamp position to correct a sacral fractures posterior translation; (E and F) Two views of the pelvic model with both clamps in place
The surgeon starts with the reduction of the posterior crescent fracture of the iliac wing. The bone of the posterior iliac wing is stronger near the sciatic notch and the iliac crest. Therefore, a commonly used reduction method is to use small screw-holding clamps (Farabeuf or Jungbluth) placed just cephalad to the top border of the sciatic notch to allow fixation below the clamp and in the crest where the bone is strong enough that the reduction screw will withstand the forces required to obtain an anatomical reduction. The superior portion of the sciatic notch is excellent bone and allows good fixation of these crescent fractures. Depending on the size of the crescent fracture and the mechanics of the injury, the sacroiliac joint may be either stable or 234unstable after fixation of the crescent fracture. Initial reduction techniques include two Farabeuf clamps, one placed close to the crest and one close to the sciatic notch. A 3.5 mm screw is placed on both sides of the fracture line and should be offset so that when they are aligned, the crescent fracture is reduced. After careful debridement of the fracture, the Farabeuf clamp is manipulated until anatomical reduction is achieved. If difficulty is encountered in reducing the fracture, an angled Matta reduction clamp is placed through the notch with one point on the sacral ala and the other point on the iliac wing (Fig. 20.9C). The clamp can internally or externally rotate the hemipelvis depending on its position. Careful planning of the placement of the Farabeuf clamps prevents the surgeon from blocking potential key areas for fixation. In general, the author places the Farabeuf clamp more superiorly than the superior border of the sciatic notch so that a plate can be placed along the border of the notch in good strong bone. The other clamp is placed more superiorly but not quite at the top of the crest to allow another plate along the crest if required. In placing the reduction screws, the surgeon must be aware of the obliquity of the fracture line and not block reduction with the screws. After anatomical reduction is achieved, lag screw fixation secures the reduction followed by definitive plate fixation. Occasionally plates are used as reduction aids, pulling or pushing fractured bone.
 
APPROACH
The approach to sacroiliac joint disruptions can be undertaken either anteriorly or posteriorly. Benefits of the anterior approach include better visualization of the joint, the ability to keep the patient in the supine position (often preferred due to associated injuries in multiple trauma patients), and sparing the more damaged posterior soft tissue (Figs 20.11A and B) (please see chapter on Sacroiliac Fixation: Anterior Approach). The major problem associated with the anterior approach is achieving reduction of a posteriorly displaced hemipelvis. Posterior displacement is very difficult to reduce and hold from the anterior approach while placing definitive fixation. Often the reduction has to be held manually while fixation is being placed. Additional problems occur if there is a sacral fracture. Such injuries cannot be fixed with anterior plating, and reduction of a sacral fracture is very difficult from the front. Finally, the L5 nerve root is in significant danger with the anterior approach. The anterior approach is indicated if there is a posterior crush injury to the soft tissue that prevents a posterior approach, if the patient has multiple trauma that cannot be placed in the prone position, and if there is an iliac wing fracture that is anterior to the sacroiliac joint.
Figures 20.11A and B: (A) Crush injury to the backside with a large skin degloving injury (Morel-Lavallee) to the entire back side from flank to flank delaying definitive open posterior approach; (B) Patient with a Morel-Lavallee lesion that was missed and subsequently had a fungal infection. The patient now has granulation tissue 3 months after the injury and is ready for definitive fixation and an open approach
235The posterior approach facilitates reduction of the posterior pelvis using clamping techniques as opposed to the anterior approach. The surgeon can debride the joint with less risk of damaging the L5 nerve root. The ability to more easily achieve reduction using clamping techniques with a posterior approach is beneficial in patients that have had a long time interval from the injury to their definitive fixation. The surgeon also has more options for the types of fixation of the posterior pelvis when using a posterior approach (iliosacral screws, transiliac bars or plate, or lumbopelvic fixation). The primary problem with the posterior approach is that damage to the soft tissue from the injury may prevent this approach from being used safely. Another disadvantage is that, the surgeon does not have the same visualization of the sacroiliac joint that is available from an anterior approach. The posterior approach is indicated in sacral fractures and in crescent fractures (fractures of the iliac wing) where the fracture line is primarily posterior to the sacroiliac joint, as well as when decompression of nerve roots is required. For the posterior approach, the patient should be placed in the prone position on a radiolucent table. The pelvis should be positioned so that appropriate inlet and outlet views can be performed. This often requires 6 inches of blankets or sheets under the thighs to prevent flexion of the pelvis and allow a good AP view of the pelvis. These blankets are in addition to chest rolls that improve ventilation in a prone patient. A critical aspect prior to embarking on a posterior approach is the assessment of the soft tissues. A common soft tissue problem is the Morel-Lavallée lesion (Figs 20.11A and B), which can become infected in greater than one third of cases.13 This soft tissue degloving injury requires a thorough debridement prior to definitive fixation. Therefore, if the patient has one of these lesions, the author will do a thorough debridement with cultures prior to definitive fixation. If at the time of debridement the hematoma does not appear infected, then the patient will undergo a re-prep and drape, and definitive fixation will be performed during the same surgical procedure. Prior to prepping the patient, radiographic evaluation is performed with the C-arm to ensure that good inlet, outlet, lateral, and AP views can be obtained.
The incision is made 1 cm lateral to the posterior-superior iliac spine and is carried inferiorly or caudal in a straight line going from just above the crest to the mid buttocks area (Fig. 20.12B). The dissection is carried down through the skin to the fascia of the gluteus maximus (Fig. 20.12C). This fascia is somewhat tenuous and therefore may be somewhat difficult to maintain after raising a skin flap medially. The key to this approach is to elevate a full-thickness skin flap (Fig. 20.12D). The gluteus maximus originates from both the iliac crest superiorly and the lumbodorsal fascia inferiorly (Fig. 20.12A). An incision straight down to the posterior-superior iliac spine will cut through muscle of the gluteus maximus. If the muscle is incised, coverage of the posterior-superior iliac spine is more difficult, and there may be a higher incidence of wound dehiscence.14 A critical step in the approach to the posterior pelvis is to elevate the gluteus maximus muscle flap off the lumbodorsal fascia (Fig. 20.12E). This allows easier and more secure coverage of the posterior sacroiliac joint and decreases the risk of infection.14 Inferiorly, the origin of the gluteus maximus is close if not at the midline spinous process (Fig. 20.12A).
After exposing the entire origin of the gluteus maximus, the muscle is elevated from the crest as well as the lumbodorsal fascia (Fig. 20.12E), providing exposure to the sacrum and the sciatic notch. At the elbow or bend of the sacrum where the coccyx begins, the lateral origin of the piriformis is taken down from the lateral border of the sacrum. The release of the piriformis starts distally and proceeds proximally, allowing the contents of the sciatic notch to fall away and preventing iatrogenic damage to these structures (Figs 20.12F and G).12 The piriformis still has an origin on the anterior sacrum, but the lateral border is released, allowing placement of clamps through the notch (Fig. 20.12H). The gluteus maximus is also taken off the lateral and posterior aspect of the iliac wing. Debris is removed from the joint and/or fracture sites.236
Figures 20.12A to H: (A) Drawing of the gluteus maximus insertion. Notice that superiorly it attaches directly to the iliac crest and inferiorly it inserts on the lumbodorsal fascia proceeding medially as one moves inferiorly (all the way to the midline in some cases); (B) Skin incision 1 cm lateral to the PSIS above the crest to down to the mid buttocks area; (C) Full thickness skin incision to the gluteus maximus fascia; (D) The skin is elevated towards the midline; (E) The gluteus maximus is elevated off the lumbodorsal fascia from midline laterally; (F) Starting from the elbow of the sacrum and dissecting the piriformis off the lateral border of the sacrum proximally (the contents of the sciatic notch fall away). The base of the wound shows the piriformis running transversely; (G) The red line outlines the lateral border of the sacrum where the sacral dissection occurs; (H) The finger can now palpate the anterior part of the SI joint and go between the S1 and S2 nerve root onto the S1 sacral body
237A laminar spreader is often used to help with visualization and debris removal. Careful use of the lamina spreader is required because excessive widening of the sacroiliac joint can stretch and damage the lumbosacral plexus. The articular cartilage of the sacroiliac is never debrided, but loose pieces of articular cartilage are discarded. Once the sacroiliac joint is debrided posteriorly, a small portion of the joint is visualized and is used to guide reduction. There is a concave surface on the sacrum that fits into the convex surface of the ilium. The sacroiliac joint forms somewhat of an L shape, with the bottom end of the L visualized posteriorly and the long part of the L visualized anteriorly.
 
FRACTURE STABILIZATION
Once anatomical reduction is achieved on the inlet, outlet, AP, and lateral views, iliosacral screws are the primary form of fixation (Figs 20.1, 20.3, 20.4, 20.7, 20.13). Placement of iliosacral screws requires a thorough understanding of the anatomy of the posterior pelvis and an appreciation of the dangers of incorrect placement of the screws. Significant morbidity and mortality, including amputations, have been attributed to poor placement of iliosacral screws (Figs 20.6E and F). The exact placement of iliosacral screws can be variable and is constrained by the bony anatomy (i.e. sacral dysmorphism-lumbarization of S1 vertebrae (see illustrative case in the chapter on Sacroiliac Fixation: Anterior Approach) or a significantly slanted sacral ala). Some authors believe that a more posterior to anterior approach is beneficial because it stays out of the more anterior articular surface of the sacroiliac joint. This may be beneficial in sacroiliac joint injuries; however, the screws may be shorter and have most of their purchase in the sacral ala, which is significantly weaker than S1 vertebrae bone. The author prefers placing a longer screw into S1 body knowing that the strongest bone is in the superior end plate of S1. These often penetrate the articular cartilage but are usually removed 1 year after they are placed (Fig. 20.1). The use of cannulated screws enhances the surgeon's ability to put the screws in percutaneously. The drawback with cannulated screws is the lack of tactile response in placement of threaded K-wires. The use of drill tip pins restores the tactile feel and gives an added measure of safety. The use of percutaneous screws may be more difficult if an anatomical reduction of the sacroiliac joint has not been achieved because malreduction can further reduce the narrow corridor of bone in which iliosacral screws can be safely placed.
Quality fluoroscopic views demonstrating the AP, inlet, outlet, and lateral projections are critical to ensure iliosacral screws can be placed safely (Figs 20.6E and F). The author's preferred starting point for iliosacral screws is the intersection between a line drawn cephalad from the posterior border of the sciatic notch and a line where the flare of the iliac wing begins (anterior end of the sacroiliac joint). At this intersection point, move a few millimeters posteriorly (into the sacroiliac joint area) onto the flatter part of the iliac wing and drill the first of two iliosacral screws under fluoroscopic guidance. Once this starting hole is checked on the inlet and outlet views, drilling commences using an oscillating drill to improve the tactile feel and to ensure that only three out of four cortices are penetrated. The author uses a 3.2 mm oscillating drill or pin, feels each of the three cortices penetrated by the drilling, and ensures the drill remains in bone at all times. These three cortices that should be penetrated are the outer and inner cortex of the iliac wing and the inner cortex of the sacrum. The drill is gently advanced with an in-and-out motion to feel the bone and to ensure that, after the third cortex is penetrated, the drill remains in bone and does not penetrate the fourth cortex. As the drill progresses, inlet and outlet views are continuously checked.
Once the drill is well into the S1 body, the drill or pin is left in place, and a lateral view is used to ensure the precise location of the drill or pin. The lateral view shows the anterior slope of the sacrum where the L5 nerve root passes and can be an area where the screw can look like it is in on both the inlet and outlet view yet be through the L5 nerve root. A free drill bit of the same size is used to measure the length of the screw off 238the drill bit that is left in place. The drill bit is left in place while the second drill is used to place a second iliosacral screw safely. The ideal location of the second screw depends on the placement of the first screw but is usually placed a little anterior and cephalad to the first screw. Various screw options include cannulated versus solid, and fully threaded versus partially threaded screws. The author in open cases uses a solid partially threaded screw with 16 mm thread length. The weakest point of the screw is the junction between the thread and the shank of the screw. Placing this junction as far away as possible from the sacroiliac joint (or sacral fracture) yields the greatest strength to the construct and diminishes the risk of breakage. A theoretical disadvantage to using a partially threaded screw is overcompression of a sacral fracture with subsequent nerve palsy. In the author's experience of more than 100 sacral fractures treated with iliosacral screws, no iatrogenic nerve palsies have occurred. A washer can be used with the screw to prevent the screw from penetrating the outer cortex of the iliac wing. Additionally, a transacral screw can be placed through the S1 body from one iliac wing to the other. Very thorough attention to the foregoing principles is required to implant this screw safely. A transacral screw may give increased resistance to vertical migration and therefore prevent loss of reduction in comminuted sacral fractures.11 This theoretical advantage may not be necessary if well placed iliosacral screws are used and there is no penetration through the uninjured SI joint.12 An S2 iliosacral screw can be used and, in some cases of sacral dysmorphism, must be used. The placement of an S2 iliosacral screw is much more technically demanding as a result of the smaller corridor of bone available for safe placement of the iliosacral screw. AP, inlet, outlet, and lateral views are performed prior to closure to ensure anatomical reduction and safe placement of the screws.
In general, in completely unstable pelvic injuries, the posterior hemipelvis requires reduction prior to the anterior pelvis. This principle holds true even if there is an associated acetabular fracture (Figs 20.13A to M). Reduction of the pelvis posteriorly will facilitate the reduction of the acetabulum.
Figures 20.13A to F: (A) AP view of an unstable left SI joint and symphysis with right transtectal transverse posterior wall fracture and a left infratectal transverse (conservative treatment); (B to D) AP, inlet, and iliac oblique after external fixator and embolization for hemodynamic instability; (E) CT scan showing the unstable left SI joint; (F) AP view after failure of percutaneous iliosacral screws
239
Figures 20.13G to M: (G) Prone position after hardware removal and reduction with a C-clamp and ORIF; (H to L) AP, inlet, outlet, obturator oblique, and iliac oblique after ORIF of the posterior pelvis with iliosacral screws and a posterior tension band plate, ORIF of the transtectal transverse posterior wall fracture, and ORIF of the symphysis; (M) AP view 1 year later
Occasionally, stabilization may occur anteriorly, but even a few millimeters of rotation anteriorly can translate into more than a centimeter posteriorly. Therefore, posterior reduction and fixation are critical prior to anterior reduction and fixation.
240The main potential complication that needs to be avoided when placing iliosacral screws is damage to the L5 nerve root. Without careful technique, a guide pin, drill, or screw can be placed in a manner in which it starts in bone, exits in the area of the sacral ala (in the area of the L5 nerve root), and then reenters the bone into the S1 body. Having a good tactile feel ensuring the pin or drill remains in bone through three cortices, as well as good radiographic evaluation, can prevent this complication from occurring.
In fixing crescent fractures, lag screws are placed from the posterior-superior iliac spine toward the anterior iliac spine and can range up to 130 mm in length. The lag screws are usually supported with two plates. The plates vary in length depending on the size of the crescent fracture. The most posterior hole of the plate is bent 90 degrees over the posterior border of the ilium. A lag screw can be placed in this hole running between the inner and outer cortical tables of the ilium, supplementing the fixation. Careful attention is required not to block additional screw placement within the plate. Once this lag screw is placed, the plate is seated down, and additional screws can be placed on both sides of the fracture. The author's preference is 3.5 mm screws and a 3.5 to 4.5 mm reconstruction plate. Once the crescent fracture is reduced, the sacroiliac joint is evaluated for instability. In many cases there is adequate stability with repair of the crescent fracture, and the sacroiliac joint does not require stabilization.
Another difficult fracture to reduce is the windswept deformity (See illustrative case in chapter on Sacroiliac Fixation: Anterior Approach). This bilateral pelvic injury involves one hemipelvis in internal rotation and the other hemipelvis in external rotation. Adhering to the principles previously described in this chapter, this deformity can be reduced anatomically during the acute period. Often, anterior external fixation is used to correct the rotational deformities prior to definitive posterior fixation with iliosacral screws.
 
ALTERNATIVE TECHNIQUES
Besides iliosacral screws anterior sacroiliac plating or posterior transiliac bars or plating are also acceptable options (see chapters on Sacroiliac Fixation: Anterior Approach and Spinopelvic Fixation). Sacral fractures associated with significant comminution may require support in addition to the iliosacral screws. In these cases, the author uses a posterior tension-band plate spanning from one iliac wing to the other (Figs 20.13A to M). A 14- to 16-hole plate is placed caudad to the posterior-superior iliac spine (just cephalad to the superior border of the sciatic notch), between spinous processes of the sacrum so that the plate will not be prominent, yet allows three screws of fixation into both iliac wings. The plate is slid underneath the back musculature with a bend at each end. Generally, the author uses a plate with three holes lateral to the sacroiliac joint bilaterally. The third screw from the end on each side is placed between the two tables of cortical bone of the iliac wing. These screws can be longer than 130 mm. The plate is bent between the second and third hole on each side so the last two screws traverse the iliac wing. The plate is usually bent slightly in the midline, conforming to the slight anterior sloping of the sacrum along its posterior surface.
 
Tips and Pearls
  • External fixation pins are placed through a pilot hole in the iliac crest and driven between the inner and outer tables of bone.
  • A reasonable reduction of an unstable posterior pelvis may be obtained by a combination of traction, either in full extension or flexed up to ~45 degrees, along with compression in the posterior part of the pelvis.
  • Contraindication for placement of the C (posterior) clamp is an iliac wing fracture anterior to the sacroiliac joint.241
  • The anterior approach for posterior pelvic instability is indicated if there is a posterior crush injury to the soft tissue that prevents a posterior approach, if the patient has multiple trauma and cannot be placed in the prone position, and if there is an iliac wing fracture that is anterior to the sacroiliac joint.
  • The posterior approach for posterior pelvic instability is indicated in sacral fractures and in crescent fractures where the fracture line is primarily posterior to the sacroiliac joint, as well as if decompression of nerve roots is required.
  • An occasionally helpful technique for reduction of the sacroiliac joint when the symphysis is disrupted is manipulation of the symphysis with the Jungbluth clamp.
  • There is a concave surface on the sacrum that fits into the convex surface of the ilium, helping guide reduction of the sacroiliac joint from posterior.
  • In performing the posterior approach, expose the origin of the gluteus maximus on the lumbodorsal fascia. Do not cut straight down onto the posterior-superior iliac spine (PSIS) because damage to the gluteus maximus will occur. Never debride the cartilage of the sacroiliac joint. However, loose pieces of cartilage are discarded.
  • In general, reduction of the posterior pelvic injury should precede reduction of an acetabular fracture or the anterior pelvic injury. Starting the reduction anteriorly, the surgeon must be aware that a few millimeters or degrees of malreduction anteriorly can lead to more than a centimeter displacement posteriorly.
  • Unstable posterior injuries require internal fixation.
  • Stability by physical exam is determined by the compression test.
  • Radiographic instability is diagnosed when there is greater than 5 mm of displacement of the sacroiliac joint, iliac fracture, or sacral fracture (a gap rather than impaction). Remember, the pelvic injury can be minimally displaced but can be grossly unstable, so a combination of physical and radiographic exams needs to be performed to determine stability.
  • The inferior sacroiliac ligaments are most important for stability and should be viewed on the CT scan prior to determining instability (i.e. superior cuts of the CT scan can show widening of the sacroiliac joint; however, inferior cuts show an anatomically reduced sacroiliac joint).
  • Nonoperative treatment for pelvic injuries includes sacral impaction injuries, isolated rami fractures, or avulsions with less than 1 cm of displacement. A weekly AP X-ray exam for 4 weeks is indicated to ensure no further increase in deformity.
  • A posterior external fixation frame (C-clamp) can reduced SI joints posteriorly but is contraindicated in cases where the iliac fracture is anterior to the sacroiliac joint.
  • If stable pelvic fractures have greater than 20 degrees internal rotation of the hemipelvis or greater than 1 cm of leg length discrepancy, or if the rami fracture is impinging on the bladder or vagina (tilt fracture), operative fixation is indicated.
  • Most rami fractures are treated conservatively. Those with greater than 1.5 cm of displacement with an unstable posterior injury are treated operatively due to disruption of the iliopectineal fascia.
  • The main complication of iliosacral screw placement is an L5 nerve root injury due to the guide pin, drill bit, or screw being placed too anteriorly so the pin exits and reenters the sacrum in the sacral ala area, damaging the L5 nerve root.
  • Bilateral sacral fractures and U- or H-type fracture patterns are frequently misdiagnosed as simple sacral fractures and can cause significant morbidity from nerve injuries. These injuries completely disassociate the pelvis and the lower extremities from the spine. They frequently have a kyphotic deformity. They can best be seen on a lateral sacral view or lateral sacral CT reconstruction.
  • The most important component to the outcome of pelvic injuries is the preoperative nerve exam. Secondarily, associated injuries and quality of reduction are also important.242
 
Postoperative Management
The rehabilitation of patients with completely unstable pelvic injuries involves touch-down weight bearing for 8 weeks. After 8 weeks, the patient may begin weight bearing as tolerated with range of motion and resistance exercises. Patients with bilateral injuries are limited to wheelchair transfers for 8 weeks. Most patients mobilize on the intact side and use crutches or a walker.
 
Complications
The two roles for the orthopedic surgeon in patients with pelvic fractures are to anatomically reduce the pelvis and prevent complications. Complications that occur from the injury are not preventable. However, iatrogenic injuries can be prevented. Kellam et al reported a 25% infection rate with a posterior approach to the pelvis.14 This high infection rate is due to operating through damaged soft tissue and cutting straight down to the bone (not elevating the gluteus maximus flap (Figs 20.12A and E). Careful consideration of the soft tissue, as well as an anatomical approach, can reduce this rate of infection to 2.8%.15 If the posterior soft tissue has sustained too much damage, an anterior approach should be chosen. Careful evaluation and treatment of Morel-Lavallée lesions can also decrease the rate of infection (Fig. 20.11).
Although, injury-related nerve damage can occur, the surgeon must work to prevent iatrogenic nerve injury. Careful understanding of the anatomy, as well as proper reduction and fixation techniques, can prevent damage to nerves that may already be slightly injured secondary to the accident. Somatosensory evoked potentials as well as other nerve monitoring can be used in an attempt to decrease the rate of nerve injury. However, the benefits of nerve monitoring in the acute setting have been controversial. The author's use of nerve monitoring has been limited to correction of chronic malunions that require significant reductions.9 In the author's opinion, nerve monitoring in the acute setting is not indicated. Finally, because of the complexity of pelvic fractures and the associated injuries, the absolute correlation between reduction and function has not been demonstrated definitively. However, it is the author's strong opinion, which is supported in the literature and by personal experience with more than 1000 pelvic injuries, that the more anatomical the reduction is, the better the functional outcome for the patient.15-17 Therefore, the goal of every surgeon is to anatomically reduce and fix the pelvis and avoid complications.
 
Literature
Multiple studies have shown no difference in the outcome of pelvic injuries despite the level of injury. Often in these studies, completely unstable pelvis injuries are treated conservatively or with external fixators only. However, other studies have shown that the degree of displacement of the hemipelvis affects the patient outcome.12,16, 17 Return to work outcomes have varied from 40 to 100% following pelvic fractures. In summarizing the outcome studies, the associated injuries seem to be more important than the pelvic injury in determining patient outcomes. The most significant factor in outcome is the degree of neurological injury. Neurological injury leads to significant impairment for the patients. In general, the surgeon should anatomically reduce the pelvis to restore function to the patient and prevent long-term deformities.9 In one study almost 90% of patients returned to work and had an excellent result if anatomical reduction was achieved.12
 
Illustrative Case
Forty-three-year-old involved in a MVA presents to an outside hospital with a systolic blood pressure of < 90 mm Hg. The patient was > 500 pounds and suffered a left 243unstable SI joint, right transtectal transverse posterior wall acetabular fracture and left infratectal transverse acetabular fracture (treated nonoperatively due to acceptable roof arc measurements- see chapter on acetabular fractures) (Fig. 20.13A). The patient went to the operating room (OR) immediately for placement of an anterior external fixator and an exploratory laparotomy (Figs 20.13B to D). The patient remained unstable and went to angiogram for embolization of the iliolumbar artery. The patient was returned to the OR on day 2 for closed reduction percutaneous iliosacral fixation. The patient stabilized however, repeat X-rays showed loss of fixation (Fig. 20.13F). The patient was transferred for definitive fixation. 10 days post injury the patient underwent a 3 stage reconstruction: 1) A posterior approach (Fig. 20.12) with removal of previously placed iliosacral screws and open anatomical reduction (Fig. 20.9) with clamps and C-clamp (Fig. 20.13G) and placement of iliosacral screws and a transiliac plate due to her being morbidly obese and poor screw purchase secondary to the previously failed iliosacral screws 2) A Kocher-Langenbeck approach for ORIF of the left transtectal transverse posterior wall acetabular fracture 3) A Pfannenstiel approach for ORIF of the symphysis with 6 hole reconstruction plate (Figs 20.13H to L). One year later the patient was doing well with some posterior pain but no hip pain (Fig. 20.13M).
References
  1. ReillyMC, BonoCM, LitkouhiB, SirkinM, BehrensFF. The effect of sacral fracture malreduction on the safe placement of iliosacral screws. J Orthop Trauma. 2003;17:88–94.
  1. DalalSA, BurgessAR, SiegelJH, et al. Pelvic fracture in multiple trauma: classification by mechanism is key to pattern of organ injury, resuscitative requirements, and outcome. J Trauma. 1989;29:981–1000.
  1. BucholzRW. The pathological anatomy of Malgaigne fracture-dislocation of the pelvis. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1981;63:400–4.
  1. KellamJ. The role of external fixation in pelvic disruptions. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1989;241: 66–82.
  1. BruceB, ReillyM, SimsS. Predicting future displacement of nonoperatively managed lateral compression sacral fractures: can it be done? J Orthop Trauma. 2011;25(9):523–7.
  1. DicksonKF, MattaJM. Skeletal deformity following external fixation of the pelvis. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23(5):1222–5.
  1. DicksonKF, FrigonVA. Open reduction internal fixation of a pelvic malunion through an anterior approach: a case report. J Orthop Trauma. 2001;15:519–24.
  1. MattaJM. Anterior fixation of rami fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:88–96.
  1. MattaJM, DicksonKF, MarkovichGD. Surgical treatment of pelvic nonunions and malunions. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:199–206.
  1. BurgessA, EastridgeBJ, YoungJWR, et al. Pelvic ring disruptions: effective classification system and treatment protocols. J Trauma. 1990;30:848–56.
  1. GriffinDR, StarrAJ, ReinertCM, JonesAL, WhitlockS. Vertically unstable pelvic fractures fixed with percutaneous iliosacral screws: does posterior injury pattern predict fixation failure? J Orthop Trauma. 2006;17(6):399–405.
  1. HsuJR, BearRR, DicksonKF. Open Reduction of Displaced Sacral Fractures: Techniques and Results.Sacral fractures. Orthopedics. 2010;33(10):730.
  1. HakDJ, OlsonSA, MattaJM. Diagnosis and management of closed degloving injuries associated with pelvic and acetabular fractures: the Morel-Lavallée lesion. J Trauma. 1997; 42:1046–51.
  1. KellamJ, McMurtryR, PaleyD, TileM. The unstable pelvic fracture: operative treatment. Orthop Clin North Am. 1987;18:25–41.
  1. MattaJM, TornettaP III. Internal fixation of unstable pelvic ring injuries. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:129–40.
  1. Semba R YasukawaK, GustiloR. Critical analysis of results of 53 Malgaigne fractures of the pelvis. J Trauma. 1983;23:535–7.
  1. TileM. Pelvic ring fractures: should they be fixed? J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1988;70:1–12.

Navigation Assisted Percutaneous Sacral Iliac Screw Fixation21

Frankie Leung, Christian Fang
 
Introduction
Pelvic ring disruption fractures are commonly associated with injury to the sacroiliac joints or the sacral alar region. Regardless of the fracture type, the management of pelvic fractures is first focused on initial stabilization of hemodynamics and control of internal bleeding. After the patient is stabilized definitive treatment with internal fixation can be considered for unstable fractures. The goal of surgery is to reduce the pelvis to a functional position, achieve a sufficiently stable fixation in order for healing to take place while the patient can still be allowed to mobilize early.
Pelvic ring disruption fractures are commonly classified by the Young and Burgress,25 or the AO/Tile systems.20 These fractures have different directions of instability and different degree of displacements. Proper preoperative evaluation of the fracture is needed. A through radiological assessment with inlet, anteroposterior and outlet views of the pelvis is mandatory. A computer tomography with multiplanar and 3D reconstruction provides valuable information to guide fixation and reduction of fractures.
During the past few decades, there has been much advancement in posterior fixation of pelvic ring injuries. Internal fixation methods include sacral iliac screw fixation, sacral iliac bars, posterior plating and anterior sacral iliac plating. Biomechanical studies have proven that these fixations can provide significantly increased stability when compared to anterior fixation alone, especially with vertically or rotationally unstable fractures, and is associated with less malunion. Posterior only fixation may be considered in patients with pure rotational instability (Young and Burgess LC I and LC II or AO/Tile B2).12
Minimally invasive fluoroscopic guided sacral iliac fixation is particularly useful in patients where an extended anterior approach is prone to complications such as sclerotic vessels, coagulopathy, obesity or post hernia repair with mesh.17,21 Its mechanical stability is comparable to other more elaborate means of posterior fixations.1,3
Biomechanical studies suggest that two screws provide higher stability22 although there may be increased risk of injury to nearby structures, especially when there is insufficient bone stock. Sacral iliac screws are placed into the S1 vertebra. We do not recommend routine placement of S2 screws as they are difficult and more likely associated with neural injuries.2 Half threaded lag screws provide inter-fragmentary compression for sacral iliac joint dissociations or simple sacral fractures. Long threaded positional screws are recommended for comminuted sacral fractures as over compression may lead to fracture displacement and nerve root compromise.246
Figure 21.1: This illustration in a pelvic model shows the screw trajectory highlighted in red with regard to different viewing angles of the pelvis. Note the close proximity to both L5 and S1 nerve roots
In bilateral, significantly displaced and comminuted sacral fractures, plating may provide additional stability and opportunity for reduction compared to screws.8,19
Fixation of posterior pelvic ring fractures maybe associated with significant risks of injury to nearby vital structures. These include the iliac vessels, sacral vascular plexus, intra-pelvic viscera, lumbosacral nerve roots and the cauda equina.4,13 The surgeon must be very familiar with the local anatomy and interpretation of special views (Fig. 21.1). It is strongly advisable that surgeons should learn and practice these approaches in specific fracture courses before they operate on their patients.
 
Operative Technique
Patient is a 42-year-old female falling off from height and suffered a fracture of the right hemi pelvis.
Assessment of the radiographs (Fig. 21.2) and CT (Fig. 21.3) revealed that the fracture involved the right sided sacral alar lateral to the foramens in addition to the pubic rami fractures. The ilium was displaced in an externally rotated position, suggesting this was an AP compression fracture. She was resuscitated and stabilized with external fixators placed to her iliac crest shortly after presentation.247
Figure 21.2: Anteroposterior X-ray showing both the pubic rami and the right sacral ala is fractured. Not rotational displacement of the right hemi-pelvis in an externally rotated direction
Figure 21.3: CT scans showing the initial displacement of the ilium in external rotation. On the coronal reformatted view, there appears to be no significant vertical shear element
248The surgical decision was to stabilize the posterior right with percutaneous sacral iliac screw fixation. The anterior external fixator frame was left in place needed for additional for anterior stability.15
 
Surgery
 
PATIENT POSITIONING
The patient is put in a supine position on a radiolucent table. The patient is shifted towards the injured side to facilitated placement of screws. Sufficient clearance under the operating table is need for the inlet, anteroposterior, outlet and lateral fluoroscopic images (Fig. 21.4).5
 
REDUCTION (FIG. 21.5)
Accurate reduction is also shown to improve clinical outcome.10 Moreover, fracture reduction prior to screw fixation is important as the safety zone for screw placement may be significantly compromised when a translation or angular displacement exists between the ilium and the sacral body.
In cases with vertical shear or rotational elements, performing reduction by first aligning the anterior ring with external fixator or internal fixation can provide a more accurate overall reduction after sacral iliac screw fixation. At times, skeletal traction maybe required to provide sufficient reduction forces.
Figure 21.4: Intraoperative positioning of the C-arm to obtain inlet, outlet and AP projections of the pelvis
249
Figure 21.5: Reduction of the fracture is performed by manipulation of the Schanz screws inserted below anterior inferior iliac spines
 
PLACEMENT OF PERCUTANEOUS SACRAL ILIAC SCREW BY COMPUTER NAVIGATION GUIDANCE
Navigated placement of sacral iliac screws can minimize the need to repeatedly reposition the C-arm thereby also minimizing radiation to the patient and operating staff.16,18 2D fluoroscopic images are commonly used as navigation reference.9 Depending on availability, some suggest using 3D CT data as reference for additional accuracy.6
Clear visualization of critical landmarks on fluoroscopy is mandatory before accepting an image as reference. The inlet view of the sacral iliac region is used to identify the spinal canal and the anterior border of the sacrum. In the outlet view, the arcs representing the sacral foramens, superior cortex of sacral ala and the superior end plate of S1 body. In the lateral view taken by overlapping the left and right greater sciatic foramen, the anterior border of the sacral body, the sacral promontory, the superior border of the sacral alar and the superior end plate of S1 can be seen. The placement of powered instruments and screws must be confined within critical landmarks to avoid injury to vital structures.11,14,24
The navigated drill guard (Fig. 21.6A) and navigated pointer (Fig. 21.6B) are used and their accuracy verified before hand. The skin incision is placed 3-5 cm posterior and slightly superior to the intersecting line between the femoral axis and a vertical line drawn from the ASIS. The accuracy of the site of incision can be enhanced by using navigated pointer (Fig. 21.7).
Figures 21.6A and B: (A) Showing a navigated drill guard, (B) Showing a navigated pointer. Accuracy of these navigated tools is verified before usage
250
Figure 21.7: The skin incision is placed 3-5 cm posterior and slightly superior to the intersecting line between the femoral axis and a vertical line drawn from the ASIS. The incision can also be planned accurately with navigated pointer placed on the skin towards the correct trajectory
Figure 21.8: This computer navigation screenshot shows the anticipated screw trajectory on the reference inlet, outlet and lateral images. Boundaries for the tunnels are spinal canal (SC), anterior cortex of sacrum (ACS), superior cortex of sacral ala (SCS), S1 neural foramen (NF), superior endplate of S1 (SE). Depending on individual preference, optional planning tools and synthetic views may further assist placement of hardware along the correct trajectory
The computer navigation screen projects the anticipated screw trajectory on the reference images (Fig. 21.8). 2.8 mm guidewires are then placed with navigated drill guide (Fig. 21.9). Fluoroscopic confirmation of the placement of wire is highly recommended. Two parallel guide wires are placed into the S1 vertebral body towards the sacral promontory.251
Figure 21.9: 2.8 mm guide wires are placed with a navigation drill guard. It is highly recommend that fluoroscopy is used in conjunction to confirm the trajectory since bending of guide wire may occur. Two parallel guide wires are placed into the S1 vertebral body towards the sacral promontory
After measurement of screw length, 7.3 mm self-drilling, self-tapping cannulated titanium screws are placed into position. Their positions are reconfirmed with fluoroscopy in the inlet, outlet and lateral views. None of the screws should penetrate the aforementioned anatomic boundaries. The overall reduction of the pelvic ring is also confirmed, noting that comminution and over-compression of the sacral ala has not occurred. Percutaneous wound is closed and the navigation reference array is removed. An anterior frame external fixator is added in significantly displaced and unstable fractures to provide additional stability to the anterior pelvic ring (Fig. 21.10). Postoperative X-rays are obtained to confirm satisfactory fracture reduction and placement of the sacral iliac screws (Figs 21.11A and B).
 
Postoperative Management
Patients are encouraged to mobilize the large joints of the ipsilateral lower limb shortly after surgery. Weight bearing walking exercises can be tolerated by patients with minimally displaced fractures after fixation. For significantly displaced and unstable fractures, non-weight bearing walking at the injured side is recommended for six weeks after surgery.
Figure 21.10: The percutaneous wound is closed. The navigation reference array is removed. For more significantly displaced and unstable fractures, it is advisable to provide additional stability to the anterior pelvic ring. An anterior frame external fixator may be kept in place for four to six weeks if internal fixation is not being performed
252
Figures 21.11A to C: Post-operative X-rays at outlet (A), inlet (B) and anteroposterior (C) views showing satisfactory fracture reduction and placement of the sacral iliac screws
253
 
Complications
Complications that may arise from surgery include screw malpositioning, L5 or S1 root injury, secondary displacement, non-union is usually of the anterior ring after posterior fixation.23 Persistent pelvic pain is associated with vertical displacement fracture especially when over 5 mm.7
 
Illustrative Case
A 37-year-old man suffered a fall injury from 4 meters. After initial stabilization, inlet radiograph shows a disruption of the left sacroiliac joint and a minimally displaced acetabular fracture and disruption of the symphysis pubis (Figs 21.12 and 21.13). Fluoroscopic guided lag screw fixation was used to provide compression across the sacroiliac joint reducing the dissociation (Fig. 21.14).
Figure 21.12: A 37-year-old man suffered a fall injury from 4 meters. After initial stabilization, inlet radiograph shows a disruption of the left sacroiliac joint and a minimally displaced acetabular fracture and disruption of the symphysis pubis
Figures 21.13A and B: (A) Showing a displaced disruption of the left sacral iliac joint, (B) showing a minimal displaced anterior column fracture
254
Figure 21.14: Fluoroscopic guided lag screw placement providing compression across the sacroiliac joint reducing the dissociation. An additional anterior fixation was unnecessary in this case since there was minimal displacement of the anterior pelvic ring
 
Conclusion
Percutaneous sacroiliac screw fixation is commonly indicated for stabilizing the posterior pelvic ring. Provided that the surgeon is familiar with the anatomy and technique, this technique probably is safer, faster and more easily performed than other techniques. This minimally invasive technique enables patients to recover quickly. Computer navigation reduces radiation dosage and do not slow down the procedure. Newer techniques utilizing 3D images may further reduce the incidence of screw malpositioning.
Bibliography
  1. BaleRJ, KovacsP, DolatiB, HinterleithnerC, RosenbergerRE. Stereotactic CT-guided percutaneous stabilization of posterior pelvic ring fractures: a preclinical cadaver study. J Vasc Interv Radiol. 2008;19-7:1093-8.
  1. CecilML, RollinsJR Jr., EbraheimNA, YeastingRA. Projection of the S2 pedicle onto the posterolateral surface of the ilium. A technique for lag screw fixation of sacral fractures or sacroiliac joint dislocations. Spine (Phila Pa 1976) 1996;21-7:875-8.
  1. ComstockCP, van derMeulen MC, GoodmanSB. Biomechanical comparison of posterior internal fixation techniques for unstable pelvic fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1996;10-8:517-22.
  1. FarrellED, GardnerMJ, KriegJC, Chip RouttML, Jr. The upper sacral nerve root tunnel: an anatomic and clinical study. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23-5:333-9.
  1. GiannoudisPV, PapadokostakisG, AlpantakiK, KontakisG, ChalidisB. Is the lateral sacral fluoroscopic view essential for accurate percutaneous sacroiliac screw insertion? An experimental study. Injury. 2008;39-8:875-80.
  1. GoldbergBA, LindseyRW, FoglarC, HedrickTD, MiclauT, HadadJL. Imaging assessment of sacroiliac screw placement relative to the neuroforamen. Spine (Phila Pa 1976). 1998;23-5:585-9.
  1. GriffinDR, StarrAJ, ReinertCM, JonesAL, WhitlockS. Vertically unstable pelvic fractures fixed with percutaneous iliosacral screws: does posterior injury pattern predict fixation failure? J Orthop Trauma. 2006;20-1 Suppl:S30-6; discussion S6.
  1. KeatingJF, WerierJ, BlachutP, BroekhuyseH, MeekRN, O’BrienPJ. Early fixation of the vertically unstable pelvis: the role of iliosacral screw fixation of the posterior lesion. J Orthop Trauma. 1999;13-2:107-13.
  1. MosheiffR, KhouryA, WeilY, LiebergallM. First generation computerized fluoroscopic navigation in percutaneous pelvic surgery. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18-2:106-11.
  1. MullisBH, SagiHC. Minimum 1-year follow-up for patients with vertical shear sacroiliac joint dislocations treated with iliosacral screws: does joint ankylosis or anatomic reduction contribute to functional outcome? J Orthop Trauma. 2008;22-5:293-8.
  1. NoojinFK, MalkaniAL, HaikalL, LundquistC, VoorMJ. Cross-sectional geometry of the sacral ala for safe insertion of iliosacral lag screws: a computed tomography model. J Orthop Trauma. 2000;14-1:31-5.
  1. OsterhoffG, OssendorfC, WannerGA, SimmenHP, WernerCM. Posterior screw fixation in rotationally unstable pelvic ring injuries. Injury. 2011;42-10:992-6.
  1. PatteeGA, BohlmanHH, McAfeePC. Compression of a sacral nerve as a complication of screw fixation of the sacro-iliac joint. A case report. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1986;68-5:769-71.
  1. RouttML Jr., SimonianPT, AgnewSG, MannFA. Radiographic recognition of the sacral alar slope for optimal placement of iliosacral screws: a cadaveric and clinical study. J Orthop Trauma. 1996;10-3:171-7.
  1. SagiHC, OrdwayNR, DiPasqualeT. Biomechanical analysis of fixation for vertically unstable sacroiliac dislocations with iliosacral screws and symphyseal plating. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18-3:138-43.
  1. SchepNW, HaverlagR, van VugtAB. Computer-assisted versus conventional surgery for insertion of 96 cannulated iliosacral screws in patients with postpartum pelvic pain. J Trauma. 2004;57-6:1299-302.
  1. SchweitzerD, ZylberbergA, CordovaM, GonzalezJ. Closed reduction and iliosacral percutaneous fixation of unstable pelvic ring fractures. Injury. 2008;39-8:869-74.
  1. SmithHE, YuanPS, SassoR, PapadopolousS, VaccaroAR. An evaluation of image-guided technologies in the placement of percutaneous iliosacral screws. Spine (Phila Pa 1976). 2006;31-2:234-8.
  1. SuzukiT, HakDJ, ZiranBH, AdamsSA, StahelPF, MorganSJ, SmithWR. Outcome and complications of posterior transiliac plating for vertically unstable sacral fractures. Injury. 2009;40-4:405-9.
  1. TileM. Pelvic ring fractures: should they be fixed? J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1988;70-1:1-12.
  1. van den BoschEW, van ZwienenCM, van VugtAB. Fluoroscopic positioning of sacroiliac screws in 88 patients. J Trauma. 2002;53-1:44-8.
  1. van ZwienenCM, van den BoschEW, SnijdersCJ, KleinrensinkGJ, van VugtAB. Biomechanical comparison of sacroiliac screw techniques for unstable pelvic ring fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18-9:589-95.
  1. WeilYA, NousiainenMT, HelfetDL. Removal of an iliosacral screw entrapping the L5 nerve root after failed posterior pelvic ring fixation: a case report. J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21-6:414-7.
  1. XuR, EbraheimNA, RobkeJ, YeastingRA. Radiologic evaluation of iliosacral screw placement. Spine (Phila Pa 1976). 1996;21-5:582-8.
  1. YoungJW, BurgessAR, BrumbackRJ, PokaA. Pelvic fractures: value of plain radiography in early assessment and management. Radiology. 1986;160-2:445-51.

Sacroiliac Fixation: Anterior Approach22

Kyle F Dickson
 
Introduction
Pelvic ring disruptions are typically part of a complex set of injuries to both the axial skeleton and the contents of the pelvis, including the gastrointestinal tract, the bladder and lower genitourinary tract, and the pelvic floor structures. Pelvic ring injuries can be life threatening in the acute phase. Surviving patients may have chronic problems due to associated neurovascular injury, pelvic ring deformity or instability, and the sequelae of associated injuries to the surrounding soft tissues or visceral structures. These factors can lead to persistent pain, sitting imbalance, limb length discrepancy, sexual/reproductive dysfunction, or bowel/bladder dysfunction. Clearly, the decisions about the management of pelvic ring injuries must consider all of these factors, and these injuries can be very difficult to treat successfully. Low-energy pelvic injuries due to minor falls rarely require surgical intervention. Conversely, patients with high-energy pelvic injuries often require operative treatment to save their life and prevent complications related to instability or deformity of the pelvis. Patients with high-energy pelvic injuries are often hemodynamically unstable with significant associated injuries. Their survival relies on the acute management of the associated injuries as well as the pelvic injury. The acute management of pelvic injuries is beyond the scope of this chapter.
This chapter deals primarily with the management of the unstable sacroiliac joint (SI) through an anterior approach. The placement of external fixators, the indications for surgery, the posterior definitive open reduction internal fixation of the various types of pelvic injuries, the classification systems, and the components of anatomy, stability, deformity, and injury vector force were covered in the chapter on iliosacral screws. When making decisions about the definitive fixation of pelvic injuries, however, it is critical to understand the stability and deformity of the pelvis. Once the vector of deformity is discovered, the vector of reduction can then be planned using various combinations of closed and open reduction techniques. Of secondary importance is the type of fixation. In general, among the higher energy pelvic injuries, internal fixation is mechanically superior to external fixation.1
 
Indications/Contraindications
The indications for SI joint fixation through an anterior approach include an unstable hemipelvis as defined in the chapter on iliosacral screws.258
Figures 22.1A to G: (A) An AP view of a 32 years old that was T-boned passenger or lateral compression injury who suffered a left stable crescent fracture of the iliac wing with a minimally displaced fracture of the inner cortex of the iliac wing. Unfortunately, the patient had over 60° of more internal rotation then the stable contralateral hemipelvis so a stable fracture with an unacceptable deformity (>20° is considered unacceptable deformity).3,6 (B to D) The inlet, outlet, and CT scan showing the fracture and the deformity. (E to G) AP, inlet and outlet view after placement of an anterior external fixation correcting the deformity without complications (8 weeks in fixator, touch down weight-bearing on the left)
The indications for surgical treatment of pelvic ring injuries include those patients that fail nonoperative treatment as well as those pelvic injuries that are stable but have unacceptable deformity. Specifically, rotational deformities of the hemipelvis such as internal rotation or flexion can be controlled better anteriorly then posteriorly (Figs 22.1, 22.2B and 22.6). An example of this may include an internal rotation deformity as a result of a lateral compression type of injury in which there is greater than 20 degrees of internal rotation of the hemipelvis, or greater than 1 cm leg length discrepancy (Figs 22.1A to G).2,3 Additionally, these internal rotational deformities can cause a ramus fracture that pierces the bladder or vagina. In these cases, it is necessary to externally rotate the hemipelvis to remove the bone from the bladder or vagina. Because these are stable injuries, a simple external fixator can be used to externally rotate the pelvis and restore the normal pelvic anatomy (Fig. 22.1). Unfortunately, if the deformity persists, an osteotomy is required prior to performing the external rotation3 (see Fig. 20.3 and 22.6). However, in most cases, rami fractures do not require fixation whether there is an isolated anterior injury or a combined anterior and posterior injury. In cases where there is greater than 15 mm of displacement associated with a posterior injury, the very strong pectineal fascia may be disrupted, and therefore open reduction and internal fixation of the ramus fracture is indicated.4 In external rotation deformities or open book pelvic injuries, the indication for surgery is greater than 2.5 cm of diastasis of the pubic symphysis. Widening of less than 2.5 cm may require surgical fixation if there is an associated posterior injury. Disruptions of the posterior sacroiliac ligaments of the pelvis begin to occur with more than 2.5 cm of displacement. There are pelvic injuries that appear as simple symphysis diastasis that actually include a complete disruption of the posterior part of the pelvis. In these injuries, reduction of the diastasis with an anterior external fixation frame will widen the posterior complex and demonstrate posterior instability (see Figs 20.4 and 20.5).
The approach to sacroiliac joint disruptions can be undertaken either anteriorly or posteriorly. The indications for an anterior approach to the SI joint can be divided into 259absolute and relative indications and contraindications.
Figures 22.2A to C: (A) Right SI joint (head superiorly) showing the L5 nerve root showing a gap of 2 cm proximally between the nerve and the SI joint. Inferiorly, the nerve crosses the SI joint; (B) An AP view of anterior SI joint plates. The author typically uses a 3 hole 3.5/4.5 mm reconstruction plate. There is room for one hole medial to the joint and the screw is angled 15° medially to parallel the SI joint. The best bone is along the brim so one plate is along the brim and the second plate is placed 90° to the first giving the construct the best stability; (C) Patient supine on a radiolucent fracture table showing plenty of room for the C-arm
Absolute indications for an anterior approach include a patient with damage posterior tissue that prevents a safe ORIF posteriorly (Fig. 20.11), multiple trauma patients which prevent prone position (pulmonary or cardiac), and injuries where the fracture line is anterior to the SI joint. Relative indications for the anterior approach include better visualization of the joint so more easily determine anatomical reduction, multiple trauma with multiple extremity injuries so different surgical teams can work simultaneously, spare the more damaged posterior soft tissue, and the ability to work on the symphysis and the anterior SI joint at the same time (with the posterior approach the SI joint is fixed in the prone position followed by changing the patient to the supine position for fixing the symphysis). An absolute contraindications for an anterior approach is a sacral fracture medial to the foramen or the use of an anterior SI joint plate for a sacral fracture (iliosacral screws can be used if reduction is achieved). Visualization from an anterior approach for sacral fractures is limited and stabilization with anterior SI joint plates is inadequate. Another absolute contraindication is when there is a delay from the time of injury to fixation and the hemipelvis is displaced posterior (very difficult if not impossible reduction from the anterior approach). Relative contraindications to an anterior approach are a nerve injury that requires decompression (posterior approach), a posteriorly displaced hemipelvis, and a SI joint injury associated with a sacral fracture. Finally, the L5 nerve root and the lateral femoral cutaneous nerve are in significant danger with the anterior approach (Figs 22.2A to C).
 
Preoperative Planning
The majority of pelvic injuries that require operative treatment are those that have complete instability of the hemipelvis. Instability is determined by a combination of physical examination and radiographic analysis (see chapter 20). The surgical treatment of a pelvis fracture involves three steps: the approach, the reduction, and the fixation. While performing definitive stabilization of the pelvis, orthopedic surgeons have the 260ability to control the reduction and prevent complications. A thorough understanding of the anatomy of the pelvis, as well as the deformity of the fracture, will optimize these two areas of control.
The radiographic, stability and deformity analysis (see Fig. 20.2) is similar to that described in the chapter 20 and includes an AP, inlet, outlet and 3 mm CT scan.
 
Implants
Once an acceptable reduction is achieved, the surgeon confirms that no posterior widening has occurred and there is posterior stability. Various options that are available for symphyseal plating include a four- or six-hole plate (3.5 or 4.5 mm screws). The author prefers a six-hole curved plate with either 3.5 or 4.5 mm screws. The plate is placed on the superior aspect of the rami. Occasionally, if there is a displaced rami > 1.5 cm longer curved plates are required. Through a Pfannenstiel incision (modified Stoppa),5 a 20 hole plate can be placed from SI joint to SI joint along the brim. Additionally, a second plate can be placed anteriorly for a more rigid 90/90 degree construct. This two-plate construct is not required in the acute setting.4 In malunion cases, double-plating is occasionally required (see Fig. 20.3).6 The surgeon bends the superior plate down ~15 degrees before the last hole on each side of the plate where the pubis bone connects with the rami. This anatomical sloping of the rami occurs over the obturator foramen. Screws inserted in the plane of the pubis can be up to 90 mm in length, and average 60 to 70 mm in length. Screws over the obturator foramen are significantly shorter, usually in the 20 to 30 mm range. Alternatively, a ramus screw can be placed from the pubic tubercle into the supra-acetabular bone as a method of fixation.7 Placement of this intramedullary screw requires experience with fluoroscopy to ensure that this rami screw does not penetrate the joint. An obturator oblique with a cephalad tilt allows the corridor of bone to be visualized where the screw can be placed safely.
For the fixation of the posterior injury, even with the anterior approach, the author prefers iliosacral screws (see the chapter 20). The plates used for the anterior approach are 3 hole 3.5/4.5 mm reconstruction plates.
 
Surgery
 
ANESTHESIA/TIMING
The timing of fixation is controversial and needs to be planned on a case-by-case basis. Performing initial fixation as early as possible often makes it easier to achieve reduction by either closed or open techniques. Initial stabilization with either or both external fixation and percutaneous iliosacral screws can achieve excellent success. However, if anatomical reduction is not achieved by closed methods, performing open reduction prior to achieving hemodynamic stability and allowing the initial bleeding to cease can lead to significant blood loss and potential mortality to the patient. In general, the author's preference in a hemodynamically unstable patient with a mechanically unstable pelvis is to stabilize the pelvis with a pelvic sheet in the emergency room. If the patient is going to the operating room due to another emergency condition, an external fixator can be placed in the operating room. Additionally, closed reduction and percutaneous fixation of posterior disruptions can be undertaken at the same time. Anatomical closed reductions become progressively more difficult to achieve after 24 hours. Occasionally, symphyseal plating is used in combination with an exploratory laparotomy to give the pelvis some anterior stability. However, only a few degrees of a malunion anteriorly can translate into more than a centimeter of displacement posteriorly. Ideally, definitive fixation is undertaken when the patient has stabilized and is in positive fluid balance (5 to 7 days from the injury).
261The timing of the repair of an associated genital urinary disruption is controversial. Frequently, urologists do not like to repair urethral injuries until several months after the initial disruption. In these cases a suprapubic catheter is required; however, this is associated with a high-risk of infection. Tunneling the suprapubic catheter away from the symphysis disruption is helpful to prevent contamination of an anterior wound. However, in some cases ureterocystoscopy is possible with realignment of the urethra over a Foley catheter. The author usually waits 3 to 5 days after a urethral injury prior to plating the symphysis. Bladder ruptures should be repaired at the time of fixation of the symphysis regardless of whether it is an intra- or an extraperitoneal rupture.
 
POSITION
The patient is placed supine on a radiolucent table with the contralateral stable hemipelvis occasionally fixed to the table with a half pin in the femoral trochanter and another half pin in the gluteus medius tubercle of the iliac crest (see Fig. 20.6B). Keys for positioning of the patient include prep the entire leg on the side of the injury in case flexion is required to relax the iliopsoas for exposure and ensure all the radiographic views can be obtained prior to prepping incase bumps are required to get good quality inlet and outlet views (Fig. 22.2C).
 
REDUCTION TECHNIQUE
With all pelvic injuries, reduction of the sacroiliac joint or the posterior pelvic injury is critical prior to inserting fixation. During the initial period (less than 48 hours) following injury, closed reduction and fixation can potentially be achieved. Closed reduction techniques include traction and manipulation using traction (often with the patient fixed to the table), as well as manipulation of the reduction using the external fixator or half pins (in the anteroinferior iliac spine or in the gluteus medius tubercle region in the iliac crest) as reduction aids.
 
Pubic Symphysis Diastasis
Once the superior portions of the rami are cleared, reduction is performed using a Weber clamp. The skin is separated from the rectus, and the Weber clamp is usually placed through the anterior insertions of the rectus onto the pubic tubercles, as demonstrated in (Fig. 22.3). Small pilot holes may be drilled into the bone to allow more secure purchase of the bone by the Weber clamp but are rarely needed. Often, in addition to the external rotation injury, there may be an associated flexion-extension deformity in the pelvis. By manipulating the clamp, both deformities can usually be corrected (also use of the actual plate can push the elevated side down), and a perfect anatomical reduction can be achieved. The cartilage between the two pubic bones is maintained and not debrided. If more force is required to achieve reduction, a Farabeuf or Jungbluth clamp can be used anteriorly with either a 4.5 or 3.5 mm reduction screw. In complete pelvic ring disruptions with posterior translation of one side of the pelvis, the displaced hemipelvis must be “pulled” anteriorly. Application of this type of vector usually requires the use of a Jungbluth clamp. Rarely, a reduction screw may pull out when large reduction forces are needed; in this circumstance a nut can be placed on the far side of the screw to help maintain fixation during reduction. The additional dissection of the anterior pubis needed for these maneuvers can cause further disruption of the insertion of the rectus as well as damage to the suspensory ligaments to the penis. These additional steps should only be used if the initial reduction attempts fail.
 
Pubic Ramus Fractures
As previously mentioned, most pubic rami fractures are treated nonsurgically. Additionally, those that occur in conjunction with posterior pelvic instability can be 262treated nonsurgically without any loss of reduction.4,8
Figure 22.3: Placement position of a Weber clamp for reduction of symphysis diastasis deep to the skin and superficial to the rectus
Although fixing the rami fractures may increase the stability of the pelvis, this is usually not necessary. Operative intervention is indicated in the following situations: > 1.5 cm displacement,4 when the pubic rami are impinging upon the bladder or vagina due to an internal rotation injury of the hemipelvis, when there is greater than 20 degrees of internal rotation of the hemipelvis, and when there is an associated leg length discrepancy of greater than 1 cm. Reduction maneuvers in these cases uses external fixation to internally or externally rotate the hemipelvis (remove the rami fracture from the bladder or vagina), Weber clamp, or ball spike.
 
POSTERIOR RING INJURIES
 
Sacroiliac Joint Dislocations (sacrum and crescent fractures generally not through anterior approach- see iliosacral screws chapter)
Good radiographic evaluation is required for accomplishing either an anterior or a posterior approach to the posterior pelvic injury. Therefore, the surgeon must position the pelvis to ensure that good AP, lateral, inlet, and outlet views can be obtained to evaluate the reduction and perform the fixation of the pelvis.
As already mentioned, reduction of the sacroiliac joint can be problematic especially through an anterior approach. An occasionally helpful technique when the symphysis is disrupted is manipulation of the symphysis with the Jungbluth clamp (see Fig. 20.9D). Additionally, use of a Farabeuf clamp on the iliac wing to manipulate the rotation of the hemipelvis as well as compress the sacroiliac joint is often useful. This can also be done with an external fixator or a pin placed into the crest and used as a joystick. Screw clamp placement in this area can be very difficult due to the soft tissue (impossible in many obese patients). Occasionally, in a thin person, flexion of the hip to relax the psoas muscle combined with a Farabeuf or Jungbluth clamp placed across the sacroiliac joint can complete the reduction. A valuable clamp that can be used through the anterior approach is the asymmetrical King Tong clamp with the shorter tine placed onto the sacral ala from above the crest and the longer tine goes onto the posterior iliac crest. Because the two tines do not come together, an assistant needs to hold the clamp maintaining the reduction vector (the angled Matta clamp and the regular King Tong can also sometimes be used in a similar position).
The key to reduction is to create the appropriate reduction vector using a combination of clamps and half pins. The most common deformities seen in operative posterior 263pelvic injuries include cephalad and posterior translation, diastasis, and rotational injuries (abduction/adduction, internal rotation/external rotation).2 Often, translational deformities are corrected, but rotational deformities persist. Awareness of the bony landmarks helps the surgeon recognize and correct residual rotational deformities. Subtle manipulation of clamp placement will often correct the deformity.
A difficult fracture to reduce is the windswept deformity (Fig. 22.6). This bilateral pelvic injury involves one hemipelvis in internal rotation and the other hemipelvis in external rotation. Adhering to the principles previously described in this chapter, this deformity can be reduced anatomically during the acute period. Often, anterior external fixation is used to correct the rotational deformities prior to definitive posterior fixation with iliosacral screws.
In general, in completely unstable pelvic injuries, the posterior hemipelvis requires reduction prior to the anterior pelvis. This principle holds true even if there is an associated acetabular fracture. Reduction of the pelvis posteriorly will facilitate the reduction of the acetabulum (see Fig. 20.13). Occasionally, stabilization may occur anteriorly, but even a few millimeters of rotation anteriorly can translate into more than a centimeter posteriorly. Therefore, posterior reduction and fixation are critical prior to anterior reduction and fixation.
 
APPROACH
 
Pubic Symphysis Diastasis
Symphyseal disruptions are more commonly treated using open reduction and internal fixation of the symphysis. There are two approaches commonly used: either a midline incision or the Pfannenstiel approach (Figs 22.4A to C and 22.6A to C).
Figures 22.4A to C: (A) A curvilinear incision 1 cm above the symphysis (alternatively a longitudinal incision can be used especially as an extension of an exploratory laparotomy); (B) The midline of the fascia between the two heads of the rectus is incised; (C) The rectus is detached from the superior surface of the rami but left attached anteriorly. Hohmans are used for exposure of the superior rami along the brim to the SI joint. A malleable retractor protects the bladder
264
Figures 22.5A to C: (A) The iliac portion of the ilioinguinal incision on a model; (B) The iliac portion of the ilioinguinal incision on a cadaver (full ilioinguinal done); (C) Exposure of the iliac crest
The midline incision is most frequently used as an extension of an exploratory laparotomy performed by the general surgeons to treat intra-abdominal pathology. More commonly, a Pfannenstiel approach is performed. The incision for the Pfannenstiel approach begins 1 cm above the symphysis pubis and is ~10 cm in length avoiding the center of the skin crease (Fig. 22.4A). A critical component of the exposure is to maintain the rectus abdominis attachment to the rami anteriorly. Adequate visualization and reduction of the fracture can be performed with the rectus attached. If the muscle insertion is detached during the approach, patients may have postoperative pain. Frequently, one head of the rectus is traumatically disrupted and requires repair to the remaining rectus as well as reattachment to the distal insertion. Deep to the skin layer, the fascia covering the two heads of the rectus is identified. The midline can be identified by noting a chevron V pattern of the muscle fibers (Fig. 22.4B). The crossing of the two sides of the fibers guides the surgeon to the midline between the two heads of the rectus. If muscle is seen, then the incision is angled to try and stay between the two heads of the rectus. Once these are separated, the rectus can be cleared from the superior portion of the rami while maintaining its attachment anteriorly. The superior ramus attachment of the rectus is released initially with an electrocautery medially and then using a periosteal elevator laterally. The superior portion of the rectus insertion is released on each side of the symphysis pubis. Hohman retractors are used beneath the rectus to help improve the exposure. A malleable retractor is used to hold back the bladder for exposure and to prevent injury.
Alternatively, laparotomy sponges can be packed between the symphysis pubis and the bladder, providing both retraction and protection of the bladder.
 
POSTERIOR RING INJURIES
 
Sacroiliac Joint Dislocations
The anterior approach is performed with the patient in the supine position. The leg is draped free to enable the surgeon to flex the hip and relax the psoas muscle and to 265manipulate the leg with traction and rotation to help reduce the injury. The surgical incision utilized is the iliac portion or upper window of the ilioinguinal incision (see Figs 20.3J, 22.5A to C and 22.6). This incision is placed from the anterosuperior iliac spine to the point where the crest begins to fall away posteriorly and can no longer be easily palpated. The dissection is taken down to the iliac crest. The tendinous portion between the abdominal musculature and the abductors is incised. No muscle should be cut during this approach. Often there is abdominal muscle overhang that will be transected if the surgeon cuts straight to the crest. It is better to approach the crest somewhat laterally and inferiorly through the tendinous fascia between the abductors of the hip and the abdominal muscles that attach on the iliac crest. Using this technique, the muscle is not damaged, and the closure can more easily and securely performed. This is especially important in very thin patients who will complain if they have a prominent iliac wing and their “love handles” have not been properly restored. Once the crest is exposed, the iliacus and iliopsoas are raised from the inner table of the ilium from the crest to the sacroiliac joint. Once the sacroiliac joint is palpated anteriorly, careful dissection is required to cross over the remaining ligaments of the sacroiliac joint and gain access to the sacrum. The L5 nerve root is ~2 to 3 cm medial to the sacroiliac joint superiorly. As one moves inferiorly on the sacrum, the L5 nerve root crosses the sacroiliac joint (Fig. 22.2A).
As a result of these anatomical relationships, careful dissection on the sacrum is required to prevent damage to the L5 nerve root. Once 2 cm of the sacrum is exposed, a sharp Hohman retractor can be gently hammered into the sacrum, allowing retraction and excellent visualization of the sacroiliac joint. The nerve root is not normally exposed and traction with a Hohman of the L5 nerve root must be minimized to prevent a L5 nerve palsy.
 
FRACTURE STABILIZATION
 
Pubic Symphysis Diastasis
The method of fixation can be either an external fixator or internal fixation with a plate. External fixation can be successful but is associated with the risk that a missed posterior disruption will lead to posterior pelvic deformity (see Figs 20.4 and 20.7). Another problem with external fixation is pin tract infections and skin necrosis in obese patients. Finally, patient acceptance of external fixation is not good.
 
Pubic Ramus Fractures
Alternatively, the Pfannenstiel incision can be extended into a modified Stoppa approach as needed to apply a plate across even high ramus fractures.5 Using the modified Stoppa approach, a plate can be placed from one sacroiliac joint all the way around the symphysis to the opposite sacroiliac joint. The Stoppa approach allows plating along the inside of the pelvis as well as from the ramus to the quadrilateral surface (SI joint). This technique is used when there is a posterior injury with greater than 1.5 cm of diastasis of the ramus fracture, indicating that the iliopectineal fascia has been disrupted. Disruption of the iliopectineal fascia leads to greater instability of the ramus fracture, and therefore surgical stabilization is indicated.
 
POSTERIOR RING INJURIES
 
Sacroiliac Joint Dislocations
Once anatomical reduction is achieved visually, palpable and radiographically on the inlet, outlet, AP, and lateral views, iliosacral 266screws are the primary form of fixation (please see chapter on iliosacral screws). Although technically demanding, iliosacral screws can be placed from the anterior approach and is the author's preferred method. This is aided by elevation of the pelvic region with blankets utilized to elevate the patient off the radiolucent operating table. Because the sacroiliac joint is exposed, placement of two plates across the joint is relatively straight forward. Either 4.5 or 3.5 mm plates can be used and should be positioned at ~90 degrees to each other. The best bone in this region is along the pelvic brim, and a three hole plate with one screw in the sacrum and the other two in the ilium along the brim achieves the best fixation. The surgeon has to remember that the sacroiliac joint is oriented obliquely in a medial direction ~15 degrees.9 Therefore, to prevent the screws from going into the joint, the angle of the screws has to be adjusted appropriately. Once the anteroinferior plate is in place, a second plate can be added in a more posterosuperior location. This plate is oriented in a plane ~90 degrees to the first plate. Again, one screw should be placed in the sacrum and two in the ilium (Fig. 22.2B). Using a 2 hole plate or placing the plates parallel is not recommended. There are special plates that have been developed for this area; however, their clinical usefulness over the described construct has not been proven.
 
CLOSURE
In the Pfannenstiel approach the superficial and deep fascia are closed by a running 0 vicryl followed by two O subcutaneously and staples in the skin. We routinely place a large Hemovac in the space of Retzius (behind the symphysis).
The closure for the anterior approach is similar with a drain in the iliac fossa and a running vicryl is used to bring the abdominals over the crest to the insertion of the abductor muscles.
 
Tips and Pearls
  • External fixation pins are placed through a pilot hole in the iliac crest and driven between the inner and outer tables of bone.
  • A reasonable reduction of an unstable posterior pelvis may be obtained by a combination of traction, either in full extension or flexed up to ~45 degrees, along with compression in the posterior part of the pelvis.
  • Maintain the rectus attachment to the rami anteriorly during the Pfannenstiel approach.
  • When placing intramedullary ramus screws, an obturator oblique fluoroscopic view with a cephalad tilt allows the corridor of bone to be visualized where the screw can be placed safely.
  • The anterior approach for posterior pelvic instability is indicated if there is a posterior crush injury to the soft tissue that prevents a posterior approach, if the patient has multiple trauma and cannot be placed in the prone position, and if there is an iliac wing fracture that is anterior to the sacroiliac joint.
  • The posterior approach for posterior pelvic instability is indicated in sacral fractures and in crescent fractures where the fracture line is primarily posterior to the sacroiliac joint, as well as if decompression of nerve roots is required.
  • An occasionally helpful technique for reduction of the sacroiliac joint when the symphysis is disrupted is manipulation of the symphysis with the Jungbluth clamp.
  • Another trick is using a Farabeuf clamp on the iliac wing to manipulate the rotation of the hemipelvis as well as compress the sacroiliac joint.
  • In general, reduction of the posterior pelvic injury should precede reduction of an acetabular fracture or the anterior pelvic injury. Starting the reduction anteriorly, the surgeon must be aware that a few millimeters or degrees of malreduction anteriorly can lead to more than a centimeter displacement posteriorly.
  • Unstable posterior injuries require internal fixation.267
  • External fixators can be used in the hemodynamically and mechanically unstable pelvic injury patient as a temporary life-saving device.
  • External fixators can be used with relatively stable (i.e. no vertical migration) posterior injuries (i.e. open book pelvis), although the author prefers a symphyseal plate. It is the treatment of choice when an internal rotation deformity of the hemipelvis causes greater than a 20 degree internal rotation deformity or greater than 1 cm leg length discrepancy, or when a rami fractured piece protrudes into the bladder or vagina.
  • Stability by physical exam is determined by the compression test.
  • Radiographic instability is diagnosed when there is greater than 5 mm of displacement of the sacroiliac joint, iliac fracture, or sacral fracture (a gap rather than impaction). Remember, the pelvic injury can be minimally displaced but can be grossly unstable, so a combination of physical and radiographic exams needs to be performed to determine stability.
  • The inferior sacroiliac ligaments are most important for stability and should be viewed on the CT scan prior to determining instability (i.e. superior cuts of the CT scan can show widening of the sacroiliac joint; however, inferior cuts show an anatomically reduced sacroiliac joint).
  • Nonoperative treatment for pelvic injuries includes sacral impaction injuries, isolated rami fractures, or avulsions with less than 1 cm of displacement. A weekly AP X-ray exam for 4 weeks is indicated to ensure no further increase in deformity.
  • Operative indication for symphysis diastasis is 2.5 cm of widening. Widening less than this may be fixed if there is a posterior injury. Be aware of a missed completely unstable posterior pelvic injury.
  • A posterior external fixation frame (C-clamp) may give better compression posteriorly but is contraindicated in cases where the iliac fracture is anterior to the sacroiliac joint.
  • Leave the rectus abdominis attached to the pelvis when plating the symphysis pubis. Never debride the symphyseal cartilage.
  • If stable pelvic fractures have greater than 20 degrees internal rotation of the hemipelvis or greater than 1 cm of leg length discrepancy, or if the rami fracture is impinging on the bladder or vagina (tilt fracture), operative fixation is indicated.
  • Most rami fractures are treated conservatively. Those with greater than 1.5 cm of displacement with an unstable posterior injury are treated operatively due to disruption of the iliopectineal fascia.
  • The main complication of iliosacral screw placement is an L5 nerve root injury due to the guide pin, drill bit, or screw being placed too anteriorly so the pin exits and reenters the sacrum in the sacral ala area, damaging the L5 nerve root.
  • The most important component to the outcome of pelvic injuries is the preoperative nerve exam. Secondarily associated injuries and quality of reduction are also important.
 
Postoperative Management
The rehabilitation of patients with completely unstable pelvic injuries is similar to that following the fixation with iliosacral screws (chapter 20) with touchdown weight bearing for 8 weeks on the affected side. After 8 weeks, the patient may begin weight bearing as tolerated with range of motion and resistance exercises. Patients with bilateral injuries are limited to wheelchair transfers for 8 weeks. Most patients mobilize on the intact side and use crutches or a walker.
 
Complications
The complications are similar to those described in the chapter 20. Those complications that are unique to the anterior approach include L5 nerve root palsy and the lateral 268femoral cutaneous nerve injury (30%).10 Understanding the anatomy and decreasing the time and the amount of traction will limit these complications. Flexing the hip can relax the psoas muscle increasing the exposure. Hohmans in the sacrum should not be pulled on, but remain vertical to hold the soft tissue back (different width Hohmans are required with the wider ones being use more superiorly where there is less concern for the L5 nerve root). Careful evaluation of the soft tissue to prevent untimely incisions through damaged tissue or in creases of obese people can reduce infections.
 
Literature
The literature on unstable pelvic injuries in general has been described in chapter 20. The outcomes specific for the anterior approach with plating are few but are similar to the more standard iliosacral screws.10-13 The concerns for the L5 nerve root and less clamping options for reduction of the posterior injury remain.
 
Illustrative Case
Thirty-nine-year-old presented to an outside hospital after a severe MVA. The patient suffered an isolated “wind swept” pelvic deformity (Figs 22.6A to C). The CT scan showed the classic internal rotation of the left hemipelvis through a sacral fracture and an external rotation deformity through the right SI joint (Figs 22.6D and E). The patient had iliosacral screws placed posteriorly with the patient in the prone position correcting the vertical translation but not correcting the rotational deformities (Figs 22.6F and G). The flexion of the left hemipelvis caused sitting and lying imbalance and leg length discrepancy. The external rotation of the right hemipelvis and the internal rotation of the left hemipelvis caused the patient to feel “crooked” and that she was walking “sideways”. She also had disabling pain in the SI joint area posteriorly. Performing the anterior approach initially on the right and external fixator would have helped reduce these rotational deformities. The patient presented to the author one year out with the above complaints and he first removed all 4 iliosacral screws hoping to improve the pain and possibly live with the deformity (Figs 22.6H to J). The patient was no better 3 months postoperative. One and a half years after the original surgery, bilateral sacral osteotomies through bilateral iliac portion of the ilioinguinal anterior approach with the bone segment taken out of the right and placed in the left sacral osteotomy site. Bilateral superior and inferior rami osteotomies were performed to help mobilize the two hemipelvis. The two femoral distractors were used to reduce the windswept deformity. One femoral distractor had one pin just lateral to the right SI joint and the other just lateral to the left SI joint. After the osteotomies, this distractor was used to internally rotate the right hemipelvis and externally rotate the left hemipelvis without distracting or causing diastasis of the sacral osteotomy sites. The other distractor used the same right pin and the left pin was placed along the quadrilateral plate into the ischium on the left. This created a vector to externally rotate and extend the hemipelvis eliminating the sitting and lying imbalance and leg length discrepancy (Fig. 22.6K). After reduction of the pelvis, two iliosacral screws were placed across both sacral osteotomies. This was technically more difficult due to the sacral dysmorphism (lumbarization of the S1). Fixation of the bilateral superior and inferior rami osteotomies was by a 10 hole reconstruction plate with two screws on both sides of the osteotomy site. Postoperatively, the patient immediately felt like she was balanced (Figs 22.6L to N). The patient was transfer to wheelchair only for 3 months. After 3 months, the patient was weight-bearing as tolerated with resistive exercises. At two year follow up, the patient was without pain, without symptoms, and felt like she was balanced (Figs 22.6O to Q). Routinely, at one year the illiosacral screws are removed. In her case, she refused because she was pain free, balanced, and back to work. 269
Figures 22.6A to Q:
270
Figures 22.6A to Q: (A to C) AP, inlet, outlet view of a 39-years-old involved in a MVA suffering a windswept pelvic deformity with a right SI joint disruption and a left sacral fracture. Notice the sacral dysmorphism (lumbarization of S1 body); (D and E) 2 D CT scan showing the external rotation of the right hemipelvis and internal rotation of the left hemipelvis (windswept); (F and G) Postoperative AP and outlet view showing reduction of the vertical translation but failure of rotational reduction (an anterior approach to the right hemipelvis and an external fixator anteriorly would have helped reduce this deformity); (H to J) AP, inlet, and outlet view after one year from the surgery and after the hardware was removed. The patient had presented with pain, sitting and lying imbalance, and a feeling she was “crooked”; (K) At the time of the surgery, bilateral iliac portions of the ilioinguinal and a Pfannenstiel approach were performed. Bilateral superior and inferior rami osteotomies and bilateral sacral osteotomies were performed to mobilize both hemipelvis. Two femoral distractors were used to reduce the hemipelvis: one to rotate the right hemipelvis internally and the left hemipelvis externally without diastasis, and the second to extend and externally rotate the left hemipelvis correcting the sitting and lying imbalance and the leg length discrepancy. A wedge of bone was removed from the right side sacral osteotomy and placed into the left sacral osteotomy essentially internally rotating the right and externally rotating the left hemipelvis; (L to N) AP, inlet, and outlet view postoperatively showing the reduction of all the rotational deformities restoring sitting and lying balance and leg lengths; (O to Q) AP, inlet, and outlet view 2 years postoperative without pain and refusing to have the iliosacral screws removed
References
  1. KellamJ. The role of external fixation in pelvic disruptions. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1989;241:66–82.
  1. DicksonKF, MattaJM. Skeletal deformity following external fixation of the pelvis. J Orthop Trauma. 2009;23(5):1222–5.
  1. DicksonKF, FrigonVA. Open reduction internal fixation of a pelvic malunion through an anterior approach: a case report. J Orthop Trauma. 2001;15:519–24.
  1. MattaJM. Anterior fixation of rami fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:88–96.
  1. ColeJD, BolhofnerBR. Acetabular fracture fixation via a modified Stoppa limited intrapelvic approach: description of operative technique and preliminary treatment results. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1994;305:112–23.
  1. MattaJM, DicksonKF, MarkovichGD. Surgical treatment of pelvic nonunions and malunions. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:199–206.
  1. Rout MLJr, SimonianPT, GrujicL. The retrograde medullary superior ramus screw for the treatment of anterior pelvic ring disruptions. J Orthop Trauma. 1995;9:35–44.
  1. MattaJM, TornettaP III. Internal fixation of unstable pelvic ring injuries. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1996;329:129–40.
  1. EbraheimNA, LuJ, BivaniA, YeastingRA. Am J Orthop. 1986;25(10):697–700.
  1. LeightonRK, WaddellJP. Techniques for reduction and posterior fixation through an anterior approach. CORR. 1996;329:115–20.
  1. RagnarssonB, OlerudC, OlerudS. Anterior square plate of SI disruption 2-8 years follow up of 23 consecutive cases. Acta Orthop Scan. 1993;64(2):138–42.
  1. SembaR, YasukawaK, GustiloR. Critical analysis of results of 53 Malgaigne fractures of the pelvis. J Trauma. 1983;23:535–7.
  1. HsuJR, BearRR, DicksonKF. Open Reduction of Displaced Sacral Fractures: Techniques and Results.Sacral fractures. Orthopedics. 2010;33(10):730

Open Reduction and Plate Fixation for Acetabular Fractures: An Overview23

Frankie Leung
 
Introduction
Acetabular fractures can be caused either by high-energy trauma (e.g. automobile collision, fall from height, etc.) in younger patients or as an osteoporotic fracture in older patients. In the past skeletal traction in bed was widely practiced. The management of acetabular fractures has evolved in recent decades. Nowadays nonoperative management with traction is only considered in minimally displaced fractures or in associated both column fracture type when a secondary congruity is maintained. Most displaced fractures will require surgery (Table 23.1), which includes a good surgical approach to expose the fracture, a good reduction of the articular surface as well as a stable internal fixation to facilitate rehabilitation.
As in other fracture surgery, a thorough understanding of the fracture pattern and careful preoperative planning is crucial in deciding surgical success (Table 23.2).
Table 23.1   Indications for fixation in acetabular fracture
  1. Acetabular fractures with hip joint instability and/or incongruity
  2. Loose body or obstructive soft tissue in the hip joint associated with acetabular fracture
  3. Fracture displacement in the weight-bearing dome area
  4. Both-column fracture
  5. Loss of congruity between femoral articular surface and articular surface of the acetabulum in any of the three radiographic view
  6. Progressive sciatic nerve deficit following closed reduction
  7. Associated vascular injury requiring repair
  8. Ipsilateral femoral neck fracture
Table 23.2   Principles of surgical reduction and fixation of acetabular fractures
  1. Detailed radiographic assessment and understanding of the fracture pattern
  2. Selection of surgical approaches
  3. Appropriate Reduction methods, including traction, reduction clamps, etc
  4. Correct placement of interfragmentary screws
  5. Application of reconstruction plates
Letournel described a comprehensive classification system, which helps surgeons to 272understand the fracture and to decide on surgical management. Hence, a good radiological assessment from anteroposterior and oblique radiographs, as well as computer tomography with 3D reconstruction is mandatory. The surgical approaches have been described in details by Letournel. It is strongly advisable that surgeons should learn and practice these approaches in specific fracture courses before they operate on their patients.
Acetabular fractures involve a major articulation in the human body. The goals of surgery are precise reduction of the articular surface and restoration of the hip joint stability. Afterwards a stable fixation allowing early hip joint motion is necessary and this is often achieved by screw and plate fixation. In fact, the radiological and clinical results correlate closely.
 
Surgery
 
SURGICAL APPROACH
Surgical approach is decided by the injury pattern. In case both columns are fractured, the column which is more displaced is approached first. Extensile or, simultaneous or sequential combined approaches may be needed. For a posterior injury, a posterior approach is used and is described here.
The patient is put in a prone or lateral position with the affected side up. A Kocher Langenbeck approach gives a good exposure of the whole posterior surface of the acetabulum and the hip joint through the posterior wall fracture (if present) (Fig. 23.1).
The fascia lata is incised and the gluteus maximus muscle split in line with the incision (Fig. 23.2).
The sciatic nerve is identified and protected by a sciatic nerve retractor (Fig. 23.3). The hook of the retractor is placed in the greater sciatic notch. The quadratus femoris should be preserved to avoid damage to the blood supply of the femoral head. The posterior capsule is usually torn from the injury. Otherwise, it should be incised at the acetabular rim to expose the fracture.
 
REDUCTION TECHNIQUES
Fracture reduction requires an understanding of the pattern of fracture displacement. The displaced structure is the ischial and pubic segment, which rotates around the pubic symphysis. Moreover, there is rotation around an axis that runs through the fracture plane. Hence, the posterior displacement is much greater than the anterior one (Figs 23.4A and B).
Figure 23.1: The skin incision (in blue) runs in line with the femur and, at the tip of the greater trochanter (in light blue), turns towards the posterior inferior iliac spine (red circle)
273
Figure 23.2: The fascia lata is incised and gluteus maximus muscle split in line with the incision
Figure 23.3: Sciatic nerve is identified and protected during the procedure
Figures 23.4A and B: Ischial and pubic segment rotates around the pubic symphysis. There is also rotation around an axis that runs through the fracture plane. The posterior displacement is much greater than anterior
274
Figure 23.5: Posterior column is fixed using a short plate near the sciatic border. A second contoured 3.5 mm reconstruction plate is placed above the wall fragments along the acetabular rim
In order to de-rotate the distal fragment, a Schanz screw is placed in the ischium. Reduction is done with special pelvic reduction clamps. Palpation through the greater sciatic notch is done to confirm the correct reduction of the anterior column.
 
PLATE APPLICATION
The fixation can be done with a short 3.5 mm reconstruction plate placed near the sciatic border. Afterwards the posterior wall fragments can be reduced and fixed with lag screws. Another contoured 3.5 mm reconstruction plate is placed above the wall fragments along the acetabular rim to further stabilize the fracture (Fig. 23.5).
A meticulous layered closure of the surgical wound should be done afterwards. Early hip joint motion should be started afterwards. Nonweight bearing walking can be started soon after the surgery, progressing to full weight bearing at 8 weeks.
 
Complications
Specific complications of the Kocher-Langenbeck approach are sciatic nerve palsy and heterotopic ossifications. Complications of the ilioinguinal approach are damage to the femoral vessels and the femoral nerve, as well as the lateral cutaneous nerve of thigh. Avascular necrosis of the femoral head can occur after both approaches, but has to be differentiated from wear of the femoral head due to friction. Any hardware in the joint can also lead to rapid articular destruction.
 
Results
Good reduction of an acetabular fracture is the most important factor that correlates best with a satisfactory clinical result. In general, the percentage of satisfactory results increases with the level of surgical experience. In experienced hands, the results of acetabular surgery can reach 80 to 90% excellent or good results. According to Matta, fractures must be reduced to a displacement of 3 mm or less, in addition to congruent reduction of the femoral head with the weight-bearing dome of the acetabulum, to achieve a satisfactory clinical result. Unsatisfactory results with persistent pain and disability are expected in displaced fractures crossing the weight-bearing dome in which congruency cannot be achieved.275
 
Illustrative Case
 
CASE 1
The patient was a 37-year-old manual laborer who fall off from height and suffered a fracture of right acetabulum (Figs 23.6A to E). A detailed assessment of the radiographs and CT revealed that the fracture was a transverse plus posterior wall fracture. The displacement of the posterior column was much greater than the anterior column. The logical surgical approach was posterior satisfactory acetabular reconstruction could be performed (Figs 23.7A to C).
Figures 23.6A to E: (A) Anteroposterior radiograph showed that both iliopectineal and ilioischial lines are disrupted; (B) Iliac oblique radiograph showed a disrupted posterior column; (C) Obturator oblique view showing fractured anterior column with slight displacement; (D) 3D reconstruction of CT scans showed a comminuted fracture of the posterior wall in addition to the column fracture; (E) Fracture of the anterior column and a minimally displaced anterior wall fracture
276
Figures 23.7A to C: (A) Postoperative radiograph showing reconstruction of the acetabulum; (B) Additional hook-plates applied to stabilize the comminution of the sciatic border; (C) The anterior column fracture remained undisplaced
Figures 23.8A and B: (A) Anteroposterior radiograph showing disruption of the iliopectineal line and an intact ilioischial line. The iliac wing is also fractured; (B) 3D reconstruction showing the fracture clearly
277
Figure 23.9: The skin incision
Figure 23.10: Iliacus muscle is elevated and inner table of ilium exposed all the way to the sacroiliac joint
 
CASE 2
A 67-year-old man fell from a ladder and sustained an anterior column fracture of his right acetabulum (Figs 23.8A and B). The use of ilioinguinal approach is the logical choice in this case.
The skin incision is shown in Figure 23.9.
The iliacus is elevated from the ilium, and the inner table is exposed all the way to the sacroiliac joint (Fig. 23.10). The femoral vessels and the femoral nerve are identified and the three windows of the ilioinguinal approach are prepared (Fig. 23.11).
 
Reduction and Fixation
A Schanz screw is inserted into the trochanteric region for application of lateral traction. With the femoral head retracted, the iliac crest fracture is first reduced and then the anterior column fracture can be reduced with the use of a collinear reduction clamp.
Figure 23.11: The femoral vessels and the femoral nerve are identified and the three surgical windows of the ilioinguinal approach are prepared
278
Figures 23.12A to C: (A) Postoperative radiograph showing restoration of acetabular joint; (B) Obturator oblique view showing a nice reconstruction of the anterior column; (C) Iliac oblique view showing the anterior column lag screw passing from the anterior inferior iliac spine to the posterior iliac crest
A long 3.5 mm lag screw can be inserted from the anterior inferior iliac spine towards the posterior iliac crest. Fixation of the iliac crest fracture and the anterior pelvic brim can be done with 3.5 mm reconstruction plates (Figs 23.12A to C).
Bibliography
  1. BaumgaertnerMR. Fractures of the posterior wall of the acetabulum. J Am Acad Ortho Surg. 1999;7:54–65.
  1. LetournelE. Acetabulum fractures: classification and management. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1980;151:81–106.
  1. LetournelE. The treatment of acetabular fractures through the ilioinguinal approach. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1993;292:62–76.
  1. HelfetDL, SchmelingGJ. Management of complex acetabular fractures through single nonextensile exposures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1994;305:58–68.
  1. JudetR, JudetJ, LetournelE. Fractures of the acetabulum: classification and surgical approaches for open reduction. Preliminary Report. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1964;46:1615–46.
  1. MattaJM, AndersonLM, EpsteinHC, HendricksP. Fractures of the acetabulum. A retrospective analysis. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1986;205:230–40.
  1. MattaJM, MehneDK, RoffiR. Fractures of the acetabulum. Early results of a prospective study. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1986;205:241–50.
  1. MattaJM. Operative treatment of acetabular fractures through the ilioinguinal approach: a 10-year perspective. J Orthop Trauma. 2006;20(1 Suppl):S20–9.

Reduction and Fixation Techniques in Acetabular Fracture Surgery: Posterior Approach24

Nikhil Shah, Henry Wynn-Jones, Anthony Clayson
 
Introduction
Acetabular fracture surgery is complex and requires extensive training and experience. A thorough knowledge and understanding of the anatomy of the acetabulum and vital soft tissue and neurovascular structures surrounding the acetabulum is required for successful management.
The aim of this chapter is to describe the principles of acetabular reduction and fixation techniques and our preferences. The subject matter is far too extensive to cover in a single chapter and the reader is referred to excellent textbooks by subject experts such as Letournel, Tile, Matta, Helfet, Mears and several others.
 
Posterior Approach
 
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
 
Goals and Timing of Surgery
The goals of treatment are anatomic reduction and stable fixation with early mobilization of the joint in order to achieve a good outcome whilst minimizing complications. It is important to counsel and consent the patient thoroughly of expected outcomes and risks. Damage to the articular cartilage, inadequate reduction of the fracture, and the trauma from extensive surgical dissection may result in less than optimal outcomes.
The goals of surgery may be different in elderly patients where an acceptable rather than anatomical reduction to restore continuity of the columns and its overall shape could be a reasonable goal. This will facilitate a future joint replacement although not every elderly patient will require a hip arthroplasty in the near future.
Willet et al have described that an anatomical reduction was more likely if surgery was performed within 15 days (elementary) and five days (associated patterns). An excellent/good functional outcome was more likely when surgery was performed within 15 days (elementary) and ten days (associated).
As far as possible, fixation should be achieved using a single approach. This becomes possible with early surgery. Occasionally, a second approach may be required at the same surgery or as a second stage a few days later to ensure accurate reduction of the entire fracture. This is more likely in complex fracture patterns in younger patients of where there is delay in fixation.280
Figures 24.1A to D: Instruments, reduction clamps and ball-spike pushers
 
Instrumentation and Facilities
It is best to perform this surgery where possible out of dedicated regional centers as outcomes are dependent on experience of the surgical team. Dedicated pelvic instrumentation and implant sets are manufactured by various different companies and the surgeon should be familiar with this. Different types of pelvic reduction clamps, bone forceps, and other specialized instruments are available on dedicated systems (Figs 24.1A to D). Similarly, long screws, long drill bits and straight and curved pelvic reconstruction plates are available in most systems. Recently introduced locking plates are very rarely needed but may be useful in osteoporotic bone. The ball-spike pusher is an extremely important tool and can be used with or without a spiked washer.
Special radiolucent fracture fixation tables can be quite expensive but where available can be very useful and are supplemented with devices to apply intraoperative longitudinal and lateral traction in the supine, prone as well as lateral position. Experienced assistants will facilitate smooth surgery. The leg can be draped free and radiolucent triangles or pillows can be employed to aid intraoperative hip flexion to relax iliopsoas muscles in supine position or kept under the thigh in the lateral position to help hip abduction and improve superior exposure of the iliac bone.
Apart from certain emergencies such as vascular injury and irreducible fracture dislocation of the hip and an open fracture, a thorough patient assessment should be conducted. The patient should be thoroughly assessed from an anesthetic point of view to ensure fitness for surgery. Routine DVT prophylaxis using mechanical and/or chemical prophylaxis is used. We routinely use Tranexamic acid and cell salvage wherever possible. Preoperative and postoperative antibiotic prophylaxis and indomethacin for prophylaxis against heterotopic ossification are also routinely implemented for acetabular fixations as is routine postoperative continuous passive motions.
Meticulous preoperative planning is imperative. It is worth spending time studying pelvic radiograms plus Judet views or 3D CT images and drawing the fracture lines on a plastic bone model to rehearse the surgical tactic and reduction maneuvers.
 
SURGICAL APPROACHES
Surgery to the acetabulum relies on adequate exposure performed without traumatizing additional soft tissue structures. The surgical approach should be planned based on the fracture pattern as well as on the surgeon's experience and knowledge of the anatomy which is often distorted.
281The Kocher-Langenbeck (KL) approach and the Ilioinguinal approaches have been our main workhorses for this type of surgery for many years. It is often possible to reduce fractures through a single approach utilizing additional screws passed from the back to the front or from the front to the back. We prefer to do anterior and posterior surgery, when required, in a sequential manner rather than simultaneously via a floppy lateral position, so that the full advantage of each approach and each position can be obtained.
 
REDUCTION AND FIXATION THROUGH THE POSTERIOR KL APPROACH
The Kocher-Langenbeck (KL) approach can be done in the prone position or in the lateral position. We prefer to use the lateral position due to familiarity because the posterior approach is also our routine approach for primary and revision hip arthroplasty. Also we believe access via the greater sciatic notch to palpate the quadrilateral plate to check the accuracy of reduction is easier. However, the reduction of displaced posterior column fractures may be easier in the prone position.
The patient should be suitably padded and pressure points should be protected. The leg is draped free from the iliac crest upto the knee or below. We prefer to do the “table tilt test” ensuring that the table can be tilted backwards or forwards as required by the surgeon to aid exposure, reduction and positioning of the image intensifier.
In the lateral position, the hip is kept extended and the knee flexed with the foot relaxed on a well-padded sterile covered Mayo trolley next to the surgeon in order to relax the sciatic nerve (Fig. 24.2).
A pelvic gown pack under the thigh / groin can act as a fulcrum to assist with hip distraction at the same time relaxing the abductors to allow superior access under the gluteus medius muscle.
Intraoperative traction can be applied in different hip positions. The weight of the femoral head may be an impediment to reduction in the lateral position but longitudinal and direct lateral traction with a Schanz screw directed from the lateral subtrochanteric area towards the lesser trochanter can counter this disadvantage. Lateral traction allows intraoperative hip distraction to remove debris and clear the joint of bone pieces. If a distal femoral pin has been inserted preoperatively we retain it and use it to apply longitudinal traction after isolating it during draping.
The KL approach has vital differences from a posterior approach utilized for hip joint replacement. The sciatic nerve is the key to the approach and should be protected at all times. This is therefore the priority step in developing the approach. Gluteus maximus tendon is routinely released from the posterior femur to relax the posterior soft tissue structures and avoid tension on the sciatic nerve.
Figure 24.2: Kocher-Langenbeck approach—hip extended knee flexed, lateral position
282
Figure 24.3: KL approach superficial dissection
The capsular attachments of the wall fragments have to be carefully preserved. Access to the hip joint is via the fracture and not via a capsulotomy.
The KL approach is indicated in posterior wall and posterior column fractures and certain T-type, transverse, and both-column fractures which require the posterior wall component to be reduced. Most other fractures can be treated either anteriorly or posteriorly depending on the experience of the treating surgeon. The area of the column extending from the ischial tuberosity to the greater sciatic notch can be directly visualized and the superior aspect of the acetabulum as well as the quadrilateral plate can be palpated.
Heterotopic ossification is a known risk and can be prevented by minimizing sub-periosteal dissection and damage to the gluteal muscle. A bipolar diathermy should be kept available if required in order to achieve hemostasis in close proximity to the sciatic nerve without causing thermal injury to the nerve.
The line of the skin incision extends from the posterior superior iliac spine upto the greater trochanter and then down the shaft of the femur (Fig. 24.3). The actual length depends upon the fracture anatomy as well as the size of the patient. The tensor fascia lata is split longitudinally. The gluteus maximus is also split in the line of its fibers.
There is a well-described incidence of sciatic nerve injury through the KL approach and therefore the nerve should always be identified and mobilized without causing excessive devascularization. Release of the gluteus maximus tendon from the femur helps to remove the tether and achieve retraction of the tissues without excessive traction on the nerve. The hip should be kept extended and the knee should be kept flexed. The sciatic nerve is identified and dissected from normal uninjured tissue into the zone of trauma closer to the fracture. The nerve is occasionally found to be incarcerated within fracture fragments and should be very carefully mobilized. The nerve is inspected for any contusion or laceration and this information should be documented. Excessive stripping or dissection of the sciatic nerve should be avoided to prevent devascularization.
The external rotators and the piriformis muscle are identified. It is possible to encounter tearing or damage to the external rotator tendons or the capsule, and on some occasions buttonholing of the fragment may be seen. The close relationship of the short external rotators to the sciatic nerve should be appreciated. The piriformis and short external rotator muscles are divided away from the insertion on the femur in order to preserve the blood supply through the branches of the ascending branch of the 283medial circumflex femur.
Figure 24.4: Division of rotators and sciatic nerve position
We prefer to place 2 ligatures away from the insertion of the rotators on the femur and divide the rotators between the 2 ligatures (Fig. 24.4). This also helps in repair later on. The quadratus femoris carries the blood supply to the femur and should be protected.
The short external rotators are mobilized upto the posterior edge of the column and the bursa is entered into. This allows the sub-periosteal plane to be developed to aid intra-pelvic palpation of the quadrilateral plate. If retractors are used in the greater and the lesser sciatic notch, they should be periodically removed and under no circumstances should excessive tension be exerted so as to protect the sciatic nerve.
The supra-acetabular portion of the iliac wing should be dissected extra-periosteally as far as possible. This may be required if there is a wall piece with superior extension or in cases of superior marginal impaction involving the weight bearing dome. Steinmann pins can be placed after retracting the gluteus medius in a posterior superior and anterior superior location. This helps in exposure and subsequent placement of the plate. Care should be taken to avoid vigorous retraction to protect the superior gluteal neurovascular bundle. Hip abduction using a sterile gown pack placed underneath the thigh will help superior exposure without excessive traction or retraction of the gluteus medius and therefore avoid neurovascular injury to the superior gluteal neurovascular bundle.
This exposure does seem to have a higher-risk of heterotopic ossification and meticulous lavage of the wound at regular intervals is required. It is important to avoid excessive periosteal stripping in the supra-acetabular portion when this technique is used in order to minimize the risk of heterotopic ossification. Any muscle that is obviously traumatised should be debrided and excised.
The approach can be combined with an extra-capsular greater trochanteric osteotomy to increase the superior exposure of the iliac wing. This also helps improve exposure of the anterior aspects of the supra-acetabular area to pass an intra-pelvic cerclage wire if required.
 
Posterior Wall Fractures
This may be in the form of a single large fragment or comminuted pieces and may be located directly posteriorly and inferiorly, direct posteriorly or postero-superiorly.
Lateral traction using a partially threaded Schanz screw or a femoral distractor can be used to distract the femoral head to obtain partial visualization into the acetabulum via the fracture without the requirement for capsulotomy (Fig. 24.5).284
Figure 24.5: Hip joint distraction using lateral traction via a Schanz screw
Direct longitudinal and lateral traction helps to distract the joint. The capsular attachments to the posterior wall fragments should be kept intact at all times as they form the main source of blood supply to the fractured pieces. Exposure into the hip joint should be via the fracture surface rather than via the capsule. This is a key and a vital difference between the KL approach and the posterior approach for THA.
The acetabulum can then be irrigated in order to flush out any minor tiny fragments or debris (Fig. 24.6). Any fragments that could prevent congruent reduction of the hip joint should be excised if it is totally devoid of soft tissue attachments; however major structural fragments can often be retained and reduced into place or occasionally used as bone graft. Unless the hip joint has already been dislocated and irreducible, we prefer not to further dislocate the hip joint in order to conduct this step. However, gentle re-dislocation of the hip for debridement of fragments within the joint has been described. Distracting the joint may also help give a clue to the accuracy of the reduction of a column fracture before the wall piece has been repositioned.
It is worth repeating that it is vital to avoid traumatizing or dividing the capsular attachments of these fragments. If the fragment is retracted superiorly, partial release of capsule may be necessary in order to mobilize the fragment and achieve accurate reduction. Placement of a suture into the soft tissue of the fragment may help retract the fracture away from the area of surgery.
Once the hip joint has been irrigated and congruently reduced and the posterior wall fragments suitably mobilized, the fracture surface itself can be cleaned gently without compromising their soft tissue attachments.
Figure 24.6: Hip joint distracted to clear out debris, marginal impaction is seen in close proximity
285
Figure 24.7: Elevation bone grafting of marginal impaction using femoral head as template
Figure 24.8: Bone grafting behind elevated fragment
Only soft tissues on the edge of the fracture and the direct surface can be removed.
Marginal impaction should be identified. This is similar to a depressed articular fracture where a piece of the articular cartilage and subchondral bone is driven into the cancellous bone of the posterior column. A clue to marginal impaction can be obtained via the CT scan. During surgery, if the articular cartilage of the acetabulum faces the surgeon, then that is the easiest clue to diagnose marginal impaction. This signifies poor prognosis for the fracture outcome and needs to be accurately reduced and elevated with bone grafting behind the elevated portion. Elevation can be performed using curved osteotomes. The line of cleavage should be at least a centimeter behind or away from the articular cartilage so that a thick portion of cancellous bone can support the articular cartilage. The reduced femoral head serves as a template (Fig. 24.7). Sequential curved osteotomes can be used in order to reduce marginal impaction as shown in the picture.
The gap can be then filled with cancellous bone obtained via a window from the greater trochanter mixed with artificial bone graft substitute as required (Fig. 24.8). If an osteotomy is not utilized, drill holes can be made in 4 corners in the form of a small rectangle. A cortical window is then elevated and a gouge and curettes can be used to obtain cancellous bone graft from within the mass of the greater trochanter.286
Figure 24.9: Reduction of wall fragment over the elevated marginal impaction fragments
This can be used to pack bone graft behind a marginal elevation. Once the marginal impaction has been reduced, we prefer to over pack this with bone graft in order to support it better.
The wall fracture fragments are then reduced onto the elevated marginal impaction area by placing the fragment directly into the gap (Fig. 24.9). Clearing away any obvious hematoma or infolded soft tissue will aid this maneuver. A ball spiked pusher with or without the spiked disk is very helpful during this stage to hold the reduction until a Kirschner wire is passed. Reducing the wall fracture over the marginal impaction then also helps to hold it in position. Temporary fixation can be obtained using K-wires. Definitive fixation can be obtained using a compression inter-fragmentary lag screw through the posterior wall fracture if the size of the fracture permits the same. If the fracture is very comminuted, we prefer to use spring plates.
A spring plate is fashioned out of a one-third tubular plate which is cut across its hole and the cut ends are then bent to act like a hook (Fig. 24.10). Fixation is obtained into the intact portion of the posterior column. The hooks then sit on the posterior wall fracture surface away from the rim of the acetabulum to avoid injury to the head (Fig. 24.11). Ideally, 2 plates which are placed at a right angle to each other seem to provide the best biomechanical configuration. Further fixation can be obtained by using a curved 8 to 10 hole 3.5 mm pelvic reconstruction plate that has been contoured over the posterior column to buttress the 2 spring plates.
Figure 24.10: Spring plate preparation
287
Figure 24.11: Spring plate application
Bending and contouring the pelvic reconstruction plate is an art. The first bend usually is quite acute and located over the cotyloid fossa in the inferior portion of the plate.
For a wall fracture, the plate should be under-contoured. In the superior extension, the plate may need to be twisted so that it fits along the posterior and the superior borders of the acetabulum (Fig. 24.12). The inferior screw is usually placed first starting from the cotyloid groove directed into the ischium. The screw should not be fully tightened. The plate should then be moved slightly so as to achieve the best possible fixation and buttressing of the spring plates (Figs 24.13A and B). The superior screw is then inserted into the plate making sure the position of the plate is ideal. Once these screws have been tightened, the remaining screws can be inserted. Usually, 3 screws on either side are sufficient and we usually prefer to use an 8- or a 10-hole curved reconstruction plate.
A second plate may be occasionally necessary if there is an extended posterior wall fracture or a posterior wall fracture combined with a posterior column (Fig. 24.14). The main difference is that a plate that is used for column fixation, or particularly if the fracture is transverse, should be over-contoured. It is important to ensure that the screws do not penetrate the joint. This can be done in the lateral position by keeping the direction of the screws away from the acetabulum. With experience, the surgeon will identify windows which are safe for the passage of screws.
Figure 24.12: Plate contouring and twisting
288
Figures 24.13A and B: Posterior wall fixation. Note the buttressing of the fracture and the hepring plates by strategie contouring and placement of reconstruction plates
Figure 24.14: Column reconstruction plate application
Once the screws have been passed, the hip joint should be moved through a full range of motion to ensure there is no obstruction to movement or grating sensation. Intraoperative imaging in multiple planes also helps to ensure that none of the screws are intra-articular. Thorough lavage should be given periodically during the surgery and also at the end.
If there is a superior extension of the fracture, we have found an extra-capsular greater trochanteric osteotomy very useful to improve superior exposure of the acetabulum (Fig. 24.15). The osteotomy plane is similar to a conventional trochanteric osteotomy as it passes through the bone. However, the exit of this osteotomy is extra-capsular in order to not disturb the blood supply which goes along the superior aspect of the neck to the femoral head. This not only gives exposure to the supra-acetabular portion of the iliac wing but exposure can be obtained as much as the anterior inferior iliac spine. This is also very useful to pass an intra-pelvic cerclage wire where the fracture obliquity permits the use of a wire to reduce the fracture and to fix it.
The anterior and posterior edges of the greater trochanter should first be identified. The deep surface of the gluteus medius is mobilized away from the gluteus minimus at 289the level of the femoral neck.
Figure 24.15: Greater trochanteric osteotomy
Figure 24.16: Completed extra-capsular greater trochanteric osteotomy
A curved cholecystectomy clamp can be used on the deep surface of the gluteus medius to serve as a guide. The osteotomy can be made directly with a saw but care should be taken to exit the osteotomy from the lateral surface of the greater trochanter to its medial surface in an extra-capsular fashion (Fig. 24.16). This helps in protecting the blood supply of the femoral neck and femoral head. The osteotomized fragment is then carefully and sharply dissected keeping intact capsule. Once it is retracted superiorly, excellent exposure of the superior acetabulum and the lateral surface of the ilium can be obtained. This is helpful in reducing superior fractures of the wall as well as treating marginal impaction located postero-superiorly.
Various different repair techniques are described to repair the greater trochanteric osteotomy. We prefer to predrill the osteotomy and repair it with partially threaded 6.5 mm cancellous screws using a washer. 4.5 mm cortical screws are stated to be equally effective. Tension band wire technique has also been described. The screws are passed from the tip of the greater trochanter towards the lesser trochanter to obtain purchase of both cortices. A Gigli saw has also been described to perform the osteotomy. Careful control and protection of the soft tissue is essential in this case. Non-unions of this osteotomy have been described in literature but we have not encountered this problem. After conducting the osteotomy, the trochanteric bed can also be used to 290harvest a small amount of bone graft. Care must be taken to avoid fragmenting the osteotomized fragment.
Figure 24.17: Reduction of the posterior column using two screws and the pelvic reduction forceps
Fractures of the posterior wall and column, although quite common, are often associated with poor prognosis. The hip will usually have been congruently reduced. Occasional residual incongruency because of intra-articular fragments may be present. Rarely the hip may be irreducible because of buttonholing of the femoral head through the soft tissues or soft tissue interposition. There is a well-described incidence of sciatic nerve injury after such injuries.
 
POSTERIOR COLUMN FRACTURES
A Kocher-Langenbeck approach in the lateral position is developed as already described for the posterior wall fractures. External rotational deformity and displacement of the posterior column can be corrected using a Schanz screw placed into the ischial tuberosity, taking care that the sciatic nerve is protected at all times in the hip extended-knee flexed position. The fracture may need to be initially distracted in order to achieve a reduction. The fracture surfaces are cleaned.
A useful reduction strategy is to place a screw on each side of the column fracture (away from the definitive plate position) and use a screw-holding pelvic reduction clamp such as a Farabeuf clamp or the Jungbluth clamp). As the clamp is tightened the fracture displacement is corrected and reduction achieved (Fig. 24.17). Translational and rotational displacement can also be corrected using a combination of these reduction maneuvers.
Palpation through the greater sciatic notch will help confirming that the posterior column fracture is reduced not just at the visible part of the fracture line but along its entire surface. Angled pelvic reduction clamps placed through the greater sciatic notch with care may also be useful to hold reduction of the anterior aspect of the posterior column fracture. Where the fracture line obliquity permits, a compression screw can be useful with a neutralization plate.
After the fracture has been reduced, initial fixation can be obtained using a smaller 3.5 mm pelvic reconstruction plate suitably contoured and positioned along the edge of the posterior column. In many situations, a second plate is very useful to achieve good compression fixation of the column fracture. 291
 
Results
In a recent meta-analysis of surgical treatment of acetabulum fractures, Giannoudis reported that about 75% and 80% of patients gained an excellent or good result at a mean of five years after injury with surgical management. Osteoarthritis occurred in approximately 20% of the patients. Other late complications, including heterotopic ossification and avascular necrosis of the femoral which were were present in less than 10%. However, only 8% of patients who were treated surgically needed a further operation, usually a hip arthroplasty. Factors influencing the functional outcome included the type of fracture and/or dislocation, damage to the femoral head, associated injuries and co-morbidity. These were considered outside the control of the surgeon.
Other factors such as timing of the operation, the surgical approach, the quality of reduction and local complications were directly under the surgeon's control.
The treatment of these injuries is challenging. Tertiary referrals need to be undertaken as early as possible, since the timing of surgery is of the utmost importance. It is important, to obtain an accurate reduction of the fracture through a single approach where possible for getting good outcome.
 
Illustrative Case
A 45-year-old male sustained a posterior column and posterior wall fracture of the left acetabulum following a road traffic accident (Fig. 24.18A). Note the superior extension of the fracture with dome fragment.
The fracture was fixed posteriorly using two plates. An extracapsular osteotomy of the greater trochanter was performed and subsequently fixed using two screws (Fig. 24.18B).
Figures 24.18A and B: Posterior wall and column fracture fixation
Bibliography
  1. BrumbackRJ, HoltES, McBrideMS, PokaA, BathonGH, BurgessAR. Acetabular depression fracture accompanying posterior fracture dislocation of the hip. J Orthop Trauma. 1990;4: 42–8.
  1. GiannoudisPV, GrotzMRW, PapakostidisC, DinopoulosH. Operative treatment of displaced fractures of the acetabulum—A meta-analysis. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2005;87-B:2-9.
  1. JudetR, JudetJ, LetournelE. Fractures of the acetabulum: Classification and surgical approaches for open reduction - Preliminary report. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1964;46:1615–46.
  1. KumarA, ShahNA, KershawSA, ClaysonAD. Operative management of acetabular fractures: A review of 73 fractures. Injury, Int J Care Injured. 2005;36:605–12.
  1. LetournelE, JudetR. ElsonRA (transed). Fractures of the acetabulum, 2nd edn. Berlin: Springer-Verlag,  1992.
  1. MadhuR, KotnisR, Al-MousawiA, BarlowN, DeoS, WorlockP, et al. Outcome of surgery for reconstruction of fractures of the acetabulum -the time dependent effect of delay. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2006;88-B:1197-203.
  1. MarvinTile, DavidHelfet, JamesKellam. Fractures of the Pelvis and Acetabulum – 3rd edn. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins,  5 May 2003.
  1. MattaJM. Fractures of the acetabulum: Accuracy of reduction and clinical results in patients managed operatively within three weeks after the injury. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1996;78: 1632–45.
  1. Michael RBaumgaertner. Fractures of the posterior wall of the acetabulum. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 1999;7:54–65.
  1. MiddlebrooksES, SimsSH, KellamJF, BosseMJ. Incidence of sciatic nerve injury in operatively treated acetabular fractures without somatosensory. Evoked potential monitoring. J Orthop Trauma. 1997;11:327–9.

Reduction and Fixation Techniques in Acetabular Fracture Surgery: Anterior Approach25

Nikhil Shah, Henry Wynn-Jones, Anthony Clayson
 
Anterior Approach
 
INTRODUCTION
The chapter deals with fractures that are mainly fixed through anterior approaches although there is some overlap. The general principles discussed are similar to chapter 24.
The aim of this chapter is to describe the principles of acetabular reduction and fixation techniques using the ilioinguinal approach and also the Stoppa approach which has recently gained in popularity.
 
Anterior Ilioinguinal Approach
This was developed and described by Letournel and often forms the workhorse in order to reduce and treat various different fracture patterns, such as, transverse fractures, anterior column, and both-column as well as T-type fractures. The advantage of this approach is that the abductor muscles are not injured and therefore the incidence of heterotopic ossification is minimal.
However, the major disadvantage is that most orthopedic surgeons are not familiar with this anatomy. The approach is developed through major neurovascular structures. There is limited direct visualization of the fracture pattern. The surgeon works through developed windows and the majority of the surgery is performed using palpation and aided by radiological imaging. Reduction can be difficult and a significant amount of experience is required to use this approach effectively. Also there is no direct visualization of the joint so that articular reduction is obtained indirectly by accurately reducing extra-articular bony fracture lines.
The posterior wall and posterior marginal impaction cannot be addressed through this approach, although some posterior column and transverse fractures can be reduced. An additional posterior approach may be necessary if there is a posterior wall or marginal impaction located posteriorly. It is possible to pass a screw from anterior to posterior into the posterior column in order to reduce both-column fractures or transverse fractures or T-type fractures through a single exposure. If the situation demands, we have no hesitation in performing a combined anterior and posterior exposure and we prefer this over an extensile iliofemoral or a triradiate exposure.
The surgeon should be familiar with the anatomy of the abdominal wall. It is not possible to describe that in detail in this chapter, but several excellent anatomy texts 294and Letournel's original description are available. Familiarity with the anatomy of the inguinal ligament is vital as well as knowledge of the neurovascular structures and the femoral sheath. The 3 abdominal muscles, external oblique, internal oblique, and transversus abdominis form the roof and the floor of the inguinal canal. The superficial and deep inguinal rings are important. The spermatic cord in males or the round ligament in females passes from the deep inguinal ring to the superficial inguinal ring. Deep to the inguinal ligament there is a lateral compartment which contains the iliopsoas muscle and the femoral nerve along with the lateral cutaneous nerve of the thigh. The medial compartment contains from lateral to medial, the femoral artery, the femoral vein, and lymphatic structures lying in the femoral sheath. Separating these 2 compartments is a thick distinct band of fascia referred to as the iliopectineal fascia which forms the key to the ilioinguinal approach. This vertical expansion extends along the pelvic brim. Careful identification and division of this band of iliopectineal fascia allows the surgeon to gain intrapelvic access for reduction and fixation.
Before embarking on such approaches, it is important that the acetabular surgeon is well trained in this approach using a combination of techniques such as closed supervised instruction and cadaveric dissection. Although some surgeons have described a floppy lateral position in performing this approach, we prefer to do this in the supine position. The table should allow the image intensifier to pass under the pelvis without difficulty. The skin incision is marked from the iliac crest posteriorly from the anterior superior iliac spine. It extends from the ASIS inferiorly following the inguinal ligament upto 2 fingerbreadths above the symphysis pubis (Fig. 25.1).
We prefer the superior extension of this incision to be slightly lateral to the iliac crest. This allows deeper dissection to be conducted through its fascial insertions avoiding cutting of the muscular structures directly. This minimize bleeding and helps in secure closure. After division of the subcutaneous fat, the fascial insertion on the iliac crest is identified. This is divided, and the iliacus muscle is mobilized from the inner table of the iliac wing using finger dissection or a Cobb elevator over a swab. Dissection is conducted in this manner upto the sacroiliac joint.
Figure 25.1: Ilioinguinal approach
Sub-periosteal dissection 295can be conducted over the sacroiliac joint with careful attention to protect the L5 nerve root on the ala of the sacrum. A moist swab can be left after this first or lateral window has been developed to achieve hemostasis while the other windows are being developed. A sterile gown pack under the knee in the supine position to flex the hip helps relax the psoas muscles to improve access through the first window of the ilioinguinal approach.
After dividing the skin in the inferior aspect, the external oblique aponeurosis is identified. The superficial inguinal ring is identified and the spermatic cord is mobilized. Non-traumatic, wide, flat corrugated slings can be kept around the spermatic cord to protect it. The inguinal canal roof is then opened from the superficial inguinal ring superiorly and laterally. The aponeurosis of the external oblique is incised parallel to the skin extending from the anterior superior iliac spine to the superficial inguinal ring with the help of a curved scissors. At least 1 cm of fascial layer should be kept intact inferiorly to achieve secure closure. The canal is thus de-roofed in this fashion. The spermatic cord and the round ligament are mobilized and kept protected within a sling.
The floor of the inguinal canal and the inguinal ligament from the pubic tubercle upto the anterior superior iliac spine are identified. The conjoint tendon in the floor of the canal is then identified and divided with the help of a controlled plunge maneuver using rounded blade. Finger dissection then helps to identify the iliopsoas compartment using a combination of finger dissection and sharp dissection. The leaf of the iliopectineal fascia is then identified. It is important to identify both surfaces of the iliopectineal fascia. On its medial surface, the femoral sheath is protected directly by the surgeon's finger or using a narrow right-angled retractor. Similarly, the lateral surface of the iliopectineal fascia is identified carefully. Lateral to this lies the femoral nerve and the iliopsoas which should be carefully protected. The iliopectineal fascia is traced upto the superior pubic bone.
Flexing the hip joint often aids in relaxing the psoas muscle and helps identification of the iliopectineal fascia without any tension on the psoas. The thickness of the fascia varies between young, muscular patients and elderly patients, and often it is a very thin flimsy layer. Extreme caution should be exercised before the band of fascia is divided ensuring that the femoral artery medially and the femoral nerve laterally are totally and completely protected in order to avoid catastrophic neurovascular injury intraoperatively. This is probably the most important step in developing this exposure. Division of the fascia is safely performed with the help of a scissors. Some blunt dissection in the intra-pelvic portion often helps to rupture the remaining fascia and achieve intra-pelvic exposure.
Occasionally, the corona mortis can lead to bleeding. If any obvious vessel is identified, it should be carefully ligated or diathermized prior to division. After dividing this fascia, deep dissection deep to the vessels is performed in order to mobilize the inner surface of the symphysis and the quadrilateral plate. A sling is then placed around the femoral sheath in order to protect the vascular bundle. The central window lies between the iliopsoas muscle laterally with the femoral nerve (protected in a sling) and the femoral sheath medially (also protected in a sling) (Fig. 25.2).
The deeper dissection can then be carried out medially directly over the superior pubic ramus. The posterior surface of the symphysis is exposed. The bladder should be protected at all times. The rectus fascia on the symphysis pubis can also be divided if greater medial exposure or contralateral exposure is required in certain fracture patterns such as a coexistent symphysis pubis disruption.
Three windows are thus raised (Fig. 25.3). The first window is lateral to the iliopsoas muscle, the second window lies between the iliopsoas and the femoral nerve laterally and the femoral sheath medially, and the third window is medial to the femoral sheath. The third window lies between the femoral sheath laterally and the rectus muscle medially. Some authors label the retropubic space as the fourth window.296
Figure 25.2: Slings protecting the psoas and femoral nerve, the femoral sheath and the spermatic cord
Figure 25.3: The 3 windows raised in an ilioinguinal approach—the Steinmann pins are on the sacral ala
The rectus muscle can be divided making this window continuous with the so-called fourth window or the retropubic window. Using a combination of retractors and digital palpation, work can be carried out through these 3 windows alternately. This helps in some visualization and reduction maneuvers as well as placement of instrumentation. The slings should be relaxed periodically to avoid excess traction of the neurovascular structures and intimal damage leading to arterial or venous thrombosis.
 
FIXATION THROUGH THE ANTERIOR ILIOINGUINAL APPROACH
 
Anterior Wall Fractures
Isolated fractures of the anterior wall are quite rare. Usually, they are associated with other complex patterns. Reduction and fixation is achieved through the windows of the 297ilioinguinal approach. A ball-spike pusher can be used to directly manipulate the fracture fragment to reduce it. K-wires are used for provisional fixation. Stabilization can be achieved using a plate along the pelvic brim which buttresses the fracture down. Screws are placed at either end of the plate. Direct fixation of the wall fragment is usually difficult because of the chance of intra-articular penetration of the screw.
A Smith-Petersen approach can also be used to achieve fixation of the anterior wall fractures. Through this approach, an arthrotomy can also be performed. The femoral head can be visualized and femoral head fractures can be fixed. The buttress plate will have screws at either end and there will be no screws positioned directly over the anterior wall fracture in order to avoid intra-articular penetration. Some anterior wall fractures may have extension into the quadrilateral plate. These can be fixed using the subinguinal approach or a Stoppa approach where direct plate positioning and fixation along the quadrilateral plate from the pubic ramus and exiting over the pelvic brim through the first window can be achieved. Purely fixing an anterior wall fracture which has a quadrilateral surface may not provide enough buttressing effect and there may be delayed displacement and protrusio of the hip joint. In such cases, direct application of the plate to the quadrilateral surface with screws passed in a perpendicular direction provides much greater biomechanical fixation.
 
Fractures of the Anterior Column
Anterior column fractures may be high or low. Usually, they have an extension into the iliac crest. There may be some additional comminution of the iliac wing. We prefer to fix these through an ilioinguinal approach. Some of these may have a posterior hemitransverse extension or may be part of a both-column fracture.
Some of these fractures can be comminuted and quite difficult to treat (Figs 25.4 and 25.5). The principles of fixation include progressing the reduction maneuvers from posterior to anterior, i.e. from the intact portion of the ilium to the fractured portions of the column correcting the external rotation displacement of the anterior column fracture as one progresses from back to front. The iliac fragments can be reduced either with the help of tenaculum reduction forceps or a Schanz screw inserted into the iliac crest used as a joystick to exert controlled internal rotation forces to bring the anterior column closer to the intact posterior column.
Figures 25.4A and B: Comminuted both column fracture with sacroiliac disruption
298
Figure 25.5: Axial CT of above fracture
The reduction is checked by the palpating finger inserted through the central window. K-wires are used to achieve provisional fixation. For larger fragments, using a single screw in each fragment and the screw holding reduction clamp is a very useful technique. Direct pressure from a ball-spike pusher can be a useful maneuver to effect the reduction. Once provisional fixation has been achieved, inter-fragmentary screws can be used to achieves stable fixation. This has to be supplemented using curved pelvic reconstruction plates, along the iliac crest and/or along the iliac fossa.
The steps in the reduction consist of reducing the high component of comminuted anterior column fractures first which are located posteriorly. The iliac crest is then manipulated using a Shanz screw and an internal rotation force is used to internally rotate the anterior column and approximate that to the posterior column, palpating the fracture surface through the central window using a finger. Iliac crest and iliac fossa plates which are slightly over-contoured can help to maintain the internal rotation and the reduction. A long contoured plate is then used to reduce and stabilize the anterior column fracture (Fig. 25.6). The quadrilateral plate is separately reduced and stabilized using the eccentric pelvic reduction clamp (Figs 25.7).
Application of lateral traction in the supine position using a Shanz screw within or below the greater trochanter can also help reduce the protrusio of the hip joint (Fig. 25.8). The quadrilateral plate has to be reduced with caution in order to avoid protrusio of the femoral head after fixation, particularly if the quadrilateral plate is a separate free-floating fragment, not attached to the low anterior column fragment. A spring plate is a useful technique to achieve stabilization; however, they can be quite difficult to contour. Also the forces of the hip joint may overcome any thin spring plates.
Therefore, a plate used along the quadrilateral surface on the inner portion of the brim of the pelvis is a very useful technique. This can be done using an ilioinguinal approach or a Stoppa approach as explained later. A plate can then be contoured from the pubic ramus along the quadrilateral surface and can be accessed via the first window. Curved pelvic reconstruction plates can be used on the quadrilateral plate in order to buttress it using screws directed from inside towards outside.
If the quadrilateral plate is also fractured, reduction is achieved using an eccentric pelvic reduction clamp with a ball-spike pusher to distribute the forces and avoid fragmentation. Externally, the clamp is positioned along the supra-acetabular area near 299the anterior inferior iliac spine.
Figure 25.6: Contouring the plate against the pelvic brim
Figure 25.7: Using the eccentric pelvic reduction clamp to reduce the quadrilateral plate
Figure 25.8: Lateral traction in supine position
After exposing the outer aspect of the anterior iliac crest, the inner limb is passed through the middle window or the medial window and positioned along the quadrilateral surface to achieve reduction.
It is important to ensure that screws are passed in the appropriate direction to avoid intra-articular penetration. Most of the work through the ilioinguinal approach is carried out through digital palpation and visualization can be difficult. There is a significant learning curve to develop the proprioceptive skills necessary to appreciate the various reduction maneuvers and then to check them with digital palpation. Similarly, a finger which is placed along the quadrilateral plate towards the ischial spine helps to get proprioceptive feedback, enabling appropriate direction of the column screw. This can be confirmed with image intensification. An oscillating drill is very useful to pass these long screws. 300
Figures 25.9A and B: Reduction progresses posterior to anterior, sacroiliac plate fixation performed, long posterior column screws through the anterior approach
Long screws can be passed from the anterior column towards the sacroiliac joint. Small cerclage wires can also be used to reduce very oblique fractures in the region of the ramus. Flexing the hip and relaxing the iliopsoas muscle can also allow the eccentric pelvic reduction clamp to be used. The long limb can be placed through the central or the medial window carefully on the quadrilateral plate. The short limb is placed on the outer table after releasing the fascia on the external aspect of the iliac crest. In this fashion, the quadrilateral plate can be reduced. However, excessive pressure of the eccentric pelvic reduction clamp may cause further comminution or fragmentation of the quadrilateral plate. Use of the spiked washer carefully helps in avoiding this pitfall.
If the fracture is very comminuted, fixation should proceed from posterior to anterior. The usual deformity is external rotation of the anterior column fracture and therefore a Shanz screw positioned into the iliac crest helps to apply internal rotation force in order to correct this deformity. Fractures into the iliac wing and exiting into the iliac crest can be reduced under vision directly using tenaculum forceps to manipulate the fracture fragments and the Shanz screw to correct rotation as well as displacement.
Definitive fixation is performed through a long curved pelvic reconstruction plate of 12, 14, or 16 holes placed along the pelvic brim (Figs 25.9A and B).
Some simple patterns of anterior column fracture can be dealt with using the first window of an ilioinguinal combined with a Stoppa approach. Isolated fixation of a pelvic brim ignoring the displacement of the quadrilateral surface may result in delayed displacement and protrusion. One can verify that the reduction is accurate using extra-articular alignment as a guide, e.g. after accurate reduction of the iliac crest level. It may be difficult to visualize the joint directly through this approach.
Some minimally displaced anterior column fractures or those fractures that are part of a transverse fracture may be fixed percutaneously using an anterior column screw. Another useful technique of reduction is to use a small 3.5 mm cortex screw into each fragment and use a Farabeuf screw-holding reduction clamp to achieve reduction followed by fixation.
 
The Transverse Fracture Pattern
The transverse fracture can be dealt with via an anterior ilioinguinal approach or a posterior approach depending on the area of maximum displacement.301
Figures 25.10A and B: Transverse fractures fixed through the posterior approach
The high transverse fracture or the transtectal fracture involves a weight-bearing dome of the acetabulum and is associated with poor prognosis. It is important to get an accurate reduction in this particular fracture pattern. There may be impaction or crushing of the dome. Some have described an extensile approach in the reduction of such fractures in order to correctly reduce the articular surface. Performing this fixation in the prone position using a posterior approach has also been described as gravity helps to reduce the anterior component of the fracture (Figs 25.10A and B).
A trochanteric osteotomy may be required to improve visualization when a posterior approach is used. It is important that the fracture is also reduced anteriorly and the palpating finger through the sciatic notch along the quadrilateral plate can be a useful guide to determine reduction anteriorly. Rotational deformity of the lower fragment can be corrected using a Shanz screw into the ischium combined with other maneuvers such as lateral traction and angled pelvic reduction clamp placed through the greater sciatic notch may also be very useful to achieve reduction anteriorly.
We have found osteotomy of the ischial spine (after protecting the sciatic nerve) extremely useful to correct the rotational deformity of the inferior fragment via the posterior approach, in delayed cases beyond 2 weeks.
Fixation can be achieved with the help of an over-contoured posterior column plate. A plate that is under-contoured will have a tendency to cause distraction at the anterior fracture surface resulting in a gap.
If a transverse fracture also has a posterior wall component associated with it, then 2 plates can be used with the plate buttressing the wall fracture being under-contoured and the plate fixing the column fracture will be over-contoured.
If an ilioinguinal approach is used, then the anterior component of the fracture can be stabilized. When using an anterior approach the derotation of the posterior component of fracture can be achieved using a blunt tipped bone hook through the central window or an eccentric pelvic reduction clamp with a spiked washer on the quadrilateral plate area. A posterior column screw is then used to stabilize the posterior component of the fracture.
In young patients when required, we prefer to use a combined anterior and posterior exposure, although that situation is rare. There should be little hesitation in appreciating the difficulty in reducing both sides of the fracture through a single approach, and particularly in younger patients, it may be better to perform a combined anterior and posterior exposure to allow accurate reduction.
A Stoppa approach or a subinguinal window can also be used to achieve direct reduction of the posterior component of the fracture and placing a plate under direct 302vision. Care must be taken when performing a fixation through the first approach, particularly in placement and the length of the screws so that reduction and fixation through the subsequent approach is not interfered with. Some authors have found a locking plate useful in such situations as they allow the insertion of shorter locking headed screws.
An alternative strategy is to fix the fracture posteriorly and to fix the anterior component using percutaneous anterior column screws. If an ilioinguinal approach is used to fix the fracture from the front, then a posterior column screw passed through the first window of the ilioinguinal approach can help to stabilize the posterior column component of the fracture. Alternatively, a direct reduction and plate fixation can be performed through a Stoppa subinguinal window.
The associated fracture patterns may be more difficult to fix. The posterior column and posterior wall fractures can be approached using principles described above. The prognosis is usually determined by the posterior wall component of the fractures. In such cases, the column fracture may occasionally be difficult to diagnose on the X-rays and scans and may be largely undisplaced. We find it easier to reduce and fix the column fracture first. This then serves as a stable foundation upon which the wall can be reduced and fixed. Once a column has been reduced, careful and gentle retraction of the wall fractures and lateral traction with distraction of the hip joint will allow inspection of the intra-articular portion of the reduction of the column fracture.
A plate that is positioned more posteriorly will help to stabilize the column fracture. The wall can then be reduced in standard fashion as described above and a second plate can be used, which is under-contoured in order to stably fix the wall fracture. Some of the posterior column fractures are quite oblique and they exit very superiorly into the greater sciatic notch. While mobilizing this corner of the column fracture, one can sometimes encounter torrential bleeding from the superior gluteal vasculature. Caution should be exerted when this happens. Ligaclips can be quite useful to control bleeding as is pelvic packing.
One should debride fracture hematoma and infolded periosteum in this superior spike extremely cautiously. If the column plate will interfere with the reduction of the wall fracture, then provisional fixation should be achieved using a combination of K-wires, lag screws, or screw-holding pelvic reduction clamps. Farabeuf reduction clamps can hold screws that are placed on either side of the fracture. Rotational deformity can be corrected using a Shanz screw into the ischial tuberosity. The Farabeuf clamp can also help with translational maneuvers and correct displacement in multiple planes. Usually, the exposure in this area is quite limited to permit satisfactory placement of the Farabeuf clamp, and again care should be exerted to avoid damage to the sciatic nerve. Once the column has been reduced and fixed, the posterior wall can be dealt with as explained previously. If a spring plate is going to be required, then the position of the spring plate has to be anticipated and planned so that the final placement of the second column plate will not interfere with positioning of the spring plate. The spring plates may be positioned first and the reconstruction plate may then overlap the spring plates.
A high transverse fracture pattern may be easier to deal using an anterior ilioinguinal approach. If, however, a posterior wall is fractured, then a posterior approach is essential.
 
T-type Acetabulum Fractures
These fractures are amongst the most challenging fractures to treat. This is a difficult fracture to treat and may have quite a poor prognosis. Surgical tactic therefore will depend highly on the experience of the surgeon and the individual situation. Accurate anatomic reduction is the key. There may be independent displacement and rotation of each component of the T fracture. The degree of displacement of the transverse component 303of the T fracture as well as the presence or absence of a posterior wall fracture will determine which approach is selected. There should be no hesitation in using sequential combined anterior and posterior approaches in whichever order if required to ensure that reduction is accurate, particularly in young patients.
Using a posterior approach and a trochanteric osteotomy may allow both components to be reduced through a single approach. Occasionally, intrapelvic cerclage wires can be quite useful. On some occasions, we have found the use of a triradiate approach as described by Dr Mears to be useful, but care should be exerted in doing this approach to avoid flap necrosis where the 3 limbs of the incision meet.
The area of greater displacement will dictate the approach. For example, the posterior fragment can be reduced and fixed through a posterior approach first. Digital palpation through the greater sciatic notch may help reduce the anterior component of the fracture. If satisfactory reduction is achieved, then a column screw may be all that is required. The posterior component of the fracture has to be reduced not only along the extra-articular portion of the column but palpation of the quadrilateral surface ensures reduction is maintained anteriorly as well.
Caution should be exerted passing the screws so that they do not interfere with the reduction of the other component of the fracture. Once the posterior component of the fracture is fixed, if the anterior component remains unstable or malreduced, then a sequential combined anterior approach should be followed. Often reduction becomes easier through single approach if surgery can be performed within the first 5 to 7 days, beyond which time it becomes increasingly difficult to achieve satisfactory reduction of both components of the fracture through a single approach.
 
Both-column Fractures
These can be quite comminuted fractures. There is no intact portion of the dome that remains in contact with the acetabulum. In elderly patients if secondary congruence has been achived conservative management is possible.
Our preference is to fix the majority of these fractures through the ilioinguinal approach. The surgical tactic becomes quite important. The reduction is usually performed posterior to anterior. On some occasions, there is an incomplete fracture going through the iliac wing and not exiting through the iliac crest. In order to allow for reduction, the fracture first has to be completed by performing an osteotomy of the incomplete fracture or plastic deformation.
Letournel has described a very typical triangular fragment of the iliac wing which may have an incomplete component with plastic deformation and therefore has to be completed using an osteotome before reduction and fixation can be achieved. The second typical fragment that Letournel describes is a triangular fragment located along the pelvic brim or the “keystone” fragment.
The posterior components of the column fracture affecting the iliac wing and crest are reduced and fixed first using the sacroiliac joint as a guide. This can be performed through the first window of the ilioinguinal approach while flexing the hip to relax the psoas muscle. Internal rotation forces are applied using a Schanz screw into the iliac crest as a joystick. Fragments are reduced using reduction forceps or two screws on each side of the fracture with a screw holding reduction clamp.
Provisional fixation is performed with the help of K-wires and definitive fixation with the help of lag screws, iliac fossa contoured pelvic reconstruction plates and iliac crest plates.
Once the anterior column has been reduced, the posterior column and quadrilateral plate are reduced. This can be quite challenging. As previously explained this can be done via an eccentric pelvic reduction clamp with a spiked washer through the central or medial window on the quadrilateral plate or under direct vision using the Stoppa 304modification / sub-inguinal window. The femoral head may be protruded into the pelvis and has to be reduced with appropriate lateral and longitudinal traction using a Shanz screw through the greater trochanter.
The posterior column fragment has to be derotated using the above maneuvers or using a bone hook with care. The blunt tipped bone hook is passed through the central window or the medial window with extreme caution and used to derotate the posterior column fragment onto the reduced anterior column.
Once these reduction maneuvers have been rehearsed, the anterior column is fixed definitively using a curved pelvic reconstruction plate over the pelvic brim. Anterior fixation is over the pubis and posterior fixation on the iliac bone in the vicinity of the sacroiliac joint. The central part of the plate is without any screws and serves to buttress down the reduced column. The screws in the anterior column need to be positioned so that the reduction of the posterior column is not interfered with. The posterior column and the quadrilateral plate are then reduced onto the anterior column and fixation can be achieved using a posterior column screw or occasionally a plate directly onto the quadrilateral surface through the Stoppa or the subinguinal window.
Where there is extensive comminution, one must accept that accurate reduction and fixation may not be possible. Under such circumstances, it is our preference to try and minimize the morbidity by achieving the most acceptable reduction possible through a single approach, usually, the anterior ilioinguinal approach. This leaves the posterior exposure territory intact. The overall shape of the acetabulum is restored and a subsequent delayed total hip arthroplasty can be performed, if required using a posterior approach through untouched territory.
In younger patients, so long as the articular surface is well reduced, some minor malreductions of the extra-articular portion of the iliac wing and the iliac crest may be acceptable.
 
The Stoppa Approach
More recently we have successfully used a Stoppa type approach (or it is modification after dividing one of the rectus muscles from the pubis) to develop the subinguinal window under the abdominal wall muscles and blood vessels to perform fixations of certain low anterior column fractures, pubic ramus fractures and combination injuries such as a combined symphysis pubis disruption or pubic ramus fractures. We have found this to have minimal morbidity and very helpful to reduce and fix the quadrilateral plate when it is displaced medically with a protrusion type deformity. When combined with the first window of an ilioinguinal approach, certain anterior column fractures can also be fixed.
It provides direct access to the quadrilateral plate and offers direct visualization of the true brim of the pelvis (Fig. 25.11). It is very useful when the femoral head is protruded through the pelvis and there is comminution in the lower aspect. The approach allows placement of the plate directly against the quadrilateral plate and pelvic brim and control the medially directed displacement (Fig. 25.12).
The ipsilateral leg is draped free and a sterile gown pack can be kept under the knee in order to flex the hip joint to relax the psoas. Flexion of the hip allows the tension on the neurovascular structures to also diminish and a better access can be gained. The approach is completely extra-articular. The joint cannot be visualized.
It can be done through a transverse Pfannenstiel incision centered over the midline about 2 cm superior to the symphysis pubis as well as a vertical lower abdominal midline incision. The lateral margin of the rectus abdominis and its insertion on the pubic tubercle define the third window of the ilioinguinal approach. The rectus muscle can be split vertically along the linea alba. The approach is purely extraperitoneal. It is important to mobilize the peritoneum and push it posteriorly.305
Figure 25.11: Stoppa approach—working deep to the rectus muscles and neurovascular bundle
Figure 25.12: Stoppa approach and plate fixation on the quadrilateral plate
The edges of the rectus can be tagged using sutures. The rectus insertion can be divided leaving a small cuff of tissue to facilitate repair. Malleable retractors of different widths need to be available. They can be used to protect the bladder which is pushed posteriorly.
The operating surgeon stands on the opposite side of the table in order to directly visualize the quadrilateral plate. The retractors are held by an assistant who stands on the ipsilateral side of the fracture or the opposite side of the surgeon. The corona mortis is an anastomotic blood vessel between the inferior epigastric or external iliac and the obturator vessels. In some patients, it can be quite prominent and can cause torrential bleeding. This is identified and must be carefully controlled using ligatures or ligaclips.
After the quadrilateral plate has been identified, the iliopectineal fascia can be divided along the true brim of the pelvis. The obturator nerve has to be protected. Care has to be again taken not to become inadvertently intraperitoneal. Posterior retraction should be performed with care to avoid damage to the lumbosacral plexus of nerves. The rectus needs to be carefully repaired at the end.306
 
Results
In a recent meta-analysis of surgical treatment of acetabulum fractures, Giannoudis reported that about 75% and 80% of patients gained an excellent or good result at a mean of five years after injury with surgical management. Osteoarthritis occurred in approximately 20% of the patients. Other late complications, including heterotopic ossification and avascular necrosis of the femoral which were present in less than 10%. However, only 8% of patients who were treated surgically needed a further operation, usually a hip arthroplasty. Factors influencing the functional outcome included the type of fracture and/or dislocation, damage to the femoral head, associated injuries and co-morbidity. These were considered outside the control of the surgeon.
Other factors such as timing of the operation, the surgical approach, the quality of reduction and local complications were directly under the surgeon's control.
The treatment of these injuries is challenging. Tertiary referrals need to be undertaken as early as possible, since the timing of surgery is of the utmost importance. It is important, to obtain an accurate reduction of the fracture through a single approach where possible for getting good outcome.
 
Illustrative Case
A 32-year-old male sustained a translectal transverse fracture of the left acetabular following a fall from height (Fig. 25.13A).
The fracture was approached through the ilioinguinal approach. An intrapelvic cerclage wire was used additionally to facilitate the reduction and fixation of the fracture (Fig. 25.13B).
 
Summary
The anterior approach is not familiar to most orthopedic surgeons and needs to be learnt thoroughly in order to perform this surgery. Through a single approach and with early surgery we have found that more than 80% of fractures can be treated with a single approach. The incidence of heterotopic ossification is less with this approach. Also the posterior territory remains intact in case a future THA is required. The Stoppa approach is fairly straightforward and in many cases obviates the need for an ilioinguinal approach.
Figures 25.13A and B: (A) Transverse fracture through anterior approach; (B) An intrapelvic cerclage wire
307It provides direct reduction and fixation of the quadrilateral plate. The neurovascular bundle should be handled with care.
Bibliography
  1. BrumbackRJ, HoltES, McBrideMS, PokaA, BathonGH, BurgessAR. Acetabular depression fracture accompanying posterior fracture dislocation of the hip. J Orthop Trauma. 1990;4: 42–8.
  1. GiannoudisPV, GrotzMRW, PapakostidisC, DinopoulosH. Operative treatment of displaced fractures of the acetabulum—A meta-analysis. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2005;87B:2-9.
  1. JudetR, JudetJ, LetournelE. Fractures of the acetabulum: Classification and surgical approaches for open reduction - Preliminary report. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1964;46:1615–46.
  1. KumarA, ShahNA, KershawSA, ClaysonAD. Operative management of acetabular fractures: A review of 73 fractures. Injury, Int J Care Injured. 2005;36:605–12.
  1. LetournelE, JudetR. ElsonRA (transed). Fractures of the acetabulum, 2nd edn. Berlin: Springer-Verlag,  1992.
  1. MadhuR, KotnisR, Al-MousawiA, BarlowN, DeoS, WorlockP, WillettK. Outcome of surgery for reconstruction of fractures of the acetabulum. The time dependent effect of delay. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2006;88(9):1197–203.
  1. MarvinTile, DavidHelfet, JamesKellam. Fractures of the Pelvis and Acetabulum – 3rd edn. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins,  5 May 2003.
  1. MattaJM. Fractures of the acetabulum: Accuracy of reduction and clinical results in patients managed operatively within three weeks after the injury. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1996;78: 1632–45.
  1. Michael RBaumgaertner. Fractures of the posterior wall of the acetabulum. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 1999;7:54–65.
  1. MiddlebrooksES, SimsSH, KellamJF, BosseMJ. Incidence of sciatic nerve injury in operatively treated acetabular fractures without somatosensory. Evoked potential monitoring. J Orthop Trauma. 1997;11:327–9.
  1. GiannoudisPV, GrotzMRW, PapakostidisC, DinopoulosH. Operative treatment of displaced fractures of the acetabulum a meta-analysis. J Bone Joint Surg [Br] 2005;87B:2-9.

Fixation of Complex Acetabular Fractures26

Kyle F Dickson
 
Introduction
Acetabular fractures represent an articular injury that requires a perfect anatomical reduction.1,2 If the surgeon does not believe he or she can obtain a perfect reduction then referral or conservative treatment is indicated (Figs 26.1A to G). Poor results occur from either joint instability or incongruency between the femoral head and the weight-bearing area of the acetabulum.3-6 Judet and Letournel determined the classification, indications, radiographic findings and treatment plan.1,7 The key to surgical treatment of acetabular fractures is to understand the fracture, choose the approach, anatomically reduce the fracture, and fix the acetabulum well enough to prevent postoperative loss of reduction.
 
Indications and Contraindications
Indications for the fixation in acetabular fractures are detailed in Table 23.1. Contraindications for surgery include: (1) A stable concentrically reduced nondisplaced acetabular fracture not involving the superior acetabular dome,4,8-10 (on AP and Judet X-rays), (2) Secondary congruence (in both column fractures where the nondisplaced joint translates medially).1 (3) Severe osteoporosis,1 (4) Severe medical comorbidities, (5) Pre-existing arthritis that requires total hip arthroplasty and (6) Lack of expertise or equipment to perfectly reduce and stabilize the acetabulum (Figs 26.1A to G). Nondisplaced fractures rarely displace (less than 7%)11 but require close follow-up so operative intervention can be performed if displacement occurs. Percutaneous acetabular fixation of nondisplaced fractures is not indicated due to most patients not requiring it and those with displacement require direct anatomical reduction (see illustrative case). Matta et al9 developed roof arc measurements in transverse and “T” type fractures to decide whether or not an acetabular fracture has violated the weight-bearing dome (Figs 26.2A to D). This measurement has been used to determine if the remaining intact acetabulum is sufficient to maintain a stable and congruent relationship with the femoral head. The medial roof arc is measured on the AP view. The anterior roof arc is measured on the obturator oblique, and the posterior roof arc is measured on the iliac oblique radiograph. To obtain these measurements, the first line is a vertical line through the center of the acetabulum (not the femoral head because it can be subluxed or dislocated) and the second line is drawn from the center of the acetabulum to the fracture location at the articular surface (Figs 26.2A to D).310
Figures 26.1A to G: 33-year-old involved in a MVA suffering a left both column acetabular fracture initially repaired by a well-trained well-known trauma surgeon through an ilioinguinal approach. (A to C) AP, obturator oblique, and iliac oblique radiograph respectively postoperatively clearing showing a failure of reduction of both the anterior column and the posterior column. Due to the patient maintaining his joint space and not putting weight on the extremity, the author 3 months after the injury performed a staged reconstruction of the acetabulum. An ilioinguinal approach was used to remove the plate and screws and perform an osteotomy and release of the anterior column. This was followed by an extended iliofemoral approach with a greater trochanteric osteotomy where a posterior column osteotomy and release was performed. Then an anatomical reduction and fixation of the both column fracture was completed; (D to F) are the AP, obturator oblique and iliac oblique radiographs retrospectively postoperatively showing an anatomical reduction of the two columns; (G) AP radiograph seven years out from the surgery with some osteophytes but no hip pain
Current recommendations are that fractures with a medial roof arc angle of greater than 45 degree, an anterior roof arc angle of greater than 25 degree, and a posterior roof arc angle of greater than 70 degree have sufficient intact acetabulum for nonoperative treatment.12 Therefore, displaced low anterior column, low transverse and low T-shaped acetabular fractures are treated nonoperatively.1,4,10
 
Preoperative Planning
 
RADIOLOGY OF THE ACETABULUM AND FRACTURE CLASSIFICATION
Judet et al recognized that the plane of the ilium was approximately 90 degree to the plane of the obturator foramen and that both of these structures were oriented roughly 45 degree to the frontal plane (Fig. 26.3A).7 Therefore, they proposed that the anteroposterior (AP) pelvis and two 45-degree oblique views be used to study the radiographic anatomy of the acetabulum and derived the first systematic classification of acetabular fractures, based on the anatomical pattern of the fracture.7 In the 1993 text, this analysis was expanded to include preoperative two-dimensional computed tomography.1 The use of newer 3D CTs do not replace the evaluation of the three plain radiographic projections and the 2D CT (Fig. 26.4B). Accurate interpretation of the plain films is based on the understanding of the correlation of the normal anatomy of the innominate bone with the pertinent radiographic landmarks of each view of the pelvis.311
Figures 26.2A to D: (A) AP radiograph of a T-shaped (technically a posterior column anterior hemitransverse classified in the T-shape category by Letournel) 4 weeks after the injury showing a medial roof arc of 32 degree; (B) Obturator oblique radiograph showing an anterior roof arc of 26 degree; (C) An iliac oblique radiograph showing a posterior roof arc of 40 degree; (D) CT scan and immediate postoperative AP after an extended iliofemoral approach
 
AP RADIOGRAPH
The AP view shows six basic radiographic landmarks (Figs 26.3 and 26.7A). The iliopectineal line is the major landmark of the anterior column.1 The inferior three- fourths of the iliopectineal line correlate directly with the pelvic brim on the innominate bone. However, the superior quarter of the iliopectineal line is formed by the X-ray beam tangent to the superior quadrilateral surface and the posterior-superior aspect of the greater sciatic notch. The ilioischial line is generally considered a radiographic landmark of the posterior column.1 It extends from the posterior-superior greater sciatic notch to the ischial tuberosity. This radiographic landmark is formed by the X-ray beam tangent to the posterior portion of the quadrilateral surface of the innominate bone. The radiographic “U”, or teardrop, consists of a medial and lateral limb.1 The lateral limb represents the inferior aspect of the anterior wall of the acetabulum, and the medial limb is formed by the obturator canal and the anterior-inferior portion of the quadrilateral surface. The teardrop and ilioischial lines are always superimposed on the AP view because both of these landmarks are from different parts of the quadrilateral plate.1 Therefore, dissociation of the teardrop from the ilioischial line suggests that either the innominate bone is rotated, or that there has been displacement of the quadrilateral surface. The dense line of the superior articular surface of the acetabulum on the AP view is known as the roof, which results from the tangency of the X-ray beam to the subchondral bone in the superior acetabulum. The anterior and posterior rims of the acetabulum represent, respectively, the peripheral contours of the anterior and posterior walls of the acetabulum.312
Figures 26.3A to D: (A) The 45 degree planes off of the AP that make the obturator oblique and the iliac oblique useful. The six basic landmarks on the AP radiograph; (B) (1) Iliopectineal line, (2) Anterior rim, , (3) Radiographic “U” or teardrop, (4) Roof of the acetabulum; (C) (5) Ilioischial line and (6) Posterior rim of the acetabulum; (D) AP radiograph of a transverse fracture disrupting 5 of the 6 radiographic lines
 
OBTURATOR OBLIQUE VIEW
The obturator oblique view is taken with the patient rotated so that the injured hemi pelvis is rotated 45 degree toward the X-ray beam (Figs 26.1B, 26.1E, 26.2B, 26.7B). This view shows the obturator foramen in its largest dimension and profiles the anterior column. The iliopectineal line has the same relationship with the pelvic brim as on the anteroposterior pelvis. The posterior rim of the acetabulum and fractures involving the posterior wall are seen best on this view. Comparison of the relationship between the femoral head and the posterior wall can reveal subtle amounts of posterior subluxation. The obturator oblique radiograph best highlights the “spur sign” which is pathognomonic for a both column fracture (Fig. 26.4C) and posterior wall fragments (“gull sign” Fig. 26.6A).
 
ILIAC OBLIQUE VIEW
The iliac oblique view is taken with the patient rotated so that the injured hemipelvis is tilted at 45 degree away from the X-ray beam (Figs 26.1C, 26.1F, 26.2C, 26.7C).313
Figures 26.4A to C: (A) CT scan showing an intra-articular fragment; (B) 3D CT scan (with head subtraction) of a both column acetabular fracture with smoothing of the anterior column anterior fracture line exit and inferior rami fracture; (C) “Spur sign” on an obturator oblique radiograph pathognomonic of a both column acetabular fracture (CT scan Fig. 26.5D)
This view shows the iliac wing in its largest dimension, and profiles the greater and lesser sciatic notches, as well as the anterior rim of the acetabulum. Involvement of the posterior column is often best seen on this view. Fractures of the anterior column traversing the iliac wing can also be detected.
 
COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY
Computed tomography (CT) is a helpful adjunct to the analysis of the three plain radiographic projections to further define fracture patterns and assess for associated injuries. The computed tomography scan should consist of contiguous sections of no more than 3 mm in thickness. Two-dimensional axial images are superior to plain films in showing: (1) The extent and location of acetabular wall fractures (Figs 26.4A, 26.5C, 26.5E, 26.6B), (2) The presence of intra-articular free fragments or injury to the femoral head (Fig. 26.4A), (3) Orientation of fracture lines (Figs 26.5A to C), (4) Identification of additional fracture lines (such as the vertical portion of the T-shape fracture Figs 26.3D, 26.5B, 26.5F), (5) Rotation of fracture fragments, and (6) Status of the posterior pelvic ring. Therefore, orientation of the fracture line(s) can be very helpful in distinguishing among fracture types.314
Figures 26.5A to F: (A) Fracture orientation on a CT scan for column fractures; (B) Transverse and T-shaped fractures; (C) Wall fractures; (D) CT scan showing a both column fracture with a small posterior wall; (E) CT scan showing a transverse fracture with a posterior wall; (F) CT scan showing an anterior column posterior hemitransverse
CT may also identify fractures of the quadrilateral plate that were not seen on the X-rays. In addition, marginal impaction, defined as depression of the articular surface of the joint, is best visualized using two-dimensional axial CT images (Fig. 26.6B).1 In one study, the two-dimensional computed tomography was shown to be superior to plain radiographs in the detection of fracture step and fracture gap deformities.13 Displacements on a single plane radiograph may be missed, therefore, 3 views are routinely taken.
Three-dimensional CT scan technology has improved to the point that it is helpful in further defining the fracture pattern and, thereby, assisting in preoperative planning (Fig. 26.4B). However, it does not provide the diagnostic detail of the two-dimensional CT scan. The three-dimensional CT scan may also assist the surgeon who is inexperienced in interpreting the plain X-rays in developing a better understanding of the fracture patterns. The understanding of the fracture pattern is further enhanced by drawing the fracture lines from the X-ray landmarks onto a dry bone model or a line drawing of the pelvis as seen on each X-ray view (Figs 26.7A to F). Only by understanding the location, orientation, and rotation of each fracture line can the fracture pattern be truly appreciated and anatomical reduction can be planned.
 
FRACTURE CLASSIFICATION
The “Letournel” acetabular fracture classification was based on his two column theory (Fig. 26.8) and continues to remain the classification of the majority of surgeons treating these complex injuries. The classification is based on the anatomy of the fracture pattern and has 10 distinct categories, which are divided into five elementary types and five associated types (Figs 26.9A to J). The five elementary fracture patterns are the anterior wall, anterior column, posterior wall, posterior column, and transverse. The associated patterns are either a combination of elementary patterns or an elementary pattern with an additional fracture component. The five associated fracture patterns are the posterior column and posterior wall, anterior column or wall with posterior hemitransverse, 315transverse and posterior wall, T-shaped, and both-column fracture.
Figures 26.6A to D: A patient with a posterior wall fracture with comminution and a marginal impaction. (A) A obturator oblique radiograph showing the “gull sign”; (B) The CT scan showing the posterior wall fragments and an increased signal representing the marginal impaction (arrow); (C) The intraoperative fluoro radiograph showing all the screws are outside the joint (a concave joint just needs one view of the entire screw outside the joint to confirm that the hardware is extra-articular); (D) AP radiograph postoperatively
Variants of these 10 basic types are not uncommon and can usually be placed into one of the 10.1
This classification is important for its ability to describe the fracture and guide the surgical approach. The fracture types are straight-forward and have high rates of interobserver and intraobserver reliability.14 Two column fractures (transverse, anterior column/wall and posterior hemitransverse, transverse and posterior wall, T-shaped) need to be separated from the both-column fracture type. The both-column fracture is unique: not only is there a fracture line separating the anterior and posterior column components, but there is also a displaced supra-acetabular fracture so that no portion of the acetabular articular surface remains intact to the innominate bone (Fig. 26.9J).
 
PREOPERATIVE DRAWING OF THE FRACTURE ON A MODEL
The majority of fractures can be classified from the information on the high quality AP radiograph. An organized approach to the examination of the three radiographs (AP and oblique views) and the CT scan further defines the subtleties of the fracture pattern.316
Figures 26.7A to F: Drawing of the fracture on the pelvic model. (A) AP radiograph of a transverse posterior wall fracture highlighting the disruption of the iliopectineal and ilioischial line and the posterior fragment inside the joint; (B) Obturator oblique radiograph highlighting the break in the anterior column; (C) The segmentally comminuted posterior wall (numerous pieces of the posterior wall). The disruption points are transferred to the outside; (D) and the inside; (E) of the pelvic model from B and C; (F) The 2D CT is reviewed sequential through the cuts connecting the dots on the pelvic model (the 2D CT will also show the rotation of the fragments)
First, the lines on the AP radiograph (Figs 26.3 and 26.7) should be carefully analyzed. Is the iliopectineal line disrupted? If so, the fracture possibilities include the anterior wall, anterior column, transverse types, T-shaped, anterior column and posterior hemitransverse, and both column. If the ilioischial line is disrupted, possibilities include the posterior column types, transverse types, T-shaped, anterior column and posterior hemitransverse, and both-column. With both lines disrupted, the possibilities are reduced to transverse types, T-shaped, anterior wall/column and posterior hemitransverse, and both column. If the fracture goes into the wing then you can exclude transverse and “T” type fractures. Is the line along the posterior rim disrupted? If so, this will add the possibility of a posterior wall fracture. Is the ilioischial line displaced from its normal relationship to the teardrop? If so, this would indicate, in general, that the two columns are separated from each other. Obturator oblique view will refine the diagnosis made from the anteroposterior view (Figs 26.7A to F). A suspected posterior wall component will become obvious, as well as disruption involving the anterior wall or column. A fracture of the obturator ring suggests that the two columns are separated from each other. The presence of supra-acetabular fracture line (the spur sign) is pathognomonic for a both column fracture (Fig. 26.4C). The iliac oblique further defines an injury to the posterior column as well as the presence and location of fractures involving the iliac 317wing (i.e. anterior column, anterior column and posterior hemitransverse, and both column fractures) (Figs 26.7A to F). Finally, the CT scan is studied to reveal the additional information described previously. When drawing the fracture pattern on a model, the points of disruption of the brim, anterior iliac wing, posterior border of the sciatic notch, anterior rim, and posterior rim are marked on the model (Figs 26.7A to F). The 2D CT is used to connect the above points following the fracture lines superiorly and inferiorly until the fracture pieces are clearly understood. Finally the rotations of the pieces are understood so that the vector to achieve anatomical reduction can be performed.
 
Implants
The main implants for fixation of acetabular fractures include 3.5 mm stainless steel screws (length 10–130 mm) and different lengths 3.5 mm reconstruction plates. Additionally, 1/3 tubular plates can be fashioned into spring plates when small pieces of the posterior wall are present. Generally a 5 hole 1/3 tubular plate is cut through the third hole leaving 2 screw holes intact for screws while the cut third hole is used for spikes that can be imbedded into the posterior wall. A reconstruction plate is placed over the 1/3 tubular plate as a buttress plate (Figs 26.1D to G). Rarely smaller size (2.5 mm) screws are used for smaller pieces and 3.0 cannulated screws are used inside fracture lines. The key is to give enough stability to maintain anatomical reduction through 8 weeks of touchdown weight-bearing.
 
Surgery
Given the above contraindications, operative treatment is indicated for all acetabular fractures that result in hip joint instability and/or incongruity in the weight-bearing dome.2,15 Posterior and anterior wall fractures with instability of the hip joint require operative fixation. In addition, fragments of bone or soft tissue incarcerated within the hip joint may result in joint incongruity. Open reduction and removal of the loose body or obstructive tissue is indicated to prevent early onset of traumatic arthritis.
 
CHOICE OF SURGICAL APPROACH
The surgical approaches to the acetabulum are described by Letournel and Judet1: the Kocher–Langenbeck (Figs 26.10A to D), the ilioinguinal (Figs 26.11A to E), and the extended iliofemoral (Figs 26.12A to E).
Figure 26.8: The two column theory that is the basis of Letournel's acetabular fracture classification
318
Figures 26.9A to J: Fracture classification: (A) Posterior wall fracture; (B) Posterior column fracture; (C) Anterior wall fracture; (D) Anterior column fracture; (E) Transverse fracture; (F) Associated posterior column and posterior wall fracture; (G) Associated transverse and posterior wall fracture; (H) T-shaped fracture; (I) Associated anterior column and posterior hemitransverse fracture; (J) Both-column fracture
The first two provide direct access to only one column of the acetabulum (posterior for the Kocher-Langenbeck; anterior for the Ilioinguinal) and rely on indirect manipulation for reduction of any fracture lines that transverse the opposite column. The extended iliofemoral approach affords the opportunity for almost complete direct access to all aspects of the acetabulum. It is most often used in associated fracture patterns that are surgically treated more than 21 days after injury or on certain transverse or both column pattern fractures with complicating features that are not amenable to treatment by the more limited approaches. A single surgical approach is generally selected with the expectation that the fracture reduction and fixation can be completely performed through the one approach.1, 2319
Figures 26.10A to D: (A) Kocher-Langenbeck approach; (B) Patient placed prone on the fracture table with the operative leg bent 80 degree and distal femoral traction; (C) Raising of the obturator internus exposing the posterior column (a variant of sciatic nerve anatomy as it passes through the piriformis); (D) Schematic of the Kocher-Langenbeck approach with the gluteal sling, obturator internus, and piriformis tagged and exposing the posterior column
 
KOCHER-LANGENBECK APPROACH (FIGS 26.10A TO D)
The Kocher-Langenbeck approach is ideal for posterior wall fractures and posterior column fractures with or without an associated posterior wall fracture. Juxta and infratectal transverse and T-shaped fractures are often treated with this surgical approach. In addition, for T-shaped fractures, the major displacement should be posterior, with only minor displacement occurring anteriorly at the pelvic brim. This approach can be performed with the patient in the lateral or prone position. The author prefers the prone position using a traction table with the knee in 80 degree of flexion especially in fractures involving the posterior column (posterior column, transverse, and T-shaped fractures Fig. 26.10B). In the lateral position, the weight of the leg displaces the femoral head medially making reduction of the column much more difficult. If a fracture table is not available, a universal distractor is a useful alternative.
 
ILIOINGUINAL APPROACH (FIGS 26.11A TO E)
The patient is placed supine on a fracture table or with the leg free so that hip flexion can be used to relax the psoas muscle and allow adequate exposure to the anterior column. The ilioinguinal approach is indicated for anterior wall and anterior column fractures as well as for most anterior wall/column plus posterior hemitransverse and both column fractures. Both column fractures with comminuted posterior wall or column 320fractures or operated on >14 days from the injury may require an additional Kocher-Langenbeck posterior approach or choice of an extended iliofemoral approach.
Figures 26.11A to E: (A) Ilioinguinal approach; (B) The external oblique is retracted back with an alice clamp showing the ilioinguinal nerve (a Penrose is wrapped around the spermatic chord (round ligament in females)); (C) The iliopsoas muscle has been raised from the inner iliac table and the roof and the floor of the inguinal ligament have been incised exposing the lateral femoral cutaneous nerve on the psoas muscle; (D) The identification of the iliopectineal fascia separating the psoas muscle and the femoral nerve from the femoral artery, vein, and lymphatics (must be freed to allow mobilization of structures and anatomical exposure through the 3 windows; medial, middle, and lateral); (E) Schematic of D
Certain associated both-column fractures will have extension into the sacroiliac joint or a separate “U” shape fracture of the superior border of the sciatic notch and are not amenable to reduction through the ilioinguinal approach (Figs 26.13A and B). Transverse fractures in which the major displacement is anterior with minimal posterior displacement (<10%) can be reduced through an ilioinguinal approach. The ilioinguinal approach allows access to the internal aspect of the innominate bone from the sacroiliac joint to the symphysis pubis. Direct visualization of the internal iliac fossa, pelvic brim, superior pubic ramus and a portion of the quadrilateral surface is achieved. Indirect access to the inferior portion of the quadrilateral surface can be attained by the palpating finger or the use of special instruments. Extension to the outer wing of the iliac bone is limited 321but leaving either the sartorius or the rectus origin leaves some blood supply to the wing. The surgeon works through three windows (Figs 26.11A to E). The entire ilioinguinal approach may not be required to obtain anatomical reduction and fixation. For instance some anterior column fractures can be reduced from only the iliac portion of the ilioinguinal or from the Pfannenstiel portion of the ilioinguinal (modified Stoppa). The modified Stoppa intrapelvic approach has been used for anterior wall and column, transverse, T-shaped, anterior column/wall posterior hemitransverse and both column fractures.16 The approach is useful for fractures requiring buttress plating of the quadrilateral plate.17 Often a second approach is required for fracture reduction or hardware insertion, i.e. the lateral and middle “windows” of the ilioinguinal approach.
 
EXTENDED ILIOFEMORAL APPROACH (FIGS 26.12A TO E)
The extended iliofemoral approach is indicated for selected complex acetabular fracture types and for surgery delayed more than 2 to 3 weeks following injury. These include transtectal transverse, transverse plus posterior wall, T-shaped, or both column fractures.1,2 Other examples include transverse or T-shaped(transtectal fractures with a wide separation along the vertical stem of the T), fractures with associated disruption of the symphysis pubis or fracture of the contralateral pubis ramus.1,2 Select both column fractures include those having a complex fracture of the posterior column or wall, a displaced fracture line crossing the sacroiliac joint or causing a segmental “U” shaped fracture (Figs 26.13A and B).2 The extended iliofemoral approach provides maximum simultaneous access to both columns of the acetabulum. The entire lateral aspect of the iliac wing, the anterior column to the level of the iliopectineal eminence, the retroacetabular surface and the interior of the hip joint are accessible.
Figures 26.12A to E: (A) The extended iliofemoral approach; (B) The patient in a lateral decubitus position on a fracture table (the surgeon stands facing the patient); (C) The initial incision removes the gluteal muscles from the outer iliac wing superiorly and is an anterior approach to the hip inferiorly (interval between tensor fascia lata and the sartorius superficially and the abductors and the rectus deep); (D) Exposure of the iliac wing and posterior column in a cadaver; (E) In a both column fracture patient
322A delay of even 5 days for a juxta or transtectal transverse or T-shaped fracture may make the anterior column very difficult to reduce through a Kocher-Langenbeck posterior approach requiring a separate ilioinguinal approach or choosing an extended iliofemoral initially.
 
SIMULTANEOUS ANTERIOR AND POSTERIOR APPROACHES
Some surgeons choose to use simultaneous anterior (ilioinguinal) and posterior (Kocher-Langenbeck) approaches as an alternative to the more extensive and extended iliofemoral approache or as the primary method for transverse, T-shaped and selected both-column fractures. The author prefers sequential approach to the simultaneous approach due to maximizing the benefits of each approach. However, the author will choose the extended iliofemoral approach if he feels there is a good chance that two approaches will be necessary.
 
Open Reduction and Internal Fixation Based on Classification
 
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Letournel developed a protocol of approach, patient positioning and the use of a fracture table based on his classification.1 Fracture reduction is the most difficult, and the most critical, element of the operative procedure. Displacement and the rotation of the fracture fragments are critical for the surgeon to understand prior to operative intervention. Drawing the fracture, either on plastic pelvic bone model or on paper, is an extremely helpful exercise (Fig. 26.7 and illustrative case). In this way, approximate clamp position required to achieve anatomic joint reduction can be established preoperatively. The use of intraoperative traction, which reduces the deforming force of the femoral head, permits a precise reduction of the fracture with the use of special clamps. Obtaining an anatomic reduction is critical to achieving consistently good clinical results.2 After completion of fracture reduction and fixation, intraoperative fluoroscopy is used to assess the quality of the reduction and hardware position. Fluoroscopy through a 180 degree arc should demonstrate the absence of a subchondral fracture gap or step-off and that the femoral head is congruent with the acetabular roof. In addition, axial and tangential views can be used to ensure that all screws are extra-articular. The acetabulum is a concave joint. Therefore, only one projection showing extra articular position of the entire screw is required (Fig. 26.6C). If this projection cannot be found for a particular screw, the screw should be removed. The three standard three radiographs (AP and two oblique views) should be obtained postoperatively. Any concern of abnormality can be further evaluated with a CT.
 
Posterior Wall, Posterior Column; Posterior Column and Posterior Wall Fractures
Posterior wall fractures (Figs 26.6 and 26.9A): Posterior wall acetabular fractures are often considered “simple”, but the uncomplicated “one fragment” posterior wall is quite rare.1,18 Complicating factors for posterior wall fractures include fragmentation of the wall, marginal impaction, intra-articular fragments, and femoral head damage.2,18 Common mistakes with operative management include: inadequate understanding of the complexity of the fracture, retrieving incarcerated posterior wall and capsule by detaching the posterior capsule, difficulty in reduction and fixation of small osteochondral fragments or marginal impaction (Figs 26.6A to D), and poor reduction or fixation of the posterior wall fragment.
323A well-done Kocher-Langenbeck approach is vital for appropriate fixation of the posterior wall fracture (Figs 26.10A to D). The surgeon must minimize surgical devitalization to the abductors, preserve the femoral head vascular supply, maintain the capsular attachments to the posterior wall, and look for small marginal impactions. Distraction of the hip joint enables removal of the usually torn ligamentum teres and any other small intra-articular fragments. This is accomplished with a fracture table or through the use of a femoral distractor across the hip joint (one Schantz pin in the area of the sciatic buttress region (1.5 cm lateral and 1.5–2 cm cephalad to the sciatic notch) and one pin in the proximal femur).
After the hip joint is adequately debrided, the femoral head may be allowed to assume its normal position against the intact articular surface of the acetabulum checking for any marginal impactions. The femoral head is used as a template for reduction of the marginal impaction and posterior wall fragments. The marginal impaction is reduced using osteotomes taking as much cancellous bone with the articular piece as possible and wedging it down against the femoral head with bone taps. The author uses a calcium phosphate paste that hardens to support the marginal impaction. After the osteochondral fragments and marginal impaction has been reduced into position, reduction and fixation of the posterior wall takes place (Figs 26.6C and D). Common errors with posterior wall fixation include not using a buttress plate, over-contouring of the plate (so as not to adequately buttress the wall), not curving the plate around the acetabulum, and placing the plate too superior thereby placing the superior gluteal nerve at risk.
Posterior column fractures (Fig. 26.9B): The congruity of the hip joint is highly dependent on anatomical reduction of the posterior column to prevent post-traumatic osteoarthritis. The approach for the posterior column fracture is always a Kocher-Langenbeck. Placing the patient prone prevents the femoral head from preventing an anatomical reduction. The common deformity is slight gapping superiorly and cephalad translation of the posterior column. Rotational mismatch of the posterior column is common and can best be assessed via palpation through the greater sciatic notch (Fig. 26.14D). Rotational control of the posterior column is obtained through a Jungbluth clamp and/or a 6.0 mm Schanz screw driven into the ischium (Fig. 26.14B). The reduction of the posterior column is then accomplished by different clamping strategies through the greater sciatic notch: an angled jaw bone forceps, a pointed reduction clamp or Farabeuf clamp (Figs 26.14B to D).
Figures 26.13A and B: (A) A patient with a both column fracture with a segmental fracture of the sacroiliac joint causing the radiologic “U”; (B) The only approach that can adequately reduce and fix this piece is an extended iliofemoral (with a greater trochanter osteotomy). Postoperative AP radiograph
324
Figures 26.14A to D: (A) Transverse fracture showing the three levels; transtectal, juxtatectal, and infratectal; (B) The placement of a Jungbluth clamp and a Schanz pin into the posterior column. Typically the Jungbluth clamp controls translation and the Schanz pin controls rotation. Alternatively, one of the tines of the angled clamp can be placed between the two arms of the Jungbluth clamp and control rotation and reduce posterior columns, transverse fractures, and anterior columns of a T-shape fracture; (C, Fig. 26.16A); (D) In posterior column and transverse type fractures the posterior column may appear anatomically reduced but still have a rotational malalignment that can only be discovered by palpation of the quadrilateral surface
Additionally, a ball spike pusher may be helpful pushing the posterior column from posterior to anterior. The surgeon must look at the posterior column reduction and palpate the fracture line through the greater sciatic notch to ensure an anatomical reduction. After the reduction of the posterior column, a lag screw from posterior to anterior (keeping in mind the frontal plane nature of the fracture) is placed, followed by a posterior column neutralization plate (Figs 26.2D and 26.13B).
Associated posterior column and posterior wall fractures (Figs 26.9F): The Kocher-Langenbeck approach is used with the patient in the prone position. The posterior column is first 325reduced. This reduction is facilitated by retracting the posterior wall fragment so that the joint can verify the anatomical reduction. After lag screw fixation and/or a neutralization plate along the posterior column fracture, the posterior wall is addressed as previously described. The fracture fixation construct is completed by the application of a buttress plate to the posterior wall (Figs 26.6C and D).
 
Anterior Wall and Anterior Column Fractures
Anterior wall fractures (Figs 26.9C and 26.15A): Operative treatment of the anterior wall fracture usually requires all or part of the ilioinguinal surgical approach with the patient in the supine position. A Pfannenstiel extension of the medial aspect of the ilioinguinal incision may be used to expose the entire quadrilateral surface to the sacroiliac joint, i.e. a modified Stoppa approach.16 Reduction of the anterior wall fracture starts with traction and internal rotation of the femur. Occasionally, intraoperative lateral traction with a Schanz pin in the greater trochanter aids reduction of the fractured anterior wall (Fig. 26.15B). Direct posterior lateral force with either a ball spike or a bone clamp positioned with one tine on the anterior wall piece and the other lateral and posterior to the anterior inferior iliac spine usually reduces the fracture. Fixation consists of a curved buttress plate placed along the pelvic brim, extending from the superior pubic ramus to the internal iliac fossa (Fig. 26.15C). Alternatively, a plate is place inside the brim from the symphysis to the SI joint. Lag screws from the brim to the quadrilateral surface or superiorly and inferiorly fixing the wall piece to intact bone can be used prior to the plate. Screws around the pectineal eminence can penetrate the joint. When anterior and posterior articular surfaces are intact, or have been reconstructed, medial subluxation of the femoral head cannot occur and quadrilateral pieces without articular involvement can be ignored.
Anterior column fractures (Fig. 26.9D): The treatment of these fractures is similar to that described above for the anterior wall fracture. A complete or partial ilioinguinal approach is used with the patient in the supine position. The iliac wing is usually externally rotated, and maximal displacement is observed at the pelvic brim. The reduction of the anterior column fractures involves lateral traction on the femoral head and derotation the anterior column. Traction and internal rotation places the femoral head on the intact posterior wall often reducing the anterior column. Occasionally, lateral traction through a Schanz pin up the neck of the femur is helpful for reduction. In high anterior column fractures, which include the anterior border of the iliac wing, rotational control of the fracture can be obtained through gripping the anterior border of the bone with a clamp in the interspinous region. A second clamp can be placed across the fracture line at the iliac crest and another clamp at the brim (Figs 26.16A to D). A linear clamp can be used in some cases with one time on the anterior column and the other hooked around the lesser notch. Fixation usually consists of lag screws followed by a buttress plate (Fig. 26.15C).
 
Transverse, Transverse and Posterior Wall; T-shaped Fractures
In these fractures the transverse fracture line exits the anterior rim just above the iliopectineal eminence in the psoas grove. The level at which it crosses the articular surface determines the impact on the joint and in some cases the approach (Fig. 26.14A). The infratectal fracture crosses below the acetabular roof and does not affect the dome articular surface. The juxtatectal fracture crosses just below the roof, and the transtectal fracture crosses the dome weight-bearing surface. Fracture reduction is most critical for transtectal fractures.
326Transverse fractures (Figs 26.3D and 26.9E): In these fractures the inferior (ischiopubic) segment is in one piece and reduction requires the simultaneous control of displacement and rotation of this entire segment. The posterior column is usually the site of greatest fracture displacement. Therefore, the Kocher-Langenbeck approach is used. The two axes of rotation that cause displacement are: (1) A line through the symphysis longitudinally and (2) A line from the symphysis to the posterior fracture line. These two axes cause the inferior piece to rotate in around the symphysis axis and internally rotate as the head pushes medially around the other axis. The rotation becomes more complex if there is an associated rami fracture or symphysis disruption. A Jungbluth clamp is placed across the posterior column to reduce medial lateral translation. A angled clamp through the notch and supra-acetabular or a Schantz pin secured near the ischial tuberosity controls the rotation (Figs 26.14B and C). The reduction is verified by inspection of the posterior column and palpation of the quadrilateral surface through the sciatic notch (Fig. 26.14D). A lag screw is directed from the retroacetabular surface, across the fracture, toward the anterior column. A neutralization plate is placed on the retroacetabular surface to complete the construct.
Associated transverse and posterior wall fractures (Figs 26.5E and 26.9G): The presence of a posterior wall fracture mandates a posterior exposure. The specific approach, either the extended iliofemoral or the Kocher-Langenbeck, is dictated by the configuration of the transverse component or time delay from injury to operative treatment, as previously noted.
Figures 26.15A to C: (A) AP radiograph of an anterior wall fracture with an incarcerated head and the typical trapezoid shape fragment of the anterior wall; (B) Intraoperative AP fluoro with a Schanz pin pulling lateral and distal (strict distal traction did not reduce the head) reducing the head and the fracture; (C) AP radiograph after an ilioinguinal approach, reduction, and fixation of the anterior wall fracture
327The transverse fracture component is reduced first, as described above. The posterior wall fracture allows visualization of the anatomically reduced transverse component. After fixation of the transverse fracture component with a lag screw across the fracture and/or neutralization plating, the posterior wall fracture is fixed using the previously described techniques (Figs 26.14A to D).
T-shaped fractures (Figs 26.2, 26.5B and 26.9H): The majority of T-shaped fractures can be treated using the Kocher-Langenbeck approach. Prone patient positioning using a fracture table is preferred. The anterior column fracture is exposed, with longitudinal traction and retraction of the posterior column. As in the transverse fracture, the anterior column is reduced with an angled clamp through the notch and is fixed with a lag screw (Fig. 26.14C). Traction is then released, the femoral head repositioned and the posterior column reduced using the previously described methods (Figs 26.14B and D). The reduction is verified by palpation of the quadrilateral surface through the sciatic notch. A lag screw is inserted across the posterior column and a plate is placed on the retroacetabular surface to complete the construct (Fig. 26.2D). If this strategy does not allow reduction of the anterior column, the posterior column is reduced and fixed and the patient is repositioned for an anterior approach (ilioinguinal) as a second stage. In this situation, the posterior column fixation must not cross into the anterior column. Otherwise, independent manipulation of the anterior column fracture fragment will be impossible and subsequent reduction maneuvers will be blocked. Alternatively in fractures where there are associated rami or symphyseal disruptions the anterior column is difficult to reduce through a posterior approach due to the loss of secondary constraints and an extended iliofemoral approach is indicated. This approach may be indicated in transtectal T-shaped with significant displacement of the anterior column or a time delay even greater than 5 days.
 
Anterior Wall/Column and Posterior Hemitransverse and Both-Column Fractures
Anterior wall/column and posterior hemitransverse fractures (Figs 26.5F and 26.9I): The associated anterior and posterior hemitransverse involves either an anterior wall or column fracture as the primary fracture line. An associated transverse fracture component propagates from the anterior fracture across the articular surface to the posterior border of the innominate bone. The posterior hemitransverse fracture line is identical to the posterior half of a transverse fracture and is usually juxtatectal or infratectal. This fracture is almost always amenable to surgical treatment through the ilioinguinal approach. Exceptions include the presence of posterior column segmental comminution or posterior wall fractures. In these situations, the fracture is best approached through the extended iliofemoral or staged ilioinguinal followed by a Kocher-Langenbeck approach. The patient is positioned supine either on the orthopedic fracture table with traction through a boot or supine on the radiolucent table with the leg prepped free. Sufficient flexion at the hip is necessary to relax the iliopsoas and allow for dissection beneath the muscle.
The anterior column or wall is reduced and fixed first, as with isolated anterior wall or column fractures. A plate is then applied along the pelvic brim leaving empty holes for subsequent lag screw fixation of the posterior column. The posterior column fracture is then reduced utilizing an angled clamp or a King Tong clamp (Figs 26.16A, C, and D) coursing around the iliopsoas with one tine placed through the middle window onto the quadrilateral surface portion of the posterior column fragment and the other placed at the supra-acetabular ilium. An intrapelvic rotational reduction of the posterior column is achieved. A linear clamp can be similarly placed (one tine in the lesser sciatic notch and the other tong on the brim/anterior column) and bring the posterior column anteriorly.328
Figures 26.16A to D: (A) Different size angled clamps critical for reduction of various anterior column and posterior column fractures through the ilioinguinal approach (C) and the Kocher-Langenbeck posterior approach (Fig. 26.14C); (B) Useful technique to reduce the iliac crest with a Weber clamp often in conjunction with C and D to reduce the brim; (C) Clamp placement for reducing an anterior column fracture straddling the psoas muscle (can also be used to reduce posterior column in a both column or the posterior part of a transverse fracture; (D) The king tong clamp can be used in this manner sliding along the inner and outer table of the iliac wing or like the angled clamp in C straddling the psoas muscle
The reduction is assessed by visualization and fluoroscopic evaluation of the posterior column reduction to both the intact ilium and anterior column. It is important to recognize that the reduction of the articular surface is never directly visualized. Screws placed from the internal iliac fossa directed down the length of the posterior column to exit the ischium or lesser sciatic notch complete the fixation construct. In addition, a screw may be placed percutaneously from the outer cortex of the ilium to the quadrilateral surface to fix the posterior column. Lag screws can give good fixation but if there is any comminution or in osteopenic patients, a buttress plates along the pelvic brim adds additional stability.
Both-column fractures (Figs 26.1, 26.4C, 26.5D, 26.9J, 26.13, and illustrative case): The majority of both column fractures are treated through the ilioinguinal approach with the patient in the supine position similar to that for the anterior column posterior hemitransverse fracture. First, the anterior column is reduced and fixed with lag screw and a plate. Before final fixation of the anterior column, the posterior column is marginally reduced to ensure the anterior column is not blocking the reduction of the posterior column. Next, a plate is applied along the pelvic brim leaving empty holes for subsequent lag 329screw fixation of the posterior column. The posterior column fracture is then reduced and fixed, completing the construct. Common indications for the use of the extended iliofemoral approach include presence of a posterior wall fracture, comminution of the posterior column, involvement of the sacroiliac joint (Figs 26.13A and B) and a delay in surgery of >14 days (Fig. 26.1 and illustrative case). Some of the posterior wall fractures of the both-column have a large cranial spike of cortical bone associated with it and can be reduced through an ilioinguinal approach. This makes it possible to address the posterior wall by developing a small window of exposure to the lateral surface of the ilium either though the interspinous or over the iliac crest. A reduction clamp is used to reduce the posterior wall to the anterior column (Figs 26.16C and D). This fracture can be fixed with obliquely oriented screws placed from just lateral to the pelvic brim and directed posteriorly toward the superior iliac extension of the wall fragment. Buttress plate fixation of this fragment is not generally necessary as the intact capsule and labrum prevent posterior femoral head subluxation.
 
Postoperative Management
With isolated acetabular fractures, physical therapy is started the next day with touchdown weight-bearing ambulation training and no range of motion or strengthening exercises for 8 weeks. After 8 weeks, the patients start weight-bearing as tolerated, range of motion, and strengthening exercises. An AP radiograph and clinic follow-up occurs at 2, 9, 12 weeks, 6 months, 1 year, 2 years, 4 years, 6 years, etc. Patients are placed in compression stockings and pneumatic compression leggings as soon after the injury as possible. Pharmacologic anticoagulation is not started until after the suction drains are removed postoperatively. High-risk patients or those with documented proximal clots have a filter placed preoperatively. The 700 cGy radiation is reserved for patients with an extended iliofemoral approach to prevent significant loss of motion by heterotopic ossification. Although against current US government standards, intravenous (IV) antibiotics are continued until the suction drains are removed.
 
Complications
The rate of infection is approximately 5% in most series of acetabular fractures treated operatively.1,2,19 and the adverse effect of a deep postoperative intra-articular wound infection cannot be minimized. Complete joint destruction can be expected in 50 percent of these cases.2,19 Perioperative antibiotic prophylaxis and meticulous surgical technique are the best preventative measures, as well as avoiding operating through a compromised soft-tissue envelope. The author waits for granulation tissue in open fractures and treats skin degloving injuries like open fractures with thorough debridement and reprep and drape before definitive fixation (Fig. 26.17). If the infection is diagnosed early, the hardware is maintained assuming there is no loosening or loss of reduction. Late infection is treated with hardware removal. In all cases, long-term culture-specific (IV) antibiotics for 6 weeks are given followed by a variable course of by mouth antibiotics.
Although the superior gluteal, inferior gluteal, obturator, or femoral nerves may be injured during acetabular surgery, the known prevalence of these injuries is low. However, iatrogenic damage to the sciatic nerve is one of the major complications encountered in acetabular fracture management. These injuries are most commonly associated with the posterior and extended surgical approaches which involve direct exposure and retraction of the sciatic nerve.1 Injury at the time of indirect reduction of posterior column displacement through an anterior surgical approach can also occur.1 Although intraoperative nerve monitoring has been advocated by some, there is no clear data indicating that nerve monitoring actually reduces the overall rate of iatrogenic 330sciatic nerve injury.
Figure 26.17: A patient with a bad skin degloving injury that was missed and subsequently developed a fungal infection. This picture is greater than three months from the injury and finally had covering with granulation tissue to allow us to fix his pelvis and T-shaped posterior wall acetabular fracture
Currently, there is no substitute for attention to detail in the operating room with careful patient positioning, maintaining the knee flexed during posterior approaches to relax the sciatic nerve (Fig. 26.10B), cautious placement of retractors, and limited traction on the nerve during fracture reduction.
Intra-articular placement of screws is a documented and often destructive complication of acetabular fracture surgery (Fig. 26.6C). If hardware has been placed within the joint, it is imperative that the offending implant(s) be removed.
Proximal deep vein thrombosis was identified using magnetic resonance venography in 34% of acetabular fracture patients.20 Letournel and Judet reported 13 deaths (2.3%) after acetabular fracture surgery, four of which were caused by massive pulmonary embolism.1 Therefore, some form of mechanical or chemical prophylaxis is recommended to decrease the risk of thromboembolic complications (see Postoperative Management). Despite the use of prophylactic treatment, the prevalence of post-traumatic and postoperative thromboembolism approximates 11%21-23 and the value of screening, using Doppler ultrasound or magnetic resonance venography remains controversial.23
Greater than 20% loss of total hip motion is thought to represent severe heterotopic ossification.2 Using this criterion, Matta reported its prevalence as 20% using the extended iliofemoral approach, 8% for the Kocher-Langenbeck and 2% for the ilioinguinal.2 The most notable risk factor is stripping of the gluteal muscles from the external surface of the ilium.1,2,24 As above, radiation is used following an extended iliofemoral approach, head injury, or a where there is extensive damage to the abductors. Delayed excision following maturation of functionally significant heterotopic ossification remains a viable option both for treatment after failed prophylactic therapy and as an alternative to prophylaxis.
The main complication after fracture of the acetabulum is post-traumatic arthritis. The quality of the fracture reduction appears to be the main determinant for clinical outcome and for the risk of late traumatic arthritis.1,2,19 Damage to the femoral head at the time of initial injury is another important factor.2 Avascular necrosis (AVN) of the femoral head occurs after acetabular fractures but should not be more than 2 to 3% of cases. AVN is often blamed for the post-traumatic arthritis when more commonly the loss of femoral head is because of a malreduced fracture.1,2331
 
Results of Operative Treatment
The outcome after acetabular fractures treated within three weeks of injury has good or excellent results in 75 to 81% at long-term follow-up.1,2,19 The main objective of operative treatment is to obtain an anatomical reduction of the articular surface and a subsequent good clinical outcome.1,2 In Letournel's series, 366 of 492 (74%) acetabular fractures, an anatomic reduction was achieved and 81% had a good to excellent result.1 However, only 64% of the 126 patients with an imperfect reduction achieved a good to excellent result. Even when post-traumatic arthritis was seen after a perfect articular reduction, Letournel found that 50% of the time, the arthritis presented between 10 and 25 years after injury.1 In contrast, after imperfect reduction, 80% of the cases of arthritis appeared within the first 10 years after injury.1 Matta also demonstrated the importance of achieving an anatomic reduction (defined as up to 1 mm of residual displacement) as the main outcome determinant for acetabular fracture surgery.2
The rate of anatomic reduction has been shown to decrease with increased fracture complexity, patient age, and time delay to fracture fixation.2 Time delay to fracture fixation dramatically affects results. In Letournel's series of 138 patients treated after a three weeks delay, the rate of good to excellent results dropped to 54%.1 Similarly, Johnson et al reported 65% good to excellent results in 187 patients.25 In a series of 237 patients, Madhu et al found that an anatomical reduction was more likely if surgery was performed within 15 days for elementary fracture types and ten days for associated fracture types.26 In some transtectal T-shaped and transverse fractures the author will switch from a Kocher-Langenbeck approach to an extended iliofemoral approach even after 5 days.
 
Illustrative Case
A 52-year-old female with a history of obesity, hypertension, diabetes, and fibromyalgia was involved in a MVA suffering a crush injury to her foot and a right both column posterior wall acetabular fracture (Figs 26.18A to L). The initial treating physician was orthopedic trauma fellowship trained, did not order initial 45 degree oblique views and felt that the acetabulum could be treated percutaneously (Fig. 26.18F). Even this initial postoperative AP radiograph shows unacceptable displacement that will lead to post-traumatic arthrosis. The patient 11 days postoperative felt something move (Fig. 26.18G). At this time a second opinion was consulted. At >3 weeks from the time of the injury, a fracture that could have been treated with an ilioinguinal (Fig. 26.18H) now required an extended iliofemoral approach with a greater trochanteric osteotomy (Figs 26.12A to E). The lateral traction device was used to help pull the hip out of the pelvis after the previous screws were removed. After aggressively debriding the fracture lines and freeing up the pieces, the anterior column was reduced to the intact iliac wing by a Weber clamp in the crest and a Jungbluth more inferiorly (Fig. 26.16B). This was stabilized with a plate and lag screw along the crest (Figs 26.18I to L). Then the posterior column was reduced to the anterior column and the intact iliac wing simultaneously with two Jungbluth clamps and an angled clamp and ischial pin to control rotation (Figs 26.14B and C). A lag screw was initially used between the anterior column and the posterior column and another lag screw fixed the posterior column to the intact iliac bone. These screws were backed up with two neutralization plates respectively (Figs 26.18I to K). An anatomical reduction of the joint was achieved and maintained. The patient is 5 years out with no pain in her hip but with foot pain (Fig. 26.18L). 332
Figures 26.18A to F: Illustrative case. (A) CT scout film showing the size of the patient; (B) AP radiograph showing a both column fracture with displacement of both the anterior and posterior column and some femoral head protrusion; (C) 2D CT showing the comminuted fracture of the wing; (D) 2D CT showing the anterior and posterior column with the intact portion of the iliac wing (“spur sign”); (E) 2D CT showing the anterior wall comminution and the long posterior spike of intact iliac wing with proximal displacement of the posterior column; (F) Initial AP radiograph postoperative showing significant displacement of the crest and the separation of the iliopectineal and ilioischial line confirming a unacceptable intra-articular reduction
333
Figures 26.18G to L: Illustrative case. (G) AP radiograph verifying further loss of an already poor reduction with protrusion of the femoral head; (H) The preoperative drawing for revision of the both column fracture; (I to K) AP, obturator oblique, and iliac oblique radiographs post extended iliofemoral approach, anatomical reduction of the joint, and fixation; (L) AP radiograph 3 years postoperative. The patient is 5 years postoperative without hip pain but with some pain in the opposite foot after the crushing injury
334
References
  1. LetournelE, JudetR. Fractures of the acetabulum, 2nd edn. New York: Springer-Verlag,  1993.
  1. MattaJ. Fractures of the acetabulum: accuracy of reduction and clinical results in patients managed operatively within three weeks after the injury. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1996;78-A:1632-45.
  1. KnightRA, SmithH. Central fractures of the acetabulum: J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1958;40-A:1-120.
  1. RoweCR, LowellJD. Prognosis of fractures of the acetabulum. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1961; 43-A:30-59.
  1. StewartMJ. Discussion of Prognosis of fractures of the acetabulum. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1961;43-A:59.
  1. StewartMJ, MilfordLW. Fracture-dislocation of the hip: An end-result study. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1954;36-A:315-42.
  1. JudetR, JudetJ, LetournelE. Fractures of the acetabulum. Classification and surgical approaches for open reduction. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1964;46-A:1615-38.
  1. HeegM, OostvogelHJM, KlasenHJ. Conservative treatment of acetabular fractures: The role of the weight-bearing dome and anatomic reduction in the ultimate results. J Trauma. 1987;27:555–9.
  1. MattaJM, AndersonLM, EpsteinHC, HendrickP. Fractures of the acetabulum. A retrospective analysis. Clin Orthop. 1986;205:230–40.
  1. OlsenSA, MattaJM. The computerized tomography subchondral arc: a new method of assessing acetabular articular continuity after fracture (a preliminary report). J Orthop Trauma. 1993;7:402–13.
  1. TornettaP III. Nonoperative management of acetabular fractures: the use of dynamic stress views. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1999;81-B:67-70.
  1. VrahasMS, WiddingKK, ThomasKA. The effects of simulated transverse, anterior column, and posterior column fractures of the acetabulum on the stability of the hip joint. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1999;81-A:966-74.
  1. BorrelliJ, GoldfarbC, CatalanoL, EvanoffBA. Assessment of articular fragment displacement in acetabular fractures: a comparison of computerized tomography and plain radiographs. J Orthop Trauma. 2002;16:449–56.
  1. Beaule,PE, DoreyFJ, MattaJM. Letournel classification for acetabular fractures: Assessment of interobserver and intraobserver reliability. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2003;85-A:1704-9.
  1. MattaJM, MerrittPO. Displaced acetabular fractures. Clin Orthop. 1988;230:83–97.
  1. ColeJD, BolhofnerBR. Acetabular fracture fixation via a modified Stoppa limited intrapelvic approach. Description of operative technique and preliminary treatment results. Clin Orthop. 1994;305:112–23.
  1. QureshiAA, ArchdeaconMT, JenkinsMA, InfanteA, DiPasqualeT, BolhofnerBR. Infrapectineal plating for acetabular fractures: a technical adjunct to internal fixation. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18:175–8.
  1. MoedBR, McMichaelJC. Outcomes of posterior wall fractures of the acetabulum: Surgical technique. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2008;90-A:87-107.
  1. MayoKA. Open reduction and internal fixation of fractures of the acetabulum. Results in 163 fractures. Clin Orthop. 1994;305:31–7.
  1. MontgomeryKD, PotterHG, HelfetDL. The detection and management of proximal deep vein thrombosis in patients with acute acetabular fractures: a follow-up report. J Orthop Trauma. 1997;11:330–6.
  1. StannardJP, Lopez-BenRR, VolgasDA, AndersonER, FarrisRC, VolgasDA, et al. Prophylaxis against deep-vein thrombosis following trauma: a prospective, randomized comparison of mechanical and pharmacologic prophylaxis. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2006;88-A:261-6.
  1. StannardJP, SinghaniaAK, Lopez-BenRR, AndersonER, BusbeeM, KaarDK, et al. Deep-vein thrombosis in high-energy skeletal trauma despite thromboprophylaxis. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2005;87-B:965-8.
  1. BorerDS, StarrAJ, ReinertCM. The effect of screening for deep vein thrombosis on the prevalence of pulmonary embolism in patients with fractures of the pelvis or acetabulum a review of 973 patients. J Orthop Trauma. 2005;9:92–5.
  1. BosseMJ, PokaA, ReinertCM, EllwangerF, SlawsonR, McDevittER. Heterotopic ossification as a complication of acetabular fracture: prophylaxis with low-dose irradiation. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1988;70-A:1231-7.
  1. JohnsonEE, MattaJM, MastJW, LetournelE. Delayed reconstruction of acetabular fractures 21-120 days following injury. Clinical Orthop. 1994;305:20–30.
  1. MadhuR, KotnisR, Al-MousawiA, BarlowN, DeoS, WorlockP, et al. Outcome of surgery for reconstruction of fractures of the acetabulum. The time dependent effect of delay. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2006;88-B:1197-1203.

Surgical Dislocation of Hip27

Rajesh Malhotra, Bhavuk Garg , Vivek Trikha
 
Introduction
Limited access has remained one of the great challenges in the treatment of disease of the hip. Given the anatomy of hip joint, dislocation of the hip is usually the only way to access the femoral head fractures. However, dislocation of the hip can be quite unsafe due to the damage to the blood supply of the femoral head, which is usually supplied by an artery known as the medial femoral circumflex artery (MFCA). This damage to blood supply is a major risk factor in the development of avascular necrosis. Professor Reinhold Ganz1 described a procedure for safe access to the hip without damaging the MFCA. This procedure provides a good access to all aspects of the femoral head as well as acetabulum.
 
Anatomy of Medial Femoral Circumflex Artery2
The major source for the blood supply of the head of the femur (Fig. 27.1) is the deep branch of the medial femoral circumflex artery (MFCA).
Figure 27.1: Blood supply of the femoral head
This artery passes posterior to 338the proximal femur at the base of the neck and runs superiorly and laterally to join the lateral femoral-circumflex artery, which is located anteriorly. Together they form the extracapsular arterial ring located at the base of the femoral neck. This ring in turn gives off a series of ascending cervical branches that pass through the hip capsule close to its insertion and run proximally along the femoral neck. At the junction of the femoral head and neck, they join to form a subsynovial intracapsular arterial ring. This in turn gives off the epiphyseal branches that perforate the cortical bone of the proximal femoral neck and continue their course into the femoral head.2
 
Principle of Surgical Dislocation
During dislocation of the hip, medial femoral circumflex artery is protected by the intact obturator externus muscle.2 Using a digastric osteotomy approach the hip can be exposed anteriorly, subluxated and dislocated in the same direction, if required, while respecting the integrity of the external rotator muscles. This allows a gap of up to 11 cm between the head and the acetabulum, giving a view of the femoral head of about 360 degree and a full 360 degree view of the acetabulum.1
 
Indications
  • Femoral head fractures
  • Selected acetabular fractures3
    • Marginal impaction fractures
    • Comminution of the posterior wall (PW) with three or more fragments
    • Superior posterior wall fractures
    • Transverse + post wall, PC+PW (few)
    • The presence of intra-articular fragments
    • Involvement of the anteroposterior acetabular rim
    • To obtain adequate reduction of an anterior-column fracture and/or extra-articular placement of an anterior-column screw
    • Associated fractures of the femoral head.
  • Femoroacetabular impingement
  • Periacetabular osteotomies
  • Surface replacement
  • Rheumatoid synovitis
  • Synovial chondromatosis
  • Pigmented villonodular synovitis
  • Labral tears
  • Joint debridement
  • Posterior column (PC).
 
Surgical Technique
The surgical technique of surgical dislocation of hip for a case of femoral head fracture (Fig. 27.2) can be described as follows:
 
POSITIONING AND ANESTHESIA (FIG. 27.3)
This procedure can be done under general or regional anesthesia like spinal or epidural anesthesia. Lateral decubitus position is used. Free movement of hip in all directions should be ensured.
 
SURGICAL APPROACH
A Kocher-Langenbeck or Gibson approach is used. Fascia lata is split. Gluteus maximus is either split or retracted posteriorly. The leg is then internally rotated and the posterior 339border of gluteus medius is identified.
Figure 27.2: X-rays and CT scan showing left femoral head fracture
Figure 27.3: Lateral decubitus and classic posterior approach is used
No attempt should be made to mobilize gluteus medius or to visualize the tendon of piriformis.1 Vastus lateralis is also identified and its posterior border is elevated from the femur (Fig. 27.4).340
Figure 27.4: Vastus lateralis is identified and its posterior border is elevated from the femur. A: Anterior; P: Posterior; H: Head end
Figure 27.5: Predrilling of greater trochanter
Figure 27.6: Trochanteric osteotomy
 
TROCHANTERIC OSTEOTOMY
An incision is made from the posterosuperior edge of the greater trochanter to the posterior border of the ridge of vastus lateralis distally. We prefer to predrill the trochanter and drill 2 holes with 3.2 mm drill bit (Fig. 27.5).
Around 1.5 cm thick trochanteric flap is raised by an osteotomy along this line with an oscillating saw. Proximally, this osteotomy exits just anterior to the most posterior insertion of gluteus medius. This trochanteric flap thus contains gluteus medius attached proximally and vastus lateralis attached distally. This is the reason why this osteotomy is also known as digastric osteotomy (Fig. 27.6).
 
MOBILIZATION OF TROCHANTERIC FRAGMENT (FIG. 27.7)
After osteotomy, this fragment is reflected anteriorly by releasing the posterior border of vastus lateralis from femur till the middle half of gluteus maximus tendon.341
Figure 27.7: Trochanteric flip
Posterior-most fibers of gluteus medius are also released from the remaining greater trochanter. Flexion and external rotation of hip also facilitates flipping of trochanteric flap anteriorly.
 
EXPOSURE OF CAPSULE
Piriformis tendon can be visualized after careful anterosuperior retraction of the posterior border of gluteus medius. The interval between the gluteus minimus and the tendon of the piriformis is developed, and the gluteus minimus is retracted superiorly to expose the capsule. Care is taken to preserve the anastomosis between the inferior gluteal artery and MFCA, which is present along the distal border of the piriformis muscle and tendon. Also it is important to identify sciatic nerve and avoid injury to it. Superior capsule is now completely visualized. This exposure is further facilitated by further flexion and external rotation of the hip. This maneuver leads to complete exposure of anterior, superior and posterosuperior capsule (Fig. 27.8A).
 
CAPSULOTOMY (FIG. 27.8B)
A Z-shaped capsulotomy is made. The middle limb of Z lies along the long axis of the femoral neck, which avoids injury to the deep branch of the MFCA.
Figures 27.8A and B: Z-shaped capsulotomy
342
Figure 27.9: Dislocation of hip joint leads to exposure of femoral head and acetabulum
Femoral limb of Z goes anteroinferiorly and must remain anterior to lesser trochanter to avoid injury to the main MFCA, which lies posterior to the lesser trochanter. Towards the acetabular side, extending the first incision towards the acetabular rim where it is sharply turned posteriorly, parallel to the labrum reaching the piriformis tendon, makes another limb of Z.
 
DISLOCATION OF HIP
After capsulotomy, femoral head is delivered by dislocating the hip joint through flexion and external rotation of leg. By maneuvering the leg, the whole femoral head and acetabulum can be visualized now (Fig. 27.9). A thorough inspection should be done to look for any intra-articular fragment (Fig. 27.10).
 
FRACTURE FIXATION
Femoral head fracture is reduced. Wide variety of screws is available to fix the fracture. We prefer Herbert screws to fix the femoral head fractures.
Figure 27.10: Look for all fracture fragments
343
Figure 27.11: Provisional fixation
Figure 27.12: Definitive fixation with Herbert screws
No articular step should be there (Figs 27.11 and 27.12). Once fixed, the femoral head is relocated simply by traction on the flexed knee and internal rotation.
 
CLOSURE
The capsule is closed loosely (Fig. 27.13). Tension should be avoided to avoid stretching of retinacular vessels. Trochanter is reattached with the help of screws (Fig. 27.14). Wound is closed in layers. Figure 27.15 shows the final postoperative X-rays of the same patient with excellent fixation of femoral head with no evidence of avascular necrosis at 6 months follow-up.
 
Results
Nötzli et al3 using laser Doppler flowmetry (LDF) studied femoral head perfusion intraoperatively in cases of surgical dislocation of hip.344
Figure 27.13: Closure of capsule
Figure 27.14: Fixation of trochanteric osteotomy with 2 screws
Figure 27.15: Postoperative X-rays of same patient showing fracture union with no evidence of avascular necrosis
345They observed that with the femoral head reduced, external rotation, both in extension and flexion, caused a reduction of blood flow. During subluxation or dislocation, blood flow was impaired when the posterosuperior femoral neck was allowed to rest on the posterior acetabular rim. A pulsatile signal returned when the hip was reduced, or was taken out of extreme positions when dislocated. They concluded that LDF provides proof for the clinical observation that perfusion of the femoral head is maintained after dislocation.
Ganz et al1 reported 213 cases of surgical dislocation. None of their patient developed avascular necrosis of femoral head. Tannast et al4 reported 60 cases of acetabular fracture operated using this technique. There were no cases of avascular necrosis. Good or excellent results were achieved in 44 hips (81.5%).
Shin et al5 reported results of surgical dislocation of hip in 23 hips in 21 children in various pediatric hip disorders. No avascular necrosis of the femoral head was noted up to the time of the follow-up (mean follow-up = 15.1 months), except for in one unstable SCFE patient whose surgical intervention was delayed for a medical reason.
 
Complications
Following complications can be seen:
  • Poor surgical technique leading to damage to MCFA and subsequent AVN
  • Injury to sciatic nerve
  • Nonunion at trochanteric site
  • Hardware problem at trochanteric site
  • Heterotopic ossification.
 
Illustrative Case
A 35-year-old male presented to us with fracture of posterosuperior wall of acetabulum on right side. His preoperative X-rays and CT scan are shown in Figure 27.16. He was operated using surgical dislocation of hip and fracture was fixed using 3.5 mm reconstruction plate. His immediate postoperative X-ray is shown in Figure 27.17. His follow-up X-ray at 2 years (Fig. 27.18) shows no evidence of avascular necrosis of femoral head and excellent fracture union without any arthritic changes.
Figure 27.16: Preoperative X-rays and CT scan showing fracture of posterosuperior wall of acetabulum
346
Figure 27.17: Immediate postoperative X-rays of same patient
Figure 27.18: Follow-up X-rays of same patient at 2 years with no evidence of avascular necrosis of femoral head
References
  1. GanzR, GillTJ, GautierE, GanzK, KrügelN, BerlemannU. Surgical dislocation of the adult hip: A technique with full access to the femoral head and acetabulum without the risk of avascular necrosis. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2001;83-B:1119-24.
  1. GautierE, GanzK, KrügelN, GillT, GanzR. Anatomy of the medial femoral circumflex artery and its surgical implications. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2000;82-B:679-83.
  1. NötzliHP, SiebenrockKA, HempfingA, RamseierLE, GanzR. Perfusion of the femoral head during surgical dislocation of the hip. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2002;84-B:300-4.
  1. TannastM, et al. Surgical dislocation of the hip for the fixation of acetabular fractures. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2010;92-B:842-52.
  1. ShinSJ, et al. Application of Ganz Surgical Hip Dislocation Approach in Pediatric Hip Diseases. Clinics in Orthopedic Surgery. 2009;1:132–7.

Fractures of the Head of Femur28

WY Shen
 
Introduction
Fractures of the head of femur occasionally occur with dislocations, both posterior and anterior, of the hip joint. These fractures are often the sequelae of high energy injuries with resultant multi-organ polytrauma. However, it can also result from a relatively trivial injury, such as a fall during a soccer game.
Femoral head fractures are quite prevalent in developing countries where severe road traffic accidents are common, especially where mandatory use of seat belt is not enforced.18 This is not the case where the author practiced. This chapter was written based on the author's limited experience, together with the information available in the literature.
The management of these patients depends greatly on the complexity of the total picture. The treatment of the femoral head fracture per se is complicated, and largely affected by the complexity of the associated injuries, be it femoral neck fractures (Pipkin's Type III) or acetabular fractures (Pipkin's Type IV), and the experience of the orthopedic surgeon. The age of the patient is another important consideration as joint replacement is simpler and results more guaranteed if the age of the patient warrants a less long lasting solution.
 
Classification
Several classifications exist, but Pipkin's classification (Fig. 28.1) is probably the one most commonly referred to.3,17 However, one must bear in mind that most of the criteria were described before the days of computed tomography.
Based on Pipkin's classification criteria, a Type I lesion consists of:
  1. Dislocation of hip joint,
  2. Fracture of the femoral head caudad to the fossa of the femoral head, and thus,
  3. It could be logically deduced that there is a disruption of the ligamentum teres, due to the dislocation of the hip joint.
A Pipkin's Type II lesion consists of:
  1. Dislocation of hip joint,
  2. Fracture of the femoral head cephalad to the fossa of the femoral head, and thus,
  3. It could be logically deduced that the loose femoral head fragment would be attached to the ligamentum teres.348
Figure 28.1: Pipkin's classification of femoral head fractures
With the advent of computed tomography studies, a more reliable feature to distinguish between a Type I and a Type II lesion is the spatial relationship between the fracture plane and the fossa—whether the plane is caudad to the fossa (Type I) or cephalad to the fossa (Type II).
For all practical considerations, this distinguishing feature between Type I and Type II does not help much with the management (Figs 28.2 and 28.9).
In my opinion, the important features to consider, pertaining to the femoral head fracture itself, are:
  1. Whether the “loose” fragment consists of one large fragment, or multiple small fragments
  2. Whether the “loose” fragment is large enough to be fixed back to the major head-neck fragment
  3. Whether the fracture line affects the weight-bearing surface over the superior part of the femoral head.
Based on these three criteria, a logical management protocol could be devised for the femoral head fracture alone.
  1. If the “loose” fragment consists of multiple small fragments, it is unlikely that these fragments could be reduced and fixed to the head-neck fragment. Removal of small fragments is advisable,15 as otherwise, these fragments will become loose bodies within the hip joint and might subsequently interpose between the femoral head and the acetabulum (Figs 28.4 and 28.5).
  2. If the “loose” fragment is large enough to be fixed, it should be reduced. Whether open reduction and internal fixation is required depends on whether the fragment could be reasonably well reduced when the hip dislocation is reduced. If the fragment is reasonably well reduced with good apposition and less than 2 mm stepping, open reduction and fixation is not necessary,2,14,15 unless there are other compelling reasons for operative treatment, such as fracture of the acetabular rim requiring fixation. The ultimate aim would be to have the fragment reasonably reduced and healed back to the major fragment, as otherwise the effective diameter of the femoral head would be significantly reduced to adversely affect the stability of the reduced hip joint (Figs 28.2A to I). If the loose fragment is single, but too small to be fixed, it will most probably remain as a single loose body in the lower cavity of the hip joint, out of harm's way (Figs 28.3A to D).
  3. If the fracture line affects the weight bearing surface, anatomic reduction is required to achieve a congruent weight bearing surface.15 This often entails open reduction and internal fixation.
If the patient's life expectancy is unlikely to out-live the longevity of a hip replacement, then a unipolar hemiarthroplasty (in case the weight bearing surface of the acetabulum is intact), or a total hip replacement (in case the acetabulum is more 349severely affected) will offer a simpler solution with more guaranteed result than open reduction and internal fixation1 (Figs 28.6A and B).
Figures 28.2A to I: (A and B) Male aged 53. Accident while riding a motorbike, resulting in posterior dislocation of the hip joint. The vague medial edge (arrows) of the femoral head betrayed the inconspicuous femoral head fracture. There were also fragments avulsed from the posterior rim of the acetabulum; (C to F) Pre- and postreduction fluoroscopy of the hip joint; (C) AP view taken before reduction. The femoral head fragment was seen “floating” within the hip joint. There was no apparent femoral neck fracture; (D) Postreduction AP view taken with femur externally rotated 30°; (E) True AP view of the hip taken with femur in neutral rotation; (F) AP view taken with the femur internally rotated 30°. The femoral head fragment was best shown in this projection in which the X-ray beam was tangential to the fracture plane; (G to I) 3-D CT reconstruction view of the femoral head; (G) True anterior view; (H) True medial view. The two views clearly showed that the fragment is located at the antero-medio-inferior part of the head, away from the main weight bearing area. It is difficult to classify this fracture, as the fracture plane seemed to go through the fossa, neither cephalad nor caudad to the fossa; (I) Fluoroscopic screening at end of four weeks showed that the fragment and the femoral head moved as one piece. Nonoperative management was decided as the initial post-reduction CT showed congruent reduction free from interposing loose bodies, and that the acetabular rim fragment was too small to be fixed. At this time, the hip was stable on flexion to 90°, neutral adduction, neutral rotation. The patient was then allowed full weight bearing walking but with restricted hip flexion as in a patient with total hip replacement done via a posterior approach
350
Figures 28.3A to D: Female aged 44. Knocked down by a car. Dislocated hip already reduced when she was transferred over (A) X-ray on admission showing a loose femoral head fragment in the inferior aspect; (B) CT coronal cut showing one loose fragment was apposing against the main fragment, another loose fragment was “free” in the lower aspect of the joint; (C) After four weeks of skeletal traction, the two fragments have remained in the same location; (D) X-ray taken 16 months after injury. Patient enjoyed near-normal hip function. The low lying “free” fragment apparently did not cause any problem. The other fragment had healed to effectively increase the head diameter in the inferior hemisphere
 
Treatment Targets
  1. Emergency concentric reduction
  2. CT to assess
    1. Concentric reduction—? Interposed bone fragments
    2. Articular congruity—< 2 mm at weight bearing area351
      Figures 28.4A to G: Male aged 24. Sustained a fall during a soccer game. (A) Fluoroscopic image before closed reduction. Note loss of spherocity at the medial edge of femoral head; (B) Externally rotated AP view after closed reduction; (C) Internally rotated AP view clearly delineated the small head fragment; (D) 3D CT view showing small antero-medio-inferior head fragment and large acetabular rim fragment; (E) X-rays immediately after fixation of rim fragment and excision of head fragment. Multiple small fragments were found inside the hip joint, and the main fragment could not be congruently reduced to the head because of plastic deformation of the cartilage. Use of titanium screws allowed an MRI to be taken 5 months after the surgery. There was no evidence of avascular necrosis; (F) 14 months post-fixation. Hip function was perfectly normal; (G) 3D CT reconstruction view soon after internal fixation and excision
      352
      Figures 28.5A to D: Male aged 46. Sustained injury in a rugby game. (A) Injury film; (B) CT cuts at different level showing large acetabular rim fragment and multiple small fragments within the joint; (C) X-rays taken two years after internal fixation of acetabular rim and removal of intra-articular loose fragments. The hip was surgically dislocated posteriorly to retrieve the loose fragments. The patient was back at sports and felt absolutely fine with his hip; (D) Loose fragments removed from the hip joint
      Figures 28.6A and B: Female aged 78. Hip dislocated with femoral head fracture and acetabular rim fracture when she was hit by a car. In view of her advanced age, the Type IV injury was treated with hip replacement
      353
      Figures 28.7A to C: Male aged 32. Truck driver involved in head on collision. (A) Preoperative film showing dislocation with head fracture; (B) Immediate postoperative film. Femoral neck fractured while closed reduction was attempted. The team was forced into immediate open reduction; (C) 10 years postoperative. Mild avascular necrosis. Minimal discomfort. Near-full function (Photos courtesy of a colleague).
      Note:
      1. Closed reduction must be gentle, under full muscle relaxation general anesthesia.
      2. Suboptimal crash decisions: would be better if the screws were not inserted from the top of the femoral head—less destruction to weight bearing cartilage, and screws could be removed easily should there be more collapse from avascular necrosis.
    3. Acetabular fracture
    4. Occult neck fracture
  3. Assessment of stability—posterior wall fracture and size of head fragment
  4. Operate to:
    1. Restore congruity
    2. Restore stability
  5. Reduce risk of Heterotopic ossification
  6. Reduce risk of AVN
 
EMERGENCY CONCENTRIC REDUCTION
As femoral head fractures are almost always associated with a dislocation of the hip joint, it is important that the hip dislocation be reduced as an emergency procedure. Closed reduction of the hip dislocation is usually not complicated if attempted early, 354with deep anesthesia and muscle relaxation. It is not necessary to achieve good reduction of the femoral head “loose” fragment at this stage. The aim should be limited to reduction of the dislocation, and the attempt must not be violent. Violent distraction and manipulation must be avoided as it could result in a fracture of the neck of femur (Figs 28.7A to C). Should all reasonable attempts fail, the surgeon would be forced to undertake a complex operation immediately for open reduction and fixation of the femoral head fracture together with any associated fractures around the hip region without the necessary CT imaging, planning and psychological preparation.
Should a gentle attempt fails to achieve reduction, one should seek the cooperation of the anesthetist for full muscle relaxation under general anesthesia with mechanical ventilation through an endo-tracheal tube. Use of spinal anesthesia, epidural anesthesia or gaseous anesthesia through a laryngeal mask are not recommended.
The initial aim would be to achieve a reduction of the hip dislocation, keep the patient on skeletal traction, and then proceed to a postreduction CT scan.
For the emergent closed reduction of the hip dislocation, the surgeon should pay attention to the following:
  1. The reduction should be attempted on a radiolucent operating table, with careful fluoroscopic screening for an occult neck fracture prior to any manipulation.
  2. Muscle relaxant general anesthesia is essential, else, a forceful struggle might ensue.
  3. Reduction should be attempted gently, else, he runs the risk of creating a subcapital fracture at the neck of the femur.
  4. After the reduction of the dislocation, careful fluoroscopic screening of the femoral head will provide a lot of information about the size and location of the femoral head fragment (Figs 28.2A to I). The size, and quality of reduction of the “loose” fragment are best shown when the hip is rotated so that the X-ray beam is parallel to the plane of the fracture.5
 
THE POSTREDUCTION CT SCAN IS TO DELINEATE
  1. Whether congruent concentric reduction is achieved; and whether there are small loose bodies interposed between the femoral head and the acetabulum. For this purpose, fine 2 mm cuts are essential
  2. Whether the femoral head fragment is reasonably reduced—the criteria for an inferior, thus non-weight bearing, fragment should be more lenient than that for a superior weight bearing fracture
  3. Whether there are any acetabular fracture
  4. Occult femoral neck fracture.
 
ASSESSMENT OF STABILITY—POSTERIOR WALL FRACTURE AND SIZE OF HEAD FRAGMENT
For a dislocation of the hip associated with an acetabular fracture but not a femoral head fracture, the Acetabular Fracture Index (AFI) has been described for assessment of the stability of the hip joint, based on CT findings.4,12 However, no one has described an assessment applicable to dislocations associated with femoral head fractures. The presence of femoral head fracture reduces the effective diameter of the femoral head. For a fracture involving one-third of the head diameter, the effective diameter of the head would be reduced by one-third. This is similar to the situation comparing the stability of a 42 mm diameter hemiarthroplasty head against that of a 28 mm total replacement prosthetic head. Thus, when there is combined acetabular rim fracture and femoral head fracture, the instability is compounded (Figs 28.8A and B).355
Figures 28.8A and B: Simulated axial cut view of the acetabulum with the hip flexed 90°. Note how the posterior stability would be affected by the femoral head fracture amounting to 1/3 of head diameter, located at the antero-medio-inferior aspect. (A) Intact posterior acetabular rim; (B) Fractured acetabular rim
 
OPERATE TO RESTORE CONGRUITY AND RESTORE STABILITY
When congruity and/or stability are not achieved by the closed reduction, operative reduction and fixation has to be considered. During this assessment, one also has to assess the size of the femoral head main fragment, and the acetabular rim main fragment. Some fragments are too small to be fixed. These have to be removed if they pose a threat to interpose between the articular surfaces. Large fragments which have been adequately reduced may not necessarily need fixation as they often remain in position with the patient on skeletal traction (Figs 28.2A to I).
When an operation is indicated, one also has to consider the surgical approach. The posterior approach in combination with a trochanteric flip osteotomy and anterior surgical dislocation of the hip5,7-9,20,21 is said to minimize the chance of postoperative avascular necrosis. However, this advantage must be balanced against the experience of the surgeon, who may be much more experienced with the Kocher–Langenbeck approach for hip replacement and fixation of acetabular rim fractures. Isolated femoral head fractures might be exposed with an anterior approach, but when there is an acetabular fracture that needs to be fixed, an anterior approach might not be as efficient. Thus, the surgeon has to make a decision based on his own experience and knowledge.
As illustrated in the cases, the posterior approach remains the author's personal preference (Figs 28.4, 28.5, 28.9 and 28.11). Among the small number of cases, the approach does not seem to produce an unacceptable risk of avascular necrosis. The only catastrophic avascular necrosis occurred in a very early case in which the author was least experienced and was forced to do an open reduction and removal of loose fragments in the middle of the night (Figs 28.10A and B).
Titanium screws, especially cannulated ones, are better than stainless steel screws. Titanium screws allow the subsequent use of MRI for assessment of avascular necrosis. Cannulation in the screws makes it easier to appreciate the direction of the screws on table. One should avoid inserting screws through the weight bearing part of the femoral head, as the iatrogenic destruction of cartilage and the sunken screw head could cause long term sequelae. When screws are inserted from the non-weight bearing surfaces, the screws heads need to be well sunken under the cartilage.
 
REDUCE RISK OF HETEROTOPIC OSSIFICATION
Similar to most acetabular surgeries, appropriate prophylaxis against heterotopic ossification should be prescribed.356
Figures 28.9A to F: Male aged 44. Twisting injury during a soccer game. (A) X-ray taken before reduction; (B) CT taken before reduction; (C) 3D CT reconstruction showing cleavage plane cutting through fossa; (D) Intraoperative photo showing femoral head delivered via a posterior dislocation of the hip. The femoral head fragment had been reduced and temporarily fixed with Kirschner wires and a reduction clamp. Note cleavage plane cutting through fossa (black arrow). Also note that there was loss of a small fragment (white arrow); (E) Femoral head fragment fixed with three titanium screws, with screw heads sunken beneath articular cartilage; (F) AP and lateral X-rays taken 5 years after the internal fixation. Patient enjoyed near-normal hip function
 
REDUCE RISK OF AVASCULAR NECROSIS
Risk of avascular necrosis is reduced by an early gentle reduction of the hip dislocation. When open reduction and internal fixation is required, these should be carried out with surgical finesse to minimize excessive dissection and destruction of vital blood supply.
 
Location and Size of the Femoral Head and Acetabular Rim Fragments
From the small number of cases encountered, all the femoral head “loose” fragments, big or small, arose from the antero-medio-inferior sector of the femoral head. Except for the unusually large piece, fragments from this location do not affect the main weight bearing surface of the femoral head. Thus, accurate anatomic reduction of these fragments is not quite necessary.
This particular area of the femoral head would lie against the posterior acetabular rim when the hip is flexed, slightly adducted and slightly externally rotated. Thus, the size of the “loose” fragment at this region of the femoral head would adversely affect the stability of the hip joint at this posture. When sizable, healing of the main “loose” fragment to its origin would contribute to hip joint stability.
If the corresponding part of the acetabular rim is also fractured, instability would be compounded by the size of the acetabular rim fragment (Figs 28.8A and B).357
 
How does Associated Acetabular Fracture Affect Treatment Strategy?
Associated acetabular fracture affects the treatment strategy in several ways:-
  1. Congruity of the hip joint demands accurate reduction and fixation of any sizable fragment as this would affect the main articulating surface of the acetabulum
  2. Stability of the hip joint is affected by the size of the fragment
  3. Reduction and fixation of this fragment is more easily approached from a posterior surgical exposure19 (Figs 28.4, 28.5 and 28.11).
 
How does Patient's Age Affect Treatment Strategy?
Open reduction and fixation of femoral head fractures is quite an undertaking. Inherent risks include avascular necrosis of the femoral head, ectopic ossification, deep infection, late osteoarthritis. Thus, for patients at an advanced age, it might be much simpler if the injuries are treated with hip replacement instead1,19 (Figs 28.6A and B). Any acetabular defect could either be fixed, with less demand on congruity, or augmented with bone graft. The outcome could be more guaranteed.
 
Surgical Approach
“Anterior approaches for open reduction of posterior dislocations of the hip are contraindicated.”6 This used to be the standard teaching which the author has adhered to. The posterior exposure is made by enlarging the plane dissected by the posterior dislocation of the hip. The iliopsoas tendon is released from the lesser trochanter to allow maximal internal rotation of the femur.
Surgical approaches that have been recommended in the literature include the anterior Smith-Petersen approach,16,19,22,23 the direct anterior Heuter approach commonly used for anterior minimal invasive hip replacement,13 the anterolateral Watson-Jones approach, the posterior Kocher–Langenbeck approach,10 and the posterior approach in combination with a trochanteric flip osteotomy and anterior surgical dislocation of the hip.5,7-9,20,21
The blood supply anatomy of the femoral head has been studied. The primary blood supply for the femoral head, particularly the weight-bearing portion, is the terminal branches from the deep branch of the Medial Femoral Circumflex Artery (MFCA).11 This vessel must be preserved no matter which approach is used.
With the advent of titanium cannulated screws, these have become the author's favorite. They are used for the repair of acetabular rim fractures and for the fixation of femoral head loose fragments. The guide wires for the cannulated screws serve both purposes of temporary fixation and as guides for screw insertion. The titanium material makes it possible to use MRI for postoperative monitoring for avascular necrosis if desired.
 
Complications
Early complications include wound infection and sciatic nerve palsy (especially in cases with fracture dislocations). Late complications include avascular necrosis (Figs 28.10A and B). Post-traumatic arthritis and heterotopic ossification.
 
Results
Giannoudis et al24 conducted a systematic review of twenty-nine articles reporting on 453 femoral head fractures in 450 patients.358
Figures 28.10A and B: Male aged 40. Dislocation of the hip with fracture of the femoral head after a fall injury during a soccer game. He jumped to make a heading, and dislocated the hip on landing. Closed reduction failed. Emergency open reduction and excision of the loose fragment via a posterior approach was undertaken in the middle of the night when the author was least prepared. Advanced avascular necrosis ensued
Authors concluded that for Pipkin 1 subtype, excision of the fracture fragment gives better results compared to ORIF, while for Pipkin type 2 fractures, anatomic reduction and stable fixation is the treatment of choice. Wound infection occured in 3.2% of surgical cases while sciatic nerve palsy complicated 3.9% of fracture dislocations. Major late complications included avascular necrosis (11.9%). Post-traumatic arthritis (20%) and heterotopic ossification (16.8%). Trochanteric flip and the anterior approach were both safer for femoral head blood supply compared to the posterior approach. Trochanteric flip (see chapter 27) gives promising long-term functional results and lower incidence of major complication rates.
 
Illustrative Case
A 39-year-old male was knocked down by a car and sustained a fracture dislocation of the left hip. He was traveling abroad and was evacuated without the reduction of hip dislocation. Figure 28.11A fluoroscopic image of the hip before closed reduction undertaken after 48 hours. Figure 28.11B internally rotated AP radiograph following reduction and Figure 28.11C CT cut at the top of femoral head showed acetabular rim fragment. Figure 28.11D CT cut at equator of head showed comminuted fracture of femoral head with a large antero-medio-inferior head fragment with multiple small fragments. The fractures were fixed via posterior approach. Postoperative X-rays were satisfactory (Fig. 28.11E). The radiographs were satisfactory (Fig. 28.11F) and the patient enjoyed good function at the latest follow-up (Fig. 28.11G).359
Figures 28.11A to G: Male aged 39, knocked down by car while traveling abroad. Evacuated without reduction of hip dislocation. (A) Fluoroscopic image before closed reduction, carried out 48 hours after injury; (B) Internally rotated AP view taken after reduction; (C) CT cut at top of femoral head showing acetabular rim fragment; (D) CT cut at equator of head showing loss of large antero-medio-inferior head fragment with additional small fragments; (E) X-ray taken immediately after open reduction and internal fixation, via posterior approach. Small loose fragments were discarded; (F) X-ray taken of the left hip 10 years after surgery; (G) Clinical photos taken 10 years after surgery. The patient enjoyed near-normal function of his injured hip
References
  1. BoraiahS, RagsdaleM, AchorT, ZelicofS, AsprinioDE. Open reduction internal fixation and primary total hip arthroplasty of selected acetabular fractures. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2009;23(4):243–8.
  1. ButlerJE. Pipkin Type-II fractures of the femoral head. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery -American Volume. 1981;63(8):1292–6.
  1. BrumbackRJ, KenzoraJE, LevittLE, BurgessAR, PokaA. Fractures of the femoral head. Hip; 1987. pp. 181-206.
  1. CalkinsMS, ZychG, LattaL, BorjaFJ, MnaymnehW. Computed tomography evaluation of stability in posterior fracture dislocation of the hip. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research. 1988;227:152–63.
  1. DrollKP, BroekhuyseH, O'BrienP. Fracture of the femoral head. Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons. 2007;15(12):716–27.
  1. EpsteinHC, WissDA, CozenL. Posterior fracture dislocation of the hip with fractures of the femoral head. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research. 1095;201:9–17.
  1. GanzR, GillTJ, GautierE, GanzK, KrugelN, BerlemannU. Surgical dislocation of the adult hip: a technique with full access to the femoral head and acetabulum without the risk of avascular necrosis. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery—British Volume. 2001;83(8):1119–24.
  1. GardnerMJ, SukM, PearleA, BulyRL, HelfetDL, LorichDG. Surgical dislocation of the hip for fractures of the femoral head. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2005;19(5):334–42.
  1. HenleP, KloenP, SiebenrockKA. Femoral head injuries: Which treatment strategy can be recommended? Injury. 2007;38(4):478–88.
  1. JessbergerS, BlattertTR, WagnerR, WeckbachA. Reducing approach-associated morbidity in fracture dislocation of the femoral head—a longitudinal study. (1982-2000) Zentralblatt fur Chirurgie. 2002;127(6):485–9.
  1. KalhorM, BeckM, HuffTW, GanzR. Capsular and pericapsular contributions to acetabular and femoral head perfusion. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery -American Volume. 2009;91(2):409–18.
  1. KeithJE Jr. Brashear HR Jr. Guilford WB. Stability of posterior fracture-dislocations of the hip. Quantitative assessment using computed tomography. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery—American Volume. 1988;70(5):711–4.
  1. KurtzWJ, VrabecGA. Fixation of femoral head fractures using the modified heuter direct anterior approach. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2009;23(9):675–80.
  1. LedererS, TauberM, KarpikS, BognerR, AuffarthA, ReschH. Fractures of the femoral head. A multicenter study. Unfallchirurg. 2007;110(6):513–20.
  1. MarchettiME, SteinbergGG, CoumasJM. Intermediate-term experience of Pipkin fracture-dislocations of the hip. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 1996;10(7):455–61.
  1. MehtaS, RouttML Jr. Irreducible fracture-dislocations of the femoral head without posterior wall acetabular fractures. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2008;22(10):686–92.
  1. PipkinG. Treatment of grade IV fracture-dislocation of the hip. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery -American Volume. 1957;39-A(5):1027-42 passim.
  1. SahinV, KarakasES, AksuS, AtlihanD, TurkCY, HaliciM. Traumatic dislocation and fracture-dislocation of the hip: a long-term follow-up study. Journal of Trauma-Injury Infection and Critical Care. 2003;54(3):520–9.
  1. SchonweissT, WagnerS, MayrE, RuterA. Late results after fracture of the femoral head. Unfallchirurg. 1999;102(10):776–83.
  1. SiebenrockKA, GautierE, WooAK, GanzR. Surgical dislocation of the femoral head for joint debridement and accurate reduction of fractures of the acetabulum. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2002;16(8):543–52.
  1. SolbergBD, MoonCN, FrancoDP. Use of a trochanteric flip osteotomy improves outcomes in Pipkin IV fractures. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research. 2009;467(4):929–33.
  1. StannardJP, HarrisHW, VolgasDA, AlonsoJE. Functional outcome of patients with femoral head fractures associated with hip dislocations. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research. 2000;377:44–56.
  1. SwiontkowskiMF, ThorpeM, SeilerJG, HansenST. Operative management of displaced femoral head fractures: Case-matched comparison of anterior versus posterior approaches for Pipkin I and Pipkin II fractures. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 1992;6(4):437–42.
  1. GiannoudisPV, KontakisG, ChristoforakisZ, AkulaM, TosounidisT, KoutrasC. Management, complications and clinical results of femoral head fractures. Injury 2009;40(12):1245–51.

Fixation for Fracture Neck of Femur29

WY Shen
 
Introduction
Fractures at the neck of femur are treated either with head preservation or prosthetic replacement. The decision should be made upon a thorough analysis of the potential risks and benefits of either operation, considering the age and physical demand of the patient, and the characteristics of the fracture itself.8
Head preservation is effected by reduction, if there is any displacement, followed by stable fixation to allow bone healing. A number of yet to be clearly defined factors affect the success rate after this operation. Among these, advanced age, female gender, advanced osteoporosis, excessive delay before operation, proximity of the fracture line to the femoral head, degree of initial displacement, verticality of the fracture line, suboptimal reduction and poor fixation are better known to increase the chance of non-union or avascular necrosis after a head-conserving procedure.4,5,10 The major drawback of prosthetic replacement is the magnitude of surgery, the limited longevity of the prosthesis, cost, and the associated morbidities of deep infection and dislocations.
Thus, the general consensus is that it would be appropriate to preserve the femoral head in undisplaced fractures10,12 and in displaced fractures in “younger” patients. This “youthfulness” is reflected by the reasonable life expectation of the patient, and is judged not only on the chronological age, but rather on the physiological age, the presence of other limiting comorbidities, against the general life expectancy in the population with similar ethnic and economic background. The cut-off line is usually drawn at 70 years in Caucasian patients enjoying reasonably good health.
 
Indications/Contraindications
We reduce and fix all displaced fractures in patients whose physiologic age are 75 or below, except when:
  • There is significant comorbidity or pre-existing disability
  • The displaced fracture is delayed for > 3 days
  • There is pre-existing hip pathology, or
  • This fracture is pathological.
Most of these displaced fractures, as well as the undisplaced fractures, are fixed with three cannulated screws, and occasionally with a sliding hip screw with a two-hole side plate.362
 
Surgical Technique
 
FIXATION WITH MULTIPLE CANNULATED CANCELLOUS SCREWS
The purpose of the fixation is to provide a set of “railway track” for guided subsidence. With subsidence, the two fragments impact into each other and gain stability. The screws are not meant for the purpose of generating static interfragmentary compression on tightening because the bone quality is usually suboptimal, except in the very young patients. With weight-bearing, the forces transmitted from the acetabulum will push the femoral head onto the distal fragment. Guided by the screws, there will be impaction at the fracture site with improved stability. At the same time, the screws have to back out. Thus, it is important that the screws are placed parallel, otherwise the screws will cut-out through the femoral head as the head still tends to sink towards the distal fragment until there is enough impaction and stability to support the head neck fragment. Furthermore, a good spread of the screws to effect even distribution of purchase on the head contributes greatly towards surgical success.4
The most important step in the operation is the closed reduction. After being put under a general or regional anesthesia, the patient is placed on the traction table with the normal lower limb elevated into a hemilithotomy position. The fracture is reduced according to the description of Leadbetter.6 One should aim for anatomical reduction. In any case, reduction should not be accepted if there is any degree of residual varus3 or retroversion. Slight residual retroversion is usually corrected by pressing down at the upper thigh. Slight varus is corrected by increased traction.
The author prefers to use the Asnis cannulated screws for fixation, although the author's procedural details are different from Asnis’ description.2 This set provides three drills of the same diameter and length as the guide pins, and a choice of screws with diameters 6.5 mm and 8.0 mm to suit femora of different sizes. The drills are used instead of the guide pins. The guide pins, like those in most other cannulated screw sets, are threaded at the tip. Thus, once the tip engages the cortex, it is difficult to adjust the direction as the thread will drag the pin forwards. As there are no threads, the drill allows fine adjustment of the direction without advancing the drill. The surgeon is in much better control using the drill instead of the tip-threaded guide pins.
Before the incision was made, the surgeon should plan the trajectory of the screws on the AP image of the reduced femoral head and neck on screen (Figs 29.1 to 29.3). The position of the lowermost screw should first be determined. The entry point should not be lower than the lower margin of the lesser trochanter. The screw should rest on the medial cortex of the femoral neck. The superior two screws should be parallel to the lowermost screw, and should be placed within the lower 2/3 of the femoral neck. The three screws should be spread out as widely as possible, within the confines of the lower 2/3 of the femoral neck, and they should be as parallel as possible. Since the posterior neck cortex is more concave than the anterior neck cortex, the three screws should be directed slightly in retroversion in order to purchase the head evenly. The screws should not reach the top part of the head. In case avascular necrosis and slight collapse ensues, the screws would not immediately become intra-articular, necessitating an immediate revision to hip replacement.
The detailed procedure is illustrated step by step in Figures 29.4A to P. An AP X-ray is taken with a Kirschner wire (or a guide pin) placed at the front of the hip, in line with the femoral neck axis. The location of the lateral incision is estimated. An incision is made, and carried down to the lateral cortex. A wire is then inserted along the anterior surface of the femoral neck, approximately in line with the trajectory of the lowermost screw on the AP view. The appropriate drill, with the drill sleeve, is then placed at the entry point for the first screw—the anterosuperior of the three. The exact position is verified with fluoroscopy. The entry point should be located well anterior, in line with 363the intended trajectory.
Figures 29.1A to D: (A) The safe corridor for placement of screws, avoiding the top part of the head; (B) The ideal trajectory on AP view; (C and D) Cross-section of the neck, showing the ideal position of the three screws—the posterior and the inferior screws should rest on the cortex
Figures 29.2A to D: (A and B) Oblique section along the femoral neck axis. Note that the femoral neck is rather flat on the anterior surface, but more concave at the posterior surface; (C) Screws placed parallel to the neck axis will skew towards the anterior 2/3 of the femoral head; (D) Screws placed slight in retroversion will be more evenly spread out
At the start, the drill should be oriented perpendicular to the surface of the entry point. This will help minimize slipping of the drill if directed oblique to the surface. Once the cortex is penetrated, the drill orientation is adjusted to that in line with the intended trajectory towards the femoral head. The direction of the drill is checked with fluoroscopy. Correct trajectory must be ascertained before the drill is advanced beyond the neck. The drill is then advanced to the subchondral bone.364
Figures 29.3A to F: (A and B) Near perfect reduction on both AP and lateral projection. Note near-flat anterior neck cortex and concave posterior neck cortex; (C and D) Ideal position of the screws. The entry point of the lower screws should not be further lower than the lower edge of the lesser trochanter; (E) The anterosuperior and postero-superior screws: (i) Within the lower 2/3 of the neck, (ii) Anterior screw entry point: almost to the anterior edge of the lateral cortex, (iii) Posterior screw very close to posterior neck cortex; (F) The inferior screw: (i) Entry point not lower than lower edge of lesser trochanter, (ii) Entry point at trisection point on lateral cortex, (iii) Very close to inferior neck cortex
365
Figures 29.4A to P: (A) A wire was placed in front of the hip. The incision was estimated as illustrated; (B) After going directly towards the lateral cortex, a wire was placed along the anterior surface of the femoral neck, more or less in line with the trajectory of the lowermost screw on the AP view; (C) The drill sleeve was placed at the entry point for the anterosuperior screw; (D) After penetrating the cortex, the drill was redirected towards the line of the intended trajectory; (E) Before the drill was advanced beyond the neck region into the head, the lateral view was checked, and the direction corrected as necessary; (F) The drill was advanced towards the subchondral bone only after surgeon is satisfied with its trajectory; (G) The drill sleeve is now placed at the entry point of the postero-superior screw. Again, the cortex was penetrated with the drill perpendicular to the cortex; (H) As the drill was advanced, the direction is corrected to the desirable trajectory; (I) The position on the lateral view was quite satisfactory, resting on the posterior cortex; (J) However, the position on the AP view was a bit too inferior. It was decided to try again from a new entry hole; (K) This new position was better, and the drill was advanced to the subchondral bone; (L) The sleeve was positioned at the entry point for the lowermost screw. It was placed midway between the two proximal drills; (M) The inferior drill was advanced, skirting the medial calcar; (N) The drill might be a bit too posterior on the lateral view, but was accepted as in order not to make another hole at this level for fear of creating a subtrochanteric fracture; (O and P) The screw lengths were measured and screws inserted. The drills were pulled out by 1 to 2 cm. The femoral head was carefully screened by internally and externally rotating the femur. The screws were adjusted as necessary to ensure that they did not penetrate into the joint, but were well secure in the subchondral bone
366When the first drill has been inserted, a second drill is inserted posterior to the first. The distance from the first drill is estimated on a lateral X-ray, and depends on the size of bone and location of the first drill. The second drill trajectory should be parallel to the first, and should be as far posterior as possible, with an intention to rest against the posterior cortex of the femoral neck.11
The third drill is inserted likewise. It should be parallel to the first two, and should be as inferior as possible, with an intention to rest against the medial cortex of the femoral neck.11 All three drills are inserted “free hand” without the “parallel guide”. An orthopedic surgeon should be skillful enough to place three parallel drills without the parallel guide. After checking that all three drills are in the appropriate position reaching the subchondral bone, the screw lengths are measured with the ruler in the set.
The three screws are inserted in the same sequence anterosuperior, posterosuperior, and lastly the inferior. This sequence is recommended because the anterosuperior drill is most difficult to place right. Its entry hole should be very anterior and very oblique to the cortical surface. It would be slightly easier if this drill is inserted without being constrained by the need to have it placed parallel to the other two. Once this is placed, it is not difficult to insert the other two parallel to the first. When any of the screw is inserted and gently tightened, it will obliterate any gap between the two fragments. Tightening the anterosuperior screw first might reduce any residual anterior angulation11 or cause an acceptable slight anteversion displacement. Tightening the posterosuperior screw first might cause slight retroversion, while tightening the inferior screw first might cause slight varus. Both retroversion or varus deformities are undesirable.
The screws must not be tightened too much, risking stripping the hold by the screw threads. It is not necessary to effect static compression by tightening the screws as there will be effective interfragmentary compression once the patient starts early weight- bearing within a few days of the operation. For the same reason, washers are not necessary.
The author prefers to pull back the three drills (or guide wires if used instead of drills) when the screws are 3/4 of the way in (Figs 29.3C and D). However, the drills are not removed until just before wound closure. This allows the author to advance the screws well into the subchondral bone. Fluoroscopy would be much easier to interpret without the drill tip confusing with the screw tip. The drills (or guide pins if used instead), left in the screw cannulations, will guide the cannulated screw driver to the screw heads for fine adjustment subsequently.
Before the drills are removed and the wound closed, it is very important that the surgeon check very carefully the final position of the screws. It is highly desirable for the screws to purchase the subchondral bone, but the screws must not penetrate the cartilage into the joint. Since the femoral head is a spherical structure, simple AP and lateral fluoroscopy might not show a slight penetration (Figs 29.4A to P). The X-ray beam must be tangential to the spot of penetration in order to pick up a slight protrusion. The author prefers to have continuous AP fluoroscopy while the lower limb is rotated from maximal internal rotation to maximal external rotation. The same is repeated for lateral projection fluoroscopy.11 This is intended to screen through tangentially the whole surface of the femoral head. The screws are fine adjusted during these screening shots.
When the surgeon is fully satisfied that the screws are in the optimal position, the drills are removed, the wound washed out, and the wound closed in layers.
The patient is allowed full weight-bearing walking within the next day or two. For patients under sixty, the fixation is protected by partial weight-bearing for 4 to 6 weeks. Since it would be counter-productive to restrict weight-bearing in older patients, they are encouraged to go for full weight-bearing. Thus, it is the responsibility of the surgeon to ensure that full weight-bearing is allowed by careful choice of patient, and expertly executing the operative fixation.367
Figure 29.5: Postoperative radiograph showing screw penetration into the joint. This embarrassment would be prevented if the surgeon took care in screening the femoral head at different rotation of the femur, in both AP and lateral projection
In osteoporotic bone, the purchase of the screws could be slightly enhanced if the bone in the femoral head had not been inadvertently removed by multiple drill paths apart from those strictly necessary. Likewise, bone around the drills (or guide pins if used instead) is conserved by inserting the screws directly without pre-drilling with the larger sized cannulated drill. During the whole operation, the surgeon should refrain from making too many holes on the lateral cortex, and in the femoral head.
The worst technical error is screw penetration into the joint (Fig. 29.5). When this happens, the offending screw must be backed out a turn or two at revision surgery. Thus, it is important that the surgeon use fluoroscopy to screen the femoral head in multiple planes.
The other technical imperfection is failing to spread out the screws to enhance stability of fixation (Figs 29.6 and 29.7). Often times, the screws were concentrated in the anterior half of the head. Placing the screws in slight retroversion to the head neck axis will allow better distribution of the screws within the confined space.
During the insertion of the lowermost screw, the surgeon must refrain from having the entry point below the lowermost edge of the lesser trochanter. Entry below this point is associated with increased risk of subsequent subtrochanteric fracture.9 For the same reason, the surgeon should not make multiple drill holes on the lateral cortex at this region while attempting to perfect the position of the lowermost screw (Figs 29.4M and N).
 
Use of Sliding Hip Screw and Locking Plate with Derotation Screw Instead of Cannulated Cancellous Screws
Some surgeons advocate the use of sliding hip screw when the fracture plane is very vertical (as in Pauwel's III).7 There is no conclusive evidence of its advantage, but the idea is certainly theoretically sound. If the sliding hip screw is used instead, the surgeon should make sure that the tip-apex distance (TAD) is within 25 mm, and that the triple reamer is used only after two or more guide pins are inserted to secure the femoral head from rotating with the reamer and subsequently the lag screw.
A more recent biomechanical study indicated that the proximal femoral locking plate might be the most stable implant for these vertically unstable fractures.1368
Figures 29.6A to D: Two problems in this case. Firstly, the screws are a bit short, and fell short of the subchondral bone (blue arrow). Secondly, the screws are not spread widely and evenly in the femoral head. More retroverted screw orientation (as indicated by the green arrows) will enable better distribution of the purchase
Figures 29.7A to D: Similar problems in this case. The screws should be longer to purchase the subchondral bone. The lowermost screw could have been a bit lower to rest on the medial calcar. The spread would be enhanced if the screws were a bit more retroverted in orientation
369More trials are necessary to see if these bench test results could be translated into clinical results.
 
Complications
Some complications cannot be avoided even after the successful internal fixation of femoral neck fractures. Namely, avascular necrosis (AVN), nonunion, fixation failure and implant failure. The ‘sliding’ concept afforded by the multiple cancellous screw fixation results in shortening in femoral neck leading to decreased abductor lever arm, which will manifest as limping clinically. Varus collapse is the other complication which can occur after screw fixation. There is a significant correlation between varus collapse and occurrence of femoral neck shortening after screw fixation.
Fixation failure and nonunion is the most common complication related to the fixation in fracture neck of femur. As this fracture takes longer to unite, commonly with displaced fracture, which will increase the stress on implant leading to fixation failure and eventually land up in nonunion. Hence it is very difficult to distinguish between fixation failure and nonunion of the fracture.
 
Results
Femoral neck fractures are considered as a true orthopedic emergency in young patients. Swiontkowski13 reported that early fixation, ideal placement and the opening of the capsule of the hip joint are the three most important factors for a successful outcome and surgical intervention should be done within 12 hours. But, clinical studies failed to show the advantage of aspiration of hemarthrosis and or capsulotomy.
Femoral neck fracture union is often slow and usually union is delayed and is achieved after 6 months in the majority of cases. The result of fixation depends upon the degree of displacement of fracture. Result of fixation in displaced fracture is inferior compared to fixation in undisplaced fractures. There is high rate of postoperative complication mainly due to implant fixation failure apart from nonunion and avascular necrosis of femoral head. High rate of union is achieved in undisplaced fracture treated with screw fixation as against displaced fracture treated with screw fixation. Just more than 90% of the cases are united in undisplaced fracture fixation whereas around 25% of the cases will result in nonunion in displaced fracture treated with screw fixation.
In literature, the rate of AVN ranges between 4 and 40 percent and varies depending on the timing of fixation, displacement of the fracture, the amount of fragmentation and the patient's age. Nikolopulos14 reported that the AVN rate is 19% in non-displaced fractures and 39% in displaced fractures in their series, comprising of 84 patients. Interestingly most of the revision surgery is done for fixation failures in less than two years after primary fixation.
 
Illustrative Case
A thirty-year-old male presented to casualty with history of high energy road traffic accident following which he was unable to stand and had severe pain in left hip. Radiograph shows isolated fracture neck of femur, with vertical, unusual pattern of fracture line extending from neck of femur superiorly to base of neck on inferior aspect (Fig. 29.8). No bony injury elsewhere. Patient was operated (closed reduction and fixation with DHS plate and antirotation screw) within 12 hours of injury without capsulotomy (Figs 29.9A and B). At 6 months follow-up radiographs show signs of union without any fixation failure and pain (Fig. 29.10).370
Figure 29.8: Intracapsular fracture neck of left femur with a vertical fracture line
Figures 29.9A and B: Fracture was treated with closed reduction and fixation with DHS and antirotation screw
Figure 29.10: Follow-up radiograph at 6 months showed union of the fracture
371
References
  1. AminianA, GaoF, FedoriwWW, ZhangLQ, KalainovDM, MerkBR. Vertically oriented femoral neck fractures: mechanical analysis of four fixation techniques. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2007;21(8):544–8.
  1. AsnisSE, Wanek-SgaglioneL. Intracapsular fractures of the femoral neck. Results of cannulated screw fixation. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery—American Volume. 1994;76(12):1793–803.
  1. ChuaD, JaglalSB, SchatzkerJ. Predictors of early failure of fixation in the treatment of displaced subcapital hip fractures. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 1998;12(4):230–4.
  1. GurusamyK, ParkerMJ, RowlandsTK. The complications of displaced intracapsular fractures of the hip: the effect of screw positioning and angulation on fracture healing. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery—British Volume. 2005;87(5):632–4.
  1. HaidukewychGJ, RothwellWS, JacofskyDJ, TorchiaME, BerryDJ. Operative treatment of femoral neck fractures in patients between the ages of fifteen and fifty years. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery -American Volume. 2004;86-A(8):1711-6.
  1. LeadbetterGW. A treatment for fracture of the neck of the femur. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research. 20023994–8. (Reprinted from J Bone Joint Surg. 1938;20:108-13.)
  1. LiporaceF, GainesR, CollingeC, HaidukewychGJ. Results of internal fixation of Pauwels type-3 vertical femoral neck fractures. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery—American Volume. 2008;90(8):1654–9.
  1. MiyamotoRG, KaplanKM, LevineBR, EgolKA, ZuckermanJD. Surgical management of hip fractures: an evidence-based review of the literature. I: femoral neck fractures. Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons. 2008;16(10):596–607.
  1. OakeyJW, StoverMD, SummersHD, SartoriM, HaveyRM, PatwardhanAG. Does screw configuration affect subtrochanteric fracture after femoral neck fixation? Clinical Orthopaedics and Related Research. 2006;443:302–6.
  1. ParkerMJ. The management of intracapsular fractures of the proximal femur. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery—British Volume. 2000;82(7):937–41.
  1. ProbeR, WardR. Internal fixation of femoral neck fractures. Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons. 2006;14(9):565–71.
  1. TidermarkJ, ZethraeusN, SvenssonO, TornkvistH, PonzerS. Quality of life related to fracture displacement among elderly patients with femoral neck fractures treated with internal fixation. Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2002;16(1):34–8.
  1. SwiontkowskiMF. Femoral neck fractures: open reduction internal fixation. In: WissDA (Ed). Master techniques in orthopaedic surgery, fractures. Lippincott Wiliams and Wilkins:  Philadelphia; 1998. pp. 213-21
  1. NikolopoulosKE, PapadakisSA, KaterosKT, ThemistocleousGS, VlamisJA, PapagelopoulosPJ, et al. Long-term outcome of patients with avascular necrosis, after internal fixation of femoral neck fractures. Injury. 2003;34:525–8

Joint Replacement for Fracture Neck of Femur30

WY Shen
 
Introduction
Fractures at the neck of femur are usually treated by one of the following means:
  1. Reduction and internal fixation—through open reduction or closed reduction, and fixation and multiple screws, pins, or with sliding hip screws.
  2. Joint replacement—which could be total hip replacement, or one of many different types of hemi-arthroplasties.
  3. Active mobilization without operation—for those patients who are relatively poor surgical risks and who have stably impacted fractures at the neck of femur—operative treatment only if significant pain persists or if fracture got displaced.
  4. Masterly neglect or girdlestone operation—for those patients who were bed- or chair-bound prior to the fracture.
This chapter is about option 2 listed above.
 
Total Joint Replacement
Total joint replacement (TJR) produces the best clinical results in those patients who enjoyed good mobility prior to the fracture. However, TJR is also fraught with the following inherent disadvantages:
  1. Compared with the hemiarthroplasties, TJR is an operation of much greater magnitude, longer duration, and more blood loss;
  2. TJR, with a usual femoral head size of 28 mm, is much more prone to postoperative dislocations, especially in those patients who have poor neuro-muscular control (e.g. Parkinsonism) and those with advanced dementia;
  3. Most TJRs are more expensive.
In view of these, TJRs are usually offered to those who were more active, and who have mild and stable co-morbidities, and those who had pre-existing arthritis at the hip.7
Most TJRs performed for fractures at the neck of femur are cemented,8 as osteoporosis makes it difficult to ensure a good fixation of non-cemented implants.
The author's personal preference is a highly polished double-tapered collarless stem such as the Exeter (Stryker) or CPT (Zimmer). These two stems come in sizes that extend way down to the extremely small range to ensure perfect fit with complete cement mantle even in small Asiatic femora. Availability of small size is very important as this is the only way to achieve a complete cement mantle without excessive removal of the dense cancellous bone on the inner surface of the cortical bone. All polyethylene 374cups are used with ceramic 28 mm heads. All polyethylene cups made of highly cross-linked polyethylene are used in those with a life expectance of more than 15 years.
Care must be taken while reaming the acetabulum of those who did not have pre-existing hip arthritis, as the acetabular bone is usually soft and thus the reamer may easily penetrate too far medially. If this happens, an impaction bone grafting of the medial wall defect should be undertaken. A wire mesh should be secured to confine the perforation. Cancellous bone chips (around 6 to 8 mm cubes) are then prepared from the femoral head. The bone chips are packed into the defect and impacted to form a new cancellous bed on which the cup is cemented—a technique similar to impaction bone grafting for revisions.9
To ensure good fixation of the stem and cup, the surgeon should be well trained in the modern techniques of cementation. On the acetabular side, the cartilage should be removed with a toothed curette, then an acetabular reamer. Reaming should reach the cancellous bone. Holes should be drilled in the superior and superolateral aspect of the acetabulum to ensure good cement penetration in “zone 1”. Pulsatile lavage and hydrogen peroxide packing should be employed. An iliac sucker would help remove blood from the acetabulum, and facilitate cement penetration into the cancellous bone at the superior aspect of the acetabulum.4 Low viscosity cement should be introduced and pressurized. Creation of macro-digitation of cement into the crevices of the cancellous bone is of utmost importance. The cup should be positioned in the same orientation as the natural acetabular brim. With experience, an even layer of cement around the cup could be secured.
The femoral side is prepared first with an appropriately oriented box chisel (Fig. 30.1). This should remove remaining femoral neck on the postero-lateral aspect. Loose cancellous bone is removed with a tapered reamer. The appropriately sized rasp, starting one size smaller than that determined by pre-operative templating, is inserted. Care must be taken not to use a rasp that is too big. The latter will remove too much cancellous bone from the inner surface of the cortex and thus reduce the amount of cement inter-digitation into host bone that could be achieved.
Figure 30.1: Orientation of the box chisel. Hip replacement via posterior approach. The neck had been osteotomised. The femur was internally rotated. The anteversion is assessed with respect to the leg axis as seen from the perspective of the surgeon, eyeing down along the length of the thigh, with the knee flexed and leg pointing towards the ceiling (yellow lines). The box chisel (red rectangle) should start as lateral and posterior as possible, but without compromising the medial and posterior femoral neck. The remaining femoral neck on the lateral aspect should be removed by the box chisel
375Worse still, an oversized rasp could easily split the upper femur when there is severe osteoporosis. Distal plugging, pulsatile lavage, and hydrogen peroxide packing are employed before low viscosity cement is introduced through an appropriately sized cement gun nozzle, which is inserted all the way down to the plug to introduce the cement in a retrograde manner. A suction vent tube helps to suck the cement down to the cement plug. The cement should be effectively pressurized using a proximal plug. The stem, with centralizer, is inserted only at a late stage when the cement just became doughy. The reader is referred to the Exeter Hip Website (www.exterhip.co.uk) for an excellent description of the technique that has stood the test of time.
 
Unipolar or Bipolar Hemiarthroplasty
These hemiarthroplasties can produce clinical results almost as good as TJR. The critical factors include:
  1. A healthy acetabulum;
  2. Use of hemiarthroplasty femoral head, be it unipolar or bipolar, whose size matches accurately that of the acetabulum3—this is achieved by utilizing systems which provide endoprosthesis heads at 1 mm increments, and accurate measurement of the host femoral head using full circumference “Harris” gauges.5 When these full circumference “Harris” gauges (Fig. 30.2) are used, the endoprosthesis head size should be the size of the gauge that just allow the femoral head to drop through.3, 6
  3. In younger, more mobile patients, a cemented prosthesis generally provides better satisfaction than a non-cemented prosthesis.7
Consistent with the choice of femoral stems used in TJR, the author's personal preference is the highly polished double-tapered collarless stem, such as the Exeter and the CPT. Most manufacturers produce bipolar heads at 1 mm increments, and these could be coupled to any standard 28 mm femoral head. The CPT stem could be used with unipolar heads available at 1 mm increments from the same manufacturer (Figs 30.3A and B). Bipolar hemiarthroplasties have not been shown to produce any better clinical outcome than unipolar hemiarthroplasties, but bipolars are generally much more expensive.7 Thus, there is no point in using a bipolar unless restricted by lack of availability of a proper unipolar system.1,2
The technique for good cementation of the stem is no different from that described for TJR.
Figure 30.2: “Harris” femoral head templates (one of a set of three), used for determining diameter of excised femoral head. The prosthetic head should be of the same diameter of the smallest hole that the excised femoral head just pass
376
Figures 30.3A and B: Unipolar endoprosthesis on CPT stem. Note that if the opening at the femoral neck was opened more anteriorly, there will be an incomplete cement mantle at the anterior part at the level of the lesser trochanter (arrows)
Cemented bipolar or unipolar hemiarthroplasties are far less prone to dislocations as compared with TJR, because of their much bigger head diameter. However, in patients with severe osteoporosis, femoral head protrusion might be a problem that would require a second operation to replace the acetabular component. In the author's experience, those hemiarthroplasties with well cemented stem and well matched head size easily last ten years without any problems on either the acetabular or the femoral side (Fig. 30.4). The longer term effects on the acetabulum are still uncertain as compared to that of TJR, but the long-term results of these highly polished double-tapered collarless stems have been well proven.
Figure 30.4: Bipolar replacement at 10 years. Patient was 65 when she had the replacement. Note preservation of “joint space” around the endoprosthetic head. Also note slight varus alignment of stem caused by inadequate lateral opening at the level of the greater troachanter. The stem fixation is otherwise perfect
377Should problem arise on the acetabular side, replacement of the acetabular side should not pose any difficulty as the polished stem could be easily knocked out and removed without any damage to the cement mantle. This will provide ample exposure for the acetabular replacement as in a primary hip replacement. The stem could then be replaced into the cement mantle utilizing the “cement-in-cement” technique.
The monobloc hemiarthroplasties have been around for decades. They provide an effective solution in those patients who had very limited mobility. They are extremely affordable. Austin Moore prostheses (AM) are intended for non-cemented implantation. They come in a standard and a narrow stem, both of which are straight. Most manufacturers provide an inventory with head sizes in 1 mm increments. Thompson prostheses are intended for cemented implantation. The collared curved prostheses come in one standard stem size.
AM replacement requires the presence of at least 0.5 cm length of remnant femoral neck on the medial side in order to provide a calcar to support the prosthesis.10,11 Thompson prostheses are implanted with all remnant femoral neck excised.
In the context of the Asian population, it is important to remember that the Thompson stem requires a much bigger medullary canal than that for the standard AM prosthesis (Fig. 30.5). Thus, a significant proportion of our geriatric femora may burst or fracture if the femur is overzealously broached with the Thompson broach. In those femora with relatively tight medullary canals, it is better to use the narrow stem AM prosthesis on a suboptimal neck calcar than to risk fracturing the femur with the Thompson broach. If necessary, the AM prosthesis could be fixed with cement. The drawback of cementing is that it would be extremely difficult to remove the AM prosthesis should anything go wrong.
Similarly, there is the occasional tight femur in which there is difficulty fully seating the narrow AM prosthesis. If the gap between the prosthesis calcar and the remnant neck is less than a couple of mm and the prosthesis could be reduced without difficulty, The author would accept the situation and let the gap be. Otherwise, it would be necessary to use a intramedullary reamer, as those used for intrameduallry nailing, to enlarge the canal. Aggressive broaching, and unrestrained hammering in order to seat the prosthesis must be avoided.
Figures 30.5A to C: Relative sizing of Thompson prosthesis vs Austin-Moore prosthesis. (A) Line tracing taken of the outline of a Thompson prosthesis; (B) Tracing superimposed onto a narrow stem AM prosthesis; (C) Thompson tracing superimposed on a regular stem AM prosthesis
378Should the broaching result in a fracture of the upper femur, the fracture should be fixed with cerclage wires or cables. Anyhow, this complication is associated with a much increased chance of postoperative infection, dislocation and mortality. An alternative is to switch to a cemented unipolar or bipolar prosthesis such as the Exeter and CPT stems. These are available to very small sizes. So far, the author have yet to find a femur which would not gracefully take the smallest Exeter (the “30 mm offset”) or CPT (the “X-small”) stem.
 
Complications
 
DISLOCATION OF HEMIARTHROPLASTIES
Hemiarthroplasty replacements are less likely to dislocate as compared with total hip replacements because of the bigger diameter of the femoral prosthetic head. Despite that, dislocations do occur.
Dislocations are most likely to occur within the first few weeks of the operation. It may be caused by one or a combination of the following:
  1. Mal-orientation of the prosthesis—especially excessive retroversion of the femoral prosthesis in the case of a replacement via the posterior approach.
  2. Infection.
  3. Loosening of the femoral prosthesis—especially the noncemented AM prosthesis. If the prosthesis was not fixed with reasonable stability by “press-fit”, the prosthesis might rotate within the medullary cavity, causing mal-orientation.
  4. Neuro-muscular disorders, e.g. Parkinsonism, epilepsy.
  5. Incompetence of the abductor muscles due to injury or the fracture of the greater trochanter (Fig. 30.6).
These factors must be excluded, especially in recurrent dislocations. Closed reduction should be attempted with the patient under anesthesia with full muscle relaxation. Oftentimes, closed reduction fails because the patient was not put on a general anesthesia with mechanical ventilation, or a regional anesthesia with inadequate motor block.
The joint should be carefully screened with fluoroscopy to detect malorientation and/or loosening. Furthermore, the hip should be aspirated to exclude deep infection.
Maloriented or loose prosthesis should be revised with a cemented prosthesis, which include cementing a loose AM prosthesis in correct orientation.
 
INFECTION
Most of these patients are old and possibly ridden with multiple comorbidities, rendering them susceptible to deep infections.
Deep infections are usually diagnosed by a rising white blood cell count, rising ESR or CRP. Clinical suspicion should prompt an aspiration and culture.
Confirmed infections warrant prompt implant removal, debridement, lavage, and use of antibiotic beads or cement spacers made of cement with antibiotic. Intravenous antibiotics administered via a peripherally inserted central catheter (PICC) is helpful as these are more reliably available for drug injection at regular intervals.
 
PROTRUSION
Hemireplacement arthroplasties may sink/subside in the femur especially when the bone quality is poor. If the prosthesis is cemented in the femur thereby preventing subsidence, the prosthesis is prone to protrude in the acetabulum when the bone quality is poor (Fig. 30.7).379
Figure 30.6: An 82-year-old lady presented with recurrent dislocation of cemented Thompson prosthesis done for fracture neck of femur. Radiographs suggest soft tissue laxity (note the separation between pelvis and prosthesis). A fracture of greater trochanter was confirmed during surgery
Figure 30.7: Acetabular protrusion of cemented nonmodular bipolar prosthesis in a 78-year-old man within 2 years of the surgery
 
Results
The early mortality rate (before 90 days), following hemiarthroplasty for the femoral neck fractures varies between 5 to 23% which aggravates to 17-34% at one year.12,13 Mortality rates are comparable between total hip arthroplasty and hemiarthroplasty but higher dislocation and reoperation rates have been reported after hemiarthroplasty.380
References
  1. BhattacharyyaT, KovalK. Unipolar Versus Bipolar Hemiarthroplasty for Femoral Neck Fractures: Is There a Difference? Journal of Orthopaedic Trauma. 2009;23(6):426–7.
  1. CalderSJ, AndersonGH, JaggerC, HarperWM, GreggPJ. Unipolar or bipolar prosthesis for displaced intracapsular hip fracture in octogenarians: a randomised prospective study. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery – British Volume. 1996;78(3):391–4.
  1. HarrisWH, RushfeldtPD, CarlsonCE, SchollerJ, MannRW. Pressure distribution in the hip and selection of hemiarthro-plasty. In: The Hip, Proceedings of theThird Open Scientic Meeting of the Hip Society, Mosby;  1975. pp. 93-8.
  1. HoganN, AzharA, BradyO. An improved acetabular cementing technique in total hip arthroplasty. Aspiration of the iliac wing. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery – British Volume. 2005;87(9):1216–9.
  1. JefferyJA, OngTJ. Femoral head measurement in hemiarthroplasty: assessment of interobserver error using 3 measuring systems. Injury. 2000;31(3):135–8.
  1. KosashviliY, AcksteinD, SafirO, RanY, LoebenbergMI, ZivYB. Hemiarthroplasty of the hip for fracture-what is the appropriate sized femoral head? Injury. 2008;39(2):232–7.
  1. MiyamotoRG, KaplanKM, LevineBR, EgolKA, ZuckermanJD. Surgical management of hip fractures: an evidence-based review of the literature. I: femoral neck fractures. Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons. 2008;16(10):596–607.
  1. ParkerMJ, GurusamyK. Arthroplasties (with and without bone cement) for proximal femoral fractures in adults. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews. 2006;3:CD001706.
  1. SchreursBW, BuschVJ, WeltenML, VerdonschotN, SloofTJ, GardeniersJW. Cetabular reconstruction with impaction bone-grafting and a cemented cup in patients younger than fifty years old. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery – American Volume. 2004;86-A(11):2385-92.
  1. SharifKM, ParkerMJ. Austin Moore hemiarthroplasty: technical aspects and their effects on outcome, in patients with fractures of the neck of femur. Injury. 2002;33(5):419–22.
  1. SinghGK, DeshmukhRG. Uncemented Austin-Moore and cemented Thompson unipolar hemiarthroplasty for displaced fracture neck of femur-comparison of complications and patient satisfaction. Injury. 2006;32(2):169–74.
  1. LennoxIAC, McLauchlanJ. Comparing the mortality and morbidity of cemented and uncemented hemiarthroplasties. Injury. 1993;24(3):185–6.
  1. CalderSJ, AndersonGH, JaggerC, et al. Unipolar or bipolar prosthesis for displaced intracapsular hip fracture in octogenarians: a randomized prospective study. J Bone Joint Surg (Br). 1996;78(3):391–4.
  1. HopleyC, StengelD, EkkernkampA, WichM. Primary total hip arthroplasty versus hemiarthroplasty for displaced intracapsular hip fractures in older patients: systematic review. BMJ. 2010;340:C2332.

Dual Mobility Cup for Fracture Neck of Femur31

Vijay Kumar, Rajesh Malhotra
 
Introduction
The results of conservative treatment of elderly patients suffering from fracture neck of femur are poor with local complications reported in as high as 42% of cases.1 In elderly patients, osteosynthesis has been reported to be associated with an increased risk of reoperation as compared to hip replacement.2 These elderly patients have better functional results after joint replacement as they can be mobilized and allowed weight bearing immediately after operation.3,4 Hemiarthroplasty is an option for elderly patients who are moribund or physically inactive. Total hip arthroplasty is the implant of choice in the elderly active patients to achieve good clinical results.5,6
There is a high incidence of dislocation reported with total hip arthroplasty done for fracture neck of femur.7 The cause for dislocation may be an increased ligament laxity in hip fractures and also the fact that the capsule is not as fibrotic as in the arthritic hips. In addition these elderly patients have less muscular control and thereby an increased propensity to fall.7,8 The surgical factors such as surgical approach and capsular repair, implant position and orientation as well choice of implant also influence the dislocation rate.9,10
A large femoral head or a bipolar acetabular component reduces the risk of dislocation.11
Constrained acetabular cups implanted in patients with instability have been associated with a high rate of loosening as well as cases of dissociation of the liner/cup interface, failure by breakage, and excessive polyethylene wear.12-15
Bosquet ( 1976 ) in France designed the ‘Dual mobility cup’ which is also known as the Tripolar cup. This system consists of a acetabular cup, liner and femoral head.
 
Dual Mobility Principle
The dual-mobility cup is a tripolar cup with a fixed acetabular metal cup (cemented or cementless), which articulates with a large mobile polyethylene liner. A standard head (usually 22 or 28 mm) is inserted into the polyethylene liner. The polyethylene insert is mobile around the head of the prosthesis. The head is held captive by a retentive collar of the polyethylene liner. The polyethylene insert is completely free to move inside the highly polished metal shell.
There is movement occurring at 2 interfaces, with preferential articulation (α), between the head and the inside of the polyethylene insert which itself then articulates 382within the concavity of the metal shell when the neck comes into contact with the retentive collar (β) (Fig. 31.1A). The majority of the motion is the first mobility whereas the second mobility only occurs only in large amplitudes such as when seated or going upstairs.
The mobile insert also effectively increases the head diameter. The effective head size is that of the polyethylene insert, so the jump gap to dislocation is large. For example, a 53-mm cup will have an insert of 47 mm.
A favorable head neck ratio further reduces the risk of dislocation. The head to neck ratio will influence when the second mobility comes into action.
The range of motion before impingement of the prosthetic neck on either the shell or surrounding bone is therefore much more than can be achieved with standard implants with 22, 2, 28 or 32 mm heads, and size for size, still compares favorably to the larger ceramic on ceramic or metal on metal total hip replacements. The range of motion will also be influenced by diameter, neck thickness and cup orientation (Fig. 31.1B)
The tripolar cup is manufactured by various manufacturers, for example, Polar CupTM Smith and Nephew, Active ArticulationTM Biomet, Captiv and CaptioleTM Evolutis (Fig. 31.2).
 
Indications/Contraindications
 
INDICATIONS
  1. Displaced fractured neck of femur in elderly patients who are still active and require a total hip replacement.
  2. Primary hip replacements in:
    • Active elderly patients (>70)
    • Noncompliant patients (dementia, alcoholism, etc.)
    • Tumors
    Figures 31.1A and B: (A) Dual mobility principle; (B) Range of motion of dual mobility cup can not be achieved with standard articulations nor resurfacing or large fixed bearing heads
    383
    Figure 31.2: Mobility cup system Captiv and CaptioleTM Evolutis dual mobility cup
    • Joint laxity (neuromuscular disorders, age)
    • Dysplasia and congenital dislocations
    • Rheumatoid arthritis.
  3. Revision hip replacements especially in patients with increased risk of dislocation such as trochanteric nonunion or osteolysis.
  4. Revision hip arthroplasty being done for recurrent dislocation of hip.
 
CONTRAINDICATIONS
  • Acute or chronic infections, local or systemic
  • Severe damage to muscles, nerves or vessels that are a risk to the affected extremity
  • Associated disorders that could interfere with the functioning of the implant.
 
Surgical Technique
Preoperative templating is done to assess implant size. Templating helps to locate the center of rotation of acetabulum, size and position of the cup. The technique described below shows the insertion of a Captiv and Captiole™ Evolutis Dual Mobility Cup.
The Dual Mobility Cup can be implanted by any conventional surgical approach to the hip. In the illustrated surgical technique, the hip has been exposed by the posterior approach (Fig. 31.3). The fracture site is located and femoral head removed from the hip.
The femur is prepared in accordance with the stem being implanted.
The acetabulum is then exposed and soft tissues removed from the margins of the acetabulum so as to have a wide exposure (Fig. 31.4).
The acetabulum is reamed using sequential reamers. Start with the smallest size to reach the true acetabular floor (Fig. 31.5).
Reaming is continued using increased diameters diameter reamers in 1 mm increments, respecting final anteversion and inclination until the cartilage layer is fully removed and subchondral bone bleeds uniformly (Fig. 31.6).
Excessive reaming of the periphery should be avoided as this would result in thinning of the anterior or posterior column bone of the acetabulum thereby compromising the fixation.
After the preparation of the acetabular cavity, a trial cup of the same size as the last reamer used, is screwed on the trial shell handle. 384
Figure 31.3: Hip being exposed by posterior approach
Figure 31.4: Exposure of acetabulum after removal of soft tissues from margins
Figure 31.5: Reaming of acetabulum is started with the smallest reamer dircted to reach the true acetabular floor
385
Figure 31.6: Acetabulum is reamed keeping the correct anteversion and inclination
Figure 31.7: Trial cup is impacted confirming the size and fit
The trial cup is impacted into the reamed acetabulum, ensuring a position of 10 to 20° anteversion and 40 to 50° inclination (Fig. 31.7). This trial cup must have a good primary stability and should be tightly fitted into the cavity on its complete circumference.
The definitive cementless acetabular cup is then impacted using 2 part impactor mounted with shell holder corresponding to implant size and finish the impaction with final impactor (Fig. 31.8). In case a cemented cup is being used, the acetabular bed is prepared dry and drill holes made in the acetabulum. The cement is then placed and then pressurized in the acetabulum and cup impacted with the corresponding handle (Figs 31.9A to C). A trial inlay is then inserted and using trial heads on femoral rasp or trial stem, stability (Figs 31.9A and B) and leg length assessed (Figs 31.9C and 31.10).
The femoral rasp is extracted and definitive femoral stem is implanted.
The polyethylene inlay, (Fig. 31.11) corresponding to the impacted cup size is assembled with the femoral head using a press (Figs 31.12A to D). The inlay is placed on the supporting plastic and the femoral head is put on the inlay's opening.386
Figure 31.8: Acetabular cup is impacted using impactors
Figures 31.9A to C: (A) Cemented acetabular cup being held by the 2 part impactor; (B) Cemented acetabular cup has been cemented in acetabulum; (C) Trial reduction using trial polyethylene inlay in case of cemented cup
387
Figure 31.10: Trial reduction using trial polyethylene inlay in case of cementless cup
Figure 31.11: Polyethylene inlay
The upper plastic bit is pushed down to seize them. T-Handle is then turned until there is a snapping sound and head is fully locked inside the inlay and moves freely (Fig. 31.13).
The femoral head is impacted on stem's taper neck (Figs 31.14A and B). The “head and inlay” assembly is then reduced into the cup (Figs 31.15A and B).
The wound is closed in layers.
 
Complications
A long-term specific complication of dual mobility cups is “intraprosthetic dislocation”.16 Intraprosthetic dislocation occurs when the neck of the femoral stem wears the retentive collar of the mobile polyethylene, and the head dislocates from the polyethylene inlay. This liner wear at the head-liner interface also leads to internal subluxation and an incongruent articulation between the head and the metal cup resulting in the development of excessive metallosis.388
Figures 31.12A to D: Femoral head being assembled in the polyethylene inlay using press
Figure 31.13: After the femoral head is assembled into polyethylene inlay, check that the head is locked and moves freely
389
Figures 31.14A and B: The femoral head and inlay assembly is impacted on femoral stem taper
Figures 31.15A and B: Final reduction of the femoral head and inlay assembly into dual mobility cup
There are two mechanisms causing this wear:
Homogenous wear: The polyethylene inlay, moves normally, wear is all around the retentive rim (Fig. 31.16A).
Asymmetric wear: The polyethylene inlay tilts and is blocked in one position, the head dislocates in a superior position, the inferior part of the polyethylene inlay has an angular sweeping type of wear from contact with the neck (Fig. 31.16B).
Such wear is usually rare, of late onset and only affects young patients. The wear was seen more often with 22,2 mm heads which had more impingement. It is much less with smooth thin, round necks. It is even rarer now that the 3rd articulation (polyethylene inlay collar) is chamfered and more retentive than early design. It is advised to avoid femoral prostheses with necks which are coarse, thick, not round and have holes or other asperities. The preferred femoral stems for use with dual mobility cups are the ones with thin round, polished necks and 28 mm heads (above size 47/49) which have a higher Head to Neck Ratio (HNR) increasing range of motion before impingement. 390
Figures 31.16A and B: (A) Intra prosthetic dislocation—homogeneous wear; (B) Intraprosthetic dislocation—asymmetric wear
Tripolar systems should be used with caution in young and active patients because of lack of long-term results with regard to wear and aseptic loosening, and the lack of clinical data with high levels of evidence [40].17
 
Results
In a multicenter prospective study conducted in France,18 Two hundred and fourteen hips in 214 patients suffering from fracture neck femur with a mean age of 83 years (range, 70–103 years) were treated with arthroplasty using a dual mobility cup. At a follow-up of 9 months, the mortality rate was 19%. Two patients (1%) had early postoperative infection, successfully treated with lavage and antibiotics. Three patients (1.4%), operated through a posterior approach, presented with postoperative dislocation, all of which were posterior. Reduction was performed through closed external manipulation under general anesthesia. There was no recurrence of dislocation.
Tarasevicius et al19compared dislocation rates of tripolar cups with that of standard cups in patients undergoing THA for femoral neck fractures. Authors analyzed the dislocation rate in 56 consecutive patients operated with conventional (fixed-liner) cemented acetabular components to that of 42 consecutive patients operated with dual articulation acetabular components. In this series, all the patients were operated upon via posterior approach and were followed up to one year postoperatively. No dislocation was reported in the group with dual mobility compared to eight cases (14%) of dislocation in the group with conventional fixed liners.
 
Illustrative Case
A 65-year-old male was involved in a road traffic accident following which he was unable to bear weight on both lower limbs. The examination revealed external rotation deformity of both lower limbs as well as tenderness at the base of Scarpa's triangle on both sides. The radiographs revealed trans cervical fracture neck of femur on both sides (Figs 31.17A and B). Bilateral total hip replacement was done using cementless dual mobility cups (Figs 31.18A to C). Patient was mobilized next day and continues to enjoy good function without complications.391
Figures 31.17A and B: (A) Anteroposterior; (B) Lateral radiograph showing bilateral femoral neck fractures
Figures 31.18A to C: Radiographs after bilateral dual mobility cup with cementless stem
References
  1. BlomfeldtR, TornkvistH, PonzerS, SoderqvistA, TidermarkJ. Comparison of internal fixation with total hip replacement for displaced femoral neck fractures. Randomized, controlled trial performed at four years. J Bone Joint Surg (Am) 2005;87:1680–8.
  1. WangJ, JiangB, MarshallRJ, ZhangP. Arthroplasty or internal fixation for displaced femoral neck fractures: which is the optimal alternative for elderly patients? A meta-analysis. Int Orthop 2009;33:1179–87.
  1. GjertsenJE, VinjeT, LieSA, EngesaeterLB, HavelinLI, FurnesO, et al. Patient satisfaction, pain, and quality of life four months after displaced femoral neck fractures: a comparison of 663 fractures treated with internal fixation and 906 with bipolar hemiarthroplasty reported to the Norwegian Hip Fracture Register. Acta Orthop. 2008;79:594–601.
  1. AleemIS, KaranicolasPJ, BhandariM. Arthroplasty versus internal fixation of femoral neck fractures: a clinical decision analysis. Ortop Traumatol Rehabil. 2009;11:233–41.
  1. BlomfeldtR, TornkvistH, ErikssonK, SoderqvistA, PonzerS, TidermarkJ. A randomized controlled trial comparing bipolar hemiarthroplasty with total hip replacement for displaced intra-capsular fractures of the femoral neck in elderly patients. J Bone Joint Surg (Br) 2007;89:160–5.
  1. MacaulayW, NellansKW, GarvinKL, IorioR, HealyWL, RosenwasserMP, et al. Prospective randomized clinical trial comparing hemiarthroplasty to total hip arthroplasty in the treatment of displaced femoral neck fractures: winner of the Dorr Award. J Arthroplasty 2008;23:2–8.
  1. LorioR, HealyWL, LemosDW, ApplebyD, LucchesiCA, SalehKJ. Displaced femoral neck fractures in the elderly: outcomes and cost effectiveness. Clin Orthop. 2001, 383:229-42.
  1. HudsonJI, KenzoraJE, HebelJR, GardnerJF, ScherlisL, EpsteinRS, MagazinerJS: Eight-year outcome associated with clinical options in the management of femoral neck fractures. Clin Orthop. 1998, 348:59-66.
  1. MorreyBF. Instability after total hip arthroplasty. Orthop Clin North A. 1992;23(2):237–48.
  1. EnocsonA, HedbeckCJ, TidermarkJ, PetterssonH, PonzerS, LapidusLJ. Dislocation of total hip replacement in patients with fractures of the femoral neck. Acta Orthop. 2009; 80(2):184–9.
  1. LeightonRK, SchmidtAH, CollierP, TraskK. Advances in the treatment of intracapsular hip fractures in the elderly. Injury. 2007;38(Suppl 3):S24–34.
  1. PattynC, DeHaan R, KloeckA, VanMaele G, DeSmet K. Complications encountered with the use of constrained acetabular prostheses in total hip arthroplasty. J Arthroplasty. 2010;25:287–94.
  1. FrickaKB, MarshallA, PaproskyWG. Constrained liners in revision total hip arthroplasty: an overuse syndrome: in the affirmative. J Arthroplasty. 2006;21:121–5.
  1. Williams JTJr, RaglandPS, ClarkeS. Constrained components for the unstable hip following total hip arthroplasty: a literature review. Int Orthop. 200731273–7. doi:10.1007/s00264-006-0191-y.
  1. AndersonMJ, MurrayWR, SkinnerHB. Constrained acetabular components. J Arthroplasty. 1994;9:17–23.
  1. Aron Grazioli and Eugene Teow Hin Ek and Hannes Andreas Rüdiger Biomechanical concept and clinical outcome of dual mobility cups. International Orthopaedics (SICOT). 2012;36:2411–8.
  1. LautridouC, LebelB, BurdinG, VielpeauC. Survival of the cementless bousquet dual mobility cup: minimum 15-year follow-up of 437 total hip arthroplasties. Rev Chir Orthop Reparatrice Appar Mot. 2008;94:731–9.
  1. AdamP, PhilippeR, EhlingerM, RocheO, BonnometF, MoleD, FessyMH. Dual mobility cups hip arthroplasty as a treatment for displaced fracture of the femoral neck in the elderly. A prospective, systematic, multicenter study with specific focus on postoperative dislocation. Orthop Traumatol Surg Res. 2012;98:296–300.
  1. TaraseviciusS, BuseviciusM, RobertssonO, WingstrandH. Dual mobility cup reduces dislocation rate after arthroplasty for femoral neck fracture. BMC Musculoskelet Disord. 2010;11:175.

Distal Femoral Fractures: Locking Plate Fixation32

Frankie Leung, Lau Tak-Wing
 
Introduction
Distal femoral fractures occur as a result of either a low-energy trauma in elderly with osteoporosis or a high-energy trauma with more severe intra-articular involvement. Intra-articular fractures involving femoral condyles are particularly difficult to treat and are more prone to unsatisfactory functional outcome and future early degeneration if an accurate articular surface reconstruction is not achieved.
In the past, most distal femoral fractures were treated with nonoperative means with high incidence of complications including nonunion and malunion. Joint function may not be restored adequately. Nevertheless, the goals of treatment of an articular or periarticular fracture are to achieve anatomical reduction at the joint surface, restoration of alignment, length and rotation as well as stable fixation. This will facilitate early range of motion training and strengthening.
Distal femoral fracture also occurs commonly as a fragility fracture. Among the various osteoporotic fractures those around distal femur are rather challenging to orthopedic surgeons. The thin cortices and lack of cancellous bone substance are commonly encountered and fixation is difficult. Different treatment methods have been used but malunion and nonunion are not uncommon. Worse still, complications such as joint stiffness, muscle wasting and deep vein thrombosis are often seen. The idea of indirect reduction and splintage has prompted the use of a plate in a similar manner as a nail. This led to the development of minimally invasive plate osteosynthesis (MIPO) and a less-invasive stabilization system (LISS)1-12 or locking compression plate (LCP). The fixed-angle locking device adds extra rigidity to the fracture site by acting as a single unit, thus prevent early collapse and malunion. Additional bone grafting may not be necessary.
 
Indications/Contraindications
The goal of management is same as that of any weight-bearing intra-articular fractures, i.e. anatomical reduction of the fracture, limb alignment, articular surface congruity, stable internal fixation and early mobilization. As there is advancement in biological fixation methods, using LCP for operative treatment for distal femoral fractures should be considered as a first choice of fixation.394
 
Surgical Technique
 
Anesthesia
General anesthesia or spinal anesthesia can be used.
 
Position and Need for intraoperative imaging
  • The patient is placed in a supine position on a radiolucent table. The buttock of the affected limb can be supported to decrease the external rotation of the affected limb. The popliteal fossa needs to be supported by enough padding to flex the knee to about 30 to 45 degree.
  • For extra-articular fracture, a lateral incision over lateral femoral condyle is required. For intra-articular fracture that needs open reduction, a lateral parapatella approach is preferred.
 
Reduction techniques
The fracture is reduced with manual traction under image intensifier (Fig. 32.1). The length, axis and rotation are the key factors for good reduction. If manual traction is not adequate, a femoral distractor applied over anterior or lateral side can aid in restoring the correct length as well as maintaining the reduction (Fig. 32.2).
Figure 32.1: Fracture is reduced with manual traction under image intensifier
Figure 32.2: A femoral distractor can aid is restoring length and maintaining reduction
395
 
Fixation and plating
  • A LISS or Distal femur-LCP (DF-LCP) can be used. For DF-LCP, the proximal part can be contoured according to the lateral bowing of the femur.
  • A lateral submuscular tunnel is prepared by either a tunneling instrument or the plate itself. The length of the plate is determined (Fig. 32.3). The optimal plate length should be long enough to span the fracture.
  • The distal locking screws should be placed parallel to the knee joint. The plate should be placed at the slanted flat surface of the lateral condyle (Fig. 32.4)
  • The AP and lateral view of the plate should be confirmed under fluoroscopy. The underside of the plate should be parallel to the posterior cortex of the femur (Fig. 32.5)
  • The distal locking screws are inserted first. The lateral translation of the femur shaft can be adjusted by a positional screw or pulling device. Then the proximal part of the plate is fixed with multiple locking head screws. The need of bicortical screws depends on the bone quality.
Figure 32.3: The length of plate is determined
Figure 32.4: The plate is placed on the slanted flat surface of the lateral condyle
396
Figure 32.5: The underside of plate should be parallel to posterior cortex of femur
Figure 32.6: Fluoroscopy is indispensable to ensure the correct position of plate and screws
  • Before wound closure, the position of the screws and plate are confirmed using fluoroscopy (Fig. 32.6).
 
Closure
The iliotibial band is repaired. Hemostasis is achieved. Suction drain is optional.
 
Postoperative Management
The use of additional external immobilization is usually not necessary active range of motion exercises should be started immediately. The use of continuous passive motion may help in the first few days after the operation. Usually, nonweight walking exercise will be allowed for the first 4 to 6 weeks followed by 4 to 6 weeks of partial weight- bearing walking. Then full weight-bearing walking exercise will be followed.
 
Complications
Complications are not uncommon. In our series, there was no infection. However, there were two cases with failure of fixation, which occurred early in our series. Both were loosening of the proximal fixation of LISS. In both cases, the relatively short five-hole plates were used instead of longer plates because the fractures involved the relatively distal part of the femur. Revision operations were performed with revision of the proximal femur using bicortical screws. The distal fixation was found to be secure in both cases. Both fractures finally united.
Schuetz et al2 also published their results in a multicentered trial. Uneventful fracture union was observed in 85% of patients. Flexion was on average 80% of the uninjured side. Of the 62 patients, 6 required bone grafting and 3 refixation was done as a result of implant loosening.
 
Result
The results of open reduction and internal fixation is dramatically improved over the last two decades with more biologic approach in soft tissue management and 397improvement in implants from condylar blade plates, DCS to more advanced fixed angle stable (locking) plates.
The advent of the locking plate system provides a more secure and reliable fixation of osteoporotic bones. A biomechanical study conducted by Marti in Switzerland used cadaver femoral bone to compare the biomechanical properties of LISS with two conventional plate systems: condylar buttress plate and dynamic condylar screw. It showed that the monocortical screw fixation system with angular stability had an enhanced ability to withstand high loads compared with the two other systems. Some other earlier clinical studies showed a satisfactory outcome with union rate more than 90%.
Early union has been reported in 93 to 100% of fractures and infections in only 0 to 2% of cases with the techniques of indirect fracture reduction and internal fixation using 95 degree fixed angle devices compared with previous methods of fixation in managing distal femoral fractures.13,14
With the advent of LCP and LISS, more promising results are shown in the literature. Many authors15-17 showed >93% union rate with rapid mobilization, low infection rate after indirect reduction and fixation with LCP. The authors attributed the success rate to more biological, stable fixation with LCP and strict adherence to principles of fracture fixation using LCP. Subsequently, Ricci et al16 used the method of LISS to treat 26 distal femoral fractures and their result showed no nonunion, no infection and early healing of fracture. The same results are reproduced by Weight and Collinge17 in 27 patients of unstable distal femoral fracture using the same principle of fixation.
In a clinical study conducted at the institution of the authors, 16 patients with 16 fractures were recruited. The mean age was 75 years with a range from 62 to 101 years. The majority of patients had low-energy trauma with 15 patients having falls on level ground. One patient was knocked down by a vehicle in a road traffic accident and 13 patients had isolated injuries while three had multiple fractures. According to the AO classification, eight patients had type A, three type B and five type C fractures. Concerning the severity of pain, nine patients had no pain, three had pain when weight- bearing, two had pain at rest, and two had pain requiring regular oral analgesic. Concerning the range of motion, six patients had full, nine had slightly limited and one had severely limited range-of-knee motion. Concerning the function of lower limbs, the Oxford knee score with a full score of 60 was used. Scores ranged from 22 to 60 with an average of 46. All fractures united with an average union time of 30 (16–68) weeks. No bone graft was used.
 
Summary/Conclusion
The importance of anatomical reconstruction of joint surface and restoration of alignment, length and rotation is of paramount importance in the fixation of distal femoral fractures. This can be achieved with modern locking implants. A sound knowledge and thorough understanding of the operative technique and a careful preoperative planning are still necessary. Fixation with locking implants represents an excellent, safe procedure for the treatment of almost all distal femoral fracture types including periprosthetic fractures of the distal femur. In general, there is no need for primary cancellous bone grafting.
 
Illustrative Case
A 79-year-old lady was admitted to the hospital after a fall on level ground at home. (Figs 32.7A and B).
Nonoperative treatment with closed reduction and plastering would be difficult to maintain the alignment well. It commonly results in redisplacement of the fracture and 398pressure sores.
Figures 32.7A and B: Anteroposterior and lateral X-rays after injury showing intra-articular comminuted fracture left distal femur
Figures 32.8A and B: Postoperative anteroposterior and lateral X-rays showing articular congruity and good fracture alignment
Complications like malunion, nonunion as well as skin impingement by bony sharp ends are not uncommon. Surgical fixation would offer the benefit of early mobilization, thus preventing limb contractures and also infective complications like chest infection and urinary tract infection.
Distal femoral locking plate fixation was done. Postoperative X-rays were satisfactory (Figs 32.8A and B). Good functional recovery was seen with pain free good range of motion (Figs 32.9A and B).399
Figures 32.9A and B: Patient enjoyed pain-free and good range of movement at 6 months time
References
  1. WongMK, LeungF, ChowSP. Treatment of distal femoral fractures in the elderly using a less invasive plating technique. Int Orthop. 2005;29(2):117–20.
  1. SchuetzM, MuellerM, RegazzoniP, HoentzschD, KretteckC, van der WerkenC, et al. Use of the less invasive stabilization system (LISS) in patients with distal femoral (AO33) fractures: a prospective multicenter study. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg. 2005;125(2):102–8.
  1. FankhauserF, GruberG, SchippingerG, BoldinC, HoferHP, GrechenigW, et al. Minimally-invasive treatment of distal femoral fractures with the LISS (less invasive stabilization system). A prospective study of 30 fractures with a follow-up of 20 months. Acta Orthop Scand. 2004;75:56–60.
  1. FriggR, AppenzellerA, ChristensenR, FrenkA, GilbertS, SchavanR. The development of the distal femur LISS. Injury. 2001;32(Suppl 3):24–31.
  1. HenrySL. Supracondylar femur fractures treated percutaneously. Clin Orthop. 2000;375:51–9.
  1. KregorPJ, StannardJ, ZlowodzkiM, ColePA, AlonsoJ. Distal femoral fracture fixation utilizing the LISS: the technique and the early results. Injury. 2001;32(Suppl 3):32–47.
  1. KrettekC, MullerM, MiclauT. Evolution of minimally invasive plate osteosynthesis (MIPO) in the femur. Injury. 2001;32(Suppl 3):14–23.
  1. MartiA, FankhauserC, FrenkA, CordeyJ, GasserB. Biomechanical evaluation of the less invasive stabilization system for the internal fixation of distal femur fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2001;15:482–7.
  1. O'BrienPJ, MeekRN, BlachutPA, BroeknuyseHM. Fractures of distal femur. In: Rockwood and Greens fractures in adults, 5th edn. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins;  2001. pp. 1731-73.
  1. SchandelmaierP, PartenheimerA, KoenemannB, GrunOA, KrettekC. Distal femoral fractures and LISS stabilization. Injury. 2001;32(Suppl 3):55–63.
  1. SchutzM, MullerM, KrettekC, HontzschD, RegazzoniP, GanzR, et al. Minimally invasive fracture stabilization of distal femoral fractures with the LISS: A prospective multicenter study. Results of a clinical study with special emphasis on difficult cases. Injury. 2001;32(Suppl 3):48–54.
  1. StoverM. Distal femoral fractures: Current treatment, results and problems. Injury. 2001;32 (Suppl 3):3–13.
  1. BolhofnerBR, CarmenB, CliffordP. The results of open reduction and internal fixation of distal femur fractures using a biologic (indirect) reduction technique. J Orthop Trauma. 1996;10(6):372–7.
  1. OstrumRF, GeelC. Indirect reduction and internal fixation of supracondular femur fractures without bone graft. J Orthop Trauma. 1995;9(4):278–84.
  1. KregorPJ, StannardJ, ZlowodzkiM, et al. Distal femoral fracture fixation utilizing the less invasive stabilization system (LISS): the technique and early results. Injury. 2001;32(Suppl 3):SC32–47.
  1. RicciAR, YueJJ, TaffetR, et al. Less invasive stabilization system for treatment of distal femur fractures. Am J Orthop. 2004;33(5):250–55.
  1. WeightM, CollingeC. Early results of the less invasive stabilization system for mechanically unstable fractures of the distal femur (AO/OTA types A2, A3, C2, and C3). J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18(8):503–8.

The Hoffa Fracture33

Ajit J Deshmukh, Rajiv M Arora
 
Introduction
“Hoffa” fracture refers to a fracture of the femoral condyle in the coronal plane. Although first described by Friedrich Busch in 1869, it is named after Albert Hoffa who reported on it in 1904.1 Overall, Hoffa fractures are uncommon and considering the plane and location of the fracture, it is not surprising that they are often overlooked at initial clinical and radiographic evaluation.2
 
Epidemiology
Distal femoral fractures account for 7% of all femur fractures in adults3 and the Hoffa pattern appears to be even rarer. Hoffa fractures appear to be more prevalent in adults, however, pediatric cases have also been reported.4,5 They occur as isolated injuries as well as in association with supracondylar-intercondylar distal femoral fractures. A report by Nork et al reported coexisting Hoffa fractures in 38% of supracondylar-intercondylar fractures.6 Association with femoral shaft fracture,7,8 extensor mechanism disruption,8,9 knee dislocation9,10 as well as patellar fracture-dislocation11 has been reported. The lateral femoral condyle appears to be more frequently involved than the medial.2,6,12-15 In the series of Nork et al, 85% Hoffa fractures involved the lateral side and 15% involved the medial side.6 Unilateral bicondylar Hoffa fractures are known to occur8,16-18 so are open Hoffa fractures.6,8 Open injuries are highly likely with bicondylar Hoffa fractures.6
 
Mechanism of Injury
Hoffa fractures are thought to be caused by a shearing or tangential force over the posterior femoral condyles. Those associated with supracondylar-intercondylar fractures of the distal femur are invariably associated with high velocity trauma. Most commonly reported mechanisms include motor vehicle and motorcycle accidents, pedestrian-motor vehicle accidents and fall from height. Lewis et al noted that majority of patients in their series were riding motor-cycles at the time of injury with the knee in 90 degree flexion at the time of receiving the impact on the lateral condyle.2
 
Clinical Presentation
With isolated Hoffa fracture, knee examination invariably identifies effusion consistent with hemarthrosis, tenderness, as well as subtle varus or valgus instability. With 402supracondylar-intercondylar fractures, the Hoffa fracture may be detected only incidentally, during radiographic evaluation. Because most Hoffa fractures are associated with high energy trauma, it is always worthwhile to rule out concomitant injuries to the hip, pelvis, femur, patella with extensor mechanism, tibia, knee ligaments and popliteal vessels.19,20
 
Radiographic Evaluation
Standard anteroposterior (AP), lateral and sometimes, oblique knee radiographs are needed. Radiographs may sometimes be unremarkable, especially when the fracture is undisplaced.21 On AP view, subtle incongruency in the femoral joint line is sometimes seen, with or without varus/valgus malalignment depending on the condyle involved. It is usually possible to see the fracture in the lateral view by following the condylar outline, where discontinuity or a step is seen. However, on a true lateral view, the femoral condyles are not superimposed, and if the fractured condyle is shortened and migrated, the condyles may overlap. This can give an erroneous impression of a poor radiographic view of a normal knee.22 Oblique views can also be of help, however, sometimes, a CT scan may be necessary (Fig. 33.1).
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) may be helpful for evaluating associated injuries to ligamentous or meniscal structures.
 
Classification
The Hoffa (coronal) fracture falls into type B3 of Muller's classification scheme23 and type 33.b3.2 as per AO/OTA classification.23,24 Letenneur et al (1978) classified Hoffa fractures into 3 subtypes based on the distance of the fracture from the posterior cortex of the femoral shaft (Fig. 33.2).12
Type I: Fracture is flush with the posterior cortex of the shaft.
Type II: Fracture line lies posterior to posterior cortex of the shaft. Subdivided into types IIa, IIb and IIc depending from the distance of fracture line from the posterior cortex. Type IIa is closest while IIc is most distant (posterior) from the posterior cortex.
Type III: Oblique fracture line.
Lewis et al to study the influence of soft tissue attachments on displacement and blood supply of lateral condylar Hoffa fractures2 and reported that the fracture line in type I may pass on either side of the anterior cruciate and lateral collateral ligament, but the lateral head of gastrocnemius and popliteus remain attached to the condylar fragment.
Figure 33.1: CT scan of a patient with Letenneur type IIC Hoffa fragment of the lateral condyle
403
Figure 33.2: Letenneur classification of Hoffa fractures
Type II fracture fragment may be completely devoid of soft tissue attachments as the fracture line moves more posterior, with type IIc least likely to have any. The type III fragment is probably the most vascular with all four attachments in place. However, this report failed to validate classification of Letenneur et al.
 
Treatment
The results of nonoperative treatment are poor.2,22,25-27 This is due to high shearing forces at the fracture site in sagittal (flexion/extension) as well as in coronal plane (varus/valgus). It is generally accepted that surgical management with open reduction and internal fixation is the gold standard for management of Hoffa fractures.2,12,22,26,28 There has also been a report of arthroscopically assisted reduction and internal fixation of two Hoffa fractures.29
 
Choice of Implants
The choice of implants is fairly limited. Partially threaded cancellous screws applied in the “lag” mode are ideal for fixation. The choice of implants include 3.5 mm, 4 mm, 4.5 mm and 6.5 mm partially threaded cancellous screws as well as Herbert screws. Appropriate antiglide plates can also be used when situation demands. Jarit et al, in a biomechanical cadaveric study found fixation with posteroanterior lag screws to be more stable than anteroposteriorly placed screws.30 However, to what extent this finding can be translated to clinical practice, is not certain.
 
Surgical Technique
It is important to look for the Hoffa fragment accompanying supracondylar-intercondylar fractures, as the surgical approach and implant choice may be affected by this finding. If the lateral condyle is coronally split, the exposure would remain the same, but it would be prudent not to use the dynamic condylar screw and use a cobra or condylar buttress type plate or LISS plate instead. The medial condyle is difficult to access through the lateral incision made for plate osteosynthesis, and in that case, another incision may be made anteromedially to reduce and fix the Hoffa fragment. In any case, however, all major condylar fragments should be fixed with lag screws and condylar geometry restored prior to fixation of the supracondylar fracture.404
Figure 33.3: Intraoperative temporary fracture stabilization by K-wires in a case of bicondylar Hoffa fractures. Note the “joy-stick” K-wire in the fracture fragment
 
Authors' Preferred Method
The patient is placed supine on a radiolucent table top and tourniquet applied. An angle frame of bolster to keep the knee in about 90 degrees of flexion is desirable. For an isolated medial Hoffa fracture, we prefer to use a midline incision with medial parapatellar arthrotomy. For the lateral Hoffa fracture, a lateral incision is used. Some authors have recommended a lateral parapatellar arthrotomy which is a reasonable alternative.22 Once the fracture is exposed and routine joint inspection performed, the fracture surfaces are debrided with a curette. Under direct vision, the fragment is reduced and compressed using pointed reduction clamps. A Kirschner wires may be used to “joy-stick” the fracture fragment if needed. Temporary stabilization is then performed using Kirschner wires to help prevent fracture displacement while drilling such that they would not interfere with final screw placement (Fig. 33.3). The aim is to utilize at least two lag screws (depending on the fracture configuration) to achieve stable fixation and interfragmentory compression. Drilling is performed perpendicular to the fracture site and as much away from the patellofemoral joint as possible. Care is taken to avoid posterior perforation while drilling. The use of image intensifier is highly recommended. Screws are then passed with or without the use of washer. Screw heads may be countersunk and screws should be of sufficient length to engage posterior subchondral bone for adequate purchase. The knee should be inspected for associated injuries, checked for stability and range of motion and thoroughly irrigated to remove debris before wound closure is initiated.
 
POSTOPERATIVE MANAGEMENT
Active and passive range of motion exercises may be instituted immediately; however, weight-bearing should be deferred until 8 to 12 weeks after surgery considering high shearing forces on the fracture site. If the fragment is too small or stability of fixation doubtful (as may happen in osteoporotic bone), the knee can be immobilized for 4 to 6 weeks. Follow-up radiographs should be obtained every 4 weeks to monitor progress of fracture union.
 
COMPLICATIONS
Complications include:
  • Loss of reduction or fixation
  • Nonunion of fracture
  • Stiffness and pain405
  • Collateral laxity
  • Progression of arthritis.
 
REVIEW OF LITERATURE AND RESULTS OF OPERATIVE TREATMENT
Considering the rarity of this injury, it is not surprising that literature on its outcomes is limited to either case reports or small case series. A detailed English literature search revealed outcome data on only 52 adult Hoffa fractures from 14 papers.2,5,8-11,13-18,22,28,35 The largest of these was a series of 7 cases.2 In addition, we found reports on 5 bicondylar unilateral Hoffa fractures in 4 papers.8,16-18 one case each of nonunion of an adult25 and pediatric Hoffa fracture,26 and two cases described in radiology literature.21,31 To date, the largest published database of Hoffa fractures comes from Harborview Medical Center, Seattle, Washington, USA.6 The authors found a total of 95 coronal plane fragments associated with 77 of 202 (38%) supracondylar-intercondylar fractures. One patient had bilateral unicondylar Hoffa while 18 extremities had bicondylar unilateral Hoffa fragments. However, there was no information provided on the outcomes of these fractures. In addition, three case reports have indicated presence of this fracture pattern in pediatric population as well.4,5,26
Interestingly, commonly referenced orthopedic fracture management textbooks offer a paucity of information regarding the preferred surgical management of these fractures.32,33 One major text does not even mention this fracture pattern.34
From our own experience as well as from the published outcomes, it is evident that good to excellent outcomes are be obtained with open reduction and stable internal fixation with lag screws. Range of motion of the knee is regained with excellent function and stability.
 
Illustrative Cases
 
CASE 1
A 43-year-old male riding a motorcycle was involved in a head on collision with a car. He suffered multiple skeletal injuries including a closed comminuted distal femur fracture with intercondylar extension and a Hoffa fracture of lateral condyle (Figs 33.4A to C). Due to the peculiar fracture pattern, internal fixation utilizing minimally invasive (sliding) percutaneous plate osteosynthesis (MIPPO) was performed.
Figures 33.4A to D: (A) AP radiograph showing comminuted distal femur fracture as a result of high velocity motorcycle accident; (B and C) Note Hoffa fragment of lateral condyle in lateral and oblique radiographs; (D) Radiograph after stabilization by minimally invasive (sliding) percutaneous plate osteosynthesis (MIPPO) utilizing a long cobra plate. The Hoffa fragment was first fixed through the lateral incision
406
Figures 33.5A and B: (A) Radiograph illustrating 4-month old nonunion of the lateral condylar Hoffa fragment (Letenneur type III) in a 35-year-old male. Patient had received nonoperative treatment in the form of cast immobilization at another center. Note subtle valgus at the knee in AP radiograph and articular incongruity; (B) Radiographs after ORIF using two 6.5 mm “lag” screws
A lateral incision just enough to permit plate insertion was made through which the Hoffa fragment was reduced under vision and stabilized using one 6.5 mm partially threaded cancellous screw. A second screw was avoided to prevent interference with passing other screws through the plate. The desired plate was then introduced and slid through the same lateral incision and screws passed under C arm guidance (Fig. 33.4D). All fractures were healed by 4 months and the patient had gained 105 degrees ROM at the knee.
 
CASE 2
A 35-year-old pedestrian was hit on the knee by a 2 wheeler. No apparent bony injury could be diagnosed at that time. Repeat radiographs at 2 weeks were suspicious for a condylar fracture and the knee was immobilized in a cylinder cast at another centre which was removed at 3 months and full weight bearing was started. The patient failed to improve and was referred to the senior author. Radiographs revealed a non-union of the lateral condylar Hoffa fragment (Letenneur type III), with subtle valgus and articular incongruity at the knee in AP radiograph (Fig. 33.5A). Valgus stress test showed increased medial opening. ORIF was performed using two 6.5 mm cancellous screws (Fig. 33.5B). The fracture surface was freshened and thin cancellous slivers from ipsilateral iliac crest utilized to augment osteosynthesis. No immobilization was given but weight-bearing was refrained for 8 weeks and by 12 weeks the fracture progressed to complete union. ROM was 0-125 degrees.
References
  1. HoffaA. Lehrbuch der Frakturen und Luxationen. Stuttgart: Verlag von Ferdinand Enke;  1904. p. 451.
  1. LewisSL, PozoJL, Muirhead-AllwoodWFG. Coronal fractures of the lateral femoral condyle. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1989;71:118–20.
  1. KovalKJ, ZuckermanJD. Distal Femur in Handbook of Fractures, 2nd edition. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins. 
  1. SamsaniSR, ChellJ. A complex distal femoral epiphyseal injury with a Hoffa's fracture. Injury Int J Care Injured. 2004;35:825–7.
  1. BiauDJM, SchranzPJ. Transverse Hoffa's or deep osteochondral fracture? An unusual fracture of the lateral femoral condyle in a child. Injury Int J Care Injured. 2005;36:862–5.
  1. NorkSE, SeginaDN, AflatoonK, BareiDP, HenleyMB, HoltS, et al. The Association Between Supracondylar-Intercondylar Distal Femoral Fractures and Coronal Plane Fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2005;87:564–9.
  1. MiyamotoR, FornariE, TejwaniNC. Hoffa Fragment Associated with a Femoral Shaft Fracture. A Case Report. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2006;88:2270–4.
  1. CalmetJ, MelladoJM, GarcíaForcada IL, GinéJ. Open bicondylar Hoffa fracture associated with extensor mechanism injury. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18(5):323–5.
  1. ShettyGM, WangJH, KimSK, ParkJH, ParkJW, KimJG, et al. Incarcerated patellar tendon in Hoffa fracture: an unusual cause of irreducible knee dislocation. Knee Surg Sports Traumatol Arthrosc. 2008;16:378–81.
  1. KarimA, RossiterN. Isolated medial uni-condylar Hoffa fracture following traumatic knee dislocation. Injury Extra. 2006;37:12–4.
  1. VaishyaR, SinghAP, DarIT, SinghAP, MittalV. Hoffa fracture with ipsilateral patellar dislocation resulting from household trauma. Can J Surg. 2009;52(1).
  1. LetenneurJ, LabourPE, RogezJM, LignonJ, BainvelJV. Hoffa's fractures. Report of 20 cases. Ann Chir. 197832213–9. (French).
  1. AllmannKH, AltehoeferC, WildangerG, GuflerH, UhlM, Seif el NasrM, et al. Hoffa fracture—a radiologic diagnostic approach. J Belge Radiol. 1996;79:201–2.
  1. OstermannPA, NeumannK, EkkernkampA, MuhrG. Long-term results of unicondylar fractures of the femur. J Orthop Trauma. 1994;8:142–6.
  1. KumarR, MalhotraR. The Hoffa fracture: Three case reports. Journal of Orthopaedic Surgery. 2001;9(2):47–51.
  1. NeogiDS, SinghS, YadavCS, KhanSA. Bicondylar Hoffa fracture-A rarely occurring, commonly missed injury. Injury Extra. 2008;39:296–8.
  1. AgarwalS, GiannoudisPV, SmithRM. Cruciate fracture of the distal femur: the double Hoffa fracture. Injury Int J Care Injured. 2004;35:828–30.
  1. PapadopoulosAX, PanagopoulosA, KarageorgosA, TyllianakisM. Operative Treatment of Unilateral Bicondylar Hoffa Fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18(2):119–22.
  1. RogersLF. The hip and femoral shaft. In: RogersLF, (Ed). Radiology of skeletal trauma, 2nd edn. New York: Churchill Livingstone;  1992. pp. 1199-1317.
  1. HelfetDL. Fractures of the distal femur. In: BrownerBD, JupiterJB, LevineAM, TraftonPG (Eds). Skeletal trauma. Philadelphia: Saunders;  1992. pp. 1643-83.
  1. AllmannKH, AltehoeferC, WildangerG, et al. Hoffa fracture—a radiologic diagnostic approach. J Belg Radiol. 1996;79:201–2.
  1. HolmesSM, BombackD, BaumgaertnerMR. Coronal fractures of the femoral condyle: a brief report of five cases. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18:316–9.
  1. MullerME, NazarianS, KochP, SchatzkerJ. The Comprehensive Classification of Fractures of Long Bones. Berlin: Springer-Verlag;  1990. pp. 144-5.
  1. Orthopaedic Trauma Association Committee for Coding and Classification. Fracture and Dislocation Compendium: distal femur fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1996;10(Suppl 1):45.
  1. OzturkA, OzkanY, OzdemirRM. Nonunion of a Hoffa fracture in an adult Musculoskelet Surg. 2009;93:183–5.
  1. McDonoughPW, BernsteinRM. Nonunion of a Hoffa fracture in a child. J Orthop Trauma. 2000;14:519–21.
  1. OstermannPA, HahnMP, EkkernkampA, et al. Monocondylare Frakturen des Femur. Chirurg. 1997;68:72–6.
  1. ManfrediniM, GildoneA, FerranteR, et al. Unicondylar femoral fractures: therapeutic strategy and long-term results. Acta Orthop Belg. 2001;67:132–8.
  1. WallenbockE, LedinskiC. Indications and limits of arthroscopic management of intra-articular fractures of the knee joint. Aktuelle Traumatol. 19932397–101. (German)
  1. JaritGJ, KummerFJ, GibberMJ, EgolKA. A mechanical evaluation of two fixation methods using cancellous screws for coronal fractures of the lateral condyle of the distal femur (OTA type 33B). J Orthop Trauma. 2006;20:273–6.
  1. Brent JBaker, EvaM Escobedo, SeanE Nork, MBradford Henley. Hoffa Fracture: A Common Association with High-Energy Supracondylar Fractures of the Distal Femur. AJR. 2002;178: 994.
  1. MullerME, AllgowerM, SchneiderR, et al. Manual of Internal Fixation. 3rd edn. New York, NY: Springer-Verlag;  1995. p. 549.
  1. SchatzkerJ, TileM. The Rationale of Operative Fracture Care. 2nd edn. Berlin: Springer-Verlag.  1996. pp. 390-1.
  1. BrownerBD, JupiterJB, LevineAM, et al. Skeletal Trauma. 2nd edn. Philadelphia, PA: WB Saunders,  1998.

Fracture of the Patella34

Vivek Trikha, Mohit Madan
 
Introduction
Fracture of patella accounts for 1% of all skeletal injuries.1 Most of the fractures occur in patients between 20 and 50 years of age.2 Patella fracture is caused by direct or indirect trauma to the anterior surface of knee. This results in varying degree of displacement of fragments and rupture of quadriceps mechanism. Treatment for minimally displaced fragments with no extensor lag is straightforward. However, various techniques are used for surgical management of displaced fracture. Among different techniques of fixation, tension band wiring technique offers the best clinical result for the stabilization of patella fracture and early rehabilitation.
 
Classification
The majority of patella fracture classifications are descriptive. They are usually classified on the basis of orientation of the fracture line on plain radiographs. Accordingly, fractures are classified as transverse, stellate or comminuted, longitudinal or marginal, proximal pole, distal pole, osteochondral and complex type consisting of combination of different patterns. Vertical fractures may not cause disruption of the extensor mechanism. In clinical practice, the fracture is simply classified as either displaced or nondisplaced. Displaced fracture is defined as fracture fragment separation of more than 3 mm or an articular incongruity of 2 mm or more.1
 
Nonoperative Treatment
Indication for nonoperative treatment include nondisplaced fracture with intact extensor mechanism. It also includes patients in whom operative procedure cannot be performed due to anesthetic constraints, or those who do not want surgery. In nonoperative treatment cylindrical or above knee cast or brace is applied for 4 to 6 weeks time followed by gradual mobilization as per the healing of the fracture. Patients who opt for nonsurgical treatment may be cautioned regarding the possibility of nonoptimal results with conservative treatment.3
 
Surgical Indication
Surgery is indicated for all displaced fractures of patella, comminuted fractures with disruption of the articular surface, osteochondral fractures with displacement of loose 410body in the joint and open fractures,4,5 and all patella fractures associated with ipsilateral fractures about the knee to allow early knee rehabilitation. There are three main types of fixation method namely: Tension band wiring, Partial Patellectomy and Total patellectomy. Tension band wiring is the most common method of fixation for fractures in which fragments are large enough for fixation. In cases of comminuted fracture various methods of screw fixation with modification of anterior tension band and encerclage wiring technique are used.
Biomechanical studies have proven that tension band wiring is an effective method of stabilizing the patella fractures.6,7 Partial patellectomy is indicated for comminuted fractures of upper or lower pole of patella.8 Total patellectomy is indicated for severely comminuted fractures nonamenable to fixation. In most of the cases of comminuted fracture patella the decision whether to excise or reconstruct patella needs to be taken at the time of operation, depending upon the size of fragments and the achievement of articular congruity. As a rule of thumb, all efforts should be made to preserve the patella, as total excision of patella shall result in residual disability.4,5
 
Preoperative Planning
Radiograph: Standard radiographic views of AP, lateral (Figs 34.1A and B) and occasionally specialized view (sunrise view/ Merchant view) are performed for the evaluation and preoperative planning of the patient. It might be difficult to evaluate patellar fracture in an anteroposterior view secondary to the superimposition of the distal femoral condyles. The lateral radiograph provides good profile of the patella. The lateral view is assessed for fracture lines, fracture displacement, and also patellar position. Bipartite patella may be confused with a fracture. However, they occur in the superolateral corner of the patella, are rounded and have a smooth,sclerotic border. The sunrise view is useful in case of a vertical split fracture and to evaluate the patellar-femoral articular congruity. Other investigations like arthrography, CT, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), and standard tomography are rarely used for the evaluation of a patella fracture.
 
TIMING OF SURGERY
Surgery should be performed as soon as possible after evaluating the general condition of the patient. Proper attention should also be given to the local skin condition to prevent chances of infection.
Figures 34.1A and B: Preoperative anterior-posterior and lateral radiograph of a simple transverse type patellar fracture
411
Figure 34.2: Supine position of the limb with preparation from the midthigh level to the midleg level
 
ANESTHESIA
Surgery may be performed under general anesthesia or neuraxial blockade. Limb exsanguination may be done with the help of a pneumatic tourniquet applied high above the thigh. The limb may be elevated for 3 to 5 minutes before the application of tourniquet. During tourniquet application, quadriceps should be pulled distally by squeezing the thigh by both hands. This prevents entrapment of quadriceps muscle under tourniquet and helps in easy reduction of fracture.
 
POSITION OF PATIENT
Patient should be placed in supine position with a small sandbag below the ipsilateral hip to keep the limb straight. The entire limb below the tourniquet may be prepared from midthigh level (Fig. 34.2).
 
SKIN INCISION
Longitudinal, transverse and S-shaped incision have been defined for the exposure of fracture patella. Depending on the surgeon's preference any of the skin incision can be used. Longitudinal midline incision, centered over the patella, is the most commonly used incision (Fig. 34.3). It is helpful due to its extensile nature, especially in cases of comminuted fractures, where more proximal or distal dissection is anticipated.
Figure 34.3: Fracture fragments and midline longitudinal incision marked
412
Figures 34.4A and B: Incision of prepatellar bursa and drainage of hematoma leads directly to the fracture. Picture showing transverse patella fracture with torn retinacular ligament
Figure 34.5: Fracture ends are gently curetted off the blood clot and the joint is washed with normal saline
Deep incision is given in line with the skin incision. The deep fascia is divided and the skin flaps are elevated by sharp dissection and retracted. As soon as the prepatellar bursa is incised fracture hematoma evacuates and the fracture site is exposed (Figs 34.4A and B). The fractured patella and the torn patellar retinaculum are identified. The fracture hematoma and the clots are washed with normal saline (Fig. 34.5). Retinacular tears identified at this period may be tagged for later repair.413
Figure 34.6: Joint should be inspected for any loose fragment or cartilage damage
The fracture ends are cleaned off the blood clots with help of small curette and suction tip. The periosteum and the retinacular fibers are removed around 2 to 3 mm from the edge of the fracture so that this tissue does not obstruct reduction. Care should be taken not to remove too much soft tissue surrounding the patella, as it often holds small fracture fragments together.
Knee joint should be inspected for any loose fragment and cartilage damage (Fig. 34.6). Bone fragments are now reduced and held temporarily with help of reduction forceps. Apposition of fracture fragment and articular congruity should be checked through the rent in the retinacular ligament. Perfect apposition of articular fragments is important. Difficulty in reduction may be due to small bony fragments or soft tissue in between the fracture fragments.
Either 1.6 mm K-wire or 4.0 mm cannulated cancellous screw may be used to maintained reduction. Two screws or K-wires are passed along the two imaginary lines dividing the patella in three equal parts and approximately 5 to 8 mm posterior to the nonarticular surface of patella. K-wire can also passed first in the proximal fragment in retrograde manner, then in the distal fragment after reducing the fracture (Figs 34.7 to 34.10).
One end of 18 gauge wire is passed underneath the fibers of quadriceps tendon (Fig. 34.11). Either wire passer or 16 gauge angiocatheter should be used for passing wire. This help in passing wire close to the superior surface of patella and prevents excessive soft tissue damage.
Wire is crossed in a ‘figure of eight’ fashion over the front of patella. One arm of wire should be kept long and a loop is made on the same side. One end is passed adjacent to the inferior pole of patella underneath the patellar ligament (Fig. 34.12). The two ends of wire are engaged in a wire tensioner. Wire is tightened simultaneously by two loops on either side of patella. This can be done with help of a wire clamp or simple pliers. Wire tightening is done by first pulling and then twisting the wire. This prevents overlapping of wire and provides good tension. Simultaneous tightening of wire provides two point tension and uniform tightening effect (Figs 34.13 and 34.14). Wire is tensioned till there is slight opening of the articular margin.414
Figures 34.7A to C: In the proximal fragment K-wire is passed in a retrograde manner, approximately 5 mm posterior to the anterior surface of patella
Figure 34.8: K-wires should be parallel and along the imaginary lines dividing the patella in three equal parts
Figure 34.9: Fracture is reduced and held with help of reduction clamp
During flexion this gap closes and provides uniform compression at the fracture surface. No excessive tension should be given as it may displace the comminuted fragments. At this stage knee is flexed to see the stability of the construct and opening at the fracture site.
After wire tightening the extra wire is cut with help of a wire cutter. The protruding twisted ends are bent along the superior patellar surface (Fig. 34.15). The ends of K-wire are bent with the help of a wire bender as close to the surface of patella as possible. Now the wires are rotated and buried inside the quadriceps by giving small 415vertical nick on the quadriceps tendon (Fig. 34.16). Later on this nick is stitched; this will prevent the back out of K-wires. The distal ends of K-wires are cut close to the patella (Fig. 34.17). Retinacular tear are stitched with nonabsorbable suture (Fig. 34.18). Knee is flexed up to 90 degrees to evaluate the stability of the construct (Fig. 34.19).
Figure 34.10: K-wires drilled through the distal fragment while maintaining the reduction
Figure 34.11: With help of a wire passer 18 gauge wire is passed close to superior pole of patella and posterior to the K-wires
Figure 34.12: End of wire is crossed in a figure of eight fashion and passed adjacent to inferior surface of patella underneath fibers of patellar tendon
416
Figure 34.13: Ends of wire are engaged and tightened with wire tensioner. Simultaneously the opposite side wire loop is twisted with wire clamp
Figure 34.14: Final tension given on the both side with wire clamp. Wire should be first pulled than twisted
Figure 34.15: K-wire is bent close to the superior surface of patella with the help of a wire bender
Figure 34.16: Wire ends are rotated and buried in quadriceps through small nick in the fibers of quadriceps tendon. This prevents back-out of wires
417
Figure 34.17: Distal end of wire is cut close to the inferior surface of patella
Figure 34.18: Retinacular tear is stitched on both the sides of patella with a non- absorbable suture
Figure 34.19: Knee is flexed up to 90 degree to evaluate the stability of the construct
Now the tourniquet is deflated and hemostasis achieved. Wound is washed with normal saline. If preferred, suction drain can be placed. Prepatellar bursa is stitched in continuous manner with 20 vicryl. Subcutaneous layer is stitched in inverted manner and skin closed with nylon/ prolene/ metal staple. Wound is dressed and above knee slab or a brace is given in extension.
 
Postoperative Management
Postoperative course depends upon the quality of fixation. In noncomminuted fracture with good fixation, active flexion as tolerated by the patient is started on first postoperative day. Drain if placed is removed 24 to 48 hours after surgery. Patient can 418be discharged and followed for stitch removal. Progressively, patient can be allowed to bear weight with extension brace. Radiograph should be taken periodically to look for the union and stability of construct. Full weight-bearing is usually allowed after six weeks after radiological signs of healing are evident.
In case of comminuted fracture and where there is doubt about the metal construct stability, the mobilization of knee should be delayed. The knee should be immobilized in extension cast or a brace for 4 to 6 weeks and gradually mobilized depending upon the union. Every effort should be made to achieve atleast 90 degree ROM by the fourth week.
 
MODIFIED TENSION BAND WIRING WITH SCREWS
Instead of K-wires, cannulated cancellous screws may be used for fixation of the patellar fragments. Other steps remain the same as in the tension band wiring with K-wires. This technique is useful in osteoporotic and pathological fracture of patella.
 
Complications
Early complication includes infection and loss of fixation. Infection is a dreaded complication which needs to be tackled at the earliest. High index of suspicion is essential as infection may lead to septic arthritis of the knee. Incision and drainage along with lavage of the knee joint is required. The implants may be kept in place if possible till fracture union. Intravenous antibiotics may be started at the time of first debridement and then modified on the basis of culture results.
Loss of fixation is the most common complication usually due to inadequate fixation. It may occur due to the lack of patient compliance or due to aggressive physiotherapy. The surgery may have to revised if the fixation is inadequate.9
Weakness of the quadriceps muscle may lead to anterior knee pain and also tight hamstrings. Every effort should be made to attain full extension by knee flexor muscle stretching and strengthening of the quadriceps muscle.
Late complications include nonunion and hardware failure, malunion, hardware prominence and arthritis. If the K-wires are not properly embedded in the quadriceps muscle, hardware prominence can occur leading to early removal of K-wires. Hardware removal rates in the literature vary from 10 to 60% especially with tension band wires.9,10 If required, it may be done after the fracture consolidation. Malreduction of the articular congruity of patella leads to abnormal patellofemoral alignment and increased joint contact forces leading to post-traumatic arthrosis.
 
Outcome
Conservative treatment in undisplaced or mildly displaced patella fractures with intact extensor mechanism can give good results. Bostrom in a large series of 282 cases treated conservatively found good to excellent results in 99% of the patients.1 Open reduction and internal fixation of the displaced patella fractures also has good results. Most of the patients who undergo tension band wiring regain full range of motion. However, in comminuted fractures there is reported loss of terminal flexion and extension.11 Anatomic reduction and rigid internal fixation is paramount for achieving the best results. This shall help in attaining early ROM providing good knee motion and quadriceps strength.
 
Illustrative Case
A 30-year-old male sustained fracture of the right patella (Figs 34.20A and B) in a motor vehicular accident.419
Figures 34.20A and B: Comminution may not always be evident on preoperative radiographs
Figures 34.21A and B: Comminuted fracture patella fixed with cancellous screw and 18 gauge wire. Fracture united with good range of knee motion
Fracture comminution was encountered intraoperatively. Fracture was fixed with modified tension based wiring and cancellous screw fixation. Union could be achieved with good range of motion and function (Figs 34.21A and B).
References
  1. BostromA. Fracture of the patella: a study of 422 patellar fractures. Acta Orthop Scand; 1972. pp. 143-80.
  1. AshbyME, SchieldsCL, KarinyJR. Diagnosis of osteochondral fractures in acute traumatic patellar dislocations using air arthrography. J Trauma. 1975;15:1032–3.
  1. PritchettJW. Nonoperative treatment of widely displaced patella fractures. American J Knee Surg. 1997;10:145–7.
  1. ScotJC. Fracture of patella. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1949;31-B:76-81.
  1. LevackB, FlannaganJP, HobbsS. Results of Surgical management of patellar fractures. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 1985;67-B:416-9.
  1. CarpenterJE, KasmanR, MathewsLS. Fractures of patella. Instr Course Lect. 1994;43:97–108.
  1. BenjaminJ, BriedJ, DohmM, et al. Biomechanical evalution of various forms of fixation of transverse patellar fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1987;1:219–22.
  1. LennoxIA, CobbAG, KnowlesJ, BentleyG. Knee function after Patellectomy: a 12–48 years follow-up. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1994;76:485–7.
  1. SmithST, CramerKE, KargesDE, et al. Early complications in the operative treatment of patella fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1997;11:183–7.
  1. SchemitschEH, WeinbergJ, MckeeMD, et al. Functional Outcome of patella fractures following open reduction and internal fixation. J Orthop Trauma; 1999. pp. 13-279.
  1. HungLK, ChanKM, ChowYN, LeungPC. Fractured Patella: operative treatment using the tension band principle. Injury. 1985;16:343–7.

Fractures of the Intercondylar Eminence of the Tibia in Adults35

Sharad Prabhakar, Manish Kothari
 
Introduction
Fractures of the intercondylar eminence of tibia were first described in 1875. Tibial spine avulsions have been considered as the pediatric equivalent of the adult anterior cruciate ligament (ACL) injury. However, they are increasingly being seen in skeletally mature individuals. The reported incidence of tibial eminence fractures varies from 4 to 10% of ACL injuries. The mechanism of injury may be direct trauma to the knee as in a motorcycle injury in a road traffic accident, hyperextension and rotation following a fall from a bicycle or forced flexion and rotation as in a skiing accident. The most common presentation is with a hemarthrosis and flexion deformity.
 
Classification
The modified Meyers and McKeever classification is used to classify these fractures:
  • Type I is nondisplaced.
  • Type II is displaced anterior margin with intact posterior cortex acting as hinge resembling a bird's beak.
  • Type III is completely displaced and void of all bony contact
    • Type IIIA involves ACL insertion only
    • Type IIIB involves the entire eminence
  • Type IV is a comminuted fracture of the tibial eminence (added by Zaricznyj in 1977).
 
Imaging
The appearance of a tiny bone fragment in the intercondylar notch with cortical irregularity of the adjacent tibial eminence is the usual finding (Figs 35.1A and B). Magnetic resonance (MR) imaging is useful to confirm that the fragment does in fact arise from the tibia and that the entire substance of the ACL is intact, as well as assessing for associated injuries (Fig. 35.2).
 
Associated Injuries
Meniscus tears are the injuries most commonly associated with fractures of the tibial intercondylar eminence. They may be associated with any combination of bone, chondral, meniscal, or ligamentous injuries.422
Figures 35.1A and B: Lateral and AP radiographs of the knee of a patient with an ACL avulsion
Figure 35.2: MRI of the same patient demonstrating attachment of the ACL to the avulsed fragment
 
Treatment
 
TYPE I
Nonoperative management is an acceptable mode of treatment. A cylinder cast is applied with the leg in full extension for 4 weeks. Thereafter a knee range of motion brace is applied and graduated knee bending exercises and muscle strengthening exercises are started till full range of motion is regained over 6 to 8 weeks.
 
TYPE II, TYPE III AND TYPE IV FRACTURES
Internal fixation is the standard method of treatment. The approach may be arthroscopic or mini-open. A well done mini-open procedure will have a better functional outcome 423than a poorly done arthroscopic fixation! The choice of internal fixation, however, varies. Screw or staple fixation is effective for a large, relatively undisplaced avulsed fragment. Suture techniques are useful if the fragment is displaced or comminuted.
 
PATIENT POSITIONING
Patient is positioned supine with lateral thigh post and sand bag to hold the knee in flexion.
 
Surgical Technique
A diagnostic arthroscopy is performed first. Standard anteromedial and anterolateral portals are used. The avulsed fragment is identified (Fig. 35.3). The joint is examined systematically for any associated chondral or meniscal injury. The tibial attachment site of the avulsed fragment is debrided of debris and soft tissue using a resector so that the fracture site is visualized (Fig. 35.4). Care is taken that the intermeniscal ligament is not cut (Fig. 35.5). The anterior horn of lateral meniscus is frequently entrapped in the fracture site prohibiting reduction.
Figure 35.3: Avulsed tibial fragment with attached ACL
Figure 35.4: A resector is used to clear the base of the avulsed fragment
424
Figure 35.5: The intermeniscal ligament is preserved while clearing the base of the avulsed fragment
It needs to be cleared with a probe without causing damage.
 
Screw Fixation Technique
The avulsed fragment is then reduced using the hook of an ACL tibial guide (Figs 35.6A and B). A 2.0 mm K-wire is used to provisionally fix the fragment (Fig. 35.7). Insertion of the K-wire requires a high anteromedial access point, just adjacent to the medial border of the patella. The entry point of the wire can be visualized from inside the joint using a standard 30 degree arthroscope in the lateral portal (Fig. 35.8). This is important to avoid scuffing the medial femoral condyle. A 1.25 mm guide wire is then inserted anteromedially close to the K-wire entry point and drilled through the fragment. It is not necessary to engage the posterior cortex. The length of the wire is measured. A 2.7 mm cannulated drill is used to ream over the wire except the distal 5 mm to prevent the wire from backing out once the drill is removed. The cannulated tap is then used. The appropriate size 4.0 mm cannulated screw with washer is chosen and threaded over the wire. An artery forceps is used to dilate the soft tissues to allow the washer to slide in with the screw. After the final tightening of the screw (Fig. 35.9), the knee is extended to check for impingement and the ACL is assessed for stability (Fig. 35.10). If the fragment is large then two 1.25 mm guide wires can be used to put two 4.0 mm cannulated screws.
Figures 35.6A and B: The hook of an ACL tibial guide is used to reduce the avulsed fragment
425
Figure 35.7: K-wire fixation of avulsed fragment
Figure 35.8: Visualization of K-wire entry from inside the joint to avoid scuffing the medial femoral condyle
Figure 35.9: Cannulated screw with washer inserted over guide wire
426
Figure 35.10: Assessing the tautness of the fixed ligament
A C-arm is used intraoperative to check the screw placement.
 
Tips and Tricks
  • In small knees, it is better to adopt a mini-open technique as a 4.00 mm screw may scuff the medial femoral condyle (Fig. 35.11) or alternatively adopt a suture-fixation method.
  • The screw length and washer orientation should be carefully checked intraoperatively. A wrongly oriented washer can prevent proper seating of the screw head leading to impingement (Fig. 35.12). If the screw needs to be removed, the washer should be separately grasped with a grasper and locked tight before the screw is removed, to avoid losing it in the joint. The wire is removed and then the washer is retrieved from the anteromedial portal.
    Figure 35.11: Screw scuffing the medial femoral condyle in a tight small knee
    427
    Figure 35.12: Screw causing impingement in extension
    Figure 35.13: Posterior placement of screw causes anterior edge of fragment to lift off. This can cause impingement
  • Placing the screw too posteriorly in the notch can result in anterior lifting off of the fragment thereby causing impingement (Fig. 35.13)
  • The avulsed tibial fragment is usually small. You must get it right the first time or it will become comminuted with repeated drilling.
 
Suture Fixation Technique
Suture fixation can be accomplished using the standard anteromedial and anterolateral portals. If required an additional central transpatellar tendon portal may be used.
A 90 degree suture lasso is passed from the accessory portal through the fibers of the ACL in the midcoronal plane as close to the bony fragment as possible (Fig. 35.14). The wire loop is grasped with a grasper and pulled out of the anteromedial portal. A No. 5 ethibond suture is passed through the wire loop within the lasso. With the one end of the suture secured, the lasso is then retrieved, pulling the other end of the ethibond suture back through the ligament fibers and out through the anteromedial portal.
Figure 35.14: Using a suture lasso
428
Figures 35.15A and B: (A) Two parallel wires for medial and lateral tibial tunnel placement; (B) Illustrating the principle of suture technique
The process may be repeated to take the sutures through the ligament.
A 3-cm longitudinal incision is made over proximal medial tibia. An ACL tibial guide is used to place, respectively, two 2.4 mm drill-tipped guide pins at the medial and the lateral edges of the fracture bed in its midcoronal plane, under direct arthroscopic visualization (Figs 35.15A and B). Two parallel tunnels, one medial and one lateral on the outside, are made by drilling over the guide pins. A bony bridge of at least 5 mm should be available after drilling.
A loop of wire is passed up through each drill hole. Using a grasper the ends of the ethibond suture are passed through the loops, which are then used to bring down the ethibond suture ends out of the tunnels. If wire loops are not available, then a reversed Beath pin, preloaded with an ethibond suture can be used to create a loop to draw the suture ends out of the tunnels.
Once the respective ends of the suture have been passed through the tunnels, the fracture is reduced by pulling down on the suture ends while removing any entrapped soft tissue. Treatment of associated intra-articular pathology may be performed before final fixation, while provisional reduction is held by the assistant. The suture is tied over the bony bridge while an assistant performs a reverse Lachman maneuver. The sutures may also be tied over a post screw. Some authors have recommended excision of the anterior bony portion of the fracture fragment to allow full extension if anatomic reduction is not achieved.
 
Mini-open Technique
It is resorted to in case arthroscopic fixation fails or primarily if the avulsed fragment is displaced and rotated. A medial parapatellar approach is used (Figs 35.16A and B). The fat pad is retracted and the avulsed ACL fragment can be directly visualized. It can then be managed by suture or screw fixation.
Tip: A separate light source assists in intra-articular visualization (Fig. 35.17).429
Figures 35.16A and B: (A) Medial parapatellar approach using mini-open technique; (B) With fat pad retracted
Figure 35.17: Using a light source aids visualization of the joint
 
Postoperative Protocol
In the first week the patient is mobilized in full extension with knee locked in extension brace. Full weight-bearing, quadriceps-strengthening, and isometric exercises are started along with straight-leg raises with brace. Passive range of motion up to 90 degrees by 3 weeks and full ROM by 6 to 8 weeks is targeted. Isometric quadriceps and hamstring and abductor and adductor strengthening with the knee locked in the brace are permitted during the first 6 weeks. At 8 weeks the brace is discontinued. Terminal resisted extension is not permitted until 3 months. At 6 months patients is allowed to resume sporting activities.
 
Complications
Complications following arthroscopic fixation are few. Arthrofibrosis has been variably reported. The attributable cause is delayed rehabilitation. Manipulation under anesthesia 430and/or arthroscopic lysis of adhesion are acceptable methods of management. Extension loss has also been reported. Arthroscopic excision of the prominent fragment gives satisfactory results. Revision surgery requiring ACL reconstruction is uncommon.
 
Results
The outcomes of arthroscopic reduction and internal fixation have been reported to be satisfactory. The Tegner and Lysholm knee scores are uniformly reported to be good. Most patients return to their pre-injury activity levels. Younger patients have better outcomes. Objective anteroposterior laxity may be seen; however, subjective outcomes are uniformly satisfactory. There is no difference in outcomes with respect to surgical approach or fixation device. Screw fixation, however, has higher reported re-operation rates due to symptomatic hardware. Hunter et al reported a re-operation rate of 44% with screw fixation as compared to 13% with suture fixation technique. Early rehabilitation is essential to ensure satisfactory outcomes. The postoperative protocol reported in literature is not uniform. It does not seem to affect the outcomes as long as early rehabilitation is ensured.
 
Illustrative Case
A 32-year-old male presented with injury to his right knee following a road traffic accident. He presented with a swollen knee and a ten degree flexion deformity. Radiographs revealed an ACL avulsion (Figs 35.18A and B). A CT scan was done to confirm the findings and to elucidate the fracture pattern (Fig. 35.19). The patient was taken up for arthroscopic fixation of the avulsed ACL fragment (Figs 35.20A and B). Postoperatively, a knee range of motion brace was used till 8 weeks. The patient regained extension and range of motion. No subjective or objective laxity was present at one year follow-up.
Figures 35.18A and B: AP and lateral radiographs of the knee demonstrating an ACL avulsion in a 32-year-old male patient
431
Figure 35.19: CT scan films of the same patient demonstrating ACL avulsion
Figures 35.20A and B: Postoperative radiographs following arthroscopic fixation of avulsed ACL
Bibliography
  1. HuangTW, HsuKY, ChengCY, ChenLH, WangCJ, ChanYS, et al. Arthroscopic suture fixation of tibial eminence avulsion fractures. Arthroscopy. 2008;24(11):1232-8. Epub 2008 Aug 30.
  1. James HLubowitz, Wylie SElson, DanGuttmann. Arthroscopy: The Journal of Arthroscopic and Related Surgery. 2005;21(1):86–92.
  1. MayJH, LevyBA, GuseD, ShahJ, StuartMJ, DahmDL. ACL tibial spine avulsion: mid-term outcomes and rehabilitation. Orthopedics. 2011;34(2):2. 89
  1. Miller,Cole. Textbook of Arthroscopy, 1st edn; Chapter 74-Arthroscopically Assisted Fracture Repair for Intra-articular Knee Fracture; Tibial Spine Fracture. 
  1. RobertHunter, John AWillis. Arthroscopic Fixation of Avulsion Fractures of the Tibial Eminence: Technique and Outcome. Arthroscopy: The Journal of Arthroscopic and Related Surgery. 2004;20(2):113–21.
  1. SuWR, WangPH, WangHN, LinCJ. A simple, modified arthroscopic suture fixation of avulsion fracture of the tibial intercondylar eminence in children. J Pediatr Orthop B. 2011;20(1):17–21.
  1. Tsan-WenHuang, et al. Arthroscopic Suture Fixation of Tibial Eminence Avulsion Fractures. Arthroscopy: The Journal of Arthroscopic and Related Surgery. 2008;24(11):1232–8.
  1. ZhaoJ, HuangfuX. Arthroscopic treatment of nonunited anterior cruciate ligament tibial avulsion fracture with figure-of-8 suture fixation technique. Arthroscopy. 2007;23(4):405–10.

The Tibial Plateau Fracture36

Ritabh Kumar, Pushkar Chawla
 
Introduction
Tibial plateau fracture management is still evolving. Two dimensional understanding and orientation is evolving to 3D with the use of CT scan/MRI. The tibial plateau is considered as a platform over which femoral condyles rotate like Dish and Dome.1 They transmit weight on a loaded knee even during flexion. Knee flexion and angulation in coronal plane at the time of injury guide the fracture configuration. The force at the time of impact and bone quality dictates the severity of the tibial condyle fracture.
High energy fractures are common in young while lower energy fractures peak in 60 to 70-year-old. As the bone softens (osteoporosis), the chances of intra-articular depression increase.
The concave medial tibial condyle absorbs the force at the time of impact over a large area, resulting in opening of the medial condyle with longitudinal splits. On the other hand, the convex lateral condyle absorbs force on relatively point contact and this result in intra-articular depression (Fig. 36.1).
 
Investigation
X-rays in two planes help in diagnosing the fracture in emergency. The intra-articular pathoanatomy is however, better delineated on the CT scan. The extent of intra-articular injuries, depression, fracture anatomy in coronal plane and comminution are better visualized on the CT scan. Meniscal injury and ligamentous injuries if suspected can be evaluated with MRI (Fig. 36.2).
Figure 36.1: Distribution of forces
434
Figure 36.2: Information available on plain radiograph, CT scan and MRI
 
Classification
The most commonly and widely used classification for initial assessment of tibial condyle fractures continues to be the Schatzker classification.2 The first three types (I, II and III) are the result of relatively low energy trauma and the second three types (IV, V and VI) are high energy injuries. While the first three types deal with articular cartilage injury the higher categories involve cartilage as well as condylar bone comminution. Type IV fracture carries the highest risk of associated intra-articular soft tissue injury.2
Type III has been further divided into two categories based on the location of depression in the lateral condyle.3
III A – Peripheral or lateral depression (covered with meniscus)
III B – Central depression.
Computed tomography has markedly improved our understanding of intra-articular depression and coronal plane fractures. Based on CT scan the three column concept has been recently suggested.4
 
THREE COLUMN CLASSIFICATION
Cong-Feng Luo et al. in 2010 described the three column classification on the basis of preoperative CT scan in high energy fractures, Schatzker types V and VI.4 On the transverse or axial view, the tibial plateau is divided into three areas that are defined as the lateral, medial and posterior column (Figs 36.3A and B).
These three columns are separated by three arbitrary lines on the axial cut. One independent articular depression with a break of the column wall is defined as a fracture of the relevant column. Pure articular depression like in Schatzker type III is defined as a “Zero-column” fracture. Though meant to classify high energy fractures, its use may be extrapolated to low energy injuries also. This classification not only categorizes the fractures, it also helps in their operative management.
 
Deformities
Shortening, angulation, shearing fracture planes, intra-articular impaction or depression, comminution and metaphyseal-diaphyseal dissociation, can be the deformities associated with these fractures.435
Figures 36.3A and B: (A) The three column classification. Adapted from Lou CF et al. in Journal Orthop Trauma 2010: 24 (11): 683-92; (B) Axial cut of CT scan showing the three column fracture of tibial plateau
 
TREATMENT
 
Indications for Surgical Intervention
The time honored and vetted principles laid down by the AO group for intra-articular injuries remain unchanged and unchallenged. They are:
  1. Direct anatomical restoration of joint surface
  2. Stable fixation
  3. Soft tissue respect
  4. Early pain free mobilization
The tibial plateau has a broad surface area covered with cushions of meniscus on either side. Steps less than 2 mm in the articular surface generally do well with conservative management. Greater degrees of articular step, subchondral comminution and intra-articular damage, however fare better with surgical intervention.
 
Timing of Surgery
The proximal tibia is a subcutaneous bone with thin tenuous soft tissue envelope. The integrity of this envelope should guide the timing of the intervention primarily. It is important to recognize impending soft tissue compromise. In low energy injuries (Schatzker type I, II or III), in hemodynamically stable patients the fracture can be dealt as soon as is possible. On the other hand, in high energy fractures definitive fracture fixation should be delayed till the edema of the primary injury has subsided to reduce the chances of wound complications. Splintage of the fractured extremity in a posterior slab usually suffices. Temporary external fixator spanning across the knee joint or lower tibial skeletal traction are suitable alternatives, especially in open injuries depending on the merits of the individual case. Signs of optimum soft tissue recovery include skin wrinkling, pinch ability, and re-epithelialization of the fractures blisters. Once they appear the definitive surgical procedure can be taken up.
 
EQUIPMENT
  • Implants and bone grafts
  • Fracture reduction – 1 mm K-wires, K-wire set, 4 mm cannulated screw set, reduction forceps—large.
  • Medial condyle: Subcutaneous bone—low profile plates—majority as buttress plate—3.5 mm reconstruction plates, small fragment set, LCP—medial anatomical plate (optional).
  • Posteromedial corner: Buttress plate—3.5/4.5 mm reconstruction or T-buttress plate, LCP—posteromedial (optional). Nonlocking plates are preferred as the working space is limited.436
Figures 36.4A and B: Intraoperative photograph showing positioning of the patient with either folded roll under the knee (A) or with fixed thigh holder (B) to maintain knee flexion
  • Lateral: Angle-stable devices—LCP 3.5/4.5 mm, long plates, partially threaded 6.5 mm cancellous screws, basic set (4.5)
  • Bone grafts: Autologous—cancellous bone from iliac crest;
    Synthetic—Tricalcium phosphate crystals or paste.
 
PROCEDURE
Anesthesia: Under spinal or combined spinal and epidural anesthesia. In the polytrauma situation, general anesthesia is preferred.
Position: Supine on radiolucent table; knee is flexed with a large folded towel under the thigh or by a fixed thigh support to about 20 to 30 degree to relax the posterior musculature (Figs 36.4A and B). Other limb may be placed in lithotomy position for procedure with expected time less than 2 hours to increase maneuverability on posteromedial corner.
Marking of anatomical landmarks and skin incision: Circumference of patella, tibio-femoral joint line (under C-arm if not easily palpable), Gerdy's tubercle, tibial tuberosity (Figs 36.5A and B). The fibula head and common peroneal nerve course should be marked out if posterolateral corner is to be exposed. Incision is planned and marked individually on either side.
External fixator for distraction or ligamentotaxis: Femoral distractor is used as a distraction aid to stretch soft tissues and is therefore placed to counter compression forces. The fixator is placed on the medial side if the fracture is caused by varus forces, i.e. fracture of medial condyle and vice versa. Fixator pins are placed spanning the knee joint. Pin should be placed to avoid the line of incision. Use gradual distraction with intermittent rest in between for soft tissues to ease open. Plan to place the distractor device so that it should not hinder in the placement of the plate or interfere in image visualization.
Tourniquet: 150 to 175 mm Hg higher than the systolic pressure, over the thigh as high as possible.
Incision and dissection: A single approach, when one condyle is either intact or non-displaced. A combined approach is highly recommended in the displaced bicondylar fracture patterns. In cases where indirect reduction is possible the incision length can be reduced as in minimally invasive percutaneous plate osteosynthesis (MIPPO) technique. Individual skin incision is used to open and reduce the articular fractures medially, laterally or posteriorly. Incisions are direct and full thickness without subcutaneous dissection. The minimal displaced side is fixed first. Coronal planes fractures like posteromedial and posterolateral fractures are considered separately.437
Figures 36.5A and B: Skin marking to identify bony landmarks front (A) and side view (B). Yellow arrow—joint line; Blue arrow—Gerdy tubercle; Red arrow—Tibial tubercle
The posteromedial corner is often the key fragment and most important for long term stability.5
Medial: Medially the proximal tibia is subcutaneous and the incision is made directly over the apex (distal-metaphyseal end) of the fracture. The incision should begin 2 to 3 cm proximal to the joint line and the distal extent depends on the length of the plate planned (Fig. 36.6). The pes insertion is retracted posteriorly or tagged and cut to be sutured after fixation. The periosteum is cleared only on the margin of the fracture ends to help in reduction. Apex of the fracture at metaphysis is to be reduced anatomically; this helps achieve an anatomical indirect reduction inside the joint.
Posteromedial: When fracture fragments involve the posteromedial corner of tibial condyle. The knee should be flexed and external rotated. The incision extends from posterior to the medial femoral epicondyle to the proximal tibia shaft on posteromedial border of tibia.
Figure 36.6: The skin incision extending from above the joint and bisecting the Gerdy tubercle
438
Figure 36.7: After incision of fascia, the bluish hue showing the distended capsule (yellow arrow). The submeniscal plane can be readily identified (blue arrow)
The fascia is incised between Pes anteriorly and anterior margin of gastrocnemius posteriorly. The anterior margin of medial head of gastrocnemius is identified and sharply incised to elevate it from posteromedial border. Distally the pes tendons are retracted forwards. Should they hinder in visualization they can be tagged and cut and restored back after reduction and fixation.
Lateral: The incision starts proximal to the joint line from the lateral femoral condyle to Gerdy's tubercle and then curved gently forward towards proximal tibial shaft. The Tensor Fascia Lata is incised in line of Gerdy's tubercle and split open with anterior and posterior flaps. Distally it extends as deep fascia to the anterior compartment, which can be slit open with a scissor. Distally the anterior compartment musculature is reflected laterally from the anterolateral aspect of the proximal tibia. Anteriorly the TFL is elevated from joint capsule till the lateral border of patellar tendon and posteriorly it is limited by fibular head where lateral collateral ligament is attached (Fig. 36.7). Joint capsule is seen as bluish, soft pouch demarcating the upper part of tibia and the probable joint line (Fig. 36.7). A hypodermic needle is used to find the submeniscal space. The joint capsule is opened transversely sharply cutting coronary fibers in submeniscal plane to the maximum extent for ease of intra-articular fracture visualization.
Figure 36.8: Following submeniscal incision, knee joint opened. Meniscus (yellow arrow) held with multiple sutures
439
Figure 36.9: Lateral fragment rotated in open-book technique to expose the intra-articular pathology. Yellow arrow—lateral joint fragment; Red arrow—intra-articular depression
Figure 36.10: Subchondral elevation should start from midline and move laterally
Figure 36.11: Articular reduction checked under image
The meniscus is tagged with two to three sutures (nonabsorbable) and lifted upwards. Manual varus thrust will help in increasing the joint surface visualization (Fig. 36.8).
The split between the fracture fragments can be pried open to aid in articular fracture visualization and subsequent direct reduction (Fig. 36.9). Depressed articular fragments usually have an intact strong subchondral bone scaffold that has subsided into the weak underlying cancellous bone. This depressed portion has to be elevated gradually with its subchondral bone with the help of a blunt elevator (Freer). This elevation should begin centrally and proceed towards the periphery (Fig. 36.10). Marginal impaction of the surrounding articular area should be identified and corrected. The extreme peripheral margin or rim attached with soft tissue is usually at normal level and femoral condyles should be used as the template for reduction. Once reduced, the fragments are temporarily held with at least two 1 mm K-wires in subchondral bone 440across the fracture site into the opposite condyle (Fig. 36.11).
Figure 36.12: Articular depression reduced against femoral condyle, subchondral gap filled with cancellous bone graft and provisionally stabilized with 1 mm multiple K-wires
Figure 36.13: Plate passed in submuscular plane and distal end centered on bone through another incision
In osteoporotic bones or where reduction cannot be secured, subchondral cavity is filled with cancellous or synthetic bone grafts (Fig. 36.12). Once the articular surface is anatomically restored the split block of bone is replaced back and held again with 1 mm subchondral K-wires (Fig. 36.13). The final reduction is checked under fluoroscopy (Figs 36.14A and B). The selected plate is secured to the bone and applied in buttress mode to support the elevated articular surface. Locking screws through the proximal holes further enhance support by acting as axially stable raft screws.
Posteromedial (coronal) shear injury: The articular fragment is usually a single large strong bone block and joint reduction is essentially indirect. Accurate reduction at the metaphysis translates into anatomical joint surface restoration (Figs 36.15A to C).
In case of posterolateral corner injuries the skin incision is shifted posteriorly. The common peroneal nerve (CPN) is identified and tagged superior to the fibula. Proximally the plane is developed between the biceps tendon and the CPN. Distally the CPN is followed and released from the fibula up to the articular branch into the tibialis anterior.441
Figures 36.14A and B: Plate position checked in image in two planes prior to definitive fixation. (A) Anteroposterior view; (B) Lateral view
Figures 36.15A and B: The principle of antiglide plating in the instance of the posteromedial shear-type fracture. A, The typical displacement is inferior and posteromedial. B, An undercontoured 3.5 reconstruction plate is used to buttress the fragment. The first screw to be inserted is on the intact tibia, 2–3 mm distal to the fracture. Tightening of the screws will cause anterolateral and superior migration of the fragment, and ultimately, its reduction (B). Lag screws can be placed proximally under fluoroscopic control, to increase the compression along the fraction line created by the buttressing effect of the undercontoured plate (C). Adapted from Weil YA et al. Journal Orthop Trauma 2008;22(5):357-62
Once the CPN is protected the fibula is osteotomised at its neck. Fibular head is tagged and held with suture ties. The fibular head is lifted from lateral capsule with lateral collateral ligament and attached biceps tendon proximally. Submeniscal approach is same as on anterolateral aspect.6,7
 
Tips and Pearls
  1. Soft tissue health should guide the timing for definitive surgical fixation. Wait for “Wrinkle”.
  2. Preoperative CT scan is mandatory in high energy fractures. It helps in identification of the fracture fragments, their orientation, articular impaction and planning for reduction and fixation.442
  3. Knee flexion at the time of fixation relaxes the posterior musculature and also retracts the neurovascular bundle from surgical irritation. This helps in mobilization and fixation of the posterior and medial fragment.
  4. Approach should be planned on individual fracture on the bases of preoperative CT scan. The width of the intact flap of skin between two incisions should not be less than four finger breadths. Try to avoid under mining and lift full thickness flaps.
  5. Posteromedial approach and fixation: Order for ball spike pusher or reduction forceps. Long cortical screws from the pelvis set help to hold both cortices in the buttress holes. Routine small fragment sets have 3.5 mm cortical screws up to 40 mm only.
  6. Submeniscal arthrotomy: Check for synovial folds that appear as bluish soft swelling. Use a hypodermic needle hitting against proximal tibia and moving superiorly. First ‘give in’ is the submeniscal space. Open the joint with a horizontal incision in submeniscal space by cutting coronary ligament with number 15 blade. Try to avoid injuring the meniscus. Meniscus is tagged with multiple nonabsorbable sutures to elevate and examine articular cartilage surface.
  7. Intra-articular reduction: Depressed intra-articular fragment should be elevated gradually with its intact subchondral bone with the help of a blunt elevator. Elevation should start from mid-line or intercondylar eminence region and move peripherally.
  8. Once elevated these fragments are held with multiple 1 mm K-wires in subchondral bone.
 
POSTOPERATIVE CARE
Sticky stretchable absorbent dressings only over the surgical wounds are comfortable and allow immediate ice pack application. This helps in reducing swelling and post-operative pain. The lower the postoperative edema and pain, earlier it is possible to mobilize the knee (Fig. 36.16). Use of continuous passive motion (CPM) is beneficial in achieving early functional knee range of movement. Nonweight bearing is commenced early but weight bearing ambulation with an aid depends on the bone quality, articular comminution and the fixation achieved. We generally allow full weight bearing at 8 to 10 weeks.
 
COMPLICATIONS
  • Wound dehiscence or delayed healing
    Figure 36.16: Rehabilitation with the help of CPM in early postoperative period
  • 443Infection
  • Compartment syndrome: Greater the amount of injury, higher is the volume of ooze from the cancellous bone in proximal tibia.
  • Secondary loss of reduction: Secondary loss of articular reduction due to subsidence and coronal plane fractures tilting into varus.
  • Secondary osteoarthritis
  • Implant related: Prominent implants especially in thin individuals and on the medial aspect. Patients are to be counseled preoperatively though implant removal is rarely recommended.
  • Outcome: Preinjury status, associated injuries like floating knee, grade of injury or cartilage loss at the time of injury dictate the final outcome.
 
Results
The knee is a major weight bearing joint and concerns for post-traumatic arthritis remain despite surgery. Operative reduction may however, delay this inevitable outcome. Most of the energy of impact is dissipated through bone and primary ligamentous injury was believed to be rather uncommon. However, MRI may pick up a very high incidence of meniscal damage and ligamentous injury that may not necessarily merit surgical intervention.8 A large retrospective analysis revealed a 5% incidence of end stage arthritis at 11 years postfixation that warranted a knee replacement.9 The time lag for end stage arthritis to develop was variable, from as early as 2 years to about 10 years postsurgery. Surprisingly more than 95% of the patients continued to do well despite radiological arthritis.9 Rademakers and his colleagues too reported an incidence of about 5% severe end stage arthritis necessitating replacement.10 The presence of an open fracture, polytrauma and higher grades of fracture injury suggest high energy impact. Unfortunately, these are non-modifiable factors beyond surgeon control.
 
Illustrative Case
This 27-year-old gentleman was injured in a road traffic accident. He fell off a two wheeler and complained of severe pain in the left knee. He was unable to stand up thereafter. This was an isolated injury. X-rays (Fig. 36.17) and CT scan (Figs 36.18 to 36.20) revealed bicondylar fracture of the left tibial plateau. Open reduction and internal fixation using 2 plates was performed (Fig. 36.21). Patient had excellent radiological result (Fig. 36.22) and clinical function (Fig. 36.23) as the end of one year.
Figure 36.17: Preoperative X-rays
444
Figure 36.18: Preoperative CT scan images
Figures 36.19A and B: Coronal CT images showing posterior comminution (A) with intact anterior column (B)
Figures 36.20A and B: Sagittal images showing the coronal fracture lines—medial (A) and lateral (B)
445
Figure 36.21: Postoperative X-rays
Figure 36.22: One year follow-up X-rays
Figure 36.23: Clinical images showing function
References
  1. WalkerPS. A new concept in guided motion total knee arthroplasty. J Arthroplasty. 2011;16: 157–63.
  1. SchatzkerJ, McBroomR, BruceD. The tibial plateau fracture. The Toronto Experience 1968-1975. Clin Orthop Related Res. 1979;138:94–104.
  1. MarkhardtBK, GrossJM, MonuJUV. Schatzker classification of tibial plateau fractures: Use of CT and MR Imaging improves assessment. Radio Graphics. 2009;29:585–97.
  1. LuoCF, SunH, ZhangBO, ZengBF. Three column fixation for complex tibial plateau fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2010;24(11):683–92.
  1. WeilYA, GardnerMJ, BoraiahS, HelfetDL, LorichDG. Posteromedial supine approach for reduction and fixation of medial and bicondylar tibial plateau fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2008;22(5):357–62.
  1. SolomonL, StevensonAW, BairdRPV, PohlAP. Posterolateral Transfibular approach to tibial plateau fractures: Techniques, Results and Rationale. J Orthop Trauma. 2010;24(8):505–14.
  1. TaoJ, HangD, WangQ, GaoW, ZhuL, WuX, GaoK. The posterolateral shearing tibial plateau fracture: Treatment and results via a modified posterolateral approach. The Knee. 2008;15:473–9.
  1. GardnerMJ, YacoubianS, GellerD, SukM, DouglasM, PotterH, et al. The incidence of soft tissue injury in operative tibial plateau fractures: a magnetic resonance imaging analysis of 103 patients. J Orthop Trauma. 2005;19(2):79–84.
  1. MehinR, O'BrienP, BroekhuyseH, BlachutP, GuyP. Endstage arthritis following tibial plateau fractures: Average 10-year follow-up. Can J Surg. 2012;55(2):87–94.
  1. RademakersMV, KerkhoffsGMMJ, SiereveltIN, RaaymakersELFB, MartiRK. Operative treatment of 109 tibial plateau fractures: 5 to 27 years follow-up results. J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21(1):5–10.

Pilon Fracture37

Ulrich Holz
 
Introduction
The pilon fracture is a comminuted fracture of the distal tibia. It results from an axial loading injury, with impaction of the talus upon the tibial plafond. The cortical bone shatters; the softer metaphyseal bone can be impacted together with fragments of the cartilage. Because of the severity of the fracture and its intra-articular involvement, post-traumatic arthritis is a common sequela.
Pilon is a French word for pestle or rammer, an instrument used for crushing or pounding. Étienne Destot introduced the term pilon 1911 into the orthopedic literature.2
Pilon fractures involve the dome of the distal tibial articular surface and extend into the adjacent metaphysis. The fibula may or may not be intact (Fig. 37.1).
Figure 37.1: The “pilon”with fragmented articular block, anterior fragment impacted into metaphyseal region. Fracture extends into the diaphysis with several split fractures. Anterior and posterior syndesmosis intact. Fibula with short oblique fracture, little displaced
448The fracture can be challenging to manage, especially when associated with significant soft-tissue injury. Although a variety of options are available to treat these fractures, timing of definitive surgery is crucial with respect to the condition of the soft tissues.
The treatment of pilon fractures has evolved over the last decades. Conservative management gave way to surgical intervention when implants became available, but poor outcomes in high velocity and crush injuries led to a return to conservative management and external fixation or limited internal fixation.7
Now a days the importance of soft tissues and the differences between low- and high-impact energy injuries have become better understood. Outcome depends on quality of articular reconstruction and on soft-tissue condition. Actual treatment concepts evolved along with an availability of more advanced implant technology and surgical techniques.Tailoring treatment to the extent of the bony and soft tissue injuries is of utmost importance.
 
Frequency
Pilon fractures account for approximately 1 to 10% of tibial fractures.
 
Pathophysiology
Depending on the mechanism, a wide variety of injuries can occur. Low-energy injuries result in minimal soft-tissue injury. The fracture fragments are fewer, often have a spiral orientation and are little displaced.
High-energy injuries such as a fall from height or a high-speed motor vehicle accident can produce significant comminution with multiple displaced fracture fragments and a contused or crushed soft-tissue envelope, which could also be breached and open to external contamination through wounds. The fibula is fractured as well in high-energy injuries.
Damage to the articular cartilage of the tibia and talus occurs. The cartilage can be scuffed, bruised, or in severe cases fragmented at the weight-bearing central dome of the tibia. Fragments of various sizes can be impacted into the metaphysis.
 
TREATMENT AT SCENE OF ACCIDENT
  • Correct any gross deformity of the limb
  • Elevate and support the limb in a temporary splint
  • Cover open fractures with sterile dressings.
 
TREATMENT AFTER ADMISSION TO THE HOSPITAL
Do not waste time at the emergency department! Keep open fractures covered with sterile dressing! Organize the imaging studies as fast as possible.
If possible, obtain a history of any previous injury and disease (e.g. diabetes mellitus). Be aware of peripheral vascular or neuropathic diseases.
In closed fractures clinical presentation varies depending on the severity of the injury and the time elapsed since the injury. Soft tissues swell rapidly, and tissue tension can produce blisters. The bony fragments may be significantly displaced and thus threaten the viability of the soft-tissue envelope. Crushing, degloving, bruising, and hematomas can further compromise soft tissues.
Leave fracture blisters intact. Once ruptured, blisters are more likely to become contaminated by skin or hospital flora.
Antibiotic prophylaxis includes cephalexin. For highly contaminated wounds an aminoglycoside is added.
449In open fractures, obtain a digital photograph for the record only at the sterile operation room.
Classification of soft-tissue injury may follow the scores of Oestern/Tscherne or Gustilo.
 
Imaging
Plain radiographs, including anteroposterior, mortise, and lateral views centered over the ankle are obtained.
CT scanning and 3D reconstruction of the distal tibia and ankle joint is almost mandatory, and it yields a better understanding of the fracture pattern, the comminution, the displacement, and the impaction of articular fragments (Fig. 37.2).
This is valuable in planning the operation, such as to help determine the approach, the reduction of the fragments and the orientation of wires and screws.
In polytrauma patients a full body scan is advisable.
Angiography is required if vascular compromise is suspected.
 
FRACTURE CLASSIFICATION
The AO/OTA classification is as follows (Figs 37.3A to C):
Type A: These fractures are extra-articular and subcategorized as simple (A1), comminuted (A2), or severely comminuted (A3) (Fig. 37.4A).
Type B: These fractures involve only a portion of the articular surface and a single column. Subcategories include pure split (B1), split with depression (B2), and depression with multiple fragments (B3) (Fig. 37.4B).
Type C: These fractures involve the whole of the articular surface. Type C fractures may be categorized as a simple split in the articular surface and the metaphysis (C1), an articular split that is simple with a metaphysis split that is multifragmentary (C2), or a fracture with multiple fragments of the articular surface and the metaphysis (C3) (Fig. 37.4C).
 
Indications for Surgery Include the Following
  • Open fracture
  • Displaced fracture
  • Articular fragments with a gap of more than 2 mm or step of more than 1 mm
  • Rotational malalignment
  • Vascular compromise
  • Compartment syndrome.
 
GOALS OF OPERATIVE TREATMENT
Congruity of the ankle joint, axis alignment, little damage to soft tissues, no harm to arterial or big venous vessels and nerves. Normal function and good long-term result.
 
Contraindications to Open Reduction and Internal Fixation
Open fractures Grade 3, the presence of severe soft-tissue swelling and/or blisters, peripheral vascular disease, and/or wound infection are contraindications for extensive surgery. External fixation should be used in such situations as primary treatment (Fig. 37.5).450
Figures 37.2A to I: Pilon fracture Type C. Standard X-rays anteroposterior and lateral view. CT scan along with coronal cuts and 3-dimensional reconstruction. Good images facilitate decision making and planning of the operation
451
Figures 37.3A to C: AO/ATO classification; Type A:Extra-articular and subcategorized as simple (A1), comminuted (A2), or severly comminuted (A3); Type B: Fractures involving only a portion of the articular surface and a single column. Subcategories include pure split (B1), split with depression (B2), and depression with multiple fragments (B3); Type C: Fractures involving the whole articular surface. Subcategories are simple split in the articular surface and metaphysis (C1), an articular split with a multifragmentary metaphyseal split fragment (C2), fractures with multiple fragments of the articular surface and the metaphysis (C3)
Figures 37.4A to C: (A) Type A3 fracture with severe extra-articular comminution; (B) Type B1 fracture with posterior split of the articular surface; (C) Type C3 fracture
452
Figures 37.5A to D: Open fractures Grade 3. Vascular supply was restored after reduction with external fixator. Early free flap was performed
 
TIMING OF SURGERY
The timing of surgery is based on :
  • Condition of the soft tissues
  • Presence of any other additional injuries
  • Presence of open wound and/or vascular compromise
  • Time elapsed since the injury in open fractures.
Open fractures require urgent and thorough debridement. In the case of vascular injury or compromise, vascular surgery is needed to restore blood flow. Blood flow to the foot may be compromised in case of severe displacement of fragments. If it is not restored after reduction, consult a vascular surgeon and ask for angiography.
When soft tissues are lost and bone and/or tendons are exposed plastic surgery is required. Consult a plastic surgeon. 453
 
Stabilization of Fracture
Patients with Pilon fractures admitted early after the injury with little swelling can be treated straight forward by open reduction and internal fixation. The decisive parameter is not the elapsed time between injury and admission but the condition of the tissues. Otherwise definitive surgery is undertaken when the condition of soft tissues is optimized. This is usually when the blisters have epithelized or healed and the skin is wrinkled.
 
PRELIMINARY STABILIZATION
Fractures with severe swelling and/or blisters should be immobilized by external fixator. Definitive surgery to restore the fragments has to be postponed until swelling subsided (staged surgery8). Adding surgical insult to already compromised soft tissues leads to a higher incidence of wound complications.
Preliminary stabilization in the presence of soft-tissue swelling is usually achieved with an external fixator spanning the ankle. An initial plate fixation of the fibula contributes to reduction and stability. Most often osteosynthesis of the fibula is relatively easy. Normal length of the fibula facilitates secondary reconstructions of the distal tibia (Fig. 37.6).
The external fixation helps with pain relief and in the resolution of soft-tissue swelling.
It prevents contractures in soft tissue, which can make subsequent surgery difficult.
It facilitates dressing changes and wound healing in open fractures, maintains alignment and permits plastic surgery.
Distraction of the ankle joint has to be avoided in order not to get dystrophic syndromes.
 
DEFINITIVE SURGERY
Sometimes with external fixation the fracture is reduced pretty well and only additional percutaneous lag screws or cannulated screws, applied over K-wires9 are necessary to restore the joint (Figs 37.7A and B). But keeping the external fixator for several weeks in place raises the risk of pin tract infection.
Therefore, open reduction and solid internal fixation is the preferable treatment. It allows early function and, if good congruity of the ankle is achieved the outcome is superior to external fixation.
Figures 37.6A to D: Initial plate fixation of the fibula restoring the alignment in a Type A fracture. The external fixator protects (neutralization) the good position
454
Figures 37.7A and B: (A) Type B1 fracture with plate osteosynthesis for the fibula fracture and minimal invasive screw fixation for the articular tibia fracture. (B) The external fixator as definitive treatment. Type B3 with similar strategy
455
Figures 37.8A to C: Planning of surgery. Identify the key fragments and select accordingly the implants which have to buttress: in this case from anterior and medial side of the distal tibia
Options for definitive surgery include :
  • Open reduction and internal fixation
  • External fixation (either spanning the ankle or not)
  • Limited internal fixation together with external fixation
  • Minimal invasive screw and plate osteosynthesis.
 
Preoperative Workup
Planning of the procedure is based on findings from radiography and CT scanning.
Determine the steps of reduction, the key fragments and the choice of implants. Consent is essential. Patient information includes (Fig. 37.8).
456Surgical procedure with or without tourniquet, implants required, eventually need for bone graft from the Iliac crest.
Postoperative management with partial weight-bearing for about 8 weeks.
Risks: Lesions to vessels and nerves. Postoperative infection and the necessity of further surgical treatment, stiffness of the ankle joint and in extreme cases amputation.
 
ANESTHESIA AND POSITIONING
General anesthesia or epidural anesthesia.
The surgery is performed on a radiolucent table with a fluoroscope.
Antibiotic prophylaxis is administered at the time of anesthesia induction.
Supine position, roll of towels underneath the buttock of the injured side and roll towel to support the ankle if necessary.
In fractures with severe comminution prepare for bone graft from the iliac crest.
 
SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS AND IMPLANTS
  • Basic instrument set
  • Pointed reduction forceps
  • Kirschner wires 1.8 mm
  • 3.5 mm screws (standard cortical and cancellous or self-drilling and tapping)
  • One-third tubular plate for the fibula
  • 3.5 reconstruction plates if the pilon has to be buttressed from two sides.
  • At the medial aspect of the distal tibia a 3.5 DCP can be applied instead of a reconstruction plate.
  • Special “anatomically shaped” plates for the distal tibia (not mandatory at all) with locking screws (Figs 37.9 and 37.10).
Figure 37.9: Newer implants with locking screws. Some plates allow for multidirectional screws, others are unidirectional. In fractures which need buttress in two planes they will not suffice
457
Figures 37.10A and B: (A) Type C fracture stabilized with “anatomical” shaped locked plate. Instability remained at the anterior fracture site. (B) Two reconstruction plates are biomechanical better and cover less bone
 
Surgical Technique
 
PERCUTANEOUS OR MINIMALLY INVASIVE FIXATION4
This technique can be used in minimally displaced fractures.
The articular fragments are reduced by closed techniques or through step incisions using Kirschner wires as “joystick” or “push screws” to place them into position. Once they are aligned, cannulated screws can be inserted under fluoroscopic guidance.
An additional external fixator protects the reconstructed pilon.
Sometimes arthroscopic control is useful but difficult because of the narrow joint and the hematoma.
For few authors arthroscopy-assisted combined external and minimally invasive internal fixation is the treatment of choice for these fractures. External fixation is used to improve the fracture alignment, arthroscopy for restoring the joint surface, and minimally invasive screws to ensure fragment stability. The reported number of cases are few.1,5
This method is not suitable for fractures with significant comminution or impacted articular fragments.458
 
EXTERNAL FIXATION6
  • The fixator may span the ankle joint and incorporate the foot to give additional stability to the reconstruction.
    Two Steinmann pins are anchored in the tibia above the fracture. Another pin is driven through the calcaneus just below the tip of lateral malleolus. The construct has to be aligned with the central axis of the tibia in order to avoid subluxation of the joint (Figs 37.11A and B).
    Figures 37.11A and B: (A) Type C fracture with external fixator in wrong position. Therefore, subluxation in the ankle joint and no reduction by ligamentotaxis; (B) Correction with two buttress plates
    459
    Figure 37.12: Hybrid external fixator is useful in Type A fractures, sometimes in Type B fractures eventually together with lag screws
    The foot in neutral position should be incorporated in the frame by anchoring small half pins in the metatarsal bone I and V. Carbon fiber rods link the pins and allow fluoroscopy and later on radiography.
    Distraction of the ankle joint has to be avoided.
  • A similar construct can be achieved using wires and rings (Ilizarov).13
  • An alternative procedure is the hybrid ring fixator not spanning the ankle joint and allowing for early motion (Fig. 37.12).
    Two 5 mm half pins are inserted in the tibia proximal to the fracture in a sagittal plane. The wires are placed in the articular bloc 10 to 15 mm above and parallel to the joint. The direction of the wires is from posterolateral to anteromedial and posteromedial-to-anterolateral. Olive wires can exert some compression to the fracture. The pins and wires are connected by carbon fiber rods and ring. Peroneal tendons and the sural nerve are endangered.
As definitive treatment this technique is suitable only for simple articular fractures which can be anatomically reduced indirectly.
 
Open Reduction and Internal Fixation
A tourniquet at the thigh is inflated if necessary.
The fibula, if not already stabilized before, is approached by a straight incision. Avoid damage to the superficial peroneal nerve. The direct reduction of the fibula with a sharp pointed forceps is usually not difficult. For stabilization a 5 or 6 hole one-third-tubular plate is sufficient. The plate is in a lateral or dorsolateral position. Complex fibula fractures are reduced indirectly by pulling or with a small distractor (Tension-distraction devise). Plates must be longer to bridge the comminution.
Correct reconstruction of the fibula already reduces lateral key fragments of the tibia.(anterior syndesmotic fragment) (Figs 37.14A and B).460
Figures 37.13A and B: Anteromedial approach to the distal tibia. Nervus peroneus superficialis and saphenus nerve should remain intact and if possible the vena saphena as well. Do not dissect tissue layers too much in order to maintain vascularity
The distal tibia is exposed by an anteromedial slightly curved incision overlying the distal tibia just lateral to the tibial crest and following the tibialis anterior tendon. Posterolateral approach seems to be an alternative in cases with displaced posterior fragments. In these cases the fibula will be fixed from the same approach.461
Figures 37.14A to F: Classical reconstruction of type C fractures. Fibula osteosynthesis first often results in good alignment of the articular bloc. Impacted fragments are carefully pushed down to the surface of the talus. The flat part of a chisel is an excellent instrument for this procedure. Provisional fixation with K-wires. Major gaps are filled with autogenous bone. After fluoroscopic control osteosynthesis with plates
The incision ends below the tip of the medial malleolus. Take care to protect the superficial peroneal and saphenous nerve (Figs 37.13A and B).
The fracture is exposed with minimal detachment of soft tissues in order to avoid avascular fragments.12
The joint must be opened anterior and the cartilage damage identified. Anterior articular fragments are gently lifted up and aside to contol the dome. Central fragments driven up into the metaphysis are mobilized carefully . The cartilage fragment, always together with the attached cancellous bone is pressed down with the broad side of an 8 to 10 mm Lambotte chisel to the surface of the talus (talus as a mold). Once these fragments are aligned they are fixed with K-wires. Sometimes a pointed forceps is necessary (Fig. 37.14C).
Often a key fragment is the anterolateral syndesmotic fragment. It must be perfectly reduced and preliminary fixed with one or two percutaneous K-wires. A step incision over this fragment should not harm the retracted anterior tibialis artery in the deep layer.462
Figures 37.15A and B: Type B fracture stabilized with DCP and lag screws
After restoration of the joint the metaphyseal fragments are reduced and temporarily fixed with K-wires and/or pointed forceps. The result must be checked by fluoroscopy or X-ray (Fig. 37.14D).
Major metaphyseal bone defects have to be filled up with bone grafts. Still the golden standard is autogenous bone from the iliac crest. Sometimes a corticocancellous graft has to buttress a marked loss of bone (Figs 37.14E and F).
Plates finally stabilize the pilon. In type I and II a buttress plate contoured to the medial aspect of the distal tibia will suffice. A 3.5 DCP or low-profile contoured plate is placed to the medial aspect of the tibia through the existing exposure (Figs 37.15A and B). In small bones even a 3.5 reconstruction plate will be stable enough (Figs 37.16A and B). If the fracture extends proximal, a less invasive percutaneous technique is possible at the diaphysis. Cloverleaf plates cover quite an extensive area of bone and may disturb vascularity.
If the medial plate is not enough to stabilize properly, two plates should buttress, one medial and the other anterior3 (Figs 37.17A to F).
Figures 37.16A and B: Type B fracture stabilized with reconstruction plate and lag screw
463
Figures 37.17A to F: Classical reconstruction and buttress from anterior and lateral providing a high degree of stability. Prefered type of osteosynthesis
464
Figure 37.18: Severerly comminuted C fracture and its reconstruction
With two reconstruction plates more stability is achieved compared to various design variations of distal tibia plates, locked or unlocked (Figs 37.18 and 37.19A and B).
Before wound closure the tourniquet should be released. The fascia is left open but the retinaculum extensorum is sutured. One or two suction drains are placed. Skin suture under no tension with atraumatic technique. If the fibula was fixed simultaneously and tension becomes a problem the fibula wound can be left open and covered by sterile wound dressings (e.g. polyurethane foam). After a few days secondary wound closure will be possible.
With the patient still under anesthesia a padded, below-knee posterior splint is applied with the ankle held at neutral position (90°). This will prevent an equinus position.
 
POSTOPERATIVE MANAGEMENT
The leg is kept elevated .Vascularity and peripherial sensation has to be controlled and documented after the operation and at least for the next 48 hours (cave compartment syndrome).
In closed fractures antibiotics are given as single shot.11 Open fractures require a continuation only if secondary revisions are necessary.
Analgesia is administered using a patient-controlled device. A good alternative is the continuous femoral or popliteal block.
Active exercises are not only focused on joint function but also as part of antithrombotic measures.465
Figures 37.19A and B: Preliminary fixation of the key fragments and finally buttressing plates
466Heparin or low molecular heparin is administered until the patient is completely mobile, usually after 2 to 3 weeks.
Patients should walk with crutches rolling the foot properly on the ground and putting little weight (20 Kg) for about eight weeks. The splint is removed after a few days and can be used to position the leg during the night. Full weight-bearing may be started after 8 to 10 weeks depending on the progress of fracture healing. Full consolidation can be expected after 3 to 4 months.
Patients are discharged home when comfortable and observed at regular intervals.
 
Complications
Complications are closely related to the experience of the surgeon. Good planning and timing is essential to avoid pitfalls.
  • Many complications result from soft tissue problems such as wound dehiscence, skin necrosis and infection. Reports range between 10 to 35%.10 The extent of tissue damage, caused by the injury but also by the operation is the main cause of these complications.
    Infections can become disastrous resulting in a stiff ankle joint and sometimes in amputation.
    Therefore, if there is any sign of infection during the early postoperative period a revision with radical debridement is mandatory. If the osteosynthesis is unstable, implants should be removed and a spanning fixator applied.
  • Complications basically related to the bone are pin-tract infection and osteomyelitis, avascular necrosis of fragments, non- and mal-union with varus or valgus deformity, incongruity of the joint and finally arthritis.
    Infected pins have to be exchanged as early as possible. Osteomyelitis requires sequestrectomy, specific antibiotic treatment and stabilization usually by external fixator.
    Incongruity of the joint should be operated only if there is a realistic chance for improvement. If so, the revision should take place early, before consolidation (Figs 37.20A and B).
    Nonunion and malunion are corrected late, when soft tissues are good.
  • Implant related complications are failure or breakage of metal. Specific problems are reported about locked plates.
 
Results
Low energy pilon fractures have good results as long as joint congruity was restored.
In high energy trauma and crush injuries the damage of the soft tissue envelope often prevents from early reconstruction and internal fixation. With external fixation in these cases it is difficult to get a congruent articular surface. Therefore, post-traumatic arthritis more often occurs. Impairment of function will be observed.
Post-traumatic arthritis of the ankle obviously is tolerated more than in other weight- bearing joints. This is reflected by the low number of ankle fusions which become necessary.
Comparison of results is difficult because of the great variation of fracture types in the studies. There is a strong correlation between anatomical restoration and outcome. Experience of the surgeon is probably the most influential factor for the outcome.
 
Illustrative Case
A 45 year old worker fell down from height and sustained Pilon fracture (Figs 37.20A and B). Osteosynthesis resulted in suboptimal reduction and the anterior part of pilon 467was no supported (Figs 37.20C and D).
Figures 37.20A to G: (A to D) Insufficient stabilization. Anterior part of the pilon is not reduced and not supported; (E to G) Early reosteosyntheses after reduction. Sound healing after 12 months
A revision surgery achieved anatomical reduction and stable fixation which went on to sound healing (Figs 37.20E to G).
References
  1. CetikO, CiftH, AriM, ComertB. Arthroscopy-assisted combined external and internal fixation of a pilon fracture of the tibia. Hong Kong Med J. 2007;13(5):403–5.
  1. HeimU. The pilon tibiale fracture: classification, surgical techniques, results. Springer berlin Heidelberg  New York, 1991.
  1. HolzU. In: Chirurgische Operationslehre Hsg. Durst, Rohen; Schattauer  1991 and 1996.
  1. LeungF, KwokHY, PunTS, et al. Limited open reduction and Ilizarov external fixation in the treatment of distal tibial fractures. Injury. 2004;35:278–83.
  1. PanchbhaviVK. Minimally Invasive Stabilization of Pilon Fractures. Techniques in Foot and Ankle Surgery. 2005;4(4):240–8.
  1. PapadokostakisG, KontakisG, GiannoudisP, et al. External fixation devices in the treatment of fractures of the tibial plafond: a systematic review of the literature. J Bone Joint Surg [Br]. 2008;90:1–6.
  1. SchatzkerJM, TileM. The rational of operative fracture care. Springer, Berlin Heidelberg, 1987.
  1. SirkinM, SandersR, DiPasqualeT, HerscoviciD Jr. A staged protocol for soft tissue management in the treatment of complex pilon fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18(8 Suppl):S32–8.
  1. SyedMA, PanchbhaviVK. Fixation of tibial pilon fractures with percutaneous cannulated screws. Injury. 2004;35:284–9.
  1. SommerCh, RüediT. In: AO Principles of fracture management, Thieme,  2000.
  1. StengelD, et al. Perioperative antibiotic prophylaxis in clean bone and joint surgery. Orthopaedics and Traumatology. 2003;15:101–10.
  1. ToplissCJ, JacksonM, AtkinsRM. The direct surgical approach to the distal tibial pilon fracture. JBJS. 2003;85-B(Suppl III):247.
  1. VidyadharaS, SharathK Rao. Ilizarov treatment of complex tibial pilon fractures. Int Orthop. 2006;30(2):113–7.

Malleolar Fracture38

Vivek Trikha, Suresh Subramani
 
Introduction
Ankle fractures are the most common fractures involving the lower extremity. Over the past five decades the incidence is progressively increasing. The recent increased incidence in geriatric population1 complicates fixation stability and needs new techniques in fixation.
 
Classification, Indications, Contraindications
The ankle fractures may involve the medial malleolus, lateral malleolus or the posterior malleolus depending upon the mechanism. The outcome of displaced bimalleolar fractures is superior to conservative methods. Undisplaced medial malleolus and lateral malleolus fractures can be treated conservatively. Isolated medial malleoli fracture should be checked for associated high level fibula fracture, which may be missed in routine radiographs. The isolated lateral malleolus fracture should also be checked for signs of associated medial side injury, especially deltoid ligament injury.
Two classifications are commonly used in ankle fractures. The Denis-Weber classification2 is based upon the level of fibula fracture line. In type A fractures, the fracture line is infrasyndesmotic. In Type B, the fracture line is at the level of syndesmosis while in Type C, the line is suprasyndesmotic. Lauge-Hansen classification3 is based upon the position of the foot at the time of injury and direction of talus rotation as the force continues (Table 38.1).
The supination external rotation injuries are the most common fracture pattern of the ankle fractures. The syndesmotic injury is commonly associated with rotational injuries.
 
Preoperative Planning
A good quality anteroposterior, mortise view and lateral view radiographs are essential to identify the fracture lines, joint subluxation and possible syndesmotic injury. On anteroposterior radiograph of the ankle, the medial, lateral and superior joint space should be equal. The medial joint space should be less than 4 mm in actual terms and if more than 4 mm, it denotes lateral talar subluxation. The medial surface of distal fibula should be continuous with talar articular margin. The talocrural angle indirectly measures the fibular length and that should be 83±4 degrees.470
Table 38.1   Lauge-Hansen classification of ankle fractures
Fracture type
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Supination-Adduction
Transverse avulsion type fracture of the fibula below the level of the joint
Vertical fracture of the medial malleolus
Supination-Eversion (External rotation)
Disruption of the anterior tibiofibular ligament
Spiral oblique fracture of the distal fibula
Disruption of the posterior tibiofibular ligament or fracture of the posterior malleolus
Fracture of the medial malleolus or rupture of the deltoid ligament
Pronation-Abduction
Transverse fracture of the medial malleolus or rupture of the deltoid ligament
Rupture of the syndesmotic ligaments or avulsion fracture of their insertions
Short, horizontal, oblique fracture of the fibula above the level of the joint
Pronation-Eversion (External rotation) (PER)
Transverse fracture of the medial malleolus or disruption of the deltoid ligament
Disruption of the anterior tibiofibular ligament
Short oblique fracture of the fibula above the level of the joint
Rupture of posterior tibiofibular ligament or avulsion fracture of the posterolateral tibia
Figure 38.1: AP view and mortise view of normal ankle joint
The normal inferior tibiofibular joint space is 4 mm. If it is more than 6 mm, it denotes syndesmotic disruption. In AP view there will be an overlap of distal fibula over distal tibia for about 6 mm (1 cm above the joint line) (Fig. 38.1).
 
Nonoperative Management
Undisplaced medial malleolus and lateral malleolus are usually treated conservatively.4,5 Conservative management consists of below knee slab with leg elevation. A check radiograph should be taken at the end of one week to rule out any displacement. If the reduction is maintained, plaster is continued for 6 weeks and then progressive weight- bearing is started. If there is a later displacement, operative treatment has to be opted for.
 
Surgery
 
INDICATIONS FOR SURGERY
  • More than 2 mm displacement of either medial or lateral malleolus after closed reduction471
  • Increased medial joint space with fibula fracture
  • Tibiotalar subluxation
  • Intra-articular loose fragment
 
ANESTHESIA
This surgery can easily be performed in regional anesthesia with spinal anesthesia being commonly used.
 
POSITION
Supine position with a sand bag in the ipsilateral gluteal region is commonly used. This helps in having a good view of both the medial and lateral surface of the ankle for the required incisions. Prone position is rarely needed for fixation of posterior malleolus. Tourniquet is applied at the level of upper thigh. Fluoroscopy is used to check adequacy of fracture reduction and joint congruity.
 
SEQUENCE OF FIXATION
In a case of bimalleolar fracture, it is usually advisable to reduce and fix the lateral malleolus first and then the medial malleolus. The reduction of the lateral malleolus aids in maintaining the length of the fibula and thus helps in indirect reduction of the medial fragment as well. In a case of trimalleolar fracture, the posterior malleolus is usually fixed first, followed by the lateral malleolus and finally the medial malleolus.6
 
LATERAL MALLEOLUS FIXATION
Fibula is a subcutaneous bone in its distal part and hence direct incision centered over the distal fibula should be avoided. Incision is usually given on the posterolateral surface of the distal fibula (Fig. 38.2). This incision avoids the exposure of the plate in cases of wound gaping or dehiscence. This incision also helps in keeping an adequate distance from another incision if planned on the anterior aspect of the ankle due to comminution or in cases of pilon fractures.
Superficial peroneal nerve, which crosses the fibula in the distal part, should be protected to avoid neuroma formation. The deep fascia is then divided in the line of incision (Fig. 38.3).
Fracture ends are cleaned of soft tissue. The fragments are reduced with the help of a small reduction forceps (Fig. 38.4). Anatomical reduction and maintenance of fibular length are important. Besides the length of the fibula, the rotation should also be checked.
Figure 38.2: A straight incision is made slightly posterior to fibula centering on the fracture site
472
Figure 38.3: Superficial and deep fascia are divided in line of incision to expose the fracture site
Figure 38.4: Reduction is done with small reduction forceps
Figure 38.5: Drill hole is made perpendicular to the fracture site for lag screw
A short oblique fracture of fibula can be fixed with a lag screw and neutralization plate (Figs 38.5 to 38.8). Long spiral fractures can be fixed with two lag screws and a neutralization plate. Minimum of four cortical fixations is essential on either side of the fracture line. A small set one-third or semitubular plate is commonly used to fix the fibula. A 3.5 mm dynamic compression plate can also be used in larger individuals. Recently, special plates have also been developed for the fixation of fibula.473
Figure 38.6: Interfragmentary compression is achieved with a lag screw
Figure 38.7: Small tubular plate is placed over the lateral surface of fibula
Figure 38.8: Plate fixed with screws on either side of fracture
If the fibula is comminuted, the plate is applied in a bridging mode. The fractured segment is bypassed and the cortical fixation is achieved above and below the fractured region. The plate should be precontoured before fixation with screws.474
Figure 38.9: Care should be taken to prevent joint penetration while applying distal screws
Occasionally, if the fracture is very low transverse, it can be fixed with 4 mm malleolar screw or tension band wiring. Intraoperative imaging can be extremely useful to avoid penetrating the joint while applying the distal screws (Fig. 38.9).
 
MEDIAL MALLEOLUS FIXATION
Place a folded towel below the ankle. Bony points and fracture line are marked with a marker, which aids in making incision (Fig. 38.10). It is advisable to avoid incision over unhealthy skin.
A straight or a slightly curved incision is made over the medial malleolus. The curve may be directed anteriorly or posteriorly depending on the skin condition, the size of the medial fragment and also the need for fixation of posterior malleolus. Curved incision is helpful in fixing a medially impacted fracture and also in fractures with loose fragments inside the joint. A straight incision over the bone prominence of the medial malleolus is avoided as it may lead to wound dehiscence.
Figure 38.10: Bony points are marked, showing the medial malleolus and fracture line. Anterior curvilinear incision is marked
475
Figure 38.11: Torn periosteum and fracture gap is visible
Figure 38.12: Distal fragment is retracted; joint cavity is exposed and cleaned of debris
Great saphenous vein and nerve are safeguarded in the subcutaneous plane to avoid painful neuroma formation. There is no defined deep fascia over the medial malleolus.
Periosteum usually is torn in medial malleolar fractures (Fig. 38.11). In most of the fractures periosteal interposition is present which causes difficulty in healing and may lead to nonunion. The periosteum should be elevated from the fracture ends and fracture surface has to be cleaned of blood clots. The fragment has to be retracted distally to see the joint. Any loose fragments inside the joint are removed and the joint is washed with saline (Fig. 38.12).
A small drill hole is made above the fracture line to engage the reduction forceps (Fig. 38.13). The medial malleolus is reduced with a tenaculum or a small reduction forceps (Fig. 38.14). One tip is placed at a hole made in the distal tibia and another tip at the fragment apex.
Figure 38.13: A small drill hole is made above the fracture site
Figure 38.14: Fracture is reduced with reduction forceps
476Avoid crushing of the fragment especially in elderly patients. The reduction should be checked both at the anterior margin of the fracture line and also at the lateral surface to avoid malreduction or rotation of the fragment. If reduction is difficult to achieve the possibility of the deep part of the deltoid ligament or tibialis posterior tendon being interposed should be ruled out. The tibialis posterior tendon may be pushing the medial malleolus fragment anteriorly and needs to be retracted back for proper reduction for the medial fragment.
Place two small Kirschner (K) wires, perpendicular to the fracture line, anterior and posterior to the clamp (Fig. 38.15). Care should be taken to ensure that the wires do not penetrate the ankle joint (Fig. 38.16). A rough angle of 30 degree from the horizontal may be the angle required to prevent the penetration of the joint. Cannulated drill bit is used to drill over the wire as close to opposite cortex. The 4 mm partially threaded cannulated cancellous screw is now inserted. To place the screw in the apex of the fragment, a part of superficial deltoid ligament may be split. Another screw is inserted in same manner (Fig. 38.17). It is not necessary to engage the opposite cortex.
Figure 38.15: Fracture is provisionally fixed with two small K-wires
Figure 38.16: Reduction and direction of K- wire is checked with image
Figure 38.17: Definitive fixation done with partially threaded cancellous screws
477
Figure 38.18: After fixation of medial malleolus
Figure 38.19: Fluoroscopy image showing congruent joint reduction and anatomical reduction of fractures
The 40 or 45 mm length of screw is more than enough to have a good purchase in most of patients. The screws should be as parallel to each other and spread out over the medial malleolus fragment to have a better rotational control (Fig. 38.18).
The fracture reduction and the placement of the screws are confirmed under fluoroscopy (Fig. 38.19). The thin subcutaneous layer is now sutured with an absorbable suture and the skin is then closed.
Medial malleolus fractures which run vertically or adduction type injuries may require fixation of screws in a horizontal manner to be perpendicular to the fracture line and also to prevent the shearing displacement of the medial malleolus. Occasionally, a small antiglide plate may also be used to supplement the screw fixation.7
If there is a medial impaction, bone grafting may also be needed. If the medial fragment is very small, it may be fixed with one screw and one K-wire or sometimes with two K-wires with static tension band principle (Figs 38.20 and 38.21).8
Figure 38.20: Vertical shear fracture of medial malleolus, fixed with buttress plate. The lateral malleolar fracture is a very low fixed with 2 K-wires
478
Figure 38.21: Illustration showing small fragment of medial malleolus fixed with tension band
 
POSTERIOR MALLEOLUS FIXATION
If the posterior malleolar fragment involves more than 25% of articular surface, reduction and fixation of that fragment is recommended. It is performed before the fixation of lateral malleolus, since the fibular plate may prevent visualization and reduction of the fractured posterior fragment.
Percutaneous reduction can be obtained with a reduction forceps. The reduction forceps is placed over the posterolateral fragment and over the anterior tibia. Before putting the clamp, the dissection should be made up to the bone to avoid injury to tendons and neurovascular bundle. A guide wire is then passed from the anterior to posterior direction after making a small stab incision in the anterior tibia. Fixation is usually achieved with partially threaded 4 mm cannulated cancellous screw in the anteroposterior direction (Fig. 38.22).
If closed reduction is not possible, open reduction is done through posterolateral approach. Fixation is done with partially threaded 4 mm cannulated cancellous screws with a washer in the posterior to anterior direction. If the fragment is posteromedial, reduction is performed through posteromedial approach and fixation done with screws in the anterior to posterior direction.
Figure 38.22: Posterior malleolus fracture fixed with anteroposterior screws
479
Figure 38.23: Syndesmotic stability is checked by pull test with a towel clip
 
SYNDESMOTIC JOINT FIXATION
Stability of syndesmotic joint should be evaluated after fixation of all malleolar fractures. All cases where the fibula fracture is above the joint level or at the joint level should be adequately checked for the stability of syndesmosis. Integrity should be checked in the anteroposterior and also mediolateral plane (Fig. 38.23). The rotation of the fibula should also be checked as it may be externally rotated in case of a syndesmotic injury.
If there is instability of syndesmoses, fixation is essential. A positioning cortical screw is used to fix the syndesmosis. The screw should be inserted at an angle of 30 degree from posterior to anterior as the fibula is anatomically posterolateral to the tibia. Tricortical purchase is considered adequate for the stability. The screw should be atleast 2 cm above the joint line (Figs 38.24 and 38.25).
 
Postoperative Management
Postoperatively, a short below knee slab is applied and foot is placed over a pillow to decrease the oedema. Ankle and toe mobilization exercises are started on the 2nd postoperative day. Suture removal is done after two weeks. Nonweight-bearing walking is allowed for 6 weeks followed by partial weight-bearing. The syndesmotic screw is usually removed after 10 weeks and then patient is allowed full weight-bearing. Some surgeons prefer not to remove the syndesmotic screw before weight-bearing. However, in such a situation, the patient has to be precounselled regarding the syndesmotic screw breakage on weight-bearing in the postoperative period (Fig. 38.29).
 
Complications
 
WOUND DEHISCENCE
The rate of superficial infection is about 8 to 10% and deep infection is 2 to 3%. Elderly patients, smokers, alcoholic and diabetic patients are more prone to get wound dehiscence and skin related complications.
 
NONUNION
Medial malleolus fractures are more prone to go for nonunion when treated conservatively, due to pull of deltoid ligament and periosteal interposition. Nonunion is very rare in lateral malleolus unless it is complicated by infection or soft tissue loss.480
Figure 38.24: Illustration depicting the direction of application of syndesmotic screw
Figure 38.25: Syndesmosis disruption in PER injury is fixed with a screw through plate
 
STIFFNESS
Most of the patients will lose some range of movement. Loss of dorsiflexion is more than loss of plantar flexion. It is advised to start early range of movement exercises to prevent any fixed contracture. Equinus contracture should be avoided.
 
SECONDARY OSTEOARTHRITIS
Most of the patients will have secondary osteoarthrosis, but only small number of patients will become symptomatic if anatomical reduction is obtained. Patients with nonanatomical reduction, osteochondral injury and joint subluxation are more prone to get symptomatic osteoarthritis. This emphasizes the need for anatomical reduction and stable fixation at the time of surgery.
 
RESULTS
The outcome after operative intervention is better when compared to conservative treatment. There are various studies showing the outcome after surgical fixation of malleolar fractures. But there is no randomized control studies comparing conservative and surgical treatments.
A study by Belcher et al involving 40 patients9 had shown that significant impaired function persists for most patients 8 to 24 months after malleolar fractures when compared to normal population. In their series patients got a mean ankle score of 72 (controls-100).
In another study involving 30 patients,10 Bhandari et al showed that operated malleolar patient's physical function and role physical scores (component of SF score) remained significantly lower than normal population.
In a study by Nilsson et al11 conducted in elderly patients more than 65 years old reported that majority of patients continued to have symptoms and reported functional limitations. Also elderly female patients had less functional recovery than male patients. 481Ponzer et al12 also studied the functional outcome in Danis type B fracture and reported that most of the patients had some functional disability which was not hindering daily activities.
There is more debate on syndesmotic fixation. Studies have shown good functional outcome in anatomically reduced syndesmoses joint.13 Also there is no functional difference after one year of tricortical and four cortical syndesmotic fixations with tricortical fixation having less complications and good early outcome.14
Though most of the studies show some functional disability after surgical fixation of malleolar fractures, they are not compared with controlled population. Anatomical reduction and stable surgical fixation of displaced malleolar fractures is paramount in achieving good functional outcome when compared to conservative management.
 
Illustrative Case
A 40-year-old male sustained bimalleolar fracture from twisting injury to the left ankle. Radiographs showed supination-external rotation injury pattern with syndesmotic disruption (Fig. 38.26). Open reduction and internal fixation was done for the medial malleolus (2 screws) and the lateral malleolus (lag screw and one-third tubular plate). A syndesmotic screw was used to secure the reduction of syndesmosis (Fig. 38.27).
Figure 38.26: Supination external rotation injury with syndesmosis disruption
Figure 38.27: Immediate postoperative X-ray
482
Figure 38.28: 12 weeks postoperative X-ray
Figure 38.29: 16 weeks postoperative, syndesmotic screw is broken, but patient is asymptomatic
Check radiographs at 12 weeks showed satisfactory healing (Fig. 38.28) and patient started bearing weight. Radiographs at further follow-up at 16 weeks, showed breakage of syndesmotic screw but the patient remained asymptomatic (Fig. 38.29).
References
  1. KannusP, ParkkariJ, NiemiS, et al. Epidemiology of osteoporotic ankle fractures in elderly persons. Ann Intern Med. 1996;125(12):975–8.
  1. DanisR. Les fractures malleolaires. Theorie et Practique de l'Osteosynthese; 1949. pp. 133-5.
  1. Lauge-HansenN. Fractures of the ankle. Combined experimental-surgical and experimental roentgenologic investigations. Arch Surg. 1950;60:957–85.
  1. SarkisianJS, CodyGW. Closed treatment of ankle fractures: a new criterion for evaluation-a review of 250 cases. J Trauma. 1976;16(4):323–6.
  1. EgolKA, DolanR, KovalKJ. Functional outcome of surgery for fractures of the ankle. A prospective, randomised comparison of management in a cast or a functional brace. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2000;82(2):246–9.
  1. MastJ, JakobR, GanzR (Eds). Planning and Reduction Technique in Fracture Surgery. New York: Springer-Verlag,  1989.
  1. ToolanBC, KovalKJ, KummerFJ, et al. Vertical shear fractures of the medial malleolus: a biomechanical study of five internal fixation techniques. Foot Ankle Int. 1994;15(9):483–9.
  1. OstrumRF, LitskyAS. Tension band fixation of medial malleolus fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1992;6(4):464–8.
  1. BelcherGL, RadomisliTE, AbateJA, et al. Functional Outcome Analysis of Operatively Treated Malleolar Fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1997;11(2):106–9.
  1. BhandariM, SpragueS, HansonB, et al. Health-Related Quality of Life Following Operative Treatment of Unstable Ankle Fractures: A Prospective Observational Study. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18(6):338–45.
  1. NilssonG, JonssonK, EkdahlC, EnerothM. Outcome and quality of life after surgically treated ankle fractures in patients 65 years or older. BMC Musculoskelet Disord. 2007;8:127.
  1. PonzerS, NacellH, BergmanB, TörnkvistH. Functional outcome and quality of life in patients with Type B ankle fractures: a two-year follow-up study. J Orthop Trauma. 1999; 13(5):363–8.
  1. EgolKA, PahkB, WalshM, TejwaniNC, DavidovitchRI, KovalKJ. Outcome after unstable ankle fracture: effect of syndesmotic stabilization. J Orthop Trauma; 2010;24(1):7–11.
  1. HøinessP, StrømsøeK. Tricortical versus quadricortical syndesmosis fixation in ankle fractures: a prospective, randomized study comparing two methods of syndesmosis fixation. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18(6):331–7.

Talus Neck Fracture39

Vivek Trikha, Suresh Subramani
 
Introduction
Talus is a unique bone in the body, as most of its part is intra-articular and covered with articular cartilage. It serves as an important link between the leg and the foot. It is involved in motion at various joints including the ankle, subtalar and the midfoot. Hence, the injury to talus can have a major bearing on the foot biomechanics and also the functional outcome of the foot. Talus fractures are quite rare injuries accounting for less than 0.5% of all the fractures of the human body. Nearly 50% of these fractures involve the talar neck region. The outcome of conservative treatment for the displaced talus fractures is usually unsatisfactory. Moreover, it is also associated with complications like nonunion and avascular necrosis due to its precarious blood supply and the nature of the injury. Over the time the indications for the surgery, timing of surgery, and surgical approaches have been well-defined.
 
Classification
Talus fractures occur due to hyperdorsiflexion injury to the ankle joint. The talus neck is wedged between the anterior margin of the distal tibia and calcaneum. When greater force occurs the talus body tends to dislocate posteromedially with or without medial malleolus fracture (Figs 39.1 and 39.2). This fracture was known as the ‘aviators astragalus’ in the 1900s when it was observed to be very common in pilots who crashlanded their planes during the First World War. Nowadays road traffic accident is the most common cause of talus fracture and its associated severe soft tissue injury.
Most common classification used for talus neck fracture is Hawkins classification modified by Canale and Kelly.
Type 1—Undisplaced fracture of the talus neck without any joint subluxation. Hawkins reported 13% incidence of osteonecrosis in such fractures.
Type 2—Displaced fracture of talus neck with subluxation or dislocation of subtalar joint. This fracture pattern has nearly 20 to 50% risk of avascular necrosis.
Type 3—Displaced fracture of talus neck with subluxation or dislocation of subtalar and ankle joints. The incidence of avascular necrosis in this fracture pattern ranges from 50 to 100%.
Type 4—Displaced fracture of talus neck with subluxation or dislocation of subtalar, ankle and talonavicular joints. This type was added by Canale and Kelly. All the osseous blood supply sources are disrupted in this type of fracture. 486
Figure 39.1: Radiograph of the ankle showing fracture talus neck and medial malleolus
Figure 39.2: Lateral radiograph of the ankle showing the fracture talus neck and posteriorly dislocated body of the talus
 
Preoperative Planning
In the evaluation of talar neck fractures, radiographs should be obtained in various planes, since the talus has an unusual shape.1 Anteroposterior, lateral, and ankle mortise views are routinely performed. The Canale and Kelly view is the special view for talus neck, in which the radiograph is taken with 15 degree of internal rotation of the leg. The X-ray tube is directed 75 degree cephalad from the horizontal. The foot should be in maximum equinus and pronated.
The Canale view helps in identifying the comminution of medial or lateral part of neck of the talus and the need for buttress plating to avoid varus or valgus collapse.
Further radiographs of the foot should also be taken to rule out any midfoot or forefoot injuries.
Routine CT scan is advised in all talus fracture, since it provides additional information with even the minimal displacement of the fracture and subtle subtalar joint incongruity being visible in the CT (Figs 39.3A and B). Any comminution in the inferior aspect can also be visualized by CT scan besides the confirmation of any process fracture which may not be clearly visible in the plain radiographs.2
 
Nonoperative Management
Undisplaced fractures of talus neck can be treated by conservative method. Type 1 fractures are detected on CT scans and usually donot displace with mild dorsiflexion. If there is displacement of the fracture then the injury may be reclassified as Type 2 which requires surgical management. Even for minimally displaced fractures operative treatment should be done, since even mild displacement leads to subtalar joint incongruity. Conservative treatment consists of well-padded below knee cast for the period of 8 to 10 weeks. In the initial 4 to 6 weeks weight bearing is not allowed. Bony union should be evidenced by radiograph before the removal of plaster and weight- bearing. Though closed reduction can be obtained for Type 2 fractures, conservative treatment is not advisable as it leads to joint incongruity along with later displacement.3487
Figures 39.3A and B: (A) CT scan shows fracture medial malleolus and talus head fragment in situ. Body fragment is dislocated, not seen in CT, which is noted by empty space below the distal tibia; (B) 3D Recon view shows fracture medial malleolus and posteromedially dislocated talus body fragment
 
Surgery
 
INDICATIONS
Any displaced fracture of the talus neck or body with or without joint subluxation should be treated by surgical fixation.
 
TIMING OF SURGERY
Though talar neck fracture is not generally considered to be a true orthopedic emergency, the operative management of such fractures should be performed on an urgent basis. This holds true especially for dislocated talar neck fractures which may have compromised skin due to pressure changes and also tibial nerve dysfunction. Open talar neck fractures should also be treated as an orthopedic emergency and managed accordingly. The management includes preoperative antibiotics, tetanus prophylaxis, debridement and lavage of the wound with complete or partial fixation of the talus fracture and an application of external fixator, if required. This helps to maintain the length of the talus for later reconstruction, to help in the soft tissue healing and also to restore the alignment of foot.
 
ANESTHESIA
Regional anesthesia is usually preferred as it provides adequate muscle relaxation. If general anesthesia is used, adequate muscle relaxants should be used.
 
POSITION
Patient is placed on a radiolucent table in supine position with a sand bag placed in the ipsilateral gluteal region to prevent the external rotation of the ankle. This also helps in having a good view of both the medial and lateral surface of the ankle for the required incisions. Prone position is occasionally used for the fixation of talar neck fractures. Tourniquet is applied at the level of upper thigh. Fluoroscopy is necessary intraoperatively to check the adequacy of fracture reduction and joint congruity.488
Figure 39.4: Anteromedial incision for fracture neck of talus
 
APPROACHES
Various approaches have been described for the management of talus neck fracture. Usually a dual approach is utilized to access the talus fracture. It also helps in assessment of the alignment and to prevent malreduction of the talar neck fractures. Anteromedial approach is the first approach which helps in visualization of the fracture. The incision is made medial to the tibialis anterior tendon (Fig. 39.4). If the fracture is more posterior, incision is made midway between tibialis anterior and posterior tendons. The fasciocutaneous flap thus created should be elevated as a whole to avoid skin necrosis (Figs 39.5A to C). Care should be taken to safeguard the saphenous nerve and vein. If this approach is not adequate, transmalleolar approach may be used. In this approach, medial malleolar osteotomy is performed to increase the exposure and aid in the anatomical reduction. Very thin oscillating saw blade should be used to make an oblique osteotomy. Care should be taken not to damage the deltoid ligament while retracting the medial malleolus fragment distally. In many cases of Hawkins Type 3 fracture, there is already a medial malleolus fracture. Medial part of the talus neck and head can now be visualized.
In anterolateral approach, the incision is made in the line of base of fourth metatarsal from the ankle joint to 4 to 5 cm below (Fig. 39.6). Superficial peroneal nerve lies just below the skin and should be safe guarded (Fig. 39.7). Thin skin flaps should be avoided. Extensor retinaculum is sharply divided to increase the exposure while the extensor tendons are retracted medially. Extensor digitorum brevis is elevated subperiosteally and reflected distally. Capsulotomy may be done in the line of the neck of talus. Lateral aspect of the talus neck, head and sinus tarsi can now be visualized. Soft tissue within the sinus tarsi should not be cut, since major vessels to talar body go through this.
Posterolateral, posteromedial and direct lateral approaches are the other approaches used when there is need to fix a particular fracture patterns. Combined anteromedial and anterolateral are the commonly used approaches for fixation of talus neck fractures.
 
INTRAOPERATIVE REDUCTION METHODS
A Steinman pin or an external fixator is used to reduce the displaced talar body and reduce the axial pull of the tendoachilles (Figs 39.8 and 39.9). Knee is kept in flexion and ankle in equinus. Downward traction is given through Steinman pin. The talar body fragment, in a Hawkins Type 3 fracture, is usually displaced posteromedially due to its hinge with the deltoid ligament which remains intact. The dislocated talar body fragment is pushed from backwards. Insertion of a small Schantz pin or a thick K-wire 489through the displaced fragment may help in its reduction and anatomical reduction of the fracture through the manipulation of the head fragment by joystick maneuver.
Figures 39.5A to C: Visualization of talus neck fracture through anteromedial incision
Figure 39.6: Anterolateral incision for fracture neck of talus
490
Figure 39.7: Superficial peroneal nerve is just underneath the skin
Figure 39.8: Reduction tried with longitudinal traction applied through calcaneal pin
Figure 39.9: Reduction attempted with external fixator applied with one pin in calcaneum and other in the distal tibia
491
Figure 39.10: Dislocated body is reduced into the normal place
 
FIXATION
After reduction of the talar body into the dome (Fig. 39.10), its anatomical reduction with the talar neck is performed. This is aided by the joystick inserted into the body. Care should be taken to achieve anatomical reduction of the fracture. The distraction achieved with the help of the external fixator or a calcaneal pin is essential to counter the forces of Tendoachilles tendon and prevent malreduction. The reduction achieved may be checked intraoperatively with the Canale view (Figs 39.11A and B) which shows any varus malalignment. Provisional fixation is now done with K-wires (Figs 39.12 and 39.13). Fixation is commonly done with screws. The screws can be applied anterior to posterior or posterior to anterior. The posterior to anterior screws can be applied perpendicular to fracture site, which is considered biomechanically strong. However, the anterior to posterior screw fixation is more than enough to withstand the shearing force across the fracture site. Two screws will provide adequate mechanical stability.4
Figures 39.11A and B: (A) Canale view to assess the accurate reduction of the talar neck fracture; (B) Radiographic image of the Canale view. There is no varus tilt of the fractured talar neck
492
Figure 39.12: Provisional fixation done with K-wires
Figure 39.13: Reduction checked with C-arm
Figure 39.14: Fixation done with cannulated cancellous screw from medial side
Figure 39.15: Screw is passed as perpendicular to the fracture line and up to subchondral bone
The medial screw usually has to be put from the head of the talus using countersink method (Figs 39.14 and 39.15) while the screw from the lateral side can be put from the nonarticular surface which is very strong and provides good fixation (Figs 39.16 and 39.17). The fracture line is usually going proximal to this surface thus a strong fixation may be achieved from the lateral screw. The direction of the screw is posterolateral from the medial screw and posteromedial from the lateral screw. If the medial malleolus is fractured, it has to be fixed with parallel screws as well through the predrilled holes (Figs 39.18 to 39.20). Final check radiographs are obtained (Figs 39.21 and 39.22).
 
CLOSURE
Thorough wound wash is given. If extensor retinaculum is divided, it should be repaired to avoid tendon bowstringing. Extensor digitorum brevis is attached to its origin. Wound is closed in layers over mini drain. Interrupted 3 ‘0’ Nylon is used for the skin sutures (Figs 39.23 and 39.24).493
Figure 39.16: Fixation with CCS through lateral aspect
Figure 39.17: Fixation is confirmed with C-arm
Figure 39.18: Medial malleolus is provisionally fixed with K-wires
Figure 39.19: Medial malleolus reduction with a reduction clamp. Fixation is confirmed with C-arm
 
ALTERNATE TECHNIQUES
When there is comminution in the talar neck, 2 mm mini plates with 4 to 5 holes can be used to avoid varus or valgus collapse. The buttress plate can be contoured and should be applied in the nonarticular region.5
In case of extruded talus, it is better to put it back and maintain the hindfoot length. Tibiocalcaneal fusion can be done later.
 
POSTOPERATIVE MANAGEMENT
Well-padded below knee slab is applied in the immediate postoperative period. Ankle is kept at neutral plantar flexion (Figs 39.25 and 39.26). Leg elevation is done till edema subsides. Suture removal is done after two weeks. Early active ankle and subtalar range of motion exercises are encouraged. Patient may be provided with a brace to prevent the equinus contracture. Radiographs are taken at the end of 6 weeks to assess 494the vascularity (Figs 39.27A and B).
Figure 39.20: Medial malleolus is fixed with two cancellous screws
Figure 39.21: AP view of the ankle after fixation of talus neck and medial malleolus
Figure 39.22: Lateral view of the ankle after fixation of talus neck and medial malleolus
Figure 39.23: Anteromedial wound after closure
Partial avascular necrosis of the dome of talus is common due to its precarious blood supply. The subchondral radiolucent line (positive Hawkins sign) denotes the vascularity.6 Its presence in an anteroposterior radiograph at 6 to 8 weeks is indicative of bone resorption which is an indirect evidence of vascularity of the talus body. Lack of the Hawkins sign may not be a confirmed indication of avascularity which may not be confirmed on plain radiographs uptil 3 months. Weight-bearing is allowed only after radiological evidence of fracture healing usually after 8 to 12 weeks.495
Figure 39.24: Anterolateral wound after closure
Figure 39.25: Leg elevation done with well-padded dressing
Figure 39.26: After removal of drain. Note the well separated surgical wounds, which lessens the chances of wound necrosis
496
Figures 39.27A and B: Postoperative radiographs at 6 weeks showing subchondral radiolucent line which denotes presence of vascularity
 
Complications
 
WOUND NECROSIS
When there is fracture dislocation, it may jeopardize the blood supply to the skin flap. Dislocation should be reduced as early as possible to avoid skin necrosis. When combined approaches are used, the skin should not be undermined. If severe soft tissue edema is there, surgery may be postponed and an external fixator applied, if fracture is not displaced severely. Mobilization should be delayed if there is skin necrosis.
 
OSTEONECROSIS
Talus has a precarious blood supply. The overall osteonecrosis rate ranges from 20 to 55%. The chance of getting avascular necrosis is dependent on the severity of injury and displacement. Type 3 and Type 4 talus neck fracture have very high incidence of osteonecrosis approaching nearly 100%. Osteonecrosis can be predicted when there is a subchondral sclerosis of talar dome (Fig. 39.28). When osteonecrosis is diagnosed, weight-bearing should be delayed. If patient becomes symptomatic, ankle arthrodesis, tibiocalcaneal fusion or Blair's fusion can be done according to the involvement.
 
SECONDARY OSTEOARTHRITIS
Secondary osteoarthritis can develop due to primary chondral injury, nonanatomical reduction or osteonecrosis. If patient is symptomatic, arthrodesis of involved joint can alleviate the pain.
 
OUTCOME
Fractures of the talar neck are associated with high rates of morbidity and complications. Outcome depends upon multiple factors including the severity of injury, amount of soft tissue damage, type and direction of dislocation, anatomical reduction and fixation of the fracture. There are no well randomized studies evaluating the functional outcome of talus fractures.497
Figure 39.28: Lateral radiograph showing avascular necrosis of the body of talus occurring four months after surgery for fracture of neck talus
Canale and Kelly7 showed that good functional results were achieved in 59% of talar neck fractures. Though the incidence of avascular necrosis in their study was 51%, many patients with avascular necrosis showed good functional outcome. They also found that talectomy gave worst outcome when compared to other salvage procedures. Sanders et al8 also have showed in their study that the need for secondary procedures increases as the duration goes on.
Long-term complications of the displaced talar neck fractures are high. In a study by Ohl et al9 with 20 patients followed up for 7.5 years, 35% of the patients had undergone secondary surgery. Osteoarthritic changes were seen in 94% with a malunion rate of 59%. However, the surgeons had used only a single approach for all their cases. The mean AOFAS was 66.9/100. Another study by Lindvall et al10 also had similar findings in their study comprising of 26 displaced talar neck patients followed up for an average of 74 months. Post-traumatic arthritis of the subtalar joint was the most common finding present in all cases, while osteonecrosis was seen in 50% of cases in this study.
A retrospective series of 100 patients with 102 fractures of talar neck by Valliers et al11 found radiographic evidence of osteonecrosis to be in 49% cases having full radiographic data. However, 37% of these patients demonstrated revascularization of the dome without collapse. Overall, 31% of patient showed osteonecrosis with collapse of dome. The timing of surgery had no correlation with the development of osteonecrosis. It also showed that patients with comminuted fractures and open fractures had poor outcome when compared to less comminuted fractures.
Similarly, a study by Pajenda et al12 of 50 patients showed better outcome of 95% with Hawkins Type 1 and Type 2 fractures while Hawkins Type 3 had 70% good results with Hawkins Type 4 having only 10% good results as per the Weber score.
In a study involving 20 patients, Bastos et al,13 showed poor functional outcome in patients undergoing surgical treatment for dislocated talar neck fractures. Eighty one percent of patients had symptoms in the operated foot. Fifty percent of patients needed to change their occupation.
 
Illustrative Case
A 25-year-old man had a fall from height of 15 feet. He suffered an injury to his right ankle and had severe pain, tenderness and swelling of the right ankle.498
Figures 39.29A and B: Preoperative radiographs showing the fracture of the talus neck (Hawkins Type 2) in anteroposterior and lateral views
Figures 39.30A to C: Intraoperative images of reduction and stabilization of fracture with K-wire (A) Anteroposterior; (B) lateral; (C) Images after screw insertion
Figures 39.31A and B: Three year postoperative follow-up radiographs showing union of the fracture
499
Figures 39.32A and B: Clinical picture of the patient showing the ROM and operative scars
He had inability to bear weight on his right ankle. A fracture of right talus was revealed in the radiographs (Figs 39.29A and B). He was operated upon by a dual incision technique and two partially threaded screws were put after accurate reduction of the fracture fragments (Figs 39.30A to C). A follow-up radiograph (Figs 39.31A and B) revealed union of the fracture fragments and also no signs of avascularity of the body of the talus. The patient had good ROM (Figs 39.32A and B).
 
Conclusion
Talar neck fractures are serious though rare injuries which usually require surgical management. The functional outcome may differ as per the displacement or dislocation of the fragments and also the development of complications. Patient should be counseled regarding the post-traumatic arthritis and chronic pain even after anatomical reduction and stable fixation.
References
  1. FortinPT, BalazsyJE. Talus fractures: evaluation and treatment. J Am Acad Orthop Surg. 2001;9:14–27.
  1. EbraheimNA, SkieMC, PodeszwaDA, JacksonWT. Evaluation of process fractures of the talus using computed tomography. J Orthop Trauma. 1994;8(4):332–7.
  1. HawkinsLG. Fractures of the neck of the talus. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1970;52(5):991–1002.
  1. LorentzenJE, ChristensenSB, KrogsoeO, SneppenO. Fractures of the neck of the talus. Acta Orthop Scand. 1977;48(1):115–20.
  1. Fleuriau ChateauPB, BrokawDS, JelenBA, ScheidDK, WeberTG. Plate fixation of talar neck fractures: preliminary review of a new technique in twenty-three patients. J Orthop Trauma. 2002;16(4):213–9.
  1. TezvalM, DumontC, StürmerKM. Prognostic reliability of the Hawkins sign in fractures of the talus. J Orthop Trauma. 2007;21(8):538–43.
  1. CanaleST, KellyFB Jr. Fractures of the neck of the talus. Long-term evaluation of seventy-one cases. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1978;60(2):143–56.
  1. SandersDW, BusamM, HattwickE, EdwardsJR, McAndrewMP, JohnsonKD. Functional outcomes following displaced talar neck fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 2004;18(5):265–70.
  1. OhlX, HarisboureA, HemeryX, DehouxE. Long-term follow-up after surgical treatment of talar fractures: Twenty cases with an average follow-up of 7.5 years. Int Orthop. 2011;35(1):93-9. Epub 2009 Dec 22.
  1. LindvallE, HaidukewychG, DiPasqualeT, HerscoviciD Jr, SandersR. Open reduction and stable fixation of isolated, displaced talar neck and bodyfractures. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2004;86-A(10):2229-34.
  1. VallierHA, NorkSE, BareiDP, BenirschkeSK, SangeorzanBJ. Talar neck fractures: results and outcomes. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2004;86-A(8):1616-24.
  1. PajendaG, VécseiV, ReddyB, HeinzT. Treatment of talar neck fractures: clinical results of 50 patients. J Foot Ankle Surg. 2000;39(6):365–75.
  1. BastosR, FerreiraRC, MercadanteMT. Analysis of clinical and functional outcome and complications of talar neck fractures. Rev Bras Ortop. 2010;45(4):362–74.

Calcaneus Fractures: Open Reduction and Plate Fixation40

Frankie Leung, Lau Tak-Wing
 
Introduction
Fracture of the calcaneus was first described in 1856 by Malgaigne. It is the commonest fracture of the tarsal bone accounting for 60% of tarsal fractures. The fracture line very often extends to the subtalar joint which is a highly loaded joint. If the subtalar joint is affected, the patient may have significant morbidity as a result of the pain and stiffness. Essex-Lopresti classified calcaneus fractures into tongue type and joint depression type. Recently Sanders proposed a CT- based classification. While these two classification methods can accurately describe the fracture pattern, they cannot be used to guide treatment and accurately predict patients’ outcome.
The management of these fractures progressed from simple non-operative to operative treatment in the past few decades. Various treatment methods including functional treatment, open reduction and plate fixation and minimally invasive percutaneous fixation have been used. In considering the treatment plan, one must consider that calcaneus fractures are often caused by fall from height and the patient could be multiply injured. Associated injuries include pelvic and spinal fractures as well as femoral or tibial fractures.
The difficulty of achieving a successful treatment is also attributed to the fact that most of these patients are manual workers whose job nature demands great physical fitness. Workmen compensation is often involved and that was shown to be associated with worse prognosis. Smoking may also cause a worse outcome.
 
Indications/Contraindications
Calcaneus fracture is an intra-articular fracture and by general principles, an accurate reconstruction of the articular surface would give the patient the best chance to recover from the injury. Hence at the operation, the subtalar joint surface should be reconstructed. This often means that the Bohler's angle should be restored and the collapse and widening of the calcaneus be corrected. Currently the most effective mthod to achieve these goals is open reduction and plate fixation. Goals of the operative treatment include restoration of heel height and length, realignment of the posterior facet of the subtalar joint and, restoration of the mechanical axis of the hindfoot. Extra-articular fractures can be treated nonoperatively in most cases except fracture of sustentaculum tali with displacement more than 2 mm avulsion fractures of the calcaneal tuberosity. Undisplaced and intra-articular fractures are also generally treated nonoperatively.502
Figure 40.1: Lateral view radiograph showed a tongue type fracture with a flattened Bohler's angle
Figure 40.2: Coronal cuts of CT showing two vertical fracture lines which make this a Sanders II fracture
 
TIMING OF SURGERY
Surgery for calcaneus fractures should be delayed in the presence of significant edema or fracture blisters. However, open fractures and the presence of compartment syndrome in the foot should prompt early surgery regardless of the skin condition.
 
Operative Technique and Case Illustration
The patient was a 47-year-old manual labourer falling off from 10 feet and suffered a unilateral calcaneus fracture (Figs 40.1 and 40.2). The soft tissue condition of the ankle improved after elevation and resting in bed for one week.
 
Surgery
 
SURGICAL APPROACH
The patient is put in a lateral position with the affected side up. An extended lateral approach (Fig. 40.3) is used to give a good exposure of the whole lateral surface of the calcaneus and it also allows reconstruction of the articular surface.
An L-shape incision should be made.
  • The vertical limb of the incision should be between posterior edge of fibula and anterior margin of Achilles tendon. It should be closer to Achilles tendon to avoid damage to the sural nerve.
    Figure 40.3: Incision for the extended lateral approach
    503
    Figure 40.4: Proximal flap should be raised as a whole layer
    Figure 40.5: Sinus tarsi is cleared of fat to expose articular facet of the talus
  • The horizontal limb is from a point distal to the calcaneal tubercle extended linearly towards the calcaneal cuboid joint. The junction between the bruises and the thick heel skin should mark the level of this incision.
  • After making the skin incision, the dissection should start at the intersection of the two limbs. The horizontal limb of the incision should be made down to bone and the proximal flap should be raised as a whole layer including skin and subcutaneous tissues (Fig. 40.4). Caution must be exercised at the anterior part of this incision when the peroneus longus tendon is encountered. A few subcutaneous sutures can be placed around the corner of this flap for further manipulation and retraction.
  • The dissection is carried on until the subtalar joint is reached. The fat tissues at the sinus tarsi can be removed to expose the articular facet of the talus (Fig. 40.5).
  • Two or three 1.8 mm K-wires are placed into the body and the neck of the talus. They are then bent and kept in place to help retracting the skin flap.
 
REDUCTION TECHNIQUES
A 5 mm Schanz screw is placed at posterior heel into calcaneus body to act as joystick for reduction. Any hindfoot varus deformity should be corrected.
The lateral wall fragment is then retracted and the fracture is further exposed, including the primary fracture line, anterior process fracture and the displaced articular fragments (Fig. 40.6).
The collapsed articular fragments are reduced.
The crucial angle of Gissane angle is reconstructed to restore the normal relationship of posterior facet and anterior process of calcaneus (Fig. 40.7).
 
PLATE APPLICATION
  • One or two 3.5 mm cancellous lag screws should be placed in the mid-portion of posterior facet, pointing 10 degree upwards. The articular surface should be checked for any gaps or steps. The lateral wall fragment is reduced to maintain a flat lateral surface.
  • A calcaneal plate should be contoured slightly and inserted (Fig. 40.8). Cortical 3.5 mm screws can then be inserted as remaining “frame screws”.
  • Postoperative radiograph confirms the restoration of calcaneal height and articular congruity (Fig. 40.9).504
Figure 40.6: Lateral wall fragment is retracted to expose the fracture further
Figure 40.7: Anatomy restored and fracture fragments fixed provisionally with K-wires
Figure 40.8: Calcaneal plate is contoured slightly and inserted
505
Figure 40.9: Postoperative radiograph showing reconstruction of the calcaneus
A meticulaous layered closure of the surgical wound should be done afterwards. A posterior plaster slab can be placed for comfort for 1-2 days. Free ankle and subtalar joint motion should be started afterwards. Toe touch down walking can be started at one week, progressing to full weight bearing at 6-8 weeks.
 
Complications
At present, open reduction and plate fixation is a popular method of treating displaced calcaneal fractures. Nevertheless, soft tissue complications such as wound dehiscence and infection are still common. Malunion leading to hindfoot varus deformity can also occur if such deformity is not noticed during the surgery.
 
Results
The controversy about the method of treatment can be largely explained by the lack of an optimal classification system. The functional outcome is difficult to be measured in view of the complex function of the calcaneum with the subtalar joint motion. Thermann et al showed that 73% of the patients can go back to their pre-injury occupational standard after operations while only 45% of the patients had good to excellent subjective outcome. There are a few prognostic indicators that correlate with poor functional outcome. Buckley had shown that the worker’ compensation issue, younger patients, female patients and fracture step-off less than 2 mm would all affect the surgical functional outcome in open operated patients.
Recently there have been some successes with the use of percutaneous reduction and screw fixation techniques in treating these fractures. Schuberth et al reported the results of minimally invasive open reduction and internal fixation of intra-articular calcaneal fractures in 24 patients. Improved radiographic parameters consistent with goals of articular congruity and calcaneal height could be achieved in all cases with minimal risk of wound complication.
 
Illustrative Case
A 37-year-old male sustained a joint depression type of fracture following a fall from roof. Fracture pattern was confirmed on X-ray and 3D-reconstruction (Figs 40.10A and B). Percutaneous reduction and fixation with 2 screws could successfully restore the anatomy and articular congruence (Fig. 40.10C). 506
Figures 40.10A to C: (A) A worker sustained a joint depression type of fracture; (B) 3D-reconstruction showing the fracture pattern; (C) Postoperative radiograph showing restoration of Bohler's angle and the subtalar joint
Bibliography
  1. BuckleyR, ToughS, Mc CormackR. Operative compared with nonoperative treatment of displaced intra-articular calcaneal fractures: a prospective, randomized, controlled multicenter trial. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2002;84:1733–44.
  1. Essex-LoprestiP. The mechanism, reduction technique, and results in fractures of the os calcis. Br J Surg. 1952;39:395–419.
  1. FolkJW, StarrAJ, EarlyJS. Early wound complications of operative treatment of calcaneus fractures: analysis of 190 fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1999;13:369–72.
  1. LetournelE. Open reduction and internal fixation of calcaneal fractures. Clin Orthop. 1993;75: 342–54.
  1. RammeltS, AmlangM, BarthelS, ZwippH. Minimally-invasive treatment of calcaneal fractures. Injury. 2004;35(Suppl 2):SB55–63.
  1. RandleJA, KrederHJ, StephenD, et al. Should calcaneal fractures be treated surgically? Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2000;377:217–27.
  1. SandersR. Displaced intra-articular fractures of the calcaneus. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2000;82:225–50.
  1. SandersR, FortinP, DiPasqualeA, et al. Operative treatment in 120 displaced intra-articular calcaneal fractures. Results using a prognostic computed tomographic scan classification. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1993;290:87–95.
  1. SandersR. Displaced intra-articular fractures of the calcaneus. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2000;82: 225–50.
  1. SandersR. Intra-articular fractures of the calcaneus: present state of the art. J Orthop Trauma. 1992;6:252–65.
  1. SangeorzanBJ, AnanthakrishnanD, TencerAF. Contact characteristics of the subtalar joint after a simulated calcaneus fracture. J Orthop Trauma. 1995;9:251–8.
  1. SchuberthJM, CobbMD, TalaricoRH. Minimally invasive arthroscopic-assisted reduction with percutaneous fixation in the management of intra-articular calcaneal fractures: A review of 24 cases. J Foot Ankle Surg. 2009;48(3):315–22.
  1. StulikJ, StehlikJ, RysavyM, WozniakA. Minimally-invasive treatment of intra-articular fractures of the calcaneum. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2006;88(12):1634–41.
  1. ThermannH, KrettekC, HüfnerT, SchrattHE, AlbrechtK, TscherneH. Management of calcaneal fractures in adults. Conservative versus operative treatment. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1998;353:107–24.
  1. ThordarsonDB, KrieerLE. Operative vs. nonoperative treatment of intra-articular fractures of the calcaneus: a prospective randomized trial. Foot Ankle Int. 1996;17:2–9.
  1. TornettaP. Percutaneous treatment of calcaneal fractures. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2000;375: 91–6.
  1. ZwippH, TscherneH, ThermannH, et al. Osteosynthesis of displaced intra-articular fractures of the calcaneus. Result in 123 cases. Clin Orthop. 1993;290:76–86.

Intraoperative 3D Imaging and Navigation for Intra-articular Fractures41

Daniel Kendoff, Carl Haasper
 
Introduction
Intraoperative fluoroscopic imaging has widely been accepted as the standard modality for assessing intraoperative articular fracture reconstruction. Although larger incongruities and gaps are relatively easy to assess visually and with conventional intraoperative two-dimensional imaging, most articular surfaces are not planar and consequently any intra-articular hardware placement or penetration can be difficult to detect.3,4 This also takes account for the exact detection of remaining intra-articular step after an adequate reduction has been done. In cases where the surgeon is unable to completely visualize the fracture surface intraoperatively, often a postoperative computer tomography (CT) scan might become necessary.
Evaluating the actual needs an orthopedic trauma surgeon expects from an imaging device are in most of the cases the following:
  • How is the quality of reduction? Are there any residual steps or gaps?
  • Are the implants adequately placed? Could any intra-articular implant lead to a progressive/rapid joint destruction?
The accuracy of reduction correlates with the clinical results of an operative fracture treatment. Furthermore it has been shown, that incomplete information about the joint surface, due to the limited two-dimensional view, may occur in up to 40% of cases, when using a standardized two-dimensional fluoroscopy.17 Computed tomography (CT) has been established already as a standard imaging modality for fracture analysis, fracture classification and for a dedicated treatment planning.4,12,24,35 Computed tomography has been proven to provide the surgeon with better, i.e. more valuable information regarding the three-dimensional information of fractures.4,8,9,29
Since the early 2000s the introduction of mobile 3D fluoroscopy enables the direct operative result evaluation in multiplanar planes and reconstructions intraoperatively. The substantial benefit arises from the possible immediate detection and correction of inadequate reductions or articular hardware misplacements. Correlating direct consequences by intraoperative revisions, which have been evaluated by various studies, have shown technical necessity in between 10 and 30%, depending on the anatomical sites.26,28 The clinical use of such 3D imaging modalities intraoperatively has gained much more popularity. This becomes especially distinguished by the increasing numbers of companies now offering this intraoperative 3D technology. The following chapter gives an overview of the actual specific usefulness of intraoperative 3D imaging with and without the additional use of navigation. 510
Figures 41.1A and B: (A) Two variations of currently available 3D fluoroscopy systems (Fa. Siemens and Fa. Ziehm); (B) Intraoperative screenshot of multiplanar reconstructions
 
Technical Description
 
INTRAOPERATIVE 3D IMAGING
Intraoperative 3D C-arms have been introduced to clinical use in 2002.11 These 3D C-arms usually consist of a standard mobile C-arm systems, coupled with a motor, hardware, and software components for 3D imaging (Figs 41.1A and B). The technique for 3D scanning should begin with a secondary sterile draping of the entire region of interest. Because most 3D systems rotate between 100 and 190 degrees around the operative field, it is difficult to ensure that nonsterile components of the initial surgical drapes are not captured by the 3D C-arm and brought into the sterile field. As such, a second sterile drape might be used to cover the field; this drape is then discarded after the imaging acquisition.
The 3D imaging is then performed by calculating multiplanar reconstructions out of 50 to 100 C-arm images that are registered during one automated or semiautomated rotating scanning procedure and calculates high resolution data. From this data set axial scans are first generated; following reconstructed into coronal and sagittal slice orientations.511
Figures 41.2A and B: Example of incomplete reduction of a triplane fracture
Based on the possible dynamic visualization and active scrolling of the images, the surgeon can perform through all generated multiplanar reconstructions, and adequate decision of fracture reductions and residual fracture gaps as well as proper implant placement becomes possible (Figs 41.2A and B).
During the scanning procedure, the automated scan should not be disturbed by any collision of the rotating C-arm, as this will cause an immediate scan stop and failure. Therefore, before the scan itself, a collision check of the complete rotation should be done. After scanning, the data set could also be transferred to any navigation system. The navigation system allows for a visualization of specific navigated surgical tools in all three multiplanar planes (Fig. 41.3).
Figure 41.3: Intraoperative combination of 3D fluoroscopy and navigation at a navigated drilling procedure of the knee joint
512General considerations in order to ensure a proper and reliable intraoperative imaging and even navigation technique: Some distinct positioning and draping techniques must be followed. This includes the possible use of a solid carbon table if available. The region that is being scanned should be positioned centrally in the middle of the table if possible. If not, the region being scanned must be ranged in the middle of the table away from all metal braces and brackets. This is especially the case for acetabular fractures or fractures close to the hip. In the case of peripheral extremities such as the hand or foot, the distinct extremity can be positioned over the end of the table if no carbon table part is available. During positioning it is extremely important to ensure that any metal-based side supports, leg-holders and other possible sources of interference are not in the direct way of the X-ray path. If the patient is positioned laterally, the side supports should be moved towards the thorax as far as possible. One should realize that for most intraoperative 3D intensifiers almost complete orbital movement is necessary, although newer imaging devices also allow partial movement which generally simplifies the complete imaging procedure.
 
Clinical Applications
The benefits regarding the criteria reduction quality and implant positioning have been proven by several actual studies for various indications.1,18,19,21,25,33 Larger retrospective clinical studies found the intraoperative revision rate based on 3D information in ranges from 734 to 19%.16 In foot and ankle applications a revision rate of even above 30% has been described.26 While several studies have reported successful clinical applications of intraoperative 3D imaging with and without navigation, most of them were reported in orthopedic trauma applications of the lower limb/foot as well as spinal care applications.1,10,14,17-20,22,27,33,34 In summary costs and potentially rates of revision surgeries could be reduced as implant position correction could be performed within the same theater session.
 
Intraoperative Imaging and Combined Navigation
The combination of intraoperative 2D and 3D imaging at general fracture treatment has mainly been established within the field of screw positioning in sacroiliac (SI) screw fixation techniques and spinal applications (Figs 41.4 and 41.5).
Figure 41.4: Intraoperative set-up for a 3D navigated spine case
513
Figures 41.5A and B: Multiplanar reconstruction after a spinal fusion
There have been different studies able to show that under a two-dimensional fluoroscopic imaging guided navigation technique the overall accuracy of the screw placement can be increased compared to the conventional technique without navigation. However, the 3D navigation for SI screw placement has been proven to be even more accurate. It has been shown that malpositioning of SI screws can significantly be reduced under 3D imaging navigation techniques. Although the overall set-up and technical considerations are undoubtful in an overall higher effort than in the conventional cases, the overall information and possible additional direct placement control of SI screws intraoperatively allows for an increased accuracy including a lower complication rate.
A much less established clinical application of 3D navigated screw placements has been shown in some percutaneous screw fixation techniques of acetabular fractures. However, this has a clinical relevance only in less displaced acetabular-type fractures where primarily a percutaneous technique is preferably used.
 
HIP JOINT
Clinical applications of intraoperative 3D imaging in the hip joint are limited; however, these include the useful intraoperative control after osteosynthesis of acetabular or femoral head fractures (Figs 41.6A to F). Although intraoperative 3D imaging at the hip joint necessitates extensive and complex patient positioning and draping, the visualization of unintended intra-articular screw placements or reduction failures might avoid any further postoperative CT control and even more relevantly, further possible revision surgery.
While more or less successful 2D navigation at the hip joint has been described for the placement of osteosynthetic screws at femoral neck or subtrochanteric fractures, combined use of 3D imaging and navigation has very limited indications at the hip joint. Related SI screw 3D C-arm navigation has been in successful clinical use since 2003.31,32 Acetabular column screw placement under 3D navigated control and secondary intraoperative control with another 3D scan has also been described. However, due to the overall limited numbers of this specific injury and indication, only very few hospital centers are able to accomplish this technique currently.514
Figures 41.6A to F: Multiplanar reconstruction after an ORIF of an acetabular fracture
Retrograde drilling applications of osteochondral or tumorous lesions in minimal invasive 3D navigated technique have also become possible with a high accuracy rate under permanent visualization of the drill in all three planes.15
 
KNEE JOINT
One of the most promising perspectives of intraoperative 3D imaging at the knee joint is the enhancement of minimal invasive procedures. In arthroscopic reduction and fixation of tibia plateau fractures intraoperative 3D imaging provides precise information about the result and avoids standard approaches and has been described in successful clinical use.19 As wound complications and nerve injuries have been described in association with open reduction and internal fixation techniques of tibia plateau fractures, sufficient minimal approaches have a high clinical potential.23 Especially the complex 515three dimensional anatomy of the articulating distal femur as well as the tibial plateau often necessitates any kind of multiplanar imaging in order to rule out intra-articular hardware placement. However, prospective studies dealing with this procedure are still missing.
In combination with navigation it has now became possible to match preoperative MRI and intraoperative 3D scans for precise targeting as in drilling of osteochondral lesions around the knee joint in minimal invasive technique.7 A more recent described application is the navigated control of the actual procedure reducing and fixing tibia plateau fractures. With the help of a navigated pointer the surgeon is able to control the reduction in comparison to a 3D preoperative dataset of the contralateral healthy side. This technique is applied successful already in various craniomaxillary indications.13,30
 
FOOT AND ANKLE
Clinical applications of intraoperative 3D imaging in foot and ankle surgery is feasible in this relatively easily accessible anatomic region. Consequently most existing studies demonstrate the direct intraoperative relevance in the hindfoot and midfoot. Studies have shown that up to 39% direct intraoperative consequences are based on the 3D image information.26 For calcaneus fractures implant correction or revision of the already achieved reduction was shown in 19.5% of cases, in one study28 (Figs 41.2A and B). Both studies outlined the benefits regarding the criteria reduction quality and implant positioning (Figs 41.7A and 41.8).
Again a limited numbers of these specific injuries and indications need to be discussed. However, besides the fracture treatment, retrograde drilling applications of osteochondral or tumorous lesions using a 3D navigated technique were described around the foot. A general high accuracy rate under permanent visualization of the drilling device in all three planes could be achieved.
 
Limitations
Major argument questioning the use of new techniques is the additional intraoperative time required. At present intraoperative 3D imaging is mostly done with 3D C-arms. Certainly the image quality is limited compared to regular CT scanners.
Figures 41.7A and B: Comparison of intraoperative 2D fluoroscopy image vs multiplanar image in the sagittal view in a calcaneal fracture
516
Figure 41.8: Identification of an intra-articular screw placement during ORIF of a calcaneal fracture
Figures 41.9A and B: Control of a closed reduction and internal fixation of a distal radius fracture visualizes the remaining intra-articular step off
However, the surgeon is able to judge his operative result during the operation and further revision surgery could be avoided (Figs 41.9A and B). This has also the potential to save money in spite of the costs associated with a 3D C-arm.2,16
Another limitation is the specific positioning techniques and equipment needed, especially at the hip joint. Metals containing edges, clamps or positioning arms can cause artifact formation while using the 3D intraoperative scan. Therefore, radiolucent tables or extremity attachments are recommended. In regard to tables with a large diameter and/or while imaging obese patients, the 3D imaging may not be able to fully scan with an intact rotation arc.
Navigation has been the logical next step forward using intraoperative 3D imaging technology. However, prospective clinical studies are lacking proving a real benefit from this technology. It is clear yet that these navigated procedures are at present time 517taking and cost intensive.
Figure 41.10: An immobilization splint allows for 3D navigation of the scaphoid
Figure 41.11: 3D control of a scaphoid screw placement under navigation
Potentially revision surgeries could be reduced as corrective measurements could be performed within a one step procedure in the same session.
Major limitation of navigated applications is based on the use of invasive reference markers for registration. The reference marker has to be rigidly fixed to the region of interest. This is usually done with single or double Schanz screw like fixation systems. Especially this takes account at any smaller anatomical regions, as for instance the scaphoid, where custom made immobilization devices with an indirect fixation of the reference marker have been implemented to avoid this technical limitation (Figs 41.10 and 41.11). Any loosening of the reference marker, however, can cause relevant inaccuracies.5,6 Noninvasively fixed reference marker can only be used in case any 518further movement of the region of interest is avoided, which is unlikely for most interventional applications.
Radiation needs to be discussed. However, time of exposure is not significantly enhanced compared to 2D C-arms and is inferior compared to conventional CT scans.
Thus different reasons for intraoperative failures due to technical errors could be discussed, while poor image resolution can result from implant artifacts, noncarbon tables, patient obesity, or patient's self-motion artifacts.
 
Conclusion
Intraoperative 3D imaging has been introduced in the early 2000s; consequently applications and indications increased in orthopedic trauma surgery worldwide. The benefit for the surgeon seems to be evident, based on the available CT like images, which can provide secure information on the operation result intraoperatively (Figs 41.12A and B). While surgical results can be improved, malreduction and malpositioning can be detected and fixed immediately, it might be even possible to save costs, which becomes a more and more relevant argument in any health care system.
3D navigation in orthopedic trauma applications is mainly limited to spinal indications; however, 3D SI screw placements, general drilling applications as osteochondral lesions, tumor biopsies and certain screws as anterior/posterior column screws in acetabular osteosynthesis, have also shown the relevance and accuracy of such systems.
Recent technical improvements as for instance the use of flat panel detectors or combined standalone navigation system within the 3D imaging module, will constantly increase the use of these technologies in modern orthopedic trauma care.
Figures 41.12A and B: The direct intraoperative control of achieved reduction and implant placements offers valuable information to the operating surgeon
References
  1. Acosta FLJr, ThompsonTL, CampbellS, WeinsteinPR, AmesCP. Use of intraoperative isocentric C-arm 3D fluoroscopy for sextant percutaneous pedicle screw placement: case report and review of the literature. Spine J. 2005;5(3):339–43.
  1. BischoffM, HebeckerA, HartwigE, GebhardF. Cost effectiveness of intraoperative three-dimensional imaging with a mobile surgical C-arm. Unfallchirurg. 2004;107(8):712–5.
  1. BlaserPF, WickyS, HusmannO, MeuliRA, LeyvrazPF. Value of 3D CT in diagnosis and treatment of fractures of the tibial plateau. Swiss Surg. 1998;4:180–6.
  1. ChanPS, KlimkiewiczJJ, LuchettiWT, EsterhaiJL, KneelandJB, DalinkaMK, HeppenstallRB. Impact of CT scan on treatment plan and fracture classification of tibial plateau fractures. J Orthop Trauma. 1997;11(7):484–9.
  1. CitakM, BoardTN, SunY, LookV, KrettekC, HufnerT, KendoffD. Reference marker stability in computer aided orthopedic surgery: a biomechanical study in artificial bone and cadavers. Technol Health Care. 2007;15(6):407–14.
  1. CitakM, KendoffD, KfuriM Jr, PearleA, KrettekC, HufnerT. Accuracy analysis of Iso-C3D versus fluoroscopy-based navigated retrograde drilling of osteochondral lesions: a pilot study. J Bone Joint Surg Br. 2007;89(3):323–6.
  1. CitakM, KendoffD, StubigT, KrettekC, HufnerT. Drilling with 3D Fluoroscopic Navigation in osteonecrosis of the femoral condyle. Unfallchirurg. 2008;111(5):344–9.
  1. ColeRJ, BindraRR, EvanoffBA, GilulaLA, YamaguchiK, GelbermanRH. Radiographic evaluation of osseous displacement following intra-articular fractures of the distal radius: reliability of plain radiography versus computed tomography. J Hand Surg [Am]. 1997;22(5): 792–800.
  1. EbraheimNA, SkieMC, PodeszwaDA, JacksonWT. Evaluation of process fractures of the talus using computed tomography. J Orthop Trauma. 1994;8(4):332–7.
  1. EulerE, et al. 3D C-Arm Imaging. Aktuelle Traumatologie. 2003;33:183–90.
  1. EulerE, WirthS, LinsenmaierU, MutschlerW, PfeiferKJ, HebeckerA. Comparative study of the quality of C-arm based 3D imaging of the talus. Unfallchirurg. 2001;104(9):839–46.
  1. FreundM, ThomsenM, HohendorfB, ZenkerW, HellerM. Optimized preoperative planning of calcaneal fractures using spiral computed tomography. Eur Radiol. 1999;9(5):901–6.
  1. GellrichNC, SchrammA, HammerB, RojasS, CufiD, Lagreze,W, et al. Computer-assisted secondary reconstruction of unilateral post-traumatic orbital deformity. Plast Reconstr Surg. 2002;110(6):1417–29.
  1. HottJS, PapadopoulosSM, TheodoreN, DickmanCA, SonntagVK. Intraoperative Iso-C C-arm navigation in cervical spinal surgery: review of the first 52 cases. Spine. 2004;29(24): 2856–60.
  1. HufnerT, StubigT, CitakM, GoslingT, KrettekC, KendoffD. Utility of intraoperative three dimensional imaging at the hip and knee joints with and without navigation. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 2009;91(Suppl 1):33–42.
  1. HufnerT, StubigT, GoslingT, KendoffD, GeerlingJ, KrettekC. Cost-benefit analysis of intraoperative 3D imaging. Unfallchirurg. 2007;110(1):14–21.
  1. KendoffD, CitakM, GardnerM, StuebigT, KrettekC, HufnerT. Intraoperative 3D Imaging: Value and Consequences in 248 cases. J Trauma. 2008;66:232–8.
  1. KendoffD, GardnerMJ, CitakM, KfuriM Jr, ThumesB, KrettekC, et al. Value of 3D fluoroscopic imaging of acetabular fractures comparison to 2D fluoroscopy and CT imaging. Arch Orthop Trauma Surg, 2007.
  1. KendoffD, PearleA, HufnerT, CitakM, GoslingT, KrettekC. First clinical results and consequences of intraoperative three-dimensional imaging at tibial plateau fractures. J Trauma. 2007;63(1):239–44.
  1. KönigB, ErdmengerU, SchroderRJ, WienasG, SchaeferJ, PechM, et al. Evaluation der Bildqualitat des Iso C 3D-Bildwandlers in Vergleich mit dem CT Diagnostik und Therapie in Beckenbereich. Unfallchirurg. 2005;108(5):378–86.
  1. KönigB, ErdmengerU, SchroderRJ, WienasG, SchaeferJ, PechM, et al. Evaluation of image quality of the Iso C 3D image processor in comparison to computer tomography. Use in the pelvic area. Unfallchirurg. 2005;108(5):378–85.
  1. KotsianosD, RockC, EulerE, WirthS, LinsenmaierU, BrandlR, et al. 3D-Bildgebung an einem mobilen chirurgischen Bildverstarker (ISO-C-3D). Erste Bildbeispiele zur Frakturdiagnostik an peripheren Gelenken im Vergleich mit Spiral-CT und konventioneller Radiographie. Unfallchirurg. 2001;104(9):834–8.
  1. KrettekC, GerichT, MiclauT. A minimally invasive medial approach for proximal tibial fractures. Injury. 2001;32(Suppl 1):SA4–13.
  1. LiowRY, BirdsallPD, MucciB, GreissME. Spiral computed tomography with two-and three-dimensional reconstruction in the management of tibial plateau fractures. Orthopedics. 1999;22(10):929–32.
  1. MeierR, KfuriM Jr, GeerlingJ, HufnerT, KrimmerH, KrettekC. Intraoperative three-dimensional imaging with an isocentric mobile C-arm at the wrist. Handchir Mikrochir Plast Chir. 2005;37(4):256–9.
  1. RichterM, GeerlingJ, ZechS, GoeslingT, KrettekC. Intraoperative three-dimensional imaging with a motorized mobile C-arm (SIREMOBIL ISO-C-3D) in foot and ankle trauma care: a preliminary report. J Orthop Trauma. 2005;19(4):259–66.
  1. RockC, LinsenmaierU, BrandlR, KotsianosD, WirthS, KaltschmidtR, et al. Introduction of a new mobile C-arm/CT combination equipment (ISO-C-3D). Initial results of 3D sectional imaging. Unfallchirurg. 2001;104(9):827–33.
  1. RubberdtA, FeilR, StengelD, SprangerN, MutzeS, WichM, et al. The clinical use of the ISO-C(3D) imaging system in calcaneus fracture surgery. Unfallchirurg. 2006;109(2):112–8.
  1. SandersR, FortinP, DiPasqualeT, WallingA. Operative treatment in 120 displaced intra-articular calcaneal fractures. Results using a prognostic computed tomography scan classification. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 1993;290:87–95.
  1. SchrammA, GellrichNC, SchimmingR, SchmelzeisenR. Computer-assisted insertion of zygomatic implants (Branemark system) after extensive tumor surgery. Mund Kiefer Gesichtschir. 2000;4(5):292–5.
  1. StockleU, KonigB, SchaserK, MelcherI, HaasNP. CT and fluoroscopy based navigation in pelvic surgery. Unfallchirurg. 2003;106(11):914–20.
  1. StockleU, SchaserK, KonigB. Image guidance in pelvic and acetabular surgery—expectations, success and limitations. Injury. 2007;38(4):450–62.
  1. WendlK, vonRecum J, WentzensenA, GrutznerPA. Iso C(3D0-assisted) navigated implantation of pedicle screws in thoracic lumbar vertebrae. Unfallchirurg. 2003;106(11): 907–13.
  1. WichM, SprangerN, EkkernkampA. Intraoperative imaging with the ISO C(3D). Chirurg. 2004;75(10):982–7.
  1. WickyS, BlaserPF, BlancCH, LeyvrazPF, SchnyderP, MeuliRA. Comparison between standard radiography and spiral CT with 3D reconstruction in the evaluation, classification and management of tibial plateau fractures. Eur Radiol. 2000;10(8):1227–32.